en 
νο ο ων 


9 
Wh ete ’ Oe ie ee ee 
“; - 2 “95 γρ dismnsdmmiuhe dan ain ane πῶ ἔα πο 
τὸ ψν. 4 a - ov rin δν ο ae ae ee «λαο. ον 
τν” Ἴνε-- νήφθν νά Se i On ‘ νι οπών ο σών i 
Mee Greet γὰρ, στο nee Αν Satara 


panda eee Orne ae ae 
νο” er APOE στὰ RR LONE “.. “σφῶν οἱ 
“447 σγγεν ey > © --- 


ης 
Dit Anke "Ἤν tae os en ας 
he ιδ Da ον ar ate gen pie 
νο eee νος, δ yA sly αλα Sik anes ton νυν ας μὲ ῳνα ον 
᾿ νο κα ΕΝ 4 


3 
ν - 
5, μὲν δον ον ΣΝ 
ete ν τον aaa ie atta ὃν PPP yee - κυνῶν νεο ιο 
ee te ΝΣ Sere Net heey See διὸ» ο΄ teanatnteten sane Na Rn tren αν νδυν. παρόσον. νο ee ie 
aati te ate ne a ο σι ταν ἃ πὸ να 5 at ο Parte μία, ο μονο σε ϑεηνονόψοτσσν.»α αϑαβνονύν δ 
Pm ἀράν et gine ντο --ωμε. Ὃ πνοή Εστω, κωδ δν έν ος νο φψάμαν. ο κας. ον ἐκάη tee 6, ip far 
wih he tole oe ine wishes pee we ας. πρ τι κου” θέσω, γὼν ὦ. δ. oF ing . ~~ 
ον“ © κ ο... υ Φουα ee ee ον τρ but κ 
κο pate Pong ere νι στη». “ ιν ον μονώμια- 
5 Pat eget ἐφ. γ᾽ ᾿ ” 6 Ν Ρ ον. PD 
be pe “. -κ"» ας, NL aT A Ay Ti a ats, Os a, Sherpas φαμεν pete 
7 - 4 . 7 RL DA Αα ο. ων n°) segs ey 
ν᾿ ην σον (Δρ ἀλ.-- να eatin sae ρον γαμώ φώς ο. ye ντο = - - 
i ρα. i ο νοκ ποπ pe cin Pie Se tein yO αν cit hte A ae eg αν νι πόση πο ON ate te ee gy ete ον 
: δν ΤῈ ντ συννο Μφωα Me ὉὉ a 
ALA AAA DAH Gc deat oe ol tye Pt het 
NO titel AE a A rata ο Φις νῷ νῷ, 
a Pie mating 


nen 
ag ee 


ape Pe 


eed 


lie ὦ ee 


eR hee AN aah ων ο. 


κών ο. ο... 


ο FORT GS 


τ Cee ee 


y 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


A SHORT ROAD TO 


ANCIENT GREEK 


BY 


THOMAS L. STEDMAN, A.M., M.D. εἰ 


ΒΟΒΤΟΝ COLLEGE LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 


NEW YORK 
HARPER & BROTHERS PUBLISHERS 
1896 


ΤΌΤ δ. : 


Copyright, 1896, by THomas L. STEDMAN. 


All rights reserved. 


PREFACE 


Greex is to-day the living speech of many millions 


| dwelling about the eastern shores of the Mediterra- 
nean, in Turkey, Asia Minor, and Egypt, as well as in 
Crete and in Greece proper. <A knowledge of this 
language would therefore simplify the conditions of 
travel throughout a large and important part of the 
old world. It would also open up to the student a 
new literature, much of which is of a high order. 

But New Greek makes other appeals to the consid- 
eration of practical men and of students. In these 
days of international congresses a pressing need is felt 
of some common medium of expression, for few men 
are such masters of the three languages in which dis- 
cussions are usually held at these gatherings as to 
enable them to take an intelligent part in all the de- 
liberations. English, French, and German have each 
in turn been proposed as the international language, 
but national jealousies would appear to offer an in- 
superable obstacle to the adoption of any one of them 
to the exclusion of the other two. The only solution 
of the difficulty seems to lie in the selection of some 

other language which could be universally accepted 
without wound to the national pride of any European 


iv PREFACE 


people. Many men, from Voltaire to Blackie and 
others of the present day, have urged the adoption of 
Greek for this purpose, and of all living tongues none 
has stronger claims in this regard. Its adaptability 
to the needs of international communication is shown 
by the fact that it is now the language of commerce 
throughout the, Levant, as it was, before and at the 
beginning of the Christian era, the common tongue of 
men of letters and of polite society in the civilized 
world. <A large proportion of scientific nomenclature 
is Greek, and most professional men have studied the 
language in their youth, so that they would be spared 
much of the drudgery attendant upon the learning of 
an entirely strange tongue. The chief objections 
urged against Greek are the assumed difficulty of 
acquiring a utilizable knowledge of the language and 
the paucity of text-books. It is hoped that the pres- 
ent work may demonstrate the fallacy of the first of 
these objections and may in a measure remove the 
other for English-speaking students. 

These considerations apart, however, it is perhaps 
chiefly as an introduction to a knowledge of the ancient 
form of the language that this little book will find its 
apology. Any foreigner purposing to study Spenser 
or Chaucer would, as a matter of course, begin by 
learning modern English, and there would seem to be 
no valid argument why the same logical plan should 
not be followed if the aim be Homer, Xenophon, or the 
Greek New Testament. Indeed, it is difficult to un- 
derstand how the latter can be studied with profit by 
any one ignorant of the modern idiom, so replete is it 
with non-classical and even present-day phraseology. 


PREFACE Vv 


But Greek of our time has a closer relation to the lan- 
guage of these works than English and the other ~ 
modern tongues of Europe have to their early classics. 
This fact has been so incontrovertibly established by 
d’Eichthal, Blackie, Gennadius, and many others, that 


| it is needless to go over the ground again. Moreover, 


any unprejudiced student, acquainted with classical 
Greek, needs but to glance through a modern Greek 


| newspaper to become convinced of the practical identi- 
| ty of the two forms of speech. Modern Greelx is, as 
| Geldart has so happily phrased it, simply ancient 
|. Greek made easy. The conjugation of the ancient 


Greek verb is shorn of its terrors to one who is al- 
ready familiar with the simpler forms of the modern 


_verb. And in that, if we except the slightly different 


arrangement of words in the sentence and a vocabu- 
lary modified to meet the necessities of modern 
thought, lies practically the only difference between 


the language of Demosthenes or Herodotus and that 
Οὗ Coraés or Bikelas. 


It is little wonder that men of practical learning 
have protested against the scholastic teaching of Latin 
and Greek as a waste of time and energy and a hinder- 


ance to sound learning. These men are surely right if 


_ the present routine is to hold, for three-quarters of the 
_ time now devoted to these studies might well be given 


to other branches. but it is not necessary to renounce 


them altogether— “the humanities,” as they are 5ο 


fitly called. On the contrary, these languages should 


be taught, but taught in such a way as to make them 


instruments of thought as well as of mental discipline. 
The young men and women in our colleges should 


e 


vi PREFACE 


learn them as living tongues, learn to know them and 
to use them as they do their mother speech. 

This is not so impossible as those who are familiar 
only with old-school routine are wont to imagine. 
Latin is so learned in Catholic seminaries throughout 
the world, and the result is seen in the practical 
knowledge of the language which the clergy of that 
church possess. The study of languages, ancient or 
modern, is still too much a matter of the eye and too 
little one of the ear or tongue. The ability to trans- 
late, or even to appreciate the ideas expressed on the 
printed page without translating, does not constitute 
knowledge of a language, any more than familiarity 
with medical terminology makes a physician. True 
knowledge of a language comes from the mastery of 
the idiom by ear and tongue and eye, and does not 
consist in its cognition by the latter alone. 

No claim is advanced for originality in the method 
developed in this work; an effort has been made to 
combine the best points of many systems, and ac- 
knowledgment is gladly made to the writings of Mar- 
eell, Gouin, Haeusser, Mogyorossy, Kroeh, and others 
for many of the features which it contains. 

The pronunciation here presented is, of course, that 
of the Modern Greeks. That it differs in some respects 
from that of the ancients will hardly be disputed, nor 
can it be contended that the pronunciation of the lan- 
guage at the time when the Epics ascribed to Homer 
were first recited was identical with that in vogue in 
the time of Pericles or with that used by St. Paul 
when preaching to the Athenians. Change is the 
attribute of life, and a language that has lived for 


* 


PREFACE vil 


three thousand years and more must have undergone 
some change in its pronunciation as well as in its 
grammatical forms. But that this pronunciation is 
more nearly that of the ancients than is the artificial 
-and indefensible system taught in our schools to-day— 
the one devised at second hand by Erasmus, who him- 
self used the modern pronunciation—is a proposition 
that would seem to need no demonstration. On the 
score of melodiousness even, the modern pronunciation 
is far superior to the “ Erasmian,”’ as any one may 
ascertain for himself by listening to the speech of an 
educated Greek. 

The figured pronunciation in the First Lesson and in 
the transliteration of the Thought Exercises is intended 
to represent as nearly as may be the sound of the 
Greek words as heard in ordinary conversation. In 
careful reading and speaking the consonantal modifi- 
cations (p to ὦ, s to z, etc.) occur less frequently, and 
even in rapid talking there are some exceptions to the 
rules here given. It is impossible.to represent per- 
fectly the pronunciation of one language in the sym- 
bols of another, but in the absence of a native teacher, 
the speech of one who follows these directions will 
at least be intelligible, even though it betray foreign 
birth. | 

It seems hardly necessary to apologize for the un- 
idiomatic English of the translations. The sole object 
is to convey the meaning of the Greek, and the trans- 
lations are therefore as nearly literal as possible. 

The manner in which this book should be used by 
one who has not the advantage of a native teacher is 
fully explained in the following pages, and this ex- 


viii PREFACE 


planation need not be anticipated here. The intend- 
ing student is simply reminded that a faithful observ- 
ance of all the directions is absolutely essential to 
the mastery of Modern Greek. 

It is the author’s pleasant duty, in closing (it is also 
his guarantee of orthodoxy), to acknowledge his in- 
debtedness to Mr. Anthony Stamoulis for revision of 
the Thought and Conversation Exercises, and to him 
and to Miss Mary Vaka for assistance in the cor- 
rection of the proof-sheets. A great part of the 
drudgery of copying the manuscript and preparing it 
for the press fell to the lot of the author’s wife, whose 
accurate execution of this difficult task calls for grate- 
ful recognition. To the publishers, finally, thanks are 
due for their willingness to undertake a work which, 
from its nature, could offer only to a liberal foresight 
its promise of an adequate pecuniary return. 


New York, September 1, 1896. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


LESSON FIRST 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΠΡΩΤΟΝ 


THe ΔΙΡΗΑΡΕΤ-- τὸ ᾽Αλϕάβητον 


Tue Greek alphabet is the same to-day as it was in 
the classical period of the language. It consists of 
twenty-four letters—seven vowels and seventeen con- 
sonants. | 

Three characters, which were found in the alpha- 
bet in pre-classical times, have been dropped there- 
from, but are still employed as figures; these will be 
shown in the section on Cardinal Numbers in Lesson 
XIV. Another letter originally in the alphabet was 
waf or dhighamma (so called from its shape, ΑΕ). It 
bad the value of vita. 

_ The signs in the right-hand column in the following 
table are those used in the figured pronunciation of 
the Greek words in this book; they are explained in 


the section on Pronunciation below. 
1 


wo 


Printed Written 
Aa ets 
Bp σαν 
ἘΞ: 
A$ DY 


KEN ae 
A 


Μι το ἢ 
0ο κ 
Ίπ Ny he 


* Sighma has two forms, as here shown, σ and ¢. The second of these, 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Name 
ἄλφα alpha 
βῆτα vita 
γάμμα ghamma 
δέλτα dhelta 

ἓ ψιλόν epsilon 
ζῆτα zita 

ἦτα ita 

θῆτα thita 
ἰῶτα iota 
κάππα kappa 
λάμβδα lamydha 
μῦ mi 

νῦ nyl 

Et ksi 

ὃ μικρόν omikron 
πὶ pl 

ρῶ ΤῸ 

σίγμα sighma 
ταῦ taf 

ὃ ψιλόν —ipsilon 
pi fi 

ve chi 

ψῖ “psi 

ὦ μέγα omegha 


Sign 


gh, y, ng 
dh 
Θ 


7 


th 


1 


k,ky,g,gy ἢ 


ἘΠ 

m, Ἢ 
n,ny,m 
ks 


5, 7 
tod 
ΤΥ 
f 

kh, ch 
ps, bz 
ο 


called final sighma, σίγµα τελικόν, is written only at the end of ἃ word, 


| 
| 


‘| 


THE ALPHABET 3 


PRONUNCIATION—17 προφορά 


A a Pronounced like @ in father, though often very 
short like @ in ask (as pronounced in England and 
the New England States of America); never like 
ain hat. Represented in the figured pronuncia- 
tion by a. 

B β Like the English ο; never liked. Represented 
by v. 

Γ y This is the most difficult of all the Greek letters 
for an English-speaking foreigner to pronounce. 
When followed by a, αυ, ο, ov, or w, or another 
consonant (except y, κ, χ. or &), it has the sound of 
a guttural g, approximately that of the North Ger- 
man g in Wagner, but there is also a suggestion of 
oo or w in it; indeed, to a native Greek the Eng- 
lish word “ wood” sounds almost as if it were writ- 
ten with an initial y. The sound may be imitated 
by placing the vocal organs in the position to pro- 
nounce “hood,” and then, without the slightest 
change in them, saying “good.” For want of a 
better symbol this sound will be represented by gh. 
When y is followed by a vowel or diphthong hav- 
ing an 6 or an ὁ sound (az, e, εἰ, ευ, η, NU, ἐς οἱ, V, OF 
ut), 10 15 pronounced like the English y—still, how- 
ever, with a guttural sound. Represented by y. 

When followed by another y, or by x, y, or &, it 
is pronounced as ny in “long.” The second y¥ is 
then pronounced like « under the same circum- 

: stances (see below). 

A ὃ Always pronounced like ¢/ in “the.” Represented 

by dh. 


4 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


E e Pronounced usually like @ in “care,” sometimes 
like ὁ in “pen,” and occasionally approximating ὦ 
in “hate.” The diphthong αι has the same sound. 
Represented by e. | 

2 ἕ This has always the sound of English z. Repre- 
sented by z. 

H η Like ὁ in “pique” or 66 in “seen”; never like ὁ in 
“Sis I Signee 

© 0 Like {ή in “thing.” Represented by th. 

I « Pronounced like ἡ. The diphthongs ει, ov, and ve 
also have the same pronunciation. This is repre- 
sented by 1. 

K κ When followed by a, av, 0, ov, or w, or another con- 
sonant, it is pronounced like & Represented by k. 
Before a vowel or diphthong having an e or ὃ 
sound (αι, ε, ευ, εἰ, η. NU, t, ου, υ, OY ve), it 15 Βοῖ- 
ened to xy, like ὁ in “cure.” Represented by ky. 
After y or ν it is pronounced like g in “ go,” but if 
followed by an 6 or ὁ sound, then as g in “ figure.” 
Represented by g or gy. 

A » Before an a,e,0,or 00 sound, like 7. Represented byl 
Before an ὃ sound it is pronounced like 72 in mill- 
ion. Sign, ly. 

M µ Like m. Represented by πι. Before β or ¢ it 
sounds more like m than m. Sign ἢ. 

N ν Before an ἄ, 6, 0, or οὐ sound, like n. Represented 
by n | 
When followed by an ὁ sound, like 2. in “new.” 
Represented by ny. 

Before π it is pronounced like m, the π then tak-— 
ing the sound of 6. Represented by m. 
= ἕ Like ks in “backs.” Represented by ks. - 


: THE ALPHABET 5 


Ο ο Like ο in “nor”; sometimes approximately, but 
never frankly, like ο in “note”; never lke ο in 
“not.” Represented by o. 

II π Pronounced as 2, and so represented in the trans- 
literation. 

When preceded by yu or ν it takes the sound of ὁ. 
Sign, b. 

P p Like 77 in “carry,” but more strongly rolled than 
is usual in English. Represented by r. 

Σ o Like 5 in “sing.” Represented by 5. 

When followed by β, y, δ, Δ, μη v, or p, it sounds 
like z. Sign, 7. 

T τ Like ὁ, and so represented in the figured pronun- 
ciation. 

When preceded by ν, it is pronounced as d.  Rep- 
resented by d. 

T υ Like ὁ in “ pique”; never like any of the sounds 
of the English w. Represented by i. | 
In the diphthongs av, ev, and ηυ, it has a conso- 
nantal value, being pronounced like Τ or v—like f 
when followed by 0, κ, &, 7, o, τ, φ, x, and ψ'; in 
all other cases like v. Sign, f or v. 

The diphthong ov has the sound οἱ οο in “ mood.” 
Represented by oo. 

Φ ¢ Like f, and so represented in the transliteration. 

X y When followed by a, αυ, ο, ov, or w, or another 
consonant, it has the sound of cA in the German 
“nach” or the Scotch “loch.” Sign, kh. 

When followed by an ¢ or ὁ sound it is pronounced 
like ch in the German “ich.” The sound is here 
represented by ch. It should be strongly aspi- 
rated. The first of these sounds is made in the 


6 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


back part of the mouth, the second more toward 
the front. 

Ww Like ps, and so represented in the figured pro- 
nunciation. 

When preceded by µ or ν it has sometimes, but 
not always, the value of bs in “ribs.” Repre- 
sented by bz. 

Q ὦ Like ο in “nor”; sometimes approximately, but 
never frankly, like o in “note”; never like o in 
“not.” Represented by o 
There is no distinction in pronunciation between 
oand o. 


99 


ΏΙΡΗΤΠΟΝΟΒ---δίφθογγοι 


There are eight diphthongs, or double letters, as 
follows: 
Αι Pronounced like «. Represented by ο. 
Av Like αφ or af (see the pronunciation of v aboye). 
Sign, af or av. 
Ez Like ἢ ors. Represented by i. 
Ev Like εφ or εβ (see above, under υ). περ ΟΣ 
by ef or ev. 
Hv Like ηφ or 78 (with the sound of ee in “reef,” - 
never that of ὁ in “if”). Represented by if or iy. 
Οι Like ΠΣ or v. It never has the sound of οὗ in 
“noise.” Sign, i. τῇ 
Ov Pronounced as ow in “ you” or oo in “mood 3” 
never like ow in “out.” Represented by oo. 
To Like ἡ οι. Represented by 1. 
There are also three semi- diphthongs, which are 
found for the most part in the dative singular of nouns 
or in the second and third person singular subjunctive 


THE BREATHING t 


of verbs. These are written by a stroke, representing . 
t (iota subscript, ὑπογεγραμμένον ἰῶτα), placed beneath 
the letters a, η, or w, thus: αι η, ω. These are pro- 
nounced exactly as a, η. and w, no account being taken 
of the half-concealed iota. When the improper diph- 
thong is written as a capital letter, it is marked by a 
small « written after, and not beneath, the capital, 
thus: Av, He, Qu. In-such case the breathing (see 
below) is placed before the capital, and not over the « 
as in proper diphthongs. 


THE BREATHING—T0 πνεῦμα 


Every word beginning with a vowel has a sign (’) 
or (“) placed over the initial letter. This is called the 
breathing. In ancient times, in all probability, it had 
to do with the pronunciation, the rough breathing (“) 
indicating that the vowel was aspirated, and thus 
having the force of the English / in “ had,” while the 
smooth breathing (’) marked the absence of aspiration. 
At the present day there is no difference in pronuncia- 
tion denoted by the breathings. The rough breathing 
has an influence, however, upon the consonant of cer- 
tain prepositions, such as ἀπό, µετά, κατά. which, when 
immediately followed by a word beginning with a 
rough breathing, drop the final vowel and change the 
consonant to the corresponding aspirate, thus: ad’, μεθ’, 
καθ’. 

There is no rule for the use of the rough or smooth 
breathing, except that initial v always takes the rough 
breathing. 

An initial ῥ was formerly, and is occasionally, though 


8 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


seldom, now written with a rough breathing; and when 
a double 66 occurred in the middle of a word, the first 
one took the smooth and the second the rough breath- 
ing. | 
When the word begins with a capital letter, the 
breathing, as well as the accent, is written to the left 
of the letter, and not over it; a diphthong, however, — 
always takes the breathing and accent on its second 
component letter. In the case of an improper diph- 
thong, when written with a capital (the « being then ~ 
placed to the right, after the manner of proper diph- — 
thongs), the accent or breathing is placed to the left of 
the main component and never over the ν. 


THe ACCENT—6 τόνος 


An accent placed over a vowel indicates that that 
syllable receives the stress in pronunciation. There — 
are three accents in Greek, the acute, ὀξεῖα (‘), the 
grave, βαρεῖα (*), and the circumflex, περισπωµένη (“ ). 
The acute accent may fall upon any of the last three 
syllables of a word, the circumflex upon either of the 
last two, the grave only upon the last syllable. The 
acute accent can fall upon the third syllable from the 
end, the antepenult, only when the vowel of the final 
syllable is short; when it is lon& in quantity, the ac- 
cent can be placed no farther back than the next to 
the last syllable, the penultimate; the circumflex can 
fall upon the penult only when this syllable is long 
and the final syllable short. The terminal syllable 
may receive either the circumflex, the acute, or the 
grave accent; when the acute accent falls upon the 


ΤΗΕ ACCENT 9 


‘final syllable it is changed into the grave unless a 
| mark of punctuation immediately follows. 

Ten words never receive any accent. These are: 
|the nominative, masculine and feminine, singular and 
| plural, of the article, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, ai; the prepositions εἰς 
‘and ἐν, in, and ἐκ (ἐξ), out of; the conjunctions εἰ, if, 
and ὡς, how; and the negative particle οὐ (οὐκ or οὐχ). 
| Certain other words lose their accent, except when 
|they begin a sentence or are separated from the pre- 
|ceding word by a punctuation mark, throwing the ac- 
/cent back upon the terminal syllable of the preceding 
| word. When this word is a paroxytone, that is, one 
| having an acute accent on the next to the last syllable, 
the accent of the following word simply disappears, 
| for two acute accents cannot fall on two contiguous 
syllables; it is also dropped entirely if the final sylla- 
| ble of the preceding word has a circumflex accent; if 
| this syllable has a grave accent, the latter is changed 
to acute in such a case. Words of this class which 
| throw their accent back on the terminal syllable of 
the preceding word are called enclitics, ἐγκλιτικαὶ λέ- 
| ἕξεις. The enclitics are: the indefinite pronoun τίς, τί, 
/ some one, something, in all its cases; the monosyllabic 
| personal pronouns in the genitive (possessive pronouns), 
μοῦ, of me, σᾶς, of you, etc., and also the dative and ac- 
cusative of the same pronouns, when they follow the 
' verb, but not when they precede it; the adverbs ποῦ, 
| somewhere, ποθέν, from somewhere, ποτέ, sometimes, 
never, and πῶς, somehow ; certain untranslatable par- 
ticles such as yé; and finally the indicative present of 
the ancient verb εἰμί, I am; but the modern form of 
this verb, εἶμαι, is not enclitic. If one of these words 


10 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


begins a sentence it retains its accent; if two or more 
follow each other, each throws the accent back on the 
preceding, so that only the final enclitic remains unac- 
cented. The dissyllabic enclitics retain their accent 
when preceded by a paroxytone word or by a properi- 
spome ending in w or &. 

The student should study carefully these remarks on pronuncia- 
tion and should refer to-them constantly in learning the ‘‘ Thought 
Exercises” in the following lessons. Note especially the modifica- 


tions in sound that certain consonants undergo according as they 
are preceded by another consonant or followed by a particular vowel 


sound. The only letters the pronunciation of which will present” 


any real difficulty to an English-speaking student are y and χ. The 
pronunciation of these, especially of the first, is difficult, and should 
be learned, if opportunity offers, from a native Greek. 

Read the remarks on the breathings and accents, but do not try to 
learn them now. If they are read over carefully once in a while, 
they will soon be learned without any appreciable effort, and, once 
mastered, the rules are so simple and logical that they can never be 
forgotten, especially as their practical application will be constantly 
before you. 

Learn the alphabet and the forms of the characters thoroughly. 
No substantial progress can be made until one is able to read the 
Greek words as readily as if they were printed in Roman characters; 
the only secret to success in this is constant practice. Exercises in 
the written character will be found in the Appendix. 


OE α ΕΕ. λξξἱ-.-----μμ. 


LESSON SECOND 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AETTEPON 


Tue following lessons begin with a ‘‘ Thought Exercise,” a 
series of simple phrases expressive of certain physical actions. 
These sentences should be read aloud several times with the aid of 
the interlinear pronunciation until they can be repeated rapidly 
without hesitation. They should then be compared with the inter- 
linear translation until their sense is fully appreciated. Then the 
appropriate actions should be performed as the words are pro- 
nounced, the student thinking only of what he is doing while 
speaking the Greek sentence, and not trying to recall the English 
equivalent of the Greek words. This exercise may seem a little 
tiresome at first, but if persevered in will soon become interesting 
and comparatively easy. When the phrases have been learned so 
that they immediately call up in the speaker’s mind the actions 
which they represent, they should be practised at frequent intervals 
during the day, and when this has been done so often that the move- 
ment at once brings to the mind or the lips the Greek phrase de- 
scriptive of it, without the slightest effort of memory, the student 
may pass on to the ‘‘ Conversation Exercise,” which is made up of 
variants of the preceding exercise, in the form of questions and 
answers. These need not be learned by heart, but are simply to be 
read over several times aloud —not translated into English. In 
all the exercises, indeed, translation into English must be studi- 
ously avoided. As soon as the meaning of a new word has been 
grasped, necessarily at first through the English, the word itself 
should be associated mentally with its meaning without thought 
of its English equivalent. This is by no means such an impos- 
sible feat as the mere thumber of dictionaries imagines; after a 
little praetice it will become instinctive, and it will be as natural 
to associate the Greek word or phrase directly with the idea, with- 


19 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


out the intervention of a definition, as it is thus to associate the Eng- 
lish. 

After having assimilated the meaning of the phrases in the ‘‘ Con- 
versation Exercise” return to the first—the ‘‘ Thought Exercise.” Go 
through the motions again and repeat the phrases that express them, 
and then write the sentence, first copying from the book and noting — 
carefully the accents and breathings as well as the spelling. After 
copying the sentence two or three times, write it from memory and 
compare with the book; repeat this at intervals until you can write 
all the sentences in the first lesson without the slightest error ἴῃ. 
letter, accent, or breathing, and then, but not until then, take up the 
second lesson. 

When alone, always read and recite aloud, for it is as necessary to 
train the ear as the eye, if not indeed even more necessary. When 
circumstances prevent loud recitation, think the phrases in the throat, 
as it were, whispering them or repeating them to yourself without 
phonation. 


Thought Exercise 


A literal translation of the Greek sentences is here given, but the 
student is cautioned against making use of this translation further — 
than to learn the meaning of the Greek words. As just said, the 
latter must not be associated with their English equivalents, but only 
with the idea or the physical action they express. In using the 
figured pronunciation be careful to give the letters the value arbi- 
trarily assigned them in the section on ‘* Pronunciation” in the 
pre®eding lesson, laying the stress on the syllable accented in the 
Greek. 


Ὕψόνω τὴν χεῖρά µου. 
tpsono tin chira moo 

I raise the hand my. 

Κρατῶ τὴν χεῖρα ὑψωμένην. 
krato tin chira ipsomenyin 

I keep the hand raised. 

Κλείω τὴν χεῖρά µου καὶ οὕτω κάμνω γρόνθον. 
klyio ἐπ chira moo kye  ooto kamno —ghronthon® 


I close the hand my and thus I make fist. 


THOUGHT EXERCISE 13 


Κτυπῶ τὴν τῆς ἄλλης χειρὸς παλάμην μὲ τὸν γρόνθον 


ktipo tin tis alyis chiros palamin me ton ghronthon 


μου. ‘ 
moo 


I strike the of the other hand palm with the fist my. 


΄ / Ν / \ \ / a 
Κάμνω ταύτας τὰς κινήσεις μὲ τὴν δεξιάν µου χεῖρα. 
kamno taftas tas kyinytsis me tin dheksiam moo chira 


I make these movements with the right my hand. 


| Avoiyo τὴν χεῖρά µου. 


anyigho tin chira moo 

I open the hand my. 

Καταβιβάζω αὐτὴν καὶ τὴν θέτω εἰς τὸ θυλάκιόν µου. 

katavivazo aftin kye tin theto δι to thilakyion moo 

I lower it and it I place in the pocket my. 

Θέτω ἐπίσης εἰς τὸ θυλάκιόν µου καὶ τὴν ἀριστεράν. 
theto episis ig. to thilakyion πιοο kye tin aristeran 

I put likewise in the pocket my also the left (hand). 

Τώρα ἀμφότεραι ai χεῖρές µου εἶναι ἐντὸς τῶν θυλακίων 
tora amfotere 6 chirez moo ine endos ton  thilakyion 


μου. 


moo 


Now both the hands my are within the pockets my. 


Μοῦ in the preceding sentences is the possessive pro- 


} noun, my. It is the genitive of the personal pronoun, 
| ἐγώ, I. Like all the possessive pronouns (except the 
| forms used in the elevated style) it is enclitic, throw- 
‘ing its accent back on the terminal syllable of the 
| preceding word. Thus in the seventh sentence in the 
| preceding exercise, we find the phrase, εἰς τὸ θυλάκιόν 


µου. The accent of the noun is on the antepenult, 
but as the word is followed by an enclitic it receives 


| a second accent on the ultima; the two words are 
| pronounced as one, thilakyionmoo, with a double ac- 


cent. 
The personal pronoun subject of a verb (ἐγώ, I, σεῖς 


14 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


or ὑμεῖς, you) is not expressed in Greek, except by way 
of comparison or for emphasis, as the termination of 
the verb indicates the number and person. 


Conversation Exercise 


Note the marks of punctuation. In Greek (;) is the mark of in- 
terrogation (?) and net a semicolon; the equivalent of our colon or 
semicolon is (*), a point at the upper edge of the line. The comma — 
(,), period (.), and note of exclamation (!) are the same as in Eng- 
lish. In some recent Greek books, especially school- books, the 
colon (:) is used for the same purposes as in English, the (:) being 


retained as the equivalent of the semicolon (;). 


Ὑψόνω τὴν χεῖρά µου; 
Μάλιστα, τὴν ὑψόνω. 
Τίς ὑψόνει τὴν χεῖρα; 
᾿Εγὼ τὴν ὑψόνω. 
Τί ὑψόνω; 
Ὑψόνω τὴν χεῖρά µου. 
Τί κρατῶ ὑψωμένον; 
al \ an / 6 
Κρατῶ τὴν χεῖρά μου ὕψω- 
μένην. 
Ἂν τὴν / / 
Καὶ ἔπειτα τί κάμνω; 
/ \ al / Ν 
Κλείω τὴν χεῖρά μου καὶ 
οὕτω κάμνω γρόνθον. 
/ / \ / 
Τίς κάμνει τὸν γρόνθον; 
3 \ 4 Ν / 
᾿γὼ κάμνω τὸν γρόνθον. 
ο / / 
Πῶς κάµνετε γρόνθον; 
Κάμνω γρὀνθον κλείων τὴν 
χεῖρά µου. 
Κλείετε τὴν χεῖρά σας; 
Μάλιστα, κλείω τὴν χεῖρά 
μου. 


Do I raise my Παπά ? 
Yes, I raise it. 

Who raises the hand ? 
I raise it. 

What do I raise ? 


‘IT raise my hand. 


What do I keep raised ? 
I keep my hand raised. — 


And then what do I do? 

I close my hand and thus 
I make a fist. | 

Who makes the fist ? 

I make the. fist. 

How do you make a fist ? 

I make a fist (by) closing 
my hand. 

Do you close your hand ἢ 

Yes, I close my hand. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 15 


Κλείετε τὴν χεῖρά µου; 
Ὄχι, δὲν κλείω τὴν χεῖρά 
/ \ > / 
cas’ κλείω τὴν ἰδικήν 


µου χεῖρα. 


| Ti κτυπᾶτε; 


Κτυπῶ τὴν παλάμην µου. 


 Κτυπᾶτε τὸν γρὀνθον σας 


μὲ τὴν παλάμην; 


| Ὄ ο \ 7 
χι, κτυπω την παλάμην 


μου μὲ τὸν γρόνθον. 
Μὲ τί κτυπᾶτε τὴν παλά- 
μην σας; 


| Κτυπῶ τὴν παλάμην μου 


μὲ τὸν γρόνθον μου. 


/ ο 
| Ποίαν παλάμην κτυπᾶτε; 


| Κτυπῶ τὴν τῆς ἄλλης χει- 


ρός μου παλάμην. 


| Μὲ ποίαν χεῖρα κάμνετε 


% / \ / 
ταυτας τας κινήσεις; 


κ bs Ν / 
Κάμνω ταῦτας τὰς κινήσεις 


μὲ τὴν δεξιάν μου χεῖρα. 


Τί κάμνετε μὲ τὴν δεξιάν 


σας; 


7 2, \ / 
| Κάμνω ταῦτας τὰς κινήσεις 


μὲ τὴν δεξιάν μου χεῖρα. 


Τί ἄλλο κάμνετε μὲ τὴν δε- 


ξιάν σας; 


Τώρα ἀνοίγω τὴν δεξιάν 


μου χεῖρα. 
» / \ \ > 
Αγοίγετε καὶ τὴν ἄριστε- 


ράν σας; 


Do you close my hand ? 

No, I do not close your 
hand; I close my own 
hand. 

What do you strike ? 

I strike my palm. 

Do you strike your fist 
with the palm ¢ 

No, I strike my palm with 
the fist. 

With what do you strike 
your palm ? 

I strike my palm with my 
fist. 

Which palm 
strike ? 

I strike the palm of my 
other hand. 

With which hand do you 
make these movements # 

I make these movements 
with my right hand. 

What do you do with 
your right (hand) { 

I make these movements 
with my right hand. 

What else do you do with 
your right ¢ 

Now I open my right 
hand. 

Do you open your left 
also ᾖ 


do you 


10 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


᾽ Ν 3 / \ 3 

Οχι, δὲν ἀνοίγω τὴν ἀρι- 
στεράν μου χεῖρα, διότι 

\ +2 / 
δὲν εἶναι κλειστή. 

K \ / ig x / 
αὶ τί κάμνετε πρὸς τού- 
τοις; 

Πρὸς τούτοις καταβιβάζω 
τὴν δεξιάν µου χεῖρα. 

Tis καταβιβάζει τὴν χεῖρα; 

᾿Εγὼ καταβιβάζω τὴν χεῖρά 
μου. 

Ποῦ θέτετε τὴν δεξιάν σας 
χεῖρα; 

Τὴν θέτω εἰς τὸ θυλάκιόν 
μου. 

Ποίαν χεῖρα θέτετε εἰς τὸ 
θυλάκιόν σας; 

Θ / 3 / \ a“ 
έτω ἀμφοτέρας TAS χεῖρας 
εἰς τὰ θυλάκιά µου. 

lal 3 5 / Ὁ an 

ΤΠοῦ εἶναι ἀμφότεραι αἱ χεῖ- 
ρές σας; . 

9 / ς ο 5 

Αμφότεραι αἱ χεῖρες εἶναι 
ἐντὸς τῶν θυλακίων µου. 


Read these sentences several times aloud. 


No, I do not open my left 
hand, for it is not closed. 


And what do you do after 
that? 

After that I lower my 
right hand. 

Who lowers his hand? 

I lower my hand. 


Where do you put your 
right hand ? 
I put it in my pocket. 


Which hand do you put in 
your pocket { 


I put both hands in my | 


pockets. 

Where are both your 
hands ? 

Both the hands are in my 
pockets. 


If two are studying 


together, one should read the question and the other give the an- 
swer, first repeating the question. The one who responds can often, 
after repeating the question, give the correct answer without refer- 
ring to the book. The sentences here given are simple, even trivial, 
but this is intentional; they are not meant primarily to amuse, but 
to serve as exercises in the practical employment of the Greek lan- 
guage. The multiplication table is not an entertaining game, but a 
necessary drill, and these exercises are the same, 

Note the enclitics in these sentences. The pronouns τίς, τί, mean 
some one, something, or who? what? When signifying some one 


1 


THE ARTICLE 17 


or something they are enclitic, but when employed as interrogative 
pronouns they retain the acute accent on the c in all the case-forms, 
thus: ὑψόνει τις τὴν χεῖρα; does any one raise his hand ? (τις enclitic), 
and τίς ὑψόνει τὴν χεῖρα; Who raises his hand ? (ris interrogative, re- 
taining the acute accent instead of changing it to the grave, as is the 
rule). 


Grammar 


THE ARTICLE—T6 ΓΑρθρον 


In modern as in ancient Greek there is but one arti- 
cle, the definite. In the vernacular (ἡ κοινὴ γλῶσσα), 
however, the numeral one is quite commonly employed 
in the sense of the indefinite article, a, απ. The def- 
inite article is declined as follows: 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ὁ ἡ τό οἱ αἱ τά 
Gen. Tov τῆς τοῦ τῶν τῶν τῶν 
Dat. τὸ τῇ τώ τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς 
Ace. τόν τήν τό τού τάς τά 


The forms not beginning with a consonant (mascu- 
line and feminine nominative in both numbers) are 
unaccented and have the rough breathing; the geni- 
tive and dative in the three genders and both numbers 
receive the circumflex accent; the other forms take an 
acute accent or, when followed, as they naturally are, 
by another word, the grave accent. In familiar con- 
versation the terminal ν of the accusative singular and 
| genitive plural, of nouns and adjectives as well as of 
the article, is usually dropped, unless the following 
word begins with a vowel or unless the word ending 


in ν is the last of the sentence. 
2 


18 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


The dative case is seldom used in ordinary conversa- 
tion (except in certain adverbial phrases, such as πρὸς 
τούτοις, in the present lesson), its place being taken by 
a preposition (εἰς, in, πρός, to) with the accusative. It 
should be carefully learned, however, for it is often 
used in oratory and in the higher style of composi-— 
tion. 

The declension of the indefinite article in the ver- 
nacular is as follows: 


Masc. Fem. Neut, 
σ / ef 
Nom. ἕνας μιά ἕνα 
ς / ε an la) δι ic ἴω 
Gen. ἑνός, ἑνοῦ μιᾶς ἐνὸς, ἑνοῦ 
Ace. ἕνα μιά(ν) ἕνα 


There is no dative in the vernacular. The line un- 
der the feminine forms, called synizesis (συνίζησις). 
indicates that the two syllables are pronounced as one, 
the . having a semi-consonantal value, like the Eng- 
lish y. : 
In the more elevated style the same word (in its lit- 
erary form, εἷς, µία, ἕν---586 Lesson XIV.) is sometimes, 
though rarely, employed, but more commonly the in- 
definite (enclitic) pronoun τις is used in this sense, thus: 
εἷς ἄνθρωπος ΟΥ ἄνθρωπός τις, ἃ Man. 


LESSON THIRD 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ TPITON 


Thought Exercise 


Read again the directions for study given in the second lesson. 
Do not begin this lesson until you have mastered the preceding 
thought exercise and have familiarized yourself with its associated 

| conversation exercise. 


Ἠκβάλλω τὴν δεξιάν μου χεῖρα ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου. 

| ekvalo tin dheksian moo chira εἶς too thilakyioo 

1 take out the right my hand from the pocket. | 

| Ἠκβάλλω ἐπίσης ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου µου καὶ τὴν ἀριστεράν. 
ekvalo episis ek too thilakyioo moo kye tin aristeran 

I take out likewise from the pocket my also the left. 

/ 5) / ς nf 3 2 \ A / 

| Τώρα ἀμφότεραι αἱ χεῖρές µου εἶναι ἐκτὸς τῶν θυλακίων 
tora amfotere 4 chirez moo ine ektos ton thilakyion 


μου. 


moo 2 
| Now both the hands my are out of the pockets my. 
| Ὑψόνω καὶ καταβιβάζω τὸν βραχίονά µου. 
| ἄρδοπο kye katavivazo ten vrachiona moo 
1 raise and lower the arm my. 
Αἱ κινήσεις γίνονται ἐκ τοῦ ὤμου. 
6 kyinyisis yinonde ek too omoo 
‘The movements take place from the shoulder. 
Κάμπτω τὸν ἀγκῶνά µου, κινῶν τὸν πῆχυν πρὸς τὸν 
kampto ton anggona (moo kyinon tom bichin pros ton 
βραχίονα. 
vrachiona 


I bend the elbow my, moving the fore-arm toward the 


arm. 


20 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


an ἴω \ ra 
Κλείω καὶ ἀνοίγω τὴν χεῖρα, κινῶν TOUS δακτύλους. 


klyio kye anyigho tin chira 


kyinon {9ο dhaktiloos 


I close and open the hand, moving the fingers. 


ἊΣ: lal \ al / 
Κινῶ τὴν χεῖρά µου, 
kyino ἐπ  chira moo ὁ 


/ \ a nr 
ἡ κίνησις Vy LVETAL ἐπὶ τοῦ καρπου. 
kyinyists 


yinete ept too karpoo 


I move the hand my, the movement takes place at the 


wrist. 


Conversation Exercise 


Ti ἐκβάλλετε ἐκ τοῦ θυλα- 
κίου σας; 

Ἠκβάλλω τὴν δεξιάν µου 
χεῖρα ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου. 
Ἔκ τίνος ἐκβάλλετε τὰς 

χεῖράς σας; 

ἘἨκβάλλω ἀμφοτέρας τὰς 
χεῖρας ἐκ πῶν θυλακίων 
μου. 

Ποῦ εἶναι τώρα ἡ ἀριστερά 
σας χείρ; 

Καὶ ἡ ἀριστερὰ καὶ ἡ δεξιά 
µου εἶναι ἐκτὸς τῶν θυ- 
λακίων. 

'“Ὑψόνετε τὸν βραχίονάσας; 

Μάλιστα, ὑψόνω καὶ κατα- 
βιβάζω βραχίονά 


μου. 


Ἂν 
τὸν 
la) / ς 7 
Ποῦ γίνονται αἱ κινήσεις; 
"Οταν ὑψόνω καὶ καταβι- 
/ Ν / / 
βάζω τὸν βραχίονα µου, 


¢ / if la) 
ἡ κίνησις γίνεται ἐκ τοῦ 
/ 

ὤμου. 


What do you take from 
your pocket 4 

I take my right hand from 
the pocket. 

From what do you take 
your hands? 

I take both the hands from 
my pockets. 


Where is now your left 
hand ? | 
Both my left and right 
(hands) are out of the 

pockets. 
Do you raise your arm ἵ 
Yes, I raise and lower my 
arm. 


Where do the movements 
take place ¢ 

When I raise and lower 
my arm the movement 


occurs from the shoul- — 


der. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 21 


ς Αα 
Γίνονται αἱ κινήσεις ἐκ τῶν 
» Ὁ 6 / \ 
μων, ὅταν ὑψόνητε και 
καταβιβάζητε τοὺς βρα- 
χίονάς σας; 
/ ς 
Μάλιστα, αἱ κινήσεις γί. 
νονται ἐκ τῶν ὦμων. 


Τί κάμνετε, ὅταν κάμπτητε 
τὸν ἀγκῶνά σας; 

Ὅταν κάμπτω τὸν ἀγκῶνά 
μου, κινῶ τὸν πῆχυν πρὸς 
τὸν βραχίονα. 

Τί κάμπτετε, ὅταν κινῆτε 
τὸν πῆχυν πρὸς τὸν βρα- 
χίονα; 


Ν A 
Κάμπτω τὸν ἀγκῶνά µου, 
a \ an \ 
κινών τὸν πῆχυν πρὸς 
\ / 
τὸν βραχίονα. 
/ “ Ν κ / 
Τί κινεῖτε πρὸς τὸν βραχἰ- 
\ 
ova, ὅταν κάµπτητε τὸν 
ἀγκώνά σας; 
a fal x \ 
Κινῶ τὸν πῆχυν πρὸς τὸν 
ο / 
βραχίονα, ὅταν κάµπτω 
“Ὁ / 
«TOV ἀγκώνά µου. 
/ al \ - β΄. 
Πρὸς τί κινεῖτε τὸν πῆχύν 
σας; 
a \ fol \ x 
Κινώ τον πῆχυν προς τον 
/ 
βραχίονα. 
/ / eae / 
Τί κλείετε καὶ ἀνοίγετε, 
a \ 4 
ὅταν κινῆτε τοὺς δακτύ- 
λους σας; 


Do the movements take 
place from the  shoul- 
ders when you raise 
and lower your arms ? 

Yes, the movements take 
place from the shoul- 
ders. 

What do you do when you 
bend your elbow? 

When I bend my elbow I 
move the fore-arm tow- 
ard the arm. 

What do you _ bend 
when you move the 
fore-arm toward the 
arm { 

I bend my elbow in mov- 
ing the fore-arm toward 
the arm. 

What do you move tow- 
ard the arm when you 
bend your elbow? 

I move the fore-arm tow- 
ard the arm when 1 
bend my elbow. 

Toward what do you move 
your fore-arm { 

I move the fore-arm tow- 
ard the arm. 

What do you close and 
open when you move 
your fingers ? 


22 MODERN GREEK 


Κλείω καὶ ἀνοίγω τὰς χεῖ- 
ράς µου, ὅταν κινῶ τοὺς 
δακτύλους. 

Τί κινεῖτε, ὅταν ἀνοίγητε 
καὶ κλείητε τὰς χεῖράς 
σας; 

Κινώ τοὺς δακτύλους µου, 
ὅταν κλείω καὶ ἀνοίγω 
τὴν χεῖρά µου. 

Ποῦ γίνεται ἡ κίνησις, ὅταν 
κινῆτε τὴν χεῖρά σας; 


“ = \ ο ο” 
Οταν κινω τὴν χεῖρά µου, 
/ / \ ἴω 
ἡ κίνησις γίνεται ἐπὶ τοῦ 
καρποῦ. 
ο / me / 
1οῦ «γίνονται αἱ κινήσεις, 
/ fol εἶ ο) / 
ὅταν κινῆτε τὰς χεῖράς 
σας; 
“ a \ aed & 
Οταν κινώ τὰς χεῖράς µου, 
/ / \ 
αἱ κινήσεις γίνονται ἐπὶ 
τῶν καρπώγ. 
\ tal 7 7 
Τὰ μέρη τῶν ἄνω ἄκρων 
5 ς 9 ς / 
εἶναι ὁ ὦμος, 0 βραχίων, 
ts 6 nan { 
ὁ ἀγκών, ὁ πῆχυς, ὁ καρ- 
/ ς \ \ ¢ / 
TOS, ἡ χεὶρ καὶ οἱ δάκτυ- 
λοι. 


Τί εἶναι τὸ πρῶτον μέρος 
τῶν ἄνω ἄκρων; 

Τὸ πρῶτον μέρος εἶναι ὁ 
ὦμος. 

Τί εἶναι τὸ δεύτερον μέρος; 


MASTERY 


I close and open my hands 
when I move my fin- 
gers. 

What do you move when 
you open and close your 
hands ? 

I move my fingers when 
I close and open my 
hand. 

Where does the movement 
take place when you 
move your hand ? 

When I move my hand 
the motion takes place 
at the wrist. 

Where do the movements 
occur when you move 
your hands ? 

When I move my hands 
the movements take 
place at the wrists. 

The parts of the upper ex- 
tremities are the shoul- 
der, the arm, the elbow, 
the fore-arm, the wrist, 
the hand, and the fin- 
gers. 

What is the first part of 
the upper extremities 4 
The first part is the shoul- 

der. 

What is the second part? 


ΤΗΕ 


Τὸ δεύτερον µέρος εἶναι ὁ 
βραχίων. 

Καὶ λοιπόν; 

Τὸ τρίτον μέρος εἶναι ὁ ἀγ- 
κών. 

Τί εἶναι τὸ τέταρτον μέρος; 

Τὸ τέταρτον μέρος εἶναι ὁ 
πῆχυς. 

"Ἔπειτα δέ; ἴ 
Τὸ πέμπτον μέρος εἶναι ὁ 

ο΄ καρπός. 

"Ἔπειτα δέ; 

Τὸ ἕκτον μέρος εἶναι ἡ χείρ. 

Τὸ τελευταῖον μέρος τῶν 
ἄνω ἄκρων εἶναι οἱ δά- 
KTUAOL. | 


VERB 23 


The second part is the 
arm. 

And then ? 

The third part is the el- 
bow. 

What is the fourth part ἢ 

The fourth part is the 
fore-arm. 

And then 4 

The fifth part is the wrist. 


And then? 

The sixth part is the hand. 

The last part of the upper 
extremities are the fin- 


gers. 


In the preceding exercise the verbs dependent upon 


ὅταν, When, such as ὑψόνητε, κλείητε, κτλ. (καὶ τὰ λοιπά, 

et cetera), having η instead of e in the penult, are in the 

subjunctive mood; all the other verbs are in the pres- 
ent indicative. 


Grammar 
THE VERB—TOo Ῥῆμα 


The modern Greek verb is very simple in its construction, its 
mastery presenting few of the difficulties usually associated with 
this part of speech in the mind of the student of the classical form 
of the language. There are really but two tenses to be learned, the 
present and the aorist, all the others being formed from these. 

It is important to learn the verb early in the study of a language, 
for it is the most necessary part of the sentence, the word, explain- 
ing the relationship of persons and things to each other. A foreigner 


24 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


who can handle his verbs correctly has little difficulty in being un 

derstood, even if he is occasionally at fault with the cases or gender 

of nouns and adjectives. It is for this reason that the usual orde 

of grammars is reversed in this book, and the verb is studied before 
the other inflected parts of speech. 

The teaching of grammar as a mental drill forms no part of this 
method, the aim of which is wholly practical, but an acquaintance 
with the inflections is necessary to a proper comprehension of the 
spoken and written language. When this has been acquired the 
student will be freed from the drudgery of grammatical forms and 
can proceed rapidly to the assimilation of Greek. The study of the 
niceties of the ancient grammar can then be undertaken intelligently 
and logically. If the student will learn thoroughly the simple gram- 
matical notes in these lessons, he will know how to use the tools of 
the language, and the tools themselves, the vocabulary, will ingen- 
sibly become his through practice of the thou ght, conversation, and 
reading exercises. 


THE PRESENT TENSE—6 ἐνεστώς 


All verbs end, in the present indicative active (the | 
dictionary form of the Greek verb), in o.* (Some, — 
called “deponents,” have only the middle or passive | 
termination, owas.) In the simple verbs this ω is un- 
accented, the word being a paroxytone (acute accent 
on the syllable before the last); the perispome or cir- | 
cumflex verbs (circumflex accent on the termination @) 
belong to the class of contracted verbs which will be _ 
studied in the next lesson. The stem or root (ῥίζα) of 
the verb is that part which remains after cutting off 
the termination ὦ of the present indicative active, or 
ovat of the present indicative middle. The process of | 


* There are still some verbs in occasional use, in the literary style, 
which end in μι. They are, however, of infrequent occurrence. They will 
be found among the irregular verbs in the Appendix, 


THE PRESENT TENSE ae 143 


finding the root is not always so easy, but the general 
rule is as here stated. 


Present Indicative Active of λύω, I loosen. 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
1. Avo, I loosen. λύομεν, We loosen. 
2. λύεις, thou loosenest. λύετε, you loosen. 
3. λύει, he loosens. λύουσι(ν) ΟΥ λύουν; they 
loosen. 
The Subjunctive (ἡ ὑποτακτική) is formed from the 


Indicative (ἡ ὁριστική) by lengthening the initial vowel 
or diphthong of the termination, so that e becomes η; 
ει, η: ο OF ου. ὦ. 


Present Subjunctive Active of λύω. 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
1. λύω, I may loosen. λύωμεν, We may loosen. 
2. λύης, thou mayest λύητε, you may loosen. 
loosen. 
ὃ. λύῃ, he may loosen. λύωσι(ν), they may, etc. 


The subjunctive is employed only after certain con- 
junctions, the most common of which are ἄν, ἐάν, if; 
va, wa, that, in order that; and ὅταν, when. (Note 
she breathings on these words. As remarked in Lesson 
[., the breathing does not affect the pronunciation of 
she letter over which it is placed, hence whether it is 
“ough or smooth can be learned only from observation. 
t is essential, however, to correct writing that it be 
sroperly marked.) The pronunciation of the subjunc- 
sive differs from that of the indicative (in the active 
voice) only in the second person plural, λύητε (lyiite) 


26 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


instead of λύετε (lyiete), and in the third person plural, 
λύωσιν (lyiosin) instead of λύουσιν (lyioosin). This form 
of the third person plural is preferable to that terminat- 
ing in ovy—the latter belongs rather to the vernacular 
and is seldom used in the literary language. 

All the third persons plural, of whatever tense or 
mood, that end in σι take a ν ἐφελκυστικόν (attracted 
v) when the verb ends the sentence or when the fol- 
lowing word begins with a vowel. 

In the spoken language the indicative is frequently 
employed instead of the subjunctive, when in the latter 
two i-sounds would come together, as in λύητε. 


Grammatical Exercises 


These grammatical exercises will be found exceedingly useful as 
a°*means of fixing the different parts of the verb firmly in the mind 
and thereby acquiring fluency in speaking and writing Greek. They 
are to grammar what the multiplication table is to arithmetic. If 
the student will practise these exercises conscientiously, orally and 
in writing, the forms of the verb will soon become so perfectly famil- 
iar that they will be used unconsciously, coming to the lips as in- 
stinctively as do those of his native tongue. The phrases should be 
read aloud several times and then be repeated from memory and also 
written down; the written exercise is then compared with the book, 
the mistakes, if any, corrected, and the sentences again written from 
memory. ‘This should be repeated until the exercise can be recited 
correctly without hesitation. This will repay the most careful and 
conscientious practice, and ought on no account to be omitted. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE 
Οέτω τὴν χεῖρά µου εἰς τὸ θυλάκιον καὶ ἐκβάλλω TO 
ῥινόμακτρόν µου. 
I put my hand in my pocket and take out my hand- 
kerchief. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 27 


Θέτεις τὴν χεῖρά σου εἰς τὸ θυλάκιον καὶ ἐκβάλλεις τὸ 
ῥινόμακτρόν σου. 

Θέτει τὴν χεῖρά του εἰς τὸ θυλάκιον καὶ ἐκβάλλει τὸ 
ῥινόμακτρόν του. 

Θέτομεν τὰς χεῖράς µας εἰς τὰ θυλάκια καὶ ἐκβάλλομεν 
τὰ ῥινόμακτρά µας. 

Θέτετε τὰς χεῖράς σας εἰς τὰ θυλάκια καὶ ἐκβάλλετε τὰ 
ῥινόμακτρά σας. 

Θέτουσι τὰς χεῖράς των εἰς τὰ θυλάκια καὶ ἐκβάλλουσι 


τὰ ῥινόμακτρά των. 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE 


Πρέπει va λύω τὰ σανδἀλιά pov.* 
I must untie my slzoes. 

Πρέπει va AVS τὰ σανδάλιά σου. 
Πρέπει νὰ λύη τὰ σανδἀλιά του. 
Πρέπει νὰ λύωμεν τὰ σανδάλιά µας. 
Πρέπει νὰ λύητε τὰ σανδάλιά σας. 


/ \ / 
Πρέπει νὰ λύωσι τὰ σανδάλιά των. 


Πρέπει is an impersonal verb meaning “it is neces- 
sary”; it is the exact equivalent of the French 7 faut. 
Πρέπει va, followed by the subjunctive, means I (you, 
he, ete.) must. ᾿ 


* This refers to an habitual action, one that must be repeatedly per- 
formed. If it were desired to express an action to be performed at this 
particular time only, the @orist subjunctive would be used. 


LESSON FOURTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ TETAPTON | 


Thought Exercise 


Περιπατῶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐδάφους. 
peripato ept too edhafoos 

Τ walk upon the floor. 

Προβάλλω τὸν ἀριστερόν µου πόδα. 
provalo ton aristeron moo podha 


I put forward the left ΤΥ Γοοῦ. 3 


Κρατῶ τὸν ἑαυτόν μου ἐπὶ τῶν δακτύλων τοῦ ὅν 
krato ton eafton moo ερὶ ton dhaktilon too aristeroo 


/ 
ποδός. 
podhos 


I support the self of me ‘upon the toes of the left foot. 


Κάμπτω τὸ δεξιόν µου γόνυ. 
kampto to dheksion moo ghonyt 


I bend the right my knee. 
Προβάλλω τὸ δεξιόν µου σκέλος. 


provalo to dheksion moo  skyelos 
I put forward the right my leg. 
Ilato μὲ τὴν δεξιὰν πτέρναν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐδάφους. 
pato me tin dheksian  pternan ept too edhafoos 
I tread with the right heel upon the floor.. 
Kpatotpat ἐπὶ τοῦ δεξιοῦ ποδός. 
kratoome ept too dheksioo podhos 


I support myself upon the right foot. 
“Ὑψόνω τὸν ἑαυτόν µου ἐπὶ τών δακτύλων Tod δεξιοῦ 
ipsono ton eafton moo epi ton dhaktilon too — dheksioo 
ποδός. 
podhos 


I raise the self of me upon the toes of the sent foot. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 29 


Ἐπαναλαμβάνω τὰς αὐτὰς κινήσεις μὲ τοὺς δύω πόδας 


epanalanvano tas aftas kyinytisis me tooz  dhio podhas 
ἐναλλάξ. 
enalaks 
I repeat the same movements with the two feet alter- 
nately. 
Στέκω. 
steko 
I stop. 
Κάθημαι καὶ θέτω τὸ ἓν πόδι µου ἐπάνω εἰς τὸ ἄλλο 
kathime keye theto to en podhi moo epano ee 16) alo 
(σταυρόνω τὰ πὀδιά µου). 
(stavrono ta podhya moo) 


I sit down and I put the one foot my over on the other 
(cross the legs my). 


The word meaning foot is ποῦς (gen. ποδός), ἃ mas- 
culine noun, but in the last sentence we have τὸ πόδι 
(neuter). This is the form used in the vernacular 
which is very prone to change nouns in common use 
into the neuter with the termination «. Thus, ἡ χείρ 
(feminine) becomes τὸ χέρι; the ancient form παῖς, 
child (masc. or fem.) becomes τὸ παιδί. 


Conversation Exercise 


Ποῦ περιπατεῖτε; ‘Where are you walking ή 
Περιπατώ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐδάφους. I am walking upon the 
floor. 
Μὲ ποίας κινήσεις ἀρχίζετε With what movements do 
νὰ περιπατῆτε; you begin to walk ? 
᾿Αρχίζω νὰ περιπατώ ἐπὶ I begin to walk upon the 
τοῦ ἐδάφους προβάλλων floor by putting forward 


τὸν ἀριστερόν µου πόδα. my left foot. 


90 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Ποῖον πόδα προβάλλετε 
πρώτον; 

Πρῶτον προβάλλω τὸν ἀρι- 
στερόν μου πόδα. 

Καὶ ἔπειτα τί κάμνετε; 

Τώρα κρατῶ τὸν ἑαυτόν μου 
ἐπὶ τῶν δακτύλων τοῦ 
ποδός μου. 

"Ertl τῶν δακτύλων ποίου 
ποδὸς κρατεῖτε τὸν ἑαυτόν 
σας; 

Κρατῶ τὸν ἑαυτόν μου ἐπὶ 
τῶν δακτύλων τοῦ ἀρι- 
στεροῦ ποδός. 

Τί κάμνετε μετὰ ταῦτα; 

Μετὰ ταῦτα κάμπτω τὸ 
γόνυ μου. 

Ποῖον γόνυ κάμπτετε; 

Κάμπτω τὸ δεξιόν μου γόνυ. 

Τώρα προβάλλετε τὸ ἀρι- 
στερόν σας σκέλος; 

Ὄχι, δὲν προβάλλω τὸ ἀρι- 
στερὸν ἀλλὰ τὸ δεξιόν. 

Πατεῖτε μὲ τὴν δεξιὰν πτέρ- 
ναν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐδάφους; 

Μάλιστα, πατώ μὲ τὴν δε- 
ξιὰν πτέρναν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐδά- 
φους. 

Τώρα κρατεῖσθε ἐπὶ τοῦ αὐ- 
τοῦ ποδός; 

Μάλιστα, κρατοῦμαι ἐπὶ 

τοῦ δεξιοῦ μου ποδός. 


Which foot do you extend 
first ᾖ 

I put forward first my left 
foot. | 

And then what do you do? 

Now I support myself 
upon my toes. 


Upon the toes of which 
foot do you support 
yourself ? 

I support myself upon the 
toes of the left foot. 


What do you do after that? 
After that I bend my knee. 


Which knee do you bend ? 

I bend my right knee. 

Do you now put your left 
leg forward { 

No, I do not advance the © 
left but the right (leg). 
Do you tread with the 

right heel on the floor? 
Yes, I tread with the right 
heel on the floor. 


Now do you support your- 
self upon the same foot ? 

Yes, I support myself upon 
my right foot. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 91 


7 ε / \ ε Ἴ / 
Τίς ὑψόνει τὸν ἑαυτόν του 
wn / »Ξ 
ἐπὶ τῶν δακτύλων τοῦ δε- 
ξιοῦ ποδός; 

5 \ e \ ιά / 

Ey@ ὑψόνω τὸν ἑαυτὸν µου 
> \ lal / fal 
ἐπὶ τών δακτύλων τοῦ δε- 
ξιοῦ ποδός. 

,ὔ ’ “ lal 
Τί κάµνετε, ὅταν κινῆσθε 
\ \ , 
KAT αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον; 


“ - 3 δα 

Ὅταν κινῶμαι κατ αὐτὸν 
/ 

τὸν τρόπον, βηματίζω. 


\ 
' Ἐπαναλαμβάνετε τὰς αὐ- 
\ / \ \ ” 
᾿ς Τὰἂς κινήσεις μὲ TOV ἄλ- 
λον πόδα; 
\ 
Nai, ἐπαναλαμβάνω τὰς av- 
7 \ 
τὰς κινήσεις μὲ τοὺς δύω 
πόδας ἐναλλάξ. 
“ ο 2 \ / 
Ὅταν περιπατῆτε, ἀπὸ ποί- 
/ 
ων ἀρθρώσεων «γίνονται 
[4 / 
αἱ κινήσεις; 
“ A e / 
Όταν περιπατώ, αἱ κινή- 
/ \ fal 
σεις γίνονται ἀπὸ τών 
¥ nw Ὁ 
ἰσχίων, τῶν γονάτων, τών 
an \ A ᾽ / 
σφυρών καὶ τών ἀρθρώ- 
σεων τών δακτύλων. 
/ 
Τώρα στέκετε; 
/ / / 
Nat, τώρα στέκω. 
\ 
Kai ἔπειτα κάθησθε; 
/ 
Nai, ἔπειτα κάθημαι. 
/ / cd / 
Τί κάµνετε, ὅταν κάθησθε; 


Who raises himself upon 
the toes of the right 
foot ? 

I raise myself upon the 
toes of the (my) right 
foot. 

What do you do when you 
move yourself in this 
way ἢ 

When I move myself in 
this manner I take a 
step. 

Do you repeat the same 
movements with the 
other foot ? 

Yes, I repeat the same 
movements with the 
two feet alternately. 

When you walk, at what 
joints do the movements 
take place ? 

When I walk the move- 
ments take place at the 
hips, the knees, the an- 
kles, and the joints of 
the toes. 

Do you stop now ? 

Yes, I stop now. 

And then do you sit down ? 

Yes, then I sit down. 

What do you do when you 
sit down ? 


ΘΟ ΟῚ MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


"Οταν κάθημαι, θέτω τὸ ἕν When I sit down I cross 


πόδι µου ἐπάνω εἰς τὸ my legs (put one foot 
ἄλλο. over the other). 

"Οταν θέτητε τὸ ἕν πόδισας ΝΥ θη you cross your legs 
ἐπάνω εἰς τὸ ἄλλο, εἶσθε are you comfortable (all 
καλά; right) ἢ 


Μάλιστα, τώρα εἶμαι πολὺ Υ 68, now 1 am all right. 


καλα. 


Note that vai, yes, signifies the exact opposite of the 
English word of the same sound. Ναί and μάλιστα 
both mean yes; the latter is somewhat more emphatic, 
yes, indeed !. certainly! equivalent to the German ja 
wohl ! ς 

᾿Αρθρώσεων.--- 6 accent here is on the antepenult, 
although the final syllable contains the long vowel o. 
This exception to the rule of accentuation occurs in 
the genitive singular and plural of many nouns of this 
class belonging to the third declension. 


Grammar 


THe MIDDLE OR PassIVE VOICE—TO μέσον ἢ παθητικόν 


In the preceding exercises we have met with several 
verbs in the present indicative or subjunctive, the ter- 
minations of which were different from those given in 
the grammatical part of the third lesson. Such termi- 
nations were κρατ-οῦμαι, κρατ-εἴσθε, κάθ-ηµαι, γίν-ονται: 
they belong to verbs in the middle or passive voice. 
The middle voice indicates that the action of the verb 
is exerted by the subject with reference to himself; the 


THE MIDDLE OR PASSIVE VOICE 33 


passive, that the action is exerted by another with ref- 
erence to the subject. Thus, σηκόνω (active) means 1 
raise; σηκόνοµαι (middle), I raise myself, I rise; σηκό- 
νοµαι (passive), 1 am raised (by another person or a 
thing) ;---δράττω (active), I grasp (something); δράττο- 
μαι (middle), 1 grasp (something) for myself, for my 
oWn purpose; δράττοµαι (passive), | am grasped (by 
somebody else). There is no difference in form be- 
tween the middle and passive. Certain verbs have a 
passive or middle form with an active (or neuter) 
meaning, as ἔρχομαι, 1 go. These are called deponent 


ΟΠ verbs. 


The following are the terminations of the present 
indicative and subjunctive passive of λύω, I loosen. ἡ 
The middle of verbs which admit this meaning is, as 
just said, the same in form as the passive. 


PASSIVE 
INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
λύομαι λυόμεθα | λύωμαι δλυώμεθα 
λύεσαι λύεσθε λύησαι δλύησθε 
λύεται λύονται λύηται λύωνται 


In the examples thus far given it will be noticed 
that the accent is thrown as far back as the quantity 
of the final syllable will permit. This is the rule 
throughout the conjugation of the verb, except in the 
perfect participle, in certain moods of the aorist, and 
in the second future passive which is derived from the 
aorist. The apparent exception to this rule in the 


case of contracted verbs (see below) is the natural and 
3 : “ 


94 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


necessary sequence of the contraction and its sign. In 
κτυπάω, for example, the accent falls regularly upon 
the a, and when this vowel is absorbed in the con- 
tracted termination (κτυπάω - κτυπῶ) the accent still 
clings to the same syllable, becoming circumflex in- 
stead of acute. 


CONTRACTED VERBS—Svuyypnpéva ῥήματα 


We have had several verbs (κτυπῶ, κινῶ, κρατῶ, κτλ.) 
in the preceding lessons which ended in ὢ (circumflex — 
accent on the termination). These are examples of 
contracted verbs, the full form of which would end in 
aw or έω. There is also a third class of contracted 
verbs in όω-ῶ, but in the modern usage this contrac- 
tion is generally avoided by the insertion of a ν be- 
tween the stem and the termination, in the present 
and imperfect tenses. “Tworm is an example of 
a verb of this class, the ancient form (only very 
seldom employed at the present day) being ὑψόω- 
ὑψῶ. 

The contraction does not take place in the aorist 
tenses, for in these, as we shall see in Lesson VI., the 
vowel of the stem is separated from that of the ter- 
mination by σ or θ. In these forms the vowel of the 
stem is lengthened, a or ε becoming η (except in a few 
verbs, a list of which will be found in the Appendix), 
and o becoming ». The contraction follows certain 
definite rules which may readily be deduced from 
the following paradigms. The uncontracted forms 
here given are never used, but are shown merely for 
the sake of comparison. 


CONTRACTED VERBS 


ACTIVE 


INDICATIVE 


/ an 
KTUTTAQ@), ὦ 

77 fal 
κτυπάεις, ας 

/ a 
κτυπάει, α 


ΓΑ lal 
KLVE®@, ὦ 

γ a 
KLVEELS, ELS 

lA a 
KLVEEL, EL 


ὑψόω, ὦ 


᾿ὑψόεις, οἷς 


/ A 
ὑψει, οἵ 


κτυπάω, ὦ 

κτυπάῃς, ἂς 
᾿ς A 

κτυπάῃ, ἃ 


κινέω, ὦ 
͵7ὔ “Ὁ 
κινέῃς, ἧς 


΄σ' 


7 
KWEN, ἢ 
/ Cathe 
ὑψόω, ὦ 
ς / Αα 
ύν;όης, οἷς 
ὑψόῃ, οἵ 


ta A 
KTUTTQAOMEV, ὦμεν 

/ nan 
KTUTTQETE, ATE 


/ an 
κτυπάουσι, ὥσι(ν) 


/ lal 
κινεοµεν, OUMEV 

/ an 
KLVEETE, ELTE 


κινέουσι, οῦσι(ν) 


ὑψόομεν, οΌμεν 
ὑψόετε, οὔτε 
ὑψόουσι, οὔὓσι(ν) 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


/ lal 
κτυπάωµεν, ὤμεν 
΄ a 

κτυπάητε, ATE 
4 ἴω 
κτυπάωσι, ὣσι(ν) 


/ lal 
κινέωµεν, ὤμεν 
κινέητε, ῆτε 

/ aA 
κινέωσι, ὣσι(ν) 


- / A 
ὑψόωμεν, ὦμεν 
ς / 
ὑψόητε, WTE 


ὑψόωσι, ὡσι(ν) 


PASSIVE 


INDICATIVE 


κτυπάοµαι, ὤώμαι κτυπαόµεθα, ὠμεθα 


/ [ο] ἴω 
κτυπάεσαι, ἄσαι κτυπάεσθε, ἂσθε 


/ lal 4 lal 
KTUTTGETAL, ATAL ατυπαονται, WVYTAL 


35 


36 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 
7 a / 0 / θ 
κινέομαι, οῦμαι. κινεόμεθα, οὐμεθα. 
Αα / ο 
κινέεσαι, εἴσαι. κινέεσθε, εἴσθε. 
ἴω / an 
KLVEETAL, εἶται. KLVEOVTAL, οὔῦνται. 
/ na ε 7 ΄, 
ὑψόομαι, ovpat. ὑψοόμεθα, οὐμεθα. 
/ rn ς / rn 
ὑψοόεσαι, οὔσαι. ὑψόεσθε, ova be. 
ς / lal [1 / n μ 
ύψεται, OUTAL. ὑψόονται, οὔνται. | 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


A / | 
κτυπάωµαι, ὤμαι. κτυπαώµεθα, ὠμεθα. | 
n / lal 
κτυπάησαι, σαι. κτυπάησθε, ἄσθε. | 
n 7] n 
κτυπάηται, ATAL. κτυπάωνται, ὦνται. 
/ A , / 
κινέωµαι, ὤμαι. κινεώµεθα, ὠμεθα. 
7 an / nr 
κινέησαι, ῆσαι. κινέησθε, Rabe. 
Αα / an 
KLVENTAL, ῆται. κινέωνται, ώνται. 
/ A / 7 
ὑψόωμαι, ὥμαι. ὑψοώμεθα, ὠμεθα. 
/ ἴω / n 
Ψψόησαι, ὥσαι. ὑψόησθε, ὥσθε. 
ς / a ς / an 
ὑψόηται, WTAL. ὑψόωνται, WYTAL. 


_ The conjugation of a contracted verb in ὦ may be 
learned by reference to a dictionary, which usually 
gives the full form; when the contracted form is 
given, the full form (dw, έω, or dw) is added in paren- 
theses. In the case of a passive or deponent verb the 
full form is indicated by the termination, ὤμαι-άομαι, 
and οὔμαι-έομαι or ὀομαι. Verbs in ow are, how- 
ever, now written ovw or sometimes ώνω, hence pas- 
sive όνομαι or ὠνομαι. It should be noted that 
the dictionary form of the Greek verb is the first 
person singular present indicative, and not the infini- 
tive. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE 37 


Grammatical Exercise 


PRESENT INDICATIVE 


Ἔρχομαι εἰς τὸ κάθισµα Kai κάθημαι. 

I go to the chair and sit down. 

” ᾽ \ / \ / 
ἔρχεσαι εἰς τὸ κάθισµα καὶ κάθησαι. 
Ἔρχεται εἰς τὸ κάθισμα καὶ κάθηται. 
᾿Ἠρχόμεθα εἰς τὸ κάθισµα καὶ καθήμεθα. 
Ἔρχεσθε εἰς τὸ κάθισµα καὶ κάθησθε. 
Ἔρχονται εἰς τὸ κάθισμα καὶ κάθηνται. 


Εἰς is pronounced very rapidly and without stress, 
almost as if it were written (as it often is in familiar 
tales and anecdotes) ᾽ς. The o in κάθισµα is pro- 
nounced like 7. The pronunciation of the first sen- 
tence is: érkhome ‘sto kAthizma kye kathime. 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE AND INDICATIVE ACTIVE 


Ὅταν κτυπῶ πρᾶγμά τι, κινῶ τὸν βραχίονά µου. 

When [I strike something I move my arm. 

Ὅταν κτυπᾶς πρᾶγμά τι, κινεῖς τὸν βραχίονά σου. 
“Ὅταν κτυπᾷ πρᾶγμά τι, κινεῖ τὸν βραχίονά του. 

“Ὅται: κτυπῶμεν πρᾶγμά τι, κινοῦμεν τοὺς βραχίονάς μας. 
Ὅταν κτυπᾶτε πρᾶγμά τι, κινεῖτε τοὺς βραχίονάς σας. 
Ὅταν κτυπῶσι πρᾶγμά τι, κινοῦσι τοὺς βραχίονάς των. 


PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE MIDDLE AND INDICATIVE ACTIVE 


Ὅταν κινῶμαι κατ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηματίζω. 
When I move in this way I take ἃ step. 

“ an , > \ \ / / 
Οταν κινῆσαι κατ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηµατίζεις. 

Ὅταν κινῆται κατ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηματίζει. 


98 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


“ , πα αν \ / ΡΥ 
Όταν κινώμεθα κατ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηματίζομεν. 
an Ἂ Ν 4 / 
Ὅταν κινῆσθε κατ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηµατίζετε. 
“ \ \ 
Ὅταν κινῶνται κατ᾽ αὐτὸν τὸν τρόπον, βηματίζουσιν. 


PRESENT INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE 


᾿Αρχίζω νὰ ὁμιλῶ τὴν ἑλληνικήν. 

I am beginning to speak Greek. 
᾿Αρχίζεις νὰ ὁμιλῆς THY ἑλληνικήν. 
᾿Αρχιζει νὰ ὁμιλῇ τὴν ἑλληνικήν. 
᾿Αρχίζομεν νὰ ὁμιλώμεν τὴν ἑλληνικήν. 
᾿Αρχίζετε νὰ ὁμιλῆτε τὴν ἑλληνικήν. 
᾿Αρχίζουσι νὰ ὁμιλώσι τὴν ἑλληνικήν. 


LESSON FIFTH 
ΜΑΘΗΜΑ IIEMIITON 


\ Thought Exercise 


/ \ 
Oa ἀνέλθω τὴν κλίμακα. 
tha aneltho tin glyimaka 


I am going (future) up-stairs. 


Θέτω τὸν δεξιόν µου πόδα εἰς τὴν κατωτάτην βαθμίδα 


theto ton dheksion moo wpodha_ is tin gatotatin vathmidha 
τῆς κλίμακος. 
tis klyimakos 
I put the right my foot on the lowest step of the stair- 
case. 


ιά / \ e / > \ fal a) / 
Ύψόνω τὸν ἑαυτόν µου ἐπὶ τοῦ δεξιοῦ µου ποδός. 
ipsono ton eafton moo ept too dheksioo moo podhos 
I raise the self of me upon the right my foot. 
Στηρίζομαι ἐπὶ Tov ἰδίου ποδός. 
stirizome ept too idhieao podhos 
I support myself upon the same foot. 
᾿Αναβιβάζω τὸν ἄλλον µου πόδα. 
anavivazo ton alon moo podha 
I raise up the other my foot. 
Θέτω τὸν ἄριστερον µου πόδα εἰς τὴν δευτέραν βαθμίδα. 
{λείο ton aristeron moo podha is tin dhefteran vathmidha 
I place the left my foot on the second step. 
ζ / λ « fr bd \ an 3 fa) / 
Ὑψόνω τὸν ἑαυτόν µου ἐπὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ποδός. 
ipsono ton eafton moo epi too aftoo  podhos 
I raise the self of me upon the same foot. 
Κρατοῦμαι ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀριστεροῦ µου ποδός. 
kratoome ept too aristeroo moo podhos 


I support myself upon the left my foot. 


40 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἣν 4 \ \ soe 
ἘἨπαναλαμβάνω ταύτας τὰς κινήσεις μὲ τὸν δεξιὸν καὶ 


epanalanvano taftas tas kyinyisis me ton dheksion kye 
\ / > / 
τὸν ἀριστερόν µου πόδα ἀλληλοδιαδόχως. 
ton aristeron moo podha -  alyilodiiadhokhos 


I repeat these movements with the right and the left 
my foot alternately. 


/ Ν / 
Τώρα ἀνέρχομαι τὴν κλίμακα. 
tora anerkhome tin glyimaka 


Now I am going (continued action) up-stairs. 


\ / \ { 
Τώρα θὰ κατέλθω τὴν κλίμακα. 
tora ἕμα kateltho tin glyimaka 


Now I am going (future) down-stairs. 


\ i - \ / > / 
Κατέρχομαι την κλίμακα, κινγων TOUS πόδας μου ἀντιθέ- 
katerkhome tin glyimaka kyinon  toos podhaz moo andithe- 


Ἃ / 
τως 1) προτερογ. 
ο5 ἃ proteron 


1 am going (continued action) down-stairs, moving the — 
feet my inversely than before. 


The initial κ of κλίμακα, accusative singular of ἡ 
κλίμαξ, the stairs, being preceded immediately by ν, is 
pronounced, in ordinary conversation, as ο: τὴν κλίμακα 
—tin glyimaka; for the same reason, in the second 
sentence, τὴν κατωτάτην βαθμίδα is pronounced tin ga- 
totatin vathmidha; in the same sentence, τῆς κλίμακος 
is pronounced tis klyimakos, since the « is preceded by 
s and not ν. 


Conversation Exercise 


Τί θὰ κάµητε; What are you going to do? 

Oa ἀνέλθω τὴν κλίμακα. Tam going up-stairs. 

Tis θὰ ἀνέλθῃ τὴν κλίμακα; Who is going up-stairs? 

᾿γὼ θὰ ἀνέλθω τὴν κλί- Lam going up stairs. 
μακα. 


CONVERSATION 


, 

Θὰ ἀνέλθῃ τις τὴν κλίμακα; 

Μάλιστα, λέγω ὅτι ἐγὼ θὰ 
ἀνέλθω αὐτήν. 

Θὰ ἀνέλθητε ἢ θὰ κατέλ- 
θητε τὴν κλίμακα; 

Τώρα θὰ ἀνέλθωμεν τὴν 
κλίμακα" ὕστερον θὰ κα- 

/ ) / 
τέλθωμεν αὐτήν. 

ΠΡροχωρεῖτε πρὸς τὴν κλί- 
μακα; 

Ναί, προχωροῦμεν πρὸς τὴν 
κλίμακα. 

Ποῦ θέτετε τὸν δεξιόν σας 
πόδα; 

Θέτω αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν βαθμί. 
δα τῆς κλίμακος. 

Εἰς ποίαν βαθμίδα θέτετε 
τὸν πόδα σας; 

Θέτω τὸν πόδα μου εἰς τὴν 

/ / an 
κατωτάτην βαθµίδα τῆς 
κλίμακος. 

Ὑψόνετε τὸν ἑαυτόν σας 
ἐπὶ τοῦ ποδός σας; 

Ναί, ὑψόνω τὸν ἑαυτόν μου 
ΒΝ a) a) / 
ἐπὶ τοῦ δεξιοῦ µου ποδός. 

Τώρα στηρίζεσθε ἐπὶ τοῦ 
2Ο / / . 
ἰδίου ποδὸς ; 


Μάλιστα, στηρίζομαι ἐπὶ 


τοῦ δεξιοῦ μου σκέλους. 
Δὲν στηρίζεσθε ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρι- 
στεροῦ; 
” , / ἀντ ν 
Οχι, τώρα στηρίζομαι ἐπὶ 


EXERCISE 41 


Will any one go up-stairs ? 

Yes, I say that 7 shall go 
up it (2.6. the stairway). 

Will you go up or down 
the stairs ? 

Now we are going up- 
stairs; later we shall go 
down it (the stairway). 

Do you go toward the 
stairs { 

Yes, we go toward the 
stairs. 

Where do you place your’ 
right foot ? 

I place it on the step of 
the stairway. 

Upon which step do you 
place your foot ? 

I place my foot on the 
lowest step of the stair- 
way. 

Do you raise yourself on 
your foot ? 

Yes, 1 raise myself upon 
my right foot. 

Do you now support your- 
self on the same foot ? 
Yes, [support myself upon 

my right lee. 

Do you not support your- 
self on the left (leg)? 

No, I support myself now 


en - 


42 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


τοῦ δεξιοῦ: ὅταν κάμω 
δεύτερον βῆμα, θὰ στη- 
ριχθῶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀριστεροῦ 
µου σκέλους. 

᾿Αναβιβάζετε τώρα τὸν apt- 
στερόν σας πόδα; 

Nai, ἀναβιβάζω τὸν ἀρι- 
στερὀν. 

Ilod θέτετε αὐτόν; 

Θέτω αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν δευτέ- 
ραν βαθµίδα τῆς κλίµα- 
κος. 

Δὲν εἶναι τώρα ἀμφότεροι 
οἱ πόδες εἰς τὴν πρώτην 
"βαθμίδα; 

Ὄχι, δὲν θέτω τὸν ἀριστε- 
pov µου πόδα εἰς τὴν πρώ- 
την, ἀλλὰ εἰς τὴν δευτέ- 
ραν βαθμίδα. 

ἘἨπὶ ποίου ποδὸς στηρί- 
ζεσθε τώρα; 

Στηρίζομαι ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀριστε- 
ροῦ µου ποδός, σύρω τὸν 
δεξιὸν καὶ θέτω αὐτὸν εἰς 
τὴν τρίτην βαθµίδα τῆς 
κλίμακος. 

᾿Επαναλαμβάνετε ταύτας 

᾿ Tas κινήσεις μὲ ἀμφοτέ- 
ρους τοὺς πόδας ἀλληλο- 
διαδόχως; 

Ναί, ἐπαναλαμβάνω ταύτας 


Ν / \ \ \ 
τὰς κινήσεις μὲ TOV δεξιὸν 


on the right; when I 
make a second step I 
shall support myself 
upon my left leg. 

Do you now draw up your 
left foot ? 

Yes, I draw up the left 
(foot). 

Where do you put it? 

I put it on the second step 
of the stairs. 


Are not now both feet on 
the first step ? 


No, I do not place my left 
foot on the first but on 
the second step. 


Upon which foot do you 
support yourself now ? 

I support myself on my 
left foot, draw up the 
right, and place it on the 
third step of the stairs. © 


Do you repeat these move- 
ments with both feet al- 
ternately ¢ 


Yes, I repeat these move- 
ments with my right 


ΤΗΕ IMPERFECT 49 


καὶ τὸν ἀριστερόν µου 
/ 
πόδα ἀλληλοδιαδόχως. 
Τί κάµνετε, ὅταν κινῆτε 
“ \ / > 
οὕτω τοὺς πόδας σας ἆλ- 
ληλοδιαδόχως; 
᾿᾽Ανέρχομαι τὴν κλίμακα. 
/ > / \ / 

Tis ἀνέρχεται τὴν κλίµα- 
κα; 

Ἢ, \ > / b] / 
γὼ ἀνέρχομαι αὐτήν. 

Δὲν κατέρχεσθε τὴν κλίμα- 
κα; 

an > a κ.) 

Πρῶτον ἀνέρχομαι καὶ ἔπει- 
τα κατέρχοµαι τὴν κλι- 
μακα. 

,ὔ / σα Ζ 
Ti κάμνετε, ὅταν κατέρχη- 
\ / 
σθε τὴν κλίμακα; 

"Οταν κατέρχωµαι τὴν κλί- 
µακα, κινῶ τοὺς πόδας 
µου ἀντιθέτως ἢ πρὀτε- 
ρον. 


and my left foot alter- 
nately. 

What do you do when you 
move thus your feet al- 
ternately ? 

I ascend the stairs. 

Who is going (present) up- 
stairs ¢ 

Ι am. 

Are you not going (pres- 
ent) down-stairs ? 

First I go up and then 1 
go down the stairs. 


What do you do when you 
descend the stairs ? 

When I go down:stairs I 
move my feet inversely 
to the way I did before 
(ὦ. e When going up- 
stairs). 


Grammar 


THE IMPERFECT—6 παρατατικός 


There are four past tenses in Greek—namely, the im- 
perfect, aorist, perfect, and pluperfect. 

The imperfect, which is wanting in the subjunctive 
mood, is formed from the present by changing the ter- 
mination ω of the active into ov, and οµαι of the middle 


or passive into ὀμην. 


The Augment.—The imperfect and the aorist indica- 


44 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


tive take a prefix to the stem in the shape of the letter 
ε, called the augment, ἡ αὔξησις. To verbs with an 
initial consonant this letter is prefixed without change, 
being then called the syllabic augment. Verbs begin- 
ning with p, however, double this letter when taking 
the augment; thus: ρίπτω, to throw; aorist, ἔρριψα. 
(The p is also doubled in compounds: καταρρίπτω, to 
throw down.) In the case of verbs beginning with a 
long vowel (η or w) or the diphthongs ει or ov, there 
isno augment. In verbs beginning with a short vowel 
or with a diphthong other than ει or ου, the initial syl- 
lable is lengthened. This is called the temporal aug- 
ment; it is formed by changing initial a to η, ¢ to η. 
o to w, at to n, av to nu, os to ῳ, ev to nv. Before ἵ or | 
ὕ (short) the ε is absorbed and the vowel is lengthened 
to ¢ or ὕ (long), a change that is imperceptible in 
prose to either the eye or the ear.* Nine verbs θ6- 
ginning with ε form the temporal augment in ει in- 
stead of η. <A list of these will be found in the Ap- 
pendix. 

The search in the dictionary for a verb of which the 
imperfect or aorist indicative only is known will be 
facilitated by remembering that the imperfect or aor- 
ist initial | 


ει corresponds to the present initial ε (in nine verbs) 


or ει 

ev corresponds to the present initial ev 

n 66 ές (6 ές ee a, €, or η 
ές $6 ές ές 66 


n αι 


* Remember that ει, η, ¢, οἱ, υ, and vw, whether long or short, are always 
pronounced like ὁ in.pique—never like ὁ in pit. 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


ΤΗΕ IMPERFECT 45 © 


nu corresponds to the present initial av or ev 
ςς [5 ςς ές 66 


ο" 


6 ςς (( ςς ςς 


ου ου 

υ (( core act ές ές υ 

ω ές ἐς 6 ς( ςς 0 Ora 
ῳ ές εν ος 66 ές οι 


This is a useful table, a little study of which now will 
perhaps save tedious search through the dictionary 
in future reading. 

Verbs compounded with prepositions take the aug- 
ment immediately after the preposition; when the 
latter ends in a vowel this disappears; thus, ava-Baiva, 
I ascend, becomes ἀν- έβανον, | was ascending. The 
final vowel of περὶ or πρὸ is, however, never elided, 
though the ο of πρὸ sometimes forms a contraction 
with the augment e, the tivo being fused into ov. The 
existence Of this contraction is indicated by the coronis 
(0) placed over the v: thus προ-χωρῶ, I advance, be- 
comes προὐχώρουν, 1 was advancing. This contraction 
does not take place in words in which the augment re- 
ceives the accent; thus, προ-λέγω, I predict, becomes 
προέλεγον, 1 was predicting. 

Verbs compounded with words or particles other 
than prepositions take the augment at the beginning 
of the word ; thus, τοποθετῶ, I place, becomes ἐτοποθέ- 
τουν, | was placing. An exception to this rule exists 
in the case of verbs compounded with δὺς or ed when 
this prefix is followed immediately by a short vowel; 
thus, εὐαρεστῶ, I please, becomes εὐηρέστουν, I was 
pleasing. When, however, a long vowel or a conso- 
nant follows the prefix, the augment is placed at the 


46 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


beginning of the verb; εὐλογῶ, I bless, becomes ηὐλό- 
γουν, 1 was blessing.* 

In the vernacular the augment is sometimes placed 
before the preposition instead of after it, e.g. the im- 
perfect of περι- πατῶ, I walk, may be ἐπεριπάτουν or 
περιεπάτουν. In the vernacular also the augment is 
usually omitted in all verbs beginning with a vowel 
and in those of more than two syllables. 

Note that many of the examples above given are of 
verbs in éw-o, the full termination of the imperfect, 
cov, therefore being contracted into ουν. 


IMPERFECT 
ACTIVE MIDDLE or PASSIVE 
7 / 
ἔλυον ἐλύομεν ἐλυόμην ἐλυόμεθα 
7] 7 ͵7 
ἔλυες ἐλύετε ἐλύεσο ἐλύεσθε 
7 ,ἤ 
ἔλυε ἔλυον ἐλύετο ἐλύοντο 
93 7 3 an 3 / 3 / 
ἐκτύπων ἐκτυπῶμεν ἐκτυπώμην ἐκτυπώμεθα 
ἐκτύπας ἐκτυπᾶτε ἐκτυπᾶσο  ἐκτυπᾶσθε 
/ ee A nn 

ἐκτύπα ἐκτύπων ἐκτυπᾶτο ἐκτυπῶντο 
3 / » lal 5 / 4 / 
ἐκίνουν  ἐκινοῦμεν ἐκινούμην  ἐκινούμεθα 
ἐκίνεις ἐκινεῖτε ἐκινεῖσο ἐκινεῖσθε 

/ / aA lal 
ἐκίνει ἐκίνουν ἐκινεῖτο ἐκινοῦντο 
ἢ an ¥ os 
ὕψουν ὑψοῦμεν ὑψούμην ὑψούμεθα 
ὕψους ὑψοῦτε ὑψοῦσο ὑψοῦσθε 
A © δ lal 
ὕψου ὕψουν ὑψοῦτο ὕψουντο 


* Ἑὐρίσκω, I find, takes no augment, the imperfect being εὕρισκον. 
εὖ and words compounded with it have the 


Note the rough breathing ; 
smooth breathing. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 47 


As already stated, the verbs in όω-ῶ, in the modern 
language, insert a v before the termination (όνω or dra), 
and are then conjugated as verbs with consonantal 
stem. It is only occasionally in the elevated literary 
style that they suffer a contraction in the present and 
imperfect tenses. 


Grammatical Exercise 


IMPERFECT 


wv \ / \ 3 / Ν tal Ξ 

Ελυον τὰ σανδάλια μου καὶ ἐκίνουν τὰς χεῖράς μου. 

I was untying my shoes and was moving my hands. 
” 4, / "A Nie Se \ ay ard 

Ελυες τὰ σανδάλιά σου καὶ ἐκίνεις τὰς χεῖράς σου. 

" \ / / ἜΝ / \ Ὁ / 

ἔλυε τὰ σανδάλιά του καὶ ἐκίνει τὰς χεῖράς Tov. 

> $ \ ΄ , ιν ο \ A / 
Ελύομεν τὰ σανδάλιά pas Kal ἐκινοῦμεν τὰς χεῖράς µας. 
. 7 \ / , \ 3 a \ an / 
Ελύετε τὰ σανδάλιά σας καὶ ἐκινεῖτε τὰς χεῖράς σας. 
” x / / ΡΥ 4 \ Ph 

Envoy τὰ σανδάλιά των καὶ ἐκίνουν τὰς χεῖράς των. 


Κατηρχόμην τὴν Κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτύπων τὴν βαθμίδα μὲ 
τὴν πτέρναν µου. 

I was going down the stairs and was striking the step 
with my heel. 

Κατήρχεσο τὴν κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτύπας τὴν βαθμίδα μὲ τὴν 
πτέρναν σου. 

Κατήρχετο τὴν κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτύπα τὴν βαθμίδα μὲ τὴν 
πτέρναν του. 

δ μεθα τὴν κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτυπῶμεν τὴν βαθμίδα 
μὲ τὰς πτέρνας μας. 

ἰξοσήρχεσθε τὴν κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτυπᾶτε τὴν βαθμίδα μὲ 
τὰς πτέρνας σας. ͵ 

Κατήρχοντο τὴν κλίμακα καὶ ἐκτύπων τὴν βαθμίδα μὲ 


\ / 
τας TTEPVAS τωγ. 
9 


LESSON SIXTH 


MAOHMA EKTON 


Thought Exercise 


Θὰ κάμω περίπατον. 
tha kamo pertipaton 
I am going to take a walk. 
Πρέπει πρῶτον νὰ φορέσω τὰ χειρόκτιά µου. 
prept proton na  foreso ta chiroktia moo 
It is necessary first that I put on the gloves my. 
Δαμβάνω τὸ ἀριστερόν µου χειρόκτιον εἰς τὴν δεξιάν µου 
lanvano to aristeron moo chiroktion is tin dheksian moo 
χεῖρα. 
chira 
I take the left my glove in the right my hand. 


7 \ 7 na » ἴω 
Kicayo TOUS δακτύλους της ἀριστερᾶς. 
isagho toos dhaktiloos tis aristeras 


I introduce the fingers of the left (hand). 


Θέτω τοὺς δακτύλους τοῦ χειροκτίου εἰς τὰ δάκτυλα τῆς 


theto toos dhaktiloos too chiroktioo as ta dhaktila tis 
χειρός µου. 
chiroz 1100 

I put the fingers of the glove on the fingers of the 
hand my. 

M7 / Φ \ \ 3 / \ "Ὶ 9 
Έπειτα θέτω καὶ τὸν ἀντίχειρα καὶ κομβὄνω τὸ χει- 
* epita theto kye ton  andichira — kye konvono to chi- 
ρόκτιον ἐπὶ τοῦ καρποῦ. 
roktion ept too karpoo 


Then I put on also the thumb and I putea the ΕΘ 


at the wrist. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 49 


Λαμβάνω τὸ δεξιὸν χειρόκτιον εἰς τὴν ἀριστεράν µου καὶ 
lanvano to dheksion chiroktion TSE ο aristeran moo  kye 
φορῶ αὐτὸ κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον. 
foro afto kata ton  afton tropon 
I take the right glove in the left (hand) my and 1 put 
τ it on after the same manner. 
Τώρα ἔχω φορέσει τὰ χειρὀκτιά µου καὶ λαμβάνω τὸν 
tora ekho forest ta chiroktia πιοο kye lanvano tom 
an / \ \ / 
πῖλόν µου καὶ τὸ ραβδίον. 
bilon moo kye to vravdhion 
Now I have put on the gloves my and 1 take the hat 
my and the cane. 
᾿᾽Ανοίγω τὴν θύραν, φορῶ τὸν πῖλόν µου καὶ ἐξέρχομαι 
anyigho tin thiran foro tom bilon moo kye ekserkhome 


κλείων τὴν θύραν. 
klyion ει thiran’ 


I open the door, I put on the hat my, and | go out, 
closing the door. 


ιά / / ’ / / 
Η θύρα τρύζει ὀλίγον, ὅταν στρέφηται. 
i thira trizt olyigion otan strefite 


The door creaks a little when it turns. 
Πρέπει νὰ ἐνθυμηθῶ va ἀλείψω δι ἐλαίου τοὺς στρόφιγ- 


prept na enthimitho na  alyipso dhieleoo toos strofing- 
Ὁ j > / 
yas, ὅταν ἐπιστρέψω. 
gas otan epistrepso 


It is necessary that I remember that I anoint with 
oil the hinges when 1 return. 


Conversation Exercise 


Hereafter in the Conversation Exercises the questions only will, as 
arule, be given, and the student is expected to form the replies him- 
self. Read the question first aloud and then give the answer, which 
will be very easy if the preceding Thought Exercise have been care- 
fully learned. If two are studying together, let one ask the question 
and the other repeat the question, without looking at the book, and 


then give the answer. After the exercise has been gone through 
4 ᾿ 


50 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


with in this way, it isa good plan to copy the questions on paper 
and then write the answers to them. 


“ \ / / / | ee \ / 
Οταν θὰ κάµητε περίπατον, τί πρέπει νὰ φορέσητε; 
Τί λαμβάνετε εἰς τὴν δεξιάν σας χεῖρα; Εἰς τί λαμβά- 
νετε τὸ ἀριστερόν σας χειρόκτιον; Τοὺς δακτύλους ποί- 
\ 3 / / / 3 \ / Qn / 
ας χειρὸς εἰσάγετε; Τί θέτετε εἰς τὰ δάκτυλα τῆς χειρός 
σας; Ποῦ θέτετε τοὺς δακτύλους τοῦ χειροκτίου σας; 
Εἰς τὰ δάκτυλα ποίας χειρὸς θέτετε τοὺς δακτύλους τοῦ 


3 A / \ / / » / 
ἀριστεροῦ σας χειροκτίου; Καὶ τί θέτετε ἔπειτα; Θέτω: 


καὶ τον ἀντίχειρ. Ti κάµνετ τώρα; Ποῦ κομβό- 
νετε αὐτό; Τί κάµνετε κατόπιν; λαμβάνω τὸ ἄλλο" 

/ 3 Ν yi a “ » 7 \ 
χειρόκτιον εἰς THY ἄλλην χεῖρα. "Όταν ἔχητε φορέσει τὰ 
χειρὀκτιά σας, τί πρέπει νὰ λάβητε; "Όταν ἀνοίγητε 
τὴν θύραν, ἐξέρχεσθε; "Όταν ἐξέρχησθε, κλείετε τὴν θύ- 
ραν; Τί τρύζει;, Τρύξει αὐτὴ πολύ; ὄχι, δὲν τρύζει 


πολὺ, ἀλλὰ τρύζει ὀλίγον. Θὰ ἐνθυμηθῆτε νὰ ἀλείψητε 


ὃ ’ 3 / \ θ / ο > / / / \ 
ι ἐλαίου THY θύραν, ὅταν ἐπιστρέψητε; Τί πρέπει νὰ 
7 3 ὦ / ε / , \ \ > / 
κάμνωσιν, ὅταν τρύζῃ ἡ θύρα; πρέπει νὰ τὴν ἀλείψωσι 
δι ἐλαίου. 
1 After that. * Other. 3 Τί πρέπει νὰ κάµνωσιν; what is to be done 
(what is it necessary that they do)? The Greeks, like the English, often 


employ the third person plural in a general sense, as λέγουσιν 6ri—they — 
say that. The ν is here added because the following word begins with a 


vowel. 


Grammar 


THE AORIST—6 ἀόριστος 


The aorist and the imperfect are the past tenses in 
most frequent use; they both express a past action, 
yet differ essentially in meaning. The imperfect ex- 
presses an action that was performed repeatedly or 


~ 


THE AORIST 51 


habitually in the past, while the aorist refers to an 
action that was performed but once; thus: ἔγραφον 
(imperfect), ὅταν εἰσῆλθε (aorist), I was writing when 
he entered. 

Modern Greek retains as a rule but one of the two 
aorists of the ancient language, and this usually the 
first. A few verbs in common use, however, have only 
the second aorist. 

The first aorist indicative is formed from the present 
by prefixing the augment and changing the termina- 
tion ὦ of the active into σα and οµαι of the passive or 
middle into θην. In the case of the contracted verbs 
the a or ε of the stem is lengthened to η. In a few 
verbs of this class, however, no vowel change takes 
place (see Appendix). An instance of this occurs in 
the Thought Exercise of the present lesson, in πρέπει 
νὰ φορέσω, | must put on, from φορῶ (έω). In the case 
of verbs in όνω or ώνω, Which in the ancient language 
have the form of a contracted verb in ὣ-όω, the ο is 
lengthened to (or the ω of the present is retained), 
and the ν is dropped. 

The augment is found only in the indicative. In the 
passive the termination takes the circumflex accent, 
forming an exception to the general rule that the ac- 
cent of the verb is thrown as far back as the quantity 
of the final syllable will permit. Another exception to 
this rule is that, in compound words, the accent can 
never fall back beyond the augment or, in case there 
is none, beyond where it would naturally be; thus: 
εἰσάγω, 1 introduce, becomes in the imperfect εἰσῆγον, 
and not εἴσηγον. 


© 
w 


MODERN GREEK 


MASTERY 


ACTIVE 

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE — 
ἔλυσα ἐλύσαμεν λύσω λύσωμεν 
ἔλυσας ἐλύσατε λύσῃς λύσητε 
ἔλυσε ἔλυσαν λύσῃ λύσωσι(ν) 
ἐκτύπησα  ἐκτυπήσαμεν κτυπήσω κτυπήσωµεν 

if 
ἐκτύπησας ἐκτυπήσατε κτυπήσῃς κτυπήσητε 
ἐκτύπησε  ἐκτύπησαν κτυπήσῃ κτυπήσωσι(ν) 
ἐκίνησα ἐκινήσαμεν κινήσω κινήσωµεν 
/ 
ἐκίνησας ἐκινήσατε κινήσῃης κινήσητε 
ἐκίνησε ἐκίνησαν κινήσῃ κινήσωσι(ν) 
; | 
ὕψωσα ὑψώσαμεν ὑψώσω  ὑψώσωμεν 
ὕψωσας ὑψώσατε ὑψώσης ὑψώσητε 
ὕψωσε ὕψωσαν ὑψώσῃ ὑψώσωσι(ν) 
PASSIVE OR MIDDLE 

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 
ἐλύθην ἐλύθημεν λυθῶ λυθῶμεν 
ἐλύθης ἐλύθητε λυθῆς λυθῆτε 
ἐλύθη ἐλύθησαν λυθή λυθῶσι(ν) 
> / > ή lal “- 
ἐκτυπήθην ἐκτυπήθημεν κτυπηθῶ κτυπηθῶμεν 
ἐκτυπήθης ἐκτυπήθητε κτυπηθῆς κτυπηθῆτε 
> / ῴ / 5 a lal 
ἐκτυπήθη  ἐκτυπήθησαν κτυπηθῇ κτυπηθῶσι(ν) 
> / > / lal lal 
ἐκινήθην ἐκινήθημεν κινηθῶ κινηθῶμεν 
> / > / A A 
ἐκινήθης ἐκινήθητε κινηθῆς κινηθῆτε 
> / > 4 » lal 
ἐκινήθη ἐκινήθησαν κινηθῇ κινηθῶσι(ν) 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 53 


ὑψώθην ὑψώθημεν ὑψωθῶ ὑψωθῶμεν 
ὑψώθης ὑψώθητε ὑψωθῆς ὑψωθῆτε 
ὑψώθη ὑψώθησαν ὑψωθῇ ὑψωθῶσι(ν) 


Grammatieal Exercise 


Aorist INDICATIVE 


” 37 \ Ν > / \ \ / 

Έλυσα τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτύπησα μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 

I unhitched the horse and struck him with the whip. 
Ἔλλυσας τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτύπησας μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 

Ww at \ ἌΣ Ν᾽ / \ \ / 

ἔλυσε τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτύπησε μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 

᾽ / κ. 3 \ a ae / \ \ / 
Ἠλύσαμεν τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτυπήσαμεν μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 
᾿Ελύσατε τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτυπήσατε μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 
Ἔλλυσαν τὸ ἄλογον καὶ τὸ ἐκτύπησαν μὲ τὴν μάστιγα. 


Συνεκινήθην ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως τοῦ θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλφης 
μου. | 

I was agitated by the news of the death of my 
(female) cousin. 

Συνεκινήθης ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως τοῦ θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλφης 
σου. 

Συνεκινήθη ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως τοῦ θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλφης 
του. 

᾿Ῥυνεκινήθηµεν ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως τοῦ θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλ- 
φης μας. 

Συνεκινήθητε ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως τοῦ θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλφης 
σας. 

Συνεκινήθησαν ἐκ τῆς εἰδήσεως ‘rod θανάτου τῆς ἐξαδέλ. 
φης των. 


Συνεκινήθην is the aorist of the middle verb, συγκι- 
νοῦμαι, 1 am touched, moved, agitated. When σύν or 


σ4 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἐν is joined to a verb beginning with y, κ, or y, the ν 
is changed toy. Similarly before 8, 7, or ¢ it becomes 
µ: before ἃ, µ, or p, it becomes λ, µ, or p respectively ; 
before o it disappears. When the preposition and the 
main part of the verb are separated by the augment, 
the ν reappears. 


LESSON SEVENTH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ EBAOMON 
: Thought Exercise 
Ποίαν ὁδὸν θὰ λάβω ; 


pian odhon tha  lavo 


Which way shall I take ? 
Θέλω ὑπάγει εἰς τὴν ἄνω πόλιν. 
thelo tpayt ts tin απο polyin 
I will go to the up-town. 
Διέρχομαι εἰς τὸ ἀπέναντι τῆς ὁδοῦ. 
dhierkhome ἐξ to apenandi tis odhoo 
I cross to the opposite (side) of the street. 
Στρέφω τὴν γωνίαν πρὸς τὰ δεξιά. 
strefo tin ghonyian pros ta dheksia 
I turn the corner toward the right. 
Περιμένω va διέλθῃ ἡ ἅμαξα. 
perimeno na dhieltht %t amaksa 


I wait that may go by the wagon. 
Σταματῶ va παρατηρήσω τὰ ποδήλατα. 


stamato πα paratiriso ta podhilata 
I stop that I may watch the bicycles. 
Πρέπει va ἐπιστρέψω εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν (τὸ σπίτι) διότι 
prept na epistrepso ts tin tkyian to spitt dhioti 
’ / \ / 
ἀρχίζει va βρέχῃ. 
archizi πὰ vyrechi 


It is necessary that I return to the house for it begins 
that it rains. 


᾿Ανοίγω τὸ ἀλεξιβρόχιόν µου. 


anyigho to aleksivrochion moo 


I open the umbrella my. 


56 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


/ λος δν ὅτ / 
Ἠλησμόνησα τὰ ἐλάστικά µου. 
elyizmonyisa ta elastika moo 


I have forgotten the rubbers my. 


Oa BpéEw τοὺς πόδας µου (τὰ πὀδιά µου). 
tha vrekso toos podhaz moo ta podhya moo 


I shall wet the feet my. 


\ Vs / σα Ν 
᾿Αδιάφορον: θὰ ἀλλάξω τὰ σανδάλιά μου, ὅταν θὰ ἐπι- 
adhiaforon tha alakso ta sandhalyia moo otan tha epi- 


στρέψω εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν. 
strepso 8 tin ikyian 
Never mind; I will change the shoes my when I shall 
return τ the house. 


id \  ἶ 7 
Πιστεύω δὲν θὰ κρυώσω. 
pistevo dhen tha krioso 


I trust I shall not take cold. 


The words in brackets are those usually employed in 
the vernacular. 


Conversation Exercise 


ς 3 
Ποίαν ὁδὸν θὰ λάβωμεν ; ἂς ὑπάγωμεν' εἰς τὴν ἄνω 
/ , > \ 3 / “ ς lal / 
πόλιν. Διέρχεσθε εἰς τὸ ἀπέναντι τῆς ὁδοῦ; Στρέ- 
dete τὴν γωνίαν πρὸς τὰ ἀριστερά; ὄχι, δὲν στρέφω τὴν 
/ \ \ > ζω 2 Ν \ Ν / 74 
γωνίαν πρὸς τὰ ἀριστερά, ἀλλὰ πρὸς τὰ δεξιά. Διατί 


/ \ / an "ἢ 3 
περιμένετε; Kat διατί σταματᾶτε ἤδη; 


Δύνασθε νὰ 
διευθύνητε ποδήλατον; Μάλιστα, ἔμαθα νὰ διευθύνω 
τὸ παρελθὸν ἔτος καὶ εὐχαριστοῦμαι πολὺ δι’ αὐτό." 
᾿Αρχίζει νὰ βρέχη: Δοιπὸν πρέπει" νὰ ἐπιστρέψητε 
εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν; ᾿Ανοίγετε τὸ ἀλεξιβρόχιόν σας; ᾿Ελη- 
σμονήσατε κἄτι τι; Δὲν θὰ βρέξητε τοὺς πόδας σας; 
Θὰ ἀλλάξητε τὰ σανδάλιά σας, ὅταν θὰ ἐπιστρέψητε 
εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν; Νομίζετε ὅτι θὰ κρυώσητε;" Δὲν 
ἠξεύρω, ἀλλὰ δὲν πιστεύω." Kpvovete εὐκόλως ;" Μά- 


READING EXERCISE 57 


| 
] / / / / A \ 
Mota, κρυόνω τόσον εὐκόλως ὥστε φοβοῦμαι μὴ ἀσθε- 


| / 11 
νήσω. 


1Τιεί us go, 2 Why. 3 Now. 4 Can you ride a bicycle 2 ΤῪ 85, 
ΟΤ learned to ride last year, and I enjoy it greatly. °Then must you? 
_7Have you forgotten anything ὃ ® Do you think you will take cold 2 
91 don’t know, but I hope not. 10 Hasily. 11 Yes, I take cold so easily 
| that I fear lest I become sick. Μη is the negative particle used instead of 


_ δέν with the subjunctive (usually), the imperative, and participles. 


Reading Exercise 


Hereafter each lesson will include a short selection for reading, 
with the aim chiefly of giving to the student a g od working vocabu- 
lary. In order to acquire this vocabulary it is not sufficient to learn 
to translate the selection so that the English equivalent can be given 
when the Greek is before the eyes. The student must be able to 
give the Greek equivalent of the English sentence, or rather the 
Greek expression of the idea contained in the English sentence—a 
very different matter! The aim of the present method is to teach 
the student to associate his ¢deas with the Greek expression of them, 
and the reverse ; not to associate a word or a sentence of one language 
with the corresponding word or sentence in the other. Indeed, there 

are few words in any language which find their exact equivalent in 

| the words of another idiom. Of course, ina method for self-instruc- 
tion, as this aims primarily to be, it is necessary to go from the 
known to the unknown, to explain the meaning of the Greek sen- 
tence in English words ; but as soon as this meaning is grasped, the 
student must attach it to the Greek phrase and then dismiss the Eng- 
lish from his mind. 

In using this exercise for the purpose of enlarging his vocabulary, 
the student should read and re-read the selection until he can under- 
stand it perfectly without referring to, or even thinking of, the Eng- 
lish version. After this, he should read each sentence over once 
or twice, and immediately repeat it while looking away from the 
book. The entire selection may be learned by heart if desired (it 
will be found helpful), but this is not essential ; all that is insisted 
upon is that each independent sentence be repeated (not simply 
read from the printed page) with full appreciation of its mean- 
ing, and that it be repeated aloud. When the whole has been 


58 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


gone through with in this way, the student should exercise himself 
upon it by forming questions and answering them, in Greek, using 
the material furnished by the selection just read. As an example of 
how this is to be done, a ‘* Vocabulary Exercise” is appended to 
this section, but in subsequent lessons the student must construct it 
for himself. It is not necessary to do this in writing, but whether 
written or not it must always be recited viva voce. Nothing helps 
more to the acquisition of a language than vocal practice. Whenever 
circumstances permit, αὐ the exercises should be read and recited 
aloud, for this will give a familiarity with the language that no amount 
of mental reading will afford. A language cannot be learned unless it 
be heard, and if you cannot hear others speak it you must hear your- 
self, even if your pronunciation be not that of the polished Athenian. 


It is better to speak broken Greek than not to understand it at all. 


ς / \ ς 7 
Η κυρία καὶ ἡ τίγρις. 
Κυρία τις περιεπάτει 
ποτὲ μόνη εἰς τόπον ὅπου 
ς if / «Δ \ 
εὑρίσκοντο τίγρεις. “Ἐν δὲ 
τῶν τρομερῶν τούτων ζώων 
ἐμφανισθὲν αἰφνηδίως ἤρ- 
\ DX: / x 3 
χισε νὰ πλησιάζῃ πρὸς av- 
\ i ὦ - 1 / \ 
τὴν. Τί ἐδύνατο ἐκείνη va 
πράξῃ πρὸς ὑπεράσπισίν 
TNS ; 
5. ,) 7 \ nan 
ἐπενόησε μέθοδον, διὰ τῆς 


Eis μίαν στιγμὴν 


ὁποίας ἤθελε δυνηθῆ ἴσως 
Ν 3 / κ / 

νὰ ἀποδιώξη τὴν τίγριν. 
πρὸς 
τὴν τίγριν τὸ ἀλεξήλιον, τὸ 


᾿Ανοίγει αἰφνηδίως 
ε ΠῚ > / > \ la) 
ὁποῖον ἐκράτει εἰς τὴν χεῖ- 
ρά της, καὶ τὸ θηρίον τρο- 
μµάξαν ἐκ τούτου ἀμέσως 
ΕῚ 7 Kao / 
ἐστράφη καὶ ἔφυγε δροµαί- 
ως εἰς τὰ δάση. ' 


The Lady and the Tiger. 


. A lady was once walk- 
ing alone in a place where 
tigers were found. One of 
these terrible animals ap- 
pearing suddenly began to 
draw near to her. What 
could she do for her de- 
fense? In a moment she 
thought of a plan by means 
of which she might per- 
haps be able to drive away 
the tiger. She opens sud- 
denly in the face of the 
tiger the parasol, which she 
was holding in her hand, 
and the beast, taking fright 
at this, immediately turned 
about and fled incontinent- 
ly into the woods. 


VOCABULARY EXERCISE 59 


VERBS 


περιεπάτει, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. περιπατῶ (éw), to 
walk, promenade. 

εὑρίσκοντο, 3d pers. plur. imp. ind. εὑρίσκομαι, to be 
found, exist. 

ἐμφανισθέν, aor. part. neut. ἐμφανίζομαι, to appear. 

ἤρχισε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. apyifw, to begin. 

πλησιάζῃ, 3d pers. sing. pres. subj. πλησιάζω, to approach. 

ἐδύνατο," 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

πράξη 3d pers. sing. aor. subj. πράττω, to do. 

ἐπενόησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐπινοῶ (έω). to think 
of, devise. 

ἤθελε δυνηθῆ, 3d pers. sing. aor. condit. δύναμαι, to be 
able. 

ἀποδιώξη, 3d pers. sing. pres. subj. ἀποδιώκω, to drive 
away. 

ἀνοίγει, 8d pers. sing. pres. ind. ἀνοίγω, to open. 

ἐκράτει, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. κρατώ (éw), to hold, keep. 

τροµάξαν, aor. part. neut. τροµάζω, to fear, be afraid. 

ἐστράφη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. mid. στρέφοµαι, to turn 
(one’s self). 

ἔφυγε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. φεύγω, to flee. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


The following is given as an example of an exercise by means of 
which the student may fix in his memory the meaning of the words 
occurring in the preceding selection and thereby enlarge his vocabu- 
lary. The exercise will not be written out in the subsequent lessons, 


* More commonly written ἠδύνατο, having a double augment, first the 
syllabic augment, ε, and then this lengthened with the temporal augment 


to η. 


00 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


for it is by formulating the questions and answers himself that the 
student will most easily and quickly learn the words. This is a very 
useful exercise, as a little practice in it will demonstrate, and it 
should be faithfully performed. Other words with which the stu- 
dent is already familiar may be introduced in order to amplify and 
vary the sentences. 


Ποῦ περιεπάτει κυρία Tis; κυρία τις περιεπάτει εἰς 
- , 
τόπον, ὅπου εὑρίσκοντο τίγρεις. Τίς περιεπάτει εἰς τόπον, 
ὅπου εὑρίσκοντο τίγρεις ; κυρία τις περιεπάτει εἰς τόπον, 
ὅπου εὑρίσκοντο τίγρεις. Περιεπάτει μόνη ἡ κυρία; μά- 
/ α 
λιστα, περιεπάτει μόνη. ἸΠοῦ εὑρίσκοντο τίγρεις ; τί- 
€ lad 
γρεις εὑρίσκοντο εἰς τόπον εἰς τὸν ὁποῖον περιεπάτει ποτὲ 
/ / by \ / \ > \ ἃ 

κυρία τις μόνη. "ἤρχισε νὰ πλησιάζῃ πρὸς αὐτὴν ev 
τῶν τρομερῶν τούτων ζώων ; val, ἕν τῶν τρομερῶν τούτων 

/ > \ 2 / ef Ν / \ 
ζώων ἐμφανισθὲν αἰφνηδίως ἤρχισε va πλησιάζη πρὸς 

>’ 4 / 5 / > / \ 7 \ iC / / 
αὐτήν. Τί ἠδύνατο ἐκείνη νὰ πράξη πρὸς ὑπεράσπισίν 

an e “ 
της; ἐπενόησε μέθοδον, διὰ τῆς ὁποίας ἤθελε δυνηθῆ νὰ 
ἀποδιώξῃ τὴν τίγριν. Τί κάμνει; (what does she do?) 
» / \ \ / \ 2 7 / >? , AS ph 
ἀνοίγει προς τὴν τίγριν τὸ ἀλεξήλιον της». ᾿Ιὕκρατει ἡ 
/ \ > / 2 \ ἴω / / ς / 

κυρία τὸ ἀλεξήλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρά της; μάλιστα, ἡ κυρία 
3 / \ > ἧς 2 a “ , 9 / \ 
ἐκράτει TO ἀλεξήλιον εἰς τὴν χεῖρά της». Kaotpadn τὸ 
θηρίον; ναί, τὸ θηρίον τροµάξαν ἐκ τούτου ἐστράφη. 
5 / \ / > / \ / > / » / 
Βιστράφη τὸ θηρίον ἀμέσως ; τὸ θηρίον ἐστράφη ἀμέσως. 
Ἔφυγε τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὰ δάση; τὸ θηρίον ἔφυγε εἰς τὰ 
ὃ / ἬΝ ὃ / ς » > \ ὃ / / 

άση. φυγε δρομαίως ἡ τίγρις εἰς τὰ δάση; μάλιστα, 
(4 / > / 3 / ν.δ / 2 Ν / 
ἡ τίγρις ἀμέσως ἐστράφη καὶ ἔφυγε δρομαίως εἰς τὰ δάση. 


Grammar 


THE FUTURE—6 μέλλων 


There are three futures in Modern Greek: the first, 
or imperfect, expressing a continued or habitual action; 


μι νο ποιο ασ ee μνρΕΥι, 


THE FUTURE 61 


the second, or aorist, expressing an action that is to be 
performed but once; and the perfect, expressing a fut- 
ure action contingent upon another action. The an- 
cient form of the future is seldom used at the present 
day. The first (or imperfect) future is formed by θὰ 
with the present subjunctive or θέλω with the present 
infinitive; the second (or aorist) future is formed by 
θὰ with the aorist subjunctive, or θέλω with the aorist 
infinitive. The sign of the future is θὰ or θέλω, and 
according as one or the other is used we have two forms 
each of the first and second future. The second form 
(θέλω, I wish, I will, with the infinitive) corresponds ex- 
actly in construction to the English future; thus, θέλει 
λύει, he will loosen (frequently), and θέλει λύσει, he will 
loosen (once). This form is, however, regarded as less 
elegant and is less frequently employed than the other— 
θὰ followed by the subjunctive present or aorist. The 
particle θὰ is acontraction οἱ θέλω νὰ, 1 willthat; θὰ λύω 
therefore means 1 will that I may loosen (habitually) ; 
θὰ λύσω 1 will that I may loosen (once). It is because of 
this (concealed) va that the subjunctive present or aorist 
isemployed after θά. The perfect future is formed of the 
future of ἔχω (θὰ ἔχω) with the aorist infinitive; thus θὰ 
ἔχω λύσει, 1 shall have loosened, the construction being 
exactly like the English. 


First (IMPERFECT) FUTURE 


ACTIVE 
First Form 
θὰ λύω θὰ λύωμεν 
θὰ λύης θὰ λύητε 


θὰ λύη θὰ λύωσι(ν) 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


θὰ κτυπῶ 
θὰ κτυπᾶς 


θὰ κτυπᾷ 


θὰ KWo 
θὰ κινῆς 
θὰ κινῇ 


θὰ ve 
θὰ ὑψοῖς 
θὰ ὑψοῖ 


θέλω λύει 
θέλεις λύει 
θέλει λύει 


7 a 
θέλω κτυπᾶ 

7 rn 
θέλεις κτυπᾶ 


/ ο 
θέλει κτυπᾶ 


θέλω κινεῖ 
θέλεις κινεῖ 
θέλει κινεῖ 


θέλω ὑψοῖ 
θέλεις ὑψοῖ 
θέλει ὑψοῖ 


θὰ λύωμαι 
θὰ λύησαι 
θὰ λύηται 


θὰ κτυπώμεν 
θὰ κτυπᾶτε 
θὰ κτυπώσι(ν) 


θὰ κινῶμεν 
θὰ κινῆτε 
θὰ κινώσι(ν) 


θὰ ὑψώμεν 
θα ὑψῶτε 
θὰ ὑψάσι(ν) 


Second Form 


θέλομεν λύει 
θέλετε λύει. 


θέλουσι λύει ~ 


7 lal 
θέλομεν κτυπᾶ 
θέλετε κτυπᾶ 
θέλουσι κτυπᾶ 


7 an 
θέλομεν κινεῖ 
/ -“ 

θέλετε κινεῖ 
/ an 
θέλουσι κινεῖ 


θέλομεν ὑψοῖ 
θέλετε ὑψοῖ 
θέλουσιν ὑψοῖ 


PASSIVE 


First Form 


θὰ λυώμεθα 
θὰ λύησθε 
θα λύωνται 


THE FUTURE 63 


Oa κτυπῶμαι θὰ κτυπώµεθα 
θὰ κτυπᾶσαι θὰ κτυπᾶσθε 
θὰ κτυπᾶται θὰ κτυπῶνται 
θὰ κινῶμαι ἃ κινώµεθα 
θὰ κινῆσαι ἃ κινῆσθε 
Oa κινῆται θὰ κινῶνται 

al 

: θα ὑψῶμαι θὰ ὑψώμεθα 
θὰ ὑψῶσαι θὰ ὑψῶσθε 
θὰ ὑψῶται θὰ ὑψῶνται 


Second Form 


θέλω λύεσθαι θέλομεν λύεσθαι 
θέλεις λύεσθαι θέλετε λύεσθαι 
θέλει λύεσθαι θέλουσι λύεσθαι 
θέλω κτυπᾶσθαι θέλομεν κτυπᾶσθαι 
θέλεις κτυπᾶσθαι θέλετε κτυπᾶσθαι 
θέλει κτυπᾶσθαι θέλουσι κτυπᾶσθαι 
θέλω κινεῖσθαι θέλομεν κινεῖσθαι 
θέλεις κινεῖσθαι θέλετε κινεῖσθαι 
θέλει κινεῖσθαι θέλουσι κινεῖσθαι 
θέλω ὑψοῦσθαι θέλομεν ὑψοῦσθαι 
θέλεις ὑψοῦσθαι θέλετε ὑψοῦσθαι 
θέλει ὑψοῦσθαι θέλουσιν ὑψοῦσθα: 


SECOND (AORIST) FUTURE 
ACTIVE 
First Form 
θὰ λύσω θὰ λύσωμεν 
θὰ λύσης θὰ λύσητε 
θὰ λύση θὰ λύσωσι(ν) 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἃ κτυπήσω θὰ κτυπήσωμεν 
ἃ κτυπήσης θὰ κτυπήσητε 
ἃ κτυπήσῃ θὰ κτυπήσωσι(ν) 
θὰ κινήσω θὰ κινήσωμεν 
θὰ κινήσῃς θὰ κινήσητε 
θὰ κινήσῃ θὰ κινήσωσι(ν) 
θὰ ὑψώσω θὰ ὑψώσωμεν : 
θὰ ὑψώσης θὰ ὑψώσητε 
θὰ ὑψώσῃ θὰ ὑψώσωσι(ν) 


Second Form 


/ 

θέλω λύσει θέλομεν λύσει 
θέλεις λύσει θέλετε λύσει 
θέλει λύσει θέλουσι λύσει 
θέλω κτυπήσει θέλομεν κτυπήσει 

/ / / / 
θέλεις κτυπήσει θέλετε κτυπήσει 

/ / / / 
θέλει κτυπήσει θέλουσι κτυπήσε: 
θέλω κινήσει θέλομεν κινήσει 

/ 7 / / 
θέλεις κινήσει θέλετε κινήσει 

/ / / νὰ 
θέλει κινήσει θέλουσι κινήσει 
θέλω ὑψώσει θέλομεν ὑψώσει 
θέλεις ὑψώσει θέλετε ὑψώσει 
θέλει ὑψώσει θέλουσιν ὑψώσει 

PASSIVE 
First Form ; 

θὰ λυθῶ θὰ λυθῶμεν 
θὰ λυθῆς θὰ λυθῆτε 


θὰ λυθὴ θὰ λυθῶσι(ν) 


θὰ κτυπηθῶ 


θὰ κτυπηθῆς 
θὰ κτυπηθῇ 


θὰ κινηθῶ 
θὰ κινηθῆς 
θὰ κινηθῇ 


θὰ ὑψωθώ 
θὰ ὑψωθῆς 
θὰ ὑψωθῇ 


θέλω λυθῆ 
θέλεις λυθῆ 
θέλει λυθῆ 


"θέλω κτυπηθῆ 
θέλεις κτυπηθῆ 
θέλει κτυπηθῆ 


θέλω κινηθῆ 
θέλεις κινηθῆ 
Θέλει κινηθῆ 


θέλω ὑψωθῆὴ 
θέλεις ὑψωθὴ 
θέλει ὑψωθῆ 


THE FUTURE 


θα κτυπηθῶμεν 
θὰ κ«τυπηθῆτε 
θὰ κτυπηθῶσι(ν) 


θὰ 
θὰ κινηθῆτε 


κινηθώμεν 


- θὰ κινηθώσι(ν) 


θὰ ὑψωθώμεν 

θὰ ὑψωθῆτε 

θὰ ὑψωθώσι(ν) 
Second Form 

θέλομεν AVOH 


Θέλετε λυθῆ 
θέλουσι λυθῆ 


θέλομεν κτυπηθὴ 
θέλετε κτυπηθῆ 
θέλουσι κτυπηθῆῇ 


θέλομεν κινηθῆ 
Θέλετε κινηθῆ 
θέλουσι κινηθὴ 


θέλομεν ὑψωθῆ 


θέλετε ὑψωθῆ 
θέλουσιν ὑψωθῆ 


PERFECT FUTURE 


ἔχω λύσει 
» Φ 
ἔχης λύσει 
/ » 
ἐχη λύσει 


ACTIVE 
θὰ ἔχωμεν λύσει 
θὰ ἔχητε λύσει 
θὰ ἔχωσι λύσει 


66 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 
θὰ ἔχω κτυπήσει, κτλ. 
θὰ ἔχω κινήσει, κτλ. 


θὰ ἔχω ὑψώσει, κτλ. 


PASSIVE 
θὰ ἔχω λυθῆ θὰ ἔχωμεν λυθῆ 
θὰ ἔχης λυθῆ θὰ ἔχητε λυθῆ ; 
θὰ ἔχη λυθῆ θὰ ἔχωσι λυθῆ 


θὰ ἔχω κτυπηθῆ, κτλ. 
θὰ ἔχω κινηθῆ, κτλ. 
θὰ ἔχω ὑψωθῆ, κτλ. 


There are two forms of the aorist infinitive passive, 
namely, λυθῆ and λυθῆναι, the shorter form being used 
in the compound tenses. The present infinitive active 
ends in ν, but this letter 15 dropped in the compound 
tenses. The aorist infinitive active has the termina- 
tion σαι, but this becomes σει in the compound tenses, 
as λύσει instead of λῦσαι. 


Grammatical Exercise 


First ForM ΟΕ THE First (IMPERFECT) FUTURE AND PRESENT 
SUBJUNCTIVE 


Θὰ κρυόνω πάντοτε τὸν χειμῶνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῶ. 

I shall always take cold in winter as long as I live. 
Oa κρυόνῃς πάντοτε τὸν χειμῶνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῆς. 

Oa κρυὀνη πάντοτε τὸν χειμώνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῇ 


\ / / \ ed b] spe a 
Oa κρυὀνωµεν πάντοτε τὸν χειμώνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζώμεν. 


THE FUTURE 67 


Θὰ κρυόνητε πάντοτε τὸν χειμώνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῆτε. 
Od κρυόνωσι πάντοτε τὸν χειμώνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῶσιν. 


Repeat this exercise with the second form of the first 
future, as follows: 


Θέλω κρυόνει πάντοτε τὸν χειμώνα ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ζῶ, κτλ. 


First ForRM oF THE SEconND (Aorist) FUTURE AND AORIST 
INDICATIVE 


Od κρυώσω, διότι ἔβρεξα τοὺς πόδας µου. 

I shall take cold, for I have wet my feet. 

Od κρυώσῃς, διότι ἔβρεξας τοὺς πόδας σου. 

Θα κρυώση, διότι ἔβρεξε τοὺς πόδας του. 

Oa κρυώσωµεν, διότι ἐβρέξαμεν τοὺς πόδας µας. 
Oa κρυώσητε, διότι ἐβρέξατε τοὺς πόδας σας. 
Θὰ κρυώσωσι, διότι ἔβρεξαν τοὺς πόδας των. 


Repeat this with the second form of the second 
| future, as follows: 


Θέλω κρυώσει διότι ἔβρεξα τοὺς πόδας µου, κτλ. 


PERFECT FUTURE 


Τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχω γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

_ At eleven o’clock I shall have written the letter. 

Τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχῃς γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

| Tip ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχῃ γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

Τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχωμεν γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

Τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχητε γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 
Τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν θὰ ἔχωσι γράψει τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 


68 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


SECOND Future AND AORIST SuUBJUNCTIVE 


Δὲν θὰ δυνηθώ νὰ λάβω µάθηµα τὴν προσεχῆ ἑβδομάδα, 
διότι θὰ ὑπάγω εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι ὀλίγας ἡμέρας. 

I shall not be able to take a lesson next week, for I 
shall go to the country for a few days. 

Δὲν θὰ δυνηθῇς νὰ λάβῃς µάθηµα τὴν προσεχῆ ἑβδο- 
pada, διότι θὰ ὑπάγῃς εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι’ ὀλίγας 
pines 

Δὲν θὰ δυνηθῇ νὰ λάβῃ µάθηµα τὴν προσεχῆ ἑβδομάδα, 
διότι θὰ ὑπάγῃ εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι ὀλίγας ἡμέρας. 

Δὲν θὰ δυνηθῶμεν νὰ λάβωμεν μάθημα τὴν προσεχῆ 
ἑβδομάδα, διότι θὰ ὑπάγωμεν εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι᾽ ὀλί- 
γας ἡμέρας. 

Δὲν θὰ δυνηθῆτε νὰ λάβητε μάθημα τὴν προσεχῆ ἑἐβδο- 
μάδα, διότι θὰ ὑπάγητε εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι ὀλίγας 
ἡμέρας. 

Δὲν θὰ δυνηθῶσι νὰ λάβωσι μάθημα τὴν προσεχῆ ἑβδο- 
μάδα, διότι θὰ ὑπάγωσιν εἰς τὴν ἐξοχὴν δι ὀλίγας 
δες 


Βρέχω, I wet, when used impersonally, @.e. in the 
third person singular without subject or object, means 
it rains. Compare the Thought Exercise in this lesson, 
in which the word is employed in both senses. 

In the last of the above exercises, the verbs δύναμαι, 
to be able, λαμβάνω, to take, and πηγαίνω, to go, are all 
irregular; they are in frequent use, however, and have 
been purposely selected for this exercise in order to 
impress their aorist forms upon the learner’s memory. 


LESSON EIGHTH 


MAOHMA ΟΓΔΟΟΝ 
Thought Exercise 

Νομίζω ὅτι θὰ ὑπάγω εἰς τὴν κάτω πόλιν. 

nomizo oti tha wtpagho is tin gato ορού 
I think that I will go to the down-town. 
Εἶναι πολὺ μακρὰν διὰ νὰ ὑπάγω πεζὸς, διὰ τοῦτο θὰ 

ine polyt makran dkhia na ipagho pezos dhia toote tha 

ἐπιβῶ τοῦ τροχιοδρόµου. 
eptvo too trochiodhromeo 
It is too far in order that I go afoot, therefore I will 
mount the tramway. 

Περιμένω νὰ διέλθῃ διὰ νὰ ἀναβῶ. 

perimeno na dhielthi dhia na  anavo 
I wait that it come in order that I mount. 
Ὃ τροχιόδρομος ἔρχεται. 

0 trochiodhromos erchetat 
The car (tramway) is coming. 
Κάμνω σημεῖον εἰς τὸν ὁδηγὸν νὰ σταθῇ. 

kamno simion is ton odhighon na _ stathé 
I make a sign.to the driver that he stop. 
᾿Αναβαίνω εἰς τὴν ἅμαξαν καὶ κάθημαι πλησίον τῆς θύρας. 

anaveno is tin amaksan  kye kathime plytston tis _ thiras 


I go up into the car and sit down near the door. 


Δαμβάνω ἕνα quarter ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου µου καὶ τὸ δίδω 
lanvano ena ek tao thilakyioo moo kye to dhidho 
εἰς τὸν ἐπιστάτην. 
δ ton epistatin 
I take a quarter from the pocket my and give it to the 
conductor. 


το MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Μοὶ ἐπιστρέφει εἴκοσι cents (σολδία). 
mi epistrefi ikost τ soldhia 


To me he returns EACLE cents. 


Θέτω τὰ ἐπιστραφέντα εἰς τὸ Θαλάντιόν μου. 
λείο ta epistrafenda 1S tO valandion moo 


I put the returned into the purse of me. 

Θέτω τὸ βαλάντιον εἰς τὸ θυλακιόν µου. 
theto to valandion “κ το thilakyion moo 

I put the purse into the pocket my. 

Θὰ καταβῶ eis την προσεχῆ γωνίαν. 

tha katavo ts tim brosechi ghonyian 


I shall descend at the next corner. 


Κάμνω σημεῖον εἰς τὸν ἐπιστάτην, ὅστις σημαίνει τὸν 


kamno simion as ton epristatin ostis simenyt ton 
/ \ \ / ἘΣ 
κώδωνα διὰ νὰ σταματησῃ ἢ ἅμαξα. 
godhona dhia na stamatist zt amaksa 


I make (a) sign to the conductor, who rings the bell in 
order that may stop the car. 


/ a \ > \ 
Καταβαίνω ἐκ τῆς ἁμάξης καὶ εἰσέρχομαι εἰς TO ἐργαστή- 
kataveno ek tis amaksis kye iserkhome ts to erghasti- 


ρ .ΟΨ. 
rion 


I descend from the car and go into the shop. 


Τροχιόδρομος, tramway (lit. wheel-way), is used here 
in the sense of the vehicle running on the tramway. 
Similarly formed words are σιδηρόδρομος, railway (lit. 
iron-way), and ἱπποσιδηρόδρομος, horse railway. 

Σημαίνει τὸν κώδωνα, rings the bell (an idiomatic 
αι σημαίνω means to signify —Té σηµαίνει 
αὕτη ἡ λέξις ; What does this word mean ? 

Πολύ, meaning much, is Γκριν employed in the 
sense of very, too. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 71 


Conversation Exercise 


No / Ὁ θὰ ς 4 \ \ / }λ, fi 
µίζετε ὅτι θὰ ὑπάγητε πρὸς τὴν κάτω πόλιν; 
Εἶναι πολὺ μακρὰν διὰ νὰ ὑπάγητε πεζός; Θὰ ἐπιβῆτε 
‘ lal rn / 
διὰ τοῦτο τοῦ τροχιοδρὀµου; Διατί περιµένετε; περιµέ- 
vo νὰ διέλθῃ ἡ ἅμαξα. Περιμένετε νὰ διέλθῃ διὰ νὰ 
2 i) ” ς / ᾿ / / 
ἀναβῆτε; 3ρχεται ὁ τροχιόδροµος; Διατί κάμνετε 
Αα > \ ή fix ¢/ ᾽ ο ἴω \ 
σημεῖον eis Tov odnydv; "Όταν ἀναβῆτε, ποῦ θὰ κα- 
θήσητε; “Otay ἀναβαίνητε, ποῦ κάθησθε; Δαμβά- 
νετε ἕνα quarter ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου σας; Καὶ τί θὰ κά- 
4 θὰ \ 5 , » \ ᾽ [ = > / 
μητε; θὰ τὸ δώσω εἰς τὸν ἐπιστάτην. Σᾶς ἐπιστρέφει 
ἴω / \ 3 7 ᾿ 7 \ » 
τι; Ποῦ θέτετε τὰ ἐπιστραφέντα; Θέτετε τὰ ἐπιστρα- 
φέντα εἰς τὸ βαλάντιόν σας; Kab ἔπειτα θέτετε τὸ βα- 
λάντιον εἰς τὸ θυλακιόν σας; ᾖ1Ιοῦ θὰ καταβῆτε; θὰ 
καταβώ εἰς τὴν προσεχῆ γωνίαν. Διατί κάμνετε σημεῖ- 
ον εἰς τὸν ἐπιστάτην ; κάμνω σημεῖον εἰς τὸν ἐπιστάτην 
; ε 
διὰ νὰ σημάνῃ" τὸν κώδωνα. Διατί σηµαίνει ὁ ἐπιστάτης 
Ν Ν / \ \ 
τὸν κώδωνα; ὁ ἐπιστάτης σηµαίνει τὸν κώδωνα διὰ νὰ 


> / 


σ / μι σα ἊΣ νο ς ee - ef / 
ταματήσῃ ἡ ἅμαξα. Σταματᾷ ἡ ἅμαξα, ὅταν σημάνῃ 
{ / 
ὁ ἐπιστάτης; [Πόθεν καταβαίνετε; κατα- 


\ . 
τὸν κώδωνα 
/ fol a 
βαίνω ἐκ τῆς ἁμάξης. Kal ἔπειτα ποῦ πηγαίνετε; ἔπει- 


τα εἰσέρχομαι εἰς τὸ ἐργαστήριον. 


Ι Πρὸς τὴν κάτω πόλιν means toward the lower part of the city, in that 
direction ; εἰς τὴν κάτω πόλιν means into the lower part of the city * When 
you enter—referring to this particular instance, therefore the aorist—where 
will you sit? *When you enter—in a general sense, therefore the 
present — where do you sit ? 4 And what are you going to do (with) it ? 
°Snudvyn, σταματήσῃ are in the aorist subjunctive. In dependent clauses 
_ and in the imperative the aorist is used, without reference to the time, to 
express an action that is performed but once and not habitually. This is 
not the case in the indicative, however, for here there would be a confusion 
of tenses were the aorist used to denote a present action. ὃ Whence. 


MODERN 


Reading 


Ἢ ἐπιτίμησις τοῦ αὐλι- 
κοῦ. 

Αὐλικός τις εἶπεν ἐνώ- 
πιον Λουδοβίκου τοῦ IA’. 
(δεκάτου τετάρτου), ὁμιλῶν 
περί τινος κυρίου, ὅτι θὰ 
Σο / / \ / . 
ἠδύνατό τις νὰ γράψη ὀγ- 
κῶδες βιβλίον ἐξ ὅσων δὲν 
ὋὉ δὲ Λου- 


δὲν ἠγάπα 


BA 1 an 
ἤξευρεν ἐκεῖνος. 
lal “ 
δοβῖκος, ὅστις 
\ 5 \ > / 
TOUS ἐμπαιγμοὺς, ἀπεκρίθη 
Ψ 7 ἐξ \ > ys 
ἀμέσως" Καὶ ἐγὼ πι- 
i e/ Ἂ, 3 7 / 
στεύω ὅτι θὰ ἠδύνατό. τις 
\ / / 
νὰ κάμῃ μικρότατον βιβλίον 
3 e ς an Ψ / 93 
ἐξ ὅσων ὑμεῖς ἠξεύρετε. 


‘O λόρδος δήμαρχος εὐαρε- 
στήθη. 

Ὁ 

Harris ἐσυνήθιζε νὰ ἱστορῇ 


ἀποθανὼν Joseph 


» / 
ἀνέκδοτον 
περὶ τοῦ Sir Thomas Ow- 


διασκεδαστικὸν 


den ἄλλοτε λόρδου δηµάρ- 
you τοῦ Λονδίνου. Οὗτος 
ὁ χρηστὸς ἀνὴρ δὲν ἦτο ἑλ- 
ληνιστὴς, ἅπαξ ὅμως πα- 
ρευρέθη 


Ὁ 1 / : lal 
οπου ἀπήγγελλε εἰς τῶν 


> Aft 
εἰς σχολειον τι 


μαθητῶν λόγον ἑλληνικόν. 
Ἠκροάσθη προσεκτικώς, 


GREEK MASTERY 


Exercise 


The Rebuke of the Court- 
ier. 


A certain courtier said 
in the presence of Louis 
XIV., speaking of a cer- 
tain gentleman, that one 
would be able to write an 
immense book out of what 
he did not know. But 
Louis, who did not like ill- 
natured jests, replied in- 
stantly:  Απά I think that 
one could make a very 
small book of what you do 
know.” 

The Lord Mayor was 

Pleased. 


The late Mr. Joseph 
Harris used to relate an 
amusing anecdote about 
Sir Thomas Owden, for- 
merly Lord Mayor of Lon- 
don. This worthy man 
was not a Greek scholar, 
but once was present at a 
certain school where one 
of the scholars was deliv- 
ering a Greek oration. He 
listened attentively, but did 


READING EXERCISE 73 


\ > / [χὰ > / 
δὲν ἐννόησεν ὅμως οὐδεμίαν 
\ a \ 
λέξιν, ἐκτὸς μιᾶς. Αὐτὴ ἡ 
Ν ς ἴω 
λέξις ἦτο τὸ οὐδὲν τὸ ὁποῖον 
/ \ \ 
προὐφέρετο, κατὰ τὴν προ- 
\ a) / cc» 
φορὰν τοῦ Kpacpou, “ aov- 
99 κ Ν « a δ / 
ντεν΄ καὶ το οποίον ὁ λορ- 
{ Shed, Ὁ 
δος δήμαρχος ἐνόμιζε ὅτι 
3 Ν 3 / ” 
εἶναι τὸ ἰδικόν του ὄνομα. 
3 2 a 
Exoraxev0n πολὺ διὰ τοῦ 
ε 
ὑποτεθέντος ἐπαίνου καὶ 
ή / BA \ / b] 
οσάκις ἤκουε τὴν λέξιν ἐση- 
KOVETO καὶ ὑπεκλίνετο σο- 


βαρῶς. 


not understand ἃ single 
word, save one. This word 
was “nothing,” which was 
pronounced, according to 
the Erasmian pronuncia- 
tion, ““owden,” and which 
the Lord Mayor thought 
was his own name. He 
was greatly flattered by 
the supposed compliment, 
and as often as he heard 
the word he rose and 
bowed gravely. 


VERBS 


εἶπε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 
ὁμιλῶν, pres. part. ὁμιλά(ὲω), to speak. 
θὰ ἠδύνατο, 3d pers. sing. imp. condit. δύναμαι, to be 


able. 


γράψῃ, 3d pers. sing. aor. subj. γράφω, to write. 
ἤξευρε, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. ἠξεύρω, to know. 
ἠγάπα, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. ἀγαπώάω), to like, 


love. 


ἀπεκρίθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 
πιστεύω, 150 pers. sing. pres. ind. πιστεύω, to think. 
κάμῃ, 3d pers. sing. aor. subj. κάμνω, to make, do. 
εὐαρεστήθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. pass. εὐαρεστῶ(έω), 


to please. 


ἀποθανών, 2d aor. part. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 
ἐσυνήθιζε, 8d pers. sing. imp. ind. συνηθίζω, to be ac- 


customed. 


ἱστορῃ, 3d pers. sing. aor. subj. ἱστορῶ(έω), to relate. 


74 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


παρευρέθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. mid. παρευρίσκοµαι, 
to be present. 

ἀπήγγελλε, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. ἀπαγγέλλω, to de- 
liver, recite, tell. | 

ἠκροάσθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀκροάζομαι, to listen 
to, hear. 

ἐννόησε, 3d. pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐννοώίέω), to under- 


stand. 
προὐφέρετο 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. pass. προφέρω, to 
pronounce. 
ἐνόμιζε, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. νομίζω, to think, 
suppose. 
ἐκολακεύθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. pass. κολακεύω, to 
flatter. z 
ὑποτεθέντος, aor. part. pass. gen. masc. ὑποτίθημι, to 
suppose. 


ἤκουε, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. ἀκούω, to hear. 

ἐσηκόνετο, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. mid. σηκόνω(ώ-όω), 
to raise, lift. | 

ὑπεκλίνετο, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. mid. ὑποκλίνω, to 
bow. 

Θὰ ἠδύνατό τις, one would be able, is an example of the Conditional, 
the formation of which will be studied in the following section. See the 
preceding lesson concerning the double augment of this word, ἠδύνατο. 

Εἶπεν, ἤξευρεν, evvonoev—the ν (v ἐφελκυστικόν) at the end of these 


verbs is added for the sake of euphony, the following words in each instance 
beginning with a vowel. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


This exercise is to be composed by the student, after 
the reading exercise has been mastered, according to 
the directions given in the preceding lesson. 


THE CONDITIONAL τὸ 


Grammar 
THE CONDITIONAL—1 ὑποθετικὴ ἢ δυνητική 


The conditional mood in Modern Greek, which here 
takes the place of the optative in the ancient form of 
the language, is related in its formation, as in English, to 
'the future tense. There are three conditionals as there 
are three futures. The first, or imperfect, expresses a 
continued or habitual action; the second, or aorist, an 
action that is to be performed but once if the necessary 
condition is met; the perfect is seldom employed. 

_ The first conditional is formed by θὰ with the imper- 
| fect indicative or by the imperfect of θέλω (ἤθελον) with 
the present infinitive. The second is formed by the im- 
| perfect indicative of θέλω with the aorist infinitive. The 
| perfect is formed by θὰ with the pluperfect indicative. 
The distinction between the forms of the conditional 
‘is not so sharply drawn as in the case of the future; 
θὰ with the imperfect may be used for either the first 
‘or the second conditional; in the forms with θέλω, 
however, the distinction is maintained. 

| The main proposition upon which the condition de- 


| indicative; thus, ἂν ἤμην πλούσιος, ἤθελον περιηγεῖσθαι, 
‘if I were rich, I would travel. 


First (IMPERFECT) CONDITIONAL 
ACTIVE 
First Form 
θὰ ἔλυον θὰ ἐλύομεν 
θὰ ἔλυες θὰ ἐλύετε 
θὰ ἔλυε θὰ ἔλυον 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY: 
θὰ ἐκτύπων, κτλ. 
θὰ ἐκίνουν, κτλ. 


δὰ ὕψουν, κτλ. 


Second Form 


ἤθελον λύει ἠθέλομεν λύει 
ἤθελες λύει ἠθέλετε λύει 
ἤθελε λύει ἤθελον λύει 


ἤθελον κτυπᾶ, κτλ. 
/ A 
ἤθελον κινεῖ, κτλ. 


ἤθελον ὑψοῖ, κτλ. 


PASSIVE OR MIDDLE 


First Form 
θὰ ἐλυόμην θὰ ἐλυόμεθα 
θὰ ἐλύεσο θὰ ἐλύεσθε 
θὰ ἐλύετο θὰ ἐλύοντο 


\ b | "ἢ 

θὰ ἐκτυπώμην, κτλ. 
ν , 

θὰ ἐκινούμην, κτλ. 
Ν Φ 4 

θὰ ὑψούμην, κτλ. 


Second Form 


ἤθελον λύεσθαι ἠθέλομεν λύεσθαι 
ἤθελες λύεσθαι ἠθέλετε λύεσθαι 
ἤθελε λύεσθαι ἤθελον λύεσθαι 


ἤθελον κτυπᾶσθαι, κτλ. 
ἤθελον κινεῖσθαι, κτλ. | | 


ἤθελον ὑψοῦσθαι, κτλ. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 77 


SECOND (AORIST) CONDITIONAL 


(Formed by the imperfect of θέλω with the aorist infinitive.) 


ACTIVE PASSIVE 
ἤθελον λύσει, κτλ. ἤθελον λυθῆ, κτλ. 
ἤθελον κτυπήσει, κτλ. ἤθελον κτυπηθῆ, κτλ. 
ἤθελον κινήσει, κτλ. ἤθελον κινηθῆ, κτλ. 
ἤθελον ὑψώσει, κτλ. ἤθελον ὑψωθῆ, κτλ. 


As was noted in the lesson on the Future, the full 
form of the aorist infinitive passive (or middle) is 
λυθῆναι, etc., but the terminal syllable is dropped in 
the compound tenses. 

Note that the imperfect of θέλω is ἤθελον, and not 
ἔθελον as it should be regularly. Θέλω is one of a 
small number of words which take a double augment, 
ee contracted to 7. See foot-note concerning δύναμαι 
on page 49. 


Grammatical Exercise 


CONDITIONAL 


“Av εἶχον σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὠμίλουν εὐφραδῶς τὴν 


ἨἙλληνικήν. 

If I had studied diligently I would speak Greek 
fluently. 

Αν εἶχες σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὠμίλεις εὐφραδῶς τὴν 
Ἑλληνικήν. 


Αν εἶχε σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὠμίλει εὐφραδῶς τὴν 
Ἑλληνικήν. 


78 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


“Ap εἴχομεν σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὠμιλοῦμεν εὐφραδῶς 
τὴν Ελληνικήν. 5 

“Ap εἴχετε σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὡμιλεῖτε εὐφραδῶς 
τὴν Ελληνικήν. 

Αν εἶχον σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς θὰ ὡμίλουν εὐφραδώς τὴν 
Ἑλληνικήν. 


Εἶχον σπουδάσει is the pluperfect of σπουδάζω, to 
study; θὰ ὡμίλουν is the first conditional of ὁμιλάέω). 
to speak. a 


‘Av ἤμην πλούσιος, ἤθελον περιηγεῖσθαι. 

If I were rich I would travel. 

"Αν ἦσο πλούσιος, ἤθελες περιηγεῖσθαι. 

‘Av ἦτο πλούσιος, ἤθελε περιηγεῖσθαι. 

"Av ἤμεθα πλούσιοι, ἠθέλομεν περιηγεῖσθαι. 
“Av ἦσθε πλούσιοι, ἠθέλετε περιηγεῖσθαι.. 
"Av ἦσαν πλούσιοι, ἤθελον περιηγεῖσθαι. 


Ἤμην is the imperfect οὗ εἶμαι (ancient form, εἰμί), 
to be; ἤθελον περιηγεῖσθαι is the first conditional of - 
περιηγοῦμαι, to travel. 


LESSON NINTH 
ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ENNATON 
Thought Exercise 


9 \ lal 
Πηγαίνω εις τον λουτρώνα. 
piyeno ts ton lootrona 


I go to the bath-room. 
᾿Αφήνω τὸ θερμὸν ὕδωρ νὰ τρέχῃ διὰ νὰ γεμίσῃ ἡ λεκάνη. 
afino lo thermon idhor πα trechi dhia τα yemisi i _ lekanyi 


I let the hot water run in order that may fill the basin. 


. Χύνω ὕδωρ (vepov™) εἰς τὴν λεκάνην ἀπὸ τῆς ὑδρίας. 


chino ον neron 18 = tin lekanyin apo tis tdhrias 
I pour water into the basin from the pitcher. 


/ A / x / ’ Ν ef \ \ 
Λαμβάνω τὸν σάπωνα, τὸν βυθίζω εἰς τὸ ὕδωρ καὶ τὸν 
lanvano ton sapona ton vithizo ο ον σε ton 
/ \ la) lal 
στρέφω µεταξυ τῶν χειρῶν µου. 
strefo metakst ton chiron moo 


I take the soap, dip it into the water, and turn it be- 
tween my hands. 
Θέτω πάλιν τὸν σάπωνα εἰς τὴν θέσιν του. 


theto palyin ton sapona is tin  thesin toot 
I put back the soap into its place. 
Αὐτὸς ὁ σάπων κάμνει πολὺν ἀφρόν. 

aftos ο δ8αΡΟΠ kamnyt polyin afron 


This soap makes much lather. 


* Νερόν is the word in most common use, although ὕδωρ, the ancient 
word, is still frequently heard, especially in the literary style. 

+ Final ν does not modify the sound of initial τ of the following word 
when the latter isa possessive pronoun, as here. 


50 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Πλύνω τὸν ἀφρὸν τοῦ σάπωνος μὲ καθαρὸν ὕδωρ. 
plyino ton afron too saponos me  katharon tdhor 

I wash off’ the lather of the soap with clean water. 

Πλύνω τὸ πρόσωπόν µου μὲ ψυχρὸν ὕδωρ (νερόν). 
plyino to prosopon moo me _ psikhron  idhor neron 


I wash the face my with cold water. 


/ Ν / / / 
]]λύνω τὸ προσωπον µου μεταχειριζόμενος σἼΟΥΥΟΨΝ. 
plyino to prosopon moo metachirizomenos sponggon — 


I wash the face my, using a sponge. 


Σφογγίζω τὰς χεῖρας Kal τὸ πρόσωπόν µου μὲ TO προ- — 


sfonggytzo tas chiras kye to prosopon moo me to pro- 
/ / 
σὀψιον (χειρόμακτρογν). 
sopston chiromaktron 


I dry the hands and the face of me with a towel. 


Conversation Exercise 


In the Thought Exercises the verbs are necessarily in the present 
tense, or occasionally in the future, and those in the Conversation 
Exercises have been hitherto in the same two tenses. Hereafter, 
however, other tenses will be introduced in the latter in order. to 
give the student practice in all the forms of the verb. It will be — 
useful for him to construct exercises for himself after the model οὗ 
those in the previous grammatical sections, employing phrases from 
the Thought Exercises with which he is already familiar. For ex- 
ample : πλύνω τὸ πρόσωπόν µου μὲ ψυχρὸν ὕδωρ, πλύνεις τὸ πρόσωπόν 
σου μὲ ψυχρὸν ὕδωρ, πλύνει τὸ πρόσωπόν του (OF της, her) μὲ ψυχρὸν 
ὕδωρ, κτλ. (καὶ τὰ λοιπά, et Cetera.) 


Ποῦ πηγαίνετε; Πηγαίνετε εἰς τὸν λουτρῶνα; Διατί, 
ἀφήνετε τὸ ὕδωρ νὰ τρέχῃ ; ἀφήνω τὸ ὕδωρ νὰ τρέχη διὰ 
ss / ς / / \ \ x / 
νὰ γεμίσῃ ἢ λεκάνη. Ἀφήνετε τὸ ψυχρὸν νὰ τρέχῃ; 
ὄχι, δὲν ἀφήνω τὸ ψυχρὸν ἀλλὰ τὸ θερμὸν νερόν νὰ τρέχη. 
/ / 5 \ / a \ > ή 1 3 Ν 
Τί χύνετε εἰς τὴν λεκάνην ; Ποῖον νερὸν ἐχύσατε' εἰς τὴν 
/ “ἤ \ \ \ ’ \ / ’ Ν 
λεκάνην ; ἔχυσα τὸ ψυχρὸν νερὸν εἰς τὴν λεκάνην. ᾿Απὸ 
an \ / AT τ΄ οὗ > \ / . / \ 
ποῦ θὰ χύσητε τὸ ὕδωρ εἰς τὴν λεκάνην; θὰ χύσω τὸ 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE δι 


ὕδωρ εἰς τὴν λεκάνην ἀπὸ τὴν ὑδρίαν. "Όταν λαμβάνητε 
“ / , 
τὸν σάπωνα, ποῦ βυθίζετε αὐτόν; “Ὅταν βυθίζητε τὸν 
/ > eT / / > , 3 \ 
σάπωνα εἰς τὸ ὕδωρ, τί κάμνετε αὐτόν ; Μεταξὺ τίνων 
στρέφετε τὸν σάπωνα; στρέφω αὐτὸν μεταξὺ τῶν χειρῶν 
µου. Kai ἔπειτα ποῦ θέτετε τὸν σάπωνα ; Κάμνει πο- 


\ \ ς > re 
λὺν ἀφρὸν αὐτὸς ὁ σάπων; Ἐπλύνατε τὸν ἀφρὸν τοῦ 


5 \ / \ A ϱ/ / \ 7 
σάπωνος μὲ νερὸν; Μὲ ποῖον ὕδωρ πρέπει νὰ πλύνητε 


Ne > \ ed \ / x J \ an ΄ 
τὸν ἀφρὸν; πρέπει νὰ πλύνω τὸν ἀφρὸν τοῦ σάπωνος 
. 4 a a \ 
μὲ καθαρὸν ὕδωρ. Μὲ ποῖον ὕδωρ θὰ πλύνητε τὸ πρόσω- 
/ Ν \ ef ΕῚ \ v : 1 / 
mov σας; µε ψυχρὸν ὕδωρ. ᾿Εὰν εἴχετε θερμὸν νερόν, 
\ 7 \ / 5 
θὰ ἐπλύνετε τὸ πρὀσωπὀν σας; ναί, ἐὰν εἶχον θερμὸν 
/ a δὲ 
νερὀν, θὰ ἔπλυνον τὸ πρὀσωπόν µου μὲ αὐτό. Τί θὰ 
/ 2% 3 / \ / / νὰ 
μετεχειρίζεσθε, ἐὰν ἐπλύνετε τὸ πρόσωπόν σας; ἐὰν 
/ εὐ / / , 
ἔπλυνον τὸ πρόσωπόν µου, θὰ µετεχειριζόµην σπόγγον. 
: η 
Μεταχειρίζεσθε σπόγγον, ὅταν πλύνητε τὸ πρόσωπόν 
σας; val, µεταχειρίζοµαι σπόγγον, ὅταν πλύνω τὸ πρό- 
ϱ Ν 
σωπόν µου. Μετεχειρίσθητε σπόγγον, ὅταν ἐπλύνατε τὸ 
3 / / 
πρόσωπόν σας; μάλιστα, μετεχειρίσθην σπόγγον, ὅταν 


/ Ἁ A 
ἔπλυνα τὸ πρόσωπόν μου. Σφογγίζετε τας χεῖρας καὶ 


τὸ πρόσωπόν σας μεταχειριζόμενος προσόψιον (χειρόµακ- 
τρον); Τί µεταχειρίζεσθε, ὅταν σφοηγγίζητε τὰς χεῖράς 
σας; ὅταν σφογγίζω τὰς χεῖράς µου, µεταχειρίζοµαι προ- 
σόψιον (χειρόµακτρον). “Ὅταν σφογγίζητε τὸ πρόσωπόν 
σας, μεταχειρίξεσθε τὸ αὐτὸ προσόψιον; ὄχι, µεταχει- 
ῥίζοµαι ἄλλο προσόψιον, ὅταν σφογγίζω τὸ πρόσωπόν 
μου. 

' Verbs whose stem ends in a liquid (A, μ, v, p) regularly take no σ in the 


aorist termination. Χύνω is, however, irregular in this respect. τί 


κάµνετε αὐτόν; what do you do (with) it? * The same. 
6 


Reading 


Ἢ ἀνδρία ἢ ἡ δικαιοσύνη. 

ἨἩρώτησέ τις ᾿Αγησίλα- 
ον, τὸν βασιλέα τῆς Σπάρ- 
της, “ποία ἀρετὴ εἶναι ἀξία 
προτιμήσεως, ἡ ἀνδρία ἢ ἡ 
Οὗτος δὲ 


4 
“Rav πάντες 


δικαιοσύνη; 
2 / 

ἀπεκρίθη" 
5 \ 
ἦσαν δίκαιοι, ἡ ἀνδρία θὰ 


ip ΚΣ 
NTO περιττή. 


ς > / lal / 

Η εὐγένεια τοῦ Σωκράτους. 
: ΐ 
Ο Σωκράτης συνήντησέ 


ποτέ τινα γνωστόν του 
\ \ 3 7 an 
καὶ TOV ἐχαιρέτισε φιλικῶς, 
2 8 ᾽ . 
ἀλλ᾽ οὗτος δὲν ἀνταπέδωκε 
( Διατί 


χαιρετᾷς ἄνθρωπον τόσῳ 


τὸν χαιρετισμόν. 


ἀγενῆ ; εἶπον οἱ μαθηταὶ 
εἰς τὸν διδάσκαλόν των. 
“"K,” ἀπεκρίθη ὁ Σωκρά- 
της, “πρέπει καὶ ἐγὼ νὰ 
nual τόσον ἀγροῖκος ὅσον 


> é 2) 
αυτος; 


VERBS 


ἠρώτησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐρωτῶ (a), to ask. 
εἶναι, 38d pers. sing. pres. ind. εἶμαι, to be. 
ἀπεκρίθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 
ἦσαν, 8d pers. plur. imp. ind. εἶμαι, to be. 

θὰ ἦτο, 38d pers. sing. imp. condit. εἶμαι, to be. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Exercise 


Valor or Justice. 


‘ 


Some one asked Agesi-_ 
laus, King of Sparta, 
“which virtue is worthy 
of preference, valor or jus- | 
tice?” He replied: “Ifall 
men were just, valor would 
be superfluous.” 


Socrates’ Good-Breeding. 


Socrates once met an 
acquaintance of his and 
ereeted him in a friendly — 
manner, but the latter did 
not return the salutation. — 
“Why dost thou greet α 
man so ill-bred?” said the 
disciples to their master. 
“Eh,” replied Socrates, “is 
it necessary that I too 
should be as rude as he?” 


THE IMPERATIVE 83 


4 ᾿ = “ / 
φυνήντησε, 38d pers. sing. aor. ind. συναντῶ (aw), to 


meet. 
ἐχαιρέτισε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. χαιρετίζω, to greet. 
ἀνταπέδωκε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀνταποδίδω, to re- 
turn, give back. 


_ χαιρετᾷς, 2d pers. sing. pres. ind. χαιρετῶ (άω), to greet. 


; 


i 


εἶπον, 3d pers. plur. 2d aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 
"πρέπει, pres. ind. of the impersonal verb, πρέπει, it is 


necessary. 


| 
| μαι, Ist pers. sing. pres. subj. εἶμαι, to be. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


This is to be worked out by the student after the 
model given in Lesson VII. 


Grammar 


THE IMPERATIVE—7 προστακτική 


There are two forms of the Imperative, the imperfect 


(usually called, after the analogy of other languages, 
the present) and the aorist. These two bear the same 
‘relation to each other as do the corresponding forms 


“ 
7 


of the indicative or future,* that is to say, the imper- 
fect imperative expresses a command to perform re- 
peated or habitual actions, while the aorist commands 
the performance of a single action; thus: λύε τὰ σαν- 
δάλιά σου πρὶν νὰ τὰ ἐκβάλλης, UNtie your shoes before . 
you take them off (imperfect, commanding an action to 
be performed as often as the shoes are taken off); 


* The future, as regards its construction, may be looked upon as a mood 
om 
rather than a tense. 


84 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


λύσε τὰ σανδάλιά σου. διότι εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κατακλιθῆς, 
untie your shoes, for it is time you went to bed (aorist, 
expressing a command referring to this particular time 
only). 

For the persons other than the second the imperative 
employs the subjunctive, preceded by ἂς (a contraction 
of ἄφες, the imperative of the ancient verb ἀφίημι, mod- 
ern form ἀφήνω or ἀφίνω, to permit, let). Compare 
the English, let us see, as ἴδωμεν. In the more elevated 
style of oratory the subjunctive may be employed 
alone, without ds: this is a return to the ancient form 
of the imperative. Φέρε (imperative of φέρω, to bring, 
manage) or dye (imperative of ἄγω, to bring) may also, 
though rarely, be used in place of as. 

In the following paradigms, the order of persons 15 
2d pers. sing. and plur., Ist pers. plur., and 8d pers. 
sing. and plur. The forms in parentheses (in the aor- 
ist) are those used in the literary style. 


IMPERFECT 
ACTIVE PASSIVE 
AVE λύου 
λύετε λύεσθε 


ἂς λύωμεν 
ἂς λύῃ 
ds λύωσι(ν) 


κτύπα 
κτυπῶτε 

ΕΝ rn 

ἂς κτυπῶμεν 
ἂς κτυπᾷ 

x A 

ds κτυπῶσι(ν) 


ἂς λυώµεθα 
x / 

ἂς λυηται 

x / 

ἂς AV@VTAL 


ατυποῦ 
κτυπᾶσθε 

xX , 

ἂς κτυπώµεθα 
xX rn 

ἂς κτυπᾶται 


Ἂ a 
ας κτυπωνται 


THE IMPERATIVE 85 


/ 
κίνει 
κινεῖτε 
x a 
ἂς κινῶμεν 
ἂς κινῇ 
x a 
as κινῶσι(ν) 


ὕψου 
ὑψοῦτε 

as ὑψώμεν 
ἂς ὑψοῖ 

as ὑψώσι(ν) 


ACTIVE 


λῦσε (λῦσον) 
λύσατε 

x ΄ 

ἂς λύσωμεν 
x / 

as λυση 

ἂς λύσωσι(ν) 


κτύπησε (κτύπησον) 
κτυπήσατε 

ἂς κτυπήσωµεν 

ἂς κτυπήσῃ 


ἂς κτυπήσωσι(ν) 


/ / 
κίνησε (κίνησον) 
κινήσατε 
ἂς κινήσωμεν 
ἂς κινήσῃ 
a / 
as κινήσωσι(ν) 


κινοῦ 
κινεῖσθε 

ΕΝ / 

ἂς κινώµεθα 
Ὁ. n 

ἂς κινῆται 

Xv a 

ἂς κινώνται 


ὑψοῦ 
ὑψοῦσθε 

ἂς ὑψώμεθα 
ἂς ὑψώται 


ἂς ὑψῶνται 


AORIST 


PASSIVE 


λύσου (λύθητι) 
λυθῆτε 

ἂς λυθῶμεν 

ἂς λυθῇ 

ἂς λυθῶσι(ν) 


κτυπήσου (κτυπήθητι) 
κτυπηθῆτε 

ἂς κτυπηθῶμεν 

ἂς κτυπηθῇ 

ἂς κτυπηθῶσι(ν) 


κινήσου (κινήθητι) 
κινηθῆτε 

ἂς κινηθῶμεν 

ἂς κινηθῇ 

ἂς κινηθῶσι(ν) 


80 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ὕψωσε (ὕψωσον) ὑψώσου aera 
ὑψώσατε ὑψωθῆτε 

ἂς ὑψώσωμεν ἂς ὑψωθῶμεν 

ἂς ὑψώσῃ ἂς ὑψωθῇ 

ἂς ὑψώσωσι(ν) — ἂς ὑψωθῶσι(ν) 


In Modern Greek, as in English, the polite form οὗ 
address is in the second person plural. The singular 
is employed in familiar conversation among the mem- 
bers of a family and between intimate friends, and — 
also in speaking to young children and _ inferior | 
servants and laborers. Cases in which the singular 
may be used without giving offence are instinctively 
appreciated by a native, but cannot be strictly defined. 
A foreigner had better, therefore, always adhere to 
the plural, for the only error into which he could fall — 
by so doing would be one of over - politeness, which, 
though sometimes amusing, is always pardonable. 


Grammatical Exercise 
AORIST IMPERATIVE 


Περίμεινε μέχρις οὗ τελειώσω τὴν ἐπιστολήν µου. 
Wait (thou) until I have finished se letter. 
Περιμείνατε μέχρις οὗ τελειώσωσι τὰς ἐπιστολάς των. 
Wait (you) until they have finished their letters. 

“As περιµείνωμεν μέχρις οὗ τελειώσῃ τὴν ἐπιστολήν της. 
Let us wait until she has finished her letter. | 
Ας περιµείνῃ μέχρις οὗ τελειώσωμεν τὰς ἐπιστολάς μας. 
Let him wait until we have finished our letters. 

“As περιµείνωσι μέχρις οὗ τελειώσητε τὴν ἐπιστολήν σας. 
Let them wait until you have finished your letter. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 87 


NEGATIVE AORIST IMPERATIVE 


Μὴ ἔλθῃς, ἀφοῦ“ δὲν θέλεις. 

Do not come, since thou dost not wish. 
Μὴ ἔλθητε, ἀφοῦ δὲν θέλετε. 

"Ας μὴ ἔλθωμεν, ἀφοῦ δὲν θέλομεν. © 
"Ας μὴ ἔλθῃ, ἀφοῦ δὲν θέλει 

"Ας μὴ ἔλθωσιν, ἀφοῦ δὲν θέλουσιν. 


NEGATIVE IMPERFECT IMPERATIVE 


Μὴ περιφρονῆς μήτε τὸν πτωχὸν μήτε τὸν ἀσήμαντον. 

Despise not (n)either the poor (man) (n)or the insig- 
nificant. 

Μὴ περιφρονεῖτε μήτε τὸν πτωχὸν μήτε τὸν ἀσήμαντον. 

As μὴ περιφρονῶμεν μήτε τὸν πτωχὸν μήτε τὸν ἀσή- 
µαντογ. 

"Ας μὴ περιφρονῇ μήτε τὸν πτωχὸν μήτε τὸν ἀσήμαντον. 

Ας μὴ περιφρονώσι μήτε τὸν πτωχὸν μήτε τὸν ἀσή- 


μαντον. 


With a negative the subjunctive form instead of the 
imperative is employed in the second person, except 
the second person plural of the imperfect, which re- 
tains the imperative form (as seen in the second sen- 
tence of the third exercise). The Greeks employ the 
double negative, despise not neither—nor, etc. 


* May be written ἀφοῦ or ad’ οὗ. 


LESSON TENTH 
ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AEKATON 


Thought Exercise 


The student is now fairly conversant with the Greek phonology, 
and may dispense with the interlinear transliteration. In case of - 
doubt he should consult the section on pronunciation in Lesson I. 


Εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κατακλιθώ. 

It is time that I go to bed. 

Πηγαίνω εἰς τὸν κοιτώνά µου. 

I go to my bedroom. 

Τραβῶ ἓν πυρεῖον καὶ ἀνάπτω τὸ φωταέριον. 

I scratch a match and light the gas. 

Καταβιβάζω τὸ παραπέτασμα. 

T pull down the curtain. 

Ἐκβάλλω τὸ ἔνδυμά pov. 

I take off my coat. 

Ἠκβάλλω τὸ ὡρολόγιον ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου µου. 

I take out my watch from my pocket. 

Χορδίζω τὸ ὡρολόγιόν µου καὶ τὸ θέτω ὑπὸ τὸ προσκέφα- 
λόν µου. 

I wind my watch and put it under my pillow. 

Ἐικκομβῶώ τὸ γελέκο µου. 

1 unbutton my waistcoat. 

Λύω τὸ δεξιόν µου σανδάλιον καὶ τὸ ἐκβάλλω. 

I untie my right shoe and take it off. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 89 


᾿Αφήνω κάτω τὸ δεξιόν µου σανδάλιον πλησίον τοῦ Ka- 
θίσµατος. 

I drop down my right shoe near the chair. 

Λύω ἐπίσης καὶ τὸ ἀριστερόν µου σανδάλιον, τὸ ἐκβάλλω 
καὶ τὸ ἀφήνω κάτω πλησίον τοῦ καθίσµατος. 

I untie also my left shoe, take it off, and drop it down 
near the chair. 

Dope τὰς παντούφλας µου. 

I put on my slippers. 

Ἐκβάλλω τὴν περισκελίδα µου καὶ ἀναρτώ αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ 
ἱματιοφυλάκιον. 

I take off my trousers and hang them in the wardrobe. 

Φορῶ τὸ νυκτικὀν µου. 

I put on my night-dress. 

Νίπτομαι καὶ καθαρίζω τοὺς ὀδόντας µου. 

I wash myself and clean my teeth. 

Σβήνω τὸ φῶς. 

I extinguish the light. 

᾿Ανοίγω ὀλίγον τὸ παράθυρον ἐκ τῶν ἄνω. 

I open ἃ little the window from the top. 

Πίπτω εἰς τὴν κλίνην καὶ σκεπάζοµαι. 

I get into bed and cover myself up. 

Ἐλπίζω ταχέως θὰ ἀποκοιμηθῶ, διότι εἶμαι κουρασμένος. 

I hope I shall quickly go to sleep, for I am tired. 


Ta σινδόνια μοὶ φαίνονται ὑγρά: ἐλπίζω ὅτι δὲν θὰ 


~ 


κρυολογήσω. 
The sheets appear to me (to be) damp; I hope that 1 
shall not take cold. 


Conversation Exercise 


. \ A / 
Εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κατακλιθῶμεν; Kis ποίαν ὥραν κα- 
/ / / > \ / \ 
τακλίνεσθε; κατακλίνοµαι συνήθως εἰς τὴν δεκάτην καὶ 


90 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


fal / la ’ / 
ἡμίσειαν. Ποῦ πηγαίνετε καὶ ἐκδύεσθε;' Las ἠνάψατε. 
ἃ a Πα > 2 ae 
τὸ φωταέριον; ἐτράβηξα ἓν πυρεῖον καὶ ἤναψα δι αὐτοῦ 
a \ “ / je 
τὸ φῶς. Ὅταν εἰσήλθετε εἰς τὸν κοιτῶνά σας, κατεβι- 
/ \ - / / / + 
Bacate τὸ παραπέτασμα; Διατί καταβιβάζετε τὸ πα- 
/ / \ / \ \ Ἂ \ 
ραπέτασµα; καταβιβάζω τὸ παραπέτασμα διὰ νὰ μὴ μὲ 
/ la / \ 
ἴδῃ τις ἐκδυόμενον., Τί ἐκβάλλετε πρῶτον; ἐκβάλλω TO 
᾿ ta / lal " 
ἔνδυμά µου. “Ὅταν ἐκβάλλητε τὸ ὡρολόγιον ἐκ τοῦ θυ- 
a a a / 
λακίου τοῦ γελέκου σας, ποῦ τὸ θέτετε; ἸΠοῖον σανδά- 
a / / Σ 2 
λιον λύετε πρώτον; "Ελυεῖ τὰ σανδἀάλιά του, ὅταν εἰ- 
\ > / 
σήλθετε; ὄχι, ἔλυσε' τὰ σανδάλιά του πρὶν εἰσέλθω. 
/ [οἷ / . 
᾿᾽Αϕήνετε κάτω τὰ σανδάλιά σας πλησίον τοῦ καθίσµα- 
ὁ a aa 
τος; "Όταν λύσητε τὰ σανδάλιά σας, τί φορεῖτε; Popa 
\ / Ρ 
τὰς παντούφλας µου. "Όταν ἐξεβάλετε τὴν περισκελίδα 
2 / 5. ον > ec / 10 
σας, ἐκρεμάσατε αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ ἱματιοφυλάκιον ; ταν 
/ / 4 / 1 @ 
Φορέσητε τὸ VUKTLKOY σας, τί κάµνετε; ὅταν φορέσω τὸ 
, / \ A \ / > δ / \ 
νυκτικόν µου, σβήνω TO φῶς καὶ πίπτω εἰς τὴν κλίνην (TO 
/ Ἵ A“ LPs / Sx ΤΑ ; 
κρεββάτι). Τίς ἔσφεσε τὸ φῶς ; Δὲν θὰ ἀνοίξητε ολίγον. 
- / \ , 
τὸ παράθυρον ἐκ τῶν ἄνω; ὅταν ἀνοίγω τὸ παράθυρον 
if a / A 5 ο ᾽ν 
πολύ, πάντοτε ἀποκτῶ κρυολόγημα. Πῶς ἡμπορεῖτε va 
a \ \ Ν ᾽ / 
κοιμᾶσθε μὲ κλειστὸν παράθυρον; δὲν τὸ ἀφήνω κλει- 
\ 2 \ Noe / Pip ” ϱ/ ς \ 9 
στὸν ἀλλὰ τὸ ἀνοίγω ὀλίγον ἄνωθεν, ὅταν ὁ καιρὸς ἤναι 
/ an : on / oe J 
ψυχρός. Ἰοιμᾶσθε συνήθως καλῶς ; πάντοτε κοιμῶμαι 
- a 8 ο 
καλῶς ἐκτὸς ὀσάκις) ἐργάζομαι εἰς προκεχωρηκυῖαν ὥραν. 


1 Idiomatic: where do you go and undress 5 ? Pres. part. mid.; in 
order that one may not see me undressing. 3 Imperfect, expressing ἃ 
continued action: was he untying his shoes when you entered ? 4 Aorist, 
expressing a completed action: he untied his shoes before Tentered. ὅδ 
always catch cold. 5 How can you sleep with closed window? Ido not 
leave it closed, but open it a little from the top, when the weather is cold. — 
7Except as often as. ὃ Perfect active participle of προχωρῶ(ίέω), to ad- 
vance; προκεχωρηκώς, προκεχωρηκυῖα, προκεχωρηκός. This is a form of 
the ancient verb, occasionally but not often found in the modern literary 
language. 


READING EXERCISE 91 


Ἐκοιμήθητε καλῶς τὴν παρελθοῦσαν νύκτα; ὄχι, ἤμην 


\ 4 “ \ a \ - κ 1 
πολὺ κουρασμένος ὥστε νὰ δυνηθῶ νὰ κοιμηθώ καὶ ἔμενα 


»/ ἘΠΕ ᾿ / ς \ \ ϱ 1 
ἄγρυπνος ἀφ᾽ οὗ κατεκλίθην ὑπὲρ τὴν ὥραν. 


ΕΤ was too tired to be able to sleep, and I remained awake after I went 


to bed for over an hour. 


Reading Exercise 


ὋὉ Αἴσωπος καὶ ὁ ὁδοιπόρος. 
‘O Αἴσωπος μετέβη ποτε 
> / / ’ 
εἰς μικράν τινα πόλιν" καθ 
ἢ \ / “ ζ 
ὁδὸν δυνήντησεν ἕνα ὁδοι- 
πόρον, ὅστις χαιρετήσας τὸν 
2 / ες / / 
ἠρώτησε: ''Ι]όσον χρόνον 
᾽ { / Ν / 
ἀκόμη πρέπει νὰ βαδίζω, 
[ή κ / 3 Ν 
ἕως οὗ φθάσω εἰς τὸ πο- 
λίχνιον ἐκεῖνο, ὅπερ βλέπο- 
μεν ἐντεῦθεν ;” 
(Ἠάδισον,) 


“ Γνωρίζω κα- 


ἀπήντησεν 
ὁ Αἴσωπος. 

- . ε ς 
Nas,” ἀπεκρίθη ὁ ὁδουπόρος, 
“Or, πρέπει νὰ βαδίσω": 
» \ ? a! \ / 
ἀλλὰ εἰπε μοι μετὰ πόσον 
καιρὸν θὰ φθάσω ἐκεῖ." 

’ / ¢ 

“ Βαδισε," ἐπανέλαβεν ὁ 
Αἴσωπος. 

ς »/ δ ΜΕ 

Ο ἄνθρωπος οὗτος εἶναι 


τ 


παράφρων, ἐσκέφθη καθ 

ἑαυτὸν ὁ ξένος, καὶ πρέπει 
\ \ \ > / Ψ 

νὰ μὴ τον ἐρωτήσω πλεον, 


ἐξηκολούθησε δὲ τὸν ὃρό- 


«Ἠδορ and the Traveller. 


AXsop was once going to 
a small town; on the way 
he met a traveller who, 
making a bow, asked him : 
“ How long a time have 1 
yet to walk before arriving 
at that little town which 
we see from here ?” 


‘“ March,’ answered 
Aksop. “I know well,” 
replied the traveller, “ that 
I must walk; but tell 
me after how long a 
time I shall arrive there.” 
“March,” repeated ‘sop. 


Disa Mate τῆν Crany. 
thought to himself the 
stranger, and I must not 
question him further, and 
he proceeded on his way. 


92 MODERN 


μον του. Τότε ἐφώναξεν ὁ 


Αἴσωπος" “KB, μίαν λέξιν, 
θὰ φθάσῃς μετὰ δύο ὥρας." 
‘O ξένος ἐστράφη ὀπίσω 
“ Ἰ]ῶς τὸ 


γνωρίζεις τώρα καὶ διατί 


7 
καὶ ἠρώτησε" 


\ »/ x Ν \ 7 
δὲν ἤθελες va μοὶ τὸ εἴπης 
x, 3 / ς 
πρὸ ὀλίγου; ὋὉ Αἴσωπος 
\ > / ({ - > 
δὲ ἀπήντησε" Πῶς ἡμ- 
/ \ x \ 
πόρουν νὰ σοὶ TO εἴπω, πρὶν 


ἴδω τὸ βάδισμά σου; 


VERBS 


μετέβη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. µεταβαίνω, to go, pass, 


migrate. 


συνήντησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. συναντώ(άω) to 


meet. 
χαιρετήσας, 
bow. 


ἠρώτησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐρωτώ(άω), to ask, 


inquire. 


πρέπει, pres. ind. of the impersonal verb, πρέπει, it 18 


necessary, proper. 


βαδίζω, 1st pers. sing. pres. subj. βαδίζω, to walk. 
φθάσω, 1st pers. sing. aor. subj. φθάνω, to arrive, reach. 
βλέπομεν, Ist pers. plur. pres. ind. βλέπω, to see. 
βάδισον, 2d pers. sing. aor. imperat. βαδίζω, to walk. 

ἀπήντησε, 8d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀπαντώ(άω), to an- 


swer. 


γνωρίζω, 150 pers. sing. pres. ind. γνωρίζω, to know. 


GREEK MASTERY 


aor. part. masc. yatpeTa(aw), to greet, 


Then Alsop called out: 
“Kh, one word, thou wilt 
arrive in two hours.” | 
The stranger turned 
back and asked: “Ποῖ 
dost thou know it now, 
and why didst thou πο 
wish to tell it to me a 
little while ago?’ ] 
9βδορ replhed: 
could I tell thee before I 
saw thy gait?’ 


| 


THE INFINITIVE 93 


ἀπεκρίθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 

Badica, 1st pers. sing. aor. subj. βαδίζω, to walk. 

εἰπέ, 2d pers. sing. 2d aor. imperat. λέγω, to say, tell. 

θὰ φθάσω, Ist pers. sing. aor. fut. φθάνω, to arrive, 
reach. 

βάδισε, same as βάδισον above. 

ἐπανέλαβε, 3d pers. sing. 2d aor. ind. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to 

| repeat. 

ἐσκέφθη, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. σκέπτομαι, to think, 
reflect. 

ἐρωτήσω, Ist pers. sing. aor. subj. ἐρωτώ(άω). to ask, 

| question. 

ἐξεκολούθησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐξακολουθῶ(έω) to 

| continue. 

ἐφώναξε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. φωνάζω, to call out, 
shout. 

ἐστράφη. 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. mid. στρέφοµαι, to turn 
(one’s self). 

ἤθελες, 2d pers. sing. imp. ind. θέλω, to wish. 

εἴπῃς, 2d pers. sing. 2d aor. subj. λέγω, to say, tell. 

ἠμπόρουν, Ist pers. sing. imp. ind. ἠμπορά[έω), to be 
able. 

ἴδω, Ist pers. sing. 2d aor. subj. βλέπω, to see. 


Grammar 


THE INFINITIVE—? ἀπαρέμφατος 


There are two infinitives in each voice, viz., the 
present and the aorist. They are formed by adding 
the terminations ειν and σαι to the stem in the active 
voice, and εσθαι and θῆναι in the passive. 


94 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ACTIVE PASSIVE 
PRESENT AORIST PRESENT AORIST 
λύειν λύσαι . λύεσθαι λυθῆναι 
κτυπῶν κτυπήσαι κτυπᾶσθαι κτυπηθῆναι 
κινεῖν κινῆσαι κινεῖσθαι κινηθῆναι 
ὑψοῦν ὑψῶσαι ὑψοῦσθαι ὑψωθῆναι 


In the compound forms (future, conditional, pertect, 
and pluperfect) the final v, of the present active, and 
vat, of the aorist passive, are dropped; the termination 
of the aorist active, σαι, becomes σε. The infinitive 
of κτυπῶ is written without iota subscriptum, which 
would seemingly belong to it, since the termination is 
a contraction of a and ew. In the infinitive of ὑψώ 
(the contracted form, which is scarcely ever used in 
Modern Greek) the full form is ὑψοῦν, while the form 
without final ν, used in the compound tenses, is ὑψοῦ. 

Except as the infinitive enters into the formation of 
the compound tenses, it is employed only as a verbal 
noun. It is then accompanied by the neuter article, 
which is regularly declined ; thus: τὸ δίδειν εἶναι evape- 
στότερον τοῦ λαμβάνειν, to give is more blessed than 
to receive; τὸ ἱππεύειν εἶναι εὐάρεστος κίνησις, riding 18 
a pleasant exercise. 

In all other cases the English infinitive is rendered 
by νά with the subjunctive or by ὅτι with the indica- 
tive.* For example: εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κατακλιθῶ, it is 
time for me to go to bed; τί θέλετε va εἴπητε; what 


* The infinitive is, however, sometimes used in the most elevated litera- 
ry style: οὐ τολμῶ ὃ εἰπεῖν τὸ τέλειον, but I do not presume to say 
per fect. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 95 


do you wish to say? δὲν ἐνθυμοῦμαι ὅτι σᾶς τὸ εἶπον, 1 
do not remember to have told you that. 

Even when employed as a verbal noun the infinitive 
is very commonly rendered by νά with the subjunc- 
tive, usually then preceded by the neuter article just as 
when the infinitive form is used. For example: τὸ va 
καταγελᾷ τις τοὺς ἄλλους εἶναι avaywyor, to laugh at 
others is ill bred. 


Grammatieal Exercise 


INFINITIVE RENDERED BY νά WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE 


Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθώ. 

It is time now for me to sleep. 
Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθῇς. 
Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθῇ. 
Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθόµεν. 
Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθῆτε. 
Τώρα εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ κοιμηθῶώσιν. 


Τὸ va περιπατῶ καθ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 
For me to take a walk every day is healthful. 
ὸ νὰ περιπατῇῆς καθ᾽ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 
ὸ νὰ περιπατῇ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 


\ ~ ’ / => 
Τὸ νὰ περιπατώµεν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 
\ [ο] 5 
Τὸ νὰ περιπατῆτε καθ᾽ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 


\ \ a Φ / το ς / 
0 νὰ περιπατῶσι καθ ἑκάστην εἶναι ὑγιεινόν. 


LESSON ELEVENTH 


MAOHMA ENAEKATON 


Thought Exercise 


Εἶναι καιρὸς νὰ σηκωθῶ. 

It is time that I rise. 

᾿Ἠκοιμήθην παρὰ πολύ---ἄσχημα. 

I have slept too long—poorly. 

Διῆλθον καλὴν νύκτα. 

I have passed (a) good night. 
᾿Ωνειρευόμην καθ’ ὅλην τὴν νύκτα. 

I was dreaming through all the night. 
Ῥηκόνομαι ἀπὸ τὴν κλίνην. 

I rise from the bed. 

Θὰ λάβω τὸ λουτρόν µου. 

I shall take the bath my. 

. ᾿Αφήνω τὸ ὕδωρ νὰ τρέξῃ εἰς τὸν λουτῆρα. 
I let the water that it run into the bath-tub. 
Τὸ ὕδωρ (νερὸν) εἶναι πολὺ ψυχρόν (κρύον). 
The water is very cold. 

Pope τὰ ἀσπρόρρουχά µου. 

I put on the underclothes my. 

Pope τὰς περικνηµίδας µου (κάλτσας µου). 
I put on the stockings my. 

Κτενίζω τὴν κόμην µου. 

I comb the hair my. 


| 


CONVERSATION 


Καθαρίζω τοὺς ὀδόντας µου. 
I clean the teeth my. 
Καθαριζω τοὺς ὄνυχας. 

I clean the nails. 

Φορῶ τὰ ἄλλα ἐνδύματά µου. 

I put on the other clothes my. 


EXERCISE 97 


Τώρα ἡ κόμωσίς µου εἶναι ἐντελής. 
Now the toilet my is complete. 

Ἤδη ἐνεδύθην (ἔχω ἐνδυθῆ). 
Already I have dressed myself. 


\ > / \ 3 x \ x / 
Θὰ ἀποσφραγίσω τὰς ἐπιστολάς µου καὶ θὰ ἀναγνώσω 


τὴν ἐφημερίδα ἕως οὗ προσκληθώ εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα. 
I will open (unseal) the letters my and will read the 
newspaper until I am called to the breakfast. 


The words enclosed in parentheses are those in 
more common use in the vernacular. 


΄ 


ήλθε 
σαν 


θὰ κάμητε πρῶτον; 


Conversation 


Exercise 


Εἶναι ἤδη καιρὸς va σηκωθῶ; Ids ἐκοιμήθητε; Ac- 


\ A 
τε καλὴν νύκτα; ᾿Ὠνειρεύθητε κατὰ τὴν παρελθοῦ- 


, > f σ 
νύκτα; Eis ποίαν ὥραν 


σηκόνεσθε συνήθως; Τί 


Δαμβάνετε λουτρὸν καθ ἑκάστην 


sf. 7 \ ’ εἰ ς 
πρωΐαν; ᾿Βλαμβάνετε' τὸ λουτρόν σας ὅτε ὁ κώδων ἐσή- 


“pave διὰ τὸ πρόγευμα; ὄχι, τὸ ἔλαβον" πρὸ μιᾶς ὥρας. 


Πότε ἐλάβετε τὸ λουτρόν σας; ᾿Αφήσατε' τὸ ὕδωρ va 


τρέξῃ εἰς τὸν λουτῆρα. 


Kivat τὸ ὕδωρ πολὺ ψυχρόν; 


᾿Εφορέσατε τὰ ἐνδύματά σας; [lod εἶναι αἱ περικνηµίδες 


μου; 


Πρέπει νὰ φορέσητε τὰ 


/ / \ \ / 
σανδαλιά σας καὶ νὰ δέ- 


1 Imperfect: Were you taking your bath when the bell rang for break- 
2 Aorist: I took it an hour ago. 
7 


fast ? 


ὃ Aorist imperative. 


98 ᾿ MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


σητ 2 ᾽ / ΠῚ / Ν / ‘i Θὰ θ / 
NTE αὐτά. κτενίσατε τὴν κόμην σας; Θὰ καθαρί- 
σητε τοὺς ὀδόντας σας; Εἶναι ἤδη ἐντελὴς ἡ κόμωσίς 
Ἤδη ἐνεδύθητε; 


An 3 \ / ΑἊ / 2 \ > / 
ῆτε εἰς το προγευµα; πεσφραγίσατε Tas ἐπιστολας 


σας; Τί θὰ κάµητε ἕως οὗ προσκλη- © 
σας; Πρέπει νὰ ἀποαφραγίσητε τὰς ἐπιστολὰς ἤδη; 
Θὰ ἀποαφραγίσητε' τὰς ἐπιστολάς σας πρὶν προσκλη- 
θῆτε εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα; Θὰ ἀποσφραγίζητε' τὰς ἐπιστο- 
Ads σας καθ ἑκάστην πρωΐαν; Θὰ ἀναγνώσητε τὴν 


ἐφημερίδα τώρα;  ᾿Ανεγνώσατε τὴν ἐφημερίδα πρὸ τοῦ Ἷ 


προγεύματας ; 


1 Δένω, to tie, lace. 
4 Aorist future. 


2 Aorist indicative. 


3 Aorist subjunctive. — 


5 Imperfect future, denoting repeated action, 


Reading Exercise 


«© € / / 
Οὗ οἱ σοφοί δέονται. 
4 / 3 
Πλούσιός τις ἄνθρωπος 
᾽ / ΄σ 
ἠρώτησε σοφόν τινα, πῶς 
/ \ 
συμβαίνει τοὺς μὲν σοφοὺς 
x / . \ . / 
νὰ βλέπῃ τις εἰς τὰς οἰκίας 
- / 
τῶν πλουσίων, τοὺς δὲπλου- 
/ / } \ - 
σίους ὄχι εἰς τὰς οἰκίας τῶν 
” Ν ~ 
σοφῶν; "ἔλαβε δὲ τὴν ἑξῆς 
3 , (a4 , id x 
ATAVTNE ED * Διότι οἱ μὲν 
\ / 8 
σοφοὶ γνωρίζουν οὗ δέονται, 
ε 
οἱ δὲ πλούσιοι ὄχι." 


᾿Αξιόλογος ξένος. 
"᾿Ανθρωπός τις λίαν ἐνη- 
σχοληµένος ἰδὼν ὅτι ἤρχετο 


\ Φ.Α / \ 
προς αυτον ξένος τις κάν VO- 


What the Wise Need. — 


A certain rich man asked 
a wise one how it happens — 
that one sees learned men — 
in the houses of the rich 
but not rich men in the 
houses of the learned. He 
received the following re- 
ρα) Because the wise 
know what they have need — 
of, but the rich do not.” 


A Visitor of Importance. 


A certain man who was 
very busy, seeing that ἃ 
stranger was coming tow- 


READING 


ae? ν΄ 4 ἢ , “ 
μίσας ὅτι ἦτο ἐργάτης, ὅστις 
» % / / 
ἤθελε τὸν ζητήσει χρήματα, 
a 3 > / ές \ 
Tw εἶπεν ἁποτόμως" “Δὲν 
”/ \ ’ 3 ο 
ἔχω καιρὸν ν ἀσχοληθῶ 
x Ὁ Lal “ 
περὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ σᾶς παρα- 
A > > A 9 / 
καλῶ ν᾽ ἀποσυρθῆτε ἀμέ- 
3) (<4 / 22 A 
cas.’ —“ Προθύμως,) τῷ 
5 ε 
εἶπεν ὁ ἄγνωστος,  ἄναχω- 
ο \ / a) 
ρῶ, ἀλλὰ θέλω va σᾶς κάμω 
\ Ὁ“ 9 / 
γνωστὸν ὅτι ἦλθον μόνον 
\ ἴω > 
νὰ σᾶς ἀποδώσω μέγα πο- 
\ A ε ἴω 
σὸν χρημάτων, τὸ ὁποῖον 
σᾶς χβεωστοῦμεν." ---““"Δ, 
3 / a 
ἐπανέλαβεν ἐκεῖνος, ἄλλο 
θὰ 


7 
προσπαθήσω νὰ οἰκονομή- 


/ la) 
πράγμα τοῦτο: τότε 


ow καιρόν" καθήσατε, πα- 
ρακαλῶ." 


EXERCISE ΄ 9 


ard him, and supposing 
that he was a laboring 
man who would ask him 
for money, said to him 
very curtly: “I have no 
time to busy myself with 
you, and I beg you to 
withdraw immediately.” 
“Readily do I go away,” 
said the unknown to him, 
“but 1 desire to make 
known to you that I have 
come only to return to 
you a large sum of money 
that we owe you.” “ Ah,” 
replied he, “that is an- 
other matter; I will en- 
deavor then to spare the 
time; please be seated.” 


VERBS 


ἠρώτησε, 3d pers. sing. aor. ind. ἐρωτώ[άω), to inquire 


of, ask. 


συμβαίνει, pres. ind. impersonal, it happens. 
βλέπῃ, 3d pers. sing. pres. subj. βλέπω, to see. 
ἔλαβε, 3d pers. sing. 2d aor. ind. λαμβάνω, to take, 


receive. 


γνωρίζουν, 3d pers. plur. pres. ind. γνωρίζω, to know. 
δέονται, 3d pers. plur. pres. ind. δέομαι, to need, want. 
ἐνησχολημένος, perf. part. mid. ἐνασχολοῦμαι, to occupy 


one’s self, be busy. 


100 ) MODERN GREEK MASTERY ο... 


ἰδών, 2d aor. part. βλέπω, to see. 

νομίσας, aor. part. νομίζω, to think, suppose. 

Aro, 3d pers. sing. imp. ind. εἶμαι, to be. | 

ἤθελε ζητήσει, 3d pers. sing. aor. condit. ζητό(έω), to 
ask, seek. 

εἶπε, 3d pers. sing. 2d aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 

ἀσχοληθώ, Ist pers. sing. aor. subj. ἀσχολοῦμαυ, to OC- 
cupy one’s self. 

παρακαλῶ(έω), Ist pers. sing. pres. ind., to beg, entreat, 
“please.” 7 Ἶ 

ἀποσυρθῆτε, 2d pers. plur. aor. subj. ἀποσύρομαι, to — 
withdraw one’s self. i 

ἀναχωράίέω), Ist pers. sing. pres. ind., to retire, go — 
away. 

κάμω, 1st pers. sing. pres. subj. κάμνω, to make, do. 

ᾖλθον, Ist pers. sing. 2d aor. ind. ἔρχομαι, to come. | 

ἀποδώσω, 1st pers. sing. aor. subj. ἀποδίδω, to return, 
give back. = 

χρεωστοῦμεν, Ist pers. plur. pres. ind. χρεωστώ{έω), ἴο 
owe. 4 

ἐπανέλαβε, 3d pers. sing. 2d aor. ind. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to 
reply, repeat. 

θὰ προσπαθήσω, Ist pers. sing. aor. fut. προσπαθώέω), 
to endeavor. 

οἰκόνομήσω, ist pers. sing. aor. subj. οἰκονομώ(έω), to 
economize, manage. | 

καθήσατε, 2d pers. plur. aor. imperat. κάθημαι, to sit 
down. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


Το be prepared in the usual way, and on no account 
to be omitted. 


THE PARTICIPLE 101 


Grammar 


THE PARTICIPLE—1 µετοχή 


There are five participles in Modern Greek, namely, 
present and aorist active, and present, aorist, and per- 
fect passive or middle. In addition to these there are 
occasionally employed also a future and α perfect 
active, and a future passive. 

The participles are declined like adjectives (see Les- 
son X XI.) and, like them, must agree with their subject 
in gender, number, and case. 


ACTIVE 
PRESENT 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
λύων λύουσα λῦον 
κτυπῶν κτυπῶσα κτυπῶν 
κινῶν κινοῦσα κινοῦν 
ὑψῶν ὑψοῦσα ὑψοῦν 
AORIST 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
λύσας λύσασα λῦσαν 
κτυπήσας κτυπήσασα κτυπῆσαν 
κινήσας κινήσασα κινῆσαν 
ὑψώσας ὑψώσασα ὑψώσαν 


The future participle is formed from the aorist by 
changing the termination as into ων. The perfect is 
formed by adding to the present stem the terminations 
κώς, κυῖα, Kos, and, like the perfect passive, takes the 


109 MODERN GREEK MASTERY ha - 


reduplication (see below). These forms are seldom 
used. 4 
PASSIVE 
PRESENT 
Mase. Fem. Neut. 
λυόμενος λυομένη λυόμενον 
κτυπώμενος κτυπωμένη κτυπώμενον 
κινούμενος κινουμένη κινούμενον 
ὑψούμενος ὑψουμένη ὑψούμενον 
AORIST ; 
- Mase. Fem. Neut. 
λυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν 
κτυπηθείς κτυπηθεῖσα κτυπηθέν 
κινηθείς κινηθεῖσα κινηθέν 
ὑψωθείς ὑψωθεῖσα ὑψωθέν 


The perfect passive participle is formed from the 
aorist indicative by changing the termination θην into — 
μένος, μένη, μένον (note the accent, differing from that 
of the present participle, which has similar termina- 
tions), and in addition the stem takes the reduplication — 
(ὁ ἀναδιπλασιασμός). By this is meant the repetition 
of the initial consonant of the verb, with an ΙΠίΘΥ- 
posed ε. It occurs in verbs beginning with a single 

consonant (except p) or with a mute followed by a 
liquid (except yv).* Those beginning with an aspirated — 
consonant, ¢, x, or @, take the corresponding hard con-— 
sonant, 7, κ, or 7, in the reduplication. Verbs begin-— 


*The mute consonants are nine in number: π, B, Φ, κ, y, χ, T ὃ, 93 
the liquids, or semi-vowels, are A,'p, v, ρ. 


THE SECOND AORIST 103 


| ning with a vowel, p, or either of the double conso- 
nants, ἕ or w, take the augment (see Lesson V.) instead 
of the reduplication. Those compounded with a prep- 
osition take the reduplication between the preposition 
and the proper stem of the verb. In the vernacular 
the reduplication is commonly omitted; it is omitted 
also in the literary language whenever it would cause 
cacophony or when the word is already unduly long 
without the addition of this extra syllable. In the an- 
cient language the reduplication was found in several 
forms that are not in use in modern Greek. 


| 
| 
| 


Masc. Fem. Neut. 
λελυμένος λελυμένη λελυμένον 
ἐκτυπημένος ἐκτυπημένη ἐκτυπημένον 
κεκινημένος κεκινημένη κεκινημένον 
ὑψωμένος ὑψωμένη ὑψωμένον 


The accent, to which attention has already been di- 
rected, departs here from the general rule according to 
which it should be thrown as far back as the quantity 
of the final syllable would permit. Κτυπῶ, beginning 
with a mute not followed by a liquid, takes the aug- 
ment instead of the reduplication. 

The participles in Greek are used in much the same 
way as they are in English. The second reading ex- 
tract in this lesson contains examples of the perfect 
and aorist participles. | 


ΤΠΕ SECOND AORIST 


This form is used in place of the ordinary First 
Aorist in the case of only a few verbs. Its termina- 


᾿ 


- 


104 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


tions in the indicative active are the same as those of © 
the imperfect. In the other moods the terminations 
are the same as those of the present, except that the 
accent, contrary to the general rule, falls upon the final 
syllable in the infinitive and participle. The seldom- 
employed second aorist passive is formed from the 
active by changing the ον into ην. The following are 
the verbs of this class which are most commonly met 


with : 

PRESENT AORIST 
Ἔλαοω, to lead, ἤγαγον 
ἁμαρτάνω, to sin, ἥμαρτον 
ἀποθνήσκω, to die, ἀπέθανον 
δ ἀφικνοῦμαι, to reach, ἀφικόμην 
βάλλω, to put, ἔβαλον 
βλέπω, to see, εἶδον 
Χ γίνομαι, to become, το ἐγενόμην 
Ἀηινώσκω, to know, ἔγνων 
ἔρχομαι, to come, ἦλθον 
εὑρίσκω, to find, ο εὗρον 
ἔχω. to have, ἔσχον 
λαγχάνω, to obtain by lot, ἔλαχον 
λαμβάνω, to take, ἔλαβον 
λανθάνω, to mistake, ἔλαθον 
λέγω, to say, εἶπον 
Ἀλείπω, to fail, ἔλιπον. 
μανθάνω, to learn, ἔμαθον 
πάσχω, to suffer, ἔπαθον 
πίνω, to drink, ἔπιον 
πίπτω. to fall, ἔπεσον 


τίκτω, to bear, ἔτεκον 


THE SECOND AORIST 105 


Ἀπρέχω, to run, ἔδραμον 
τρώγω, to eat, et ἔφαγον 
τυγχάνω, to acquire, ἔτυχον 
φεύγω, to flee, ἔφυγον 


Those marked with an (*) have also a first aorist 
form. With the others only the second aorist is in 
use. The form ἔγνων, second aorist of γινώσκω, is used 
only in compound verbs; of the simple verb the first 
aorist form ἔγνωσα is employed. 


LESSON TWELFTH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ AQAEKATON 
Thought Exercise 


Ἢ ὑπηρέτρια μὲ προσκαλεῖ εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα. 

The maid me calls to the breakfast. 

Χαίρω, διότι τὸ ψυχρὸν λουτρὸν μοὶ ἤνοιξε τὴν ὄρεξιν. 

I am glad, for the cold bath to me has opened the 
appetite. 

Κάθημαι εἰς τὴν τράπεζαν. 

I sit down to the table. 

᾿᾽Ανοίγω τὸ χειρόμακτρόν µου. 

I open the napkin my. 

Ἠξαπλόνω αὐτὸ εἰς τὰ γόνατά µου. 

I spread out it on the knees my. 

Δαμβάνω ἕν πορτοκάλιον ἀπὸ τὴν ὀπωροθήκην. 

I take an orange from the fruit-dish. 

Ἐκλεπίζω (καθαρίζω) τὸ ὀπωρικὸν καὶ τὸ τρώγω. 

I peel the fruit and it eat. 

Βυθίζω τοὺς δακτύλους µου εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα. 

I dip the fingers my in the (finger) bowl. 

Σφογγίζω τὸ στόμα µου μὲ TO χειρόµακτρον. 

I wipe the mouth my with the napkin. 

Ἢ σύζυγός µου μοὶ γεμίζει τὴν κύλικα (τὸ φλυτζάνι) μὲ, 
καφέν. | | 

The wife my to me fills the cup with coffee. 


THOUGHT EXERCISE 107 


“HI ὑπηρέτρια μοὶ δίδει κύπελλον τεῖου. 

The maid to me gives cup of tea. 

᾿ Θέτω βῶλον σακχάρεως εἰς τὸν καφέν---τὸ Téiov. - 

I put lump of sugar in the coffee—the tea. 

Πρὸς τούτοις θέτω θερμὸν γάλα καὶ ὀλίγον ἀφρόγαλα. 
Besides this I put warm milk and a little cream. 
Κινώ τὸν καφὲν μὲ τὸ κοχλιάριον διὰ νὰ διαλυθῇ τὸ σάκ- 
χαρι. 

1 stir the coffee with the spoon in order that may dis- 
| solve the sugar. 


1 


᾿Σχίζω τὸν ἀρτίσκον καὶ ἀλείφω αὐτὸν μὲ βούτυρον. 

I break the roll and spread it with butter. 

Mreido μὲ βούτυρον ἕν τεμάχιον φρυγανιᾶς. 

I spread with butter a slice of toast. 

Δάκνω ἕν τεμάχιον καὶ TO μασσῶ. 

I bite a piece and it masticate.. 

Ὁ καφὲς εἶναι πολὺ θερμός: δὲν δύναμαι νὰ τὸν πίω πρὶν 
κρυώση. 

The coffee is very warm; I cannot drink it before it 
cools. 

Τώρα ἐτελείωσα τὸ πρὀγευµά µου. 

Now I have finished the breakfast my. 

Διπλόνω τὸ χειρόμακτρόν µου. 

I fold the napkin my. 

᾿Ωθό πρὸς τὰ ὀπίσω τὸ κάθισµά µου καὶ σηκόνοµαι ἀπὸ 
τὴν τράπεζαν. 

I push to the back the chair my and I rise from the 
table. 

Τώρα πρέπει νὰ ὑπάγω εἰς τὸ ἔργον µου. 

Now it is necessary that I go {ο the work my. 

Τώρα πρέπει νὰ ὑπάγω εἰς τὸ γραφεῖόν µου. 

Now it is necessary that I go to the office my. 


108 MODERN GREEK MASTERY νι 


Conversation Exercise 


Oa εἶναι) ἕτοιμον ταχέως τὸ πρόγευμα ; πιστεύω, διότι 
πεινώ. Σᾶς ἤνοιξε" τὴν ὄρεξιν τὸ ψυχρὸν λουτρόν; Μᾶς 
προσεκάλεσεν ἡ ὑπηρέτρια εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα; ἸἹότε θὰ 
ἦναι' ἕτοιμον τὸ πρόγευμα; θὰ ᾖναι ἕτοιμον ταχέως. 

τὰ Σ 2 
Εἶναι καιρὸς va καθήσωµεν εἰς τὴν τράπεζαν; "Όταν 
> / » / / / Ν / 3 μ᾽ [4 7 
ἀνοίξητε τὸ χειρόμακτρόν σας τί τὸ κάµετε;' Θὰ ἁπλώ- 
σητε τὸ χειρόµακτρον εἰς τὰ γόνατά σας; Λάβετε" ἕν 
> / > \ \ 24 / / \ ? \ 4 
ἀπίδιον ἀπὸ τὴν ὀπωροθήκην. Ἱαθαρίζετε τὸ ὀπωρικὸν 
πρὶν ἢ φάγητε αὐτό; ᾿Αφοῦ φάγει τις πορτοκάλιον, 

\ / \ / \ / ᾽ \ A “a 
δὲν πρέπει νὰ βυθίζῃ τοὺς δακτύλους εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα; 

/ Ν ο) / \ / κ / nv κ 
Δύναμαι νὰ σᾶς γεµίζω τὴν κύλικα μὲ καφέν; “As δώσῃ 

la) oh / a : 
ὑμῖν ἡ ὑπηρέτρια κύπελλον τεῖου. Δὲν θὰ θέσητε βῶλον 

τ n A / / | 
σακχάρεως εἰς τὸ Téiov; σᾶς εὐχαριστῶ, οὐδέποτε βάλ- 

5 / 3 \ /.. Ν / / 2 / 
λω" σάκχαρι εἰς τὸ τέῖον. Πρὸς τούτοις θέσατε ὀλίγον. 
γάλα ἢ ἀφρόγαλα. Διατί κινεῖτε τὸν καφὲν μὲ τὸ κοχ- 
λιάριον; Τί θέλετε νὰ φάγητε; θὰ λάβω Ev ἀρτίσκον. 
“ ; \ ἢ / \ ἢ / \ ΄ 9 
Όταν σχίζητε τὸν ἀρτίσκον, Tov ἀλείφετε μὲ βούτυρον ; 
Θὰ ἀλέίψητε ἕν τεμάχιον φρυγανιᾶς; Διατί δὲν πίνετε 
τὸν καφέν; Διατί δὲν δύνασθε νὰ πίητε τὸν καφέν; 

5 \ 4 
Εἶναι ὁ καφὲς πολὺ θερμός; ᾿Βτελειώσατε τὸ πρόγευμά 

’ A \ εν νο \ / / / 
σας; ‘Odette πρὸς τὰ ὀπίσω τὸ κάθισμα σας; Σηκό- 

5 \ x / 6 ae / / / 
νεσθε ἀπὸ τὴν τράπεζαν ;" lod ὑπάγετε τώρα; Ἱ]ρέπει. 
νὰ ὑπάγητε ἀμέσως εἰς τὸ γραφεῖόὀν σας ; 


115 written either θὰ εἶναι or θὰ ἦναι, the latter being more correct. 
? The Greeks say “it has opened my appetite.” 8 What do you do with 
it. 4Take a pear; second aorist imperative. 51 never put sugar in 
tea. ϐ)Από properly governs the genitive, but is often, as here, followed 
by the accusative. 7 Immediately. 


READING 


EXERCISE 


109 


Reading Exercise 


To τεθραυσµένον πέταλον. 


Χωρικός τις ὑπῆγε μετὰ 


τοῦ υἱοῦ του, τοῦ μικροῦ 
lal / 
Θωμᾶ, εἰς τὴν πόλιν. Ιδού, 
3 δ 
εἶπε καθ᾽ ὁδόν, τεμάχιον πε- 
τάλου χαμαί, σήκωσε καὶ 
| / 
βάλε το εἰς τὸ θυλάκιόν 
᾿ 6 
σου. “EK, ἀπήντησεν ὁ Θω- 
nr / 
μᾶς, δὲν ἀξίζει τὸν κὀ- 
\ / . » / 
πον νὰ κύψῃ τις δι αὐτό. 
- 
O πατὴρ οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίθη 
ἀλλὰ κύψας ἐσήκωσε τὸ 
σίδηρον καὶ τὸ ἐφύλαξε ἐν 
“ / > ~ 
τῷ σακκιδίῳ Tov. Kis τὸ 
Qn / ο yy 
πρῶτον χωρίον ὅπου ἔφθα- 
σαν ἐπώλησεν αὐτὸ τῷ σιδη- 
ρουργῷ ἀντὶ πέντε λεπτῶν 
4 ο / 
καὶ ἠγόρασε δι αὐτῶν κερά- 
σια. 
ἐξηκολούθησαν 
Ὁ ἥλιος 
ἔκαιεν, οὐδαμοῦ δὲ ἀνεφαί- 


Ἔπειτα 
Ν / 
"τὸν δρόμον των. 


»/ 4 »/ / 
νετο οὔτε οἰκία οὔτε δάσος 
/ ς “ , 
οὔτε πηγή. O Θωμᾶς ἀπέ- 
\ “ / 
θνησκε σχεδὸν ἐκ τῆς δί- 
\ / / a 
Wns καὶ μόλις κατώρθονε va 

~ \ 
ἀκολουθῆ τὸν πατέρα του. 
΄ a / “ 

Τοτε οὗτος προσεποιήθη ὅτι 


κατὰ τύχην ἔρριψε χάμω 


The Broken Horseshoe. 


A certain peasant was 
going with his son, the lit- 
tle Thomas, to the city. 
“Look,” he said on the 
way, ‘“there’s a piece of a 
horseshoe on the ground, 
pick it up and put it in 
thy pocket.” “Oh,” an- 
swered Thomas, “it is 
not worth the trouble of 
stooping down for that.” 
The father answered noth- 
ing, but, stooping down, 
picked up he iron and 
put it in his bag. At the 
first village where they 
arrived he sold it to the 
blacksmith for five cen- 
times and bought cherries 
with them. Then they 
continued their walk. The 
sun was burning, but πο- 
where appeared either 
house or wood or spring. 
Thomas was almost dying 
of thirst and scarcely was 
able to follow his father. 
Then the latter pretended 


110 


‘O Θωμᾶς 
μετὰ τοιαύτης λαιμαργίας 


/ 
ἕνα κεράσιον. 


Ἀ ϑ ‘A Qn 
TO ἀνήρπασεν ἐκ τῶν χω- 

a) ς \ rn x 
μᾶτων ὡς ἐὰν ἀνεῦρε χρυσὸν 

\ \ 7 i, 3 \ 
καὶ TO ἔχωσε ταχέως εἰς τὸ 

3 / / 
στόμα του. ᾿Ολίγα βήματα 
/ έ \ 

παραιτέρω ὁ πατὴρ ἔρριψεν 
» ’ ΔΝ id lal ε 
ἄλλο κερᾶσιον, τὸ οποιον ο 


Θωμᾶς κατέπιε μετὰ τῆς. 


5 A 3 / \ 
αὐτῆς ὀρέξεως καὶ προθυ- 
/ an αμ] 
μίας. Tovto κατ᾽ ' ἐξακο- 
λούθησιν ἐπανελήφθη ἕως 
Οἱ > 7 / \ 
ov ἐξηντλήθησαν πάντα τὰ 
κεράσια. 


9 A « “Ὁ 

Αφοῦ ὁ Θωμᾶς ἔφαγε 

Ν \ na ς \ 
καὶ TO τελευταῖον ὁ πατὴρ 
3 / \ Meet. \ 
ἐστράφη πρὸφ αὐτὸν Kal 
5 / \ 
εἶπεν" “Βλέπε, ἐὰν ἅπαξ 

3 \ \ 
μόνον ἔκυπτες διὰ νὰ ση- 

, Ν / Ἅ, \ 
κώσῃς TO πέταλον, δὲν θὰ 


9 ’ A 
σο ἠναγκασμένος νὰ κύ- 


-and promptitude. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


to drop a cherry accident- 
ally onthe ground. Thom- 
as snatched it from the 
ground with as much ea- 
gerness as if he had found 
some gold, and thrust it 
into his mouth. <A few 
steps farther the father 
dropped another cherry 
which Thomas swallow- 
ed with the same relish 
This. 
was subsequently repeated 
until all the cherries were 
used up. 

After Thomas had eaten 
the very last one his father 
turned to him and said: 
“See, if thou hadst stooped 
once only to pick πρ the 
horseshoe then wouldst 
thou not have been com- 


Wns ἑκατοντάκις διὰ τὰ _ pelled to stoop a hundred 
κεράσια.) times for the cherries.” 
VERBS 


TeOpavopévor, perf. part. pass. Opava, to break. 


ὑπῆγε, aor. ind. πηγαίνω or ὑπάγω, to go. 
εἶπε, 2d aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 


‘onKkwoe, aor. imperat. σηκόνω(ώ-όω), to raise, pick up. 
βάλε, 2d aor. imperat. βάλλω, to put. — 
ἀπήντησε, aor. ind. ἀπαντώ(έω), to answer. 


VERBS 111 


ἀξίζει, pres. ind. ἀξίζω, to be worth. 


κύψῃ, aor. Subj. κύπτω, to bend, stoop. ~ 
ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to answer. 


κύψας, aor. part. κύπτω, to stoop. 


ἐσήκωσε, aor. ind. σηκόνω(ώ-όω), to pick up. 

ἐφύλαξε, aor. ind. φυλάττω, to put by, preserve. 
ἔφθασαν, aor. ind. φθάνω, to arrive at, reach. 
ἐπώλησε, aor. ind. πωλώ(έω), to sell. 

ἠγόρασε, aor. ind. ἀγοράζω, to buy. 

ἐξεκολούθησαν, aor. ind. ἐξακολουθώ(έω), to continue. 
ἔκαιε, imp. ind. καίω, to burn. 

ἀνεφαίνετο, imp. ind. ἀναφαίνομαι, to be visible, appear. 
ἀπέθνησκε, imp. ind. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 

κατώρθονε, imp. ind. κατορθόνω(ώ-όω), to succeed. 
ἀκολουθῆ, aor. subj. ἀκολουθώ[έω), to follow. 
προσεποιήθη, aor. ind. προσποιοῦμαι(έοµαι), to feign. 
ἔρριψε, aor. ind. ρίπτω, to throw, drop. 

ἀνήρπασε, aor. ind. ἀναρπάζω, to snatch. 

ἀνεῦρε, 24 aor. ind. ἀνευρίσκω, to discover. 

ἔχωσε, aor. ind. χώνω, to thrust into. 

κατέπιε, 2d aor. ind. καταπίνω, to swallow. 
ἐπανελήφθη, aor. ind. pass. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to repeat. 
ἐξηντλήθησαν, aor. ind. pass. ἐξαντλώ[έω), to exhaust. 
ἔφαγε, 2d aor. ind. τρώγω, to eat. 


ἐστράφη, aor. ind. mid. στρέφω, to turn. 

βλέπε, imp. imperat. βλέπω, to see. 

ἔκυπτες, imp. ind. κύπτω, to stoop. 

onkoons, aor. Subj. σηκόνω(ώ-όω), to pick up. 

θὰ ἦσο ἠναγκασμένος, perf. condit. pass. ἀναγκάζω, to 
compel. 

KU ns, aor. Subj. κύπτω, to stoop. 


112 MODERN GREEK MASTERY - 


Vocabulary Exercise 


This exercise should never be omitted, for it is ex- 
ceedingly useful as a means to the acquirement of a 
good stock of words. 

| 


Grammar 
DISTINCTION BETWEEN AORIST AND IMPERFECT 


The Greek verb distinguishes very clearly between 
a continued or habitual action and one that is per- 
formed but once, the former being expressed by the 
ποσό ΟΥ Laver ο the latter by the aorist tenses; 
thus: Πρκ το) καθ᾽ ἑκάστην (imperfect), he came every 
day; ἦλθε σήμερον (aorist), he came to-day. This dis- 
tinction is made not only in the past tenses, but in the 
present and future as well. Thus in the subjunctive, 
imperative, future, conditional, infinitive, and partici- 
ple, the present or imperfect form expresses a con- 
tinued or repeated action, while the aorist denotes a 
single or inceptive action, whether this be present, 
past, or future. In the indicative, however, the aorist 
can be used to indicate past time only, and past time 
in which there is no conception of duration or repe- 
tition. 

A careful comparison of the followi ing examples will 
make this use of the aorist clear. ; 

"Eypadov χθὲς ὅτε ἔκρουσέτις τὴν θύραν, 1 was writing 
yesterday when some one knocked at the door. 

Χθὲς ἔγραψα πέντε ἐπιστολάς, I wrote five letters 
yesterday. 


THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT 113 


Θέλω va σᾶς γράφω ἐπιστολὴν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην, 1 want 
to write you a letter every day. 

Θέλω νὰ γράψω πέντε ἐπιστολὰς σήμερον, 1 want to 
write five letters to-day. 

Θὰ σᾶς γράφω καθ᾽ ἑκάστην, I shall write you every 
day. 

Oa σᾶς γράψω ἐπιστολὴν αὔριον, I shall write you a 
letter to-morrow. 

Ἤθελον γράφει καλῶς ἐὰν εἶχον σπουδάσει ἐπιμελῶς, 
I would write well if I had studied STUN 

Ἤθελον γράψει πέντε ἐπιστολὰς ἐὰν εἶχον πα. I 
would write five letters if I had time. 

Γράφετε καλῶς, εἶναι σημεῖον ἀνθρώπου πεπαιδευμένου, 


| write well; it is the mark of an educated man. 


Γράψατε πέντε ἐπιστολὰς σήμερον, write five letters 


to-day. 


_ THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT—6 παρακείμενος καὶ ὑπερσυντελικός 


The perfect is formed usually, both in the active and 
in the passive, by the present of ἔχω with the aorist 
infinitive, thus: 


ACTIVE PASSIVE 
ἔχω λύσει ἔχομεν λύσει ἔχω λυθῇ ἔχομεν λυθῆ 
ἔχεις λύσει ἔχετε λύσει ἔχεις λυθῇ ἔχετε λυθῆ 
ἔχει λύσει ἔχουσι λύσει ἔχει λυθῆ ἔχουσι λυθῆ 


The perfect active is also formed occasionally by the 
present of ἔχω with the perfect participle passive in 
the accusative case, agreeing in gender and number 
with the object; as, for example: ἔχω λελυμένα τὰ 
σανδάλιά µου, | have untied my shoes. Similarly the 


8 


114 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 5: 


perfect passive may be formed by the present of εἶμαι. 
with the perfect participle pass agreeing with the 
subject in gender and number, as εἶμαι λελυμένος. 

The following ancient forms of the perfect are occa-_ 
sionally, though very rarely, employed in the most ele- 
vated literary style: 


ACTIVE PASSIVE 
λέλυκα λελύκαμεν λέλυμαι λελύμεθα 
λέλυκας λελύκατε λέλυσαι λέλυσθε 
λέλυκε λελύκασι(ν) λέλυται δλέλυνται 


The pluperfect is formed by εἶχον, the ΠΕΡ τος of 
ἔχω, with the aorist infinitive active or passive, thus: — 


ACTIVE PASSIVE 


εἶχον λύσει εἴχομεν λύσει εἶχον λυθῆ εἴχομεν λυθῆ — 
χ χομ χ η πείς | 


εἶχες λύσει εἴχετε λύσει εἶχες λυθῆ εἴχετε λυθῆ. 
εἶχε λύσει εἶχον λύσει εἶχε λυθῆ εἶχον λυθῆ 


: 
These tenses are not in very common use, all forms 


of past action being usually expressed by the imper- 
fect or aorist. 


a 


Exercise 


PERFECT 


"Ey ἀπολέσει τὸ βαλάντιόν µου. 

I have lost my purse. 

"ἔχεις ἀπολέσει τὸ βαλάντιόν σου. 
"Eyes ἀπολέσει τὸ βαλάντιόν του. 
[Ἔχομεν ἀπολέσει τὰ βαλάντιά µας. 

| Ἔχετε ἀπολέσει τὰ βαλάντιά σας. 
Ἔχουσιν ἀπολέσει τὰ βαλάντιά Tov. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 115 


The above could be equally well or better expressed 
by the aorist, thus: 


\ / 
᾿Απώλεσα, -ας, -ε τὸ βαλάντιόν µου, σου, του. 
\ / 
᾽Απωλέσαμεν, -ατε, -αν τὰ βαλάντιά µας, σας, των. 


PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE AND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE 


Εἶχον ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὸ ὡρολόγιόν µου, ὅταν ἀνέγνωσα 


τὴν γραφήν. (ς Προφυλαχθῆτε ἀπὸ τοὺς βαλαν- 
TLOTOMOUS.” 

I had already lost my watch, when I read the sign: 
“ Beware of pickpockets.” 

Eiyes ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὸ ὡρολόγιόν σου, ὅταν ἀνέγνωσας 
τὴν ἐπιγραφήν: “ Προφυλαχθῆτε ἀπὸ τοὺς βαλαν- 
τιοτόµους.᾽ 

Εἶχε ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὸ ὡρολόγιόν του, ὅταν ἀνέγνωσε τὴν 
ἐπιγραφήν, κτλ. 


KE ΡῈ / / μι 3 , 
Εἴχομεν ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὰ ὡρολόγιά µας, ὅταν ἀνεγνώσα- 


μεν τὴν αφή» κτλ. 


| ae ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὰ ὡρολόγιά σας, ὅταν ἀνεγνώσατε 


τὴν ἐπιγραφήν, κτλ. 

Εἶχον ἤδη ἀπολέσει τὰ ὡρολόηιά των, ὅταν ἀνέγνωσαν 
τὴν ἐπιγραφήν: “' Προφυλαχθῆτε ἀπὸ τοὺς βαλαν- 
TLOTOMOUS.” 


EGE LIBRARY 
a ἡ δὰ eR M ASS. 


BOSTON COLL 
CH! 


LESSON THIRTEENTH 
MAOHMA AEKATON TPITON 
Thought Exercise 


Κάθημαι τώρα, ἀλλὰ θὰ σηκωθῶ ἀμέσως. 
I am sitting now, but I shall rise immediately. 


a / / 
Σηκόνομαι ἐκ τοῦ καθίσµατός µου καὶ ἵσταμαι ὄρθιος. 


I rise from the chair my and stand upright. 
Προχωρῶ πρὸς τὴν θύραν. 

I proceed toward the door. 
 Πλησιάζω τὴν θύραν. 

I draw near the door. 

Φθάνω εἰς τὴν θύραν. 

I arrive at the door. 

Σταματῶ εἰς πὴν θύραν. 

I stop at the door. 

᾿Εκτείνω τὸν βραχίονά µου. 

I stretch out the arm my. 

Δράττομαι τοῦ μήλου τῆς θύρας. 

I take hold of the handle of the door. 
Κρατῶ τὸ μῆλον τῆς θύρας. 

I hold the handle of the door. 
XTpéhw TO μῆλον τῆς θύρας. 

I turn the handle of the door. 

Ἢ θύρα κινεῖται. 

The door moves. 


| 


| 
i 
| 


| 


‘ 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE _ 117 


᾿Ανοίγω τὴν θύραν. 

I open the door. 

Τώρα κλείω τὴν θύραν καὶ κλειδόνω αὐτήν. 
Now I close the door and lock it. 

Ἢ θύρα εἶναι κλειστὴ καὶ κλειδοµένη. 

The door is closed and locked. 

Ἐεκλειδόνω τὴν θύραν καὶ ἀνοίγω αὐτὴν πάλιν. 
I unlock the door and open it again. 

᾿Αφήνω τὸ μῆλον τῆς θύρας. 

I let go of the handle of the door. 
Ἐπιστρέφω εἰς τὸ κάθισµά µου καὶ κάθημαι πάλιν. 
I return to the chair my and sit down again. 


Conversation Exercise 


The student is reminded that the advantage to be derived from 
this exercise depends in a great measure upon the conscientiousness 
with which he follows the directions for its employment. The sen- 
tences given are chiefly in the forms of questions for which the 
student himself must find the answers. After having read the ques- 
tion once or twice until its meaning is thoroughly grasped, repeat it 
aloud and immediately give the reply. The questions should be 
varied by changing the tenses and also occasionally by turning them 
into commands, employing the different persons and numbers of the 
imperative and also the positive and negative forms. 


Τίς θὰ σηκωθῇ; Θὰ σηκωθῆτε ἀμέσως ; dev’ ση- 
κόνεσθε; Σηκωθεὶς ἐκ τοῦ καθίσµατος ἵστασθε; Προῦ- 
Ὁ 2 \ \ ff ec » / > / / 
χωρεῖτε" πρὸς τὴν θύραν, ὅταν ἤνοιξέ τις αὐτὴν; Tis 
” / \ \ / . / / \ / 
προὐχώρησε πρὸς τὴν θύραν; ᾿πλησίασέ τις τὴν θύ- 
ραν; ᾿ἈΕπλησιάσατε τὴν θύραν; ᾿Ἰφθάσατε εἰς τὴν 
θύραν πρὶν ἀνοίξωσιν αὐτὴν τὰ παιδία; Φθάσας εἰς 


1 Whence. 2 May also be written ἐπροχωρεῖτε, imp., Were you going 
toward the door when some one opened it ? 3 Children. 


118 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


τὴν θύραν θὰ σταµατήσητε ἐκεῖ; Διατί ἐκτείνετε τὸν 
βραχίονά σας ; τὸν ἐκτείνω ἵνα δράττωµαι τοῦ μήλου τῆς 
θύρας.' Διατί ἐξετείνατε τὸν βραχίονά σας ; τὸν ἐξέτεινα 
ἵνα δράξωµαι τοῦ μήλου τῆς θύρας. Μὴ κρατήσητε' τὸ 
μῆλον τῆς θύρας. Πρέπει νὰ στρέψητε τὸ μῆλον διὰ νὰ 
ἀνοίξητε τὴν θύραν; 
Εκλειδώσατε τὴν θύραν; 


δωµένον; "Οταν ξεκλειδώσητε τὴν θύραν τί κάµνετε; 


,ὔ \ / / / 
Ἰλείσας τὴν θύραν τί κάµνετε; 
5 \ \ 
Τί εἶναι κλειστὸν καὶ κλει- 


\ a 3 » 8 \ a Ὶ 
Καὶ ὅταν ἀνοίξητε αὐτὴν κρατεῖτε ἀκόμη τὸ μῆλον; 
7 \ A 3. A , 
᾿Ανοίξας τὴν θύραν ἀφήσατε τὸ μῆλον αὐτῆς; Τότε 
ἴω > / 3 / 5 Ν Υ / 
ποῦ ἐπεστρέψατε; ᾿Επεστρέψατε εἰς τὸ κάθισµά σας; 
/ / / 
Ὅταν ἐπεστρέψατε εἰς τὸ κάθισµα ἐκαθήσατε πάλιν ; 


11 stretch it out in order to take hold of the knob of the door; here used 
in a general sense—whenever I stretch it out I do so in order to take hold, 
etc. If it were meant to refer to this particular occasion only, the sentence — 
would read, τὸν ἐκτείνω ἵνα δράξωµαι τοῦ μήλου τῆς θύρας. "1η nega- 
tive commands the imperative form of the verb is used only in the second 
person plural of the imperfect; in all other cases the subjunctive form is 


used. (See p. 87.) 3 Still. 


᾿ Reading Exercise 


Σελὶμ ὁ I”. καὶ τὸ ἀγχίνουν 
παιδίον. 
δ 
Σελὶμ ὁ IY. (τρίτος) ἀπαν- 
/ ’ ¢ 8 / 
τήσας καθ᾽ ὁδὸν παιδίον 
/ ο 
ἐρχόμενον ἀπὸ τὸ σχολεῖον 
προσεκάλεσεν αὐτὸ καὶ τῷ 
ἠρώτησε ποῖον εἶναι τὸ µά- 
θηµά του. Τὸ παιδίον ἀνοῖ- 
ξαν τὸ βιβλίον του ἔδειξε 
\ / / \ \ 
τὸ µάθηµά του χωρὶς va 
γνωρίζῃ ὅτι ἧτο ὁ Σουλ- 
/ - 3 > \ 
Tavos. Οὗτος εἶπεν εἰς τὸ 


Selim III. and the Quick- | 
witted Boy. 


Selim III, meeting on 
the road a boy coming 
from school, called him 
and asked him what his 
lesson was. The boy, open-. 
ing his book, pointed out 
his lesson, without know- 
ing that it was the Sultan. 
He told the boy to read a 
little, and seeing the recita- 


READING EXERCISE 


/ \ » / 5 / 
παιδίον νὰ ἀναγνώσῃ ὀλί- 
γον, ἰδὼν δὲ τὴν ἀλάνθαστον 
ἀπαγγελίαν, τὴν ἀγχίνοιαν 
καὶ τὴν ὀξύτητα τοῦ πνεύ- 
patos του τῷ ἔδωκεν Ev 
φΦλωρίον. Τὸ παιδίον ev- 
θὺς ἐπέστρεψε τὸ φλωρίον 
εἰς τὸν Σουλτάνον, λέγων " 
“ Δὲν δύναμαι va δεχθῶ 

Ν a / ο aN 
τὸ δῶρόν σου καθ ὅτι, ἐὰν 
ὁ πατήρ µου μὲ ἐρωτήσῃ 

a a \ / \ 
ποῦ εὗρον τὸ Φλωρίον, δὲν 

\ 5 7 / Ν ~ 5 
θὰ ἠξεύρω τί θὰ τῷ ἀπο- 
κριθῶ." ὋὉ Σουλτάνος ἀπε- 
κρίθη: “Εἰπὲ ὅτι σοὶ τὸ 
ἔδωκεν εἷς ἄνθρωπος.” 
ἧς a 3 / 3 \ 

Eivat ἀδύνατον, εἶπε τὸ 
παιδίον, νὰ τὸ πιστεύσῃ, 
διότι ποῖος ἄνθρωπος χαρί- 
ζει εἰς μικρὸν παιδίον ἓν 
φλωρίον. Ὁ Σουλτάνος 


ἐπρόσθεσεν: “ Ἠπὲ ὅτι σοὶ 


« ‘ 
τὸ ἔδωκεν ὁ Σουλτάνος. 


« Τότε 
παιδίον, παντάπασι δὲν θέ- 


Vid. 


« «ἡ 
ἠρώτησεν ὁ Σουλτά- 


5 x 
μάλιστα, εἶπε TO 


λει τὸ πιστεύσει." 
ri,” 
| vos. «Διότι, ἀπεκρίθη τὸ 
| “παιδίον, οἱ Σουλτάνοι δὲν 
χαρίζουν ἕν φλωρίον, χαρί- 
ζουν πολλά" ὥστε τὸ φλω- 


/ \ { an \ / 9.4 
ploy τὸ ὁποῖον μὲ δίδεις, ἐὰν 


119 


tion without mistake and 
the readiness and acute- 
ness of his mind, gave him 
a fiorin. The boy straight- 
way returned the florin to 
the Sultan, saying: “I 
cannot accept thy gift, for 
the reason that, if my fa- 
ther asks me where 1 
found the florin, I shall 
not know what to reply 
to him.” The Sultan an- 
swered: “Say that a man 
gave it to thee.” “It is 
impossible,” said the boy, 
“that he should believe it, 
for what man makes a 
present of a florin to a 
little boy!” The Sultan 
added; ‘Say that the 
Sultan gave it to thee.” 
“Then especially,” said the 
boy, “ he will most certain- 
ly not believe it.” “Why ?” 
asked the Sultan. “Βα. 
cause,’ replied the boy, 
“sultans do not give one 
florin, they bestow many ; 
so that the florin which 
thou givest me, if it be 
the gift of a man, is 
much, but if it be that of 


120 


ἦναι δῶρον ἑνὸς ἀνθρώπου, 
εἶναι πολὺ, ἐὰν δὲ ἦναι 
ἑνὸς Σουλτάνου, εἶναι ὁλί- 
γον. Ἕνεκα τούτου λάβε 
τὸ φλωρίον σου ὀπίσω." 
Θαυμάσας ὁ Σουλτάνος 
τὴν φρόνιμον ἀπόκρισιν καὶ 
εὐτολμίαν τοῦ παιδίου, εἰς 
αὐτὸ μὲν ἐχορήγησε μεγά- 
λην ποσότητα φλωρίων, 
προσκαλεσάμενος δὲ τὸν 
πατέρα ἐζήτησε παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
τὸ παιδίον, τὸ ὁποῖον παρέ- 
λαβεν εἰς τὸ παλάτιον, διο- 
ρίσας διδασκάλους διὰ τὴν 
ἐμπαίδευσίν του: ἀφοῦ δὲ 
ἐξεπαιδεύθη ἀρκετὰ καὶ ἡλι- 
κιώθη, τὸ ἐτίμησε μὲ βαθ.- 
μοὺς τιμήσας 
ταὐτοχρόνως καὶ τὸν πα- 


μεγάλους, 


xX 3 / 
τέρα του μὲ βαθμὸν ἀνάλο- 
a ς / / 
γον τῆς ἱκανότητός του. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


a sultan, it is little. For 
that reason take back thy 
florin.” 


The Sultan, admiring the 
thoughtful answer and the 
courage of the boy, gave 
him a large sum of florins; 
and having sent for the 
father, begged of him the 
boy, whom he received 
into the palace, appointing 
teachers for his education ; 
and after he was educated © 
sufficiently and had grown 
older, honored him with 
lofty titles, honoring at the — 
same time his father with — 
a title proportionate to his 
ability. 


VERBS 


ἀπαντήσας, aor. part. ἀπαντῶ(άω). to meet. 


ἐρχόμενον, pres. part. ἔρχομαι, to come. 

προσεκάλεσε, aor. ind. προσκαλώ(έω), to call, invite. 
ἠρώτησε, aor. ind. para ae), to inquire of. 

ἀνοῖξαν, aor. part. ἀνοίγω, to open. 

ἔδειξε, aor. ind. δεικνύω (anciently δείκνυμι), to hited 
γνωρίζῃ, pres. subj. γνωρίζω, to know. 


ἦτο, imp. ind. εἶμαι, to be. 


ΣΩ͂Ν VERBS | 191 


εἶπε, 2d aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 
ἀναγνώσῃ, aor. subj. ἀναγινώσκω, to read. 
dv, 2d aor. part. βλέπω, to see. 


ἔδωκε, aor. ind. δίδω (anciently δίδωμι), to give. 

ἐπέστρεψε, aor. ind. ἐπιστρέφω, to return, give back. 

λέγων, pres. part. λέγω, to say. 

δεχθῶ, aor. subj. δέχομαι, to receive, accept. 

ἐρωτήσῃ. aor. Subj. ἐρωτῶ(άω), to ask, inquire of. 

εὗρον, 2d aor. ind. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

θὰ ἠξεύρω, imp. fut. ἠξεύρω, to know. 

θὰ ἀποκριθῶ, aor. fut. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 

ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. from the same. 

εὐπέ, aor. Imperat. λέγω, to say. 

πιστεὐση. aor, Sub]. πιστεύω, to believe. 

χαρίζει, pres. ind. χαρίζω, to bestow. 

ἐπρόσθεσε, aor. ind. προσθέτω, to add. 

θέλει πιστεύσει, aor. fut. πιστεύω, to believe. 

χαρίζουν (χαρίζουσι), pres. ind. χαρίζω, to bestow. 

δίδεις, pres. ind. δίδω, to give. 

λάβε, 2d aor. imperat. λαμβάνω, to take. 

θαυμάσας, aor. part. θαυμάξω, to admire, wonder. 

ἐχορήγησε, aor. ind. χορηγῶ(έω), to supply, furnish. 

προσκαλεσάμενος," aor. part. mid. προσκαλῶ(έω), to call, 
send for. 


This is the ancient form of the first aorist middle, now employed only 
occasionally in the literary style. If all the forms of this tense were used, 
the conjugation would be as follows: 

Ind. προσεκαλεσάμην, -σω, -σατο, -σάμεθα, -σασθε, - σαντο. 

‘Subj. προσκαλέσωμαι, -σῃ, -σηται, -σώμεθα, -σησθαι, -σωνται. 

Imperat. προσκάλεσαι, -σασθε, -σάσθων (1st pers. plur.), -σάσθω. 

-σάσθωσαν. 


Inf. προσκαλέσασθαι. 


Part. προσκαλεσάμενος, -σαμένη, -σάμενον. 


122 MODERN GREEK MASTERY ΄ 


ἐζήτησε, aor. ind. ζητῶ(έω), to ask, beg. 
παρέλαβε, 24 aor. ind. παραλαμβάνω, to receive. 
διορίσας, aor. part. διορίζω, to fix, appoint. 
ἐξεπαιδεύθη, aor. ind. pass. ἐκπαιδεύω, to educate. 
ἠλικιώθη, aor. Ind. ἠλικιόνομαι{οῦμαι-όομαι), to advance — 
in years. 
ἐτίμησε, aor. ind. τιμῶ(άω), to honor. 
τιμήσας, aor. part. of the same. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be made by the student in the manner pre- 
scribed. 


Grammar 


TuE AORIST OF PURE AND IMPURE VERBS 


Verbs are distinguished as pure or impure according 
as the final letter of the present stem (the character, 
ὁ χαρακτήρ) is a vowel (or diphthong) ου”. consonant. 
The two classes of verbs present certain differences in 
the formation of the aorist, active or passive, and the 
tenses derived from it. 

In pure uncontracted verbs (λύ-ω) the character re- 
mains unchanged in the aorist. In pure contracted, or 
perispome, verbs (κτυπῶ, d-a, κινῶ, έ-ω, ὑψῶ, ὁ-ω), the 
character is lengthened usually, so that a or e becomes 
η. and ο becomes ὦ. | 

In impure verbs the character undergoes certain 
changes, with most if not all of which the student 
should bythis time be practically familiar from having 
repeatedly encountered them in the preceding exer- 
cises. These changes are as follows: 


AORIST OF IMPURE VERBS 128 


ACTIVE 


8, 7, φ, and πτ are contracted with the following o 
of the aorist to yp. 


Ex. τρίβω, to rub, ἔτριψα 
πέμπω. to send, ἔπεμψα 
γράφω, to write, ἔγραψα 

κύπτω, to stoop, ἔκυψα 

| 


Υ, κ. χ. σσ, TT, aNd ox are contracted with the fol- 
lowing σ to &. 


Ex. ἀνοίγω, to open, ἤνοιξα 
πλέκω, to knit, ἔπλεξα 
διδάσκω, to teach, ἐδίδαξα 
βρέχω, to wet, ἔβρεξα 
πράττω, to make, do, ἔπραξα 


Three verbs in σσ or 17, Viz., ἐρέσσω, to row, πάσσω. 
to sprinkle, and πλάττω or πλάσσω, to form, take in 
the aorist active σα instead of ξα. 
| ᾿ δ, 6, τι, and ἕ are dropped before the σ of the aorist. 
| 


| Ex. σπεύδω, to hasten, ἔσπευσα 

πείθω, to persuade, ἔπεισα 

| θέτω, to put, ἔθεσα 
ἀγοράξω, to buy, ἠγόρασα 


| “A few verbs in ἕ form the aorist in £a, as νυστάζω, 
Ito be sleepy, ἐνύσταξα. Σαλπίζω, to trumpet, has 
Γἐσάλπιγξα. 

r, µ. v, and p are preserved, the o of the usual aorist 
termination being omitted. In this case the vowel im- 


194 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


mediately preceding the character is changed, e becom- 
ing ει, αι becoming a, and ἵ and ὕ being lengthened to 
¢ and v,a change that may affect the accent in cer- 
tain moods of the aorist. In the case of AA, one is 
dropped. 7 


Ex... ἀγγέλλω, to announce, ἤγγειλα 
περιμένω, to Wait, περιέµεινα 
διανέµω, to distribute, διένειµα 
σύρω, to draw, pull, ἔσυρα 
ξηραίνω, to dry, ἐξήρανα 
βάλλω, to put, ἔβαλα 


PASSIVE 


In pure uncontracted verbs the character undergoes 
no change, except, however, that verbs of this class 
frequently take a o between the character and the @ of 
the aorist termination: e.g. κλείω, to close, ἐκλείσθην : 
Opava, to break, ἐθραύσθην " ἀκούω, to hear, ἠκούσθην. 

The character in the case of contracted verbs is 
lengthened in the same way as in the active voice. 
The modifications as regards the character of the im. 
pure verbs are as follows: ) 


8, 7, and πτ are changed to ¢ before θ. 
Ex. τρίβω, to rub, ἐτρίφθην 
πέμπω, to send, ἐπέμφθην 
κάµπτω, to bend, ἐκάμφθην 
γ, K, σσ, TT, and ox are changed {ο χ. | 
Ex. ἀνοίγω, to open, ἠνοίχθην 
πλέκω, to knit, ἐπλέχθην 


AORIST OF IMPURE VERBS 125 


πράττω, to do, ἐπράχθην 
διδάσκω, to teach, ἐδιδάχθην ; 


ὃ, θ. τ. and change the character to σ before 0. 


Ex. σπεύδω, to hasten, ἐσπεύσθην 
πείθω, to persuade, ἐπείσθην 
θέτω, to put, ἐθέσθην 
ἀγοράζω, to buy, ἠγοράσθην 


Δ, µ, ν, p remain unchanged in the aorist except 
that in the case of AA one is dropped. In verbs with 
monosyllabic stem, if ε immediately precedes the char- 
acter it is changed to a (not to ev as in the active); in 
polysyllabic stems the e remains unchanged ; αι before 
ν is changed to a. 


| Ex. ἀγγέλλω, to announce, ἠγγέλθην 
| στέλλω, to send, ἐστάλθην 
σύρω, to draw, ἐσύρθην 
ξηραίνω, to dry, ἐξηράνθην 


_ Kava, to incline, πλύνω, to wash, and κρίνω, to 
judge, drop the ν before the @ of the aorist ; τείνω, to 
stretch, becomes ἐτάθην. 


| This completes the study of the regular verb, as far as it is neces- 
lsary for a proper comprehension and use of Modern Greek. The 
Istudent is earnestly advised to make himself thoroughly familiar 
lwith this section of the grammar, and to drill himself on the conju- 
gation by means of the grammatical exercises. 

A list of the irregular verbs, all the most important of which will 
have been learned by reason of their frequent recurrence in the 
reading and other exercises, will be given in the Appendix. 


LESSON FOURTEENTH 


MAOHMA AEKATON TETAPTON - 


Thought Exercise 


Θὰ ἀναγνώσω τὴν ἐφημερίδα. 

I will read the newspaper. 

"Eda δὲν ἔχει' ἀρκετὸν φῶς. 

Here there is not enough light. 

Πρέπει νὰ καθήσω πλησίον τοῦ παραθύρου. 

It is necessary that I sit near the window. 

᾿ Σηκόνομαι ἐκ τοῦ καθίσµατος κρατῶν τὴν ἐφημερίδα εἰς 
τὴν χεῖρά µου. ὮΝ 

I rise from the chair holding the newspaper in my 
hand. 

᾿Ωθῶ τὸ κάθισµα πρὸς τὸ παράθυρον. 

I push the chair toward the window. 

Τοποθετῶ τὸ κάθισµα ὥστε νὰ μὴ ἐμποδίζηται τὸ φῶς. - 

I place the chair so that not may be hindered th 
light. 

Κάμνει" ὀλίγον ο θὰ σύρω τὴν πολυθρόναν πμ 
σιέστερον εἰς τὴν θερμάστραν (φωτιάν). 

It is a little cold; I will draw the arm-chair nearer tc 
the stove (fire). 

Τώρα εἶμαι πολὺ ἀναπαυτικά. 

Now I am very comfortable. 


'Ἔχει, it has, is frequently employed in the sense of “there is,” lik 
the French @ ya, 5 It makes cold; compare the French il fait Froid. | 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 127 


Conversation Exercise 


5. Ἦν / 
ο Ti ἀναγνώσητε; ᾽Ανεγνώσατε τὴν ἐφημερίδα σή- 
| \ sh 1 \ / Naor 8 εν / 
΄µερον τὴν πρωΐαν; Δὲν δύνασθε νὰ ἴδητε ν᾿ ἀναγνώ- 
2 9 IQA \ »/ ? \ A / 
΄σητε;᾽ ὄχι, ἐδῶ δὲν ἔχει ἀρκετὸν φῶς. “ἕνεκα τούτου 
“πρέπει va καθήσητε πλησίον τοῦ παραθύρου, δὲν ἔχει 
| 4 3 “ > / θ 9 n / / aA 
οὕτω ;" "Όταν ἐγείρησθε' ἐκ τοῦ καθίσµατος τί κρατεῖτε 
εἰς τὴν χεῖρά σας; ἸΚρατῶν τὴν ἐφημερίδα εἰς τὴν χεῖρά 
σας τί κάμνετε ; ἐγείρομαι ἐκ τοῦ καθίσματος (Or, σηκό- 
| b) a / / > / ᾽ / 
Ίνομαι ἐκ τῆς καθέκλης). Llolav ἐφημερίδα ἀναγινώσκετε 
/ » ΄ A κο PES 29S ae 
᾿συνήθως; ἀναγινώσκω τακτικῶς τὴν “Ατλαντίδα τῆς 


Νέας “Ὑόρκης, τὸ “"Αστυ) τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν καὶ τὴν “Νέαν 
“Hyépav” τῆς Τεργέστης. ᾿Εὰν δὲν δύνασθε ν᾿ ἀναγνώ- 
> 3 Ν Ν - 3 7 \ / Ν x Me 
σητε εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ φῶς ὠθήσατε τὸ κάθισµα πρὸς τὸ παρά- 
/ \ > an \ / ταῦ: ο 
θυρον. Διατί δὲν ὠθεῖτε τὸ κάθισμα πλησιέστερον τοῦ 
παραθύρου, ὅταν ἀρχίζῃ νὰ νυκτόνη; διότι προτιμῶ" ν᾿ 
> / ς ς / Ν / / Ν » 
ἀνάπτῃ ἡ ὑπηρέτρια τὸ φωταέριον. Διατί δὲν κάθησθε 
πλησίον τοῦ παραθύρου; διότι κάμνει ψῦχος καὶ προ- 
τιμῶ νὰ μαι πλησίον τῆς θερμάστρας (τῆς φωτιᾶς). 
Διατί δὲν τοποθετεῖτε τὸ κάθισμα οὕτως ὥστε νὰ μὴ 
> / \ ~ > ~ \ \ ig / is \ 
ἐμποδίζηται τὸ φῶς ; εὐχαριστῶ διὰ τὴν ὑπόμνησιν, θὰ 
τὸ τοποθετήσω πλησίον τοῦ παραθύρου ὥστε νὰ μὴ ἐμπο- 
/ \ ‘al / “ \ / / 
δίζηται τὸ φώς. Νομίζετε ὅτι θὰ κάμῃ περισσότερον 
A ” 8 ο) > , 519 \ \ / / 5 
ψῦχος αὔριον ;" δὲν ἠξεύρω," ἀλλὰ τὸ πιστεύω, διότι εἶναι 
\ \ ΄ κε) ορ / A / 10 / 
καιρὸς νὰ παύσῃ ἡ ὑπέρμετρος ζέστη τοῦ θέρους." Διατί 


1 This morning. 2 Can you not see to read ὃ 3Isit not? * When 
you rise from the chair. ᾿Εγείρομαι belongs more to the literary style, but 


means the same 48 σηκόνομαι. 51 read regularly the ‘ Atlantis,” of 
New York, the “City,” of Athens, and the ‘New Day,” of Trieste. a 
prefer. 7 Thanks for the suggestion. 5 Do you think it will be colder 
to-morrow ? 31 donot know, but I think so. 10 Tt is time for the ex- 
cessive heat of summer to cease, 


128 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ῥγῶν' δὲν σύρετε τὴν πολυθρόναν πλησιέστερον τῆς θερ-. 


µάστρας; Σύρας τὴν πολυθρόναν πλησίον τῆς φωτιᾶς 


δὲν ἀναπαύεσθε καλλίτερον ;" σᾶς εὐχαριστῶ." 


\ Why, if you feel chilly (feeling chilly). 
fortable (lit., do you not rest better) ? 


Reading 


Φιλανθρωπία Λουδοβίκου 
ος 

Λουδοβίκος ὁ 1ΣΤ’., Ba- 
σιλεὺς τῆς Γαλλίας, ἐσυνεί- 
θιζε κατὰ τὸ παράδειγµα 
τοῦ πάππου του ᾿Ερρίκου 
A'., νὰ ἀναμιγνύηται μετὰ 
τοῦ λαοῦ του, καὶ νὰ ἐπι- 
σκέπτηται τὴν κατοικίαν 
τοῦ πτωχοῦ καὶ τὴν καλύ- 
"Eve δέ 


.) 7 5 % vg 
ποτε ἐθήρευεν εἰς τὰ δάση 


βην τοῦ χωρικοῦ. 


τῆς Βερριέρας, ἀπήντησεν 
εἰς μοναξίαν νέον τινα, ὅστις 
μὴ γνωρίζων αὐτὸν ἔπεσε 
Ν lal la) > a / 
πρὸ τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ λέ- 
(Δ x \ 4 a 
γων " ιὰ TO ὄνομα τοῦ 
ο / Υ͂ 
Θεοῦ δὸς με ἐλεημοσύνην, 
\ ¢ 
καὶ μὴ ἀμφιβάλλης ὅτι θὰ 
ς / > \ / 22 
uTayn εἰς καλὸν µέρος. 
εὐ a 
“Kal δὲν ἠμπορεῖς καλλί- 
99 αν Ὁ ς 
Tepa,” τῷ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς, 
ie το ὩΣ 3 / 
ἀντὶ νὰ ζητῆς ἐλεημοσύνην, 
\ > / / ϕ 
νὰ ἐργάζησαι ;᾽ “Nat, κύ- 


. 


2 Are you not more com- 
8 “ Yes” implied in the thanks. 
Ρ 


Exercise 


Benevolence of Louis 
XVI. 

Louis XVI., King of 
France, was accustomed, 
after the example of his 
grandfather, Henry ΤΝ. to 
mix with his people απά 
to visit the home of the 
poor and the cabin of the 
peasant. While he was 
once hunting in the for- 
ests of Berry, he met in 
an unfrequented place a 
young man who, not know- 
ing him, fell at his. feet, 
saying: * For the name of 
God give me an alms, and 
do not doubt that it will 
go to a good purpose.” 
“And canst thou not do 
better,” said the King to 
him, “instead of begging 
an alms, to work?” “ Yes, 
sir, but I am compelled to 


READING 


\ = / \ 
ple, πλην εἶμαι βιασμένος νὰ 
κάθηµαι εἰς τὸν οἶκον, διότι 
ιά 
ὁ μὲν πατήρ µου ἀποθνή- 


΄σκει ἡ δὲ μήτηρ µου καὶ τὰ 


i] 


| 


/ / 
πέντε ἀδέλφιά µου κοίτον- 


ται ἄρρωστα." ''"᾿Αλήθειαν 


᾿ μὲ λέγεις 3” “Ναί, κύριε, τὴν 


| 
] 
| 


i 
᾿ 
| 


ἡ 
i] 


‘O Aov- 


δοβῖκος TO ἔδωκεν ἐλεημο- 


n / 
πᾶσαν ἀλήθειαν." 


/ \ 
σύνην τινα, πλὴν συλλογι- 
ζόμενος ὅτι μικρὸν αὕτη 
δ / XN ἰοὺ 
ἤθελε χρησιμεύσει ἂν ἦσαν 
ο id 4 
ἀληθεῖς οἱ λόγοι του, τὸν 
ἠρώτησε πάλιν ' “ Καὶ εἶναι 
μακρὰν ἡ κατοικία σου; 
co VN / / 
ως τρία τεταρτηµόρια 
᾿ 4 
λεύγης," ἀπεκρίθη ὁ νέος. 
4 \ 9 4 
ϱ βασιλεὺς. ἀπεφάσισε 
νὰ βεβαιωθῇ αὐτοπροσώ- 
\ a / 
πως περὶ τοῦ πράγματος 
ή / a 
καὶ ὁδηγούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ 
/ 3 ’ lal \ 
νέου, δι’ ἀκανθῶν καὶ τρι- 
/ 
βόλων, ἔφθασεν εἰς ἄχυρο- 
/ / 
καλύβην τινα πανταχὀθεν 
» / \ 
ἄσκεπον, ἔνθα θρηνικαὶ φω- 
ναὶ ἀντήχησαν κατὰ πρῶτον 
> A 9S κ ’ \ 
εἰς τὰ ὦτά Tov: εἰσελθὼν 
>] 9 5 7 / 
δ᾽ εἶτα εἶδε γέροντά τινα 
ἡμιθανῆ κείμενον ἐπὶ τῶν 
/ / 
ἀχύρων, καὶ παιδία ἡμίγυ- 
\ 1 > n \ \ 
μνα, τὰ μὲν ἀσθενῆ, τὰ δὲ 


ζητοῦντα ἄρτον παρὰ τῆς 
9 


EXERCISE 


129 


stay idle at home because 
my father is dying and my 
mother and my five broth- 
ers and sisters are lying 
sick.” ‘“ Art thou telling 
me the truth?” ‘Yes, sir, 
the whole truth.” Louis 
gave him an alms, but, re- 
flecting that it would be 
of little service if his 
words were true, asked 
him again: “And is thy 
house far?’ ‘Upwards 
of three-quarters of a 
league,” replied the young 
man. The king resolved 
to assure himself in person 
of the matter, and, guided 
by the young man through 
the briars and thistles, ar- 
rived at a thatched hovel 
unprotected on all sides, 
where plaintive voices first 
sounded in his ears. En- 
tering then, he saw the 
old man lying half dead 
on the straw, and _half- 
naked children, some sick, 
others begging bread of 
their wretched mother, 
who. besides tears had 
nothing else to give them. 


190 


ἀθλίας μητρός των, ἥτις 
ἄλλο παρὰ δάκρυα δὲν εἶχε 
Κινη- 


θεὶς δ᾽ εἰς οἶκτον ὁ Λουδο- 


\ ,ὔ > > / 
να δώση εις αυτα. 


A \ 
Bikos διεµοίρασεν εἰς αὐτοὺς 
ἀμέσως ὅσα χρήματα εἶχε 
μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, λυπούμενος μά- 
λιστα ὅτι δὲν ἐκράτει πλει- 
; ' 
otepa. ᾿Επιστρέψας δ᾽ εἰς 

A / 7 \ 
τὴν πόλιν διηγήθη TO συμ- 

Ν an \ > 
βεβηκὸς τοῦτο εἰς τὴν οἶκο- 

” / 
γένειάν του καὶ προθύμῳ 

/ - 
πάντων γνώμῃ ἐν τῷ ἅμα 
54 > a 2 \ \ 
ἔπεμψεν αὐτοῖς ἰατρὸν καὶ 

vt A 
πάντα τὰ ἀναγκαῖα. 


MODERN GREEK 


MASTERY 


Being moved to compas- 
sion, Louis distributed to 
them immediately what+ 
ever money he had with 
him, grieving exceeding- 
ly that he did not have 
more. Having returned © 
to the city, he related this 
occurrence to his house- — 
hold, and, with the ready 
approval of all, immedi- 
ately sent them a _phy- 
sician and everything nec- 
essary. 


VERBS 


ἐσυνείθιζε, imp. ind. συνειθίζω, to be accustomed. 
ἀναμιγνύηται, pres. subj. mid. ἀναμιγνύω, to mix. 
ἐπισκέπτηται, Pres. Subj. ἐπισκέπτομαι, to pay a visit. 
ἐθήρευε, imp. ind. θηρεύω, to hunt. 

ἀπήντησε, aor. ind. ἀπαντῶ(άω), to meet. 

γνωρίζων, pres. part. γνωρίζω, to know. 

ἔπεσε, aor. ind. πίπτω, to fall. 

λέγων, pres. part. λέγω, to say. 

δός, aor. imperat. δίδω, to give. 

ἀμφιβάλλῃς, pres. subj. (negat. command) ἀμφιβάλλω. 
Oa ὑπάγῃ. aor. fut. πηγαίνω (or ὑπάγω), to go. 
ἠμπορεῖς, pres. ind. ἠμπορῶ[έω), to be able. 


εἶπε, aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 


ζητΏς, pres. subj. ζητῶ(έω), to beg. 


VERBS 191 


.ἐργάζησαι, pres. subj. ἐργάζομαι, to work. 
᾿βιασμένος, perf. part. pass. βιάζω, to compel. 


κάθημαι, pres. subj. κάθημαι, to sit, dwell, be idle. 


ἀποθνήσκει, pres. ind. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 
xoitovtat, pres. ind. κοίτοµαι, to lie down. 
λέγεις, pres. ind. λέγω, to say. 


ἔδωκε, aor. ind. δίδω, to give. 


συλλογιζόμενος, pres. part. συλλογίζομαι, to reflect. 
ἤθελε χρησιμεύσει, aor. condit. χρησιμεύω, to serve, be 
of use. 


ἦσαν, imp. ind. εἶμαι, to be. 


ἠρώτησε, aor. ind. ἐρωτῶ(έω), to ask, inquire. 
ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 
ἀπεφάσισε, aor. ind. ἀποφασίζω, to resolve, decide. 


| βεβαιωθῇ, aor. subj. mid. βεβαιόνω(όω-ῶ), to assure. 


ὁδηγούμενος. pres. part. pass. odnya(éw), to guide. 
ἔφθασε, aor. ind. φθάνω, to arrive. 
ἀντήχησαν, aor. ind. ἀντηχῶ(έω), to resound. 


εἰσελθών, 2d aor. part. εἰσέρχομαι, to enter. 


εἶδε, 2d aor. ind. βλέπω, to see. 
κείμενον, pres. part. κεῖμαι, to lie down. 


 ζητοῦντα, pres. part. neut. plur. ζητῶ(έω), to beg. 


εἶχε, imp. ind. ἔχω, to have. 

δώσῃ, aor. subj. δίδω, to give. 

κινηθείς, aor. part κινοῦμαι(έομαι), to be moved, agitated. 
διεµοίρασε, aor. ind. διαµοιράζω, to distribute. 
λυπούμενος, pres. part. λυποῦμαι{έομαι), to be sorry. 
ἐκράτει, imp. ind. κρατῶ(έω), to hold, keep. 
ἐπιστρέψας, aor. part. ἐπιστρέφω, to return, go back. - 
διηγήθη, aor. ind. διηγοῦμαι{έομαι), to relate. 

ἔπεμψε, aor. ind. πέµπω, to send. 


132 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be done by the student in the manner previously 
indicated. 


Grammar 


Tue CARDINAL NUMBERS—Td ἀπόλυτα ἀριθμητικά 


The cardinal and ordinal numbers in the following 
lessons should be learned by heart and repeated until 
they become perfectly familiar to the student. Read 
the first five numbers over aloud several times, then 
try to repeat them without looking at the book; when 
these can be recited and written without hesitation, 
go on to the next five, learn them and then repeat the 
ten, and so on up to twenty. Now learn the tens, five 
at a time, up to one hundred, and then the hundreds. 
Try to associate the Greek*names in the mind, not 
with the English equivalents, but with the Arabic 
numerals. After the numbers have been learned so 
that counting is easy, write down several Arabic fig- 
ures at random and say the Greek names for them, 
writing at the same time the Greek figures under the 
Arabic ones. These Greek figures are simply the 
letters of the alphabet in their regular order, those 
with a dash above the line and to the right represent- 
ing numbers under 1000, while those with a dash 
below the line and to the left stand for numbers of 
1000 or upward. The signs for 6, 90, and 900 are 
letters of the ancient (preclassical) alphabet; they are 
ς or στ’ (στίγμα, originally the digamma, δίγαμµα). 6, 
4 (koma), 90, and Ἄ (cau), 900. The Greek figures 


THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 133 


ΔΥῸ less commonly used than the Arabic, nevertheless 
they occur sufficiently often in Greek books and news- 
papers to make it advisable to learn them. 


1 α eis, µία, ἕν 
2 B δύω or δύο 
 γ τρεῖς, τρία 
4 8 τέσσαρες (τέσσαρα) 
5 ε΄ . πέντε 
ος ς ἕξ 
τ «ἑπτά 
| Ω ; : 5 
8. η΄ ὀκτώ 
9 6 ἐννέα ᾿ 
10- + δέκα 
11 ια ἕνδεκα 
12 ιβ’ δώδεκα 
19 υγ δεκατρεῖς(τρία) . 
| 14 ιδ΄ δεκατέσσαρες(τέσσαρα) 
15 we δεκαπέντε 
16 us δεκαέξ 
17 ιζ δεκαεπτά 


18 (η δεκαοκτὠ 

19 ιθ΄ δεκαεννέα 

20 κ΄ εἴκοσι(ν) 

21 κα εἴκοσι (καὶ) εἷς, µία, ἕν 


22 κβ' εἴκοσι (καὶ) δύο 

30 λ΄ τριάκοντα (τριάντα) 

40 μ' τεσσαράκοντα (σαράντα) 
50 ν΄ πεντήκοντα (πενῆντα) 

060 ξ΄ ἑξήκοντα (ἑξῆντα) 

70 ο΄ ἑβδομήκοντα (ἑβδομῆντα) 
80 π΄ ὀγδοήκοντα (ὀγδοῆντα) 


184 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


90 π΄ ἐννενήκοντα (ἐννενῆντα) 


100 ρ' ἑκατόν 


101 ρα ἑκατὸν (καὶ) εἷς, µία, ἕν 
200 σ΄ διακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
300 τ΄ τριακόσιοι, -αι, -a 
400 ν΄ τετρακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
500. ¢’ πεντακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
600 χ΄ ἑξακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
700 ψ' ἑπτακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
800 ω΄ ὀκτακόσιοι, -αι, -α 
900 ΄ ἐννεακόσιοι, -αι, -ᾱ 
1,000 ja χίλιοι, -at, -ᾱ 
2,000 8  bdvo χιλιάδες 
10,000 «4 δέκα χιλιάδες 
1,000,000 ἕν ἑκατομμύριον 
9.000.000 δύο ἑκατομμύρια 


The numbers in parentheses from 90 to 90 are 
the abbreviated forms of the vernacular, and are 
those most commonly heard in ordinary conversa- 
tion. 

The numbers 1, 6, 7, and 100, with their decimal mul- 
tiples, take the rough breathing; all the others begin- 
ning with a vowel have the smooth breathing. 

The numbers 1, 3, 4, all the hundreds from 200 up- 
ward, and 1000 are declined as adjectives. When un- 
accompanied by a noun, as in counting, ciphering, and 
to express the year, the neuter forms of these numerals 
are employed. The thousands are declined as noun 
(χιλιάς, gen. χιλιάδος) and are properly followed by th 
genitive of the noun; in ordinary conversation, how- 
ever, the nominative plural is usually employed. 


THE CARDINAL NUMBERS 135 


The numbers 1, 3, and 4 are declined as follows: 


Masc. Fem. Neut. ους Neut. Masc. and Fem. Neut. 
- / “ a / / / 
Nom. εἷς μία ἕν τρεῖς, τρία τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα 
Gen. ἑνός μιᾶς ἑνός τριῶν τεσσάρων 
Dat. évi μιᾷ ἑνί τρισί(ν) τέσσαρσι(ν) 
L 


Acc. ἕνα μίαν &(a) τρεῖς, τρία τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα 


The following are the formulz used in working out 
arithmetiéal problems: 


54+3=8, πέντε καὶ τρία ὀκτώ. 

93 + 91 -- 44, εἴκοσι τρία καὶ εἴκοσιν ἕν σαράντα τέσ- 
σαρα. 

12—4=8, δώδεκα πλὴν τέσσαρα ὀκτώ. 

94. 91 = 8, εἴκοσι τέσσαρα πλὴν εἴκοσιν ἕν τρία. 

5.Χθ-- 18, τρία ἐπὶ ἕξ δεκαοκτώ. 


19 Χχ T= 84, δώδεκα ἐπὶ ἑπτὰ ὀγδοῆντα τέσσαρα. 


18 --- 6 -- 8, δεκαοκτὼ διὰ ἕξ τρία. 

900 --- 4 -- ὅ0, διακόσια διὰ τέσσαρα πενῆντα. 
Υ16 -- 4, 
81 = 9, 
V8 = 2, ἡ κυβικὴ ρίζα τοῦ ὀκτὼ εἶναι δύο. 

Υ1000 = 10, ἡ κυβικὴ ρίζα τοῦ χίλια εἶναι δέκα. 

The interest on $500 αὖ 6 per cent. per annum is $30. 
Ὃ τόκος πεντακοσίων δολλαρίων πρὸς ἕξ τοῖς ἑκατὸν 


ἡ τετραγωνικὴ ρίζα τοῦ δεκαὲξ εἶναι τέσσαρα. 
ἡ τετραγωνικὴ ρίζα τοῦ ὀγδοῆντα ν εἶναι ἐννέα. 


λ 3 Ἂν / 
τὸ ἔτος εἶναι τριάντα δολλάρια. 
The interest on $200 at 5 per cent. per annum is $10. 
¢ / / / \ / a e Ν \ 
Ο τόκος διακοσίων δολλαρίων προς πέντε τοῖς EKATOV TO 


ἔτος εἶναι δέκα δολλάρια. 


1896, χίλια ὀκτακόσια ἐννενήκοντα ἕξ. 
1776, χίλια ἑπτακόσια ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ. 


196 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


1620, χίλια ἑξακόσια εἴκοσι. 

1492, χίλια τετρακόσια ἐννενήκοντα δύο. 
100 B.c., ἑκατὸν πρὸ Χριστοῦ (a. Χ.). 
200 A.D., διακόσια μετὰ Χριστόν (μ. Χ.). 


Grammatical Exercise 


The repetition of the multiplication table is an ος. 
cellent means of acquiring fluency in the use of the 
cardinal numbers; thus: 


A yee 3 \ ray / 7 3 x / ff ὃ ’ὔ 3 4 / ο 
vo ἐπὶ ἕν δύο, δύο ἐπὶ δύο τεσσαρα, δύο ἐπὶ τρία ἕξ, 
7 b] \ / . 7 / > \ / δέ ὃ , 3 Ν A 
δύο ἐπὶ τέσσαρα ὀκτώ, δύο ἐπὶ πέντε δέκα, δύο ἐπὶ ἕξ 
ὃ 7 ὃ ὃ / 3 \ ς \ / ὃ / ο) \ > \ ὃ / 
WOEKA, δύο ἐπὶ ἑπτὰ δεκατέσσαρα, νο ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ δεκαέξ, 

ὃ / 3 4 ’ / 7 / 3 \ ὃ 7 ” / 5 Α, δε 
VO ἐπὶ ἐννέα δεκαοκτώ, δύο ἐπὶ δέκα εἴκοσι, δύο ἐπὶ ἕνδε. 
” / / ο Ὁ / ffs / 
κα εἴκοσι δύο, δύο ἐπὶ δώδεκα εἴκοσι τέσσαρα. 
T / 3 οἵ ἃ / / 3 \ ὃ / ς / > x 7 > ͵ 
pia ἐπὶ ἕν τρία, τρία ἐπὶ δύο ἕξ, τρία ἐπὶ τρία ἐν- 
νέα, κτλ. 
Π: / > ae οἳ / V4 5 % ὃ , 9 / 
ἐσσαρα ἐπὶ ἕν τέσσαρα, τέσσαρα ἐπὶ δύο ὀκτώ, κτλ. 
Tiz ΑΤΙΑ / / > 3 / / / δν ον ος 
έντε ἐπὶ ἕν πέντε, πέντε ἐπὶ δύο δέκα, πέντε ἐπὶ τρία 


/ 
δεκαπέντε, κτλ. 


Work out other problems in mental arithmetic, in division, addi- 
tion, and subtraction, after the formule above given. Set down a 
number of figures at random, or dates of well-known events, and 
translate them orally and in writing into Greek. : 


LESSON FIFTEENTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AEKATON IEMIITON 


Thought Exercise 


᾿Αρχίζω τὴν μελέτην τοῦ ἑλληνικοῦ µου µαθήµατος. 
I begin the study of my Greek lesson. 

Λαμβάνω τὸ βιβλίον ἐκ τῆς βιβλιοθήκης. 

I take the book from the book-case. 

Κάθημαι εἰς τὸ γραφεῖόν µου. 

I sit down at my desk. 

᾿Ανοίγω τὸ βιβλίον. 


I open the book. 


Ἀτρέφω εἰς τὸ δέκατον πέμπτον μάθημα εἰς τὴν ἑξηκοστὴν 
τρίτην σελίδα. 

I turn to the fifteenth lesson at the sixty-third page. 

᾿Αρχίζω ν᾿ ἀναγινώσκω. 

I begin to read. : 

᾿Αρχίξων μὲ τὴν πρώτην φράσιν κάμνω τὴν κίνησιν ἡ 
ὁποία ἐκφράζεται δι αὐτῆς. 

Beginning with the first phrase I make the movement 
which is expressed by it. 


᾿Επαναλαμβάνω τὰς λέξεις καὶ τὴν ἀντιστοιχοῦσαν κίνη- 
σιν ἕως οὗ ἀμφότερα στενῶς συνδεθώσιν ἐν τῇ δι- 
/ 
αγνοία µου. 
I repeat the words and the corresponding movement 
until both are closely bound together in my mind. 


198 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Οὕτω θὰ μάθω νὰ ὁμιλῶ τὰ ἑλληνικὰ ὡς τὴν µητρικήν. 
µου γλῶσσαν. 
So I shall learn to speak Greek as my mother tongue. 


Conversation Exercise 


Before beginning this exercise the student will do 
well to learn the ordinal numbers as given in the 
grammatical section. In his answers to the questions 
he should vary the lesson and page numbers, remem- 


bering that µάθηµα is neuter and σελίς (ace. σελίδα) is 
feminine. 


Τί ἀρχίζετε τώρα; Ἐπιθυμεῖτε' ν᾿ ἀρχίσητε τὴν µε- 
λέτην τῆς ἑλληνικῆς γλώσσης; Πότε" θὰ ἀρχίσητε τὴν 
μελέτην τοῦ ἑλληνικοῦ σας µαθήµατος; Τί ἐλάβετε ἐκ 
τῆς βιβλιοθήκης; ἸΠόθεν" ἐλάβετε τὸ βιβλίον τοῦτο; 
Λάβετε τὸ βιβλίον σας, παρακαλῶ, καὶ ἀρχίσατε τὴν 
μελέτην τοῦ µαθήµατός σας. ᾿Αρχίζων τὴν μελέτην τοῦ 
ἑλληνικοῦ σας µαθήµατος ποῦ κάθησθε; ἸΚαθήσατε εἰς 
τὸ γραφεῖόν σας, παρακαλῶ, καὶ ἀνοίξατε τὸ βιβλίον. 
Eis ποῖον µάθηµα θὰ στρέψω; πρέπει νὰ στρέψητε εἰς 
τὸ πρῶτον µάθηµα. Kis ποίαν σελίδα θὰ εὕρω" τὸ ἕκτον 
μάθημα; Τὸ εἰκοστὸν μάθημα εὑρίσκεται εἰς τὴν ἑκατο- 
στὴν ἐννενηκοστὴν τετάρτην σελίδα, δὲν ἔχει οὕτω, Τὸ 
δέκατον ἔννατον µάθηµα ἀρχίζει εἰς τὴν ἑκατοστὴν ὀγδοη- 
κοστὴν ἑβδόμην σελίδα, δὲν ἔχει οὕτω; θὰ εὕρητε τὸ δέ- 
κατον ὄγδοον µάθηµα εἰς τὴν ἑκατοστὴν ἑβδομηκοστὴν 
δευτέραν σελίδα. Etpav τὴν θέσιν σας" εἰς τὴν πεντη- 


1Do you wish. 2 When. 3" Whence. *Shall I find. Second 
aorist future of εὑρίσκω, to find. 3518 it not so? δ Having found 
your place. 


READING EXERCISE 139 


Ανα- 
Eds 


A / 9 / ws / phon ae , 4 
ποιον στιχον πρεπευ ν αρχισω V αναγνωσω; Οταν 


\ 3 / / 5 / » » / 1 
κοστὴν ὀγδόην σελίδα ἀρχίσατε ν᾿ ἀναγνώσητε. 
/ > / > / 5 \ “ / 

γνώσατε ὀλίγον ἀρχίζων εἰς τὸν ἕβδομον στίχον. 


ἀρχίσητε τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν" τῆς πρώτης φράσεως, τί κά- 
μνετε; Θὰ κάµητε τὰς κινήσεις αἱ ὁποῖαι ἐκφράζονται 
διὰ τῶν φράσεων; ᾿Επανελάβετε' τὰς λέξεις καὶ τὰς 
ἀντιστιχούσας κινήσεις ἕως οὗ ἀμφότερα στενώς συνδε- 
θῶσιν ἐν τῇ διανοίᾳ cas; Πῶς θὰ δυνηθῆτε νὰ συνδέ- 
σητε στενώς τὰς λέξεις καὶ τὰς ἀντιστιχούσας κινήσεις 
ἐν τῇ διανοίᾳ σας; θὰ δυνηθῶ νὰ κάμω τοῦτο ἐπανα- 
λαμβάνων συγχρόνως τὰς λέξεις καὶ τὰς ἀντιστιχούσας 
Εἶναι ἡ 


/ / > ς / a 
κινήσεις. Tis εἶναι ἡ μητρική σας γλωσσα; 


ἀγγλικὴ ἡ μητρική σας γλώσσα; OA δυνηθῆτέ ποτε νὰ 
ὁμιλῆτε τὴν ἑλληνικὴν ὡς τὴν µητρικήν σας γλῶσσαν; 
οὐδέποτε:' ἀλλὰ πιστεύω νὰ ὁμιλήσω τὰ ἑλληνικὰ οὕ- 


“ \ A 
τως ὥστε πάντες νὰ μὲ ἐννοώσιν. 


5 Never. 


1 Begin to read. 2 Line. 


Reading 


Ἐέρξης καὶ οἱ ψευδεῖς ἀδά- 
µαντες. 


jg 4 e \ A 
Ξέρξης ὁ βασιλεὺς τῆς 
Περσίας, θέλων νὰ ἐκλέξῃ 
σύμβουλον εἰλικρινῆ καὶ 
ἱκανὸν, ἐπενόησε τὸ ἀκό- 
λουθον τέχνασμα" ἑσπέραν 
Ν 
τινα προσεκάλεσεν εἰς τὸ 
” 
avopas 


/ / / 
παλάτιον του πέντε 


τῆς 


πρωτευούσης, οἵτινες 


3716 reading. 


4 Have you repeated 9 


“δ So that everybody may understand me. 


Exercise 


Xerxes and the False 
Diamonds. 


Xerxes, King of Persia, 
wishing to select an up- 
right and able counsel- 
lor, devised the follow- 
ing plan: One evening 
he called to his palace 
five men of the capital 
who were regarded as 


140 


la) δ e la) 
ἐθεωροῦντο ὡς οἱ μᾶλλον 
a 
ἔξυπνοι πάντων. 
a i) C pa / 
‘A dod δὲ ἦλθον, ὁ Ξέρξης 
κ \ 
δείξας εἰς αὐτοὺς τὴν ἀριστε- 
A \ 
ράν του χεῖρα, εἰς τοὺς δακ- 
/ ο (4 / ./ 
τύλους τῆς οποίας ἔλαμπον 
/ 
πέντε ἀδάμαντες θαυμασίου 
5 Ν ΄ὔ 
μεγέθους, εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" 
“Sas προσεκάλεσα ἐν- 
a ss \ / } / 
ταῦθα καὶ τοὺς πέντε, ἐλπί- 
Ψ / \ 1/ λαο 
ζων ὅτι θέλετε μοὶ εἴπει τὴν 
/ \ 
ἀλήθειαν. Brémete τοὺς 
/ > / 
πέντε τούτους ἀδάμαντας, 
ο fo! \ 
θέλουσι σᾶς δοθῆ ὡς ἀμοιβὴ 
an 3 / , 
τῆς εἰλικρινείας σας. Λέγε- 
\ an 
τε, τί στοχάζεσθε περὶ τῆς 
͵ ας τ 5) 
δυνάμεως καὶ τῆς δόξης μου. 
td 
Καὶ οἱ μὲν τέσσαρες κα- 
fal / 
ταθαμβωθέντες ἐκ τοῦ µεγέ- 
a / 
θους καὶ τῆς ὡραιότητος 
A ‘ , a 
τών ἀδαμάντων καὶ ἐκ τῆς 
> Ms vA > og ος] 
ἰδέας, ὅτι ἠδύναντο ν᾿ ἄποκ- 
/ 
τήσωσι κἀνένα ἐκ τούτων 
ἔσπευσαν ν᾿ ἀποκριθώσιν 
/ © x 
ἀλληλοδιαδόχως: ὅθεν καὶ 
Cote , 
ἐξύμνησαν ὁ eis περισσότε- 
Ἂ Ν aA 
pov Tov ἄλλου τὸ μεγαλεῖ- 
n / \ 
ον τοῦ βασιλέως των, καὶ 
J 
μετὰ τοσούτου ἐνθουσια- 
la) / lal 
σμοῦ ὠμίλησαν περὶ τῶν 
/ \ “ 3 
προτερημάτων καὶ τῶν ἀρε- 
a / \ 
τών του, Kal τόσα λαμπρὰ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


the brightest (most wide- 
awake) of all. 

‘After they had come, 
Xerxes, showing them his 
left hand, on the fingers of 
which glittered five dia- 
monds of wonderful size, 
said to them: 

{1 have summoned you 
here, the five of you, hop- 
ing that you will tell me 
the truth. You see these 
five diamonds; they will be 
given to you as a reward 
of your sincerity. Say 
what you think of my 
power and glory.” 

Now four, dazzled by 
the size and beauty of 
the diamonds and by the 
thought that they might 
be able to obtain one of 
them, made haste to reply, 
each in turn, and then ex- 
tolled, each more (extrava- 
gantly) than the other, the 
greatness of their king; 
with such rapture, indeed, 
they spoke of his pre- 
rogatives and virtues, and 
attributed to him such 
brilliant qualities, that it 


READING 


3 / ών 3 / “ 
ἐπίθετα τῷ ἀπέδωκαν, ὥστε 
ἣν \ \ 
δὲν ἦτο δυνατὸν va εἴπῃ τις 
/ fa 
περισσότερα περὶ τοῦ µε- 
γαλείου καὶ τῆς παντοδυ- 
ναµίας τοῦ Θεοῦ. 
4 
Ο βασιλεὺς ἐκβαλὼν 
3 \ \ / 
ἀπὸ τοὺς δακτύλους του 
τέσσαρας ἐκ τών adapav- 
> / Μ » Ν “ 
των ἐκείνων ἔδωκεν ἀνὰ ἕνα 
εἰς ἕκαστον τῶν ἀνδρῶν. 
Ὑ E \ NX x 
Έπειτα στραφεὶς πρὸς τὸν 
πέμπτον λέγει" 
Ἡ \ / e 
“Kali ov διατί δὲν ὁμι- 
ο Φ 9 \ \ \ 
Nets; Εἰπέ μοι καὶ ov τὴν 
a / 
γνώμην σου περὶ τῆς δυνά- 
να ͵ 5) 
μεως καὶ τῆς δόξης μου. 


» / 
“ Στοχάζομαι ἀπεκρίθη 
lal te / / - 
ἐκεῖνος, ὅτι ἡ δύναμίς σου εἷ- 
/ Ν e / 
ναιπαρακαταθήκη,τὴν οποί- 
ε ek , ᾽ / 
αν ὁ Θεὸς ἐνεπιστεύθη εἰς σέ, 
\ fal 
διὰ τὴν εὐτυχίαν τῶν ὑπη- 
a e / 
κόων σου, καὶ περὶ τῆς ὁποί- 
Ν lal / > an 
as θὰ σοῦ ζητήσῃ ἀκριβῆ 
\ / / 
λοηγαριασμὸν μίαν ἡμέραν" 
ϱ \ 
νομίζω ὅτι ἡ δόξα σου θὰ 
\ \ 
ἦναι ψευδὴς καὶ φθαρτὴ ἐὰν 
“Ὁ \ / \ ᾽ 
ζητῆς νὰ στηρίξης αὐτὴν εἰς 
τὴν ἐξωτερικὴν λαμπρότητα 
καὶ τὰς κατακτήσεις καὶ ὄχι 
> \ > \ 2 / 
εἰς την αὐστηρᾶν ἐκπλήρω- 


“ / 
σιν τῶν καθηκόντων σου.” 


EXERCISE 141 


would be impossible for 
one to say more concern- 
ing the greatness and the 
omnipotence of God. 


The King, taking from 
his fingers four of those 
diamonds, gave one to each 
of the men. Then, turn- 
ing to the fifth, he says: 


“And thou, why dost 
thou not speak? Tell me, 
thou also, thy opinion con- 
cerning my power and my 
glory.” 

“T believe,” replied the 
latter, “that thy power is 
a charge which God has 
intrusted to thee for the 
happiness of thy subjects, 
and for which He will ask 
of thee an exact account- 
ing one day; I think that 
thy glory will be false and 
perishable if thou seekest 
to establish it in exter- 
nal pomps and in con- 
quests, and not in the 
austere fulfilment of thy 
duties.” 


142 


/ ς \ > 
Τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀπε- 
x 
κρίθη: “Δὲν δίδω λοιπὸν 
3 κ \ ./ > / 
εἰς σὲ τὸν ἄλλον ἀδάμαντα, 
> \ \ > / \ 
ἀλλα τὴν ἐμπιστοσύνην KAL 
/ 7 
τὴν φιλίαν μου. Μένε πάν- 
τοτε πλησίον µου" εὗρον 
Ν Ψ an 
τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸν ὀποῖον ἡ 
/ 
καρδία µου ἐζήτει." 
Τὴν ἐπαύριον ἦλθον οἱ 
3 , 
ἄλλοι τέσσαρες εἰς τὸ παλά- 
/ an 
τιον μὲ πρόσωπα κατηφῆ, 
Ν / 
λέγοντες εἰς τὸν βασιλέα, 
ο κά 2 fd \ 
OTL ὁ ἁἀδαμαντοπώλης TOV 
b) / i “59 τ 
ἠπάτησε, διότι τῷ ἐπώλησε 
a id 
ψευδεῖς ἀδάμαντας. 
“και 
ς re 7 ϱ A 
ὁ Ξέρξης γελῶν, “ νομίζετε, 


a > / 
πῶς " ἀπεκρίθη 
“ \ 3 / A 
ὅτι δὲν ἐγνώριζον τοῦτο; 

/ A aA 
Μὲ ἐπηνέσατε ψευδῶς, σᾶς 
\ a 3 / 
ἔδωκα καὶ ἐγὼ ψευδεῖς ἀδά- 
[ο / \ 
µαντας ' σᾶς ἐπλήρωσα μὲ 

Ν / / 
τὸ ἴδιον νόμισμα" τί παρα- 
πονεῖσθε ;” 

/ 

Τοιουτοτρόπως -. ἠθέλησε 

Ν / ¢ / Ἂ 
νὰ διδάξῃ ὁ Ξέρξης τοὺς ἀν- 

/ 3 / ο id > 
θρώπους ἐκείνους, OTL ἡ εἰλι- 

/ > \ / 
κρἰνεια εἶναι τὸ καλλίτερον 

Ν 2 Ν , 
συστατικὸν εἰς τὸν ἄνθρω- 
πον, ἐνῷ ἡ κολακεία εἶναι 
> / Ν \ 
ἐλάττωμα κακὸν καὶ καθι- 

lal \ / 
στᾷ τὸν μεταχειριζόμενον 

\ / > / 

τὴν κολακείαν ἀξιογέλαστον. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Then the King an- 
swered: “I do not then 
give thee the other dia- 
mond, but my confidence 
and friendship. Remain 
always near me; I have 
found the man whom my 
heart sought.” 3 

The next day the other 
four came to the palace 
with dejected looks, say- 
ing to the King that the 
diamond dealer had cheat- 
ed him in that he had 
sold him false diamonds. 

“Well, well!” replied 
Xerxes, laughing, “do you 
suppose that I did not 
know that? You praised 
me falsely and I gave you 
false diamonds; I paid you 
back with the same coin ; 
of what do you complain?” 

In this way Xerxes 
wished to teach-these men 
that sincerity is the best 
recommendation to a man, 
while flattery isa wretched 
vice and renders the one 
employing the flattery ri- 
diculous. 


i 


| 
| 
| 


VERBS 145 


VERBS 


θέλων, pres. part. θέλω, to wish. 


ἐκλέξῃ, aor. subj. ἐκλέγω, to choose. 


ἐπενόησε, aor. ind. ἐπινοῶ(έω). to contrive, devise. 
προσεκάλεσε, aor. ind. προσκαλώ(έω), to call, invite. 


᾿ ἐθεωροῦντο, imp. ind. pass. θεωρῶ(έω), to observe. 


ἦλθον, 2d aor. ind. ἔρχομαι, to come. 

δείξας, aor. part. δεικνύω, to show. 

ἔλαμπον, imp. ind. λάµπω, to shine, glitter. 

ἐλπίζων, pres. part. ἐλπίζω, to hope. 

θέλετε εἴπει, aor. fut. λέγω, to say. 

βλέπετε, pres. ind. βλέπω, to see. 

θέλουσι δοθῆ, aor. fut. pass. δίδω, to give. 

λέγετε, Imp. imperat. λέγω, to say. 

στοχάζεσθε, pres. ind. στοχάζομαι, to think, believe. 

καταθαμβωθέντες, aor. part. pass. plur. καταθαμβώ(έω), 
to dazzle. 

ἠδύναντο, imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

ἀποκτήσωσι, A0Y. 580]. ἀποκτῶ(έω). to obtain. 

ἔσπευσαν, aor. ind. σπεύδω, to hasten. 

ἀποκριθῶσι, aor. 51]. ἀποκρίνομαι, to answer. 

ἐξύμνησαν, aor. ind. ἐξυμνώ(έω), to laud, extol. 

ὡμίλησαν, aor. ind. ousra(éw), to speak. 

ἀπέδωκαν, aor. ind. ἀποδίδω, to attribute. 

ἐκβαλών, 2d aor. part. ἐκβάλλω, to take off. 


ἔδωκε, aor. ind. δίδω, to give. 


στραφείς, aor. part. mid. στρέφω, to turn. 
ὁμιλεῖς, pres. ind. ὁμιλώ(έω), to speak. 

εἰπέ, aor. imperat. λέγω, to say, tell. 
ἐνεπιστεύθη. aor. ind. ἐμπιστεύομαι. to intrust. 
θὰ ζητήσῃ, aor. fut. ζητώ(έω), to seek. 


144 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


θὰ ἦναι, imp. fut. εἶμαι, to be. 

στηρίξῃ», aor. subj. προς, to support, stables 

μένε, imp. imperat. μένω, to remain, stay. 

εὗρον, 2d aor. ind. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

oe imp. ind. ζητώ(έω), to seek. 

ἠπάτησε, aor. ind. ἁπατώάω), to deceive, cheat. 

ἐπώλησε, aor. ind, πωλώ(έω), to sell. 

γελῶν, pres. part. yeha(dw), to laugh. 

ἐγνώριζον, imp. ind. γνωρίζω, to know. 

ἐπηνέσατε, aor. ind. ἐπαινω(έω), to praise. 

ἐπλήρωσα, aor. ind. πληρόνω(ώ-όω), to pay. 

παραπονεῖσθε, pres. ind. παραπονοῦμαι{έομαι), to com- 
plain. 

ἠθέλησε, aor. ind. θέλω, to wish. 

διδάξῃ, aor. subj. διδάσκω, to teach. 

καθιστᾷ, pres. ind. καθιστά(άω), to render, constitute. 

µεταχειριζὀµενον, pres. part. µεταχειρίζοµαι, to use. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be done by the student in the usual way; on no 
account to be omitted. 


Grammar 
Tur ΟΠΡΙΝΑΙ, NUMBERS—rd τακτικὰ ἀριθμητικά 


These are formed from the cardinal numbers as 
follows 


1 πρῶτος 5 πέμπτος 
2 δεύτερος 6 ἕκτος 
ὃ τρίτος ἴ ἕβδομος | 


4 τέταρτος 8 ὄγδοος 


| 
| 5 

᾿ 9 ἔννατος 
10 δέκατος 
ΤΙ ἑνδέκατος 


19 δωδέκαγος 


THE ORDINAL NUMBERS 145 


90 ἐννενηκοστός 
100 ἑκατοστός 
101 ἑκατοστὸς πρῶτος 
110 ἑκατοστὸς δέκατος 


| 19 δέκατος τρίτος 200 διακοσιοστόὀς 


| 14 δέκατος τέταρτος 900 τριακοσιοστός 
15 δέκατος πέμπτος 400 τετρακοσιοστος 
10 δέκατος ἕκτος 500 πεντακοσιοστός 
| 11 δέκατος ἕβδομος 


18 δέκατος ὄγδοος 


000 ἑξακοσιοστός 
700 ἑπτακοσιοστός 
19 δέκατος ἔννατος 800 ὀκτακοσιοστός 
20 εἰκοστός 900 ἐννεακοσιοστός 
1.000 χιλιοστός 
2,000 δισχιλιοστός 


3,000 τρισχιλιοστός 


321 εἰκοστὸς πρῶτος 
|2ὔ εἰκοστὸς πέμπτος 
80 τριακοστός 
40 τεσσαρακοστός 10,000 δεκάκις χιλιοστός 
50 πεντηκοστός 50,000 πεντηκοντάκις χιλιοστός 
00 ἑξηκοστός 100.000 ἑκατοντάκις χιλιοστός 
10 ἑβδομηκοστός 1,000,000 ἑκατομμυριοστός 
80 ὀγδοηκοστός 3,000,000 τρισεκατομμυριοστός 
The ordinal numbers are regularly declined like 
ladjectives of three terminations (see Lesson ΧΧΙ.), 
masc. os, fem. ἡ, neut. ov. Thus: πρώτος, πρώτη, πρώ- 
τον" δεύτερος, δευτέρα, δεύτερον " τέταρτος, τετάρτη, τέταρ- 


τον" ὄγδοος, ὀγδόη, ὄγδοον. Note the change of accent 


termination. This vowel is η in all except δεύτερος, in 
hich it is a. 

Fractions (κλασματικά) are represented, as in Eng- 
lish, by a cardinal number for the numerator and an 
fordinal for the denominator, the latter (and also the 


10 


146 MODERN GREEK MASTERY | 


former when it is one, three, or four, and therefore 
declinable) being in the neuter. Ex.: 4, ἕν πέμπτον" 3%, 
τρία δέκατα" 4, τέσσαρα ὄγδοα. One-half is ἥμισυς, 
ἡμίσεια, ἥμισυ, ΟΥ, in the vernacular, pods, μισή, μισόν. 
Half an hour, ἡμίσεια ὥρα, or μισὴ ὥρα---ἴ 8 half of an 
hour, τὸ ἥμισυ μιᾶς ὥρας. 

The year is ordinarily expressed, as we saw in the 
preceding lesson, by the cardinal numbers in the neu- 
ter: in 1896, εἰς τὰ χίλια ὀκτακόσια ἐννενήκοντα ἕξ" 
but the ordinal numbers may also be employed: κατὰ 
τὸ χιλιοστὸν ὀκτακοσιοστὸν ἐννενηκοστὸν ἕκτον ἔτος ' OF 
the ordinal numbers may be used in the dative, agree- 
ing with “in the year,” thus: ἐν ἔτει χιλιοστῷ ὀκτακο- 


~ A / 
σιοστῶ ἐννενηκοστῷ ἕκτῳ. 


NuMERAL ADVERBS—dpiOpnrika ἐπιρρήματα 


These are formed in general quite regularly by 
changing the termination of the cardinal number into 
dx. The first four, however, and ἑκατοντάκις, are ir- 
regular. 


ἅπαξ, once δωδεκάκις. 12 times 
dis, twice εἰκοσάκις, 20 times 
τρίς, thrice τριακοντάκις., 90 times 
τετράκις, 4 times ἑκατοντάκις, 100 times 
πεντάκις, ὃ times χιλιάκις, 1000 times 
δεκάκις, 10 times μυριάκις, 10,000 times 


The numeral adverbs may be used in multiplication, 
thus: τρὶς ἕξ εἶναι δεκαοκτώ, τετράκις πέντε εἶναι εἴκοσι, 
δεκάκις δέκα εἶναι ἑκατόν, κτλ. 


PROPORTIONAL NUMBERS 147 


ABSTRACT NUMBERS—dpiOunrtikd οὐσιαστικά 


The following are the most commonly employed ; 
they are declined like feminine nouns of the third de. 
_clension in as, gen. αδος. 


μονάς, unit, unity τριάς, trinity dwdexas, dozen 
δυάς, couple dexds, decade εἰκοσάς, Score 


MULTIPLICATIVES—zroAAamAactaoTiKG 


These may be formed from the numeral adverbs by 
changing the termination άκις into απλοῦς, thus: 


ἁπλοῦς, single, simple 

διπλοῦς, double, twofold 
τριπλοῦς, triple, threefold 
τετραπλοῦς, quadruple, fourfold 
πενταπλοῦς, fivefold 

δεκαπλοῦς, tenfold 

εἰκοσαπλοῦς, twentyfold 
ἑκατονταπλοῦς, one-hundred-fold 


PROPORTIONAL NUMBERS—oyerixd ἀριθμητικά 


These are the same as the multiplicatives, the termi- 
nation πλοῦς of the latter being changed to πλάσιος. 
thus: διπλάσιος, twice as many; τετραπλάσιος, four 
times as many; δεκαπλάσιος, ἑκατονταπλάσιος, κτλ. 

The multiplicatives and proportionals are regularly 
declined like adjectives of three terminations. See 
p. 214. 


145 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


DAYS OF THE WEEK 


Four of the days of the week are called by the 
ordinal number (in the feminine agreeing with ἡμέρα, 
day, understood) indicating their sequence. 


Sunday, Κυριακή-- ἴπο Lord’s day. 
Monday, Aevtépa—Second day. 
Tuesday, Tptrn—Third day. 
Wednesday, Terdptn—Fourth day. 
Thursday, Iéua7n—Fifth day. 
Friday, Hapacxev7j—Parasceve, or day of preparation 
for the Sabbath. | 
Saturday, Σάββατον-- ἴλο Sabbath. 


~ 


Grammatical Exercise 


Write down a number of fractions, using Arabic nu- 
merals, repeat them in Greek and then write them out. 
For example: 


1 of 6 = 8, τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ ἕξ εἶναι τρία. 

2 of 20 -- 8, τὰ δύω πέμπτα τοῦ εἴκοσιν εἶναι ὀκτώ. 

5 of 80 -- 9ὔ, τὰ πέντε ἕκτα τοῦ τριάκοντα εἶναι εἴκοσι, 
πέντε. 

1 of 50 -- 191, τὸ τέταρτον τοῦ πεντήκοντα εἶναι δώδεκα 
καὶ ἥμισυ. | 


Say aloud and then write down the dates given in 
the preceding lesson, using the ordinal numbers, thus: 


In 1492, κατὰ τὸ χιλιοστὸν τετρακοσιοστὸν ἐννενηκοστὸ 
δεύτερον ἔτος. 


GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE 149 


Repeat part of the multiplication table, using the 
numeral adverbs: 


/ A > / / / 5 
Τετράκις ἓν εἶναι τέσσαρα, τετράκις δύο εἶναι ὀκτώ, τετρά- 
/ 3 , / . 
Kis τρία εἶναι δώδεκα, τετράκις τέσσαρα εἶναι δεκαέξ, 
τετράκις πέντε εἶναι εἴκοσιν. 


| 
| 


LESSON SIXTEENTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AEKATON EKTON > 


Thought Exercise 


Θὰ γράψω ἐπιστολὴν ἀμέσως. 

I shall write (a) letter immediately. 

Κάθημαι εἰς τὸ γραφεῖόν µου. 

I sit down at my desk. 

᾿Ανοίγω τὸ συρτάριον καὶ λαμβάνω φύλλον χάρτου. 
I open the drawer and take (a) sheet of paper. 
Λαμβάνω τὴν γραφίδα εἰς τὴν χεῖρά pov. 

I take the pen in my hand. 

Βυθίζω τὴν γραφίδα εἰς τὴν µελάνην. 

I dip the pen in the ink. 

Ἢ µελάνη δὲν ρέει ἐλευθέρως, εἶναι πολὺ πυκνή. 
The ink does ποῦ flow freely, it is too thick. 
Θέτω ὀλίγην νέαν µελάνην εἰς τὸ μελανοδοχεῖον. 
I put some fresh ink into the inkstand. 

Αὕτη ἡ γραφὶς δὲν γράφει καλῶς. 

This pen does not write well. 


Ἐκβάλλω τὴν γραφίδα ἐκ τοῦ κονδυλοφόρου καὶ θέτω 
μίαν νέαν. We 

I take out the pen from the penholder and put in (a) 
new one. 

᾽Αρχίζω νὰ γράφω τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

I begin to write the letter. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 151 


Θὰ μεταχειρισθῶ μίαν χρυσῆν γραφίδα, διότι γράφει 
καλλίτερον ἢ ἡ χαλυβδίνη. 

I will use a gold pen, for it writes better than the 
steel (one). 

Θέτω τὴν ἡμερομηνίαν μεταχειριζόμενος τακτικὸν ἀριθμὸν 
εἰς θηλυκὴν δοτικὴν διὰ νὰ ἐκφράσω τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ 
µηνός. 

I put down the date, using (an) ordinal number in (the) 
feminine dative in order to express the day of the 
month. 

Λησμονῶ τὴν ὀρθογραφίαν αὐτῆς τῆς λέξεως. 

I forget the correct spelling of this word. 

Βλέπω τὴν λέξιν εἰς τὸ λεξικόν. 

I look (for) the word in the dictionary. 

Δὲν ἔχω γράψει ὀρθῶς αὐτὴν τὴν λέξιν. 


| I have not written this word correctly. 
΄ Ἐξαλείφω τὴν λέξιν καὶ γράφω ἐκ νέου αὐτὴν ὀρθῶς. 


I erase the word and write it again correctly. 
"Exapa πολλὰ λάθη. 

I have made many mistakes. 

"Exo χαλάσει τὸ φύλλον τοῦτο. 

I have spoiled this sheet. 


| Λαμβάνω ἕν ἄλλο φύλλον καὶ ἀρχίζω ἐκ νέου τὴν ἐπιστο- 


λήν µου. 
I take another sheet and begin my letter again. 


Conversation Exercise 


Πότε θὰ γράψητε τὴν ἐπιστολήν; "Όταν γράφητε 
| ποῦ κάθησθε συνήθως; Πόθεν ἐλάβετε τὸ φύλλον τοῦτο 
| A / πον» \ / ο Ae > 
| ποῦ χάρτου; lod εὕρετε τὸ φύλλον τοῦτο; τὸ εὕρον εἰς 
τὸ συρτάριον τοῦ γραφείου µου. Μὴ λάβετε τὴν γραφίδα 


152 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ταύτην. Διατί δὲν πρέπει νὰ λάβω τὴν γραφίδα ταύτην; 
διότι εἶναι χαλυβδίνη καὶ θὰ ἦναι προτιμότερον νὰ µετα- 
χειρισθῆτε μίαν χρυσῆν. Ιοῦ βυθίζετε τὴν γραφίδα; 
Ῥέει' ἐλευθέρως ἡ μελάνη; Διατί δὲν ρέει ἐλευθέρως ; 
Τί πρέπει νὰ κάμητε; Θὰ θέσητε ὀλίγην νέαν μελάνην 
εἰς τὸ μελανοδοχεῖον; Γράφει καλῶς αὕτη ἡ γραφίς ; 
Δὲν εἶναι πολὺ σκωριασμένη" αὐτὴ ἡ γραφὶς ὥστε νὰ 

/ ~ 3 \ 3 / e / / 
γράφῃ καλώς; ᾿Εὰν ἦναι σκωριασµένη ἡ γραφίς σας, τί 
θὰ κάµητε; Δὲν θὰ ἐκβάλητε αὐτὴν ἐκ τοῦ κονδυλοφό- 

\ \ / / , 5 , y \ 
ρου καὶ θὰ θέσητε μίαν νέαν; Ἠκβάλετε ταύτην τὴν 
χαλυβδίνην γραφίδα καὶ θέσατε μίαν χρυσῆν. Τί εἶναι 
εἰς τὸ μελανοδοχεῖον; ἡ µελάνη εἶναι ἐκεῖ, ἐννοεῖται. 
Καὶ πότε θὰ ἀρχίσητε τὴν ἐπιστολήν σας; ᾿Αρχίσας 
τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τί γράφετε πρῶτον; Δὲν θέτετε πρῶτον 
\ ς / lal / ef - e / 
τὴν ἡμερομηνίαν; Iles γράφεται αὕτη ἡ λέξις; Δη- 
an \ 2 β΄ 2 an aA / 2 / 
σμονεῖτε τὴν ὀρθογραφίαν αὐτῆς τῆς λέξεως; ᾿Ἠλήσμο- 
νήσατε τὴν ὀρθογραφίαν αὐτῆς τῆς λέξεως; Διατί δὲν 
βλέπετε αὐτὴν εἰς τὸ λεξικόν; Ἴδετε αὐτὴν τὴν λέξιν 
εἰς τὸ λεξικόν. Δὲν ἔχετε γράψει ὀρθῶς αὐτὴν τὴν λέ- 
Ew; ᾿Εξαλείψας τὴν λέξιν γράφετε ἐκ νέου αὐτὴν ὀρθῶς ; 
᾿Ἠκάμαμεν πολλὰ λάθη; Τίς ἔκαμε τόσα λάθη; ἔχετε 
χαλάσει τὸ φύλλον τοῦτο, δὲν ἔχει οὕτω; Καὶ τί θὰ 
κάµητε; Δὲν θὰ λάβητε ἕν ἄλλο φύλλον; Καὶ λαμβά- 
νων ἕν ἄλλο φύλλόν θὰ ἀρχίσητε ἐκ νέου τὴν ἐπιστολήν 
σας; μάλιστα, θὰ λάβω ἕν ἄλλο φύλλον ἐκ τοῦ συρτα- 
/ ἵ Ν \ > 7 3 / \ 2 / \ 

ρίου καὶ θὰ ἀρχίσω ἐκ νέου τὴν ἐπιστολὴν µου. Λαβὼν 
ἕν ἄλλο φύλλον ἠρχίσατε ἐκ νέου τὴν ἐπιστολήν σας; 
μάλιστα, ἔλαβον ἕν ἄλλο φύλλον ἐκ τοῦ συρταρίου καὶ 
ἤρχισα ἐκ νέου τὴν ἐπιστολήν μου. 


1 Disyllabic verbs (and their compounds) in έω, as ρέω, to flow, do not 
} ’ Pe, ) 
suffer a contraction of έω into ὦ. 3 Too rusty. 3 Of course. 


BEGINNING AND ENDING OF LETTERS ; 1538 


| Reading Exercise 


| BEGINNING AND ENDING oF LETTERS 


The forms used in the address and subscription of 
letters vary more or less according to the relative posi- 
tions in the social scale of the writer and the person 

addressed. The name of the town and the date are 
placed as in English at the upper right-hand corner or 
-hand corner; they are both in the 
dative case, or occasionally the date is in the accu- 
sative. The following are some of the more usual 
| formule employed in the beginning and ending of 
letters : 


Business Letters 
Ἔν Νέᾳ Ὑόρκη, New York, 
τῇ T Ιουλίου, 1895. July 7, 1895. 
Κύριε Ρ., VE aioe 
Σᾶς ἀσπάζομαι φιλικῶς, Very sincerely yours, 
Ἐν Λονδίνῳ, London, 
τῇ 10 Μαΐου, 1893. May 10, 1898. 
Κύριε, ο ως. 
Διατελῶ πρόθυμος (εἰς 1 τοπ]αῖη sincerely yours 
τὰς διαταγάς σας), (to command), 
Ἔν ᾿Αθήναις, Athens, 
τῇ ὕῃ ᾿Ιουνίου, 1890. June 5, 1890. 
Κύριε Σ., Mr. S., 
Δέξασθε, κύριε, τοὺς χαι- Accept, sir, my re- 


ρετισμούς µου, spects, 


154 


Ἐν Σικάγῳ, 
- 3 / 
τῇ 9η Ιανουαρίου. 
᾿Αξιότιμε κύριε, 
A > > / 
Διατελῶ μετ᾽ ἰδιαιτέρας 
ὑπολήψεως, 
“Ὅλως ὙὝμέτερος, 


Ἐν Παρισίοις, 
τῇ 90 Αὐγούστου. 


ο ο ο ο ο δν οἱ ο οἱ οἱ οὐ ον ο ορ αν 


Δέξασθε, κύριε, τὴν δια- 
βεβαίωσιν τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς 
ὑπολήψεώς µου, 


Circulars and the Like 


Ἐν Νέᾳ “Υόρκη. 


sts ΓΦ το) κ ο ος ο ὅσα. ο ο ο ο ο μον 


Ὑμέτερος, κτλ., 


To One to Whom Respect is Due 


Ἐν Φιλαδελφείᾳ, 
τῇ 99 Ὀκτωβρίου, 1888. 
Σεβαστὲ κύριε, 
Εἰμὶ μετὰ βαθυτάτου σε- 
βασμοῦ, 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


spect, 


Chicago, 
January 3d. 
Dear Sir, 
1 remain with very great 
respect, 
Yours truly, 


Paris, 
August 30th. 


Accept, sir, the assur- 
ance of my esteem, 


New York. 


eee © 5ο ο 5 Δ ρα ο ους ο ο ο αν 


Yours, etc., 


Philadelphia, 
October 29, 1888. 
Honored Sir, 


94 990 ος ee ea seh Ὁ ἃ ἃ © σον... 


I am with deepest re- 


| Ἔν Βερολίνω, 


τῇ 2 Απριλίου. 


᾿Αξιότιμε κύριε, 


ο δ αν ὁ ὁ ὃ δ ὁ ὃ ὃ 5569 0ο υοουο 


1” \ / / \ 
ἔχω τὴν τιμήν, κύριε, νὰ 
᾿ὑποσημειωθῶ εὐπειθέστα- 


τος, 


BEGINNING AND ENDING OF LETTERS 


155 


Berlin, 
April 2d. 
Honored Sir, 
I have the honor, Sir, to 
sign myself most obedi- 
ently yours, 


To a Clergyman 


Αἰδεσιμώτατε, 


5 0 Ὁ Ὁ ευ 05 0 υ απ δ' ἃ 0 0 0 ὁ 000 eevee 


Τέκνον εὐπειθέστατον, 
Ἐν Βιέννη, 
τῇ 10η Φεβρουαρίου. 


΄Ἐλλόγιμε κύριε, 


Ὑποσημειοῦμαι εὐσεβά- 
στως, 

Ἐν Νέῳ Διμένι, 
τῇ ὅ Μαρτίου, 1896. 


Ἔν Κανταβριία, 

τῇ ὃ Δεκεμβρίου. 
᾿Ελλόγιμε κ. Ἰζαθηγητά, 
Μετὰ τὴν ἔκφρασιν τοῦ 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς σεβασμοῦ δέχ- 
θητε καὶ τοὺς ἄποχαιρετι- 
σμοὺς τοῦ εὐγνώμονος µα- 


θητοῦ σας, 


Most Reverend, 


Your most obedient son, 
Vienna, 
February 10th. 


To a Professor 


Learned Sir, 

I sign myself very re- 
spectfully, 

New Haven, 
March 5, 1896. 


Cambridge, 
December 8th. 
Learned (Mr.) Professor, 
With the expression of 
respect, accept also the sal- 
utations of your grateful 


pupil, 


156 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


To a Friend 


Ἔν Ῥώμῃ, Rome, 
τῇ ὃ Νοεμβρίου. November 84. 
Φίλτατε Ι.., Dearest G., 
Δέξασθε τοὺς ἐγκαρδίους Accept my cordial re- 
ἀσπασμούς µου, gards, 
Ἐν Βασιγκτῶνι, Washington, 
τῇ 4 Σεπτεμβρίου. September 4th. 
᾿᾽Αγαπητέ μοι κύριε Δ., My dear Mr. D., 
ὋὉ εἰλικρινὴς φίλος σας, Your sincere friend, - 
Ἔν Βοστώνη, Boston, 
τῇ 2 Μαΐου. May 24. — 
᾽Αγαπητή μοι κυρία &., My dearest Mrs. X.., 
Εἰμὶ μετὰ πολλῆς ἀγά- I am, with much love, 
πης ἡ φίλη σας, your friend, | 


To a very Intimate Friend 


ΠΠοθητέ μοι L., Dearest G., 
Σὲ ἀσπάζομαι τρυφερῶς, Very affectionately 
yours, : 
Ἐν Βρουκλίνη, Brooklyn, 
τῇ 4ῃ Μαρτίου, 1896. March 4, 1896. 


In the forms for the beginning and ending of letters, 
here given, the date has been uniformly put in the 


NOUNS . 157 


dative case, the name of the town being preceded by 
ἐν. This is the more elegant way, but perhaps not the 
more usual. Very commonly the name of the town is 
written in the nominative and the date in the accusa- - 
tive, or the latter is marked simply by figures without 
any indication of case. Thus: 


Ῥερολίνον, τὴν 18 Μαΐου, 1896 —or, Νέα “Ὑόρκη, 4 
Ἰουλίου, 1895. 


Grammar 


Νοῦκβ- τὰ οὐσιαστικά 


There are three declensions of substantives in the 
literary language. The first declension comprises 
masculine nouns in as or ης and feminine nouns in a or 
η. The nouns of the second declension end in ος for 
the masculine or feminine, and in ov for the neuter. 
These two declensions are parisyllabic (ἐσοσυλλαβα), 
i.e., there is the same number of syllables in all the 
eases. The third declension includes masculine, femi- 
nine, and neuter nouns of various terminations, which 
take an extra syllable in the genitive and other cases 
(imparisyllabic, περιττοσύλλαβα). 


Frrst DECLENSION 


Masculine nouns ending in as or ns 


SINGULAR 
Young man Glutton Artist Poet Citizen 
e / la) / f / 
Nom. ὁ νεανίας payas καλλιτέχνης ποιητής πολίτης 
j a ᾿ Αα / ἴω 
Gen. τοῦ νεανίου φαγᾶ καλλιτέχνου ποιητοῦ πολίτου 


158 


Dat. 
Ace. 
Voe. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voce. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voce. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
ACC. 
Voe. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


- / - / "ἡ 
Toveavia φαγᾷ καλλιτέχνη ποιητῇ πολίτῃ 


\ / a / VA / 
Tov νεανίαν φαγᾶν καλλιτέχνην ποιητὴν πολίτην 
5 / la) / ΄ a 
(ὧ) νεανία gaya καλλιτέχνα ποιητά πολῖτα 


PLURAL 

/ a va / a 
οἱνεανίαι φαγαῖ καλλιτέχναι ποιηταί πολῖται 
τῶν νεανιῶν φαγῶν καλλιτεχνῶν ποιητῶν πολιτῶν 
τοῖς νεανίαις φαγαῖς καλλιτέχναις ποιηταῖς πολίταις 

\ “ ͵ ie 
τοὺς νεανίας φαγᾶς καλλιτέχνας ποιητάς πολίτας 

κ᾽ / 9 a / / lal 
(ὦ) νεανίαι φαγαῖ καλλιτέχναι ποιηταί πολῖται 


Feminine nouns ending in a or ἢ 


SINGULAR 
Truth Fate Tongue Art Soul 

> i a “ 
ἡ ἀλήθεια μοῖρα γλῶσσα τέχνη ψυχή 


τῆς ἀληθείας μοίρας γλώσσης τέχνης ψυψῆς 
τῇ ἀληθείᾳ µοίρᾳ γλώσσῃ τέχνῃ Ψυχῇ 
τὴν ἀλήθειαν μοῖραν γλῶσσαν τέχνην ψυχήν 
(ὦ) ἀλήθεια μοῖρα γλῶσσα τέχνη ψυχή 
PLURAL 
αἱ ἀλήθειαι. μοῖραν γλῶσσαι τέχναι ψυχαί 
τῶν ἀληθειῶν μοιρῶν γλωσσών τεχνών ψυχών. 
ταῖς ἀληθείαις μοίραις γλώσσαις τέχναις ψυχαῖς 
τὰς ἀληθείας μοίρας γλώσσας τέχνας ψυχάς 
(ὦ) ἀλήθειαι, μοῖραι γλῶσσαι τέχναι ψυχαί 


The dative case is seldom employed—almost never 
in ordinary conversation, except in certain adverbial 
expressions—its place being taken generally by eis or 
mpos With the accusative. 

The accent in the different cases of the first declen- 
sion remains throughout on the same syllable as in the 


NOUNS 159 


nominative, whenever the quantity of the final syllable 
will permit. (It is to be noted that the αι of the 
‘nominative and vocative plural has the value of a 
short syllable as far as accent is concerned.) The only 
exception to this rule of accent is found in the genitive 
plural, which always has the circumflex on the final 
‘syllable. The reason given for this is that the termi- 
nation ὧν is a contraction of άων. Substantives having 
an acute accent ΟΠ the final syllable in the nominative 
(ποιητής, ψυχή) change this accent to circumflex in the 
genitive aud d+1Vve of both numbers. 

Nouns in ἃς (which are few in number) are exam- 
ples of the contracted declension, and preserve the 
circumflex accent in all the cases. They also take ἃ 
instead of od in genitive singular. A few other nouns 
(not contracted), chiefly proper names in as,as Πυθαγό- 
pas, also take a in the genitive. 

The a of the vocative in words ending in as is always 
long, but in most of the words ending in ης it is short. 

Feminine nouns ending in a preceded by a vowel or 
p preserve the a throughout all the cases in the sin- 
gular; those in which the nominative termination is 
preceded by a consonant (other than p) take η in the 
genitive and dative singular. 

The feminine form of all adjectives of three termina- 
tions (see Lesson X XI.) is declined exactly like a femi- 
nine noun of the first declension. 


BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 


LESSON SEVENTEENTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AEKATON ΠὌλΟΜωΩΝΤ. _ 
nomen 


uD } 


Thought Exercis 3 
a 


"Exapa κηλίδα εἰς τὴν δευτέραν σελίδα τῆς ἐπιστολῆς 
μου. 

I have made (a) blot on the second page of my letter. 

Ἐηραίνω τὴν µελάνην μὲ τὸν ἀπορροφητικὸν χάρτην (τὸ 
στυπὀχαρτογ). : 

I dry the ink with the blotting-paper. 

Evo τὴν κηλίδα μὲ τὸ μαχαιρίδιόν µου. 

I scratch out the blot with my penknife. 

Τώρα ἐτελείωσα τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

Now 1 have finished the letter. 

Ἢ ἐπιστολὴ φαίνεται ὀρθῶς ἔχουσα ἐκτὸς αὐτῆς τῆς 
μικρᾶς κηλίδος. 

The letter appears to be correct except this little blot. 

Λαμβάνω φάκελλον ἐκ τῆς χαρτοθήκης ἐκ τῶν δεξιῶν. 

I take an envelope from the pigeon-hole on the right. 

Διπλόνω τὴν ἐπιστολὴν καὶ θέτω αὐτὴν ἐντὸς φακέλλου. 

I fold the letter and put it within the envelope. 

Θέτω τὴν ἐπιγραφὴν εἰς τὸν φάκελλον. 

I put the address on the envelope. 

Σφραγίζω τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

I seal the letter. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 161 


Ζυγίζω τὴν ἐπιστολὴν διὰ νὰ ἴδω μὴ ἔχη ἀνάγκην διπλοῦ 
τέλους. 

I weigh the letter in order to see lest it have need of 
double postage. 

‘H pron ζυγίζει ἀκριβῶς ὀλίγον πλέον ἡμισείας ὀγ- 

| γίας. 

The letter weighs just a little more than half an ounce. 

Προσκολλῶ ἓν γραμ, ιτόσηµον. 

I stick on one stamp. 

Ἐπειδὴ εἶναι ἐπισ' γλὴ διὰ τὸ ἐξωτερικόν, πρέπει νὰ θέσω 
δύο γραµµατο. | μα. 

Since it is a foreign letter (for the exterior), it is neces- 
sary to put on two stamps. 


Τούτου ἕνεκα προσκολλώ Ev ἄλλο γραμματόσημον. 
Therefore (on account of this) I put on another stamp. 
Ἢ ἐπιστολὴ ζυγίζει ἀκριβῶς ὀλιγώτερον μιᾶς ὀγγίας. 
The letter weighs just a little less than one ounce. 
᾿Επειδὴ εἶναι ἐπιστολὴ διὰ τὸ ἐσωτερικόν, ἕν γραμματό- 
| σηµον εἶναι ἀρκετόν. 

Since it is a domestic (for the interior) letter, one 
stamp is sufficient. 


Conversation Exercise 


/ » f ’ \ / ο ἘΠ / 

Τίς ἔκαμε κηλίδα εἰς τὸ χαρτίον τοῦτο; is ποίαν 

“ a / / 

σελίδα τῆς ἐπιστολῆς σας ἐκάματε κηλίδα; "Όταν κα- 

| (ὃ Jy > \ \ \ ὃ / δὲ 

πνητε κηλίδα, ξύετε αὐτὴν μὲ τὸ μαχαιρίδιὀν σας, δὲν 
Ν / 

ἔχει οὕτω; Ἐηραίνετε τὴν µελάνην μὲ τὸ στυπὀχαρτον; 
. an 

Ετελειώσατε τὴν ἐπιστολήν σας; "Eyes ὀρθῶς ἡ ἐπι- 

/ ᾿ lal \ lal fal A 

τολή; «Φαίνεται ὀρθῶς ἔχουσα ἐκτὸς αυτῆς τῆς μικρᾶς 

n ΄ ’ / \ 

εηλίδος; Ilod εἶναι οἱ Φάκελλοι; [16θεν ἐλάβετε Tov 


άκελλον τοῦτον; ᾿Ἠλάβετε φάκελλον ἐκ τῆς χαρτοθήκης 
11 


16 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


fal A \ / 
ἐκ τῶν δεξιῶν; "Όταν ἐτελειώσατε τὴν ἐπιστολήν, ποῦ 
\ , \ 
τὴν θέτετε; Διπλόνετε αὐτὴν καὶ τὴν θέτετε ἐντὸς φα- 
΄ » \ 
κέλλου, δὲν ἔχει οὕτω; Τί ἐγράψατε εἰς τὸν φάκελλον ; 
\ \ \ 3 
Δὲν ἐθέσατε τὴν ἐπιγραφὴν εἰς τὸν φάκελλον ; Τί σφρα- 
/ \ 2 / \ ει A LR eel | / 7 
γίζετε; Δὲν ἐσφραγίσατε τὴν ἐπιστολὴν πρὶν θέσητε 
/ \ 
τὴν ἐπιγραφήν; Διατί ζυγίζετε τὴν ἐπιστολήν; Πό- 
id / / \ / 
cov’ ζυγίζει ἡ ἐπιστολή; Δὲν ζυγίζει ἡ ἐπιστολὴ πλέον 
ες / > / 5 εαν \ \ ο \ x 
ἡμισείας oyylas ; Εΐναι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ διὰ τὸ ἐξωτερικὸν ἢ 
δ \ ae / > \ αν ὃ \ Virus / δὲ / 
ιᾶ τὸ ἐσωτερικόν; “Kav ἦναι διὰ τὸ ἐξωτερικόν, δὲν πρέ- 
Ν > / 8 ΄ / 3 / - 
πει va eTLOéanTte δύο ypappatoonpua ; ᾿Ἐπεθέσατε πλέον 
A Χ Ν / ζ 2 \ 2 / 
τριῶν γραμματοσήμων; Δὲν ζυγίζει ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὀλιγώ- 
na 2 ls > \ tel Be: \ μεν \ Ἀ 
τερον μιᾶς oyylas; ᾿Επειδὴ ἡ ἐπιστολὴ εἶναι διὰ τὸ 
/ 9 ὃ 
ἐσωτερικόν, δὲν θὰ ἦτο ἀρκετὸν ὃν γραμματόσημον; 
Ἐ / \ > \ A \ ἴδ }λ / Ἂ 
ζυγίσατε τὴν ἐπιστολὴν διὰ νὰ ἴδητε ἐὰν πρέπῃ νὰ 
/ ἃ / Ν - 
θέσητε ἕν γραμματόσημον ἔτι; ᾿Εὰν ζυγίζῃ ἀκριβῶς 
, 5 , \ ” bie a? a / }λ 
µίαν ὀγγίαν, δὲν ἔχει ἀνάγκην διπλοῦ τέλους; ἐὰν ζυ- 
/ 3 Ωω ς , ’ / Ν ” . / 8 a 
γίζῃ ἀκριβῶς ἡμίσειαν ὀγγίαν, θὰ ἔχῃ ἀνάγκην διπλοῦ 
/ > ‘ / \ > 
τέλους ἐπειδὴ εἶναι διὰ TO ἐξωτερικόν' ἐὰν εἶναι ἐπι- 
\ \ \ > / x Ν ” > / n 
στολὴ διὰ TO ἐσωτερικόν, δὲν θὰ ἔχῃ ἀνάγκην διπλοῦ 
τέλους. 


1 Before. 2 How much ὃ ὃ Το put on. * Yet, still. ~ 


Reading Exercise 


4 e 


‘O Δάμων καὶ ὁ Φιντίας. Damon and Phintias 


‘O Δάμων καὶ ὁ Φιντί- Damon απά Phintias. 
as, δύο Συρακούσιοι νέοι two young Syracusans 
ἀνατεθραμμένοι ἀμφότεροι both brought up according 
κατὰ τὰς ἀρχὰς τῆς Τυ- to the principles of the 
θαγορικῆς σχολῆς ἦσαν Pythagorean school, we 
συνηνωµένοι, διὰ δεσμῶν united by bonds of the 


¥ 


ἀκραιφνεστάτης Φιλίας. most sincere friendship. - 


READING 


/ ε / 
Διονύσιος ὁ τύραννος 
a τ - 
τῆς Σικελίας, ὑποπτευθεὶς 
Ν / ς 
τὸν Δάμωνα ὡς προδότην 
/ b] \ > 4 
κατεδίκασεν αὐτὸν εἰς θά- 
ε 
νατον. Ὠλέπων δὲ ὁ κατά- 
δικος ὅτι οὐδεμία ὑπάρχει 
ἐλπὶς σωτηρίας, παρεκά- 
Ν ως 
λεσε τὸν τύραννον νὰ τῷ 
/ > "4 x ς / 
χαρίσῃ ολίγας τινὰς Ίμερας 
/ “ / Ν Αα 
µόνον, ἵνα διατάξη τὰ τοῦ 
οἴκου του, ὑποσχόμενος ὅτι 


ἐξάπαντος ἤθελεν ἐπιστρέ- 


aber ἵνα λάβῃ τὸν θάνατον. 


€ a 
Ο Διονύσιος τῷ ἔδωκε 
\ ” / ’ 
μὲν τὴν ἄδειαν ταύτην, ἀλλ 
ey" / * 2 / 5) 
ἐπὶ συμφωνίᾳ ν ἀφήσῃ ἀλ- 
ο τν 2 2 a ¢ \ 
λον ἄντ αὑτοῦ, ὅστις να 
A \ A lal 
λάβῃ τὸν θάνατον ἂν ἐκεῖ- 
Ν 2 / > \ 
vos δὲν ἐπέστρεφεν εἰς τὸ 
/ a 
τέλος τῆς διορίας' οὐδ᾽ 
> / / { , 
ἐφαντάζετό ποτε 0 τύραννος 
“ > / \ ς a 
ὅτι ἠδύνατο νὰ εὑρεθῇ τις 
> / / 
εἰ τοιαύτην περίστασιν 
\ / ς \ > \ 
νὰ παραδώσῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀντὶ 
ἄλλου. 


QA nr 
ἀκούσας τὸ πρᾶγμα ἄνευ 


‘O Φιντίας ὅμως 


δισταγμοῦ σπεύσας εὐθὺς 

παρέδωκεν ἑαυτὸν μετὰ πά- 
a PA 5 / 

σης τῆς ζητουμένης ἐγγυή- 

σεως. 

Ὀλίγοι ἐπήνουν τὴν ἀφο- 

“4 / ο) /΄ 
σίωσιν ταύτην τοῦ Φίλου, 


EXERCISE 163 


Dionysius, the tyrant of 
Sicily, suspecting Damon 
to be a traitor, condemn- 
ed him to death. But the 
condemned, seeing that no 
hope of deliverance re- 
mained, prayed the tyrant 
to grant him a few days 
only in order that he 
might set his family af- 
fairs in order, promising 
that he would absolutely 
return to suffer death. 

Dionysius granted him 
permission, but only upon 
the condition that he 
should leave another in his 
place who would suffer 
death if he himself did not 
return at the expiration of 
the appointed time; the ty- 
rant never imagined that 
any one could be found in 
such a case to give himself 
up instead of the other. 
But Phintias, hearing of 
the affair, hastening with- 
out delay, gave himself up 
immediately with all the 
required security. 

A few praised this de- 
votedness of the friend, 


164 


πλεῖστοι δὲ μάλιστα ὕβρι- 

ζον αὐτὸν ὡς μωρὸν καὶ κου- 
/ / ς / 

Φόνουν, διότι ἡ προθεσµία 

e 

ἐπλησίαζεν ὁ δὲ κατάδικος 

δὲν ἐφαίνετο: ἀλλ᾽ ἠπατή- 

θησαν μεγάλως. 


x wt ΡΝ - 
"Eve ὁ ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ ἐσύ- 
\ / a 
ρετο εἰς τὸν τόπον τῆς κατα- 
/ > ie 
δίκης, πάντη μὲν ἀτάραχος 
/ 
διὰ τὸν ἴδιον θάνατον λυ- 
/ \ / ς 7 
πούµενος δὲ µόνον ὡς γινώ- 
, ς 
σκων ἐντελέστατα, OTL ο 
ἐᾷ \ 
φίλος του ἔμελλε va ἐπι- 
> / / 
στρέψη ἀφεύκτως, αἴφνης 
τρέχει οὗτος, καὶ - Στα- 
a an ere > / 
θῆτε, σταθῆτε ἀνέκραξε 
ο [ο A 5 
γεγονυῖα τῇ φωνῇ, “ αἱ ὑπο- 
\ 7, 
θέσεις μου δὲν μοὶ ἐσυγχώ- 
Ν ” / 
ρησαν νὰ ἔλθω προτήτερα, 
ie \ 
καὶ ἐβιάσθην μάλιστα va 
\ ὃ / \ / / 
μὴ δώσω τὸ ποθούμενον τέ- 
τ \ 
λος εἰς μερικὰς, φοβούμενος 
Ν / \ 
μὴ προφθάσητε καὶ θανα- 
δν \ " σ 
τώσητε τὸν φίλον µου, ὅστις 
ἄλλο ἔγκλημα δὲν ἔπραξε 
᾽ “ » Ἄ 
παρ᾽ ὅτι ἔδειξε τοιαύτην 
\ ΡΣ \ b] / ο 
πρὸς ἐμὲ ἀφοσίωσιν' ὅθεν 
\ tg 
λύσατε αὐτὸν πλέον ἀπὸ τὰ 
ὃ \ \ ld ο age! 3 
εσμὰ καὶ φέρατε ἐμὲ εἰς 
ia) / 
τὴν καταδίκην." 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


but most abused him ex- 
ceedingly as foolish and 
light-minded, for the term 
was approaching, but the 
condemned did not appear ; 
but they were greatly mis- 
taken. ᾿ 

While the one in the 
prison was being dragged 
to the place of execution 
altogether unconcerned 
about his own death, but 
grieving only because he 
knew very well that his 
friend would inevitably re- 
turn, suddenly the latter 
runs up, and “ Stop, stop !” 
he shouted in a loud voice, 
“my affairs did not per- 
mit me to come sooner, 
and I was even forced not 
to give the desired termi- 
nation to some of them, 
fearing lest you go ahead 
and kill my friend, who 
has committed no other 
crime than that he has 
shown such devotion to 
me; therefore loose him 
entirely from the bonds 
and lead me to the execu- 
tion.” 


VERBS 


/ / 

Πάντες ἐξεπλάγησαν ἐπὶ 
ro > / / 
TH ἀπροσδοκήτῳ ταύτῃ 

/; ε 
πράξει, ὁ δὲ Διονύσιος οὕτω 
/ 
κατενύχθη, ὥστε ἀμέσως 
» lt / Z ; rd 
ἀπέλυσεν ἀμφοτέρους, λέ- 
/ a 
yov ὅτι δὲν εὐχαριστεῖτο 
κ) / / / 
νὰ διαχωρίση τοιούτους φί- 
λους, ὧν αἱ καρδίαι ἦσαν 
οὕτω στενῶς συνδεδεμέναι 
μετ᾽ ἀλλήλων, καὶ τοὺς πα- 
Ψ' \ / 
ρεκάλεσε νὰ συμπεριλά- 
\ 
Boot καὶ αὐτὸν τρίτον εἰς 
\ / 
τὴν φιλίαν των. 


165 


All were astonished at 
this unexpected act, but 
Dionysius was so touched 
that he immediately freed 
both, saying that he did 
not wish to separate such 
friends, whose hearts were 
so strongly bound to each 
other, and he begged them 
to include himself a third 
in their friendship. 


VERBS 


ἀνατεθραμμένοι, perf. part. pass. ἀνατρέφω, to educate. 
συνηνωµένοι, perf. part. pass. συνενῶ(όω), to unite. 


ὑποπτευθείς, aor. part. ὑποπτεύομαι, to suspect. 
κατεδίκασε, aor. ind. καταδικάζω, to condemn. 
ὑπάρχει, pres. ind. ὑπάρχω, to exist, be. 
παρεκάλεσε, aor. ind. παρακαλῶ(έω), to beg. 

χαρίσῃ, aor. subj. χαρίζω, to grant. 

διατάξῃ, aor. subj. διατάσσω, to set in order. 
ὑποσχόμενος, pres. part. ὑπόσχομαι, to promise. 
ἤθελεν ἐπιστρέψει, aor. condit. ἐπιστρέφω, to return. 
λάβῃ, 2d aor. subj. λαμβάνω, to receive. 

ἔδωκε, aor. ind. δίδω, to give. 

ἀφήσῃ, aor. subj. ἀφήνω (or ἀφίνω), to leave. 
ἐπέστρεφε, imp. ind. ἐπιστρέφω, to return. 
ἐφαντάζετο, imp. ind. φαντάζομαι, to fancy, imagine. 
ἠδύνατο, imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

εὑρεθῇ, 24 aor. subj. pass. εὑρίσκω, to find. 


106 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


παραδώσῃ. Aor. subj. παραδίδω, to give up. 
ἀκούσας, aor. part. ἀκούω, to hear. 

σπεύσας, aor. part. σπεύδω, to hasten. 

παρέδωκε, aor. ind. παραδίδω, to give up. 
ἐπήνουν, imp. ind. ἐπαινῶ(ίέω). to praise. 

ὕβριζον, imp. ind. ὑβρίζω, to abuse, insult. 
ἐπλησίαζε, imp. ind. πλησιάζω, to draw near. 
ἐφαίνετο, imp. ind. φαίνομαι, to appear. 
ἠπατήθησαν, aor. ind. mid. ἀπατῶ(άω), to deceive. 
ἐσύρετο, imp. ind. pass. σύρω, to draw, drag. 
λυπούμενος, pres. part. λυποῦμαι{έομαι), to grieve. 
γινώσκων, pres. part. γινώσκω, to know. 

ἔμελλε, imp. ind. µέλλω, to be about to. 
ἐπιστρέψῃ, aor. subj. ἐπιστρέφω. to return. 
τρέχει, pres. ind. τρέχω, to run, hasten. 

σταθῆτε, aor. imperat. mid. στέκω, to stop. 
ἀνέκραξε, aor. ind. ἀνακράζω, to shout. 
ἐσυγχώρησαν, aor. ind. cuvyyapa(éw), to permit. 
ἔλθω, 2d aor. subj. ἔρχομαι, to come. 
ἐβιάσθην, aor. ind. pass. βιάζω, to compel. 

δώσω, aor. subj. δίδω, to give. 

ποθούμενον, pres. part. pass. ποθῶ(έω), to desire. 
φοβούμενος, pres. part. φοβοῦμαι{έοµαι), to fear. 
προφθάσητε, aor. sub). προφθάνω, to anticipate. 
θανατώσητε, aor. subj. θανατόνω(ῶ-όω), to put to death. 
ἔπραξε, aor. ind. πράττω, to do. 

ἔδειξε, aor. ind. δεικνύω, to show. 

λύσατε, aor. imperat. We, to loose. 

φέρατε, aor. imperat. φέρω, to bring, carry. 
ἐξεπλάγησαν, aor. ind. mid. ἐκπλήττω, to astonish. 


1 The aorist of δίδω is ἔδωσα or ἔδωκα. 


SECOND DECLENSION 167 


᾿κατενύχθη, aor. ind. mid. κατανύσσω, to touch, fill with . 

compassion. 

ἀπέλυσε, aor. ind. ἀπολύω, to liberate, free. 

| εὐχαριστεῖτο, imp. ind. εὐχαριστοῦμαιίέομαι), to he con- 
tent. 

διαχωρίση, aor. subj. διαχωρίζω, to separate, disunite. 

συνδεδεµέναι, perf. part. pass. συνδέω, to join. 

παρεκάλεσε, aor. ind. παρακαλώ(έω), to beg. 


= 


συμπεριλάβωσι, 2d aor. subj. συμπεριλαμβάνω, to in-— 
clude. 


Vocabulary Exercise 
| This exercise should never be omitted, for it is of 
great utility. 
Grammar 
SkCOND DECLENSION 


The second declension comprises masculine (and a few feminine) 
nouns ending in os, and neuter nouns in ον. 


SINGr LAR 


| Man Physician Wine Island Apple 
εν > / 53 ς fa Ν fol 
| Νοπῃ. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἰατρός οἶνος ἡνῆσος τὸ μῆλον 
ao 8 / > - »/ ο # an / 
| Gen. τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἰατροῦ οἴνου τῆς νήσου τοῦ μήλου 
| D t ne) 0 , . - ” a“ Fi a ἆλ, 
| 1)ῦ. τῷ ἀνύρωπω ιατρω οινω τηνησῳ τω μήλῳ 
| 3 / 53 A A 
Ace. τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἰατρόν οἶνον τὴν νῆσον τὸ μῆλον 
93 2 A 53 9S na 9 n 
Voc. (ὦ) ἄνθρωπε ἰατρέ ove (ὦ)νῆσε (@) μῆλον 
PLURAL 
cy > / 9 e a \ a 
Νοπι. οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἰατροί οἶνοι αἱνῆσοι τὰ μῆλα 
A / “ lal a 
Gen. τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἰατρῶν οἴνων τῶν νήσων τῶν µήλων 
Αα > lal a / na 
Dat. τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἰατροῖς οἴνοις ταῖς νήσοις τοῖς μήλοις 
/ / a 
Ace. τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἰατρούς οἴνους τὰς νήσους τὰ μῆλα 


Voc. (ὦ) ἄνθρωποι ἰατροί οἶνοι (ὦ) νῆσοι (ὦ) μῆλα 


ιν 


168 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


The accent remains on the same syllable as in the 
nominative, as long as the quantity of the final sylla- 
ble will permit, and there is no exception in the geni- 
tive plural, as in nouns of the first declension. 

The terminations of the accusative and vocative of 
neuter nouns are the same as those of the nominative 
in both numbers. The vocative termination is the 
same as that of the nominative in all genders in the 
plural. The accusative singular termination is ov for 
all genders. 

All adjectives of two terminations in ος and ον, as 
well as the masculine and neuter forms of adjectives 
and participles of three terminations in os, 7 (a), ov (see 
Lesson XXJ.), are declined like nouns of the second 
declension. The feminine of adjectives of three termi- 
nations, as was stated in the preceding lesson, is ἆθ- 
clined like a feminine noun of the first declension. 


DIMINUTIVES 


To the second declension belong the diminutives in 
(ov. These have often lost their original significance 
as diminutives, being employed, in the vernacular, in’ 
preference frequently to the more ancient form of the 
word ; ¢.g., instead of ἡ βίβλος, the book (now always 
the Bible), we have τὸ βιβλίον: instead of ὁ χάρτης, 
paper, τὸ χαρτίον is usually employed. These diminu- 
tives are declined regularly in the literary language, but 
in the vernacular the final ον is usually dropped, and in. 
the oblique cases the termination is united to the ὦ by 
synizesis (συνίζησις), the two syllables being pronounced 
as one, the « assuming the force of the English ψ. 


CONTRACTED NOUNS 


169 


There is also a very large class of diminutives 
(chiefly used in the vernacular) formed by the substi- 
tution of ἄκιον, more commonly ἀκι, for the nominative 
termination. Thus, from τὸ δένδρον, the tree, we have 
τὸ devdpaxi(ov)* ὁ ἀδελφός, the brother, τὸ ἀδελφάκι(ον). 
These are declined in the same way as the other dimin- 


utives ending in ((ον). 


The dative case is never used in the vernacular, its 
place being taken by εἰς or πρός with the accusative, 


or sometimes by the genitive. 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Literary Vernacular Literary Vernacular 
Nom. τὸ χαρτίν χαρτί τὰ χαρτία χαρτιά 
Gen. τοῦ χαρτίου χαρτιοῦ τῶν χαρτίων χαρτιῶν 
Dat. τῷ χαρτί wanting τοῖς χαρτίοι wanting 
Acc. τὸ χαρτίον χαρτί τὰ χαρτία χαρτιά 
Voc. (ὦ) χαρτίον χαρτί (ὦ) χαρτία χαρτιά 
CONTRACTED Nouns 
There are a few words in this declension, especially 


among the adjectives, ending in eos or οος (εον or oor) 


which are contracted to οὓς or οὔν. 


SINGULAR 
Mind Voyage Catarrh 
Nom. 0 νοῦς πλοῦς κατάρρους 
Gen. τοῦ νοῦ πλοῦ κατάρρου 
Dat. τῷ νῷ πλῷ κατάρρῳ 
Ace. τὸν νοῦν πλοῦν κατάρρουν 


Voc. (ὦ) νοῦ πλοῦ κατάρρου 


Bone 

\ ᾿ A 
TO OO TOUV 
Caines fal 
του οστου 

Ανα lal 

τω οστω 

\ 5 “ 
TO οστουν 


(ὦ) ὀστοῦν 


170 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


PLURAL 
> nan - / ο a 
Nom. οὐ vot πλοῖ κατάρροι τὰ ὀστᾶ 
Gen. τών νῶν πλιών κατάρρων τῶν ὀστῶν 
Dat. τοῖς νοῖς πλοῖς κατάρροις τοῖς ὀστοῖς 
Acc. τοὺς νοῦς πλοῦς κατάρρους τὰ ὀστᾶ 
Voc. (ὦ) vot πλοῖ κατάρροι (ὦ) ὀστᾶ 


The simple (uncompound) words of this contracted 
class are all perispome, having the circumflex accent 
on the termination; but the compounds of νοῦς, πλοῦς, 
and pods (stream) are paroxytone, i.e., With an acute 
accent on the penultimate or next to the last syllable. 
The genitive singular of νοῦς and its compounds is 
often written also νούς. 


LESSON EIGHTEENTH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ AEKATON ΟΤΔΟΟΝ 
Thought Exercise 


Νομίζω δὲν εἶναι ἀνάγκη va συστήσω τὴν ἐπιστολὴν διὰ 
τὸ ἐσωτερικόν. 
I think it is not necessary to register the letter for 
| the interior. 
Τὸ ταχυδρομικὸν κιβώτιον εἶναι εἰς τὴν προσεχῆ γωνίαν. 
The post-box is at the next corner. 
Oa λάβω τὴν ἐπιστολὴν καὶ θὰ τὴν ρίψω εἰς τὸ ταχυ- 
δρομικὸν κιβώτιον. 
Π1 will take the letter and will drop it in the letter- 
| box. 
| Λαμβάνω τὸ ἐπανωφόριον καὶ τὸν πῖλόν µου. 
| I take my overcoat and hat. 
AapBave' τὴν ἐπιστολὴν καὶ ἐξέρχομαι τῆς οἰκίας. 
I take the letter and go out of the house. 
Προχωρῶ πρὸς τὴν γωνίαν. | 
I go towards the corner. 
ᾠθάνω εἰς τὴν γωνίαν ὅπου εὑρίσκεται τὸ γραμματοκιβώ- 
| τίον. 
| I reach the corner where the letter-box is. 


Ἢ 7 Ν / a / \ / 
| Ἱγείρω τὸ κάλυμμα τοῦ γραμµατοκιβωτίου Kal ρίπτω 


\ 5 / 
την ἐπιστολήν. 


I raise the lid of the letter-box and drop in the letter. 


172 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Ἐπειδὴ ἡ ἐπιστολὴ διὰ τὸ ἐξωτερικὸν εἶναι ἀξίας θέλω 
τὴν δώσει ἐπὶ συστάσει. 

As the foreign letter (for the exterior) is of value, I 
will give it for registration. 

Προχωρῶ πρὸς τὸ ταχυδρομεῖον μὲ τὴν ἐπιστολήν. 

I go to the post-office with the letter. 

Τὸ ἀσφάλιστρον εἶναι ὀκτὼ ὀβολοί. 

The registration fee is eight cents. 

Ἰπιθέτω τὸ ἀναγκαῖον γραμματόσημον. 

I put on the necessary stamp. 

Δίδω τὴν ἐπιστολὴν εἰς τὸν ὑπάλληλον καὶ ζητῶ νὰ τὴν 
συστήση. 

I give the letter to the clerk and ask him to register it. 

Θέτει ἐπὶ συστάσει τὴν ἐπιστολὴν καὶ μοὶ δίδει ἀπόδειξιν. 

He registers the letter and gives me a receipt. 

Τώρα ἡ ἐπιστολὴ θὰ ὑπάγῃ ἀσφαλώς. 

Now the letter will go safely. 


Conversation Exercise 


/ “ Ages 3 / Ν 7 \ 2 
Νομίζετε ὅτι θὰ ἦναι ἀνάγκη νὰ συστήσω τὴν ἔπιστο- 
\ / 5 ον \ ἮΡΙ \ Ἃ WS 
λὴν ταύτην; Εἶναι αὐτὴ διὰ τὸ ἐσωτερικὸν ἢ τὸ έξωτε- 
/ BE? / , θὰ εὖ 1 [ / 
ρικόν; Εἰς ποίαν γωνίαν θὰ εὕρω' γραμματοκιβωτιον ; 
1153 Ν / an 
Εἶναι ταχυδρομικὸν κιβώτιον εἰς τὴν προσεχῆ γωνίαν ; 
fal \ / λ 
Ποῦ θὰ θέσω τὴν ἐπιστολήν; Δὲν θὰ τὴν ρίψητε εἰς 
\ 4 
τὸ ταχυδρομικὸν κιβώτιον; "Όταν φθάσητε εἰς τὴν γω- 
/ / Ν ΄ \ 5 / 4 Ἂν Ὰ / > 
νίαν, τί θὰ κάµητε τὴν ἐπιστολήν ; Oa την ρίψητε εἰς 
Ν / / 
τὸ γραμματοκιβώτιον;  Φθάσας εἰς τὴν γωνίαν ὅπου 
Ὁ / 
εὑρίσκεται τὸ γραμμµατοκιβώτιον, ἐγείρετε τὸ κάλυμμα 
> a / \ an n 
αὐτοῦ; ἐγείρας τὸ κάλυμμα τοῦ ταχυδρομικοῦ κιβωτίου 


1 Shall I find. 2 What will you do (with) the letter? 


READING EXERCISE 178 


πα \ » ᾿ \ > > / . Ν 9 3 / G > 
ρίπτετε τὴν ἐπιστολὴν εἰς αὐτο; ᾿Εὰν ἦναι ἀξίας ἡ ἐπι- 
Ν \ wy 3 / \ \ 49 / \ \ 
στολὴ διὰ τὸ ἐξωτερικόν, δὲν θὰ ἦναι προτιμότερον νὰ τὴν 
, Δ," ΄ / / \ / > 
δώσητε ἐπὶ συστάσει; Διατί θέλετε τὴν δώσει ἐπι συ- 


στάσει; Τί εἶναι τὸ δικαίωμα ; Δὲν πρέπει νὰ ἀγορά- 
σητε τὸ ἀναγκαῖον γραμματόσημον καὶ τὸ ἐπιθέσητε πρὶν 
ἐπὶ συστάσει δώσητε τὴν ἐπιστολήν; Lis τίνα δίδετε 
Τί ζητεῖτε νὰ κάμῃ ὁ ὑπάλληλος; Θὰ 
συστήσῃ τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ὁ ὑπάλληλος; Ὅταν θέτῃ ἐπὶ 
συστάσει τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ὁ ὑπάλληλος, τί σᾶς δίδει; ‘O 
ὑπάλληλος θὰ σᾶς δώσῃ ἀπόδειξιν, δὲν θὰ σᾶς δώσῃ ;" 
Νομίξετε ὅτι θὰ ὑπάγῃ ἀσφαλῶς συστημένη ἡ ἐπιστολή ; 
Πώς ὀνομάζεται ὁ διευθυντὴς τοῦ ταχυδρομείου" τῆς. 
Νέας Ὕόρκης; ᾿Απὸ ποῖον ὑπάλληλον ἠγοράσατε τὰ 
γραμματόσημα; Kis ποῖον μέρος" εὑρίσκεται ὁ ὑπάλλη- 
λος ὁ πωλῶν γραμματόσημα; 


ο 
τὴν ἐπιστολήν ; 


1 The fee. 
of New York ? 


? Will he not ? * What is the name of the postmaster 


4In what part, where ? 5 Who sells stamps. 


Reading Exercise 


Διευθυντὴς καὶ μαθητής. Principal and Student. 


Νέος τις εἴς τινα σχολὴν A young man in a 


“ > / }] Ὁ 
τῶν εὐελπίδων εὐηρεστεῖτο 
\ / e ο) / A 
va τρώγῃ ἀπλοῦν μόνον ap- 
/ 
τον, ἐμβαπτόμενον εἰς ζω- 


| pov, μηδενὸς ἀκούων τὴν 
συμβουλὴν ὅπως μεταβάλῃ 


\ 7 / ξ 
τὴν συνήθειαν ταύτην. Ὁ 


| διευθυντὴς τῆς σχολῆς δυσ- 
µαρεστηθεὶς ἐπὶ τῇ ἰδιοτρο- 


/ / Αα 
πια ταυτ) του νεανίου, προσ- 


certain military academy 
(school of cadets) was 
pleased to eat only plain 
bread, soaked in soup, list- 
ening to the advice of none 
that he should change this 
habit. The principal of 


the school being displeased 
at this eccentricity of the 


174 


/ > \ A 5 
καλέσας AUTOV τω εἶπεν, 
x / \ 
ὅτι ἂν δὲν μετέβαλε τὴν συ- 
/ 
νήθειάν του καὶ δὲν ἠκολου- 
ω \ / 
θει ἀκριβῶς τοὺς Kavovas 
a n Ν 
τῆς σχολῆς, ὤφειλε νὰ δια- 
/ \ 7] / \ 
κόψη τὰ μαθήματά του καὶ 
\ 2 νά 1 an ιά 
νὰ ἀναχωρήσῃ ἐκεῖθεν. Ἢ 
/ Ν 
δ᾽ ἀπειλὴ αὕτη ἐφόβισε τὸν 
νέον ὥστε τὸν κατέπεισε τε- 
Ca) \ > a 
λευταῖον va ἐκμυστηρευθῇ 
\ / an an 
τὴν αἰτίαν τῆς διαγωγῆς 
΄ ες > \ 8 
που ταυτης. Kis τὸν οἱ- 
/ / ε a 
κὀν µας, ἀπεκρίθη, οἱ γονεῖς 
¢ 
µου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί µου δὲν 
i 4 \ / 
τρώὠγουσιν ἄλλο, εἰμὴ µέλα- 
» \ / ς / 
να ἄρτον καὶ μόλις ευρι- 
"ARN 


ον / IQA \ 7 
ἐγὼ τρώγω ἐδῶ λευκὸν ap- 


σκουσι καὶ τοιοῦτον. 


κ b] / / 
τον καὶ ἐξαίρετον ζωμόν. 
Ν Ν / Ζ 
Τὰ δὲ πολυποίκιλα φαγητά, 
Ἂς ¢ a , 1 / / 
τὰ ὁποῖα βλέπω ἐνώπιον 
µου ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης μοὶ 
3 a 
φέρουσιν εἰς τὸν νοῦν TO- 
la) A \ 9 
σοῦτον ζωηρῶς τὸν οἶκόν 
μας ὥστε καὶ ἂν θέλω δὲν 
/ \ / 3 5 9 Ne 
δύναμαι va φάγω ἀπ᾽ αὑτά. 
Καὶ πῶς τῳόντι νὰ λάβω 
> / Sic VN / 
ἀνάπαυσιν, ἐνῶ συλλογί- 
Ὁ“ ¢ / 
Comat, ὅτι οἱ Φιλόστοργοι 
γονεῖς µου ἀποθνήσκουσι 
a / ς 
τῆς πείνης ; ὋὉ διευθυν- 
\ \ ’ / \ 
τὴς δὲν ἠδυνήθη νὰ Kpa- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


youth, having summoned 
him, said to him that if he 
did not change his custom 
and did not follow exactly 
the rules of the school he 
must break off his studies _ 
and go away from there. 
This threat terrified the 
young man so that it fi- 
nally induced him to con- 
fide the cause of this be- 

havior of his. “In οὐδ᾽ 
family,” he replied, “my 
parents and my brothers 
do not eat anything else 
but black bread, and hard- 
ly find even that. But 1 
eat here white bread and 
excellent soup. The many 


kinds of food which I see 


before me on the table 
bring to my mind so vivid- 
ly our home, that, even if 
I wish, I cannot eat of 
them. And how, indeed, 
can I take any comfort — 
while I reflect that my 
dear parents are perishing 
of hunger ?” 

The principal was un- 
able to keep back his tears, 
seeing such an instance of 


READING 


4 ἐξ / / / 
τήση τὰ δάκρυά του βλέπων 
τηλικοῦτον δεῖγμα υἱϊκῆς 
/ a 
φιλοστοργίας " τελευταῖον 
δὲ - Φ ‘ «coe / 
€ τῷ εἶπεν: Ο πατὴρ 
L 
> « / 
σου ἦτο στρατιωτικός, δὲν 
/ 
διόλου 


“Ὄχι, ἀπεκρίθη ὁ 


λαμβάνει σύντα- 
Ew ;” 
νέος, ἀλλὰ Kal τὴν ἐζήτησε 
μάλιστα ἀρκετὸν καιρόν, 
καὶ ἐπειδὴ κατεξωδεύθη, διὰ 
τοῦτο ἀπεσύρθη εἴς τινα 
νῆσον, προτιμῶν va Cn ἐκεῖ 
ἀθλίως παρὰ νὰ ὑποπέσῃ 
εἰς χρέος εἰς τὴν πρωτεύου- 


ος Ἀ 


σαν Αν τὸ πρᾶγμα ἔχῃ 


7 ε 
οὕτως, ἐπανέλαβεν ὁ διευ- 


 θυντής, ἐγώ θέλω φροντίσει 


\ F ΄ 9 σφεῖς 
νὰ προμηθεύσω εἰς αὐτὸν 
, a a 
σύνταξιν χιλίων δραχμών 

Ἅ, δὲ \ / / 
κατ ἔτος, καὶ θέλω μάλιστα 
an Ν A / 
ἐπιμεληθῆ va τῷ στείλω τὰ 
/ 
ἡμίση ἐμπρός. 
\ [ ΄ 
λάβε σὺ τώρα τριάκοντα 


Ἐν τούτοις 


δραχμὰς διὰ τὰ μικρά σου 
ἔξοδα." 
ἔχητε σκοπόν, εἶπεν ὁ νέος, 
νὰ πέμψητε χρήματα εἰς 
τὸν πατέρα μου, ἂς προστε- 


ο / 
"Αν, κύριέ µου, 


A ~ \ e 
θῶσι παρακαλώ καὶ αἱ dpa- 
χμαὶ αὗται" ἐγὼ ἐδῶ ἄπο- 
λαύω ὅ,τι ἐπιθυμῶ καὶ δὲν 


\ / 
μοὶ λείπει τὸ ἐλάχιστον, 


EXERCISE 175 


filiallove. Finally he said 
to him: “Thy father was 
a military man, does he 
not draw any pension at 
all?” No,” replied the 
young man, “ but he sought 
it a long enough time, and 
when his means were ex- 
hausted he then withdrew 
to an island, preferring 
to live there wretchedly 
rather than to fall into 
debt in the capital.” “If 
the thing is so,” said the 
principal, “I will take care 
to obtain for him a pen- 
sion of a thousand drach- 
mas a year, and [ will also 
see to it to send him the 
half in advance. In the 
meanwhile accept thyself 
now thirty drachmas for 
thy little outlays.” “Tf, 
sir, you have the inten- 
tion,” said the young man, 
“to send money to my 
father, let these thirty 
drachmas also be added ; 
I enjoy here whatever I 
desire, and there is not 
the least thing wanting to 
me, but I know how much 


176 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὸν πατέρα µου these will be of service to 
γνωρίζω πόσον αὗται θέ- my father.” 


λουσι χρησιμεύσει. 


VERBS 


εὐηρεστεῖτο, imp. ind. mid. εὐαρεστώ[έω), to please. 

τρώγῃ. pres. Subj. τρώγω, to eat. 

ἐμβαπτόμενον, pres. part. pass. ἐμβάπτω, to dip, soak. 

ἀκούων, pres. part. ἀκούω, to hear. 

μεταβάλῃ, aor. subj. µεταβάλλω, to change. 

δυσαρεστηθείς, aor. part. mid. δυσαρεστώ(έω), to dis- 
please. 

προσκαλέσας, aor. part. προσκαλά{έω), to call, summon. 

μετέβαλε, aor. ind. µεταβάλλω, to change. 

ἠκολούθει, imp. ind. ἀκολουθά[ίέω), to follow. 

ὤφειλε, imp. ind. ὀφείλω, to owe, must. 

διακόψῃ, aor. Subj. διακόπτω, to interrupt, discontinue. 

ἀναχωρήσῃ, aor. subj. avaywp@éw), to gO away. 

ἐφόβισε, aor. ind. φοβίζω, to frighten. 

κατέπεισε, aor. ind. καταπείθω, to persuade. 

ἐκμυστηρευθῇ, aor. subj. ἐκμυστηρεύομαι, to confide. 

ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 

εὑρίσκουσι, pres. ind. εὑρίσκω, ο find. 

φέρουσι, pres. ind. φέρω, to bring. 

Ad Bea, aor. subj. λαμβάνω, to take. 

συλλογίζοµαι, pres. ind., to reflect, meditate. 

ἀποθνήσκουσι, pres. ind. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 

ἠδυνήθη, aor. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

κρατήσῃ, aor. subj. κρατώ(έω), to hold. 

ἐζήτησε, aor. ind. ζητώ(έω), to ask, seek. 

κατεξωδεύθη, aor. ind. mid. κατεξοδεύω, to squander. 


THIRD DECLENSION 177 


ἀπεσύρθη, aor. ind. ἀποσύρομαι, to withdraw. 5 


προτιμῶν, pres. part. προτιμώ(άω), to prefer. 


ζῇ, aor. subj. ζώ(άω), to live. 


ὑποπέσῃ, aor. subj. ὑποπίπτω, to fall under, into. 

ἐπανέλαβε, aor. ind. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to repeat. 

θέλω φροντίσει, aor. fut. φροντίζω, to take care that. 

προμηθεύσω, aor. subj. προµηθεύω, to procure. 

θέλω ἐπιμεληθῆ, aor. fut. ἐπιμελοῦμαιίέομαι), to take 
care, attend to. 

στείλω. aor. subj. στέλλω, to send. 

πέµψητε; aor. subj. πέμπω, to send forward, despatch. 

as προστεθώσι, aor. imperat. pass. προσθέτω(προστίθημυ), 
to add. 

ἀπολαύω, pres. ind., to enjoy. 

ἐπιθυμώ(έω). pres. ind., to wish, desire. 

λείπει, pres. ind. λείπω, to fail, be wanting. 

γνωρίζω, pres. ind., to know. 

θέλουσι χρησιμεύσει, aor. fut. χρησιµεύω, to be useful. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be written out by the student after the model 
given in Lesson VII. 


Grammar 


THIRD DECLENSION 


The third declension comprises masculine, feminine, and neuter 
| substantives ending in a,t, v, ω, v,p, or o (W, €). The nouns of this 
| declension are imparisyllabic (περιττοσύλλαβα), that is, they have one 
| syllable more in the genitive and following cases than in the 
| nominative. 


All nouns ending in a, «, or vare of the neuter gender. 
12 


178 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


SINGULAR 
Lesson Honey Knee 
Nom. τὸ µάθηµα μέλι γόνυ 
Gen. τοῦ µαθήµατος μέλιτος γόνατος 
Dat. τῷ μαθήματι μέλιτι γόνατι 
Acc. τὸ μάθημα μέλι γόνυ 
Voc. (ὦ) μάθημα μέλι γόνυ 
ΓΠΡΙΟΒΑΙ, 
Νοπι. τὰ μαθήματα μέλιτα γόνατα 
Gen. τῶν μαθημάτων μελίτων γονάτων 
Dat. τοῖς μαθήμασι(ν) μέλισι(ν) γόνασι(ν) 
Acc. τὰ μαθήματα ᾿ μέλιτα " γόνατα 
Voc. (ὦ) μαθήματα μέλιτα γόνατα 
SINGULAR 
Bell Rule Old Man Month Harbor 
Nom.o κώδων κανὼν «γέρων μήν λιμήν 


Gen. τοῦ κώδωνος κανόνος γέροντος μηνός λιμένος 
Dat. τῷ κώδωνι κανόνι «γέροντι — μηνί λιμένι 
Acc. τὸν κώδωνα κανόνα γέροντα μῆνα λιμένα 
Voce. (ὦ) κώδων κανόν γέρον μήν λιμήν 


PLURAL 


Nom.oi κώδωνες κανόνες γέροντες μῆνες λιμένες 


Gen. τῶν κωδώνων κανόνων γερόντων μηνῶν λιμένων 
Dat. τοῖς κώδωσι(ν) κανὀσι(ν) γέρουσι(ν) μησί(ν) λιμέσι(ν) 
Ace. τοὺς κώδωνας κανόνας γέροντας μῆνας λιμένας 
Voc. (ὦ) κώδωνες κανόνες γέροντες μῆνες λιμένες 


| | 


4 


. THIRD DECLENSION 179 


SINGULAR, - 
Spark Ether Agent Liver 
Nom.o σπιθήρ αἰθήρ πράκτωρ τὸ ἧπαρ 


Gen. τοῦ σπινθῆρος αἰθέρος πράκτορο τοῦ ἥπατος 
Dat. τῷ σπινθῆρι αἰθέρι. πράκτορι τῷ ἥπατι 


Ace. τὸν σπινθῆρα αἰθέρα πράκτορα τὸ ἧπαρ 
γα. (ὦ) σπινθήρ αἰθήρ πράκτορ (ὦ) ἧπαρ 


PLURAE 


Nom. oi σπινθῆρες αἰθέρε πράκτορε τὰ ἥπατα 


- 7 > κ / - a e / 
Gen. τών σπινθήρων αἰθέρων πρακτόρων τών ἡπάτων 


Dat. τοῖς σπινθῆρσι(ν) αἰθέρσι(ν) πράκτορσι(ν) τοῖς ἥπασι(ν) 


Acc. τοὺς σπινθῆρας αἰθέρας πράκτορας τὰ ἥπατα 


(Voce. (ὦ) σπινθῆρες αἰθέρες πράκτορε (ὦ) ἥπατα 


SINGULAR 
Giant Week Horn 
ΙΝΟΠΙ, ὁ γίγας ἡ ἑβδομάς τὸ κέρας 
θη. τοῦ γίγαντος τῆς ἑβδομάδος τοῦ κέρατος 
Dat. τῷ γίγαντι τῇ ἑβδομάδι τῷ κέρατι 
}Acc. τὸν γίγαντα τὴν ἑβδομάδα τὸ κέρας 
Voc. (@) yiyas (ὦ) ἑβδομάς (ὦ) κέρας 
PLURAL 
Nom. οἱ γίγαντες αἱ ἑβδομάδες τὰ κέρατα 
Gen. τῶν γιγάντων τῶν ἑβδομάδων τῶν κεράτων 


Dat. τοῖς γίγασι(ν) ταῖς ἑβδομάσι(ν) τοῖς κέρασι(ν) 


jAcc. τοὺς γίγαντας τὰς ἑβδομάδας τὰ κέρατα 


Voc. (ὦ) γίγαντες (ὦ) ἑβδομάδες (ὦ) κέρατα 


180 MODERN GREEK MASTERY Ξ 


SINGULAR 
Nose Ray Hope Hen Favor 
Nom. ἡ pis ἀκτίς ἐλπίς ὄρνις χάρις 
Gen. τῆς ρινός ἀκτῖνος ἐμπίδος ὄρνιθος χάριτος 
Dat. τῇρινί ἀκτῖνι ἐλπίδι ὄρνιθε χάριτι 
Acc. τὴν piva ἀκτῖνα ἐλπίδα ὄρνιθα χάριτα 
Voce. (ὦ) pis ἀκτίς ἐλπίς ὄρνις χάρις 
PLURAL 
Nom. ai pives ἀκτῖνες ἐλπίδες ὄρνιθες χάριτες 


Gen. τῶν ρινῶὼν ἀκτίνων ἐλπίδων ὀρνίθων χαρίτων 
Dat. τοῖς ρισί(ν) ἀκτῖσι(ν) ἐλπίσι(ν) ὄρνισι(ν) χάρισι(ν) 
Acc. τοὺς ρῖνας ἀκτῖνας ἐλπίδας ὄρνιθας χάριτας 
Voc. (ὦ) ρῖνες ἀκτῖνες ἐλπίδες ὄρνιθες χάριτες 


SINGULAR 
Hero Love Light Beauty 
Nom.0o ἥρως ἔρως τὸ φῶς ἡ ὡραιότης 
new 7” ἴω / an Φ / 
Gen. τοῦ ἥρωος ἔρωτος τοῦ φωτός τῆς ὡραιότητος 
Dat. τῷ ἥρωι ἔρωτι. τῷφωτί τῇ ὡραιότητι 
λ 4 7 δι a \ ε as 
Acc. τὸν ἤρωα ἔρωτα τὸ φῶς τὴν ὡραιότητα 


Voc. (ὦ) ἥρως ἔρως (ὦ) φῶς (ὦ) ὡραιότης 


PLURAL 


Nom. οἱ ἥρωες ἔρωτες τὰ φῶτα αἱ ὡραιότητες 
Gen. τῶν ἡρώων ἐρώτων τῶν φώτων τῶν ὡραιοτήτων 
Dat. τοῖς ἥρωσι(ν) ἔρωσι(ν) τοῖς φωσί(ν) ταῖς ὡραιότησι(ν) 
Acc. τοὺς ἥρωας ἔρωτας τὰ φῶτα τὰς ὡραιότητας 
Voc. (ὦ) ἥρωες ἔρωτες (ὦ) φῶτα (ὦ) ὡραιότητες 


THIRD DECLENSION 181 


SINGULAR 


| Larynx Raven Vein 
| Nom. ὁ λάρυγξ κόραξ ἡ φλέψ 
| Gen. τοῦ λάρυγγος κόρακος τῆς φλεβός 
Dat. τῷ λάρυγγι κόρακι τῇ φλεβί 
ο Ace. τὸν λάρυγγα κόρακα τὴν φλέβα 
_ Voc. (ὦ) λάρυγξ κόραξ (ὦ) φλέψ' 
| 
PLURAL 
| Nom. οἱ λάρυγγες κόρακες αἱ φλέβες 
| Gen. τῶν λαρύγγων κοράκων τῶν φλεβῶν 


Dat. τοῖς λάρυγξι(ν) κόραξι(ν) ταῖς φλεψί(ν) 
| Acc. τοὺς λάρυγγας κόρακας τὰς φλέβας 
Voc. (ὦ) λάρυγγες κόρακες (ὦ) φλέβες 


The accent in all dissyllabic and polysyllabic words 
remains throughout on the same syllable as in the nom- 
inative as long as the quantity of the final syllable will 
| permit. (The a and. of the case-endings in the third 

declension are always short.) Monosyllabic nouns 

'throw the accent on the termination in the genitive 
and dative in both numbers; in the other cases the 
accent remains on the stem. An exception to this rule 
occurs in the following six words, which are paroxy- 
tone, instead of perispome, in the genitive plural: ὁ 
παῖς, boy; ὁ σής, moth; ἡ das, torch; τὸ φῶς, light ; τὸ 
οὓς, ear; and ὁ Τρώς, the Trojan. 

The dative plural takes a v (ν ἐφελκυστικόν) after 
the « at the end of the sentence or when the following 
word begins with a vowel. 


LESSON NINETEENTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ AEKATON ENNATON 


Thought Exercise 


Τί ὥρα εἶναι, dpa ye! 

What time is it, I wonder! 

Τὸ ὡρολόγιον ἀκριβῶς τώρα ἐσήμανε. 

The clock has just now struck. 

Τὸ ὡρολόγιον ἐσήμανεν ἑπτὰ πρὸ ὀλίγου. 

The clock struck seven a little while ago. 

Ἤκουσα τὸ ὡρολόγιον σημαῖνον, ἀλλὰ δὲν ἠρίθμησα. τοὺς 

κτύπους. 

I heard the clock striking, but I did not count the 
strokes. Ἷ 

Θὰ ἴδω εἰς τὸ ὡρολόγιόν μου. 

I will look at my watch. 

Ἐκβάλλω τὸ ὡρολόηιον ἐκ τοῦ θυλακίου µου. 

I take the watch out of my pocket. 

— Φαίνεται ὅτι ἔχει σταματήσει. 

It seems to have stopped. 

‘O δείκτης των δευτερολέπτων βεβαίως δὲν στρέφεται. 

The second-hand is certainly not moving (turning). 

Θέτω τὸ ὡρολόγιον εἰς τὸ οὓς µου. 

I put the watch to my ear. 

Δὲν τὸ ἀκούω νὰ κτυπᾶ. 

I do not hear it ticking. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 183 


᾿ Δὲν ἐργάζεται-- σταμάτησεν. 

It is not going (working)—it has stopped. 

— Φαίνεται ὅτι ἔχει ἐκχορδισθῆ. 

It appears to have run down. 

 ᾿᾽Βλησμόνησα νὰ τὸ χορδίσω χθὲς ἑσπέρας. 

_ I forgot to wind it last evening. 

 Χορδίζω τὸ ὡρολόγιον καὶ ὁ δείκτης τῶν δευτερολέπτων 
ἀρχίζει νὰ στρέφηται. 

I wind the watch and the second-hand begins to move 
(turn). 

To κανονίζω πρὸς τὸ ὡρολόγιον τοῦ τοίχου (ἐκκρεμές). 

I set it with the clock (of the wall). 

Συνήθως δεικνύει ἀκριβώς τὸν χρόνον. 

Usually it keeps good time (indicates exactly the time). 

*"Eviote πηγαίνει ἐμπρός. 

Sometimes it goes ahead. 

Εἶναι περίπου πέντε λεπτὰ ὀπίσω. 

It is about five minutes behind. 

Ἢ ἅλυσις τοῦ ὡρολογίου µου φαίνεται θολωμένη. 

My watch-chain looks dull. 

Πρέπει νὰ στιλβώσω τὴν ἅλυσιν ὥστε va φαίνηται 
καθαρά. 

I must polish it so that it looks bright (clean). 


Conversation Exercise 


Γνωρίζετε ποία ὥρα εἶναι; Ποίαν ὥραν ἔχομεν; Κυτ- 
7 1 ΄ / “ 3 9 / ΄ Ν 
τάξατε, παρακαλώ, τί ὥρα εἶναι. EKivat δύο--δύο καὶ 
τέταρτον--τρεῖς καὶ ἡμίσεια---ἕξ παρὰ τέταρτον---τέσσα- 
pes καὶ δέκα-- δέκα παρὰ εἰκοσιπέντε- ὀκτὼ καὶ εἴκοσιν 


1 506 what time it is, please. 


184 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


/ / 1 Ἢ / nO \ ο / 

---μεσονύκτιον---μεσημβρία. σήµανεν ἤδη τὸ ὠρολό- 
/ a / \ / / 

γιον; Δὲν ἐσήμανεν ἀκριβῶς τώρα τὸ ὡρολόγιον; οτε 

bd / ς / λ > / > \ Aiud is Ἠ / 

ἐσήμανεν ἑπτά; Δεν ἐσήμανεν οκτώ πρὸ ὀλίγου; κού- 


κας / a ¢/ 5) 7 ΓΕ: / 
TATE τὸ ὡρολοόγιον σηµαινον; Οταν ἠκούσατε το ὠρολό- 
a \ 3 / \ / > \ * 
γιον σημαῖνον, δὲν ἠριθμήσατε τοὺς κτύπους ; Kav δὲν 
/ / ο 3 / Ν / 2 ie e τ 
γνωρίζητε ποία ὡρα εἰναι, διατί δὲν βλέπετε εἰς το ὠρολό- 
/ 5 \ θ if \ / \ 4 16 2 > 
γιόν σας; ᾿Βὰν θέλητε νὰ γνωρίσητε τὴν ὠραν, LOETE εἰς 
\ e / / \ ΝΜ e / lal / > ο 
τὸ ὡρολόηιόν σας. Δὲν ἔχετε ὠρολογιον τοῦ τοίχου (ἐκκρε- 
/ / 
μὲς) εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ; Ἠργάζεται τὸ ὡρολόγιόν σας ; Δὲν 
> ig \ ς / / e / lal 
ἐσταμάτησε τὸ ὡρολόγιον σας; Ἀτρέφεται ὁ δείκτης των 
δευτερολέπτων; Bice βέβαιος ὅτι ἔχει σταματήσει; 
Διατί δὲν θέτετε τὸ ὡρολόγιον εἰς τὸ οὓς σας διὰ νὰ ἀκού- 
SX / 3 / > Ν A an / 
σητε ἐὰν στρέφηται; ᾿ Ἀκούετε αὐτὸ νὼ κτυπᾷ; Nopi- 
cf 3 5 n 5) / 7 3 \ XN 
tere ὅτι ἔχει ἐκχορδισθῆ: ᾿Ἠλησμονήσατε tows va τὸ 
δι. θὲ ς { δί \ e / / 
χορδίσητε χθες ἑσπερας ; Χορδίζετε τὸ ὠρολογιόν σας 
9.1 © / 1 / Ἃ νε / A 4 \ \ 
καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἑσπέραν ἢ καθ᾽ ἑκάστην πρωϊαν ; Δὲν θὰ 
| ὲ : 
τὸ κανονίσητε πρὸς τὸ ὡρολόγιον τοῦ τοίχου ; Τὸ ἐκανο- 
/ Χ XN \ e / / » . ἴω 
νίσατε χθὲς πρὸς τὸ ὡρολογιὸν µου; Δεικνύει ἀκριβῶς 
. \ / / 3 
τὸν χρόνον; Ὑπάγει τὸ ὡρολόγιόν σας ἐμπρὸς ἢ μένει 
5 / 5 \ Ὁ / / \ > “ / 
ὀπίσω;' Δὲν εἶναι περίπου δέκα λεπτὰ ἐμπρὸς ; Διατί 
\ 
δὲν τὸ δίδετε νὰ τὸ κανονίσωσιν ;° Καλὴ ἐἰσήγησις, θὰ 
: 8 / > \ ς Vee \ % \ / ᾿ = 
τὸ δώσω εἰς τὸν ὡρολογοποιὸν' διὰ νὰ TO κανονἰσῃ. Δια- 
τί δὲν στιλβόνετε τὴν ἄλυσίν σας; Ἢ ἅλυσις τοῦ 


0 / \ \ 
πρεπει να την 


ὡρολογίου σας δὲν εἶναι πολὺ στιλπνή ** 
‘ Φ a 
στιλβώσητε. ᾿Εστιλβώσατε νεωστὶ THY ἅλυσιν τοῦ ὧρο- 
/ / \ / 
λογίου σας; φαίνεται πολὺ θολωμένη. 

110 is two o’clock—a quarter after two—half-past three—a quarter to 
six—ten minutes (λεπτά, understood) after four—twenty-five minutes to 
ten—twenty minutes after eight—midnight—noon. 2 Look at (second 
aorist imperative). 8 Perhaps. 4 Every evening or every morning. 
5 Does your watch gain or lose time (go ahead or stay behind) ? δ To 
have it regulated. 7A good suggestion. 8 Watch-maker. ὃστιλ- 


βόνω (ῶ-όω), to polish. 10 Bright. 


| ἀνθρώπινον πνεῦμα. 


Hd / ς 
ἀπεκρίθη ὁ 


READING 


Reading 


ἈΝ ΨΆ A / 
Τὸ @ov τοῦ Κολόμβου. 


ε : ; 
O Καρδινάλιος Μεντό- 
/ 
ζας ἔδωκέ ποτε συμπόσιον 
> \ an / 
εἰς τιμὴν τοῦ Ἀριστοφόρου 
κά a 
Κολόμβου, κατὰ τὸ ὁποῖον 
5 ΄ / 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ τοὺς μεγίστους 
> / \ \ > / 
ἐπαίνους διὰ τὰς ἀνακαλύ- 
ἃ εὐ { ’ / 
Ψψεις, ἃς εἶχε κάμει. ᾿Ωνό.- 
Ν \ / A 
pate δὲ αὐτὰς μεγίστην τῶν 
“ A . 
νικῶν, ἃς ἀπέκτησέ ποτε τὸ 


Οἱ δὲ 


| αὐλικοὶ φθονοῦντες ἠγανά- 


8 aA @ 
κτησαν διὰ τοῦτο, καὶ εἷς 
2 > n Φ / 
ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶπε" “Mol φαί- 


| Φ e / Ν 
| vetat ὅτι ὁ δρόμος πρὸς 


Ν 
τὸν λεγόμενον νέον κόσμον 


δὲν ἦτο τόσον δυσεύρετος" 
Ι « 45) A 
ὁ ὠκεανὸς ἦτο πανταχοῦ 
| ἀνοικτός: ἑπομένως πᾶς θα- 
} , ες \ » 

λασσοπόρος Ἱσπανὸς ἤθε- 
| λεν εὕρει τὸν δρόμον." 


Ἢ ὁὀμήγυρις ἐπεδοκίμασε 


\ / lal \ / 
| Tov λόγον τοῦτον καὶ φωναί 
| / / 
[τινες ἠκούσθησαν" ““Ὦ, βέ- 
'βαια, βέβαια, ἕκαστος ἐξ 
ρα ΠΥ SP \ / 
ἡμῶν θὰ ἠδύνατο νὰ κάμῃ 


Qn \ ’ 
τοῦτο." “Πολὺ ἀπέχω," 


Χριστόφορος 


EXERCISE 


Exercise 


Columbus’s Ege. 


Cardinal Mendoza once 
gave a banquet in honor 
of Christopher Columbus 
at which he spoke the 
highest praises to him for 
the discoveries which he 
had made. He _ called 
them the greatest of the 
victories which the human 
mind ever achieved. But 
the courtiers, being envi- 
ous, were indignant at that, 
and one of them said: “ It 
seems to me that the way 
toward the so-called new 
world was not hard to 
find ; the ocean was every- 
where open, consequently 
every seafaring Spaniard 
might have found the 
way.” 

The company approved 
this speech, and certain 
voices were heard: “Why, 
of course! Every one of 
us could have done this!” 
“JT am far,” replied Co- 
lumbus, “ from boasting of 


186 


Κολόμβος, “va 


δι ἐκεῖνο ὅπερ ὀφείλω τῇ 


καυχηθῶ 


θείᾳ μόνον θελήσει, ἀλλ᾽ 
“ > \ / 
ὅμως εἰς πολλὰ πράγματα, 
τὰ ὁποῖα μᾶς φαίνονται εὐ- 
/ / » 
κατόρθωτα, πρέπει ἄλλος τις 
νὰ μᾶς δείξῃ τὸν τρόπον τῆς 
ἐκτελέσεως. Καὶ ἰδοὺ πα- 
ραδείγματος χάριν," λέγει 
ὁ Χριστόφορος Κολόμβος 
ΤΟΣ 
«στήσατε τὸ φὸν τοῦτο ἐπὶ 


έκε ἴῖνον τὸν κύριον, 


τῆς ἂκρας οὕτως ὥστε νὰ 
\ / { 
μὴ πέσῃ." Οὗτος δὲ λα- 
βων τὸ φὸν μάτην προσεπά- 
θει νὰ τὸ ὀρθώση" καὶ ὁ 
/ id 
γείτων ὁμοίως ἀπεπειράθη, 
> \ > / ς / 
ἀλλὰ ἀπέτυχεν ὠσανυτω». 
Τότε ἄλλοι ἔσπευσαν πέριξ 
\ 
καὶ ἕκαστος προσεπάθει νὰ 
στήσῃ τὸ Φὸν διὰ νὰ λάβη 
τὸ βραβεῖον, ἀλλ᾽ ἦτο ἀδύ- 
νατον νὰ ἐκτελέσῃ τις τὸ 
τέχνασμα. “Τοῦτο 
νο / 3 > / ε 
ἀδύνατον," ἐκραύγασεν ἢ 
£ 4 6 
ὁμήγυρις, 
, 0 ” 
γμα ἀκατόρθωτον. 


» ο 
ἀπαιτεῖτε πρα- 
“ Kal 
“ a 5 ΩΝ 
ὅμως τοῦτο εἶναι δυνατόν, 
\ 
Λαβὼν 


κτυπήσας 


εἶπεν ὁ Κολόμβος. 
\ Ἁ ba’ \ 
δὲ τὸ «ον καὶ 
αὐτὸ ἐλαφρῶς ἐπὶ τῆς τρα- 
rn . 

πέζης ἔστησε σταθερῶς ἐπι 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


εἶναι. 


what I owe solely to the 


“Divine will, but still in 


many things which ap- 
pear to us easy of accom- 
plishment some one else” 


must show us the mode- | 


of their execution. And 
see here, for example,” 
says Columbus to μας 
gentleman, “stand this egg 
on end so that it does not 
fall”’ The other, taking 
the egg, tried in vain to 
set it upright; and his 
neighbor also attempted, 
but failed likewise. Then 
others hastened around, 
and each tried to stand up 
the egg in order to get 
the prize, but it was im-— 
possible for any one to ac- 
complish the trick. “That 
is impossible!” cried the 
company, “ you are asking 
someting that cannot be 
done.” “And yet this is 
possible,” said Columbus. 
Taking the egg and 
striking it lightly on the 
table, he stood it firmly 
on the pressed-in shell. 
“ But that every one of us 


VERBS 


~ { / 
τοῦ πεπιεσμένου κελύφους. 


\ A 
«᾿Αλλὰ τοῦτο ἕκαστος ἐξ 


ς lal γὃ / \ / 39 
ἡμῶν ἠδύνατο νὰ κάμῃ, 
> / e > / 
ἀνέκραξαν οἱ αὐλικοί. 
“᾿Αλλὰ, κύριοι, ἀπεκρίθη 
4 4 ο 
ο Κολόμβος μειδιῶν, “' δια- 
/ Ἀ \ > 7 ς 
τί δὲν τὸ ἐκάμνετε; Ἢ µε- 
\ ς a ς / 
ταξὺ ἡμῶν ὑπάρχουσα δια- 
\ Lg A 
φορὰ εἶναι ὅτι ὑμεῖς μὲν 
16 4 Ν \ / 5 \ 
ἠδύνασθε va TO κάµητε, ἐγὼ 
\ ΝΑ 9 
δὲ τὸ ἔκαμα. 


187 


could do,” cried the cour- 
tiers. ‘ But, gentlemen,” 
replied Columbus, smiling, 
“why did you not do it? 
The difference existing be- 
tween us is that you were 
able to do it, indeed, but I 
did it.” 


VERBS 


ἔδωκε, aor. ind. δίδω, to give. 


εἶχε κάμει, plup. ind. κάμνω, to do. 

ὠνόμαζε, imp. ind. ὀνομάξω, to call, name. 

ἀπέκτησε, aor. ind. ἀποκτῶ(άω), to obtain. 

φθονοῦντες, pres. part. φθονῶ(έω), to envy. 

| ἠγανάκτησαν, aor. ind. ἀγανακτῶ[έω), to resent, be in- 


dignant. 


| φαίνεται, pres. ind. φαίνομαι, to appear, seem. 
| λεγόμενον, pres. part. pass. λέγω, to say. 

ἤθελε εὕρει, aor. condit. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

| ἐπεδοκίμασε, aor. ind. ἐπιδοκιμάζω, to approve. 
| ἠκούσθησαν, aor. ind. pass. ἀκούω, to hear. 

| θὰ ἠδύνατο, imp. condit. δύναμαι, to be able. 


Ἱκάμη, aor. subj. κάμνω, to do. 


᾿ ἀπέχω, pres. ind., to be distant from, abstain from. 


(Far be it from-me!) 


καυχηθῶ, aor. subj. καυχώμαι{άοµαι), to boast. 
Γδείξη, aor. subj. δεικνύω (δείκνυμι), to show. 
στήσατε, aor. imperat. στήνω (terns), to set up. 


188 : MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


πέσῃ, aor. subj. πίπτω, to fall. 

προσεπάθει, imp. ind. προσπαθώ{έω), to try, attempt. 
ὀρθώσῃ, aor. Subj. ὀρθόνω(ώ-όω), to erect, raise. 
ἀπεπειράθη, aor. ind. ἀποπειρώμαι{άομαι), to attempt. 
ἀπέτυχε, 2d aor. ind. ἀποτυγχάνω, to fail. 

ἔσπευσαν, aor. ind. σπεύδω, to hasten. 

λάβη, aor. subj. λαμβάνω, to take, receive, get. 
ἐκτελέσει, aor. subj. ἐκτελάίέω), to accomplish. 
ἐκραύγασε, aor. ind. κραυγάζω, to ery, clamor. 
ἀπαιτεῖτε, pres. ind. ἀπαιτα[έω), to demand, require. 
κτυπήσας, aor. part. κτυπώ(άω), to strike. 

ἔστησε, aor. ind. στήνω(ἴστημυ), to set. 

ἀνέκραξαν, aor. ind. ἀνακράξζω, to cry out, exclaim. 
ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, LO reply. 

μειδιῶν, pres. part. µειδιώ(άω), to smile. 

ἐκάμνετε, imp. ind. κάμνω, to do. 

ὑπάρχουσα, pres. part. fem. ὑπάρχω, to exist, be. 
ἠδύνασθε, imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

κάµητε, aor. Subj. κάμνω, to do. 

ἔκαμα, aor. ind. of the same. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be written out in the manner explained in Lesson 
VII., and then to be read over several times aloud. 


Grammar 


2 


ConrTRActED Nouns oF THE THIRD DECLENSION 


Several nouns of this declension, whose root ends in 
a vowel, suffer a contraction of this vowel with the 


CONTRACTED NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 


termination in some or all of the oblique cases. 
| contractions occur in accordance with the following 


189 


These 


rule: 
ea becomes η---εε and εἴ become ει 
υε ἡ, v—eo “ oo - ου 
ot “  ot—oa “ ew “ «ω 
SINGULAR 
Eyebrow Mouse City 
Nom. ἡ ὀφρύς ὁ μῦς τὸ ἄστυ 
Gen. τῆς ὀφρύος τοῦ µυός τοῦ ἄστεος 
Dat. τῇ ὀφρύϊ τῷ μυΐ τῷ ἄστει 
Acc. τὴν ὀφρύν τὸν μῦν τὸ ἄστυ 
Voc. (ὦ) ὀφρύ (ὦ) μῦ (ὦ) ἄστυ 
PLURAL 
Nom. αἱ ὀφρῦς--ὀφρύε οἱ μῦς--μῦε τὰ ἄστη 


ones. 


Gen. τῶν ὀφρύων 
Dat. ταῖς ὀφρύσι(ν) 
Acc. τὰς ὀφρῦς-- ὀφρύας 


Voc. (ὦ) ὀφρῦς-- ὀφρύες 


τῶν μυῶν 
τοῖς µυσί(ν) 


a 7 
τῶν ἄστεων 


τοῖς ἄστεσι(ν) 


τοὺς μῦς-- μύας τὰ ἄστη 


(ὦ) μῦς---μῦες 


(ὦ) ἄστη 


The uncontracted forms of words of this class (geni- 


tive in ος) are also in use as well as the contracted 
Like ἄστυ is declined τὸ ἥμισυ, the half. 
the irregular accent in the genitive plural of this word. 


Note 


To ἄστυ usually refers to Athens, and it is seldom em- 
ployed in any other sense at the present day, ἡ πόλις 
being the ordinary word for city. The latter, when 
used alone, generally refers to Constantinople. 


190 MODERN GREEK MASTERY — 


SINGULAR 
Forest Echo Dawn 
Nom. τὸ δάσος ἡ ἠχώ ἡ ἠώς 
Gen. τοῦ δάσους (δάσεος) τῆς ἠχοῦς (ἠχόος) τῆς ἠοῦς (ἠόος) 
Dat. τῷ δάσει (δάσε) τῇ ἠχοῖ (HOt) τῇ ἠοῖ (joi) 


Acc. τὸ δάσος τὴν ἠχώ (ἠχόα) τὴν ἠώ (ἠόα) 

Voc. (ὦ) δάσος (ὦ) ἠχοῖ (ὦ) ἠοῖ 
PLURAL 

Nom. τὰ δάση (δάσεα) αἱ ἠχοί αἱ ἠοί 

Gen. τῶν δασῶν (δασέων) τῶν ἠχῶν τῶν ἠῶν 

Dat. τοῖς δάσεσι(ν) ταῖς ἠχοῖς ταῖς ἠοῖς 

Ace. τὰ δάση (δάσεα) τὰς ἠχο - Tas ἠούς 

Voc. (ὦ) δάση (δάσεα) (ὦ) ἠχοί (ὦ) ἠοί 


The forms in parentheses are not employed, but are 
here given only to show how the contractions are 
effected. The nouns in ὦ and ως, which are few in 
number, are all feminine; they are declined in the 
plural like nouns of the second declension. 


SINGULAR 
City Forearm King 
Nom. ἡ πόλις ὁ πῆχυς ὁ βασιλεύς. 
Gen. τῆς πόλεως τοῦ πήχεως τοῦ βασιλέως 
Dat. τῇ πόλει (πὀλεϊ) τῷ πήχει (πήχεϊ) τῷ βασιλεῖ[εἴ) 
Ace. τὴν πόλιν τὸν πῆχυν τὸν βασιλέα 


Voc. (ὦ) πόλι (ὦ) πῆχυ (ὦ) βασιλεῦ 


IRREGULAR NOUNS 191 


PLURAL 
Nom. ai πόλεις οἱ πήχεις οἱ βασιλεῖς 
Gen. τῶν πόλεων τῶν πήχεων τῶν βασιλέων 
Dat. ταῖς πὀλεσι(ν) τοῖς πήχεσι(ν) τοῖς βασιλεῦσι(ν) 
Acc. τὰς πόλεις τοὺς πήχεις τοὺς βασιλεῖς 
Voc. (ὦ) πόλεις (ὦ) πήχεις (ὦ) βασιλεῖς 


In nouns of this class (genitive in εως) the w of the 
genitive in both numbers has, as regards accent, the 
value of a short vowel, so that those words which are 
not accented on the final syllable in the nominative 
are proparoxytone in the genitive. ΑἸ] the words in 
is, With few exceptions, are feminine. Like πῆχυς are 
declined ὁ πρέσβυς, ambassador, and ὁ πέλεκυς. hatchet. 
All the words in evs are oxytone and masculine. ; 


IRREGULAR Nouns 


The following are the most important of the irregu- 
lar nouns of the third declension: 


ὁ πατήρ, father, πατρός, πατρί, πατέρα. πάτερ---πατέρες, 
πατέρων, πατράσι(ν), πατέρας, πατέρες. 

ἡ μήτηρ, mother, μητρός, μητρί, μητέρα, μῆτερ--- μητέρες, 
μητέρων, μητράσι(ν), μητέρας, μητέρες. 

ἡ θυγάτηρ, daughter, θυγατρός, θυγατρί, θυγατέρα, θύγα- 
τερ---θυγατέρες, θυγατέρων, θυγατράσι(ν), θυγατέρας, 
θυγατέρες. 

ὁ ἀνήρ, Man, ἀνδρός, ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα, ἄνερ--- ἄνδρες, ἀνδρῶν, 
ἀνδράσι(ν), ἄνδρας, ἄνδρες. 

τὸ γάλα, milk, γάλακτος, γάλακτι, κτλ. 


195 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ὁ κύων, Og, κυνός, κυνί, κύνα, κύον---κύνες, κυνῶν, κυσί(ν), 
κύνας, κύνες. 

τὸ ὕδωρ, water, ὕδατος, ὕδατι---ὕδατα, ὑδάτων, ὕδασι(ν). 

ἡ γυνή, Woman, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, γύναι---γυναῖ- 
κες, γυναικῶν, γυναιξί(ν), γυναῖκας, γυναῖκες. | 

ἡ ἀλώπηξ, the fox, ἀλώπεκος, κτλ. 


ς / σης. / / / , 7, Ps 

ἡ θρίξ, hair, τριχός, τριχί, τρίχα, θρίξ-- τρίχες, τριχών, 
τριξί(ν), τρίχας, τρίχες. 

ἡ νύξ, night, νυκτός, νυκτί, νύκτα, νύξ --- νύκτες, νυκτῶν, 


νυξί(ν), νύκτας, νύκτες. 

ἡ κλείς, key, κλειδός, κλειδί, κλεῖδα OF κλεῖν, κλείς---κλεῖ- 
δες, κλειδῶν, κλεισί(ν), κλεῖδας OF κλεῖς, κλεῖδες OF 
κλεῖς. 

ὁ ὀδούς, the tooth, ὀδόντος, κτλ. 

τὸ οὓς, CAL, ὠτός, ὠτί---ὦτα, ὥτων, ὠσί(ν). 

ὁ παῖς, the Ῥογ.παιδός,παιδί,παῖδα, παῖ-- παῖδες,παίδων, 
παισ((ν), παῖδας, παῖδες. 

ὁ πούς, foot, ποδός, ποδί, πόδα, ποῦ---πόδες, ποδῶν, ποσίν), 
πόδας, πόδες. 

ὁ βοῦς, Ox, βοός, Bot, βοῦν, βοῦ --- βόες, βοῶν, βουσί(ν), 
βόας, βόες. 

ὁ μάρτυς, Witness, μάρτυρος, μάρτυρι, κτλ. 

ἡ γραῦς, old woman, γραός, γραΐ, γραῦν, γραῦ --γρᾶες, 
γραῶν, γραυσί(ν), γραῦς, γρᾶες. 

ἡ ναῦς, Ship, νηός or νεώς, νηΐ, ναῦν, ναῦ---νῆες, νηῶν OF 
νεῶν, ναυσί(ν), ναῦς, νῆες. 

ὁ ἀστήρ, star, ἀστέρος, has ἀστράσι(ν) in the dative 
plaral. 

a χείρ, hand, χειρός, has χερσί(ν) in the dative plural. 

ὁ Ἂρης, Mars, Άρεως or “Apeos, “Apes, “Apny or "Ap, 
"Apes. 

6 Σεύς, Jupiter, Διός, Aci, Δία, Zed. 


VERNACULAR FORMS : 193 


ἡ Δημήτηρ, Ceres, Δήμητρος, Δήμητρι, Δήμητρα, Δήμη- 
τερ. 


Γραῦς, ναῦς, and κλείς are very seldom employed in 
_ the modern language, the common forms being ἡ γραῖα, 
τὸ πλοῖον, aud τὸ κλειδίον. 


VERNACULAR ΓΟΠΜΒ 


In the language of the common people the third de- 
clension is not often used, many of the words of this 
class being changed to the first declension. Thus the 
masculine words ending in ην, np, wv, wp, as, της, ἐς 
(uncontracted), ἕ, ψ., and ws (uncontracted) are changed 
to the first declension by taking the accusative plural 
as the nominative form: o πατήρ, father, acc. plur. 
πατέρας. In the same way feminine words with these 
terminations take the accusative singular as the nom- 
inative: ἡ μήτηρ, mother, acc. sing. μητέρα. 


LESSON TWENTIETH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ EIKOZTON 


The student has now acquired a certain facility of mental ex- 
pression of the common actions of daily life, and the so-called 
Thought Exercise wiil therefore give place to a new theme, which, 
while still serving as a basis for the Conversation Exercise, is de- 
signed to enlarge the learner’s vocabulary, This is not intended to 
replace, but rather to supplement, the Thought Exercise, furnishing 
the student with fresh material which he should now be able to work 
into the latter, using the models already learned or constructing new 
ones from this and the Reading Exercises. 

This theme should be read carefully (always aloud) several times, 
the translation being used only so far as it may be necessary to ex- 
plain the pew words, and when it is thoroughly familiarized, so that 
it can be read and understood without reference to the English, the 
Conversation Exercise may be taken up. 


Τὸ ἀνθρώπινον σῶμα 
The Human body 


Τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου συνίσταται ἐκ κεφαλῆς, κορμοῦ 

The body of | man consists of head, trunk, 
καὶ τεσσάρων ἄκρων. Τὸ κρανίον καὶ τὸ πρόσωπον 
and four extremities. Theskull andthe face 
ἀποτελοῦσι τὴν κεφαλήν. Τὸ κρανίον συνίσταται ἐκ 
make up the head. The skull consists of 
μερικῶν ὀστῶν καὶ καλύπτεται ὑπὸ δέρματος καὶ τριχών, 
several bones and is covered by skin απά hairs 


μμ ἄπ «οὐδ 


| 
| 


THE HUMAN BODY 195 


τὰ ὁποῖα ὁμοῦ ὀνομάζονται περικρανία. Τὸ κεντρικὸν 
which together are called scalp. The central 
σημεῖον τοῦ μέρους τούτου εἶναι ἡ κορυφὴ τῆς κεφαλῆς. 
point of this part is the crown of the head. 
Ἐντὸς τοῦ κρανίου εὑρίσκεται ὁ ἐγκέφαλος. Td ἄνω 
Within the skull [5 found the brain. The upper 
µέρος τοῦ προσώπου εἶναι TO µέτωπον, ὑπὸ TO ὁποῖον 
part of theface is the forehead, below which 
εἶναι οἱ δύο ὀφθαλμοί. Μεταξὺ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν καὶ 
are the two eyes. Between the eyes and 
πρὸς τὰ κάτω ἐκτεινομένη εἶναι ἡ ρίς, καὶ ὑπὸ THY 
downward stretching is the nose, and below the 
ρίνα εὑρίσκεται τὸ στόμα. Τὸ πρόσωχον ἀπολήγει εἰς 
nose 15 found the mouth. The face terminates in 
Tov πώγωνα. Ἠκατέρωθεν τῆς ρινὸς καὶ τοῦ στόματος 
the chin. On either side of the nose and of the mouth 
εἶναι αἱ παρειαὶ καὶ ὄπισθεν ἑκάστης παρειᾶς εὑρίσκεται 
are the cheeks, and back of each cheek is found 


τὸ οὓς. , 
the ear. ’ 
Ὑπεράνω ἑκάστου ὀφθαλμοῦ ἐκτείνεται στοῖχος 
Above each eye stretches (a) line 


τριχῶν καλούμενος ὀφρύς. "Όταν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἦναι 
of hairs called eyebrows. When the eyes are 

\ / αν / a / ς 
κλειστοὶ, καλύπτονται διὰ δύο πτυχῶν δέρματος αἱ 


closed, they are covered by νο folds of skin 
ὁποῖαι ὀνομάζονται βλέφαρα. His τὰ ἄκρα τῶν 
Which are called eyelids. At the edges οἵ 


βλεφάρων φύονται τρίχες καλούμεναι βλεφαρίδες. Οἱ 
the eyelids grow _ hairs called eyelashes. The 


5 \ 5 / Ν \ a “ 
ὀφθαλμοὶ εἶναι μέλανες, καστανοὶ καὶ κυανοῖ, οὕτω 
eyes are black, brown, and blue, 80 


196 + MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


~ 


λεγόμενοι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρώματος τῆς ἴριδος. Ἡ κόρη κεῖται 
called fromthe color of the iris. The pupil lies 
> - / “ “ 3 / / 

ἐν τῷ κέντρῳ τῆς ἴριδος - ἀλλάσσει διαστάσεις, δια- 

ἢ the centre ofthe iris; it changes dimensions α]- 


στελλομένη εἰς τὸ σκότος καὶ συστελλομένη τῇ 
lating in the dark and contracting through the 


ἐνεργείᾳ τοῦ φωτός. 
action of the light. | 
Ὅταν ὁ ἄνθρωπος γηράσκῃ, ἡ ὅρασις συνήθως 
When 6 man grows Ο]4, the sight usually 
ἀμυδροῦται, ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ νέοι ἔχουσι πολλάκις ἀσθενῆ 
grows dim, but even the young have frequently weak 


ὅρασιν. Οἱ νέο ὅταν ἔχωσιν ἀσθενῆ τὴν ὅρασιν, 
sight. The young, when they have weak (the) sight, 
εἶναι συνήθως. μύωπες, οἱ δὲ γέροντες πρεσβύωπες. 
are usually near-sighted, the old (are) far-sighted. 
“Ὅσοι ἀπολύτως δὲν δύνανται νὰ βλέπωσιν ὀνομάξονται 
Those who absolutely are not able to see ᾿ are called - 
τυφλοί. Οἱ μύωπες καὶ οἱ πρεσβύωπες φέρουσι 
blind, The near-sighted and the far-sighted wear 
δίοπτρα διὰ τῶν ὁποίων δύνανται ν᾿ ἀναγινώσκωσιν. 
spectacles by which they are enabled to read. 
Διὰ νὰ βλέπωμεν ἀντικείμενα τὰ ὁποῖα εἶναι πολὺ 
In order to see objects which are _ too 
μικρὰ ὥστε νὰ ἦναι ὁρατὰ διὰ τοῦ γυμνοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ, 
small to be visible by the naked eye 
µεταχειριζόµεθα ἐργαλεῖον καλούμενον µικροσκόπιον. 
weemploy — instrument called microscope. 
"Οταν θέλωμεν νὰ βλέπωμεν ἀντικείμενα τὰ ὁποῖα 
When we wish to see objects which are 
κεῖνται πολὺ μακράν, ola πλοῖον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν ἢ 
situated very far off, such as ἃ ship on the sea or 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 197 


τὴν σελήνην ἢ TA ἄστρα, µεταχειριζόµεθα τηλεσκόπιον. 
the moon or the stars, we use a telescope. 
To τε µικροσκόπιον καὶ τὸ τηλεσκόπιον συνίστανται 
Both the microscope and the telescope are composed 
ἐκ φακῶν οἱ ὁποῖοι ἐκτρέπουσι τὰς ἀκτῖνας τοῦ φωτὸς 
of lenses which deflect the rays of the light 
τὰς ἐρχομένας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐξεταζομένου ἀντικειμένου οὕτως 
coming fromthe examined object ᾽ 8ο 
ὥστε νὰ συναθροίζωνται εἰς ἕν σημεῖον τοῦ ἀμφιβλη- 
that they may be collected together in one spot of the 
στροειδοῦς YLT@VOS. Ἡ ὅρασις εἶναι µία τῶν 
netlike tunic (retina). The sight is one of the 
πέντε αἰσθήσεων" ἴσως ἡ ἀναγκαιοτάτη ὅλων. 
five senses; perhaps the most important of all. 


Conversation Exercise 


> / a , ον ο / a / 
Ex ποίων μερῶν συνίσταται τὸ ἀνθρώπινον σώμα; Τί 

’ Ὃ e \ ¢ \ 4 Ν / 3/ 
ἀποτελοῦσιν ἡ κεφαλὴ, ὁ κορμὸς καὶ τὰ τέσσαρα ἄκρα; 

4% / a ͵ ς / ΘΕ 

κ ποίων μερῶν συνίσταται ἡ κεφαλή; Τί ἀποτελουσι 
\ / \ / 1 / X 7 
τὸ κρανίον καὶ τὸ πρόσωπον; Ilws ὀνομάζεται τὸ καλύ- 
1 \ 4 a 3 / \ / 3 5 Φ 
πτον᾿ τὸ κρανίον; Πώς ὀνομάζεται τὸ κέντρον ἀφ᾽ οὗ 


| / 2 / n 
| φύονται πανταχόσε" αἱ τρίχες; τοῦτο τὸ κεντρικὀν 


an 2 / / / ς / > \ - 
σημεῖον ὀνομάζεται κορυφὴ. Τί εὑρίσκεται ἐντὸς τοῦ κρα- 
/ - ς 7 e b] / / 3 \ BA 
viov; lov εὑρίσκεται ὁ ἐγκέφαλος; Τὶ εἶναι τὸ ἄνω 


| µέρος τοῦ προσώπου; ἨΠοῖα μέρη τοῦ προσώπου εἶναι 


» A ς Ν Ν / / ¥ > 4" \ 
ἀκριβῶς ὑπὸ τὸ μέτωπον; Ἰ]οία λέξις εἰς THY κοινὴν 
/ 2 Ν \ re / 

σηµαίνει ὀφθαλμός ;" εἰς τὴν κοινὴν μάτι σηµαίνει ὀφθαλ- 
/ an / A / 

pos. Ἰοῖον µέρος τοῦ προσώπου ἐκτείνεται πρὸς τὰ 
a \ a 3 Ψ / Ν / e Ν 

κάτω μεταξὺ τῶν ὀφθαλμων; Εὐὑρίσκεται τὸ στόμα ὑπὸ 


1 ΤῊ 6. (thing) covering. 2Τη all directions. 3’ What word in the 
vernacular means eye ? 


198. MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


\ / 3 7 <3 / \ If 5 e / | 
τὴν ρίνα; Eis τί ἀπολήγει τὸ πρόσωπον ; Εἶναι ο πώ- 
/ ~ / an / ᾿ 
γων τὸ κατώτατον᾽ μέρος τοῦ προσώπου; [Ποῖον μέρος 
5 A \ \ ~ A 
εἶναι ἑκατέρωθεν τῆς ρινὸς καὶ τοῦ στόματος ; Κεῖνται 
Ὁ (al a / / 2 \ 
τὰ ὦτα ὄπισθεν τών παρειῶν; Kis τί χρησιμεύουσι τὰ 
ο \ A Σ/ δι, ΣΝ / δὲ / [χά = 
Ata; Διὰ τῶν ὤτων ἀκούομεν, δὲν ἔχει οὕτω; Hivat 
ς > \ 4 7 ο) / 3 θ / 4h / - e€ 2 
ἡ ἀκοὴ" μία τῶν πέντε αἰσθήσεων; ‘Lis εἶναι ἡ avay- 
/ an / > lal 2 / 5 5 ένο 
καιοτάτη τῶν πέντε εἰδικῶν αἰσθήσεων ;" Kivat ἡ ὅρασις 
3 / a 3 a 4 5 e ” a 
ἀναγκαιοτέρα τῆς ἀκοῆς ; Τίνες εἶναι at ἄλλαι τρεῖς 
να ο \ 5 8 
εἰδικαὶ αἰσθήσεις; ἡ γεῦσις, ἡ ὄσφρησις' καὶ ἡ apy. 
qn e rn - = Cs n / 
ἸΠῶς ὀνομάζεται ὁ στοῖχος τῶν τριχῶν ὁ ὁποῖος ἐκτείνεται 
ς / 6 7 2 a \ / / ς 
υπεράνω εκάστου ὀφθαλμοῦ; Διὰ τίνος καλύπτονται οἱ 
5 3 n v4 - 
ὀφθαλμοὶ ὅταν ἦναι κλειστοί; Ids ὀνομάζονται αὗται 
ε \ - ς 
αἱ δύο πτυχαὶ διὰ τῶν ὁποίων καλύπτονται οἱ ὀφθαλμοί; 
\ τὰ 
Φύονται τρίχες εἰς τὰ ἄκρα των βλεφάρων ; "Eyouow at 
/ iQ ” / 9 / » 37 Μ᾽ 10 
τρίχες αὗται ὄνομά τι!" μάλιστα, ἔχουσιν ἴδιον ὄνομα, 
al if nr ο “ 
καλοῦνται βλεφαρίδες. ἸΠοῖον μέρος τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ εἶναι, 
3 / 
ἐχρωματισμένον ; ἡ ἴρις εἶναι ἐχρωματισμένή. Δύ- 
: es \ μ᾽ ἊΣ / ολ a 
νανται οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ νὰ ἦναι μέλανες, KATTAVOL ἢ κυανοι; 
A A ε / > / / 
Ποῦ κεῖται ἡ κόρη; Ἀλλάσσει διαστάσεις ἡ κόρη; 
/ / 

Διαστέλλεται ἡ κόρη εἰς τὸ σκότος; Τίνος ἐνεργείᾳ 
ζλλ, 9 A ΔΝ ὃ Ωω exe Ψ a 
συστέλλεται αὕτη ; μυδροῦται ἡ ὅρασις ὅταν γηρᾶσκῃ 

cy θ "ER > ders ὁ 12 ‘ e / 3 “οι 

ὁ ἄνθρωπος ; χουσιν ἐνίοτε" καὶ οἱ νέοι ἀσθενῆ ὅρα- 
. 4) »/ ς / > θ [οὶ \ [τ 3 

σιν; ταν ἔχωσιν οἱ γέροντες ἀσθενῆ τὴν ὅρασιν, εἶναι 

7 Ἃ / 5 ΄ 

μύωπες ἢ πρεσβύωπες; Εἶναι μύωπες οἱ νέοι οἱ ἔχοντες 

.) rn Ἂς / ἊΝ 

ἀσθενῆ τὴν ὅρασιν; lds ὀνομάζονται ὅσοι" δὲν δύ- 

/ 
νανται διόλου" νὰ βλέπωσιν; Τί φέρουσιν οἱ ἔχοντες 


1 Lowest. 2 Of what use are (to what serve) the ears ? 3 Note the 
exception to the rule for the accent of monosyllabic nouns of the third de- 
clension (p. 181). 4 Hearing. ® Special senses. ° Taste. TSmell. 
8Touch. °%Anyname. [19 Special name. 11 Colored (perf. participle), 
12 Sometimes, 183Those who. 14 At all. This may be written, as here, 
in one word, or in two words, δι ὅλου. 


READING EXERCISE 199 


» 


ν" 3 lal \ Ὡ + x 3 / 2.32 a 
ἀσθενῆ τὴν ὅρασιν διὰ νὰ avaywookwow ; Τί ἐργαλεῖον 
/ x \ 77 > / \ e a 
µεταχειριζόµεθα διὰ νὰ βλέπωμεν ἀντικείμενα τὰ ὁποῖα 
\ \ / \ 5 ζ \ ~ n 
εἶναι πολὺ μικρὰ ὥστε νὰ ἦναι ὁρατὰ διὰ τοῦ γυμνοῦ 
ὀφθαλμοῦ ; 
\ \ / > / Ἂς 6 lal ο \ 
θα διὰ va βλέπωμεν ἀντικείμενα τὰ ὁποῖα κεῖνται πολὺ 


Καὶ τί ἐργαλεῖον πρέπει νὰ μεταχειριζώµε- 


Συνίστανται ἀμφότερα τὰ ἐργαλεῖα ταῦτα ἐκ 
Ἐικτρέ- 


ς \ \ 5) ~ a \ \ 5) / 
πουσιν Ob φακοὶ TAS ακτινας του φωτὸς τας ερχοµενας 


μακράν; 

a > / e \ 9 
φακών; Kis τί χρησιµεύουσιν οἱ φακοὶ οὗτοι ; 
> \ ~ 2 / 3 7 > / / 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐξεταζομένου ἀντικειμένου; Kis τί συναθροί- 
6.5 A a“ / \ / > ἃ 
ζονται αἱ ἀκτῖνες τοῦ φωτός; Δὲν συναθροίζονται εἰς ἕν 
σημεῖον τοῦ ἀμφιβληστροειδοῦς χιτῶνος ; ναί, συναθροί- 
ζονται εἰς τὸν ἀμφιβληστροειδῆ χιτώνα. 


1 Visible. 


Reading Exercise 


ε » 
Η εἰκών. 
ή 
Ἰλουσιώτατός τις ἄνθρω- 
\ a 
πος ἀποθανὼν ἀφῆκε κλη- 
/ “ 
ρονόμον τῆς περιουσίας του 
a na id 
τὸν μονογενῆ υἱόν του, ὅστις 
e / v4 ο > 
ὑπελογίζετο ὅτι ἦτο εἰκοσι- 
ἀλλ᾽ 
3 \ 3 > / \ 
ἐπειδὴ εἶχεν ἀναχωρήσει πρὸ 


\ 
πενταετῆς περίπου" 


/ \ 2. 3 a 
δώδεκα σχεδὸν ἐτῶν ἐκ τῆς 
πατρικῆς του οἰκίας, δὲν 
b] us 3 Ν lal is / 
ἐγνώριζε κἀνεὶς ποῦ εὗὑρί- 
σκετο. Ὅθεν ἔστειλαν παν- 
Ϊ a / 
| τοῦ εἰς ἀναζήτησίν του" ἀλλ᾽ 
ς 3 / / 
αἱ ἔρευναι ἀπέβησαν µάται- 
\ \ \ \ = 
αι καὶ διὰ πολὺν καιρὸν ἦτο 
BA ες 7 
ἄγνωστος ὁ διάδοχος. 


The Portrait. 

A very rich man, dying, 
left heir to his property 
his only son who was 
reckoned to be about 
twenty-five years old; but 
since he had left, nearly 
twelve years before, his 
father’s house, Πο one 
knew where he_ was. 
Therefore they sent ev- 
erywhere in search of 
him; but the search 
turned out fruitless, and 
for a long time the heir 
was unknown. 


200 


Τέλος πάντων ἰδοὺ πα- 
ρουσιάζεται νέος τις μὲ 
φορέματα 

νο 2 Ν 3 
διαβεβαιοῖ ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶναι 


Ν \ 
᾿Ασιατικὰ καὶ 


id / \ \ 
ὁ κληρονόμος. Kat ἡ μὲν 
\ > ‘4 ο »/ 
δικαστικὴ ἐξουσία ἦτο ἤδη 
/ \ \ / 
ἑτοίμη νὰ τὸν ἀναγνωρίση 
ὡς τοιοῦτον: ἀλλ αἴφνης 
, / λ. an 
ἄλλος νέος ἐλθὼν ἐκ τῆς 
la \ 
᾽Αμερικῆς διαφιλονικεῖ τὴν 
if “ - \ Ε re 
κληρονομίαν - ἐνῷ δὲ οἱ δύο 
ie / 2 \ 
οὗτοι νέοι ἐφιλονίκουν, ἰδοὺ 
\ / n 
ἔρχεται καὶ τρίτος ἐκ τῆς 
ς / ὃν id 
Ῥωσσίας, καὶ παρουσιάζε- 


ται ὡς ἀληθὴς κληρονόμος. 


ec \ e / > 
O Δικαστὴς εὑρέθη ἅμη- 
΄ \ \ 
χανώτατος καὶ μὴ ἠξεύρων 
/ ἌΡ / / 
τί ν᾿ ἀποφασίσῃ, κατέφυγεν 
2 Ἀ ο / / 
εἰς τὸ ἀκόλουθον τέχνασμα" 
/ 2 Ν 
ἐκρέμασεν εἰς τὴν αἴθουσαν 
‘A > / \ ς / 
μίαν εἰκόνα πολὺ οµοιάζου- 
5 \ / ἢ 
σαν τὸν ἀποθανόντα καὶ 
\ Ν x / 
στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς νέους 
5 \ [ο 5 
εἶπε" “Δύο ἀπὸ σᾶς εἶσθε 
/ ζ 5 lal ¢ 
βεβαίως οἱ ἀπατεῶνες " ο 
Ν 
Θεὸς θὰ προστατεύσῃ τὸν 
ο Ν Ν \ 
ἀθῶον καὶ θὰ δώση τὴν 
κληρονομὶαν εἰς ἐκεῖνον 
“ \ / \ a 
ὅστις θὰ διαπεράση διὰ τοῦ 
/ / \ / 
βέλους τούτου τὸ κομβὶίον 
\ / ο 
τὸ εὑρισκόμενον ἐπὶ τοῦ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Finally there presents 
himself a young man in 
Asiatic dress and declares” 
that he is the heir. And, 
indeed, the judicial author- 
ity was already prepared 
to acknowledge him as 
such; but suddenly αη- 
other youth coming from | 
America lays claim to the 
inheritance; and while 
these two young men are 
disputing, behold there — 
comes also a third from 
Russia and presents him- 
self as the true heir. 

The judge found him- 
self much embarrassed, 
and, not knowing what to — 
decide, resorted to the 
following stratagem: He | 
hung in the hall ἃ por- 
trait resembling greatly 
the dead man, and, turn- 
ing to the young men, 
said: “Two of you are 
certainly impostors; God 
will protect the innocent 
and will give the inheri- 
tance to the one who will 
pierce with this arrow the 
button which is found 


VERBS 


2 nr > 7 / 
στήθους τῆς εἰκόνος ταύ- 
3) 
της. 
c \ Qn a, 9 ΄ 
Ο μὲν πρῶτος" ἐπιτήδειος 
\ 
κυνηγὸς δὲν εἶχεν ἀμφιβο- 
λίαν περὶ τῆς ἐπιτυχίας" 
» " > . / 3 Σ 
αλλ ἐν τούτοις ἢ χείρ του 
rs / 
τρέµει καὶ δὲν ἐπιτυγχάνει 
n id 
τὸ σημεῖον: ὁ δὲ δεύτερος 
/ 
ἐπλησίασε περισσότερον' 
ε / Ὁ ΡῚ we SD / 
0 τρίτος ὅμως ἀφοῦ ἐτέντω- 
σε τὸ τόξον του τὸ συνέ- 
κ rn x ος 
τριψε κατᾶ γῆς, κράζων ὅτι 
ἐπροτίμα νὰ χάσῃ τὴν κλη- 
/ 
ρονομίαν παρὰ νὰ διατρυ- 
/ κ lal al 
πήση τὸ στῆθος τοῦ πατρός 
ο / 
του ἔστω καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς εἰκό- 
νος. 
= x ἵν 
Ο δικαστὴς πεισθεὶς ὅτι 
. \ 9 e 3 \ τν \ 
αὐτὸς ἦτο O ἀληθὴς υἱὸς τὸν 
ἐνηγκαλίσθη φιλοστόργως, 
\ SN 7 » " εἴ 5 
καὶ μὲ δάκρυα εἰς τοὺς ὀφ- 
\ ο 5 / c/ 
θαλμοὺς τῷ ἀπέδωκεν ὅλα 
\ 9 i \ Ν \ / 
τὰ ἀγαθὰ καὶ τοὺς τίτλους 
τοῦ πατρός του. 


201 


upon the breast of this 
portrait.” 

The first, an expert 
hunter, had no doubt of 
his success; but just then 
his hand trembles and he 
does not reach the mark. 
The second came nearer. 
But the third, after he had 
stretched his bow, broke it 
to pieces on the ground, 
crying out that he pre- 
ferred to lose the inheri- 
tance rather than to pierce 
the breast of his father, 
even though only in a 
picture. 

The judge, persuaded 
that this was the real son, 
embraced him affection- 
ately, and with tears in 
his eyes gave over to him 
all the goods and _ the 
titles of his father. 


VERBS 


ἀποθανών, aor. part. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 

ἀφῆκε, aor. ind. ἀφήνω, to leave. 

ὑπελογίζετο, imp. ind. pass. ὑπολογίζω, to reckon. 
εἶχεν ἀναχωρήσει, plup. ind. ἀναχωρώίέω), to go away. 
ἐγνώριζε, imp. ind. γνωρίζω, to know. 


202 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


εὑρίσκετο, imp. ind. pass. εὑρίσκω, to find. 
ἔστειλαν, aor. ind. στέλλω, to send. 
ἀπέβησαν, aor. ind. ἀποβαίνω, to become, turn outs 5 
παρουσιάζεται, pres. ind. παρουσιάζοµαι, to present one’s 
self. 
διαβεβαιοῖ, pres. ind. διαβεβαιώ(όω). to affirm, assert. 
ἀναγνωρίση. aor. Subj. ἀναγνωρίζω, to acknowledge. 
ἐλθών, 2d aor. part. ἔρχομαι, to come. 
διαφλονικεῖ, pres. ind. διαφιλονικά(έω), to lay claim to. — 
ἐφιλονίκουν, imp. ind. Φιλονικώ(έω), to dispute, quarrel. | 
εὑρέθη, aor. ind. mid. εὑρίσκω, to find. 
ἠξεύρων, pres. part. ἠξεύρω, to know. 
ἀποφασίσῃ, aor. subj. ἀποφασίζω, to decide. 
κατέφυγε, aor. ind. καταφεύγω, to have recourse to. 
ἐκρέμασε, aor. ind. κρεµώ(άω), to hang. 
ὁμοιάζουσαν, pres. part. fem. ace. ὁμοιάζω, to resemble. — 
ἀποθανόντα, 34 aor. part. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 
στραφείς, aor. part. mid. στρέφω, to turn. 
θὰ προστατεύσῃ. aor. fut. προστατεύω, to protect. 
θὰ δώσῃ. aor. fut. δίδω, to give. 
θὰ διαπεράσῃ, aor. fut. διαπερώ(άω), to pierce. 
εὑρισκόμενον, pres. part. pass. εὑρίσκω, to find. 
τρέμει, pres. ind. τρέμω, to tremble. 
ἐπιτυγχάνει, pres. ind. ἐπιτυγχάνω, to arrive at, succeed. 
ἐπλησίασε, aor. ind. πλησιάζω. to approach. | 
ἐτέντωσε, aor. ind. τεντόνω(ῶ-όω), to stretch, extend. 
συνέτριψε, aor. ind. συντρίβω, to break to pieces. 
κράζων, pres. part. κράξω, to cry, call out. 
érpotiua,.imp. ind. προτιµώ(άω), to prefer. 
χάσῃ, aor. Subj. χάνω, to lose. 
SvatpuTnon, aor. subj. διατρυπώ(άω), to perforate. 
ἔστω, imperat. 3d pers. sing. εἰμί (εἶμαι), to be. 


NAMES OF PERSONS 203 


πεισθείς, aor. part. mid. πείθω, to persuade. 
ἐνηγκαλίσθη. aor. ind. ἐναγκαλίζομαι, to embrace. 
ἀπέδωκε, aor. ind. ἀποδίδω. to concede, grant. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be prepared in the usual way. 


Grammar 


NAMES OF PERSONS 


The first names of women end in a or η. and are de- 
clined like nouns of the first declension, except that 
they preserve the a or η throughout whether the stem 
ends in a consonant or in a vowel. 

The first names of men end in as, ns, ος, evs, Οἵ ων. 
Those terminating in as and some of those ending in 
ns follow the first declension, but preserve the a or η in 
the genitive, instead of taking the termination ov. The 
names ending in ος follow the second declension ; those 
in evs, wv, and most of those in ης (namely those in 
-γένης, -KpaTns, -λάμπης, -μήδης, -πήθης, -σθένης, -τέλης, 
«Φάνης, -χάρης, and -κλῆς) are of the third declension. 


NOMINATIVE 

ὁ Πυθαγόρας Διογένης ᾿Αρχιμήδης Περικλῆς 
GENITIVE 

τοῦ Πυθαγόρα Διογένους ᾿Αρχιμήδους Περικλέους 
DATIVE 

τῷ Πυθαγόρα Διογένει ᾿ἈΑρχιμήδει  Περικλεῖ 
ACCUSATIVE : 

τὸν Πυθαγόραν Διογένη(ην) ᾿Αρχιμήδη(ην) Περικλῆ(έα) 
VOCATIVE 


(ὦ) Πυθαγόρα Διόγενες ᾿Αρχιμῆδες Περίκλεις 


904 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Note the accent in the vocative of nouns ending 
in ης: that of Αρχιμήδης is irregular. q 

Patronymics terminate in as, ης, ΟΥ os. Those end-— 
ing in as or ης are declined as nouns of the first declen- 
sion, but retain the a, or ἡ throughout; those in os 
follow the second declension. : 

When preceded by. Κυρία (Mrs.), the patronymic 18 
placed in the genitive: ἡ Κυρία Παπαδοπούλου, Mrs. 
P. (the lady of Παπαδόπουλος). 


FourtH DECLENSION 


This contains only nouns employed in the ver- 
nacular, and is not found in the literary form of the 
language. It is parisyllabic in the singular and im- 
parisyllabic in the plural. As the vernacular never 
employs the dative, there are but four cases in this 
declension. 


SINGULAR 

Coachman Baby Couns 
Nom. ὁ ἁμαξᾶς µπεµπέ κόντες 
Gen. τοῦ ἁμαξᾶ μπεμπέ KOVTE 
Ace. τὸ(ν) ἁμαξᾶ(ν) μπεμπέ(ν) KOVTE(V) 
Voc. (@) ἁμαξᾶ μπεμπέ κόντε 

PLURAL » 

Nom. οἱ ἁμαξάδες μπεμπέδες κόντηδες 
Gen. τῶ(ν) ἁμαξάδω(ν μπεμπέδω(ν) κὀντηδω(νν)" 
Ace. τοὺς ἁμαξάδες μπεμπέδες κόντηδες 
Voc. (ὦ) ἁμαξάδες μπεμπέδες κόντηδες 


1 Pronounced bebés. 2 The accent here takes no account of the ὦ in 
the genitive, but remains on the first syllable, ' 


FOURTH DECLENSION f 205 
SINGULAR 
Shoemaker Stupid Woman 

Nom. ὁ παπουτσῆς ἡ μπουνταλοῦ᾿ 
Gen. τοῦ παπουτσῆ τῆς μπουνταλοῦς 
Ace. τὸ(ν) παπουτσῆ(ν) τὴ(ν) μπουνταλοῦ(ν) 
Voc. (ὦ) παπουτσῆ (ὦ) μπουνταλοῦ 

‘ PLURAL 
Nom. of παπουτσῆδες ἡ μπουνταλοῦδες 
Gen. τῶ(ν) παπουτσήδω(ν) τῶ(ν) μπουνταλούδω(ν) 
Acc. τοὺς παπουτσῆδες ταὶς μπουνταλοῦδες 
Voc. (ὦ) παπουτσῆδες (ὦ) μπουνταλοῦδες 


_ The v of the accusative singular and genitive plural 
_is pronounced only when the following word begins 
with a vowel. 

The definite article in the vernacular is declined as 
follows : 


SINGULAR | PLURAL 
Nom. o ἡ τό Nom,.ot <4 Ta 
Gen. τοῦ THs τοῦ Gen. τώ(ν) τώ(ν) TOV) 
Acc. τό(ν) τή(ν) τὀ Acc. τούς ταῖς ΟΙ τής τά 


1 Pronounced boodalod. 


LESSON TWENTY-FIRST 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ EIKOSTON HPOTON 


Τὸ ἀνθρώπινον σῶμα (συνέχεια) 


The Human Body (continuation) 


Ἔϊχομεν δύο χείλη, ἄνω καὶ κάτω, μεταξὺ τῶν ὁποίων 

We have two lips, upper and lower, between which — 
εἶναι τὸ ἄνοιγμα τοῦ στόματος. Τὰ χείλη εἶναι ροδό- 
is the opening of the mouth. Το ΠΡ are [Ό86- 
χροα. Byrds τοῦ στόματος εὑρίσκεται ἡ γλώσσα καὶ 
colored. Within the mouth is found the tongue and 
οἱ ὀδόντες. Ἢ γλώσσα εἶναι τὸ ὄργανον τῆς γεύσεως 
the teeth. Thetongue is the organ of (the) taste 
καὶ ἐπίσης ἕν τῶν ὀργάνων τῆς φωνοποιήσεως, τροπο- 
and also one of the organs of phonation, modi- 
ποιοῦν τὴν φωνὴν ἡ ὁποία γεννᾶται ἐν τῷ λάρυγγι. Οἱ 
fying the voice which originates in the larynx. The 
ὀδόντες χρησιμεύουσιν εἰς τὴν µάσησιν' εἶναι ἐμπεφυ- 
teeth serve for mastication; they are im- 
τευµένοι εἰς ἡμικυκλίους σειρὰς ἐν τῇ ἄνω καὶ κάτω 
planted in semicircular rows in the upper and lower 
γνάθῳ. “Ἕκαστος ὀδοὺς ἔχει κορυφὴν καὶ ρίζαν" ἐκεί- 
jaw. Each tooth has crown and root; the 
vn μὲν καλύπτεται διὰ γανώµατος, αὕτη δὲ ριζοῦται 
former is covered with enamel, the latter is rooted : 


THE HUMAN BODY 207 


εἰς τὴν γνάθον καὶ περιβάλλεται διὰ τῶν οὕλων ὅπου 
in the jaw and is surrounded by the gums where 
ἑνοῦται μετὰ τῆς κορυφῆς. ὝὙπάρχουσι δύο ἀναπτύξεις 
itis joined with the crown. There are two growths 
τῶν ὀδόντων, δηλαδὴ οἵ νεογιλοὶ ὀδόντες καὶ οἱ μόνιμοι 
of the teeth, namely the milk teeth and the permanent 
ὀδόντες. Ἐνίοτε οἱ ὀδόντες σήπονται, καὶ οὕτω γεν- 
teeth. Sometimesthe teeth decay, and thus is pro- 
νᾶται ὀδονταληία. Τότε συμβουλευόµεθα ὀδοντίατρον, 
duced toothache. Then πο consult a dentist, 
ὅστις ἐλβύει τὸν τερηδονώδη ὀδόντα ἢ τὸν ἐξορύσσει. 
who fills the decayed tooth or extracts it. 

Τὰ ὦτα εἶναι τὸ ὄργανον τῆς ἀκοῆς. “Ὅταν τὸ 
The ears are the organ of hearing. When the 
τύμπανον Φλεγμαίνεται, ἔχομεν ὠταλγίαν. "Ὅστις δὲν 
drum is inflamed we have earache. Who isnot 
δύναται va ἀκούῃ καλῶς εἶναι βαρυήκοος: ὅστις δὲν 
able to hear wellis hard of hearing; whois ποῦ 
δύναται διόλου νὰ ἀκούῃ εἶναι παντελῶς κωφός. Οἱ 
able atall to hear is entirely deaf. The 
ἐκ γενετῆς κωφοὶ εἶναι ὡσαύτως ἄλαλοι: οἱ τοιοῦτοι 
congenitally deaf are also dumb; such 
καλοῦνται κωφάλαλοι. 
are called deaf mutes. 

Ἢ κόμη δύναται νὰ ἦναι μέλαινα, καστανὴ ἢ κοκκίνη. 

The hair may be ‘black, brown, ον red. 
Οἱ γέροντες ἔχουσι συνήθως ψαρὰν κόμην ἢ ἐνίοτε 
The aged have usually gray hair, or sometimes 
λευκὴν κόμην. Oi ἀπολέσαντες τὴν κόμην των 
white hair. Those having lost their hair 
καλοῦνται Φαλακροί. Oi ἄνδρες ἔχουσι τρίχας εἰς τὸ 
are called bald. Men have hair on the 


208 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


πρόσωπον. Τὸ μέρος τοῦ τριχώματος ὅπερ φύεται 
face. The part of the hair which grows 
ἐπὶ τοῦ ἄνω χείλους ὀνομάζεται μύσταξ. At γυναῖκες 
upon the upper lip is called mustache. Women do 
δὲν ἔχουσι γένειον, οὕτως εἶναί ἀγένειοι. Αἱ γυναῖκες 
not have ἃ beard, so they are beardless. Women 
ἔχουσι μακρὰν κόμην, τὴν ὁποίαν πλέκουσι καὶ τυλίσσουσι 
have long hair, which they braid and coil 
ὀφιοειδῶς ἐπὶ τὴν κορυφὴν τῆς κεφαλῆς. 
(serpentinely) on the crown of the — head. 
Οταν ἡ κόμη τοῦ ἀνδρὸς αὐξήσῃ μεταβαίνει εἰς τὸν 
When the hair of a man grows he goes_ to the 
κουρέα, ὅστις κόπτει τὴν κόμην. “Hav δὲν θέλῃ νὰ 
barber, who cuts the hair. If he does not wish 
αὐξάνη τὸ γένειόν του TO ξυρίζει καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἢ 
his beard to grow he shaves it every day or 
ἡμέραν παρ ἡμέραν. "Όταν ὁ κουρεὺς ξυρίζῃ τινὰ 
every other day. - When the barber shaves one 
μεταχειρίζεται ξυράφιον. Ανδρες τινὲς ξυρίζουσιν έαυ- 
he uses ἃ razor. Some men _ shave them- 
τούς, ἄλλοι δὲ ξυρίζονται ὑπὸ τοῦ κουρέως. 
selves, others are shaved by the barber. 


Conversation Exercise 


/ / » 5 Η - / 
Πόσα χείλη ἔχομεν; Τί εἶναι μεταξὺ τῶν χειλέων ; 
Τίνος χρώματος εἶναι τὰ χείλη; Th εὑρίσκεται ἐντὸς 
an / » / / ς lal es ιά 
τοῦ στόματος; His τί χρησιμεύει γλωσσα; Εἶναι ἡ 
γλῶσσα τὸ ὄργανον τῆς γεύσεως ; Δὲν εἶναι ἐπίσης ἕν 
τῶν ὀργάνων τῆς φωνοποιήσεως ; Τροποποιεῖ ἡ γλῶσσα 
τὴν φωνήν; Ποῦ σχηματίζεται" ἡ φωνή; Kis τί χρη- 


1Ts formed, made, 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 209 


Π ἜΤ: ἃ / n 3 τ / € 
σιμεύουσιν οἱ ὀδόντες; ᾖΙοῦ εἶναι ἐμπεφυτευμένοι οἱ 


> / ο / vy rims / Μ Φ 

ὀδόντες ; Ποῖα μέρη ἔχουσιν οἱ ὀδόντες; “Eyer ἕκαστος 
ο. \ \ { “ 1 Ν / / ς \ 
οδοὺς τὰ µέρη ταῦτα ; Διὰ τίνος καλύπτεται ἡ κορυφὴ 


rn / “ a a 
τοῦ ὀδόντος ; Ἰ]οῦ ριζοῦται ἡ ρίζα τοῦ ὀδόντος; Διὰ 
f / η ; / Ὁ“ 4 la) \ an 
τίνος περιβάλλεται ἡ ρίζα ὅπου ἑνοῦται μετὰ τῆς κο- 
᾿ an ς / / an > / Αα Ἵ , 
ρυφῆς; "Υπάρχει πλέον μιᾶς ἀναπτύξεως τῶν ὀδόντων ; 
Tla ’ / ἘΦ ὃς ἢ . / a κ 1 
ὥς ονομάζονται at δύο ἀναπτύξεις αὗται; Σήπονται 
Dy .ε 2ο 7, / as / Ψ » 
ἐνίοτε οἱ ὀδόντες; Ti κάμνει ὁ ὀδοντίατρος ὅταν ἔχωμεν 
ὀδονταλγίαν ; ἹΠρέπει νὰ συμβουλευώμεθα τὸν ὀδοντία- 
“ » / 2ο / “ ” 
τρον ὅταν ἔχωμεν τερηδονώδη ὀδόντα; "Όταν ἔχητε τε- 
7 2 / 93 / ς > / Ν η) / Ἃ 
ρηδονώδη ὀδόντα, ἐξορύσσει ὁ ὀδοντίατρος τὸν ὀδόντα ἢ 
3 / 3 / 
ἐμβύει αὐτόν : 
Ei , κά / \ iO Ἢ FE? ο > \ / ca) 
is τί χρησιµεύουσι τὰ ὦτα; Εἶναι ἡ ἀκοὴ µία τῶν 
lal " 
πέντε εἰδικῶν αἰσθήσεων ; ᾿Απαγγείλατε" τὰς ἄλλας 
/ > \ 3 f / 3 ς 7 
τέσσαρας εἰδικὰς αἰσθήσεις. Τίνες εἶναι οἱ βαρυήκοοι; 
Καὶ τίνες οἱ παντελῶς κωφοί; Εἶναι ἄλαλοι οἱ ἐκ γενε- 
τῆς κωφοί; Καλοῦνται οἱ τοιοῦτοι, κωφάλαλοι ; Ἔχο- 
3 “ / 
μεν ὠταλγίαν, ὅταν Φλεγμαίνηται τὸ τύμπανον τοῦ ὠτός ; 
Ποῖα χρώματα δύναται νὰ ἔχῃ ἡ κόμη; "Ἔχουσι συνή- 
Ν / ? \ ει For / / 
θως καὶ μέλανας ὀφθαλμοὺς οἱ ἔχοντες µελαίνην κόμην ; 
/ 3 / a 
Τίνος χρώματος εἶναι ἡ κόμη τῶν γερόντων; Ἔθχουσιν 
ς η lal ἴω 
οἱ ἄνδρες τρίχας εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον; ἨΠοῖον μέρος τοῦ 
/ ᾿ > 5. a 
τριχώματος των ὀνομάζεται μύσταξ; Eivac ai γυναῖκες 
ἀγένειοι; Φέρουσιν αἱ γυναῖκες μακρὰν κόμην; Τί κά- 


/ / 
“ΠῚ κάμνει 


ο \ \ / 

µνουσιν αἱ γυναῖκες τὴν μακρὰν κόμην των; 
> x “Ἁ ς / » 1 n4 / / 
ἀνὴρ τις, ὅταν ἢ κόμη του ἔχῃ ἀναπτυχθῆ' πολύ; Τί 

A ¢ , / 6 / re φιλος \ / , 
κάμνει ο κουρεύς; Πότε" Evpifer ὁ ἀνὴρ τὸ γένειόν του; 
ὅταν δὲν θέλῃ νὰ τρέφῃ" αὐτό. ἸΠοσάκις᾽ ξυρίζει τις τὸ 

‘These parts. Τὰ αὐτὰ µέρη, the same parts. %Say, repeat. 3 Aorist 
imperative. What do women do with their long hair? 4 Perfect of dva- 
πτύσσω, to grow, develop. Comp. ἀνάπτυξις τῶν ὀδόντων, eruption of the 


teeth. 5 When ? ° Tpépa, to nourish, cultivate. 7 How often ? 
14 


210 


~ ae / / fc 4 ae 7 
γένειόν του; Τί μεταχειρίζεται ὁ κουρεύς, ὅταν ξυρίζῃ 

4 = / Ls ‘ ΓΝ δρ DY \ / « Φ 
τινά; Ἐνυρίζουσιν ἑαυτοὺς οἱ ἄνδρες ἢ τοὺς ξυρίζει ὁ κου- 


ρεύς ; 


Reading Exercise 


Παράδειγμα ἐγκαρτερή- 
σεως. 


oor ET ν « 
μην πτωχος στρατιω- 


της, ἔλεγέ τις, “καὶ ἐλάμ- 

βανον δέκα σολδία καθ᾽ ἐβδο- 
/ “ ” θ / 

pada, ὅταν ἔμαθον μόνος 
Αα - \ μι / 

µου νὰ ὁμιλῶ καὶ νὰ γράφω 
~ \ 2 7 -- 

καλῶς τὴν ἰδικήν µου γλώσ- 

/ 

σαν. Δὲν ἔχει τίς ἀνάγκην, 
“ / \ / »/ 

ὅταν θέλῃ νὰ μάθῃ οὔτε 

θαλάμου, οὔτε ἐξόδων. Ἢ 
/ 

στρατιωτική µου κλίνη 

> / ¢ 7 

ἐχρησίμευσεν ὡς καθέκλα, 

ὁ σάκκος μου ὡς ἀναλογεῖ- 

Ἃ 

ον, μικρά τις σανὶς ὡς τρά- 

/ Ν 95 / 

πεζά µου. Δεν εἶχον χρή- 

ματα v ἀγοράσω λαμπάδα 


x 


Da \ 

ἢ ἔλαιον. Kata τὸν χει- 
- 5 / ; 3 Ν 
μῶνα ἐσπούδαζον εἰς τὴν 
γωνίαν τῆς καπνοδόχης καὶ 
αἱ ἀκτῖνες αὐτῆς μὲ ἤρκουν, 
ἀλλὰ δὲν ἠδυνάμην νὰ 

/ > lal 3 \ vA 
TANTLATW EKEL, εἰμὴ Όταν 
»/ ε ΄ \ 
ἤρχετο ἡ σειρά µου. Διὰ 

\ > / Ν / 
νὰ ἀγοράσω γραφικὸν κάλα- 
μον ἢ φύλλον χάρτου, ὑπε- 
χρεούμην νὰ στερῶμαι μέρος 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY | 


An Instance of Persever- 
ance. 


“TI was a poor soldier,” 
one said, “and received ten 
sousa week, when 1 learned. 
by myself to speak and 
write well my own lan- 
guage. No one has need, 
when he desires to learn, 
either of a private room or 
of expenditure. My sol- 
dier’s cot served as a chair, 
my sack as a reading-desl 
a small board as my table. 
I had no money to buy 
Jamp or oil. In winter 1 
studied in the corner of the 
chimney, and the rays 0 
this sufficed me, but 
could not draw near there 


In order to buy a pen ¢ 
a sheet of paper I was 


be. 


READING ΕΧΕΒΟΙΘΕ 


ew n / ΄ 
τῆς τροφῆς ὅσον πεινασμέ- 
| να ” \ % 
vos καὶ ἂν ἤμην. Δὲν εἶχον 
στιγμὴν ἥσυχον" ἔπρεπε ν᾿ 
ἀναγινώσκω ἢ νὰ γράφω ἐν 
τῷ μέσῳ τῶν στρατιωτῶν, 
[χὰ > / b] / 
οἵτινες ἐτραγώδουν, ἐγέλων, 
» a ἃ t/ 3 \ 
ἐσύριζον, καὶ οἵτινες εἰς TAS 
ὥρας τῆς ἀναπαύσεώς των, 
| δὲν εἶναι οὔτε κόσμιοι, οὔτε 
ἥσυχοι. Μὴ περιπαίζετε τὸ 
λεπτὸν, τὸ ὁποῖον ἔδιδον, διὰ 
| νὰ ἀγοράσω χάρτην, γραφι- 
| κοὺς καλάμους καὶ μελάνην, 
| διότι τοῦτο δι ἐμὲ ἦτο με- 
ἰ et / » ” 
᾿ γάλη ποσὀτης. Ἤμην evpw- 
/ ῃ \ \ 
στος, ἐγυμναζόμην πολὺ και 
ἘἨπλή- 


| Ν Ὶ 
ρονα τὸ συσσίτιόν μου καὶ 


ἤμην ὑγιέστατος. 


poi ἔμενον τέσσαρα σολδία 
καθ᾽ ἑβδομάδα : ἐνθυμοῦμαι 
᾿μίαν ἡμέραν, ἀφοῦ ἔκαμον τὰ 
ἀναγκαῖα ἔξοδα, μοὶ ἔμεινεν 
ἓν σολδίον τὴν Παρασκευὴν 
[τὸ ἑσπέρας καὶ τὸ προσδιώ- 
ρισα νὰ ἀγοράσω πρόγευμα 
διὰ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν, διότι ὁ χάρ- 
της καὶ ὁ γραφικὸς κάλαμος 
᾿ἀπερρόφησαν τὰ λοιπὰ σολ- 
Ιδία. ᾿Εκδύομαι, ἀλλοίμονον! 
Πίπτω εἰς τὴν κλίνην πει- 
[νασμένος, ὥστε εἶχον ἀνάγ- 
κην ὅλης µου τῆς δυνάµεως, 


» 


211 


ment; I had to read or to 
write in the midst of the 
soldiers, who were singing, 
laughing, whistling, and 
who, in their hours of rec- 
reation, are neither or- 
derly nor quiet. Do not 
laugh at the mite which 
I gave to buy paper, pens, 
and ink, for that was a 
great amount for me. I 
was robust, exercised a 
great deal, and was in ex- 
cellent health. I paid my 
mess and there remained 
to me four sous each week. 
I remember one day, after 
I had made the necessary 
expenditures, one cent was 
left me on Friday evening, 
and 1 set it aside to buy 
breakfast the following 
day, for the paper and 
pens had swallowed up 
the other cents. I un- 
dress myself; alas! I get 
into bed hungry, so that 
I had need of all my 
strength to impose silence 
upon my hunger; 1 dis- 
cover that I have lost 
my treasure; the cent was 


212 


, \ 
διὰ νὰ ἐπιβάλλω σιωπὴν 
, A“ , 5 
εἰς τὴν πεῖνάν μου, ἀνακα- 
/ σα > / ἐν 
λύπτω ὅτι ἀπώλεσα TOV 
/ Ἂς r 
θησαυρόν pou: τὸ σολδίον 
ἐχάθη. "ἔκρυψα τὴν κεφα- 
, ς λ \ 
λήν µου ὑπὸ τὸ σκέπασμα, 
0 ς , 39 
καὶ ἔκλαιον ὡς παιδίον. 
Ποῖος νέος ἀναγινώσκων 
la) Ν / >’ “ 
τοῦτο δὲν θέλει αἰσχυνθῆ 
3: ) , 
διϊσχυριζόμενος, ὅτι περι- 
. a 
στάσεις καὶ ἔλλειψις καιρου 
ἃς 
πρὸς σπουδὴν, ἐμπόδισαν 


A 5 / “ἢ 
τὴν ἐκπαίδευσίν του: 


VERBS 


ἔλεγε, imp. ind. λέγω, to say. 

ἐλάμβανον, imp. ind. λαμβάνω, to recelve. 
ἔμαθον, 2d aor. ind. μανθάνω, to learn. 
μάθῃ, aor. subj. of the same. 

ἐχρησίμευσε, aor. ind. χρησιμεύω, to serve. 
ἀγοράσω. aor. subj. ἀγοράζω, to purchase. 
ἐσπούδαζον, imp. ind. σπουδάζω, to study. 
ἤρκουν, imp. ind. ἀρκῶ[έω) to suffice. 
ἠδυνάμην, imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 
πλησιάσω, aor. subj. πλησιάζω, to approach, draw near. 
ἤρχετο, imp. ind. ἔρχομαι, to come. 
ὑπεχρεούμην, imp. ind. pass. ὑποχρεόνω(ῶ-όω), to oblige. 
στερῶμαι, pres. subj. mid. στερῶ(έω), to deprive. 
rewacpévos, perf. part. mid. πεινῶ(άω)., to hunger. 
ἐτραγῴδουν, imp. ind. τραγωδῶ(έω), to act a tragedy, 


sing. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


lost. I buried my head 
under the bedclothes and 
cried like a child.” 


What young man, ΟΠ. 
reading this, will not be 
ashamed to pretend that 
circumstances and lack -of 
time for study have hin- 
dered his education ᾖ | 


ADJECTIVES 213 


ἐγέλων, imp. ind. γελῶ(άω), to laugh. 

| ἐσύριζον, imp. ind. συρίζω, to whistle. 

περιπαίζετε, imp. imperat. περιπαίζω, to laugh at. 
ἔδιδον, imp. ind. δίδω, to give. 

| ἐγυμναζόμην, imp. ind. γυμνάζοµαι, to take exercise. 

| ἐπλήρονα, aor. ind. πληρόνω, to pay. 

ἔμενον, imp. ind. μένω, to remain. 

ἐνθυμοῦμαι, pres. ind., to remember. 

| ἔκαμον, aor. ind. κάμνω, to make. 

| ἔμεινε, aor. ind. μένω, to remain. 

| προσδιώρισα, aor. ind. προσδιορίζω, to ordain, set aside. 
| ἀπερρόφησαν, aor. ind. ἀπορροφώίάω), to swallow up. 
| ἐκδύομαι, pres. ind. mid. ἐκδύω, to take off clothes. 

| ἀπώλεσα, aor. ind. ἀπολλύω, to lose. 

| ἐχάθη, aor. ind. pass. χάνω, to lose. 

ἔκρυψα, aor. ind. κρύπτω, to hide. 

| ἔκλαιον, imp. ind. κλαίω, to cry, weep. 
ἀναγινώσκων, pres. part. ἀναγινώσκω, to read. 

θέλει αἰσχυνθῆ, aor. fut. αἰσχύνομαι, to be ashamed. 
διϊσχυριζόµενος, pres. part. διϊσχυρίζοµαι, to pretend. 
ἐμπόδισαν, aor. ind. ἐµμποδίζω, to hinder. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be written out and read aloud by the student, 
after the usual method. 


ατα 


ΑΡΟΕΕΒΟΤΙΝΥΕΕ-- ἐπίθετα 


Adjectives are usualiy of three terminations, mascu- 
line, feminine, and neuter; there are many, however, 


214 MODERN GREEK MASTERY : 
| 


of two terminations, one common to the masculine and | 
feminine and the other to the neuter; a few have but 


one termination for masculine and feminine with πο 
neuter. 


I. Apsxctives or ΤΗΝΕΡ TERMINATIONS, τριακατά- 
ληκτα ériGera.—These end in 

1. ος, a or η. ov. When the stem ends with a vowel 
or p, the feminine is formed with a: when the stem 
ends with a consonant, except p, the feminine termina- 
tion is 7. An exception to this rule is ὄγδοος, ὀγδόη. . 
ὄγδοον, eighth. The α of the feminine termination of 
adjectives in os is long; in those of other terminations - 
it is short. : 


καλός, καλή, καλόν" καλοί, καλαί, καλά, good. 

ἄξιος, ἀξία, ἄξιον" ἄξιοι, ἄξιαι, ἄξια, worthy. 

καθαρός, καθαρά, καθαρόν: καθαροί, καθαραί, καθαρά, 
pure. | 

2. οὓς, ἃ or ἢ. οὖν. The formation of the feminine 
in this contracted declension follows the same rule con- 
cerning a and 7 as the preceding uncontracted declen- 
sion. 
χρυσοῦς, χρυσῆ, χρυσοῦν: χρυσοῖ, χρυσαῖ, χρυσᾶ, golden. 
ἀργυροῦς, ἀργυρᾶ, ἀργυροῦν ἀργυροῖ, ἀργυραῖ, apyupa, 

silver. 

3. vs, eta, v. Words of this class are all oxytone in 
the nominative singular (masculine and neuter) except 
ἥμισυς. ἡμίσεια, ἥμισυ, half. 
ταχύς, ταχεῖα, ταχύ" ταχεῖς, ταχεῖαι, ταχέα, rapid. 

4. ίεις, ίεσσα, lev* deus, ὀεσσα, ὀεν. 
χαρίεις, χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν ' χαρίεντες, χαρίεσσαι, χαρίεν- 

τα, graceful. 


ADJECTIVES 215 


a, ὅ / / 
πτερόεις, πτερόὀεσσα, πτερὀεν' TTEPOEVTES, πτερὀεσσαι, 
/ . 
πτερόεντα, Winged. 


5. Participles (µετοχαί). These are: 

a. Present and perfect passive in os, 7, ov. They 
are declined like the adjectives of the same termina- 
tions (see 1). 

6. Present and second aorist active in wy, ουσα. ov. 


λέγων, λέγουσα, λέγον λέγοντες, λέγουσαι, λέγοντα, 

saying. 

| εἰπών, εἰποῦσα, εἰπόν" εἰπόντες, εἰποῦσαι, εἰπόντα, hav- 
ing said. 

Like these participles are declined the adjectives 
ἑκών. ἑκοῦσα, éxov, Voluntary, and ἄκων, ἄκουσα, ἄκον, 
involuntary. 

6. First aorist active in as, aca, av. 


ΔΝ 


λύσας, λύσασα, λύσαν: λύσαντες, λύσασαι, λύσαντα, 
having loosened. : 


Similarly is declined πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, all, every. 
α΄. Aorist passive in εἰς, εἴσα, έν. 
λυθείς, λυθεῖσα, AVOEV: λυθέντες, λυθεῖσαι, λυθέντα, 
loosened. | 
ο. Perfect participles in ὡς, via, os. 


κεκμηκώς, -κυῖα, -KOS* -KOTES, -κυῖαι, -κότα, tired. 
πεποιθώς, -θυῖα, -θός' -θότες, -θυῖαι, -θοτα, persuaded. 


As will be seen from the above examples, the femi- 
nine of all adjectives of three terminations follows in 
its declension that of nouns of the first declension; the 
masculine and neuter forms in os, ov, and ods, οὖν. fol- 
low the second declension, the others the third. 


216 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


The ordinal numbers are declined regularly like 
adjectives of three terminations. 
ὄγδοος, however, terminates irregularly in η instead 
of in a (see 1). : 

The following are zrregular in their declension : 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voce. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
* Voc. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
ats 
Acc. 
Voce. 


Mase. 
μέγας" 
μεγάλου 
μεγάλῳ 
μέγαν 
μέγα. 
πολύς" 
πολλοῦ 
πολλῷ 


πολύν 
πολύ 


μεγάλοι 


SINGULAR 


Fem. 
μεγάλη 
μεγάλης 
μεγάλη 
μεγάλην 
μεγάλη 
πολλή 
πολλῆς 
πολλῇ 
πολλήν 
πολλή 


PLURAL 


μεγάλαι 


regularly declined 


πολλοί 


πολλαέ 


regularly declined 


μέλας 
μέλανος 
μέλανι 
μέλανα 
μέλας 


1 Great. 


SINGULAR 


μέλαινα 
μελαίνης 
μελαίνῃ 
μέλαιναν 
μέλαινα 


2 Much. 


3 Black. 


The feminine of 


Neut. 
μέγα 
μεγάλου 
μεγάλῳ 
μέγα 
μέγα 


πολύ 
πολλοῦ 
πολλῷ 
πολύ 
πολύ 


μεγάλα 


πολλά 


μέλαν 
μέλανος 
μέλανι 
μέλαν 
μέλαν 


Nom. 
Gen. 


Dat. 
Ace. 
Voce. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voce. 


Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Acc. 
Voc. 


ADJECTIVES 
PLURAL 
μέλανες μέλαιναι 
μελάνων μελαινῶν 
μέλασι(ν) μελαίναις 
/ / 
μέλανας μελαίνας 
/ / 
μέλανες μέλαιναι 
SINGULAR 
1 ο) 
πρᾷος πραεῖα 
πρᾷου πραείας 
/ / 
ορ ας 
πρᾷον πραεῖαν 
πρᾷε πραεῖα 
PLURAL 
πρᾶοι πραεῖαι 
πράων πραειῶν 
ῃ / 
πρᾶοις πραείαις 
/ / 
πραους πραείας 
πρᾶοι πραεῖαι 


217 


1 Mild; also written πραύς, πραεῖα, πραῦ, then regularly declined (see 3). 


IJ. Apsectives or Two ΤΕΕΜΙΝΑΤΙΟΝΒ, δικατάληκτα 
ἐπίθετα.--- 656 end in 


1. ης, ες. 


The adjectives of this class are declined 
like contracted nouns of the third declension; thus: 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Masc., Fem. Neut. Masc., Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ἀληθής ἀληθές ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
Gen. ἀληθοῦς ἀληθοῦς ἀληθῶν ἀληθῶν 
Dat. ἀληθεῖ ἀληθεῖ ἀληθέσι(ν) ἀληθέσι(ν) 
Ace. ἀληθῆ ἀληθές ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 
Voc. ἀληθῆ ἀληθές ἀληθεῖς ἀληθῆ 


218 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


2. os, ov. To this class belong most adjectives com- 
pounded of two words, as, ἀ- θάνατος, immortal; ἄ-πειρος, 
inexperienced ; ἐξ-αίρετος, excellent; διά-φορος, different; 
and a few other uncompounded adjectives, such as 
βάρβαρος, barbarous ; ἥσυχος, quiet ; ὠφέλιμος, useful ; 
ἀκόλουθος, following. They follow regularly the sec- 
ond declension. 

3. ους, ουν. Those ending in ποὺς are declined like 
the noun ὁ πούς (p. 192), the others like contracted 
nouns of the second declension (p. 169); those in vous 
may, however, remain uncontracted in the plural, es- 
pecially in the neuter plural; those in χρους may have 
χρώματος in the genitive and χρώματα in the accusative 
singular. 

4. wy, ov. These follow the third declension. 
εὐδαίμων, εὔδαιμον: εὐδαίμονες, εὐδαίμονα, happy- 

5. Miscellaneous terminations : 
ἄδακρυς, ἄδακρυ: ἀδάκρυες, ἀδάκρυα, cruel (tearless). 
ἀπάτωρ, ἅπατορ"' ἀπάτορες, ἀπάτορα, fatherless. 
ἄρρην, ἄρρεν ' ἄρρενες, ἄρρενα, masculine. 
εὔελπις, εὔελπι: εὐέλπιδες, εὐέλπιδα, hopeful. 

εὔχαρις, εὔχαρι" εὐχάριτες, εὐχάριτα, pleasant. 


Il]. Apsrcrtves or Onn TERMINATION, µονοκατάληκτα 
ér(Oera.—These are few in number. They all belong 
to the third declension. | 


ἄπαις, ἄπαιδες, childless. εἴρων, εἴρωνες, ironical. 
βλάξ, βλάκες, stupid. μύωψ,, μύωπες, near-sighted. 


LESSON TWENTY-SECOND 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΕΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ AETTEPON 


Τὸ ἀνθρώπινον σῶμα (τέλος) 


The Human Body—(conclusion) 


Ἢ φωνὴ παραλλάσσει" εἶναι ὀξεῖα κατὰ τὴν παιδι- 
The voice varies ; itis shrill in child- 
\ ξ / \ . f / 3 \ b) \ 
κὴν ἡλικίαν καὶ καθίσταται βαρυτέρα εἰς τὴν ἐφηβικὴν 
hood and becomes deeper at pu- 
ζ / ς Ν nn 3 λ 9 / \ \ 
ἡλικίαν" ἢ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀνδρὸς εἶναι βαρυτέρα κατὰ τὸν 
berty; the voice of the man is deeper ἴῃ the 
τόνον τῆς φωνῆς τῆς γυναικός. Οἱ μὲν ἄνθρωποι 
tone than the voice of the woman. Some __ people 
δύνανται νὰ τραγῳδῶσιν, οἱ δὲ ὄχι": οἱ μὲν ἄνδρες οἱ 


are able {ο sing, others noty the men who 
τραγῳδοῦντες εἶναι βαθύφωνοι, βαρύτονοι ἢ ὀξύφωνοι: 
sing are bassos, barytones, or tenors; 


αἱ δὲ γυναῖκες, ὑψίφωνοι ἢ ἀνθυψίφωνοι. 
the women, sopranos or contraltos. 

Ἡ κεφαλὴ συνάπτεται τῷ κορμῷ διὰ τοῦ λαιμοῦ" 
The head is joined {ο the trunk by the neck; 
τὸ πρόσθιον µέρος τοῦ λαιμοῦ ὀνομάζεται λαιμός: τὸ δὲ 
the anterior part of the neck is called throat; the 
ὀπίσθιον µέρος αὐχήν. Τὸ ἄνω µέρος τοῦ κορμοῦ 
posterior part, nape. The upper part of the trunk 


220 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


καλεῖται θώραξ, τὸ δὲ κάτω µέρος ὑπογάστριον" τὸ 7 
is called chest, the lower part abdomen; the 
ὀπίσθιον µέρος τοῦ κορμοῦ εἶναι τὰ νῶτα" εἰς τὰ κάτω 
posterior part of the trunk is the back; at the lower 
τῶν νώτων εἶναι ἡ ὀσφύς" διὰ TOD κέντρου τῶν 
part of the back is the loins; through the centre of the 
νώτων διήκει ἡ ῥράχι. Τὸ µέρος ὅπου ὁ βραχίων 
back runs the spine. The part where the arm 
συνάπτεται τῷ κορμῷ ὀνομάζεται ὦμος" τὸ δὲ ὅπου 
is joined to the trunk is called shoulder; that where 
τὸ σκέλος συνάπτεται TO κορμῷ, ἰσχίον. Τῶν ὀνομάτων 
the thigh joins thetrunk, hip. Ofthe names 
τῶν διαφόρων μερῶν τῶν ἄνω Kal τῶν κάτω 
of the different parts of the upper and of the lower 

ἄκρων ἐγένετο μνεία εἰς τὰ πρότερα μαθήματα 
extremities was made mention in the earlier lessons 
τοῦ βιβλίου τούτου καὶ πρέπει νὰ Hvar γνωστὰ τῷ 
of this book, and they should be known to the 
σπουδαστῇ. | 
student. 

Ἐντὸς τοῦ θώρακος εἶναι ἡ καρδία καὶ οἱ πνεύμονες * 
Within the thérax are the heart andthe lungs; 
ἐντὸς τοῦ ὑπογαστρίου εὑρίσκονται ὁ στόμαχος, τὰ 
within the abdomen ἃ16 found the stomach, the 
ἐντόσθια, τὸ ἧπαρ, τὸ πάγκρεας, ὁ σπλήν, τὰ νεφρὰ 
intestines, the liver, the pancreas, the spleen, the kidneys, 
καὶ ἡ κύστις. Διὰ τῶν ὀργάνων τούτων τελεῖται ἡ 

and the bladder. By these organs is accomplished 
πέψις. 

digestion. 
Ὅλον τὸ σῶμα καλύπτεται ὑπὸ δέρματος. “Tdwp 


ΑΙ the body [15 οονογοά with skin. Water 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 221 


ἀφιδρόνει διαρκῶς διὰ τοῦ δέρματος: ἡ ἐξίδρωσις 
exudes continually through the skin; this exuda- 
αὕτη καλεῖται ἱδρώς. To ποσὸν τοῦ ἱδρῶτος 

tion is called sweat. The quantity of the perspiration 


΄ Ν \ ΄ τ / x 
παραλλάσσει' κατὰ TO θέρος εἶναι περισσότερον ἢ 


νατ]ο5: in summer itis greater than 

Ν x A ς yA e / / [τέ 
κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα. Ὃ ἄνθρωπος ἱδρόνει πλέον, ὅταν 

in winter. A man perspires more when 
γυµνάζηται πολύ. Ὅταν ὁ ἱδρὼς παύη αἰφ- 
he exercises much. When the perspiration ceases sud- 
νιδίως, κινδυνεύει τις νὰ κρυώσῃ. 


denly, one is on danger of taking οο]ά. 


Conversation Exercise 


Παραλάσσει ἡ φωνή; Κατὰ ποίαν ἡλικίαν' εἶναι 
ὀξεῖα; Πότε καθίσταται βαρυτέρα; ναι ἡ φωνὴ τοῦ 
ἀνδρὸς βαρυτέρα κατὰ τὸν τόνον τῆς φωνῆς τῆς γυναικός ; 
Δύνανται ὅλοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι νὰ τρωγῳδῶσιν; Τίνος εἴδους " 
εἶναι αἱ φωναὶ τῶν τραγωδούντων ἀνδρῶν ; αἱ φωναὶ τῶν 
τραγῳδούντων ἀνδρῶν εἶναι βαθύφωνοι, βαρύτονοι ἢ ὀξύ- 
\ / ” 3 ς \ fa 9 ποῦς ἢ 
φωνοι. Καὶ τίνος εἴδους εἶναι αἱ φωναὶ τῶν ἀδουσῶν 
γυναικῶν ; εἶναι ὑψίφωνοι ἢ ἀνθυψ ίφωνοι. 
\ ΄ ΄ ς \ a - aA ’ 
Διὰ τίνος συνάπτεται ἡ κεφαλὴ τῷ κορμῷ; Iles ovo- 
r \ / / rn n \ a lal 
µάζεται τὸ πρόσθιον µέρος τοῦ λαιμοῦ; Καὶ πῶς καλεῖ- 
ται τὸ ὀπίσθιον µέρος; [Ποῖον εἶναι τὸ ἄνω µέρος τοῦ 
Lal a ? / Ν / / a / 
κορμοῦ; Πῶς ὀνομάζεται τὸ κάτω µέρος: Ἰ]οῖον µέρος 
τοῦ κορμοῦ εἶναι τὰ νῶτα; Ti διήκει διὰ τοῦ κέντρου 


. Age. 2 Of what kind. 8 Gen. plur. fem. of the pres. part. of ado, 
to sing. 4 All these adjectives, βαθύφωνοι, ἀνθυψίφωνοι, and the rest, 
are adjectives of two terminations, the masculine and feminine being alike 
in form. 


222 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


> 


n an tf 
τῶν νώτων; Πῶς ὀνομάζονται τὰ µέρη ὅπου συνάπτονται 
ς / \ \ / ~ ~ A, tes / 
οἱ βραχίονες καὶ τὰ σκέλη τῷ κορμῷ; 1 οῦ ἐγένετο μνεία 
ral A ο A A 4 \ ny 77 
τῶν ὀνομάτων τῶν διαφόρων μερῶν τῶν ἄνω καὶ τῶν κάτω 
ὡς \ \ > io “ 
ἄκρων; Πρέπει νὰ ἦναι Hon’ γνωστὰ τὰ ὀνόματα ταῦτα 
- ios n \ an J 
τῷ σπουδαστῃῇ: Ποῖα ὄργανα εὑρίσκονται ἐντὸς τοῦ θώ- 
ο) 5 a / \ 
ρακος; Καὶ ποῖα εἶναι ἐντὸς τοῦ ὑπογαστρίου; Ava 

/ 5 / lal ς / 
ποίων ὀργάνων τελεῖται ἡ πέψις ; 

/ \ / / , 2 a , - 

Καλύπτεται διὰ δέρματος μέρος τι μόνον’ τοῦ σώματος" 
ΕΝ - / A an 7] 

ἢ ὅλον τὸ σώμα; Τί ἀφιδρόνει διαρκῶς διὰ τοῦ δέρματος ; 
- ΄- ἢ ΄σ 
Τί καλεῖται ἱδρώς ;* Παραλλάσσει τὸ ποσὸν τοῦ ἱδρῶ- 
3 ς \ A / x Ἂν 
τος; Εἶναι ὁ ἱδρὼς περισσότερον κατὰ τὸ θέρος ἢ κατὰ 
- ς / 
τὸν χειμῶνα; Ἰδρόνει τις πλέον, ὅταν γυμνάζηται; 
/ \ 4 
Πότε κινδυνεύει τις νὰ κρυώση; Υπάρχει κίνδυνος μὴ 
/ ο/ ta 2 / ky / 3 
κρυώσῃ τις, ὅταν παύῃ αἰφνιδίως ὁ ἱδρώς ; 

1 Already. 8 What is called perspiration? What 
is the perspiration called would be, τί καλεῖται 6 (Spas; 4 The negative 
particle μή is here used in the sense of lest ; is there danger lest one take 
cold when the perspiration is suddenly checked ? 


2A part only. 


Reading Exercise 


‘O λόρδος Νιθσδάλης καὶ 
ἡ σύζυγός του. 
Ὅτε ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἰάκωβος 
ἀπέτυχεν εἰς τὴν ἀπόπειράν 
3 κ Art? \ lal / 
του, ν᾿ ἀναβῇ ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου 
τῆς ᾿Αγγλίας, ὅλοι οἱ ἄρ- 
χοντες οἵτινες εἶχον ἐναγκα- 
λισθῆ τὴν μερίδα του κα- 
/ > / 
τεδικάσθησαν εἰς θάνατον, 
καὶ ἐξετελέσθη ἡ καταδίκη 
αὐτῶν τὴν 1θην Μαρτίου, 


Lord Nithsdale and his 
Wife. 


When King James failed 
in his attempt to ascend 
the throne of England, all 
the nobles who had em- 
braced his side were con- 
demned to death, and the 
sentence was carried out 
March 16, 1716. Lord 
Nithsdale, being of the 


READING 


1716. Ὃ λόρδος Νιθσδά- 
λης, ὧν τῆς αὐτῆς μερίδος 
ἔμελλε νὰ ὑποστῇ τὴν αὐ- 
τὴν εὐφυὴς 
στοργὴ τῆς συζύγου του τὸν 


Εἶχον ἐπιτρέψει 


τύχην, ἀλλ᾽ 


ἔσωσεν. 
’ x. “Ὁ \ / 
εἰς τὰς γυναῖκας νὰ βλέπω- 


/ x 
σι τοὺς συζύγους των τὴν 


n / 
παραμονὴν τοῦ θανάτου 
των, διὰ νὰ τοῖς δώσωσι 
τὸν τελευταῖον ἀσπασμόν 


Ἡ κυρία Νιθσδάλη, 
στηριζομένη ἐπὶ δύο γυναι- 


TOV. 


κῶν θαλαμηπόλων της, καὶ 


a 6 Ἦν 9 / 
δῆθεν ὡς γυνὴ ἀπηλπισμένη 
εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν Ιύργον. 
᾿Α φοῦ ὑπῆγεν εἰς τὴν φυλα- 
κὴν ὑπεχρέωσε τὸν σύζυγόν 
της ὅστις ἦτο τοῦ ἀναστή- 
ματος αὐτῆς 7 ἀλλάξῃ τὰ 
ἐνδύματά του, καὶ νὰ ἐξέλθῃ 
κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον τρόπον μὲ 

rn x 3 / 
τὸν ὁποῖον αὐτὴ εἶχεν εἰσέλ.- 
3 / x [τ ς 
θει, ἐπρόσθεσε δὲ ὅτι ἡ 
“ να A \ / 
ἅμαξά της ἤθελε τὸν φέρει 

? \ v ahd / 
εἰς τὰς ὄχθας τοῦ Ἑαμέσεως, 
ὅπου ἤθελεν εὕρει λέμβον, 
ἥτις ἤθελε τὸν ἀνάγει ἐπὶ 
πλοίου ἑτοίμου ν᾿ ἀναχω- 
ρήσῃ διὰ τὴν Γαλλίαν. Τὸ 

/ > / 
στρατήγημα ἐξετελέσθη 
al ¢ 
ἐπιτυχῶς " ὁ λόρδος Νιθο- 


EXERCISE 223 


same party, was to have 
undergone the same fate, 
but the ingenious love of 
his wife saved him. They 
had granted permission to 
the women to see their 
husbands on the eve of 
their death in order to 
bid them a last farewell. 
Lady Nithsdale, sup- 
ported by two οἳ her 
maids and like a woman 
who had lost hope, went 
into the Tower. After 
she had entered the prison 
she constrained her hus- 
band, who was of her 


height, to change his 
clothes and to go out 
in the same manner 


with which she had come 
in, and added that her 
carriage would take him 
to the bank of the Thames, 
where he would find a 
boat which would put him 
on a ship ready to depart 
for France. The strata- 
gem was executed  suc- 
cessfully ; Lord Nithsdale 
made his escape (became 
invisible), arriving at three 


224 


δάλης 
φθὰς τὴν τρίτην 


ἐγένετο ἄφαντος, 
ὥραν τῆς 
πρωΐας εἰς τὸ Καλαί. Ἠα- 
τῶν εἰς τὴν γῆν, ἐπήδησε 
κραυγάζων: Δόξα τῷ Θεφ' 
ἰδοὺ ἐσώθην! Αὐτὴ ἡ πα- 
ραφορὰ τὸν ἀπεκάλυψεν, 
ἀλλὰ δὲν ἦτο πλέον εἰς. τὰς 
χεῖρας τῶν ἐχθρῶν του. 
Τὴν ἐπαύριον τὸ πρωὶ ἔπεμ- 
ψαν 


σα 7 λ / > 
iva φέρῃ Tov δεσμώτην εἰς 


ἀπεσταλμένον τινα 
τὸ μέρος τῆς καταδίκης" ὁ 
ἀπεσταλμένος ἐξεπλάγη με- 
γάλως ὅτε εὗρε γυναῖκα ἀντὶ 
ἀνδρός. 

Ἢ εἴδησις διεδόθη εὐθύς, 
ὁ δὲ ἐπιστάτης τοῦ πύργου 
συμβουλευθεὶς τὴν αὐλὴν 
τί ἔπρεπε νὰ κάμῃ περὶ τῆς 
κυρίας Ν θσδάλη, ἔλαβε 
διαταγὴν. νὰ τὴν ἐλευθε- 
ρώσῃ, καὶ αὕτη ὑπῆγε πρὸς 
συνάντησιν τοῦ ἀγαπητοῦ 


της συζύγου. 


Ὃ δανειζόμενος. 
Ἰατρός τις ἐκάθητο ἐν 
καφενείῳ τινὶ τοῦ Λονδίνου" 
ξένος τις καὶ ἄγνωστος τὸν 
ἐπλησίασε καὶ τὸν παρε- 


/ a A 7 / 
κάλεσε νὰ τῷ δανείσῃ πέντε 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


‘tonished when he found 


o’clock in the morning αἲ 
Calais. Stepping upon 
the land, he leaped, cry- 
ing: “Praise be to God ;_ 
behold, Iam saved!” This 
transport betrayed him, 
but he was no more in 
the hands of his enemies. 
The following morning 
they sent a messenger to 
bring the prisoner to the 
place of execution; the 
messenger was greatly as-_ 


a woman instead of a 
man. 

The news quickly spread 
abroad, and the Governor — 
of the Tower sought α- 
vice of the court what 
should be done with Lady 
Nithsdale; he received an 
order to set her free, 
and she went off to meet 
her beloved husband. 


The Borrower. 

A physician was sitting 
in a coffee-house in Lon- 
don; a guest, unknown to 
him, approached him and 
asked him to lend him 


VERBS 


| σελίνια. “Ids, κύριε, διε- 
| νοήθητε τοῦτο ;" εἶπεν ὁ 
ἰατρός. “ Διόλου δὲν σᾶς 
/ b] /, ς / 
γνωρίζω, ἀπεκρίθη ὁ ξένος, 
ο ’ > ἣν a / 
| καὶ δι αὐτὸ ζητῶ δάνειον 
παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐπειδὴ πάντες 
“ \ / \ / 
ὅσοι μὲ γνωρίζουσι δὲν θέ- 
overt νὰ μοὶ δανείσωσιν. 


225 


five shillings. ‘“ How, sir, 
did you think that out?’ 
said the physician. “1 
don’t know you at all,” 
replied the guest, “and 
for that reason I ask a 
loan from you, since all 
who know me will not 
lend to me.” 


VERBS 


ἀπέτυχε, aor. ind. ἀποτυγχάνω, to fail. 
ἀναβῇ, aor. subj. ἀναβαίνω, to ascend. 
εἶχον ἐναγκαλισθῆ, plup. ind. ἐναγκαλίζομαι, to embrace. 
Γκατεδικάσθησαν, aor. ind. pass. καταδικάξω, to condemn. 
ἐξετελέσθη, aor. ind. pass. ἐκτελώ(έω), to fulfil. 


| ov, pres. part. εἶμαι, to be. 


ἔμελλε, imp. ind. μέλλω, to be about (denoting a future 


action). 


ὑποστῇ, aor. subj. ὑφίσταμαι, to undergo. 
|ἔσωσε, aor. ind. σώζω, to save. 


εἶχον ἐπιτρέψει, plup. ind. ἐπιτρέπω, to allow. 
βλέπωσι, pres. subj. βλέπω, to see. 

δώσωσι, aor. subj. δίδω, to give. 

στηριζομένη, pres. part. pass. στηρίζω, to support. 
ἀπηλπισμένη, pert. part. ἀπελπίζομαι, to lose hope. 
εἰσῆλθε, aor. ind. εἰσέρχομαι, to enter. 


ὑπῆγε, aor. ind. πηγαίνω or ὑπάγω, to go. 


Ιὑπεχρέωσε, aor. ind. ὑποχρεόνω(ώ-όω), to force. 
ἀλλάξῃ, aor. subj. ἀλλάζω, to exchange. 

ἐξέλθῃ, aor. subj. ἐξέρχομαι, to come out, go out. 
ἐπρόσθεσε, aor. ind. προσθέτω, to add. 


15 


226 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἤθελε φέρει, aor. condit. φέρω, to carry. 

ἤθελεν εὕρει, ΔΟΥ. condit. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

ἤθελεν ἀνάγει, aor. condit. avayo, to bring, carry. 
avaxyopnon, aor. subj. ἀναχωρώ(έω), to depart. 
ἐξετελέσθη, aor. ind. pass. ἐκτελώίέω), to accomplish. 
ἐγένετο, 2d aor, ind. γίνομαι, to become.. 

φθάς, aor. part. φθάνω, to arrive, reach. 

πατῶν, pres. part. πατώ(έω), to tread upon. 

ἐπήδησε, aor. ind. πηδώ(άω), to spring, jump. 
κραυγάζων, pres. part. κραυγάζω, to cry out. 

ἐσώθην, aor. ind. pass. σώξω, to save. 

ἀπεκάλυψε, aor. ind. ὀποκαλύπτω, to reveal, discover. 
ἔπεμψαν, aor. ind. πέμπω, to send. 
ἀπεσταλμένον, pert. part. pass. ἀποστέλλω, to send off. 
ἐξεπλάγη, aor. ind. mid. ἐκπλήττω, to astound, surprise. 
εὗρε, aor. ind. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

διεδόθη, aor. ind. pass. διαδίδω. to spread about, publish. 
ἔπρεπε, imp. ind. πρέπει, it is necessary. 

κάμῃ, aor. 580}. κάμνω, to do. 

ἔλαβε, aor. ind. λαμβάνω, to receive. 

ἐλευθερώση, aor. subj. ἐλευθερόνω(ώ-όω), to set free. 
δανειζόμενος, pres. part. δανείζοµαι, to borrow. 

ἐκάθητο, imp. ind. κάθημαι, to sit. 

ἐπλησίασε, aor. ind. πλησιάζω, to approach. 


παρεκάλεσε, Or. ind. παρακαλώ(έω), to beg. 

δανείση, aor. subj. δανείζω, to lend. 

διενοήθητε, aor. ind. διανοοῦμαι(έοµαι), to think, devise. 
εἶπει, aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 

ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 

γνωρίζουσι; pres. ind. γνωρίζω. to know. 

θέλουσι, pres. ind. θέλω, to wish. 

δανείσωσι, aor. subj. δανείζω, to lend. - 


νο 
w 
-: 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 


Grammar 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 


The comparative (τὸ συγκριτικόν) and the superlative 
(τὸ ὑπερθετικόν) are formed by the terminations repos, 
| πέρα, τερον, and τατος, τάτη, τατον respectively. These 
| terminations are added to the positive neuter form of 
| the adjective as follows: 


1. Those in os, a or ἡ; ov, drop the final ν οἱ the neu- 
| ter, thus: 

᾿ μικρός, -ᾱ, -dv, small, μικρότερος, μικρότατος. 

When the final vowel of the stem is short by nature 
| or by position, z.e., not followed by two consonants or 


a double consonant (&, £, w), the ο is lengthened to a, 
| thus: 
πλούσιος, -η, -ov, rich, πλουσιώτερος, πλουσιώτατος. 


| εὔκολος, -η, -ον, Θ85Υ, εὐκολώτερος, εὐκολώτατος. 


2. The contracted form in οὓς, οὖν, changes the final 
|v to o, thus: 


ἁπλοῦς, -ovv, Simple, ἁπλούστερος, ἁπλούστατος. 


3. In words ending in vs, ης, or as, the terminations 
| are added: to the unchanged neuter form, thus: 


γλυκύς, γλυκύ, Sweet, γλυκύτερος, γλυκύτατος. 
ἀληθής, ἀληθές, true, ἀληθέστερος, ἀληθέστατος. 
μέλας, μέλαν, black, µελάντερος, μελάντατος. 


4. Adjectives in εις add the termination to the 
| neuter form after changing the final ν to o, thus: 


| χαρίεις, χαρίεν, graceful, χαριέστερος, χαριέστατος. 


228 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


5. Those in wy interpose ex between the ternrination 
of the neuter and the comparative or superlative end- 
ing, thus: 


εὐδαίμων, εὔδαιμον, happy, εὐδαιμονέστερος, εὐδαιμονέ- 
στατος. 


The comparative may also be formed by prefixing 
μᾶλλον, πλέον, ΟΥ περισσότερον, More, and the superla- 
tive by prefixing τὰ μάλιστα, most, to the positive, 
thus: 
ἄσχημος, ugly, ἀσχημότερος ΟΥ μᾶλλον ἄσχημος, ἀσχη- 

µότατος ΟΥ τὰ μάλιστα ἄσχημος. 
πεπαιδευμένος, Cultivated, μᾶλλον πεπαιδευμένος, τὰ μά- 
λιστα πεπαιδευμένος. 


This form is always used in the comparison of par- 
ticiples employed in the sense of adjectives, απά 
usually also in that of adjectives of one termination 
and of those of two terminations in us, ἐς, ωρ, and ην 
(see 5, p. 218). 

The superlative is sometimes formed, ος in 
the vernacular, by prefixing the ο. to the com- 
parative, thus: 
ὡραῖος, beautiful, ὡραιότερος, ὡραιότατος OY ὁ ὡραιότε- 

ρος. ; 
ἄσχημος, ugly, ἀσχημότερος, ἀσχημότατος OF ὁ ἀσχημό- 
TEPOS. 


The comparison of the following is irregular : 


ἀγαθός', good, ἀμείνων ἄριστος 
βελτίων βέλτιστος 
κρείσσων-- κρείττων κράτιστος 


COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 


αἰσχρός, Shameful, αἰσχρότερος 


ἅρπαξ, rapacious, 
ἄσμενος, joyful, 


βλαξ, stupid, 


κακός, bad, 


καλός, good, 


λάλος, loquacious, 


μακρός, far, 
μέγας, great, 


μέλας, black, 
μικρός, small, 


ὀλίγος, little, 


πολύς, much, 


στενός, Narrow, 


ταχύς, swift, 


ὑψηλός, high, 


φίλος, dear, 


1 These are archaic forms, seldom seen except in poetry. 
monly used instead of the regular comparison on p, 227. 


αἰσχίων 
ἁρπαγίστερος 
ἀσμενέστερος 
Βλακίστερος 
χείρων-- κακίων᾿ 
χειρότερος 
καλλίτερος 


καλλήτερος-- καλλίων' 


λαλίστερος 
μακρότερος 
μάσσων' 


μεγαλείτερος 


µεγαλήτερος-- μείζων 


μελανώτερος 
μικρότερος 
μείων 

5 / 
Ολιυγωτερος 

> / 

ἐλάσσων 

“ “ 
ἥσσων--ἥττων 
πλείων---πλειότερος 
περισσότερος 
στενότερος 
ταχύτερος 
ταχίων 
θάσσων' 
ὑψηλότερος 


φίλτερος 


229 


αἰσχρότατος 
αἴσχιστος 
ἁρπαγίστατος 
ἀσμενέστατος 
Ελακίστατος 
κάκιστος 
χείριστος 
κάλλιστος 


λαλίστατος 
μακρότατος 
μήκιστος 
μέγιστος 


, 
μελανώτατος " 
/ 
μικρότατος 


5 / 
ολίγιστος 
3 / 
ἐλάχιστος 
ἥκιστος 
πλεῖστος 


στενότατος 
ταχύτατος 
τάχιστος 


ὑψηλότατος 
ὕψιστος 
φίλτατος 


? Very com- 


230 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


The following are the comparative and superlative 
forms derived from certain adverbs and prepositions : 


ἄνω, above, ἀνώτερος, higher, ἀνώτατος, highest 
ἀπό, from, ἀπώτερος, farther, ἀπώτατος, farthest 
ἐγγύς, hear, ἐγγύτερος, nearer,  ἐγγύτατος, nearest 


ἐγγίων ἔγγιστος, very near 
ἔξω, out, ἐξώτερος, outer, Cota outermost 
ἔσω, Within, ἐσώτερος, inner, ἐσώτατος, innermost 
ἔνδον, Within, ἐνδότερος, inner, ἐνδότατος, innermost 
ἐκ. out, ἔσχατος, last, extreme 


κάτω, below, κατώτερος, lower, κατώτατος, lowermost 

πέραν, ΘΥ ΟΠά,περαίτερος, further 

πλησίον, near, πλησιέστερος, hearer, πλήησιέστατος, nearest 

πλησιαίτερος 
/ / r 

πρό, before, πρότερος, former, πρῶτος, first 
πρώτιστος, very first 

ὑπέρ, above, ὑπέρτερος, Superior, ὑπέρτατος, supreme 
ὕπατος | 

ϱ/ ο ᾿ “ 

ὕστερον, after, ὕστερος, posterior, ὕστατος, last, final 


The lower degrees of comparison are expressed by 
ὀλιγώτερον, ἔλασσον, OF ἧττον, less, and ὀλίγιστα, ἐλά-. 
χίστα, or ἥκιστα, least, with the positive form of the 
adjective. The pee is also used to denote α΄ 
quality in a high degree (very) without any idea of 
comparison. 

Than, after a comparative, is expressed by ἤ or (in 
the vernacular) παρά with the nominative, by ἀπό 
with the accusative (in the vernacular), or simply 
by the genitive. The superlative is followed by the 
genitive. 


LESSON TWENTY-THIRD 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΕΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ TPITON 


« f 
ἵματισμος 
Clothing 
Οἱ ἄγριοι of κατοικοῦντες τόπους θερμοὺς φέρουσιν 
Savages inhabiting warm countries wear 
᾽ ba x 3 / e \ \ ‘i \ 
ἐλαφρὸν ἢ οὐδένα ἱματισμὸν πλὴν ράκους περὶ 


slight or πο clothing except a breech-clout round 
τὴν ὀσφύν, ἀλλὰ οἱ πεπολιτισµένοι φέρουσιν ἐνδύματα 
the loins, but civilized people wear — clothing 
διὰ νὰ προφυλάττωνται ἀπὸ τοῦ ψύχους. 
in order {ο protectthemselves fromthe cold. 
Ὃ ἱματισμὸς τοῦ ἀνδρὸς εἶναι πολὺ ἀφελέστερος ἢ 
The clothing of τὰ is much plainer than 
ὁ τῆς γυναικός, ἀμφότεροι δὲ παραλλάσσουσιν ἀναλό- 
that of woman, but both change accord- 
yas τοῦ ἐπικρατοῦντος συρμοῦ. Ὃ ἀνὴρ φέρει κατά- 
ing {ο the prevailing fashion. Man_ wears next 
σαρκα ὑποκάμισον, ἐσώβρακον καὶ κάλτσας' ταῦτα 
his skin undershirt, drawers, and stockings; these 
᾿ ὀνομάζονται ὁμοῦ  ἀσπρόρρουχα. ἈἹατασκευάζονται 
are called collectively underclothes. They are made 
ἐκ µαλλίου, βάμβακος, λινοῦ, ἢ µετάξης. Μετάξινα 
of wool, cotton, linen, or © silk. Silk 


232 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἐνδύματα εἶναι τὰ ὡραιότατα καὶ τὰ δαπανηρότατα. 
clothes are the handsomest and the most expensive. 
Τὸ ὑποκάμισον κατασκευάζεται ἐκ βάμβακος ἢ καμπρίου, 
The δι is made of cotton or cambric, 
μὲ στῆθος, περιτραχήλιον καὶ περιχειρίδας ἐκ τριπλοῦ 
with bosom, collar, and cuffs of three-ply 
ἢ τετραπλοῦ λινοῦ. Τὸ περιτραχήλιον (ἢ ὁ κολάρος) 
or four-ply linen. The collar (or the collar) 
καὶ αἱ περιχειρίδες (ἢ τὰ µανικέτια) εἶναι συνήθως οὕτω 
and the cuffs (or the cuffs) are usually so 
κατεσκευασμένα ὥστε νὰ δύνηταί τις νὰ τὰ κομβώνῃ 
made that oneisable to button them 
εἰς τὸ ὑποκάμισον, ἀλλὰ ἐνίοτε ὅλα ἀποτελοῦσιν ἓν 
to the shirt, but sometimes all constitute one 
τεμάχιον. Ὅταν τὸ ὑποκάμισον καὶ τὰ ἀσπρόρρουχα 
piece. Whenthe μι and the underclothes 
λερώσωσι, τὰ ἀλλάσσει τις καὶ βάλλει καθαρά. Ἢ 
are soiled, one changes them and puts on clean. The 
πλύντρια πλύνει τὰ ἀκάθαρτα ἀσπρόρρουχα * πλύνει 
laundress washes the soiled underclothes; she 


3 / \ \ ς 3 ’ f > ᾿ \ 4 
ἐπίσης καὶ TA υποκαμισα, κολλαρίζει αὐτὰ και τὰ 


washes also the _ shirts, starches them, and irons 
σιδηρὀνει. 

them. 

Ἢ  ἐνδυμασία τοῦ ἀνδρὸς εἶναι περισκελὶς (ἢ παν- 


The outer clothing of man ἰδ trousers (or pan- 
ταλόνι), χιτωνίσκος (ἢ; γελέκο) καὶ ἔνδυμα (ἢ σακκάκι). 
taloons), waistcoat (or vest), and coat (or sack-coat). 
Ὅταν ἐξέρχηταί τις φέρει κάλυμμα ἢ πῖλον, καί 
When one goes out one wears acap or hat, and 
κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα, ἐπανωφόριον " κατὰ τὸ θέρος, ὅταν 

in winter an overcoat; in summer, when 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 233 


κάμνῃ ζέστην, Φέρει ψιάθινον πῖλον. Τὰ σανδάλια 
itis hot,one wearsastraw hat. The shoes 


> / Ν / 
εἶναι κατεσκευασμένα ἐκ δέρματος. "Όταν τὰ πέλματα 


are made of leather. When the soles 
τῶν σανδαλίων εἶναι τετριµµένα, τὰ φέροµεν ἢ τὰ 
of theshoes are worn we take them or 


στέλλομεν εἰς τὸν ὑποδηματοποιόν, ὅστις κάμνει νέα 
carry them to the shoemaker, who makes new 
/ \ / \ \ ¢ \ N \ 
πέλματα καὶ πτέρνας. Kata τὸν ὑγρὸν ἢ βροχερὸν 
soles and Ἰοσίς. In wet or rainy 
καιρὸν πολλάκις φοροῦμεν ἐλαστικά. is τὴν οἰκίαν 
weather often wewear rubbers. In the house 
lal 2 / / “ / 
φορεῖ τις ἐνίοτε παντούφλας. "Όταν χορεύῃ τίς, 
one wears sometimes slippers. When one dances one 
φορεῖ ὑποδήματα τοῦ χοροῦ, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι κοντὰ 
wears pumps (shoes of the dance), that is, low 
/ \ \ / 
σανδάλια μὲ λεπτὰ πέλματα. 
shoes with thin _ soles. 


(The names of garments in parentheses are those 
commonly employed in the vernacular.) 


Conversation Exercise 


/ ε ” \ € / an / 
Φέρουσιν οἱ ἄγριοι πολὺν ἱματισμόν; ἨΠοῖοι ἄγριοι 
\ / > / e \ \ 4 1 \ \ 

δὲν φέρουσιν οὐδένα ἱματισμὸν πλὴν ράκους περὶ τὴν 
ὀσφύν; Διατί φέρει τις ἐνδύματα; Διατί φέρουσιν οἱ 
πεπολιτισµένοι ἐνδύματα; «Φέρουσιν οἱ ἄγριοι οἱ κατοι- 
κοῦντες τόπους ψυχροὺς" ἱματισμὸν διὰ νὰ προφυλάτ- 
Τωνται ἀπὸ τῆς δριμύτητος" τοῦ Kaipod;* Διατί δὲν 

ΤᾺ rag or clout. "Ψυχρός (adj.). ψῦχος (subs.), cold. 3 Severity. 
4 Of the weather. 


234 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


a / \ ει om 
φέρουσιν οἱ ἄγριοι οἱ κατοικοῦντες τόπους θερμοὺς ιμα- 
\ \ / Ν \ > / / \ » 
τισμὸν πλὴν ράκους περὶ τὴν ὀσφύν; διότι δὲν ἔχουσιν 

5 > a / > 
ἀνάγκην νὰ προφυλάττωνται ἀπὸ τοῦ ψύχους. Hivat 
Ἂς > / “ > Ν 4 / xX \ n / 
τὰ ἐνδύματα τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἀφελέστερα ἢ τὰ τῆς YUVALKOS ; 

/ κας \ μας Α, Ν > / ο ος | . 
Παραλλάσσει ὁ ἱματισμὸς τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἀναλόγως TOU ἐπι- 
A ~ \ ἈΝ 
κρατουντος συρμου; Παραλλάσσουσιν ἐπίσης καὶ τὰ 
ἐνδύματα τῆς γυναικὸς ἀναλόγως τοῦ ἐπικρατοῦντος συρ- 
- A 3 \ - \ «ς ο e A 
μοῦ; Ποῖα εἶναι τὰ ἐνδύματα τοῦ ἀνδρὸς τὰ ὁποῖα ομοὺ 
/ 
ὀνομάζονται ἀσπρόρρουχα:' κ τίνος κατασκευάζεται 
, \ / 3 
τὸ ὑποκάμισον, τὸ ἐσώβρακον καὶ ai περικνημίδες τοῦ 
3 / ν αἱ f > lal > n Ὁ“ 4 \ 
ἀνδρός; Katacxevalovtar ex τῆς αὐτῆς ὕλης τὰ 
al al Us νὰ : 
ἀσπρόρρουχα τῆς γυναικός; Ἠοῖα ἐνδύματα εἶναι τὰ 
, 5 Ἂς / 
ὡραιότατα; Δὲν εἶναι αὐτὰ τὰ ἐνδύματα τὰ δαπανηρό- 
5 Ν , ἢ / ο ο δ ON 
tata; Ἠίναι τὰ μάλλινα ἄσπρορρουχα υγιεινότερα ἢ 
\ / \ a \ \ / 5 / 
τὰ βαμβακερά, τὰ λινᾶ καὶ τὰ µετάξινα ἀσπρὀρρουχα; 
/ \ a ~ \ 
Ἔκ τίνος κατασκευάζεται τὸ στῆθος τοῦ ὑποκαμίσου, TO 
\ © Ψ 3 / 
περιτραχήλιον καὶ αἱ περιχειρίδε; ἰέναι οὕτω κατε- 
/ \ / oe 
σκευασµένα τὸ περιτραχήλιον καὶ αἱ περιχειρίδες ὥστε 
\ / / \ \ f > <a / \ 
νὰ δύνηταί τις νὰ τὰ κομβώνῃ εἰς τὸ ὑποκάμισον; Δεν 
la) \ , / 
ἀποτελοῦσιν ἐνίοτε τὸ ὑποκάμισον, τὸ περιτραχήλιον καὶ 
ἃ ᾽ὕ iva 
αἱ περιχειρίδες ἓν τεμάχιον; Τί κάμνει τις, ὅταν τὰ 
5 / ’ / / ϱ ’ / 
ἀσπρόρρουχα λερωσωσιν; Τί πλύνει ἡ πλυντρια; πλυ- 
\ / \ ’ ΄ 
νει τὰ ἀσπρόρρουχα. Δὲν πλύνει ἐπίσης καὶ τὰ ὑποκά- 
πο oe / e / \ ¢€ / 6 
pica; ‘Ti ἄλλο κάμνει ἡ πλύντρια τὰ υποκάμισα; 
53 a f “ ) lal 
Τίνα εἶναι τὰ µέρη τῆς ἐνδυμασίας τοῦ ἀνδρός; [Πῶς 
> / ε 
ὀνομάζονται ἡ περισκελίς, ὁ χιτωνίσκος καὶ τὸ ἔνδυμα εἰς 
; of 
τὴν κοινήν; Τί φέρει τις, ὅταν ἐξέρχηται; Τί ἄλλο 
\ a / 
φέρει τις κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα; Φέρει Tis ἐπανωφόριον 
/ 3, / cf , “- 
κατὰ τὸ θέρος ; ὄχι συνήθως, μόνον ὅταν κάμνῃ Ψῦχος. 
Ψυχρός (adj.), ψῦχος (subs.), cold. 2 Literally ‘ white garments.” 


*Stockings or socks. 4Stuff, ὃ More healthy. ὃ What else does the 
laundress do with the shirts. 7In the vernacular, 


READING EXERCISE 


235 


/ - 3 / \ / 
Ἔκ τίνος εἶναι κατεσκευασμένα τὰ σανδάλια; "Όταν 


/ δ / ¢ νὰ 
τὰ σανδάλια ἤναι τετριμμένα, κάμνει ὁ ὑποδηματοποιὸς 


\ / 
νέα πέλματα καὶ πτέρνας ; 


diy φορεῖτε παρεκτὸς" τῶν 


/ \ \ ξ \ Ἃ Ν / a 
σανδαλίων κατὰ τὸν ὑγρὸν ἢ βροχερὸν καιρόν; Φορεῖτε 


> \ “ / 
, ἐλαστικὰ ὅταν βρέχῃ; 


8 
χιον ; 


Φέρετε ἐπίσης καὶ ἀλεξιβρό- 
Τίνος εἴδους σανδάλια φορεῖ τις, ὅταν χορεύῃ ; 


Τίνα εἶναι τὰ σανδάλια τοῦ χοροῦ ; 
χ 


1 Τη addition to. 


Reading 


᾿Αλέξανδρος ὁ μέγας καὶ ὁ 
ἀφρικανὸς ἀρχηγός. 
Ὃ μέγας ᾿Αλέξανδρος 
κατὰ τὴν ἐκδρομήν του εἰς 
» \ ο > ./ 
Αφρικὴν εὗρεν εἰς ἄγνω- 
στον γωνίαν γῆς ἀφανῆ 
λαόν, ζῶντα ἥσυχον εἰς τὰς 
ταπεινάς Tov καλύβας. Tov 
ὡδήγησαν εἰς τὸν ἀρχηγόν, 
ὅστις τὸν προσεκάλεσεν εἰς 
τὴν τράπεζάν του καὶ τῷ 
προσέφερε τεμάχια χρυ- 
σίου, παριστῶντα φοίνικας, 
” \ \ » 
ἄλλους καρποὺς καὶ ἄρτους. 
Ὁ Μακεδὼν μονάρχης, θεω- 
al \ \ al 
ρῶν Ta πλαστὰ ταῦτα φα- 
/ > { / 
γητά, ἀνέκραξε. Μήπως 
τρώγετε ἐνταῦθα χρυσίον ; 
Οὐχί ἀπεκρίθη ὁ ἄγριος ' 
ἀλλ᾽ ἐστοχάσθην, ὅτι ἐὰν 


2 Umbrella. 


Exercise: 


Alexander the Great and 
the African Chief. 


Alexander the Great, 
during his sally into 
Africa, found in an un- 
known corner of earth 
an obscure people living 
quietly in its humble cab- 
ins. They conducted him 
to the chief, who invited 
him to his table and of- 
fered him pieces of gold 
representing dates and 
other, and loaves of bread. 
The Macedonian monarch, 
seeing this imitation food, 
cried: “ You do not eat 
gold here, do you?” 

“No,” replied the sav- 
age, “but I thought that 


236 


δὲν ἐστερεῖσθε ἀξιολόγου 
τροφῆς εἰς τὴν πατρίδα σας 
δὲν ἠθέλετε ζητήσει τοιαύ- 
την ἐδῶ. Τί λοιπὸν ζητεῖτε 
παρ ἡμῶν; 
Βεβαίως οὐχὶ τὸν χρυσόν 
η \ \ / 
σας, ἀλλὰ νὰ γνωρισωμεν 
No > Neat 4 ς val 
τὰ ἤθη καὶ ἔθιμα ὑμῶν. 
Λοιπὸν περιµείνατε ὀλί- 
Ν / Ν / 
γον καὶ θέλετε τὰ γνωρί- 
σει. 
Ἐνῷ ὁ ᾿Αφρικανὸς ἀρχη- 
Ἂ BA ‘ / / 
γὸς ἔλεγε τοὺς λογους του- 
/ ” 
τους, δύο ἄνθρωποι προσελ- 
θόντες τὸν παρεκάλεσαν 
νὰ τοὺς δικάσῃ περὶ μιᾶς 
διαφορᾶς ἐγερθείσης μετα- 
ὋὉ εἷς εἶπεν: Ὃ 


γείτων μου οὗτος μοὶ ἐπώλη- 


ξύ των. 


σεν ἀγρὸν ἐντὸς τοῦ ὁποίου 
" 7 \ 
εὑρέθη θησαυρο». Θέλω νὰ 
τῷ τὸν ἀποδώσω ὡς ἀνή- 
ἂν / / / 
κοντα εἰς αὐτόν, διότι ἠγό- 
/ \ 5 / >] > 
paca μόνον τον ἀγρόν, αλλ 
αὐτὸς τὸν ἀποποιεῖται. 
᾽ ς 
Ὃ ἕτερος ἀπεκρίθη. Ἢ 
7 ἴω 
ἀποποίησίς μου εἶναι τοσοῦ- 
τον εὐσυνείδητος, ὅσον καὶ 
ἡ γενομένη εἰς ἐμὲ προσφο- 
/ ,ὔ \ ’ 
pa. ΠἩαρεχώρησα τὴν ἰδιο- 
κτησίαν µου 


ἴω “ / 
τῶν ἐν αὐτῇ περιεχομένων, 


ὅλων 


μεθ᾽ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


if you were not deprived 
of remarkable food in 
your own country you 
would not seek such here. 
What do you seek of us?” 

“Certainly not your 
gold, but to know your 
manners and customs.” 

“Then wait a little and 
you will know them.” 


While the African chief 
was saying these words, 
two men, coming to him, 
asked him to decide con- 
cerning a difference that 
had arisen between them. 
One said: “ This neighbor 
of mine sold me a field 
in which a treasure was 
found. I wish to return 
it to him as belonging to 
him, for I bought only 
the field, but he refuses 
it.” 

The other replied : “ My 
refusal is as conscientious 
as the offer which was 
made to me. I gave over 
my property with all there 
was in it, consequently I 
have no right to the treas- 


READING 


€ / > \ / 
ἑπομένως οὐδὲν δικαίωµα 
ἔχω ἐπὶ τοῦ θησαυροῦ, ὅστις 
Α 5 \ ο 
περιλαμβάνεται εἰς την πώ- 
λησιν. 
‘O δικαστὴς ἐπανέλαβε 
\ { α / 
τοὺς λόγους τῶν δύο δια- 
διὰ νὰ βεβαιωθῇ 
ον 5 “ \ > / 
ὁ ἴδιος ὅτι τοὺς ἐννοησε 
Ἔπειτα σκεφθεὶς 


δίκων, 


καλῶς. 
’ / 5S > x Qn 
ὀολίγον, εἶπεν εἰς τὸν πρω- 
» / / 
τον" ἔχεις θυγατέρα: Ma- 
λιστα. Καὶ σύ, ἠρώτησε 
/ 
τὸν ἄλλον, ἔχεις υἱόν; Μά- 
\ 
λιστα. Ta τέκνα γνωρί- 
ζονται μεταξύ των, ἀγαπῶν- 
» “Δ 
ται ἀμοιβαίως; ~Q πολύ, 
/ 
ἀνέκραξαν ταὐτοχρόνως. 
/ / 
Tore, φίλοι µου, πρέπει 
\ νε 4 \ \ 
νὰ τὰ ὑπανδρεύσητε Kal νὰ 
“Ὁ / Ν δ᾽ 
τοῖς δώσητε τὸν θησαυρόν. 


Ὁ ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἵστατο 
ἐκπεπληγμένος ἐκ τῆς κρί- 
σεως ταύτης. Μήπως τὴν 
εὑρίσκετε ἄδικον; εἶπεν ὁ 
᾿Αφρικανὸς ἀρχηγός. Οὐχί, 
βεβαίως, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπάρχει κἄτι 
παράδοξον εἰς τὸ πρᾶγμα. 

Ai! καὶ πῶς ἡ ὑπόθεσις 
αὕτη ἤθελε τελειώσει εἰς 


, Ν Ν 
τὸ βασίλειόν σας; Νὰ σὲ 


EXERCISE 237 


ure which is included in 
the sale.” 


The judge repeated the 
words of the two contest- 


ants in order to assure 
himself that he under- 
stood them well. Then, 


reflecting a little, he said 
to the first: “Hast thou 
ha Gauchten?t’)~-"<Y ess 
“ And thou,” he asked the 
other, “hast thou a son?” 
“Yes.” “The children 
are acquainted with each 
other; they love each oth- 
er?” “Oh; much,”. they 
exclaimed simultaneously. 
“Then, my friends, you 
must marry them and 
give them the treasure.” 
Alexander stood aston- 
ished at this decision. 
“You did not find it un- 
just?” said the African 
chief. “ No, certainly not, 
but there is something 
strange in the matter.” 
“Indeed! and how 
would this question be de- 
cided in vour kingdom?’ 


238 


εἴπω τὴν ἀλήθειαν, ὁ θη- 
ἤθελεν ἀφαιρεθῆ 
ἀπὸ τοὺς διαδίκους καὶ δοθῆ 


σαυρὸς 


εἰς τὴν κυβέρνησιν ὡς ἰδιο- 
κτησία της. Kis τὴν κυ- 
βέρνησιν ; ἀλλ ἡ γῆ σας 
φωτίζεται ὑπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου; 
᾿Αναμφιβόλως. Βρέχει ὁ 
Βεβαίως. Ila- 


val 
padofov! κατοικεῖται ὑπὸ 


> Υ͂ 
οὐρανὸς ; 


ξ 7 \ 2 7 , 
ἡμέρων καὶ ἀγρίων ζφων ; 
“Ὑπὸ ζῴων παντὸς εἴδους.“ 


Τότε λοιπὸν πρὸς χάριν 

ο > ig / / ε 
τῶν ἀθώων τούτων ζῴων ο 
Θεὸς ἀνατέλλει τὸν ἥλιόν 
του καὶ ποτίζει τὴν γῆν του 
διὰ τῆς βροχῆς᾽ διότι, σεῖς, 
τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, δὲν εἶσθε ἄξιοι 
τοιαύτης εὐεργεσίας. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


“To tell you the truth, the 
treasure would be taken 
away from the contestants 
and given to the govern- 
ment as its property.” “ To 
the government? But your 
land is lighted by the 
sun?’ “Undoubtedly.” 
“Tt rains?’ “Certainly.” 
“Strange! It is inhabited 
by domestic and wild ani- 
mals?” ‘By animals of 
every kind.” 

“Then for the sake of 
these innocent animals 
God causes his sun to rise 
and waters his earth with 
the rain; for you, in truth, 
are not worthy of such 
beneficence.” 


VERBS 


ζῶντα, pres. part. ζῶ(άω), to live. 

ᾠὡδήγησαν, aor. ind. ὁδηγῶ(έω), to conduct, ouide. 
προσεκάλεσε, aor. ind. προσκαλῶ(έω), to invite. 
προσέφερε, ΔΟΥ. ind. προσφέρω, to offer, bring in. 


παριστῶντα, pres. part. παριστῶ (παριστάνω, Tapl 


to represent. 


/ 


nr 


στημι), 


θεωρῶν, pres. part. θεωρῶ(έω), to observe, contemplate. 
ἀνέκραξε, aor. ind. ἀνακράξζω, to exclaim. | 


τρώγετε, pres. ind. τρώγω, to eat. 


VERBS 239 


ἀπεκρίθη, aor. ind. ἀποκρίνομαι, to reply. 

ἐστοχάσθην, aor. ind. στοχάζοµαι, to believe, think. 

ἐστερεῖσθε, imp. ind. στεροῦμαι(έοµαι), to be deprived of. 

ἠθέλετε ζητήσει, aor. Condit. ζητῶ(έω), to seek. 

γνωρίσωμεν, aor. Subj. γνωρίζω, to know. 

περιµείνατε, aor. imperat. περιμένω, to wait for, expect. 

θέλετε γνωρίσει, aor. fut. γνωρίζω, to know. 

ἔλεγε, imp. ind. λέγω, to say. 

προσελθόντες, ΔΟΥ. part. προσέρχομαι, to come to. 

παρεκάλεσαν, aor. ind. παρακαλά(έω), to ask, beg. 

δικάσῃ, aor. subj. δικάζω, to judge, decide. 

ἐγερθείσης, aor. part. pass. ἐγεῖρω, to raise up. 

ἐπώλεσε, aor. 1nd. πωλώ(έω). to sell. 

εὑρέθη, aor. ind. pass. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

ἀποδώσω, aor. Subj. ἀποδίδω. to return, give back. 

ἀνήκοντα, pres. part. ἀνήκω, to belong. 

nyopaca, aor. ind. ἀγοράζω. to buy. ο 

ἀποποιεῖται, pres. ind. ἀποποιοῦμαι(έομαι), to refuse. 

γενομένη, perf. part. γίνομαι, to be, become. 

παρεχώρησα, aor. ind. παραχωρώ(έω), to yield, grant. 

περιλαμβάνεται, pres. ind. pass. περιλαμβάνω, to em- 
brace, comprehend. 

ἐπανέλαβε, aor. ind. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to repeat. 

ἀποδείξῃ, aor. Subj. ἀποδεικνύω, to demonstrate, prove. 

ἐννόησε, aor. ind. ἐννοώ(ίέω). to understand. 

σκεφθείς, aor. part. σκέπτομαι, to reflect, consider. 

ἠρώτησε, aor. ind. ἐρωτώ(άω), to ask, inquire. 

γνωρίζονται, pres. ind. mid. γνωρίζω, to know. 

ἀγαπῶώνται, pres. ind. mid. aya7ra(aw), to love. 

ὑπανδρεύσητε, aor. Subj. ὑπανδρεύω, to marry. 

ἵστατο, imp. ind. mid. ἵστημι, to set up; (ἵσταμαι, to 
stand). 


240 MODERN GREEK MASTERY . 


ἐκπεπληγμένος, perf. part. pass. ἐκπλήττω, tO astonish. 

ὑπάρχει, pres. ind. ὑπάρχω, to be, exist. | 

ἤθελε τελειώσει, aor. Condit. τελειόνω(ώ-όω), to end. 

ἤθελε ἀφαιρεθῆ, aor. condit. pass. ἀφαιρώίέω), to take 
away, deduct. 

ἤθελε δοθῆ, aor. condit. pass. δίδω, to give. 

φωτίζεται, pres. ind. pass. φωτίζω, to light. 

βρέχει, pres. ind. βρέχω, to wet; impersonally, to rain. 

κατοικεῖται, pres. ind. pass. κατοικά(έω), to inhabit. 

ἀνατέλλει, pres. ind. ἀνατέλλω, to raise. 

ποτίζει, pres. ind. ποτίζω, to water, give to drink. 


Grammar 
ADVERBS— Ἐπιρρήματα 


Most adverbs are derived from adjectives, nouns, or 
other parts of speech, but some are original and inde- — 
pendent of other words in their formation. 

Those derived from adjectives are formed by chang- 
ing the termination ων of the genitive plural masculine | 
into ws, thus: 


ADJECTIVE GEN, PLURAL ADVERB 
καλός, good καλῶν καλῶς 
βέβαιος, certain, βεβαίων βεβαίως 
ἁπλοῦς, simple, ἁπλῶν ἁπλῶς 
μέγας, great, μεγάλων μεγάλως 
βαρύς, heavy. βαρέων βαρέως 


The comparison of adverbs of this class follows that 
of the corresponding adjectives, the comparative being 
the neuter singular (sometimes plural) of the compara- 
tive of the adjective, the superlative the neuter plural 
of the superlative form of the adjective, thus; 


ADVERBS 241 


“ / 
καλῶς κάλλιον, καλλίτερον κάλλιστα, ἄριστα 
/ / 
βεβαίως βεβαιότερον βεβαιότατα 
3 lal « / ς / 
ἁπλῶς ἁαπλούστερον απλούστατα 


μεγάλως μεῖζον, µεγαλείτερον μέγιστα 
βαρέως βαρύτερον βαρύτατα 


The comparison is sometimes indicated, as in the 
case of adjectives, by πλέον, περισσότερον, ΟΥ μᾶλλον. 

Sometimes, especially in the vernacular, one of the 
case-endings, more often the neuter singular or plu- 
ral, of the adjective is employed as an adverb, thus: 
ἀριστερά, ΟΥ ἀριστερᾷ, to the left; δεξιά, or δεξιᾷ, to 
the right; δημοσίᾳ, publicly; δυνατά, strongly ; ἰδίᾳ, 
privately ; μακράν (ὁδόν, understood), far; µόνον, only ; 
πεζῇ, on foot; πολύ, much. 

Adverbs of nationality may end in κά or ἐστί, thus: 
ἑλληνικά ΟΥ ἑλληνιστί, γαλλικά ΟΥ γαλλιστί, ἀγγλικά OF 
ἀγγλιστί. 

The numeral adverbs have been given on p. 146. 

Adverbs denoting vest in a place have the termina- 
tion θὲ or σι--ἄλλοθι, elsewhere ; οὐρανόθι, in heaven ; 
θύρασι, by the door; ᾿Αθήνησι, in Athens; those de- 
noting motion toward a place, σε or δε---οἴκαδε, towards 
home; ἄλλοσε, to another place, elsewhither; those 
denoting motion from a place, θεν--- ἄλλοθεν, from an- 
other place, elsewhere ; οὐρανόθεν, from heaven ; ἄνωθεν, 
from above. 

The other adverbs of time, place, manner, etc., have 
no peculiarities that require explanation here. Those 
in common use have already been encountered fre- 
quently in the preceding exercises. 

16 


LESSON TWENTY-FOURTH « 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ EIKOSTON ΤΈΤΑΡΤΟΝ 


Ἱματισμός (τέλος) 


Clothing—(conclusion) 


Ἐλησμονήσαμεν va ἀναφέρωμεν ὅτι μὲ TO περι- 
We forgot to mention that with the col- 
τραχήλιον φέρουσι πάντοτε λαιμοδέτην, τὸ σχῆμα καὶ 
lar Ῥθορίο Ἴνθα always ἃ cravat, the shape and 
τὸ χρῶμα τοῦ ὁποίου παραλλάσσει ἀναλόγως τοῦ 
color of which vary according to the 
ἐπικρατοῦντος συρμοῦ. 
prevailing fashion. 
Αἱ γυναῖκες φοροῦσιν, παρεκτὸς ἄλλων ἐνδυμάτων, 
Women wear, in addition to other garments, 
ἐσωφόριον (μεσοφούστανον) καὶ ἐσθῆτα (φόρεμα). Τὸ 
a petticoat and adress. -. The 
μεσοφούστανον εἶναι κατεσκευασμένον ἐκ µουσελίνης 
petticoat is made of muslin 
ἢ µετάξης, ἡ δὲ ἐσθὴς ἐξ ὑφασμάτων διαφόρων εἰδῶν: 
or silk, the dress of cloths οὗ various kinds: 
βατίστης, λινοῦ, ἐριούχου, µετάξης, ἀτλαζίου, βελού- 
batiste, linen, woollen cloth, silk, satin, vel- 
Sov, κτλ. (καὶ τὰ λοιπὰ), καὶ εἶναι ἐστολισμένη μὲ 
vet, etc. (et cetera), and itis trimmed with 


CLOTHING 243 


ταινίας, γουναρικὸν καὶ διάφορα τείνοντα πρὸς στολισμόν. 
ribbons, fur, and various trimmings. — 
“Τὸ μῆκος ths φούστης καὶ τὸ μέγεθος τῶν χειρίδων 
The length of the skirt and the size οὗ the sleeves 
παραλλάσσουσιν ἀπὸ καιροῦ εἰς καιρὸν ἀναλόγως τοῦ 
vary from time to time according to-the 
ἐπικρατοῦντος -συρμοῦ. "Όταν ἡ γυνὴ ἐξέρχηται κατὰ 
prevailing fashion. When ἃ woman goes out in 
τὸν χειμῶνα, φορεῖ ἐπενδύτην, πολλάκις δὲ σισύ- 
the winter, she wears ἃ cloak, often, indeed, ἃ fur 
ραν. λλλοτε ἐφόρει τις σάλι, ἀλλὰ τώρα δὲν 
cloak. Formerly one wore ἃ shawl, but now they 
εἶναι πολὺ ἐν χρήσει. Ὃ πιλίσκος ἔχει διάφορα 


are not much in use. The bonnet has various 
σχήματα καὶ διάφορα μεγέθη, καὶ εἶναι ἐστολισμένος 
shapes and various _ sizes, and is trimme?@ 
pe πτερὰ, φιόγγους καὶ πολυειδῆ κοσμή- 
with feathers, bows, and many kinds of  orna- 
para. Γυνὴ Θαρυπενθοῦσα . φορεῖ μέλανα 
ments. A woman in deep mourning wears black 
Φορέματα. 

clothes. 


Φέρουσι Ἀχειρόκτια, ὅταν εὑρίσκωνται ἔξω διὰ va 
People wear gloves when _ they are out-of-doors, in 
κρατῶσι θερμὰς τὰς χεῖράς των, καὶ ὁμοίως κατὰ τὸ 
order to keep warm their hands,and also in sum- 
θέρος ὡς μέρος τῆς ἐνδυμασίας. Χειρόκτια κατα- 


mer as an article of dress. - Gloves 810 
σκευάζονται ἐκ διφθέρας ἢ µαλλίου. Τὰ ἐξ ἐριφίου 
made of leather or wool. Kid gloves 


δέρματος χειρόκτια Φέρει ὁ ἐκλεκτὸς κόσμος, 
(the of kid-skin gloves) wears the fashionable world, 


244 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ὅταν κάμνῃ ἐπισκέψεις, εἰς τὸ θέατρον, καὶ εἰς ὅλας τὰς 
when it pays visits, in the theatre,andin all the 
δημοσίους ἢ ἰδιωτικὰς συναναστροφάς. 

public or private entertainments. 


Conversation Exercise 


Δὲν ἐλησμονήσατε κἄτι τι; Τί ἐλησμονήσατε va 
3 / / / δ » x an 
ἀναφέρητε; Τί φέρουσιν οἱ ἄνδρες παρεκτὸς τοῦ περι- 
/ / \ nan % Ἀ an a 
τραχηλίου; Ἱαραλλάσσει τὸ σχῆμα καὶ TO χρωμα του 
λαιμοδέτου ἀναλόγως τοῦ συρμοῦ; Ποῖον εἶναι τὸ χρῶμα 
fa id 3 
τοῦ λαιμοδέτου σας; ὁ λαιμοδέτης μου εἶναι μέλας μὲ 
2 \ λα 
ἐρυθρὰς γραμμάς. 
ο « ο) / 3 \ / a > 
Popovow αἱ γυναῖκες pecophovatav’® καὶ φόρεμα; Ἐκ 
τ τίνος εἶναι κατεσκευασμένη ἡ µεσόφουστα; Ἑατασκευά- 
ζεται τὸ προς ἐξ ὑφασμάτων διαφόρων εἰδῶν; “HE 
ὑφασμάτων τίνων εἰδῶν εἶναι κατεσκευασμένον τὸ ος. 
μα; Μὲ τί εἶναι ἐστολισμένον; ἹΠαραλλάσσει τὸ μῆ- 
Αα / / 2 / \ \ / 
κος τῆς φούστης; Ilapaddaoce ἐπίσης καὶ τὸ μέγεθος 
τῶν χειρίδων ἀπὸ καιροῦ εἰς καιρόν; Τί φορεῖ γυνὴ 
βαρυπενθοῦσα; Tis φορεῖ μέλανα φορέματα; Τί φέρει 
N rn an 3 
ἡ γυνὴ ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς της: “Eyer ὁ πιλίσκος διάφο- 
/ / A => 
ρα σχήματα καὶ διάφορα μεγέθη; Πῶς εἶναι ἐστολισμέ- 
ς / 5 > / \ / / 
νος 0 πιλίσκος; Ἠίναι ἐστολισμένος μὲ πτερά, Φιόγγους 
\ δη / Ti 4 Ne 54. 
καὶ πολυειδῆ κοσμήματα; Τι φέρει γυνὴ ὅταν ἐξέρχηται 
Ἂς Ν lal , ο 4 7, 3 / 
κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα; Ί]οτε φοροῦσι σισύρας; ᾿Εφόρουν 
ἄλλοτε" σάλια; Δὲν φοροῦσι cada τώρα; 
1Have you not forgotten something ? * Black with red_ stripes. 
® Another form of μεσοφούστανον. 4When do they (women) wear ὃ 
δ Another word for formerly is πάλαι ' but as σάλι belongs to the vernacular, 


ἄλλοτε (also a word in the vernacular) is employed. A Greek does not use 
words belonging to the higher style and to the vernacular in the same sen- 


tence when it is possible to avoid it. 


εν ος | 


δέρματος χειρόκτια ; 


READING EXERCISE 


Πότε φέρουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι χειρόκτια ; 


245 


Φέρουσι χει- 


ρόκτια κατὰ τὸ θέρος; Kata τὸ θέρος φέρουσι χειρόκτια 


\ \ n x \ a / x / e / 
διὰ νὰ κρατῶσι θερμὰς Tas χεῖράς των ἢ μόνον ὡς µέρος 


τῆς ἐνδυμασίας ; 


Ἔκ τίνος κατασκευάζονται χειρόκτια; 


Πότε φέρουσιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι τοῦ συρμοῦ τὰ ἐξ ἐριφίου 


Φέρουσι χειρόκτια εἰς τὸ θέατρον ; 


Φέρουσι χειρόκτια εἰς ὅλας τὰς δημοσίους καὶ ἰδιωτικὰς 


συναναστροφάς ; 


1 People of fashion. 


Reading 


Οἱ ὀλυμπιακοὶ ἀγῶνες. 

ς / Ὁ »/ 

Η πανήγυρις αὕτη Ίρχι- 
σε νὰ λαμβάνῃ πολλὴν 
> / εἶ Ν ο 4 
ἐπίδοσιν ἀπὸ τῆς δεκάτης 
τεταρτης ὀλυμπιάδος. Μέ- 
χρι τῆς ὀλυμπιάδος ταύτης 
εἷς καὶ μόνος ἐτελεῖτο ἀγών, 

\ « n / / \ 
τὸ ἁπλοῦν στάδιον, τότε δὲ 
κατὰ πρῶτον εἰσήχθη καὶ 
ὃ Γ > / ο a 

εύτερος ἀγών, τὸ διπλοῦν 
στάδιον, ὁ λεγόμενος “' δίαυ- 
λος, δηλαδὴ δρόμος ἀπὸ 
τῆς ἀρχῆς μέχρι τοῦ τέλους 
lal / \ / \ 
τοῦ σταδίου καὶ πάλιν πρὸς 

Cee CMRP, ΑΕ an / 
τὰ ὀπίσω ἀπὸ τοῦ τέλους 

ῇ n a 
µέχρι τῆς ἀρχῆς. "ἔπειτα 

\ \ 2 / 3 
κατὰ τὴν ἀκόλουθον ὀλυμπι- 

/ > ο ν ’ 4 
άδα, εἰς τὰ ἑπτακόσια εἴκοσι 

Ν a / \ 
πρὸ Χριστοῦ, προσετέθη καὶ 

/ 53 «ς 
τρίτον εἶδος δρόμου, ὁ “ δόλι- 


Exercise 


The Olympian Games. 


This festival began to 
attract much notice from 
the 14th Olympiad. Up 
to this Olympiad only one 
game was celebrated, the 
single course, but then for 
the first time the second 
contest was introduced, 
the double course, the so- 
called “diaulos,” that is 
to say, a race from the 
beginning to the end of 
the stadium and again in 
the reverse direction from 
the finish to the starting- 
point. Then at the fol- 
lowing Olympiad, 720 B.c., 
was added a third kind of 
race, the “ dolichos,” name- 


246 


χος,᾽ ἤτοι δρόμος ἀπ᾽ ἀρχῆς. 


an / / / 
τοῦ σταδίου μέχρι τέλους 
/ Ν 
καὶ τἀνάπαλιν, ἀλλὰ πολ- 
λάκις ἐπαναλαμβανόμενος. 
/ σα ε 
᾿Αξιοσημείωτον δέ, ὅτι ὁ 
Ν 
πολλαπλασιασμὸς αὐτὸς 
ο / 
τῶν ἀγωνισμάτων συμπί- 
πτει μὲ τὴν αὔξησιν τῆς 
/ Ν ο ς / 
φήμης καὶ τῆς ὑπολήψεως 
lal af 
τῆς πανηγύρεως. 
/ 3 / 
Κατὰ τὴν δεκάτην ὀγδόην 
5 , / e 
ὀλυμπιάδα προσετέθησαν ἡ 
> / 
“carn” καὶ “τὸ πέντα- 
\ ς A 
θλον," τὸ ὁποῖον περιε- 
/ / \ ot 
λάμβανε συνάμα τοὺς ἑξῆς 
/ 3 ο) {Ὁ 99 
πέντε aywvas: ἄλμα, 
7 / 
ἤτοι πήδημα": “ δίσκον," 
ἤτοι βολὴν διὰ στρογγύλου 
ς fal 4 / 
καὶ ὁμαλοῦ λίθου: “δρὀ- 


2) ες 2. ες 


μον, 
ο \ 2? 
Etepos νεωτερισμὸς ἐγένε- 


7 
πάλην," “ ἀκόντιον." 
Ν x 5 \ / 
TO κατὰ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τρίτην 
9 / ὡς τς - 
ὀλυμπιάδα, τῷ ἑξακοσιοστῷ 
5 ὃ ΄σ 3 ὃ / ΕΣ \ 
ὀγδοηκοστῶῷ ὀγδόῳ ἔτει πρὸ 
lal / rn 
Χριστοῦ, εἰσαχθείσης τῆς 
Αα / 
“ἐ πυγμῆς" καὶ ἄλλος σπου- 
/ a \ , x 
δαιότερος κατὰ τὴν εἰκοστὴν 
πέμπτην, τῷ ἑξακοσιοστῷ 
ώ A » \ 
ὀγδοηκοστώ έτει πρὸ Ἆρι- 
‘a 
ap- 


S, / 
ματος ἵππων τελείων," δη- 


ce 


lal ’ / n 
στοῦ, εἰσαχθέντος τοῦ 


λαδὴ τοῦ δρόμου δι ἁμάξης 


MODERN GREEK 


MASTERY 


ly, a race from the begin- 
ning of the stadium to the 
end and the reverse, but 
many times repeated. It 
is worthy of note that 
this multiplication of con- 
tests coincides with the in- 
crease of fame and of rep. 
utation of the festival. 


At the 18th Olympiad 
were added the “palé” 
(wrestling) and the “pen- 
tathlon,’ which included 
in one the following five 
contests: ‘“halma,” that 
is, Jumping; “ discos,” that 
is, throwing by means of a 
round and smooth stone ; 
“dromos” (running), 
“pale” (wrestling), “akon- 
tion” (spear - throwing). 
Another innovation took 
place at the 23d Olympiad, 
688 B.c., the “ pigmé” (box- 
ing) being introduced, and 
another more important 
one at the 25th, 680 ν.ο., 
the “team of perfect 
horses” being introduced, 
that is to say, a race with 
a chariot drawn by four 


VERBS 


/ Ν / 
συροµένης ὑπὸ τεσσάρων 
/ 4 Ν 
τελείων ἵππων. To τελευ- 
a n 7 
ταῖον τοῦτο ἀγώνισμα συνε- 
/ Ν / . \ \ 
τέλεσε TA μέγιστα ELS TO νὰ 
f. 
διαποικίλλῃ καὶ νὰ λαμπρύ- 
\ / / a 
vn τὸ θέαμα, διότι κατῆλθον 
” > \ 2 a ς 
ἤδη εἰς τὸν ἀγῶνα οἱ πλου- 
- « 
σιώτατοι τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων, οἱ 
/ \ 
δυνάµενοι va τρέφωσι μὲν 
\ / a 7 
τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν ἵππων, 
\ a \ \ > 
νὰ μισθώσι δὲ τοὺς ἐπιτη- 
‘4 
δειοτάτους ἁρματηλάτας. 
\ 
Kata τὴν τριακοστὴν 
/ 2 / ~ ς 
τρίτην ὀλυμπιάδα, τῷ ἑξα- 
κοσιοστῷ τεσσαρακοστῷ 
2 7, » \ la) 
ὀγδόῳ ἔτει πρὸ Χριστοῦ, 
7 / 2/. yy 
προσετέθησαν δύο ἔτι εἴδη 
᾿ δὲ { 
ἀγωνισμάτων, “ τὸ παγκρά- 
99 ” 2 \ a 
τιον" (ἤτοι ἀγὼν πυγμῆς 
\ / / x 
καὶ πάλης συνάμα) καὶ ὁ 
/ 5 \ 
“ἵππος κέλης, δηλαδὴ ἡ 
> Ν 
πὶ 


μᾶλλον δὲ καὶ μᾶλλον νέα 


ἁπλῆ ἱπποδρομία. 


/, 2 ! 
προσετίθεντο ἀγωνίσματα, 
e / c lal / 
οἷον δρόμος ὁπλιτῶν ποικί- 
7 Ν 
λα παίδων ἀγωνίσματα, καὶ 

/ ” / “4 
πώλων (ἤτοι νέων ἵππων) 


δρόμοι. 


247 


perfect horses. This last 
contest contributed in the 
greatest degree to the 
adorning and making re- 
splendent of the spectacle, 
for the richest of the 
Greeks descended to the 
contest, those able to keep 
the best of horses and to 
hire the most expert chari- 
oteers. 


At the 33d Olympiad, 
in 648 τ.ο., two further 
kinds of contest were 
added, the ‘pancration” 
(namely a contest of box- 
ing and wrestling com- 
bined) and the “hippos 
kelés” (race-horse), that is 
to say, single-horse racing. 
More and more new con- 
tests were added, such as 
the race of soldiers in 
armor, various contests of 
boys, and races of colts 
(that is, of young horses). 


VERBS 


ἤρχισε, aor. ind. ἀρχίζω, to begin. 
λαμβάνῃ, pres. subj. λαμβάνω, to take. 
ἐτελεῖτο, imp. ind. pass. τελώ(έω). to celebrate. 


248 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


εἰσήχθη, aor. ind. pass. εἰσάγω, to introduce, admit. 

προσετέθη, aor. ind. pass. προσθέτω, to add. 

ἐπαναλαμβανόμενος, pres. part. pass. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to 
repeat. 

συμπίπτει, pres. ind. συµπίπτω, to coincide. 

περιελάμβανε, imp. ind. περιλαμβάνω, to contain. 

ἐγένετο, 2d aor. ind. γίνομαι, to become. 

εἰσαχθείσης, aor. part. pass. fem. εἰσάγω, to introduce, 

εἰσαχθέντος, aor. part. pass. masc. of the same. 

συροµένης. pres. part. pass. σύρω, to draw. 

συνετέλεσε. aor. ind. συντελῶ(έω), to contribute, add. 

διαποικίλλη. pres. Subj. διαποικίλλω, to adorn, decorate. 

λαμπρύνῃ, pres. Subj. λαμπρύνω, to make resplendent. 

κατῆλθον, aor. ind. κατέρχοµαι, to descend. 

τρέφωσι, pres. Subj. τρέφω, to keep, maintain. 

μισθῶσι, pres. subj. µισθόνω(ὢ-όω), to hire. 


Grammar 
Ῥπονοῦνβδ- ἀντωνυμίαι 
- 
The pronouns are divided into: 1, personal; 2, re- 
flexive ; 8, reciprocal; 4, possessive ; 5, demonstrative ; 
6, interrogative ; 7, relative ; and 8, indefinite. Those 
of the first three of these divisions are called substan- 
tive pronouns, the others adjective pronouns. 


1. PersonaL PRONOUNS—IIpocemtkal ἀντωνυμίαι 


First Prerson 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. ἐγώ. I Nom. ἡμεῖς, ἐμεῖς, we 
Gen. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ Gen. ἡμῶν, μᾶς 
Dat. ἐμοί, μοί Dat. ἡμῖν, μᾶς 


Acc. ἐμέ, μέ Acc. ἡμᾶς, ἐμᾶς, μᾶς 


PRONOUNS 249 


Srconp PERSON 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. σύ. ἐσύ, thou Nom. ὑμεῖς, σεῖς, ἐσεῖς, you 
Gen. σοῦ Gen. ὑμῶν. σᾶς, ἐσᾶς 
Dat. σοί Dat. ὑμῖν, σᾶς, 
Ace. σέ, ἐσέ, ἐσένα  ἈΆοου. ὑμᾶς, σᾶς, ἐσᾶς 
Voc. σύ, ἐσύ Voc. ὑμεῖς, σεῖς, ἐσεῖς 


TuirD PERSON 


Masculine 
SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. αὐτός, he Nom. αὐτοί, they 
Gen. αὐτοῦ, τοῦ Gen. αὐτῶν, τῶν 
Dat. αὐτῷ, τῷ Dat. αὐτοῖς, τοῖς | 
, / 
Acc. αὐτόν, τόν Acc. αὐτούς, τοὺς 
Feminine 
SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. αὐτή, she Nom. αὐταί, they 
Gen. αὐτῆς, τῆς Gen. αὐτῶν, τῶν 
Dat. αὐτῇ, τῇ Dat. αὐταῖς, ταῖς 
Ace. αὐτήν, τήν Ace. αὐτάς, τάς 
Neuter 
SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. αὐτό, it Nom. αὐτά, the 
. 2 
Gen. αὐτοῦ, τοῦ Gen. αὐτῶν, τών 
Dat. αὐτώ, τῷ Dat. αὐτοῖς, τοῖς 
. αὐτό, τό . αὐτά, τά 
Acc , τό Acc ἣ 


_ The dissyllabic forms of the first and second persons 
jare seldom used in ordinary conversation, but belong 
rather {ο the literary language. In the oblique cases 
they invariably follow the verb which governs them. 
The monosyllabic forms are those most frequently 


250 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


heard. They usually precede the governing verb, 
except when this is in the positive form of the impera- 
tive; then they follow it; when the imperative is in 
the negative, however, they precede it. When follow- 
ing the imperative, they are enclitic, throwing their 
accent back on the final syllable of the verb, but in all 
other cases they retain their accent. In the compound 
tenses with θά, θέλω, or ἄς, they are placed between 
the participle and the verb; they oceupy the same posi- 
tion also in relation to the negatives δέν and μή and to 
the conjunctions νά, etc. When following prepositions 
the monosyllabic forms preserve their accent, but after 
the prepositional adverbs (such as πλησίον and the 
like) they become enclitic, unless (as is usually the 
case, however) a special emphasis is laid upon them; 
thus: καθήσατε πλησίον µου, sit near me; ὅλοι ἐκτὸς 
σοῦ τὸ ἐπίστευσαν, all except thee believed it. When, 
however, there is a dissyllabic form (in all cases, there- 
fore, except the second person singular) this is used 
after prepositions in place of the corresponding mono- 
syllabic form. A frequent exception to this rule is 
πρὸς μέ, instead of πρὸς ἐμέ, although the latter is cor- 
rect and is often heard. | 


2. REFLEXIVE Ῥπονοῦνβ-- Αὐτοπαθεῖς ἀντωνυμίαι 


First ΡΕΒΒΟΝ 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Gen. ἐμαυτοῦ, -ῆς, | Gen. ἡμών αὐτῶν, 
of myself of ourselves 
Dat. ἐμαυτῷ, -ἢ Dat. ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, -ats 
Acc. ἐμαυτόν, -ἡν Acc. ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, -as 


PRONOUNS 251 


SECOND PrErson 


SINGULAR PLURAL 


| Gen. σεαυτοῦ (σαυτοῦ), -ῆς, Gen. ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, 


of thyself of yourselves 
Dat. σεαυτῷ (σαυτώ), -7 Dat. ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς, -αἲς 


Ace. σεαυτόν (σαυτόν), -ήν Acc. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, -άς 


ΤΠΙΠΡ Person 
SINGULAR PLURAL 
Gen. ἑαυτοῦ (αὑτοῦ), -ῆς. -οῦ, Gen. ἑαυτών (αὑτῶν), 
of him-, her-, itself of themselves 
Dat. ἑαυτῷ (αὑτῷ), -7, -ῷ Dat. ἑαυτοῖς (αὑτοῖς), -αἲς 
/Αοο. ἑαυτόν (αὑτόν), -ήν, -6 Acc. ἑαυτούς (αὑτούς), -άς, -ά 


| Note the rough breathing in both forms of the third 

iperson ; in the other persons the breathing is smooth. 
Instead of the forms above given the following are 

very commonly employed, especially in speaking: 


First Person Second Person Third Person 


‘Gen. τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ 


ο ιόν µου, µας σου, σας του, της, των 


3. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN—’AAAnAorabys ἀντωνυμία 


Gen. ἀλλήλων, -ων, -wv, One another 
Dat. ἀλλήλοις, -αις, -οις 
Acc. ἀλλήλους, -ας, ἄλληλα 


Instead of these forms we very commonly have in 
ithe vernacular: 


/ 4 


ὁ εἷς τὸν ἄλλον ἡ µία τὴν ἄλλην τὸ ὃν τὸ ἄλλο 


252 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


4, PossEsstvE Ῥπονοῦνα-- Κτητικαὶ ἀντωνυμίαι 


The possessive pronouns in ordinary use are simply 
the genitive form of the personal pronouns, namely, 
µου, my}; σου, thy; του or αὐτοῦ, his; της or αὐτῆς, her; 
του OF αὐτοῦ, its; µας Or ἡμῶν, OUP; σας OF ὑμών, YOUr; 
των or αὐτῶν, their. These invariably follow the noun 
to which they refer, or its attributive adjective, if it 
have one. The monosyllabic forms are enclitic. Em- 
phasis is expressed by ἰδικός, -ή, όν (own), followed by — 
the pronoun, the two being placed between the article 
and the noun, thus: εἶναι τὸ ἰδικόν µου βιβλίον οὐχὶ δὲ 
τὸ ἰδικόν σας, it is my book, not yours. The same 
form is used when the possessive stands alone without 
a substantive; thus: τίνος εἶναι ὁ πῖλος οὗτος ; ὁ ἰδικός 
μου, Whose hat is that ? mine. 

There is another form of the possessive pronoun, em- 
ployed in the literary language, to wit: 


ἐμός, ἐμή, ἐμόν, MY ἡμέτερος, ἡμετέρα, ἡμέτερον, OUL 
σός, σή, σόν, thy ὑμέτερος, ὑμετέρα, ὑμέτερον, Your 


These are declined regularly like adjectives of three 
terminations in -os, -a or -y, -ov. They are preceded 
by the article and are placed before the noun to 
which they belong, agreeing with it in gender, num- 
ber, and case. These pronouns are sometimes em- 
ployed, instead of the enclitic forms with ἰδικός, to de- 
note emphasis, or as a predicate without a noun; thus: 
ὁ πῖλος εἶναι ἐμός (or ἰδικός µου), the hat is mine (with- 
out the article); but: εἶναι ὁ ἐμός (or ὁ ἰδικός µου), it 
is mine (with the article). 


LESSON TWENTY-FIFTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΒΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ ΠΕΜΠΤΟΝ 


Ὁ χρόνος 
Time | 


Τὸ ἔτος εἶναι ἡλιακόν, δηλαδὴ εἶναι τὸ χρονικὸν 
_ The year is (a) solar (year), that is, it is the space 


Ka 


διάστηµα ἐν ᾧ ἡ γῆ περιστρέφεται περὶ τὸν ἥλιον" 
of time in which the earth turns round the sun; 
ἄλλαις λέξεσι, µία περιστροφὴ τῆς γῆς περὶ τὸν 
in other words, one revolution of the earth round the 


xX 


“ 4 =) ἃ / / ς Pe 
ἥλιον τελειόνει εἰς EV ἔτος ἢ τριακοσίας ἑξήκοντα 


sun takes place in one year or 365 
πέντε ἡμέρας. Λογαριάζομεν τὸν χρόνον ἀπὸ τῆς τοῦ 
days. We reckon time from the birth 
Χριστοῦ γεννήσεως" λέγομεν, π. χ. (παραδείγματος 
of Christ ; we say, 6. 0. (for example), 
χάριν), ὅτι συμβάν τι ἔγεινε εἰς τὰ διακόσια TpidKov- 

that an event happened in 231 

τα ἕν π.Χ. (πρὸ Χριστοῦ) ἢ eis τὰ ἐννεακόσια ἐβδο- 

B.o. (before Christ) or in 973 


µήκοντα τρία μ.Χ. (μετὰ Χριστόν). Ὃ Δημοσθένης ἐδη- 

A.D. (after Christ). Demosthenes γροῖ- 
λητηριάσθη εἰς τὰ τριακόσια εἴκοσι δύο π.Χ. --ἢ 
soned himself in 322 B.C. — ΟΥ 


254 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


/ ‘ \ \ Ν + 
δυνάμεθα va εἴπωμεν κατὰ τὸ τριακοσιοστὸν εἰκοστὸν. 


we may say in the three hundred and tiwenty- 


, XN an N ~ - ’ 
δεύτερον ἔτος πρὸ Χριστοῦ, ἢ τῷ τριακοσιοστῷ εἰκοστῷ 


second year before Christ, or (the same in the dative 


δευτέρῳ ἔτει π.Χ. Τὸ ἑλληνικὸν βασίλειον 
case without preposition). The Greek kingdom — 
ο / > \ /- 5 / ./ 3 7 x 
ἱδρύθη εἰς τὰ χίλια ὀκτακόσια εἴκοσιν ἐννέα μ.Χ.---ἢ 
was established in 1829 A.D.—Or 
κατὰ TO χιλιοστὸν ὀκτακοσιοστὸν . ᾿ εἰκοστὸν 


in the one thousand eight hundred and twenty- 
ἔννατον ἔτος μετὰ Χριστόν. 

ninth year after. Christ. 

Μία ἑκατονταετηρὶς εἶναι περίοδος ἑκατὸν ἐτῶν. 

A century is a period of one hundred years. 

“Ἕκαστον τέταρτον ἔτος εἶναι δίσεκτον. Τὸ ἔτος ἔχει 
Every fourth year is leap year. The year has 
δώδεκα μῆνας" οἱ δώδεκα μῆνες τοῦ ἔτους εἶναι 
twelve months; the twelve months of the year are 
Ἰανουάριος, Φεβρουάριος, Μάρτιος, ᾿Απρίλιος, Μάϊος, 
January, February, March, April, May, 
Ἰούνιος, Ιούλιος, Αὔγουστος, Σεπτέμβριος, Οκτώβριος, 
June, July, August, September, October, 


Νοέμβριος, Δεκέμβριος. Οἱ τρεῖς μῆνες τοῦ χειμῶνος 


November, December. The three months of the winter 

εἶναι Δεκέμβριος, κτλ.' οἱ τρεῖς μῆνες τῆς ἀνοίξεως 
are December, etc.; the three months of the spring 
(τοῦ ἔαρος) εἶναι Μάρτιος, κτλ. Οἱ  θερινοὶ μῆνες 


(of the spring) are March, etc. The summer months 


εἶναι lovvios, κτλ.' οἱ φθινοπωρινοὶ μῆνες (οἱ μῆνες 
are June, etc.; the autumn months (the months 
τοῦ φθινοπώρου) εἶναι Σεπτέμβριος, κτλ. Αἱ τέσσαρες 
of autumn) are September, etc. The four 


TIME 205 


ὧραι τοῦ ἔτους ὀνομάζονται ἄνοιξις (ἢ ἔαρ), θέρος, 
seasons (of the year) are called spring, summer, 
φθινόπωρον καὶ χειμών. ‘O μὴν ἔχει τριάκοντα ἢ 
autumn, and winter. The month has thirty or 
τριάκοντα μίαν ἡμέρας. ὁ Φεβρουάριος ἔχει μόνον 


thirty-one days ; February has only 
εἴκοσιν ὀκτὼ ἡμέρας πλὴν κατὰ τὸ δίσεκτον ἔτος, ὅτε 


twenty-eight days, except in leap year, when it 
ἔχει εἴκοσιν ἐννέα ἡμέρας. Αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι τῆς ἐβδο- 
has twenty-nine days. The seven days of the 


| µάδος ὀνομάζονται Κυριακή, Δευτέρα, Τρίτη, Τε- 


week arecalled Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wed- 


| τάρτη, Πέμπτη, Παρασκευὴ καὶ Σάββατον. 
_hesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday. 


Mia ἡμέρα, ἡ ὁποία εἶναι διῃρημένη εἰς εἴκοσι 
One day, which is divided into twenty- 


! / 3 \ 98 
τέσσαρας ὥρας, εἶναι τὸ χρονικὸν διάστηµα ἐν ᾧ 


four hours, is the space of {πιο in which 
ἡ γῇ περιστρέφεται περὶ τὸν ἄξονά της. ‘Exdorn 


{πο earth turns round its axis. Each 


“ / ς / Ἂν x Ψ \ 4 
ὥρα ἔχει ἑξήκοντα λεπτὰ καὶ ἕκαστον λεπτὸν ἔχει 


‘hour Ἰαδ sixty minutes,and each minute has 


ἑξήκοντα δευτερόλεπτα. Ὃ χρόνος εἶναι τὸ ἀντίθετον 


sixty seconds. Time is the opposite 
τῆς αἰωνιότητος.  ἀγγλικὴ παροιμία λέγει: ““O καιρὸς 
of eternity. The English proverb says: “Time 
εἶναι χρήματα," ὅ εστι, ὁ καιρὸς εἶναι πολλοῦ ἄξιος, 
is money,” that is, time 1 very valuable, 
᾿καὶ δὲν πρέπει νὰ τὸν σπαταλᾷ Tis: οἱ "Ἕλληνες 
‘and one must not waste it; the Greeks 


> 


λέγουσι" “Χρόνου φείδου." 
say, ‘‘Economize time.” 


256 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Conversation Exercise 


53 / / ὔ 7 
Εἶναι τὸ ἔτος ἡλιακόν; Τί σημαίνει ἡ ἔκφρασις, 
ς Ν Μ / / / 2 ὃ \ \ 
ἡλιακὸν ἔτος; Ilocos χρόνος παρέρχεται διὰ νὰ περι- 
n ἃ 
στρέφηται ἡ γῆ περὶ τὸν ἥλιον; ἕν ἔτος παρέρχεται. 
\ a an \ 
Els πόσας ἡμέρας τελειόνει µία περιστροφη τῆς γῆς περὶ 
δὴ Ψ ’ \ / 3 a ” ς / 
τὸν ἥλιον; Απὸ ποίας ἐποχῆς ἄρχεται ἡ χρονολογία 
ο» 8 a ἘΞ ἃ 4 κα ΣᾺΝ > LAG eee ” 
ἡμῶν; [Πῶς ὀρίζομεν᾽ τὸ ἔτος εἰς τὸ οποιον ἔγεινε συµ- 
7, ς \ 
βάν τι; Πότε ἐδηλητηριάσθη ὁ Δημοσθένης; Kara 
- ” ’ 5 / \ C5 oe \ > 8 
ποῖον ἄλλον τρόπον δυνάμεθα νὰ ορίσωµεν την αὑτὴν 
\ \ /- 
χρονολοηίαν: Πότε ἱδρύθη τὸ ἑλληνικὸν βασίλειον; 
ς i \ 3 \ / Ψ ” , 
Ορίσατε τὴν αὐτὴν χρονολογίαν κατ ἄλλον τροπον. 
3 ο p dias \ 
Πόσα ἔτη ἔχει µία ἑκατονταετηρίς (ἢ εἷς αἰών ; “Ava 
/ ” / na ᾿» 
πόσα ἔτη᾽ ἐπέρχεται δίσεκτον " ἔτος ; όσους μῆνας ἔχει 
ΩΝ > 2 \ / n aA » / 
τὸ ἔτος; Εἰπέτε τοὺς δώδεκα μῆνας τοῦ ἔτους. 1]όσας 
€ / 3/ ε / Μ ¢ / / y 
ἡμέρας ἔχει ὁ μήν; "ἔχει ὁ Φεβρουάριος πάντοτε εἰκο- 
,ὕ la / / a 
σιν ὀκτὼ ἡμέρας; Πῶς ὀνομάζονται αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι τῆς 
έβδο LO . Tl a 5 ς A n a ‘ Ej / 
µάδος; οἷοι εἶναι of μῆνες τοῦ χειμῶνος; Ἠὐπέτε 
τοὺς τρεῖς μῆνας τῆς ἀνοίξεως. “Eyer αὐτὴ ἡ ὥρα 
- 24 7 ” an 3 / { na - 
τοῦ ἔτους ἄλλο ὄνομα; Ilds ὀνομάζονται οἱ μῆνες τοῦ 
/ / 5 e la A 4 / 
θέρους; Τίνες εἶναι οἱ μῆνες τοῦ φθινοπώρου; Τίνα 
εἶναι τὰ ὀνόματα τῶν τεσσάρων ὡρῶν τοῦ ἔτους; Ἡ 
ς { \ τ ὲ »᾿ / ς a 
ἡμέρα τί χρονικὸν διάστηµα εἶναι; Περιστρέφεται ἡ γῆ 
περὶ τὸν ἄξονά της: Δὲν περιστρέφεται ἐπίσης περὶ τὸν 
ο / > \ e / Ν 2 % 
ἥλιον; ἜΤελειόνουσιν αὐταὶ αἱ δύο περιστροφαὶ εἰς τὸ 
αὐτὸ χρονικὸν διάστηµα: His πόσας ὥρας εἶναι διῃρη- 
i ¢ ς / ” 6 / “ at / 
μένη ἡ ἡμέρα; "ἔχει ἑκάστη ὥρα ἑξήκοντα λεπτά; 
/ 
Πόσα δευτερόλεπτα ἔχει ἕκαστον λεπτόν; όσα δευτε- 
' Expression, 2 How much time is consumed? παρέρχομαι, to pass 
away, glide by. *From what epoch does our chronology begin? 
4 Ὀρίζω, to define, say. >In what other way? 6 Age, eternity, also 
century. 7 Every how many years ὃ 5. Also written βίσεκτον. 


READING EXERCISE 


257 


f » / WA ce oF », yf e / 
ρόλεπτα ἔχει µια WPA; 1) ὡρα ἔχειν τριακόσια ἑξήκοντα 


δευτερόλεπτα. Τίς εἶναι ἡ ἀγγλικὴ παροιμία ἡ ἀφορῶσα' 


τὸν χρόνον ; 


Τί σηµαίνει ἡ παροιμία αὐτή; 
1) 7 


Tis εἶναι 


ἡ ἀντίστοιχος” ἑλληνικὴ παροιμία ; χρόνου φείδου. 


Pres, part. fem. of ἀφορῶ(άω), to regard, concern. 


* Corresponding. 


Reading Exercise 


Γράμμα παραινετικόν τῷ 

Θωμᾶ ᾿Ιεφφερσῶνι Σμίθ. 
Μοντικέλλω, 

τῇ 2 Φεβρουαρίου, 1825. 


Τὸ γράμμα μου τοῦτο θὰ 
τὸ νομίσητε ἐρχόμενον ἐκ 
τῆς τῶν νεκρῶν κατοικίας. 
< / 3 \ λ ς “Ὁ 
Ο γράφων αὐτὸ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 
θὰ κλεισθῇ ἐν τῷ τάφῳ πρὶν 

η : ο πρ 
Xx a \ / 
ἢ δυνηθῆτε va µελετήσητε 
Τὸ 


γράφω δὲ κατ᾽ αἴτησιν τοῦ 


τὰς συμβουλάς του. 


/ \ » / 
φιλοστόργου καὶ ἐξαιρέτου 
/ ἴω 
πατρὸς σας, ἐπιθυμοῦντος νὰ 
σᾶς στείλω τι δυνάμενον 
\ a 
va ἐπιδράση ἐπωφελῶς 

Ν κ 
καὶ νὰ καθοδηγήση τὸν µέλ- 
ς a / Ν Rey 
λοντα ὑμῶν βίον" καὶ ἐγὼ 
/ 
δέ, 


᾿ “Ὁ lal 
καὶ ὑμεῖς ὄνομα, μεριμνῶ 


id / \ 2 Ν 
ὡς φέρων τὸ αὐτὸ 


* 0 Ἰεφφερσὼν ἦτο ὀγδοή- 
κοντα δύο ἐτῶν ὅτ᾽ ἔγραφε τὸ γράμ- 


μα τοῦτο. 
17 


A Letter of Counsel to 
Thomas Jefferson Smith. 


Monticello, 
February 2, 1825. 


This letter will, to you, 
be as one from the dead.* 
The writer will be in the 
grave before you can 
weigh its counsels. Your 
affectionate and excellent 
father has requested that 
I would address to you 
something which might 
have a favorable influence 
on the course of life you 
have to run, and 1 too, as 
a namesake, feel an inter- 
est in that course. Few 
words will be necessary, 
with good dispositions on 


* Jefferson was 82 years old 
when he wrote this letter. 


258 


\ A / ο a 
περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος υμων. 
"Oriya θ᾽ ἀρκέσωσι μόνον 
TN. \ ο Ὁ 2 , 
ἐὰν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐπιδείξητε 

/ 
προθυμίαν καὶ θέλησιν. 
Λάτρευε τὸν Θεόν, τίμα 

\ ο 
καὶ ἀγάπα τοὺς γονεῖς σου, 
ἀγάπα τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς 
/ Ἁ / 
σεαυτόν, καὶ τὴν πατρίδα 
/ 
ἔσο 


/ ./ 5 / 9 
δίκαιος, ἔσο εἰλικρινῆς, οὐ- 
/ SS A 

δέποτε γόγγυζε κατὰ τῆς 


σου πλέον σαυτοῦ. 


/ / νά \ 
θείας προνοίας" οὕτω δὲ 
e A) 
ἡ ζωη 

/ 
ἔσται σοι ὡς προοίμιον 


εἰ ἣν εἰσῆλθες 
9.0 7 ἘΞ Υ̓ 3 
ἀῑδίου καὶ ἀρρήτου εὐδαιμο- 
vias. ᾿Βὰν δ᾽ ἐπιτρέπηται 
τοῖς νεκροῖς τὸ μετέχειν τῶν 
ἐγκοσμίων, θὰ σᾶς παρακο- 
λουθήσω καθ᾽ ὅλον ὑμῶν 
Ν , 

τὸν βίον. 

Χαῖρε, 

Θωμᾶς Ἰεφφερσών. 


Δεκάλογος παραγγελμάτων 
τηρητέων κατὰ τὸν πρα- 
κτικὸν βίον. 

1. Μὴ ἀναβάλλῃς 
τὴν αὔριον ὅ,τι δύνασαι νὰ 
πράξῃς σήμερον. 

2. Μὴ ἐνόχλει ποτὲ ἄλ- 


ώ 
εις 


λον τινὰ δι ὅ,τι μόνος δύ- 
νασαι νὰ πράξης. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


your part. Adore God. 
Reverence and _ cherish 
your parents. Love your 
neighbor as yourself, and 
your country more than 
yourself. Be just. Be 
true. Murmur not at the 
ways of Providence. So 
shall the life into which 
you have entered be the 
portal to one of eternal. 
and ineffable bliss. And — 
if to the dead it is per- 
mitted to care for the 
things of this world, every 
action of your life will be 
under my regard. 


Farewell. 
Thomas Jefferson. 


A Decalogue of Canons 
for Observance in Prac- 
tical Life. 


1. Never put off till to- 
morrow what you can do 
to-day. 

2. Never trouble an- 
other for what you can 
do yourself. 


3. Μὴ δαπάνα τὰ χρή- 
/ \ x \ / 
µατά σου πρὶν ἢ τὰ λάβῃς 
εἰς χεῖράς σου. 

4. Μὴ ἀγόραζε ὅ,τι δὲν 
ειάζεσαι ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ ὅ 
χρειάζεσαι ἐπὶ τῷ λόγω ὅτι 
\ J / 7 / / 
τὸ εὑρίσκεις εὐθηνόν " διότι 
καὶ οὕτω εἶνε πολὺ ἀκριβόν. 

5. Ἣ ἀλαζονεία εἶνέ τι 
χειρότερον τῆς πείνης, τῆς 
δίψης καὶ τοῦ ψύχους. 

0. Οὐδείς ποτε μετανοεῖ 
διότι ἔφαγε παρὰ πολὺ ὀλί- 
γον. : 
7. Οὐδὲν ἑκουσίως γινό- 
μενον φαίνεται βαρύ. 

8. Πόσων θλίψεων πα- 


| ραίτιοι ἐγένοντο ἡμῖν δυσ- 


τυχίαι οὐδέποτε ἐπελθοῦ- 


σαι. 


9. ΛΔάμβανε πᾶν πρᾶγμα 


] πας ® n° 4 , ᾽ A 
| πο TOV ευκολωτάτου αὐτοῦ 


| μέρους. 


10. ᾿Οργιζόμενος µέτρει 
µέχρι τοῦ δέκα πρὶν ἢ λα- 


f / / 4 Pow ve x 
λήσῃς" µέχρι δὲ τοῦ ἑκατὸν 


5. = δ 5. / 
εαν σαι πολὺ ὠρηγισμένος. 


VERBS 


259 


3. Never spend money 
before you have it. 


4. Never buy what you 
do not want because it is 
cheap; it will be dear to 
you. 

5. Pride costs us more 
than hunger, thirst, and 
cold. 

6. We never repent of 
having eaten too little. 


7. Nothing is trouble- 
some that we do willingly. 

8. How much pain have 
cost us the evils which 
have never happened. 


9. Take things always 
by their smooth handle. 


10. When angry count 
ten before you speak; if 
very angry, one hundred. 


VERBS 


θὰ νομίσητε, aor. fut. νομίζω, to think, believe. 
ἐρχόμενον, pres. part. ἔρχομαι, to come. 
γράφων, pres. part. γράφω, to write. 


*” 


260 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


θὰ κλεισθῇ, aor. fut. pass. κλείω, to close, shut. 

δυνηθῆτε, aor. subj. δύναμαι, to be able. 

µελετήσητε, aor. Subj. µελετώ(άω), to study, meditate. 

ἐπιθυμοῦντος, pres. part. ἐπιθυμώίέω), to desire. 

στείλω, aor. subj. στέλλω, to send. 

ἐπιδράσῃ, aor. subj. ἐπιδρώ(άω), to influence. 

καθοδηγήση, aor. subj. καθοδηγώ(έω), to guide. 

µεριμνώ({άω), pres. ind., to be anxious about. 

θὰ ἀρκέσωσι, aor. fut. ἀρκώ[έω), to suffice. 

ἐπιδείξητε, aor. subj. ἐπιδεικνύω, to show. | 

λάτρευε, imp. imperat. λατρεύω, to worship, adore. . 

τίμα, imp. imperat. τιµώ{άω), to honor. 

ἀγάπα, imp. imperat. ἀγαπώ(άω), to love. 

ἔσο, imp. imperat. εἶμαι, to be. 

γόγγυζε, imp. imperat. γογγύζω, to murmur. 

εἰσῆλθες, aor. ind. εἰσέρχομαι, to enter. 

μαι ancient form of the future of εἰμί, to be. 

OAT pres. subj. pass. ἐπιτρέπω, to permit. 

μετέχειν, pres. infin. (verbal: noun), µετέχω, to be con- 
cerned in. 

θὰ παρακολουθήσω, aor. fut. παρακολουθώ(έω), to fol- 
low, attend. 

χαῖρε, imp. imperat. χαίρω, to rejoice, (in ir epee 
farewell. 

ἀναβάλλης, pres. subj. (negative imperat.) ἀναβάλλω, 
to postpone. 

δύνασαι, pres. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

πράξῃς, aor. subj. πράττω, to do. 

ἐνόχλει, imp. imperat. ἐνοχλώ(έω), to trouble, inconven- 
ience. 

δαπάνα, imp. imperat. δαπανώ(άω), to spend. 

λάβῃς, aor. subj. λαμβάνω, to take, obtain, have. 


PRONOUNS 261 


ἀγόραζε, imp. imperat. ἀγοράζω, to buy. 

χρειάζεσαι, pres. ind. χρειάζομαι, to need. 

εὑρίσκεις, pres. ind. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

μετανοεῖ, pres. ind. weravoa(éw), to repent. 

ἔφαγε, 2d aor. ind. τρώγω, to eat. 

γινόμενον, pres. part. γίνομαι, to become, happen. 

φαίνεται, pres. ind. φαίνομαι, to appear. 

ἐγένετο, 2d aor. ind. γίνομαι, to become, happen. 

ἐπελθοῦσαι, aor. part. ἐπέρχομαι, to happen, come upon. 

λάμβανε, imp. imperat. λαμβάνω, to take. 

ὀργιζόμενος, pres. part. mid. dpyifw, to enrage (ὀργίζομαι, 
to be angry). 

µέτρει, imp. imperat. wetpa(éw), to count. 

λαλήσῃς, aor. subj. λαλά(έω), to speak. 

ἦσαι, pres. subj. εἶμαι, to be. 

ὠρηισμένος, perf. part. mid. dpyifw, to enrage. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be written out in the prescribed manner. 


Grammar 


5. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS—Aetkrikal ἀντωνυμίαι 


These are: αὐτός, -ή -ό, this; οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this 
(more emphatic than the preceding); and ἐκεῖνος, -η -ο, 
that. 

Αὐτός, -ή, -ὁ is the same as the third personal pro- 
noun. When used in connection with the first or 
second personal pronoun, it means self; thus: ἐγὼ αὐτός, 
I myself; ὑμεῖς αὐτοί, you yourselves; he himself 
means αὐτὸς ὁ ἴδιος. Ὃ ἴδιος may also be employed 


262 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


with the pronouns of the first and second persons in 
the same sense. ‘O αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό Means “ the 
same.” Αὐτὸς ὁ ἄνθρωπος or ὁ ἄνθρωπος αὐτός, this 
man ; ὁ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπος, the same man. 

Οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο. Distinguish carefully between 
this and the preceding ; αὐτός -ή, -ὁ is accented on the 
final syllable and has the smooth breathing; οὗτος, 
αὕτη, τοῦτο is accented on the first syllable and the 
forms beginning with a vowel take the rough breath- 
ing. The two are practically the same in meaning, 
the second, however, being the more emphatic, and 
being also more μας, employed in the conversa- 
ο language. 


8 SINGULAR PLURAL 
Φ ο/ 5 a 4 αν ην A 
Nom.ovtos αὕτη τοῦτο “ΝΟΠΙ.οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
ν ¥ 
Gen. τούτου ταύτης τούτου Gen. τούτων τούτων τούτων 
Dat. τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ Dat. τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
Acc. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο Acc. τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


Ἐκεῖνος, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο iS regularly declined like an 
adjective of three terminations. . 

When a demonstrative pronoun is used with a sub- 
stantive it may stand before or after it, but the article 
(which can never be omitted) immediately precedes 
the noun; thus: οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος or 6 ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, 
this man; αὐτὸ τὸ παιδίον or τὸ παιδίον αὐτό, this boy; 
ἐκείνη ἡ γυνή OY ἡ γυνὴ ἐκείνη, that woman. 

The particles μέν and δέ with the article are also 
used in a demonstrative sense: ὁ µέν-- ὁ δέ, that one— 
this one, or the one—the other, the former—the latter. 

The English “that,” referring to a substantive just 


PRONOUNS 2638 


mentioned, is expressed in Greek by the article alone, 
thus: τὸ βιβλίον µου καὶ τὸ τῆς ἀδελφῆς µου, my book 
and that of my sister. 

“It” or “they” used as a predicate of a demonstra- 
tive pronoun is not expressed in Greek: τοῦτο εἶναι, 
this is it; οὗτοι εἶναι, these are they. 


6. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS—’Epornparikal ἀντωνυμίαι 


These are τίς, τί or ποῖος, ποία, ποῖον, who, what, 
which; πόσος, -η,-ον, how much or many, how great; 
πότερος, ποτέρα, πότερον, Which of two. The latter be- 
longs to the literary language, and evén there is not 
uncommonly replaced by τίς or ποῖος τῶν δύο or ἐκ 
τῶν δύο. 

All of the interrogative pronouns except τίς are reg- 


ularly declined like adjectives of three terminations. 


SINGULAR . PLURAL 
Nom. τίς τί Nom. τίνες τίνα 
Gen. τίνος τίνος Gen. τίνων τίνων 
Dat. τίνι τίνι Dat. τίσι(ν) τίσι(ν) 
Acc. τίνα τί Ace. τίνας : τίνα 


‘here is but one form for the masculine and femi- 
nine. Note particularly the accent; it is always on 
the first syllable, and remains acute (never grave) in 


_ the monosyllabic forms, even in the middle of a sen- 


| tence. This distinguishes the interrogative from the 


indefinite pronoun of the same form, the latter being 
either enclitic or accented on the final syllable. 

The interrogative pronouns must agree in gender 
and number with the substantive to which they refer ; 


264 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


thus: τίνες or ποῖοι εἶναι αὐτοὶ οἱ κύριοι; who are 
these gentlemen 4 τίνες OF ποῖαι εἶναι αὐταὶ αἱ κυρίαι; 
who are these ladies? τίνα or ποῖα εἶναι αὐτὰ τὰ παιδία; 
who are these children? Τί is, however, often em- 
ployed in conversation before a noun of any gender, in 
the sense of “what sort of a”; it is regarded as a con- 
traction of τίνος εἴδους, of what sort. “In the vernacu- 
lar τί is employed in any gender and either number. 

Tivos εἶναι: means, whose is? to whom belongs *— 
τίνος εἶναι 6 πῖλος οὗτος; Whose is this hat ? 


7. RELATIVE PRoNoUNS— Avaopikal ἀντωνυμίαι 


These are ὁ ὁποῖος, ἡ ὁποία, τὸ ὁποῖον, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ, and 
ὅστις, ἥτις, 6,71, Who, what, which. 

Ὃ ὁποῖος is the form in common use; it is regularly 
declined like an adjective of three terminations, always 
with the article. The vernacular uses the indeclinable 
word ὁποῦ or ποῦ for all cases, genders, and numbers. 
The pronouns ὅς and ὅστις are used in the literary lan- 
cuage, the first more often than the second. 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. ὅς. 7 ὅ Nom. of) - 
Gen. οὗ ἧς οὗ Gen. ov ὧν ὧν ς 
Dat: ο oT οὁ Dat. οἷς αἷς οἷς 
Ace. 6v fw ὃ Ace. ots ads & 


In the ancient language the enclitic particle περ was 
sometimes joined to this pronoun, rendering it more 
emphatic, ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ, but only ἃ few forms, 
practically only the neuters ὅπερ and ἅπερ are used at 
the present day. 


PRONOUNS 265 


Ὅστις is also defective in that only a few forms are 
now in use. It is compounded of ὅς and the indefinite 
pronoun τίς, τί. It is declined as follows, the rarely 
used forms being enclosed in brackets: 


SINGULAR 
Nom. ὅστις ἥτις ὅ,τι 
Gen. οὗτινος [ἧστινος] οὗτινος 
Dat. [drive] [reve] [ᾧτινι] 
Ace. [ὅντινα] [ἥντινα] ὅ,τι 

PLURAL 
Nom. οἵτινες αἵτινες ἅτινα 
Gen. [ὧντινων] [ὡντινων] [ὧντινων] 
Dat. [οἷστισι(ν))Ἅ [αἷστισι(ν)}) [οἷστισι(ν}} 
Ace. [οὕστινα)] [ἅστινας )])  . ἅτινα 


The exception (in the genitive and dative) to the 
rule of accentuation that a circumflex cannot be placed 
over the penultimate syllable is only an apparent one, 
for the second part of the word is the enclitic indefi- 
nite pronoun (see below). The neuter singular has a 
comma (here called diastole, ἡ διαστολή) separating the 
two parts of the word so as to distinguish it from the 
conjunction ὅτι" or the two parts may be simply sepa- 
rated from each other without the diastole, thus: 8 τι. 


8. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS— Adpic rot ἀντωνυμίαι 


The indefinite pronoun τίς, τί, one, a certain, some, 
a few, is declined like the interrogative of the same 
form, but differs from it in accent. 


266 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
Nom. tis τί Nom. τινές τινά 
Gen. τινός τινός Gen. τινῶν τινῶν 
Dat. τινί ᾿ τινΐ Dat. τισήν) τισί(ν) 
Acc. τινά τί Ace. τινάς τινά 


These forms are all enclitic; thus: ἄνθρωπός τις 
ἐκάθητο ἔν τινι καφενείῳ τοῦ Λονδίνου, a man Was 
sitting in a coffee-house in London; ἐὰν ἔλθῃ τις, εἰπέ 
τῳ, ὅτι δὲν δέχομαι ἐπισκέψεις σήμερον, if any one 
comes, say to him that I am not receiving visits to- 
day. If the word begins the sentence, it, of course, 
retains its accent, thus: τινὲς τῶν φίλων µου εἶναι 
ἐνταῦθα, some of my friends are here. The dissyllabic 
forms, however,.as is the rule with all dissyllabie en- 
clitics, retain their accent after a paroxytone word ; 
thus the first of the above sentences might be written : 
ἄνθρωπός τις ἐκάθητο ἐν καφενείῳ᾽ τινὶ τοῦ Λονδίνου. 
Two instances of this exception to the rule of enclities 
occur in the Reading Exercise in this lesson on page 
258. | 

‘O, ἡ, τὸ τάδε, and 6, ἡ, τὸ δεῖνα, such a one, so and 
so; ὁ κύριος δεῖνα, Mr. So-and-so, Mr. What’s-his-name. 
Τάδε is indeclinable, but δεῖνα is sometimes declined as 
follows (always with the article) : 


SINGULAR PLURAL 
e c Ν = A a 
ο, ἡ, τὸ δεῖνα οἱ, αἱ δεῖνες, τὰ δεῖνα 
τοῦ, τῆς, τοῦ δεῖνος τών δείνων 
τῷ, τῇ, τῷ δεῖνι (dative wanting) 


\ \ \ - -“ 
τὸν, τὴν, τὸ δεῖνα τοὺς, τὰς δεῖνας, τὰ δεῖνα 


PRONOUNS 267 


Κανείς, καμμία, κανέν is declined like εἷς, μία, ἕν. It 
means any one, anything; when standing alone in 
answer to a question, no one, none, nothing. In the 
literary language this word is generally replaced by 
τίς, τί (in the positive sense), or by οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, 
or μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν. - 

The neuter form is often replaced in the vernacular 
by τίποτε (τίποτα). thus: θέλετε τίποτε; τίποτε, do you 
wish anything? nothing. Σᾶς εὐχαριστῶ πολύ.--- Τί. 
ποτε, I thank you very much.—Don’t mention it. 

“Something” is also frequently expressed—in sim- 
ple, non-interrogative phrases—by κἄτι or κἄτι τι. 

‘Other indefinite pronouns are: ἕκαστος, ἑκάστη, ἕκα- 
στον (in the conversational language, καθείς, καθεµία, 
καθέν), each, every ; ἑκάτερος, ἑκατέρα, ἑκάτερον, each of 
two; and in the popular speech: κάποιος, κάποια, κά- 
ποιοί»), some one, something; κάµποσος, κάµποση, κά- 
µποσοί(ν), a large number, a good deal. 


Τοιοῦτος, τοιαύτη, τοιοῦτο, Such a One, and τοσοῦτος, 
τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτο, SO much, so great a one, are de- 
clined like οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, but the initial + of the 
second word disappears in the compound. Τέτοιος, 
τέτοια, τέτοιο(ν), Which is regularly declined, is com- 
monly employed in the vernacular instead of τοιοῦτος. 


LESSON TWENTY-SIXTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΒΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ EKTON 


Ἢ θρησκεία 
Religion 


Ἢ θρησκεία ὁρίζεται ὡς κοινωνία μεταξὺ ἑνὸς 
Religion is defined as a communion between one 
λατρεύοντος καὶ ἑτέρου λατρευομένου--- ἡ κοινωνία 
worshipping and another worshipped—the communion — 
ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τοῦ ὄντος TO ὁποῖον πιστεύει ὡς Θεόν. — 
of man withthe being whom he believes inas God. 
Ὑπάρχουσι πολυειδεῖς θρησκεῖαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, αἱ 
There are many kinds of religion in the world, the 
πρωτεύουσαι τῶν ὁποίων εἶναι ὁ Βουδισμός, ἡ θρησκεία 
chief of which are Buddhism, the religion 
τοῦ Κονφουκίου, ὁ Μωαμεθανισµός, ὁ Ἰουδαϊσμὸς καὶ 
of Confucius, Mohammedanism, Judaism, and 
ὁ Χριστιανισμός. Τρεῖς εἶναι at κύριαι διαιρέσεις 
Christianity. Three are the principal divisions. 
τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ, δηλαδὴ ἡ ᾿Ανατολικὴ ᾿Ορθόδοξος 
of Christianity, namely,the Eastern Orthodox 
Ἐκκλησία, ἡ Δυτικὴ ἢ Καθολικὴ Ἐκκλησία καὶ 
Church, the Western or Catholic | Church, and 
αἱ Διαμαρτυρόμεναι Ἐκκλησίαι. . Ὑπάρχουσι πολλαὶ 
the Protestant Churches. There are many 


RELIGION 269 


διαμαρτυρόµεναι ἐκκλησίαι, TOV ὁποίων αἱ κυριώτεραι 
protestant churches, of whichthe_ chief 
εἶναι ἡ Λουθηρανή, ἡ Πρεσβυτεριανή, ἡ Ποιμνιοκρατική, 
are the Lutheran, the Presbyterian, the Congregational, 
ἡ Βαπτιστική, ἡ Μεθοδιστική, ἡ Επισκοπικὴ καὶ 


the Baptist, the Methodist, the Episcopal, and 


. ἡ ᾿Αντιτριαδική. 
the Unitarian. 
Οἱ Χριστιανοὶ εὑρίσκονται κυρίως ἐν Εὐρώπῃη καὶ 
The Christians are found chiefly in Europe and 
᾿Αμερικῇ, πολλοὶ ὅμως τῶν κατοίκων αὐτῶν δὲν 
America, but many of the inhabitants of these 
πιστεύουσιν εἰς τὴν ὕπαρξιν τοῦ Θεοῦ. οἱ τοιοῦτοι 
do not believe in the existence of God; such 
ὀνομάξονται διαφόρως ἀθεῖσταί, ὑλισταί, ἀγνωστικοὶ 
are called variously atheists, materialists, agnostics, 
κτλ. Οἱ ὀπαδοὶ τῆς ᾿Ανατολικῆς Εκκλησίας κατοι- 
etc. The adherents of the Eastern Church ἆναι 
κοῦσιν ἐν ἨἙλλάδι, Ῥωσσία καὶ ἄλλαις χώραις τῆς ava- 
in Greece, Russia, and other countries of East- 
τολικῆς Εὐρώπης. 
ern Europe. 
Είναι πολλαὶ ἑορταὶ εἰς τὸ χριστιανικὸν μηναῖον, 
There are many feasts in the Christian calendar, 
μεταξὺ τῶν ὁποίων εὑρίσκονται τὰ Χριστούγεννα, ἡ 
among which are found Christmas, the 


ἡμέρα τῆς Περιτομῆς, ἡ ὁποία συμπίπτει μετὰ τοῦ 
day of the Circumcision, which coincides with new- 
νέου ἔτους, τὰ Θεοφάνεια, τὸ Πάσχα, ἡ ἡμέρα τῆς 
year’s day, Epiphany, Easter, the day of the 
᾿Αναλήψεως, ἡ Πεντηκοστή, ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Πέτρου καὶ 
Ascension, Whitsunday, the day of Peter and 


270 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Παύλου, = Κοίµησις τῆς Θεοτόκου καὶ 
Paul, the Assumption of the Blessed Virgin, and 
ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Αγίων Πάντων. Εἶναι ἐπίσης καὶ 
the feast of All Saints. There are also — 
πολλαὶ ἡμέραι eis τὰς ὁποίας οἱ ᾿Ὀρθόδοξοι καὶ οἱ 
many days on which the Orthodox and the 
Καθολικοὶ ὀφείλουσι va νηστεύωσιν' τῷ ὄντι, αἱ: 
Catholics must fast; indeed, the 
νηστήσιµοι ἡμέραι εἶναι περισσότεραι ἢ αἱ ἑορταί. 
fast-days are more numerous than the feasts. 
Ἢ µεγάλη νηστεία ἢ Τεσσαρακοστὴ διαρκεῖ ἀπὸ τῆς 
The great fast, or Lent, continues from 
καθαρᾶς Δευτέρας µέχρι tod Πάσχα. Ἢ τελευταία 
Pure Monday until Easter. The last 
ἑβδομὰς τῆς Τεσσαρακοστῆς ὀνομάζεται, Μεγάλη 
week of Lent is named the Great 
Ἑῤβδομάς, αἱ τρεῖς τελευταῖαι ἡμέραι τῆς ὁποίας εἶναι 
Week, the three last days of which are 
ἡ Μεγάλη Πέμπτη, ἡ Μεγάλη Παρασκευὴ καὶ τὸ Μέγα 
Holy Thursday Good Friday and Holy 
Σάββατον. ᾿Αλλαι νηστεῖαι εἶναι προσέτι αἱ παραμοναὶ 
Saturday. Other fasts are ΠΙΟΓΘΟΥΟΥ {1ο vigils 
τῶν μεγάλων ἑορτῶν καὶ ἑκάστη Ἡαρασκευὴ τοῦ 
of the great festivals and every Friday of the 
ἔτους. Εἰς ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας εἶναι ἀπηγορευμένον 
year. On ὕμθϑθ days is forbidden 
τὸ κρέας, καὶ ἐνίοτε δὲν πρέπει νὰ φάγῃ τις wa, 
meat, and sometimes one must not eat eggs, 
ἰχθῦς, γάλα, βούτυρον καὶ ἔλαιον. 
fish, milk, butter, and οἱ!. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 271 


Ἢ Κυριακὴ Προσευχή 
The Lord’s Prayer 


> a 


’ὔ A ε A ἣν 
Πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά 
gov: ἐλθέτω ἡ βασιλεία σου" γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου, 
A a a \ 
ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς: τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιού- 
a3 Le a 7 \ 7 e al \ 2 7 
σιον δὸς ἡμῖν σήμερον: καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰ ὀφειλήματα 
ε “ ς \ ς lal 3 Ps lal 5 / ς lal \ 
ἡμῶν, WS καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν τοῖς ὀφειλέταις ἡμῶν" καὶ 
a \ nN “Ὁ \ 
μὴ εἰσενέγκῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν, ἀλλὰ ρῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ 
Αα ο ¢/ ας ε κ Nie, / 
τοῦ πονηροῦ. "Ότι σοῦ ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία, καὶ ἡ δύναμις, 
\ ς / > \ IA ει: ΄ 
καὶ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ᾽Αμήν. 


The preceding is the version of the Lord’s Prayer 


| which is recited in the public liturgies of the Church ; 


the following is from a Modern Greek version of the 
New Testament, which is, however, not sanctioned by 
the Orthodox Greek clergy. 


Πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἁγιασθήτω τὸ ὄνομά 
σου" ἐλθέτω ἡ βασιλεία σου" γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου, 
ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιού- 
σιον δὸς εἰς ἡμᾶς σήμερον" καὶ συγχώρησον εἰς ἡμᾶς τὰς 
ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν, καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς συγχωροῦμεν εἰς τοὺς 
ἁμαρτάνοντας εἰς ἡμᾶς: καὶ μὴ φέρῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν, 
ἀλλὰ ἐλευθέρωσον ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ διότι σοῦ εἶναι 
ἡ βασιλεία καὶ ἡ δύναμις καὶ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας" 
᾽Αμήν. 


Conversation Exercise 


A ς / / 53 
Πῶς ὡρίσθη ἡ θρησκεία; Είναι ἡ θρησκεία κοινωνία 
ες δν / ie ete f = 
μεταξὺ ἑνὸς λατρεύοντος Kal ἑτέρου λατρευοµένου; Ἐλναι 
\ / / \ a ε val 
αὐτὴ κοινωνία ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τοῦ ὄντος TO ὁποῖον πισ- 


‘Tt. 


272 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


τεύει ὡς Θεόν; Ὑπάρχουσι πολυειδεῖς θρησκεῖαι ἐν τῷ 
κόσμῳ; Τίνες εἶναι αἱ πρωτεύουσαι θρησκεῖαι ἐν τῷ κὀ- 
σμῳ; Τίνες εἶναι αἱ κύριαι διαιρέσεις τοῦ X piotreapen ee ; 
Εἰ ρχουσ πολλαὶ διαμαρτυρόµεναι ἐκκλησίαι; Πόσαι 


εἶναι αἱ  διαμαρτυρόμεναι ἐκκλησίαι; δὲν γνωρίζω. λέγου- 
σιν ὅτι εἶναι μέχρι' διακοσίων. Ἠϊπατέ μοι τὰ ὀνόματα 


τῶν κυριωτέρων διαμαρτυρομένων ἐκκλησιῶν. Τοῦ εὑρί. 
\ oe 
σκονται κυρίως οἱ Χριστιανοί; Ὑπάρχουσι μεταξὺ τῶν 
an \ 
κατοίκων τῆς Εὐρώπης μὴ πιστεύοντες” εἰς τὴν ὕπαρξιν 
τοῦ Θεοῦ; Iles ὀνομάζονται οἱ τοιοῦτοι; Ποῦ κατοικοῦ- 
fa fal / φὰ 
σιν οἱ ὀπαδοὶ τῆς ᾿Ανατολικῆς ᾿Ορθοδόξου Ἐκκλησίας ; 
3 7] nA \ > \ ” λ ee Me! / / 
Ἀρχίζουσι τοῦτο τὸ οὐσιαστικὸν ὄνομα καὶ τὰ ἐπίθετά του 
μὲ κεφαλαῖα γράμματα ;* ναί, πρέπει νὰ ἀρχίζωσιν καὶ 
τὰ τρία μὲ κεφαλαῖα γράμματα." Ποῦ κατοικοῦσιν οἱ 
πλεῖστοι" τῶν Καθολικῶν; οἱ ἸΚαθολικοὶ κατοικοῦσι 
NG 5 - / Ν ~ 2 / 6 id / 
κυρίως ἐν τῇ νοτίῳ καὶ δυτικῇ Βὐρώπῃ. Ἐὑρίσκονται 
ἐπίσης καὶ πολλοὶ Κάαθολικοὶ ἐν ᾿Αμερικῃ; Εἶναι Καθο- 
λικοὶ οἱ κάτοικοι τῆς νοτίου καὶ κεντρώας ᾽Αμερικῆς ;7 
Δὲν κατοικοῦσι πολλοὶ Διαμαρτυρόμενοι ἐν τῇ abate 
η, δηλαδὴ ἐν ταῖς Ἠνωμέναις Πολιτείαις καὶ τώ 
Καναδᾶ ;* 
κά / ε \ 3 \ \ 
Ties εἶναι αἱ κυριώτεραι ἑορταὶ εἰς τὸ χριστιανικὸν 
μηναῖον; Μὲ ποίαν ἡμέραν συμπίπτει ἡ ἑορτὴ τῆς Περι: 
τομῆς; ἨΠοία εἶναι ἡ σημασία τῆς λέξεως" Easter εἰς 
\ ς / ἴω 5 / 2 \ 
την Ἠλληνικήν; ἸΠοῖαι εἶναι περισσοτεραι εἰς TO 
a“ 3 rn / 
χριστιανικὸν μηναῖον, αἱ ἑορταὶ ἢ αἱ νηστεῖαι; Πότε 
i / 
ἄρχεται ἡ Τεσσαρακοστὴ eis τὴν Ελληνικὴν ᾿Ορθόδοξον 


1 Upwards of. 2 Disbelievers. ®Do this substantive (noun) and 
its adjectives begin with capital letters ? + Yes, all three must begin 
with capital letters. >The most. 6 Southern and Western Europe. 
7 Southern and Central America. *In North America, that is to say, in 
the United States and Canada. * What is the meaning of the word ὃ 


READING EXERCISE 273 


Ἐκκλησίαν; Πῶς ὀνομάζεται ἡ τελευταία ἑβδομὰς τῆς 
μεγάλης Τεσσαρακοστῆς ;' 
Ash Wednesday ; δηλοῖ" τὴν Καθαρὰν Τετάρτην. Εἶναι 


/ / / an 
προσέτι νηστήσιµοι ἡμέραι καὶ αἱ παραμοναὶ τῶν μεγάλων 


/ 9 ς / an 
Ποία εἶναι ἡ σημασία τοῦ 


ec - 5 b] 7 / \ ς / Ἁ 
εορτών; Kiva ἐπίσης νηστεία καὶ ἑκάστη Ἱαρασκευὴ 
τοῦ ἔτους; Τί εἶναι ος μου εἰς ταύτας τὰς ἡμέ- 
pas; Ἀΐναι ἐπιτετραμμένον εἰς τὰς νηστείας νὰ ea 
τις Od, ἰχθῦς, -- το το, καὶ ἔλαιον ; 9 Εἶναι ὁ κα- 
νὼν τῆς νηστείας αὐστηρότερος" εἰς τὴν ᾿Ανατολικὴν ἢ 
εἰς τὴν Δυτικὴν Εκκλησίαν; Τίς εἶναι ἡ κεφαλὴ τῆς 
Δυτικῆς Εκκλησίας; ἡ κεφαλὴ τῆς Καθολικῆς Ἐκκλη- 

/ 95 te 5 / / Cee A > / / 
σίας εἶναι ὁ Ἠπίσκοπος Ῥώμης ὁ ὁποῖος ὀνομάζεται Πά- 


πας. 


‘The great Lent as distinguished from the Advent fast. 
* Permitted, perf. part. pass. of ἐπιτρέπω. 
® Pope. 


the Head of the Western Church ? 


2Tt means. , 


4 More severe. 5 Who is 


Reading Exercise 


Ἢ προφορὰ τῆς ἑλληνικῆς 
γλώσσης.“ 

Πρὸ μικροῦ, εἰς ἐπήκοον 
τῆς Φιλολογικῆς Εταιρίας, 
καθηγητής τις καὶ δεινὸς 
ὁμηριστὴς ἐποιήσατο σπου- 
δαίαν διάλεξιν περὶ τῆς 
ἑλληνικῆς προφορᾶς, δια- 
τρίψας ἰδίως εἰς τὸ πολυ- 
θρύλητον περὶ τοῦ λοιμοῦ 
χωρίον τοὺ Θουκυδίδου. 


s a > 25 
"Ἐκ τῆς “'᾿Ατλαντίδος, ἀδείᾳ 


τοῦ κ. Σ. I. Ἑλαστοῦ. 
18 


The Pronunciation of the 
Greek Language.* 


Recently, before the 
Philological Society, a 
certain professor and able 
Homerist delivered a lect- 
ure on the pronunciation 
of Greek, dwelling espe- 
cially on the famous pas- 
sage of Thucydides: con- 
cerning the plague. ‘The 


* From “ Atlantis,” with permis- 
sion of 8. J. Vlasto, Esq. 


274 


(Ἢ περὶ τοῦ λοιμοῦ καὶ 
λιμοῦ ἱστορία παρὰ Θου- 
/ 9 > a οϱ 
κυδίδη, εἶπεν, ἀναιρεῖ ὅλως 
\ / ὩΨ ς Ν x 
τὴν θεωρίαν ὅτι ἡ κατὰ τοὺς 
νεωτέρους ἕλληνας ἐκφώνη- 
σις τῶν φωνηέντων ἦτο ἡ 
αὐτὴ καὶ ἐν τοῖς ἀρχαίοις 

3 η 
χρόνοι». ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἶναι παρά- 
δοξον ὅτι οἱ ὑπέρμαχοι καὶ 

an e A Ἂς, A > 
τῆς EXANVLKNS και τῆς ἀγ- 
A / 3 A 
γλικῆς θεωρίας ἐπικαλοῦν- 
ται ὑπὲρ ἑαυτῶν τὸ θουκυ- 
δίδειον χωρίον. Ti δὲ λέγει 
ὁ Θουκυδίδης; Κατὰ τοὺς 
χρόνους τοῦ λοιμοῦ ἐν ᾿Αθή- 
ναις, οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ἀνεμι- 
µνήσκοντο ἔπους, ἀδομένου 
2 \ A an > a ς 
ἐπὶ τῆς παιδικῆς αὐτῶν ἡλι- 
/ 6 Ἐ δὲ - - κα 
κίας. ν δὲ τῷ κακῷ οἷα 
ηλ 
εἰκὸς ἀνεμνήσθησαν καὶ 
A A , 
τοῦδε τοῦ ἔπους, φάσκοντες 
/ 
οἱ πρεσβύτεροι πάλαι ἄδε- 
σθαι' ἥξει Δωριακὸς 
/ \ \ 
TONEMOS καὶ λοιμος 
(ld a) 3 = Ἢ my \ 
ἅμ᾽ αὐτῷ. γένετο μὲν 
οὖν ἔρις τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 
\ \ 5 / 3 
μὴ λοιμὸν ὠνομάσθαι ἐν 
τῷ ἔπει ὑπὸ τῶν παλαιῶν, 
ἀλλὰ λιμόν: ἐνίκησε δὲ ἐπὶ 
na , Ἁ 
τοῦ παρόντος εἰκότως λοιμὸν 
aS Fy ς Ν ” 
εἰρῆσθαι: οἱ γὰρ ἄνθρωποι 
ἃ \ / 
πρὸς ἃ ἔπασχον τὴν μνήμην 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


account in Thucydides con- 
cerning λοιμός and λιμός, 
he said, “overthrows en- 
tirely the theory that the 
pronunciation of the vow- 
els according to the mod- 
ern Greeks was the same 
as in ancient times. But 
it is singular that the par- 
tisans both of the Greek 
and of the English theory 
invoke in their own favor 
the Thucydidean extract. 
Now what does Thucyd- 
ides say? At the time 
of the plague in Athens, 
the elders recalled a say- 
ing current in their youth: 
‘In their misery, as was 
natural, they remembered | 
also this verse, the old 
men saying that it had 
been uttered long ago: A 
Dorian war shall come, 
and plague along with τέ. 
Now there was a dispute 
among the men that it 
was not called plaque 
(λοιμός) in the verse by 
the ancients, but famine 
(λιμός); the opinion, how- 
ever, at the present time 


READING EXERCISE 


> A Xx / 9 / 
ἐποιοῦντο" ἢν δέ γε οἶμαί 
ποτε ἄλλος πόλεμος κατα- 
λάβῃ Δωρικὸς τοῦδε ὕστε- 
ρος καὶ ξυμβὴ γενέσθαι λι- 
μόν, κατὰ τὸ εἰκὸς οὕτως 
ἄσονται. “Ex τοῦ χωρίου 
6 
/ / 
τούτου γίνεται ἐμφανές, ὅτι 
ἂν αἱ δύο αὗται λέξεις ἐξε- 
Φωνοῦντο κατὰ «τὸν αὐτὸν 
/ \ 3 / 

τρόπον καὶ ἀπαραλλάκτως, 
δὲν ἦτο δυνατὸν νὰ ἄδηται 
κ A -“ 
ο στίχος μετὰ τῆς μιᾶς 
μᾶλλον ἢ μετὰ τῆς ἄλλης 
λέξεως. 
”/ A 
ἔργοις καὶ "Ἠμέραις τοῦ 


./ ᾿Ὶ A 
Έπειτα ἐν τοῖς 


ε 4 3 ~ / 
Ἡσιόδου ἀπαντᾷ στίχος, 
ἔνθα ὁ Ζεὺς λέγεται κατα- 
πέμψας “λιμὸν καὶ λοιμόν". 
γελοία δὲ θὰ ἦτο ἡ ὑπόθε- 
Ὁ > / e / 
σις OTL ἀμφότεραι αἱ λέ- 
ἕξεις προεφέροντο leemon.”’ 


Ταῦτα ὁ διαπρεπὴς ὁμηρι- 
στής"' ἀλλ᾽ εἶναι πρόδηλον 
ὅτι τὸ ζήτημα δὲν ἐτέθη 
ὀρθῶς. Οὐδεὶς ἰσχυρίζεται 


ασ ε ο 
ὅτι οἱ νῦν ἕλληνες προφέ- 


275 


prevailed naturally that 
plague had been said; for 
the men made the account 
to agree with what they 
were suffering. But, I 
suppose, if another Dorian 
war ever come upon them 
after this, and a famine 
happen to exist, in all 
probability they will say 
the verse accordingly.’ 
From this extract it is 
evident that if the two 
words were pronounced in 
the same way and exactly 
alike it was not possible 
for the line to be uttered 
with the one more than 
with the other word. 
Then in the ‘Works and 
Days’ of Hesiod there oc- 
curs a line where Jupiter 
is said to be sending down 
famine and plague; the 
supposition would be ridic- 
ulous that both the words 
were pronounced leemon.” 
Thus far the famous Ho- 
merist; but it is evident 
that the question has not 
been presented correctly. 
No one holds that the 


276 


\ ’ a) / 
ρουσι τὰ ἀρχαῖα γράμματα 
\ \ / > 
καὶ τοὺς φθόγγους ἀπαραλ- 
/ “ ς \ 
λάκτως ὅπως οἱ παλαιοῦ 
᾿Αττικοί: ὅτι εἰς τὴν ἐκφώ- 
νησιν ἐπῆλθέ τις φθορά, εἷ- 
> / ” 
ναι ἀναμφισβήτητον, ἄλλως 
Ν / 5 7. 3 
τε καὶ διότι οὐδέποτε οὐδα- 
μοῦ ἐν οὐδεμιᾷ γλώσσῃ διε- 
φυλάχθη καθ᾽ ὅλα ἀναλ- 
λοίωτος καὶ ἀλώβητος ἡ 
ἐκφώνησις τῶν φθόγγων. 
Ἔκ τοῦ προμνημονευθέντος 
χωρίου συνάγεται ὅπως δή- 
ποτε ὅτι ἡ κατὰ τὸ ἐρασμι- 
i A 
κὸν σύστημα προφορὰ τοῦ 
λοιμὸς (δηλαδὴ λοϊμὸς) 
εἶναι ἀστήρικτος, καὶ ὅτι, 
ὡς παρετήρησεν ἤδη πρὸ 
ἑξήκοντα πέντε καὶ περι- 
/ πὶ ns ς 2 / Ν 
πλέον ἐτῶν ὁ OlKovopos, τὸ 
λοιμὸς καὶ λιμὸς τοῦ 
Θουκυδίδου συμμαχεῖ μᾶλ- 
λὸν πρὸς τὴν ἡμετέραν ἢ 
τὴν ἐρασμικὴν προφοράν' 
Βεβαίως αἱ δύο αὗται λέξεις 
δὲν ἦσαν πάντη τοὐτόφω- 
νοι" ἦσαν ὅμως ἐξ ἅπαντος 
/ 

ὁμοιοφωνόταται πρὸς ἀλλή- 
λας" εἰ δὲ μή, δὲν ἠδύναντο 
οἱ διαφερόμενοι νὰ ἀνταλ- 
λάξωσιν αὐτὰς εὐκόλως τὴν 


µίαν πρὸς τὴν ἄλλην, ἐκ- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


present Greeks pronounce 
the ancient letters and 
diphthongs exactly in the 
same way as the ancient 
Attics; that some corrup- 
tion has come into the 
pronunciation is not to be 
doubted, for, besides, never 
any where in any language 
has the pronunciation of 
the sounds been preserved 
in all respects unchanged 
and uncorrupted. From 
the above-cited passage it 
is at any rate to be inferred 
that the pronunciation of 
λοιμός according to the 
Erasmian system (that is 
to say, lowumos) 1s unsup- 
ported, and that, as Oiko- 
nomos remarked sixty-five 
years and more ago, the 
λοιμός and λιμός of Thu- 
cydides argues more 
strongly in favor of our 
pronunciation than of the 
Erasmian. Certainly these 
two words were not exact- 
ly of the same sound ; but 
they were decidedly very 
much alike in sound to 
each other; otherwise the 


VERBS 


λαμβάνοντες ἑκάτεροι τὴν 
£ / ᾽ \ α ς ᾿ ς 

ετεραν ἀντὶ τῆς ἑτέρας. Os 
προσεπάγεται ὁ προμνημο- 
νευθεὶς σοφώτατος ἕλλην, 
ζ \ lal / / 

ἡ διαφορὰ τῶν δύο τούτων 


ει / Ν \ 
ὀνομάτων, λοιμὸς καὶ λι- 


µός, ἦτο στοιχείων, οὐχὶ 
συλλαβῶν διαφορά" τὸ οι 
στοιχεῖον διέφερε τοῦ ικατὰ 
\ > / 4 \ \ 
τὴν ἐκφώνησιν ὅσον καὶ τὸ 
Ύ τοῦ 1+ ἂν δὲ τὸ λοιμὸς 
προεφέρετο λοϊμός, θὰ διέ- 
φερε παραπολὺ τοῦ λιμός, 
/ 
καὶ τότε οὔτε ἀμφιβολία 
+ 4 \ 3 a \ 
οὔτε ἔρις θὰ ἐγεννᾶτο περὶ 
a / “ Ul / 
τῆς σημασίας τῶν δύο λέ- 
ξεων. Ὥστε αἱ ἐναντιολο- 
γίαι τοῦ καθηγητοῦ κατα- 
πίπτουσιν ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. 


277 


disputants had not been 
able to change them one 
for the other, each under- 
standing the one instead 
ofthe other. As the above- 
mentioned most learned 
Greek adds, the difference 
in these two words was a 
difference of letters, not 
of syllables; the character 
οι differed from ὁ in sound 
just as T from I; but if 
λοιμός Were pronounced 
lovmos, it would differ very 
greatly from λιμός, and 
then there would have aris- 
en no doubt and no dispute 
concerning the meaning of 
the two words. Thus the 
adverse arguments of the 
professor fall of themselves. 


VERBS 


ἐποιήσατο, aor. ind. mid. (ancient form), ποιῶέω), to 


do, make. 


διατρίψας, aor. part. διατρίβω, to dwell, stay. 
εἶπε, 2d aor. ind. λέγω, to say. 


ἀναιρεῖ, pres. ind. ἀναιρῶ(έω), to part with, abolish. 


ἐπικαλοῦνται, pres. ind. ἐπικαλοῦμαι, to invoke, quote. 
ἀνεμιμνήσκοντο, imp. ind. mid. ἀναμιμνήσκω, to re- 


member. 


adouévov, pres. part. pass. dda, to sing, say. 


278 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


(The following fourteen are the ancient forms found 
in the extract from Thucydides; many of them, it will 
be seen, are the same as the modern forms.) 


ἀνεμνήσθησαν, aor. mid. ἀναμιμνήσκω, to remember. 
φάσκοντες, pres. part. φημί, to say. 

ἄδεσθαι, aor. inf. pass. ἄδω, to sing, say. 

ἥξει, fut. ἥκω, to arrive, come. 

ὠνομάσθαι, aor. inf. pass. ὀνομάζω, to name, call. 
ἐνίκησε, aor. ind. νικῶ(άω), to conquer, prevail. 
εἰρῆσθαι, aor. inf. pass. λέγω, to say. 

ἔπασχον, imp. ind. πάσχω, to suffer. 

ἐποιοῦντο, imp. ind. ποιῶ(έω), to do, make. 

οἶμαι (οἴομαι), pres. ind., to suppose. 

καταλάβῃ, aor. subj. καταλαμβάνω, to come upon, befall: 
ξυμβῇ, aor. subj. ξυμβαίνω (συμβαίνω), to coincide. 
γενέσθαι, pres. inf. γίγνομαι, to become, be. 

ἄσονται, fut. mid. ἄδω, to sing, say. 


ἐξεφωνοῦντο, imp. ind. pass. ἐκφωνῶ(έω), to pronounce. — 

ἄδηται, aor. subj. pass. ἄδω, to sing, say. 

ἀπαντᾷ, pres. ind. ἀπαντώκάω), to meet, occur. 

καταπέµψας, aor. part. καταπέµπω, to send down 

προεφέροντο, imp. ind. pass. προφέρω, to pronounce. 

ἐτέθη, aor. ind. pass. θέτω, to place. 

ἰσχυρίζεται, pres. ind. ἰσχυρίζομαι, to assert. 

ἐπῆλθε, aor. ind. ἐπέρχομαι, to come upon, happen. 

διεφυλάχθη, aor. ind. pass. διαφυλάττω, to preserve. 

προμνηµονευθέντος, aor. part. pass. προμνημονεύω, to cite 
before. 

συνάγεται, pres. ind. pass. συνάγω, to infer. Ξ 

παρετήρησε, aor. ind. παρατηρά{έω). to remark. 

συμμαχεῖ, pres. ind. cuppayd(éw), to be allied with. 


PREPOSITIONS 279 


διαφερόμενοι, pres. part. mid. διαφέρω, to differ, (middle) 
to quarrel. 

ἀνταλλάξωσι, aor. subj. ἀνταλλάσσω, to exchange. 

ἐκλαμβάνοντες, pres. part. ἐκλαμβάνω, to understand. 

προσεπάγεται, pres. ind. mid. προσεπάγω, to add. 

διέφερε, imp. ind. διαφέρω, to differ. 

θὰ ἐγεννᾶτο, condit. pass. γεννώ(άω), to bear, bring forth. 

καταπίπτουσι, pres. ind. καταπίπτω, to fall down. 


Grammar 


PREPOSITIONS—ai προθέσεις 


There are eighteen prepositions, governing some one, 
some two, and some three cases; those governing 


| more than one case have different meanings with the 


different cases. They usually govern the same case in 
_ the modern form of the language that they do in the 
ancient, although not invariably. 


(A.) Governing tHE (ΕΝΙΤΙΝΕ, ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ or ἐξ, 
πρό--- 
1. ᾽Αντί, instead of, for, against : 
ἔρχομαι ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ µου, I come instead of my 
brother ; 
ἠκούσατε ὅτι ἐρρέθη" οφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ καὶ 
ὀδόντα ἀντὶ ὀδόντος, ye have heard that it hath 
been said, an eye for an eye and a tooth for a 
tooth (Matt. v. 38); 
ἠγόρασα τὸ βιβλίον ἀντὶ δώδεκα δραχμῶν, 1 bought the 
book for twelve drachmas; 


* An archaic form of the aor. pass. of λέγω---ἐλέχθη is the form in 


common use, although the other is still encountered occasionally. 


280 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἀντὶ va σιωπήση ἐψεύσθη, instead of keeping silent, he 
told a lie. 
9. ᾿Από, from (of time or place), for,since: 
ἔφυγεν ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεως, he fled from the city ; 
ἀπὸ καιροῦ εἰς καιρόν, from time to time; 
κατοικῶ ἐνταῦθα ἀπὸ τριών ἑβδομάδων, 1 have lived here 
for three weeks. 
ἀπό is followed in the vernacular, and not infre- 
quently also in the cultivated language, by the accusa- 
tive. It is also used in the vernacular to express a 
casual relation (instead of ἐκ, ἐξ), thus: ἀπέθανεν ἀπὸ. 
πεῖναν, he died of starvation. | 


3. Ἐκ (ἐξ before a word with initial vowel), of, out 
of, from: 
ἦχθον ἐκ (or ἐξῆλθον) τῆς οἰκίας, 1 came out of the 
house; 
ἀπέθανεν ἐκ φθίσεως, he died of consumption ; 
γνωρίζω αὐτὸν ἐξ ὄψεως, I know him by sight. 
4. IIpo, before (of time or place), ago: 
ἦλθε πρὸ ἑνὸς ἔτους, he came a year ago; 
πρὸ μεσημβρίας, before noon, antemeridian (7. μ., A. M.) 5 
τοῦτο συνέβη πρὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν µου, this happened be- 
fore my eyes. ! 
The ο of πρό is ποῦ elided before a word beginning 
with a vowel; that of ἀπό is so elided. 
(B.) Governtne THE Dative, ἐν, σύν--- 
5. Ἔν, in (of time or place): 
τοῦτο συνέβη ἐν τῇ νεότητί µου, this happened in my 
youth ; 


PREPOSITIONS 281 


εὑρίσκεται ἐν ἐσχάτῃ ἀνάγκῃ, he is in extreme want; 
κατοικεῖ ἐν ᾿Αθήναις, he lives in Athens. 


ἐν is usually replaced by εἰς with the accusative. 
6. Σύν, with: 


ἀνεχώρησε σὺν γυναιξὶ καὶ τέκνοις, he went away with 
| wife and children. 

| σύν is employed only very rarely and in the most 
| elevated style, and then usually in such expressions as 
| σὺν Θεῷ, with God’s help. It is replaced generally 
by µετά with the genitive or (more commonly) by pé 
| with the accusative. 


(C.) Governine THE AccusATIvE, dvd, εἰς, ué— 


| 7. Ανά, up, upon, throughout, by : 

| ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν Εὐρώπην, throughout all Europe ; 

| οἳ στρατιῶται ἐβάδιζον ἀνὰ δύο, the soldiers marched 

| two by two (by twos); 

| ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, each day, daily. 

| 8. Eis, at, in, to, towards: 

μένω εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, I remain in the house; 

᾿πηγαίνω εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, I go into the church; 

µεταφράζω τὸ ἄρθρον εἰς τὴν Ἑλληνικήν, I am translat- 
ing the article into Greek ; 

πηγαίνω εἰς τὸν θεῖόν µου, I am going to my uncle; 

ἦτο εἰς τοῦ βιβλιοπώλου, he was at the bookseller’s 
(shop); in this case εἰς appears to govern the genl- 


tive, but it really governs τὸ κατάστημα (the shop), 
understood. 


9. Μέ, the vernacular form, in very common use, of 
µετά, With: 


νο τὸ a ἔτει ελ” aL ) 
| ο ών ος 
4 Sd 


282 | MODERN GREEK 


ὁ πατὴρ μὲ τὰ τέκνα του, the father wit. 1} 
μὲ ὅλον τὸν πλοῦτόν σας δὲν εἶσθε εὐτυχής, with 
EUS you are not hapPYs ; 


he is προ, 


| LESSON TWENTY-SEVENTH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ ΕΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ EBAOMON 


Τὰ φαγητά 
Meals 
| Τρώγομεν διάφορα φαγητὰ κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν " ὀνομά- 
| Weeat several meals in the ἆαγ; these 


| ζονται δὲ πρόγευμα, γεῦμα καὶ δεῖπνον. Τὸ κυριώτερον 
| are breakfast, dinner, and supper. The principal 
| 

| 

| 


Φαγητὸν τῆς ἡμέρας εἶναι τὸ γεῦμα. Οἱ  κάτοι- 


meal ofthe day ἰ8 the dinner. The inhabi- 


a ή / / / \ e / 
κοι τῶν πόλεων γευματίζουσι συνήθως το ἐεσπέρας, 


| tants of the cities dine usually in the evening, 
| τρώγοντες TO ἄριστον περὶ μεσημβρίαν. Ἰολλάκις 
| eating theluncheon about noon. Often 

| 


δειπνοῦσιν ἀργὰ τὸ ἑσπέρας μετὰ τὸ θέατρον, καὶ 
|(people) sup late in the evening after the theatre, and 
πολλοὶ ἔχουσι τὴν συνήθειαν νὰ τρώγωσι πρόχειρον 
many .bave the habit of eating a 
ἑστίαμα καὶ va λαμβάνωσι ποτήριον οἴνου, οὐισκίου 
snack and οὗ taking  aglass of wine, whiskey, 
| ζύθου ὀλίγον πρὶν κατακλιθῶσιν. 

or beer a little before going to bed. 

| To πρόγευμα πρέπει va ἦναι ἐλαφρόν τι φαγητὸν 
The breakfast should be alight meal 


. 


284 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


/ 2 / / of. “ x 
συνιστάµενον EK κυπέλλου καφε, τεῖου, σοκολατας ἢ 
consisting of (a) cup of coffee, tea, chocolate, or 
κακάου, μὲ ἀρτίδιον καὶ βούτυρον ἢ μερικὰ τεμάχια 
cocoa, witha Το. and butter or afew _ slices 
/ ./ a \ / 
πεφρυγµένου ἄρτου (ὀρυγανιᾶς). Πρὸς τούτοις 
of toasted bread (toast). To this 
ἐνίοτε προστίθεται τμῆμα καπνιστοῦ κρέατος, χοι- 
sometimes is added a rasher of smoked meat (bacon), 
ροµέρι μὲ αὐγὰ τηγανιστά, μίαν κοτολέτταν ἢ μπιφτέκι. 
ham and fried eggs, a cutlet, or beefsteak. 
‘Oud (αὐγὰ) μαγειρεύονται διαφόρως: Φὰ βραστὰ (wa 
Eggs are prepared in different ways; boiled eggs | 
\ 4 \ ὟΝ ca) Σ +X Ν xX 
πολὺ βεβρασμένα καὶ wa μελᾶτα), WA KTUTNTA ἢ 
(hard boiled and soft boiled), scrambled eggs, or. 
a 53 7 7 Ἂς / Δ 
σφογγᾶτον. ᾿Αρχίζουσι συνήθως τὸ πρόγευμα μὲ 
omelet. They begin usually the breakfast with 
ὀπωρικόν' μῆλα, ἀπίδια, ροδάκινα, πορτοκάλλια, σταφυλὰς 
fruit: apples, pears, peaches, oranges, grapes, 
ἢ μόρα, τοιαῦτα ὁποῖα τὰ χαμαικέρασα, βατόμουρα, 


and berries, such as strawberries, blackberries, 
κορινθιακὰς σταφίδας, κτλ’ Οἱ ἼΑηγλοι ἀγαπῶσι νὰ 


currants, etc. The English like ἴο 
τρώγωσι κατὰ τὸ τέλος τοῦ προγεύµατος ὀλίγον γλυκὸν 
eat at the end of the breakfast ἃ little jam 
ἢ  παλάθην. 
or marmalade. 
Οἱ τρώγοντες ὀλίγον εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα λαμβάνουσι 
Those who eat little at breakfast take 
κἄτι τι θρεπτικώτερον εἰς τὸ ἄριστον * αὐτὸ τὸ φαγητὸν 
something more substantial at lunch ; this meal, 
ὅμως εἶναι συνήθως σχετικῶς ἐλαφρόν: διὰ τοὺς 
however, ἰδ usually rather light; for the 


MEALS 285 


πλείστους ἀρκεῖ τεμάχιον ψυχροῦ κρέατος ἢ βουτυρό- 
most people suffices a slice of cold meat or ἃ sand- 
ψωμογ. 
wich. 
To γεῦμα ἀποτελεῖται συνήθως ἐκ μερικῶν 
The dinner Ἱἱδτηαάο πρ usually οὗ — several 
παραθεµάτων. Kart’ ἀρχὰς συμποσίου τινός, π.χ. (παρα- 
courses. Atthebeginningofa banquet, e.g. (for 
δείγματος χάριν), φέρουσιν ὠμὰ ὄστρεα ἢ ἄλλα 
example), they bring raw oysters or other 
ὀστρακόδερμα, ἀναλόγως τῆς ὥρας τοῦ ἔτους, καὶ τοῦτο 
shell fish, according to the season, and this 


\ / 9 a ς \ 7 \ fa) 
| τὸ παράθεµα ἀκολουθεῖται ὑπὸ εἴδους τινὸς ζωμοῦ. 


course is followed by soupofsome_ kind. 


| Πρὸς τούτοις τρώγομεν ἰχθῦς μὲ γεώμηλα. Μεταξὺ 


| After this weeat fish with potatoes. Among 
| τῶν καλλίστων ἰχθύων εἶναι ὁ σωλοµός, ὁ τρώκτης, 


‘the best fish are — salmon, trout, 
ὁ σκόµβρος, ἡ μουρούνα, ἡ γλῶσσα, ὁ ρόμβος, ἡ σμαρὶς 
' mackerel, codfish, sole, turbot, smelts, 
| Kal ἡ τρίγλη. Οἱ ἀστακοί, οἱ καρκῖνοι καὶ αἱ καρίδες 
ἃ πα mullet. Lobsters, crabs, and shrimps 
[εἶναι πολὺ εὔχυμο. "Ad οὗ ἐτελειώσαμεν τὸ 
are very tasty. After we have finished this 


παράθεµα τοῦτο φέρουσι προβείας φλογίδας (μπριξόλες), 


course they bring mutton chops, 


νεφρά, πάγκρεας, µοσχοκεφάλι, μυελὸν τηγανιστόν, 
ΓΚ14πΠ6Υγ5, sweetbread, calf’s head, . fried brains, 
| ἀρτόκρεας ἢ τὰ παρόμοια, μὲ λάχανα. Μετὰ ταῦτα 
vol-au-vent, orthe like, with vegetables. After that 
παραθέτουσι πουλάμια ἢ κυνήγιον μὲ σαλάταν. 
they serve chicken or game _ with κνα]αά. 


, 


286 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Els τὸ τράγημα, ἢ ἐπιδόρπιον, τρώγοµεν γλυκύσματα 
At the sweet course, or dessert, weeat sweets of 
διαφόρων εἰδῶν, ὀπωρικὰ καὶ τυρόν. Τελειόνομεν τὸ 
various kinds, fruit, and cheese. We finish the 
/ \ \ / \ Υ A 
συμπόσιον μὲ μικρὸν κύπελλον καφὲ καὶ μυρωδᾶτου 
banquet with a small cup of coffeeand Ἠα- 

/ \ \ A ς BA / / 
ποτόν. Μετὰ τὸ γεῦμα οἱ ἄνδρες συνήθως. καπνίζουσι 
ueur. After the dinner the men usually smoke 
ποῦρα ἢ σιγαρέττα, καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες Φλυαροῦσιν. 
cigars or cigarettes, and the women ΡΌΒΒΙΡ. 


Conversation Exercise 


/ 1 , \ \ ἘΞ ΤΩ A 3 : 
Ποσάκις' τρώγει τις κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν; Llota εἶναι 
\ / " / A 9 / \ / 
τὰ φαγητά; Ἐϊπετέ μοι πῶς ὀνομάζεται τὸ κυριώτατον 
φαγητὸν τῆς ἡμέρας. Πότε γευματίζουσιν οἱ κάτοικοι 
ο / ΄ / / Ate / 
τῶν πόλεων; Tes γευµατίζουσι συνήθως τὸ ἑσπέρας ; 
A Ἂς 
Tives δειπνοῦσιν ἀργὰ τὸ ἑσπέρας μετὰ τὸ θέατρον ; οἱ 
κάτοικοι τῶν πόλεων. Ποίαν συνήθειαν ἔχουσι πολλοὶ 
Bd \ » \ / \ / 
ἄνθρωποι; πολλοὶ ἔχουσι την συνήθειαν νὰ τρὠγωσι 
πρόχειρον ἑστίαμα καὶ νὰ λαμβάνωσι ποτήριον οἴνου, 
οὐισκίου ἢ ζύθου ὀλίγον πρὶν κατακλιθῶσιν. HKivas αὕτη 
καλὴ συνήθεια; τοῦτο ἐξαρτᾶται κατὰ μέγα μέρος ἐκ τῆς 
Αα \ / 
ἀτομικῆς γνώμης " ἐὰν τρώγῃ καὶ πίνῃ τις μετρίως, πι- 
στεύω ὅτι συνήθως δὲν βλάπτει τὴν ὑγείαν." Πρέπει νὰ 
> » \ \ / ’ / / \ 
ἦναι ἐλαφρὸν τὸ πρόγευμα; “KK τίνος πρέπει νὰ συνι- 
A / a ἴω 
στᾶται τὸ πρόγευμα; Ποῖον προτιμᾶτε, τὸν καφέν, τὸ 
τέϊον ἢ τὴν σοκολάταν; ᾿Αγαπᾶτε ἀρτίδια ἢ προτιμᾶτε 
/ / A A 
πεφρυγµένον ἄρτον ; προτιμῶ τεμάχιον ἁπλοῦ ἄρτου, ἂν 
' How often ? 2 That is in great measure a matter of individual opin- 


ion; if one eats and drinks moderately I do not think that it is ordinarily 
injurious to the health. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE 287 


> ο) 1 . / Ν / A ’ \ 
ἀγαπᾶτε. ᾿Ειφάγετε καπνιστὸν κρέας ἢ χοιρομέρι μὲ. 
pe δη Ἀγ τ 3 \ / , ~ , \ 
αὐγὰ τηγανιστὰ εἰς TO πρόγευμά σας; IIds θέλετε va 
/ \ ΕἾΤΑ A ὃν χὰ a x \ 
µαγειρεύωνται τὰ wa; Προτιμᾶτε Ta wa μελᾶτα ἢ πολὺ 


βεβρασµένα; Θέλετε νὰ λάβητε ὠὰ κτυπητὰ ἢ σφογγᾶ- 


3 / \ / XY. 3 / an 3 
τον; ᾿Αρχίζετε τὸ πρόγευμα μὲ ὀπωρικοὀν; Ἰ]οῖον οπω- 
Ν ἴω / ἊΝ / / Ἃ / 
ρικὸν προτιμᾶτε; Θέλετε νὰ φάγητε ροδάκινα ἢ μόρα; 
Δὲν ἀγαπᾶτε τὰς σταφυλάς; Τρώγετε πορτοκάλλια 

\ \ A / : / νο) \ 
κατὰ τὸν χειμῶνα; Τρώγετε συνήθως ὀλίγον γλυκὸν 
κατὰ τὸ τέλος τοῦ προγεύµατος; Λαμβάνουσιν οἱ τρώ- 


Ὕοντες ὀλίγον εἰς τὸ πρόγευμα κἄτι τι θρεπτικώτερον εἰς 
| τὸ ἄριστον; Δὲν εἶναι συνήθως τὸ φαγητὸν τοῦτο σχετι- 
κῶς ἐλαφρόν; Τί ἀρκεῖ διὰ τοὺς πλείστους; Τρώγετε 
H ε ο) / ΑΔ” e& / > Χ » \ 
| ὑμεῖς πλέον ἢ ἕν βουτυρόψωμον εἰς TO ἄριστον; Aév 
ἀρκεῖ τεμάχιον ψυχροῦ κρέατος δι ὑμᾶς ;" 


> “ \ a 3 A / / 
Αποτελεῖται τὸ γεῦμα ἐκ μερικῶν παραθεµάτων; Τί 


φέρουσι κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς συμποσίου τινός; ᾿Αγαπᾶτε τὰ 


2 / A 4 A 7 3 
ὀστρακόδερμα; Ἡροτιμᾶτε ὄστρεα τῶν ἄλλων ὀστρα- 


/ \ / ϱ/ a » 5 / 8 
κοδέρμων ; Κατὰ ποιαν ωραν του ετους ειναι πρεπον 


A A e 
νὰ τρώγῃ τις ὄστρεα; KATA τοὺς μῆνας εἰς τοὺς ὁποίους 
ex> > \ / ace 5 a ef ς 
εὑρίσκεται τὸ γράμμα p.*  ᾿Ακολουθεῖται αὕτη ἡ περι- 
ποῖ Ὁ \ 2/ \ aA / » 3 / be 
φορὰ ὑπὸ εἴδους τινὸς ζωμοῦ; Τίνα εἴδη ἴχθύων εἶναι 
εἴ / 


\ 53 yA ra 9) / « a 
|Ta κάλλιστα; Δεν εἶναι εὔχυμοι οἱ ἀστακοί, οἱ καρκίνοι 

᾿ | \ \ / 

Ἡ καὶ αἱ καρίδες; Τί φέρουσι κατὰ τὴν εἴσοδον; ᾿Άγα- 
| \ / ᾽ / 

ἢ πᾶτε νεφρά, πάγκρεας, μυελὸν τηγανιστόν, ἀρτόκρεας καὶ 


\ / 
τὰ παρόμοια; Ἔκ τίνος συνίσταται τὸ ἑπόμενον παρά- 


θεμα: Τί λαμβάνομεν εἰς τὸ τράγηµα; Τί πίνουσι 


'If you please. 318 not a slice of cold meat enough for you? 515 


jit proper. + Entrée. 


| *The absence of r in the month conveys another warning to the Greeks. 
| They say: 


Ὅσοι μῆνες δὲν ἔχουν p, 


Βάλε ᾿ς τὸ κρασὶ νερό. 


288 


\ \ fa) 
μετὰ TO γευμα; 
/ 
σιγαρεττα ; 


8 A / “Ὁ ; 
Τί προτιμᾶτε νὰ καπνίζητε, ποῦρα" ἢ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


x 


1 Σιγάρον signifies either a cigar or a cigarette. Pipe, ἢ καπνοσῦριγξ, 


or more usually ima: tobacco, 6 καπνός, lit. smoke. Αὐτὸς 6 καπνὸς δὲν 
πίνεται, this tobacco does not smoke (lit. drink) well. 


Reading Exercise 


John Stuart Blackie.* 

Eis τῶν λόγων δι οὓς οἱ 
Βρεττανοὶ ἀπολαύουσιν ἐν 

A 3 ἕῳ 7] \ 
τῷ ἐξωτερικῷ γοήτρου καὶ 
φήμης δικαίας, εἶναι αὐτὴ 
ἡ τιμὴ ἧς τυγχάνουσιν ἐν 

οἱ 20 b] / ec ο 
τῷ ἔθνει, οὐ μόνον οἱ ὕψι- 
στοι καὶ περιφανέστατοι 
τών ἀνδρών αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ 
καὶ οἱ εὐδοκίμως ὑπηρετή- 
σαντες καὶ διακριθέντες. 
Γίνεται δὲ τοῦτο ἄνευ ἁψι- 
κόρου θορύβου καὶ ὑπερβο- 

A / / 
λῆς κακοζήλου, μµαταιούσης 

» \ \ / > . 2 
αὐτὸν τὸν σκοπόν, ἀλλ. ἐν 
λελογισμένη καὶ μεμαρτυ- 
ρημένῃ ἐρεύνῃ αὐτῶν τῶν 
πραγμάτων. 

Ἡ ἄρτι δημοσιευθεῖσα 
βιογραφία τοῦ καθηγητοῦ 
I. Σ. Βλάκη παρέχει ἐπί- 

* Βιβλιοκρισία, ἐκ τῆς “Ατλαν- 


5} , “ 
τίδος,͵ ἀδείᾳ τοῦ κυρίου Σ.1. Βλα- 


στοῦ. 


John Stuart Blackie.* 


One of the reasons why 
the British enjoy prestige 
and just renown abroad is 
the honor which not only 
the highest and most fa- 
mous of its men, but 4850. 
those who have served it 
well and have  distin- 
guished themselves, ac- 
quire in the nation. This 
takes place without incon- 
stant bustle and reprehen- 
sible exaggeration, frus- 
trating the very object, 
but in reasoned and at- 
tested examination of the 
facts. 

The recently published 
biography of Professor J. 
S. Blackie furnishes a 


* A Review, from “ Atlantis,” 
with permission of Mr. 8. J. Vla- 
sto. 


eee . 


READING EXERCISE 


καιρον παράδειγµα τοῦ ἐν 
πᾶσιν ἐρρύθμου καὶ λογικοῦ 
/ / - ; 
δημοσίου βίου τῶν Bper- 
τανῶν. Τὸ δίτομον τοῦτο 
σύγγραμμα περιποεῖ τι- 
Ν > Ν / Ν 
μὴν εἰς τὴν λογίαν καὶ καλ- 
λιεπῆ δέσποιναν, ἥτις ἀμέ- 
σως μετὰ τὸν θάνατον τοῦ 
Βλάκη ἐπελήφθη τοῦ ἔργου, 
κινεῖ δὲ ζωηρὸν τὸ ἐνδιαφέ- 
ρον ἡμῶν τῶν ἑλλήνων, ὧν 
τὴν πατρίδα"καὶ τὴν γλῶσ- 
σαν θερμῶς ἠγάπησε καὶ 
ξ 
ἐξυπηρέτησεν ὁ 
ἀνήρ. 
κ / πὰ eae, / 
Ἀπανία εἶναι ἡ ἐπιτυχία 


ἀοίδιμος 


μεθ᾽ ἧς ἡ κυρία Στόδδαρτ 
ἀφηγεῖται τὰ κατὰ τὴν ἰσό- 
βιον δράσιν ἀνδρὸς τόσῳ 
πολυμαθοῦς, πολυασχόλου 
καὶ πολυπείρου ὡς τοῦ 
Βλάκη. ᾿Αμφότεροι δὲ οἱ 
τόμοι οὗτοι εἶναι μεστοὶ 
> / fal 

ἐνδιαφέροντος πολυμεροῦς. 
Καὶ τὰ μὲν ἄλλα τοῦ βίου 
ἀναγκαζόμεθα νὰ παρέλθω- 

> / Be 

μεν ἐπιτροχάδην θὰ ἐνδια- 
τρίψωµεν ὅμως ἐκτενέστε- 
ον ἐπὶ τῆς ἀφορώσης εἰς 
ἃς ἑλληνικὰς σπουδὰς δρά- 


*John Stuart Blackie; a Biography. 
1895. 


urgh and London, Blackwood. 
19 


289 


timely example of the in 
all things measured and 
logical public life of the 
British. This two-volume 
work does credit to the 
learned and eloquent lady 
who, immediately after 
the death of Blackie, un- 
dertook the task, and also 
excites the lively interest 
of us Greeks whose land 
and language the man of 
blessed memory warmly 
loved and served. 


Rare is the success with 
which Madame Stoddard 


relates the history of the 


lifelong activity of a man 
so erudite, busy, and ex- 
perienced as Blackie. Both 
of these volumes are, in- 
deed, full of varied inter- 
est, but we are compelled 
to pass briefly over the 
other details of the life; 
we shall, however, dwell 
more at length upon the 
influence upon Greek 
studies of this Philhellene 
By Anna M. Stoddard, Edin- 


290 


σεως τοῦ Φιλέλληνος καὶ 
ἑλληνομαθοῦς καθηγητοῦ. 
Ὃ Ἑλάκης αήσοις ἐξ 
ἀρχαίας οἰκογενείας ἧς τὰ 
μέλη πρὸ ἑνὸς καὶ πλέον 
αἰῶνος μετήρχοντο τὸν ἰα- 
"ANN 
6 πατὴρ αὐτοῦ διηύθυνε 
ἐν Γλασκώβῃ, 
ὅπου ὁ Ἰωάννης ἐγεννήθη 
τῷ 1809. 
᾿Αβερδήνῃ ἐπεδόθη τὸ πρῶ- 


τρὸν ROUGE 
τράπεζαν 
Ἐκπαιδευθεὶς ἐν 


τον εἰς τὰ νομικά: ἀλλ ἡ 
ἐν δικήγορηκῷ γραφείῳ ὑπη- 


ρεσία δὲν τὸν ἔθελγεν. 
"00εν μετέβη εἰς ᾿Εἰδιμβοῦρ- 
γον ὅπως, τελειοποιήσας 


τὰς σπουδὰς αὐτοῦ χειρο- 
τονηθῇ ἱερεύς " ἐκεῖ δὲ ἐδί- 
δασκον τότε, ὁ μέγας ἑλ- 
ληνιστὴς Dunbar καὶ ὁ 
περίφημος καθηγητὴς τῆς 
φιλοσοφίας Σὶρ Γουλιέλμος 
ο η 
διαφέρον ηὐτύχησε νὰ προσ- 
εταιρισθῇ ὁ νέος Ἑλάκη. 


Αμιλτών, οὗ τὸ 


᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδὲ τὸ κληρικὸν στά- 


Υ 
διον δὲν προσείλκυεν αὐτόν "“ 


ο΄ Ν / 
ὅθεν μεταβὰς εἰς Ῥοννην 
ἐφοίτησεν εἰς τὸ ἐκεῖ πανε- 


/ Αα 
πιστήµιον καὶ ἐκεῖθεν πε- 


/ 3 aN \ 
ριώδευσεν ava τὴν Leppa- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


aw, but employment in a 


and learned Greek profess- 
or. 

Blackie was descended 
from an old family, the 
members of which had for 
a century and more fol- 
lowed hereditarily the pro- 
fession of medicine. But 
his father was manager of 
a bank in Glasgow, where 
John was born in 1809. 
Educated in Aberdeen, he 
was advanced first to the 


law office did not attract 
him. Therefore he went 
to Edinburgh in order 
that, when he had com- 
pleted his studies, he might 
be ordained a clergyman. 
At that time there were 
teaching there the great 
hellenist Dunbar and the 
celebrated professor of 
philosophy Sir William 
Hamilton, whose friendly 
interest young Blackie suc- 
ceeded in winning. But 
neither did a clerical ca- 
reer attract him; so, go- 
ing to Bonn, he attended! 
the university there, and 


READING EXERCISE 


᾿ γίαν καὶ Ἰταλίαν, διατρίψας 
ἐπί τινα χρόνον ἐν Ῥώμῃ, 
ὅπου συνέδεσε στενὰς σχέ- 
| σεις μετὰ τοῦ περιφήμου 
Γερμανοῦ ἀρχαιολόγου Ger- 
| hard καὶ μετὰ τοῦ Βοῦνσεν. 
Ἢ ἐν Γερμανία διατριβὴ 
| αὐτοῦ ἤσκησεν ὁριστικὸν 
| ἐπὶ τοῦ χαρακτῆρος καὶ τῶν 
φιλολογικῶν αὐτοῦ ἰδεῶν 
| δρᾶσιν, ὡς καὶ αἱ σχέσεις 
To 1899 διω- 
| ρίσθη καθηγητὴς τῆς Λατι- 
᾿νικῆς ἐν ᾿Αβερδήνη, τῷ δὲ 
| 1852 ἐξελέγη καθηγητὴς 
| τῆς ἑλληνικῆς ἐν ᾿Εδιμβούρ- 
[γῳ, τηρήσας ἕδραν 
| ταύτην µέχρι τοῦ 1881, ὅτε 


| αὐτοῦ αὗται. 


\ 
τὴν 


1 ἢ ον / 
| ἀπεσύρθη ἐπὶ συντάξει. 
| Ἐτελεύτησε δὲ τὴν 2 Μαρ- 
| / / 5 Ν 
Γτίου παρελθόντος, ἄγων τὸ 


85 ἔτος τῆς ἡλικίας. 


Τοῦ Βλάκη ἡ προσωπικό- 
| τῆς ὑπῆρξε μία τῶν γνωστο- 
| τάτων καὶ προσφιλεστάτων 
niyo / κά μας 
καὶ ἐν Σκωτία, ὅπου ἐτήρη- 
/σεζῶσας πάσας τὰς ἀρχαί- 
᾿ᾶς τῆς χώρας παραδόσεις 
ἊΣ 
| καὶ ὅπου ἀνεζωογόνησε τὴν 
\ an > / > 
σπουδὴν τῆς ἐγχωρίου Ova- 
ἢ λικῆς γλώσσης, καὶ ἐν ᾿Αγ- 


291 


thence travelled through 
Germany and Italy, re- 
maining for some time in 
Rome, where he contracted 
a firm intimacy with the 
renowned German arche- 
ologist Gerhard and with 
Bunsen. His sojourn in 
Germany exercised a defi- 
nite influence upon his 
character and philological 
ideas, as did also these 
friendships. In 1839 he 
was appointed Professor 
of Latin in Aberdeen, and 
in 1852 he was chosen 
Professor of Greek in 
Edinburgh, retaining this 
chair until 1881 when he 
retired upon ἃ pension. 
He died on the 2d of last 
March, in the 85th year 
of his age. 

The personality οἵ 
Blackie was one of the 
best known and best loved 
both in Scotland, where he 
kept alive all the ancient 
traditions of the country 
and where he revived the 
study of the native Celtic 
tongue, and in England, 


292 


γλίᾳ ὅπου συνεδέετο διὰ 
στενῶν σχέσεων μετὰ πάν- 
των τῶν κατὰ τὸν μακρὸν 
βίον 


ἐπιφανῶν ἀνδρών. Ἴσχυ- 


αὐτοῦ ἀκμασάντων 
\ \ . \ > - » - 
pov δὲ ἀρωγὸν ἐν τῷ ἄγώνι 
“ \ > an 
τοῦ βίου ἔσχε τὴν εὐγενῆ 
\ \ > a ’ 
καὶ σεβαστὴν αὐτοῦ συξυ- 
ἃ > / / » 
γον, ἣν ἐνυμφεύθη νέος ἤδη 
\ 
ἂν καὶ μετὰ δεινὸν καὶ Kap- 
τερικὸν ἀγῶνα κατὰ τῆς 
ἀντιστάσεως τῶν «γονέων 
αὐτῆς. 
δ / 
Οὕτως, ἐν συντόμῳ, ἔχου- 
\ \ \ / a 
σι τὰ κατὰ τὸν βίον τοῦ 
/ 

Βλάκη. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἰδίως ἐνδια- 
/ e “ e \ \ ς 
φέρει ἡμᾶς ἡ περὶ τὴν ελ- 

\ 
ληνικὴν Φιλολογίαν καὶ 
A an An? / 
γλῶσσαν δρᾶσις τοῦ ἀνδρός. 


VERBS 


ἀπολαύουσι, pres. ind. ἀπολαύω, to enjoy. 
τυγχάνουσι, pres. ind. τυγχάνω, to reach, acquire. 
ὑπηρετήσαντες, aor. part. ὑπηρετῶ(έω), to serve. 
διακριθέντες, aor. part. mid. διακρίνω, to distinguish. 
γίνεται, pres. ind. γίνομαι, to take place, become. 
µαταιούσης, pres. part. fem. µαταιώ(όω-όνω), to frus 


trate. 


λελογισμένῃ. perf. part. λογίζομαι, to reason, reflect. 
μεμαρτυρημένῃ, pert. part. pass. µαρτυρώ(έω), to affirm 


bear witness. 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


where he bound himself 
with strong ties to all the 
eminent men who flourish- 
ed throughout his long 
life. He had a powerful 
assistant in his life work 
in his amiable and vener- 
ated wife, whom he mar- 
ried while still a young 
man, although after a long 
and persevering struggle 
against the opposition of 
her parents. 

This is in brief the his- 
tory of Blackie’s life. But 
the influence of the man 
upon Greek philology and 
language especially inter- 
ests US. 


VERBS 293 


: δημοσιευθεῖσα, aor. part. pass. δηµοσιεύω, to publish. 

παρέχει, pres. ind. παρέχω, to afford, give. 

περιποιεῖ, pres. ind. περιποιώ(έω), to procure, gain. 

᾿ἐπελήφθη, aor. ind. mid. ἐπιλαμβάνω, to undertake. 

κινεῖ, pres. ind. κινώ(έω), to move, stir. 

ἠγάπησε, aor. ind. ἀγαπώ(άω), to love. 

ἐξυπηρέτησε, aor. ind. ἐξεπηρετώ(έω), to be of service to. 

ἀφηγεῖται, pres. ind. ἀφηγοῦμαι{έομαι), to relate. 

ἀναγκαζόμεθα, pres. ind. pass. ἀναγκάζω, to compel. 

παρέλθωμεν, aor. Subj. παρέρχοµαι, to pass by. 

θὰ ἐνδιατρίψωμεν, aor. fut. ἐνδιατρίβω, to dwell upon. 

κατήγετο, imp. ind. κατάγοµαι, to descend from. _ 

µετήρχοντο, imp. ind. µετέρχομαι, to pursue, profess. 

διηύθυνε, imp. ind. διευθύνω, to direct, manage. 

ἐγεννήθη, aor. ind. pass. γεννώ(άω), to bear, give birth. 

ἐκπαιδευθείς, aor. part. pass. ἐκπαιδεύω, to educate. 

ἐπεδόθη, aor. ind. pass. ἐπιδίδω, to advance, succeed. 

ἔθελγε, imp. ind. θέλγω, to attract, allure. 

μετέβη, aor. ind. µεταβαίνω, to go, proceed. 

τελειοποίιήσας, AOY. part. τελειοποιώ(έω), to complete. 

χειροτονηθῇ, aor. 5.10]. pass. χειροτονώ(έω), to ordain. 

ἐδίδασκον, imp. ind. διδάσκω, to teach. 

ηὐτύχησε, aor. ind. εὐτυχόά(έω), to be happy, succeed. 

προσεταιρισθῇ, aor. subj. mid. προσεταιρίζοµαι, to at- 

tach one’s self. 

προσείλκυε, imp. ind. προσελκύω, to attract. 

µεταβάς, aor. part. µεταβαίνω, to go. 

ἐφοίτησε, aor. ind. φοιτώ(άω), to attend. 

περιώδευσε, ΔΟΥ. ind. περιοδεύω, to travel. 

διατρίψας, aor. part. διατρίβω, to stay, dwell. 

συνέδεσε, aor. ind. συνδέω, to unite, bind together. 
ἤσκησε, aor. ind. ἀσκώ(έω), to exercise, practise. 


994 | MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


διωρίσθη, aor. ind. pass. διορίζω, to appoint. 

ἐξελέγη, 2d aor. ind. pass. ἐκλέγω, to choose. 
τηρήσας, aor. part. τηρώ(έω), to keep. 

ἀπεσύρθη, aor. ind. mid. ἀποσύρω, to withdraw. 
ἐτελεύτησε, aor. ind. τελευτώ(άω), to end, die. 

ἄγων, pres. part. ἄγω, to bring, lead. 

ὑπῆρξε, aor. ind. ὑπάρχω, to exist, be. 

ἐτήρησε, aor. ind. τηρώ[έω), to keep. 

ζώσας, pres. part. fem. plur. acc. ζώ(άω), to live. 
ἀνεζωογόνησε, aor. ind. avafwoyova(éw), to revive. 
συνεδέετο, imp. ind. mid. συνδέω, to unite, bind together. 
ἀκμασάντων, aor. part. gen. plur. ἀκμάξζω, to flourish. 
ἔσχε; aor. ind. ἔχω, to have. 

ἐνυμφεύθη, aor. ind. mid. νυμφεύω, to marry. 
ἐνδιαφέρει, pres. ind. ἐνδιαφέρω, to interest. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be prepared in the usual way by the student. 


Grammar 
' PREPOSITIONS (continued) 


— (D.) Governinc THE GENITIVE oR AccusATIVE, διά, 
κατά, µετά, περί, ὑπέρ, ὑπὸό--- 
10. Διά, a. With gen., through, by (via), by means of: 

εἰσῆλθεν eis τὴν οἰκίαν διὰ τῆς θύρας, he entered the 
house through the door; 

μετέβη διὰ Λονδίνου eis Κανταβριγίαν, he went to Cam- 
bridge wa London ; 

ἐταξείδευον διὰ ξηρᾶς, I travelled by land. 


PREPOSITIONS — 295 


6. With acc., for, on account of, to, for (in the di- 
~ rection of): 
Bot βιβλίον διὰ τὴν νεολαίαν, here is a book for the 
young; 
μὴ αἰτιᾶσθε ἐμὲ διὰ τοῦτο, do not be angry with me on 
this account ; 
θὰ ταξειδεύσῃ διὰ ᾿Αθήνας, he will make a journey to 
Athens. 
᾿ς 1]. Kara, a. With gen., against, down upon: 
| οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐπολέμησαν ἀνδρείως κατὰ τῶν Τούρκων, 
the Greeks fought bravely against the Turks; 
ἔπεσε κατὰ γῆς, he fell to the ground. 
6. With acc., on, in or by (distributive), at, during 
(time), according to: 
᾿ κατὰ γῆν καὶ θάλασσαν, on land and water; 
| κατὰ τεμάχια, piecemeal ; 
καθ᾽ ἑκάστην (ἡμέραν), every day ; 
ἤμην ασθενὴς καθ᾽ ὅλον τὸν μῆνα τοῦτον, I was ill that 
| whole month ; 
| κατὰ τὸ λέγειν ὅλων, according to the say of all; 
κατὰ λέξιν, verbatim ; κατὰ τύχην, by chance. 
12. Merd, a. With gen., with: 
ἔλθετε μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ. come with me; 
| ἀπεκρίθην αὐτῷ μετὰ καθαρᾶς συνειδήσεως, I answered 
him with a clear conscience. 
b. With acc., after (time): 
μετὰ τρεῖς μῆνας, after three months; 
μετὰ τὸν πρῶτον ἔρχεται ὁ δεύτερος, after the first comes 
the second ; - 
μετὰ μεσημβρίαν, after noon, post meridiem (μ.µ., P.M). 


296 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


13. Περί, a. With gen., about, concerning: 


πολλὰ ἤκουσα περὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σας, 1 heard many 
things about your brother ; 

ἔγραψε ἄρθρον περὶ τῆς ναυτιάσεως, he wrote an article 
on sea-sickness. | 


2. With ace., about, round: 


ἐκάθηντο περὶ τὴν τράπεζαν, they sat round the table; 
ἦλθε περὶ TO μεσονύκτιον, he came about midnight. 


- The ἐ of περί is not elided before a vowel. 


14. Ὑπέρ, a. With gen., for, in favor of (the oppo- 
site of κατά): 


ὅστις δὲν εἶναι ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ, εἶναι κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ, he who 15 not 
for me is against me ; 
ἀπέθανεν ὑπὲρ τῆς πατρίδος του, he died for his country. — 


b. With αοο., over, above, more than: 


ἡ εἰκὼν κρέμαται ὑπὲρ τὸ ἀνάκλιντρον, the picture hangs 
above the sofa ; | 

ἐπήδησεν ὑπὲρ τὸ κάθισμα, he jumped over the chair; 

διέμενε ἐν Νέα Ὑόρκη ὑπὲρ τοὺς ἓξ μῆνας, he remained 
in New York more than six months. 


15. ‘Yad, a. With gen., with, by (the agent of an 
action expressed by a passive verb), from, because of: 


ὅλοι οἱ λόφοι ἦσαν κεκαλυμμένοι ὑπὸ χιόνος, all the hills 
were covered with snow ; 

τὸ δρᾶμα τοῦτο ἦτο συγγεγραμµένον ὑπὸ τοῦ Σαιξπείρου, 
this play was written by Shakespeare ; 

ἐρυθριᾷ ὑπὸ αἰδοῦς, he blushed for shame. 


PREPOSITIONS 297 


ὁ. With acc., under (of place or figuratively): 

ὁ σκύλος κεῖται ὑπὸ τὴν τράπεζαν, the dog is lying 
under the table ; 

θέτω τὸ ὡρολόγιον ὑπὸ τὸ προσκέφαλόν µου, I put the 
watch under my pillow; 

αὕτη ἡ νῆσος εἶναι ὑπὸ THY προστασίαν τῆς Μεγάλης 

| Βρεταννίας, this island is under the protection of 
Great Britain ; 

θὰ τὸ κάµω ὑπὸ τὸν ὅρον τοῦτον, I will do it on this 
condition. 


LESSON TWENTY-EIGHTH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ ΒΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ ΟΓΔΟΟΝ 


\ / 
Τὰ νοσήματα 


Diseases 


Τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τῶν νοσημάτων ἀκολουθεῖ πολὺ 
The chapter on diseases follows very 
καταλλήλως τὸ περὶ τροφῆς, ἐπειδὴ αἱ πλεῖσται τῶν 
properly that on meals, since most of the 
ἀσθενειῶν αἱ ὁποῖαι θλίβουσι τὴν ἀνθρωπότητα, ἐκτὸς 
diseases which afflict humanity, except: 
τῶν μεταδοτικῶν νοσημάτων, προέρχονται ἐκ σφαλμάτων 
the infectious diseases, arise from errors 
περὶ τὴν δίαιταν. Ἰολλαὶ φλογώσεις τῆς ρινός, 
in diet. | Many inflammations of the nose, 
τοῦ λαιμοῦ, τῶν βρογχίων καὶ τῶν πνευμόνων γεννῶνται 
throat, bronchial tubes, and lungs arise 
ὡς «Φαίνεται ἐξ ἀτμοσφαιρικῶν μεταβολῶν, ἀλλὰ 
apparently from atmospheric changes, but 
πράγματι προέρχονται ἐκ τῆς παρουσίας µικρο- 
really they come from the presence of micro- 
οργανισμῶν, οἱ ὁποῖοι ἐνεργοῦσι καὶ ἐπι- 
organisms which become active and exercise an 
δρῶσιν ἐπιζημίως ἐπὶ τῶν μυξωδών μεμβρανῶν 
injurious influence upon the mucous membranes 


DISEASES 299 


αἵτινες ἐξασθενοῦνται διὰ τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ ὑγροῦ 
which are weakened through the action of damp 
ψύχους ἢ τῆς ξηρᾶς θερμότητος. 
cold or of dry heat. 
Τέσσαρα εἶναι τὰ κύρια συστήµατα τοῦ σώματος 
Four are the principal systems of the body 
Ta ὁποῖα δύναται va ἦναι θέσις καχεκτικῆς πορείας" 


which may be the seat of a disease process: 
τὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι TO TETTLKOV, TO ἀναπνευστικόν, τὸ 
such are the digestive, the respiratory, the 


ἀγηειῶδες, καὶ TO νευρικὸν σύστημα. Ὃ ἰατρὸς 
vascular, andthe nervous’ system. The physician 
κάμνει διάγνωσιν νοσήµατός τινος ἐκ τῶν παρουσιαζο- 
makes a diagnosis of a disease fromthe  symp- 
μένων συμπτωμάτων. Τὰ καταφανέστατα συμπτώματα 
toms _ present. The most prominent symptoms 
τῶν γαστρικῶν διαταράξεων εἶναι ἀνορεξία, ἐπιστρωμένη 
of gastric disturbances are loss of appetite, coated 
γλῶσσα, πόνος καὶ ἐμετός. Ναυτία, ἐμετὸς καὶ 
tongue, pain, and vomiting. Nausea, vomiting, and 
ἴλιγγος εἶναι τὰ συνήθη καὶ πολὺ δυσάρεστα συμ- 
dizziness are the commonand very unpleasant symp- 
πτώματα τῆς ναυτιάσεως. Τὰ αὐτὰ συμπτώματα παρου- 
toms of sea-sickness. Thesame symptoms 86 
σιάζονται εἰς τὴν χολερικότητα. Ἡ δυσπεψία εἶναι 
associated with _ biliousness. Dyspepsia isa 
πολὺ βασανιστικὴ ἀσθένεια. Oi ἀσθενεῖς οἱ πάσχον- 
very distressing affection. Patients suffer- 
τε ἐξ ἐντερικῶὼν νόσων ἔχουσι Κκωλικόπονον καὶ 
ing from intestinal diseases have colic and 
διάρροιαν ἢ δυσκοιλιότητα. 
diarrhoea or constipation. 


- 900 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Τὸ κρυολόγημα εἶναι συνηθεστάτη ΄ νόσος, ἰδιαι- 

Ν cold is avery frequent disease, espe- 
τέρως εἰς αὐτὸ τὸ Κλίμα, ὅπου ὁ καιρὸς εἶναι τόσον 
clally in this climate, where the weather is SO 
εὐμετάβλητος. ᾽Απλῆ KaTappon δὲν εἶναι σοβαρόν 
inconstant. Simple catarrh is ποῦ a serious 
τι, ἐκτὸ ἐὰν ἡ φλόγωσις προχωρῇ πρὸς τὰ 
matter, except when the inflammation advances 

κάτω καὶ πίπτῃ ἐπὶ τῶν βρογχίων καὶ τῶν 
downwards and attacks the bronchi and 


πνευμόνων. Τότε ὀνομάζεται στηθικὸς κατάρρους. 
lungs. Thenit iscalled κα chest cold. 
Ὅταν πάσχῃ τι ἀπὸ στηθικὸν κατάρρουν ἔχει 
When one suffers from a chest cold _ one has 
βῆχα, στηθόπονον, δύσπνοιαν καὶ ἐνίοτε 
cough, pain in the chest, difficult breathing, and some- 
αἱμοπτυσίαν. Ὑτηθόπονος εἶναι σύμπτωμα 


times spitting of blood. Chest pain is asymptom 
τῆς πλευρίτιδος καὶ τῆς πνευμονία. Ἡ πνευμονία εἶναι. 
of pleurisy and of pneumonia. Pneumonia is an 
ὀξεῖα φλόγωσις τῶν πνευμόνων. Ἡ φθίσις εἶναι 


acute inflammation of the lungs. Phthisis [5 
ἐπίσης κοινὴ νόσος, τῷ ὄντι εἶναι ἡ νόσος ἐκ 


also a common disease, indeed, it is the disease from 
A e / / > / x > δ) 
τῆς οποίας περισσότεροι ἀποθνήσκουσιν ἢ ἐξ ἄλλης 


which more die than from any 
Twos νόσου. συνήθως ἡ πορεία της εἶναι χρονία" 
other disease; ordinarily its course is chronic; 


δὲν εἶναι ὅμως πάντοτε µοιραία καὶ ἐλπίζουσιν, ὅτι 
it is not, however, always fatal, and it is hoped that 
βεβαία θεραπεία αὐτῆς θὰ εὑρεθῆ per od πολύ. 
ἃ true cure of it will be found before long. 


CONVERSATION EXERCISE : 901 


x > \ 5 an la) ἊΣ A / 6 
Το ἐπιστημονικὸν ὄνομα τοῦ χτικιοῦ ἢ τῆς φθίσεως 
The scientific name of consumption or  phthisis 
εἶναι ἡ πνευμονικὴ φυματίωσις. 

is pulmonary tuberculosis. 


Conversation Exercise 


Διατί τὸ κεφάλαιον περὶ τῶν νοσημάτων ἀκολουθεῖ 
καταλλήλως τὸ περὶ τροφῆς; ἩΠροέρχονται αἱ πλεῖσται 
τῶν ἀσθενειών ἐκ σφαλμάτων περὶ τὴν δίαιταν; Ποῖα 
νοσήµατα δὲν προέρχονται ἐκ ταύτης τῆς αἰτίας; τὰ 
μεταδοτικὰ νοσήματα δὲν προέρχονται ἐκ σφαλμάτων 
περὶ τὴν δίαιταν. Τεννάνται πολλαὶ Φλογώσεις τών 
ἀναπνευστικών ὀργάνων ἐξ ἀτμοσφαιρικών μεταβολών; 
αὗται αἱ φλογώσεις γεννώνται µόνον κατὰ τὸ φαινόμενον' 
ἐξ αὑτῶν τῶν αἰτιῶν. “Ex τίνος προέρχονται αὐταὶ πρἀγ- 
ματι; Διατί οἱ μικροοργανισμοὶ εὑρίσκονται ἐν ἐνεργείᾳ" 
καὶ ἐπιδρῶσιν ἐπιζημίως; ᾿Πξασθενοῦσιν αἱ μυξώδεις 
μεμβράναι διὰ τῆς ἐνεργείας τοῦ ὑγροῦ ψύχους ἢ τῆς 
ξηρᾶς θερμότητος; όσα" εἶναι τὰ κύρια συστήματα 
τοῦ σώματος τὰ ὁποῖα δύναται" νὰ ἦναι θέσις καχεκτικῆς 
πορείας; ἸΠοῖα εἶναι τὰ τέσσαρα ταῦτα συστήματα; 
᾿Απὸ τίνος κάμνει διάγνωσιν νοσήματός τινος ὁ ἰατρός ; 
Ποῖα εἶναι τὰ καταφανέστατα συμπτώματα τῆς ναυτιά- 
σεως; Παρουσιάζονται τὰ αὐτὰ συμπτώματα εἰς τὴν 
χολερικότητα ; Πάσχουσιν ἀπὸ ναυτίας (ναυτιάσεως ) 
ὅλοι οἱ ταξειδεύοντες διὰ θαλάσσης; ὄχι, πολλοὶ εὐτυχῶς 
δὲν ἐπηρεάζονται᾽' ὑπὸ ταύτης τῆς δυσαρέστου ἀσθενείας. 

1 Only apparently. 2 Become active (are found in activity). 3 How 
many? 3 ΜαΥ be; δύναται is here used impersonally, and therefore in 
the singular. δ Also means irascibility, the state of being choleric. 


_ * Both these words mean sea-sickness or nausea, 7 Are not affected, in- 
᾿ fluenced. 


302 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


5 \ 3 | dit . 
Δὲν εἶναι ἡ δυσπεψία πολὺ βασανιστικὴ ἀσθένεια; 
Ποῖα συμπτώματα ἔχουσιν οἱ ἀσθενεῖς οἱ πάσχοντες ἀπ᾽ 
Ν η , > 
ἐντερικὰς νόσους; Εἶναι τὸ κρυολόγημα συνήθης νόσος eis 
τα. ee / 7 4 A a3: Ψ 1 ο / / 
τὸ ἡμέτερον κλίμα; Τί τὸ ἰδιαίτερον' τοῦ κλίματος τού- 
ον A / 
του; Εἶναι σοβαρόν τι ἡ ἁπλῆ καταρροή; 
5 - \ x / Vm 
τι σοβαρὸν ὅταν ἡ Φλόγωσις προχωρῇ πρὸς τὰ κάτω καὶ 
Πῶς ὀνο- 


La 
Δὲν εἶναί 


- Ν A / 
πίπτῃ ἐπὶ τῶν βρογχίων καὶ τών πνευμόνων ; 
άζεται ἡ ἀσθένεια ὅταν ἡ φλόγωσις πίπτῃ ἐπὶ τῶν βρογ- 
µάζεται ἡ ἀσθέν ἡ φλόγ ῃ por: 
= / 3 \ / 
χίων καὶ τῶν πνευμόνων; Τίνα εἶναι τὰ συμπτώματα 
3 ι 
Ποίων νόσων εἶναι ὁ στηθόπο- 
Ἂν 
Εἶναι ἡ φθί. 


\ / . / / 2 / 
σις κοινὴ νόσος; Αποθνήῄσκουσι περισσότεροι ἐκ φθί- 


τοῦ στηθικοῦ κατάρρου; 
νος σύμπτωμα; Τί εἶναι ἡ πνευμονία; 
Nie? » Ν / 5 ς / / 
σεως ἢ ἐξ ἄλλης τινὸς νόσου; Εἶναι ἡ πορεία ταύτης 
lal / / xX ’ A 5 6 / ᾽ν 
τῆς νόσου χρονία ἢ ὀξεῖα; Εἶναι ἡ φθίσις πάντοτε 
Ψ' / / 3 7] ς Ψ Ν ο % \ 
µοιραία νόσος; Τὶ ἐλπίζουσιν οἱ ἰατροὶ ὡς πρὸς τὴν 
A / 7 
θεραπείαν" τῆς ἀσθενείας ταύτης; Ἐϊὑρέθη ἤδη βεβαία 
A \ A 
θεραπεία αὐτῆς; Τί εἶναι τὸ ἐπιστημονικὸν ὄνομα τοῦ 


A 9 
χτικιου ; 
Se 
ΔΑ vernacular 


1 What is the peculiarity ? 2 Treatment or cure. 


form. 


Reading Exercise 


John Stuart Blackie 


(συνέχεια). 


Αἱ παρὰ τῷ Gerhard ἐν 
Ῥώμῃ ἀρχαιολογικαὶ µελέ- 
ται πρῶται διήγειραν τὸ 
ἰδιάζον περὶ τῶν ἑλληνικῶν 
γραμμάτων ἐνδιαφέρον τοῦ 
is a \ 

Kel δὲ 


συναντήσας νέον τινὰ ἕλ- 


7 ΠῚ 
νέου σπουδαστοῦ. 


John Stuart Blackie 
(continued), 


The archeological stud- 
ies with Gerhard in Rome 
first aroused the special 
interest of the young 
student concerning Greek 
learning. Having met a 
young Greek there he be- 


READING 


ληνα, ἤρξατο ἀναγινώσκων 
. ) a \ 4 \ 
μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὸν “Ὅμηρον καὶ 
\ > / \ / ἂν 
τὸν Αἰσχύλον, καὶ TOTE τὸ 
πρῶτον διέγνω, μετὰ χαρα- 
κτηριστικῆς ὀξυνοίας, τὸ 
ἐσφαλμένον τῆς ᾿ρασμια- 
νῆς προφορᾶς, καθ᾽ ἧς διεξή- 
» ’ / 3 Αν 
γαγεν ἔκτοτε ἰσόβιον ἀλλὰ 
/ > A , / 
μάταιον ἀγῶνα. ἜΕπιστελ- 
λων δὲ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα του 
τὴν 238 ᾿Ιανουαρίου 1891, 
» . 
ἔγραφε: 
(ς ἼἬ \ la) / 
χω κατὰ νοῦν σχέ- 
διον ὅπως διεγείρω συζήτη- 
σιν περὶ τῆς ἑλληνικῆς προ- 
φορᾶς, καθόσον μοὶ φαίνεται 
Ν [τ ἘΠ Θ᾽ / 
σαφὲς ὅτι οἱ ἡμέτεροι καθη- 
γηταὶ σφάλλουσι μὴ ἀποδε- 
χόµενοι τὴν προφορὰν τῆς 
Νεοελληνικῆς. Αὕτη δὲν 
εἶναι νεκρὰ ἀλλὰ ζῶσα." 


"Amo τῆς αὐτῆς ἐποχῆς 
χρονολογεῖται καὶ ἡ ἀπό- 
Φασίς του ὅπως κατάσχῃ 
τὴν ἕδραν τῆς ἑλληνικῆς. 
ἘἨπανελθὼν δὲ εἰς Ἑκοτίαν, 
συνέτυχε διαπρύσιον θια- 
σώτην τῆς ἑλληνικῆς Φιλο- 
λογίας τὸν δόκτορα ἤΛδαμς, 
ὅστις αὐτὸ τοῦτο ἐλάτρευε 
τοὺς ἕλληνας συγγραφεῖς 


EXERCISE 908 


gan to read with him 
Homer and Atschylus, and 
then first discerned with 
characteristic clearness of 
perception the error of 
the Erasmian pronuncia- 
tion, against which from 
that time he carried on a 
lifelong but vain struggle. 
In a letter to his father 
dated January 28, 1831, 
he wrote: 

“T have a project in my 
head to set on foot a con- 
troversy about the Greek 
pronunciation, as I think 
it quite plain that our 
professors are wrong in 
not adopting the pronun- 
ciation of modern Greek. 


“This is not a dead but a 


living language.” 

From the same time also 
dates his determination to 
obtain the chair of Greek. 
Returning to Scotland, he 
met the ardent votary 
of Greek literature, Dr. 
Adams, who simply wor- 
shipped the Greek writ- 
ers and enthusiastically 
learned by heart the odes 


904 


\ > A . / 
καὶ ἐνθουσιωδῶς ἀπεστή- 
θιζε τὰς ὠδὰς τοῦ Πινδάρου 

> > \ / \ 
εἰς οὐδὲν λογιζόμενος τὴν 
νεωτέραν Φιλολογίαν, οὐδ' 
αὐτὸν τὸν Σακεσπῆρον, καὶ 
΄σ \ / 
περιφρονῶν τὴν μέθοδον 
τῶν τότε ἐν Σκοτίᾳ καθηγη- 
τῶν. ᾿Αληθώς δ᾽ εἰπεῖν ὁ 
"A days ἣν ὁ κράτιστος τῶν 
συγχρόνων του ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ 
> / ¢ ~ « \ x 
ἐκείνῃ ἑλληνιστῶν, ὁ δὲ πρὸς 

τ τε \ / ᾽ 
TA ἐλληνικὰ γράμματα op- 

\ ΤΩΝ. / 
γασμος τοῦ νέου Ἑλακη κα- 

/ ᾽ / 
τέθελγεν αὐτόν. 

Οὕτως ἐνθαρρυνθεὶς ἤρ- 
ξατο ὁ Βλάκης μεταφράζων 
τὸν Αἰσχύλον, ἐκ δὲ τῶν 
σχετικῶν του μελετῶν προέ- 

/ 

κυψε σπουδαιοτάτη συµβο- 
λὴ εἰς τὴν μετρικὴν τῆς 
ς a / 

ἑλληνικῆς ποιήσεως, δηµο- 
σιευθεῖσα ἐν τῷ Foreign 
Quarterly Review τοῦ 
᾿Ιουλίου 1839 ὑπὸ τὸν τί: 
τλον “ Greek Rhymes and 
Metres,” καὶ μετὰ ἓν ἀκρι- 

a ” Pe \ 

Bas ἔτος ἑτέρα διατριβὴ 

\ 3 / 9 A 3 ~ 
περὶ Εὐριπίδου ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ 
ἸΑλλ) ἡ πολύ- 
µοχθος ἐργασία τῆς µετα- 


περιοδικώ. 


φράσεως, ἥτις διήρκεσεν 
ἐπὶ δώδεκα ὅλα ἔτη, ἐκινδύ- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


of Pindar, deeming of no 
account the newer litera- 
ture and even Shakespeare, 
and despising the system 
of the professors then in - 
Scotland. In fact, how- 
ever, Adams was the 
greatest of the Hellenists 
who were his contempora- 
ries in that country, and 
the ardor of young Blackie 
for Greek letters charmed 
him. | 


Thus encouraged, 
Blackie began to translate 
Atschylus, and from his - 
comparative studies re- 
sulted a very important 
contribution on the metre 
of Greek poetry, published 
in the Loreign Quarterly 
Review for July, 18389, 
under the title “Greek 
Rhymes and Metres,” and 
just a year later another 
essay on Euripides in the 
same periodical. But the 
laborious work of transla- 
tion, which continued for 
twelve entire years, was in 
danger of becoming fruit- 


READING 


5 > - / 5 
νευε ν᾿ ἀποβῆ ματαία, δι 
ἀπορίαν τῆς πρὸς ἔκδοσιν 
δαπάνης. Τότε δὲ ἐξέλαμ- 

«ς ᾽ / Ἁ > 
ψεν ἡ ἀφοσίωσις καὶ av- 
τῆς 

> a ο / \ 
αὐτοῦ, ἥτις πωλήσασα τὴν 


ταπάρνησις συζύγου 
οἰκοσκευὴν αὐτῆς, METOKN- 
σεν εἰς στενώτερον κατά- 
λυμα ὅπως ἐκ τῆς οὐκονο- 
μίας ἐπαρκέσῃη εἰς τὰ τῆς 
ἐκτυπώσεως. 

᾿Αλλὰ τὸ 
ἐπεστέφοντο 
Βλάκη καὶ ἡ ἐθελοθυσία 


᾽ὔ ἢ 
ἑπόμενον ἔτος 
οἱ κόποι τοῦ 


τῆς εὐγενοῦς αὐτοῦ συμ- 
/ 2 \ \ a b) 
Bias* ἐπειδὴ διὰ τῆς ἐκλο- 
γῆς αὐτοῦ ὡς καθηγητοῦ 
τῆς ἑλληνικῆς ἐν Ἠδιμβούρ- 
a? 
ὄνειρον τῆς νεαρᾶς του ἡλι- 


2 a \ 
επραγµατοποιονυτο TO 


κίας. - Πλήρης δ᾽ ἐνθουσια- 
σμοῦ καὶ νεανικῆς ὅλως 


ὁρμῆς συγχρόνως 
καὶ τὴν ἑλληνικὴν ἑταιρίαν, 


ἵδρυσε 


εἰς ἣν συνεκέντρωσε τοὺς 
κρατίστους τῶν τότε ἑλλη- 
νιστῶν, καὶ ἧς σκοπὸς ἣν ἡ 
θεραπεία τῶν ἑλληνικῶν 
γραμμάτων. 

Τῷ 1852 ἐποιήσατο ἐν 
τῷ φιλολογικῷ ἰνστιτούτῳ 
σειρὰν διαλέξεων περὶ ἑλ- 

20 


EXERCISE 905 


less through the lack of 
funds for the publication. 
Then shone forth the de- 
votedness and self -abne- 
gation of his wife, who, 
selling her household fur- 
niture, moved into smaller 
lodgings in order that 
from the saving there 
might remain enough for 
the printing. 

But the following year 
the labors of Blackie and 
the self-sacrifice of his 
amiable consort were 
crowned with success, for 
through his election as 
Professor of Greek in 
Edinburgh the dream of 
his youth was _ realized. 
Filled with enthusiasm 
and youthful ardor, he 
founded at this time the 
Hellenic Society, into 
which he gathered the 
leading Hellenists of the 
time, and the object of 
which was the cultivation 
of Greek letters. 

In 1852 he delivered in 
the Philological Institute 
a course of lectures on 


906 


ληνικῆς φιλολογίας καὶ 
συγχρόνως ἐξέδοτο τὴν πρώ- 
την αὐτοῦ σύντομον πραγ- 
µατείαν περὶ τῆς ἑλληνικῆς 
προφορᾶς. 
αὐτῆς ἐπέσυρε μεγάλην 


Ἢ δηµοσίευσις 


/ 3 \ > \ 3 
προσοχήν, ἐπειδὴ οὐδεὶς εἶχε 
/ 3 \ \ » 
τολμήσει, ἐπὶ πολλα ETN, 
\ > / \ 3 \ 
νὰ ἀμφισβητήση τὸ ὀρθὸν 
τῆς ἐν τοῖς Βρεττανικοῖς 
ο 7 
σχολείοις συνήθους προφο- 
ρᾶς ἐκ τῶν πολλῶν δ᾽ ἐπι- 
στολῶν ἃς ἔλαβε τότε ὁ 
Βλάκη, παραθέτομεν τὰς 
ἑξῆς περικοπὰς ἐκ τῆς τοῦ 
Sir Edward Bulwer Lyt- 
ton, ἀκολούθως λόρδου Lyt- 
ton, ἑνὸς τῶν διασηµοτέρων 
συγγραφέων καὶ πολιτικῶν 
ἀνδρῶν τῆς ἐποχῆς ἐκείνης : 
“Πόσον μὲ κατέπεισεν ἡ 
ς / \ ϱ/ 7 
ὑμετέρα διατριβὴ ὥστε av 


ποτε τύχω τριμήνου θερινῆς 


εὐκαιρίας θὰ ἐπιδοθώ εἰς 
τὴν σπουδὴν τῆς νεοελλη- 
νικῆς. Ἢ ἑλληνικὴ γλώσ- 
\ = Ν > 3 
σα δὲν εἶναι δυνατὸν ν᾿ ἀπο- 
θάνῃ ποτέ. Λαὸς λαλήσας 
> \ ο Ν 3 
αὐτὴν ἅπαξ δὲν εἶναι δυνα- 
τόν ποτε νὰ τὴν ἀπαρνηθῇ." 
᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ἕτερος πόθος 


\ an / / 9 z 
θερμὸς τῆς νεότητός του ἐζή- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Greek Literature, and at 
the same time he pub- 
lished his first short trea- 
tise on Greek pronuncia- 
tion. The publication of 
this attracted great atten- 
tion, for no one had dared 
for many years to dispute 
the correctness of the usual - 
pronunciation in the Brit- 
ish schools. Of many let- 
ters which Blackie then 
received we present the 
following extract from 
that of Sir Edward Ῥυ]- 
wer Lytton, afterwards 
Lord Lytton, one of the 
most celebrated writers” 
and politicians of the 
time: “If I ever get a 
good three months’ sum- 
mer holiday, I am suffi- 
ciently convinced by your 
treatise to resolve to give 
myself up to Romaic. 
Greek can never be ἃ 
dead tongue; no people 
that once spoke it can 
give it up.” 


But another warm de- 
sire of his youth next 


READING EXERCISE 


» ὃ / 

τει ἐπιμόνως πραγµάτωσιν 

¢ a / n 
—o θελκτικὸς πόθος τοῦ 
ἰδεῖν τὴν ἑλληνικὴν γῆν, 
τοῦ γνωρῖσαι τοὺς προσ- 
φιλεῖς αὐτῷ ἕλληνας, τοῦ 
ἀκοῦσαι τὴν ζῶσαν αὐτῶν 

a 3 { Ὁ 
yA@ooav ἐκ στόματος ἕλ- 


Τὴν 4 Μαΐου 1858 


ἐπάτησε τὸ ἔδαφος τῆς ᾿Ατ- 


Anvos. 


. a ae ed / ς ~ “ 
τικῆς, καὶ ἐξενίσθη ὑπὸ τοῦ 
συμπατριώτου του Γεωργίου 
Φιίνλεῦ. Αἱ δ᾽ ἐξ ᾿Αθηνῶν 
\ λ ae / 3 
προς τὴν σύζυγόν Tév ἐπι- 
στολαὶ ἀποπνέουσιν ἱερὰν 

1/ \ > , 
ἔκστασιν καὶ ἐνθουσιώδη 
ἔρωτα πρὸς πᾶν ὅ,τι ἐν τοῖς 
νεωτέροις ἕλλησιν ἐνθύμιζεν 
» Lal \ > / 3 / 
αὐτῷ τοὺς ἀρχαίους. “dias 
"/ 3 a \ 7 
ἔθελξεν αὐτοῦ τὸ παράστη- 
‘ x / κ.ε 
μα, τὸ βάδισμα καὶ ἡ γεν- 
ναία καὶ ἀνεπιτήδευτος στά- 
σις τῶν χωρικῶν, ὧν τινας 
προσομοιάζει πρὸς 
” Ἔ \ \ Μ 
Αγαμέμνονα καὶ τὸν Αἴαν- 


Ν 
τὸν 
ta. Ἱρώτιστον δ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
μέλημα ὑπῆρξε τὸ φοιτᾶν 
εἰς τὰς παραδόσεις τῶν κα- 
θηγητῶν τοῦ πανεπιστη- 
μίου, ὅπως ἀκροώμενος ἀπο- 

/ / \ Ψ “ 
κτήσῃ τελείαν τὴν ἕξιν τῆς 
a ς 
καθ ἡμᾶς. “AN ὁ καύσων 


τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν κατέβαλεν 


307 


demanded realization—the 
alluring desire to see the 
Grecian land, to know the 
Greeks beloved by him, 
to hear their living lan- 
guage from the mouth of 
a Greek. On the 4th of 
May, 1853, he stepped 
upon the soil of Attica 
and “was entertained by 
his fellow-countryman, 
George Finlay. The let- 
ters to his wife from 
Athens breathe out a pi- 
ous ecstasy and an enthu- 
siastic love for all that in 
the new Greeks reminded 
him of the old. Espe- 
cially charmed him the 
appearance, the walk, and 
the brave and simple pose 
of the peasants, some of 
whom he likened to Aga- 
memnon and Ajax. His 
very first care was to at- 
tend the lectures of the 
professors of the univer- 
sity, in order that, by list- 
ening, he might acquire a 
perfect use of the modern 
pronunciation (lit., of the 
according to us). But the 


808 


αὐτόν, καὶ ὅπως ἀναρρώσῃ 
ἐξέδραμεν διὰ Κορίνθου εἰς 


Αργος καὶ Ναύπλιον. 


Ὁδοιπορῶν δὲ ἠσμενίζετο. 


ἐρχόμενος εἰς φιλικὴν μετὰ 


τῶν χωρικῶν συνάφειαν, 
/ \ »/ \ 4 

κρίνων τὰ ἤθη καὶ ἔθιμα 

αὐτῶν καὶ ἑδραιούμενος ἐν 


τῇ γλώσσῃ. 


9 


(ἕπεται ἡ συνέχεια.) 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


heat of Athens prostrat- - 
ed him, and in order to re- 
cuperate he made an ex- 
cursion by way of Corinth 
to Argos and Nauplia. — 
While travelling he was 
pleased by coming into 
friendly intercourse with 
the ‘peasants, studying 
their customs and habits, 
and strengthening himself 
in the language. 
(To be continued.) 


VERBS 


διήγειραν, aor. ind. διεγείρω, to arouse, excite. 
συναντήσας, aor. part. συναντώ(άω), to meet. 

ἤρξατο, aor. ind. ἄρχομαι, to begin. 

ἀναγινώσκων, pres. part. ἀναγινώσκω, to read. 
διέγνω, 2d aor. ind. διαγινώσκω, to know clearly. 
ἐσφαλμένον, perf. part. pass. σφάλλω, to err. 
διεξήγαγε, 2d aor. ind. διεξάγω, to carry out, direct. 
ἐπιστέλλων, pres. part. ἐπιστέλλω, to send to, write to. 
ἔγραφε, imp. ind. γράφω, to write. 

διεγείρω, pres. subj. διεγείρω, to arouse. 
ἀποδεχόμενοι, pres. part. ἀποδέχομαι, to accept. 
χρονολογεῖται, pres. ind. mid. ypovoroyaéw), to date. 
κατάσχῃ, pres. subj. κατάσχω, to seize. 

ἐπανελθών, 2d aor. part. ἐπανέρχομαι, to come back. 
συνέτυχε, 24 aor. ind. συντυγχάνω, to meet. 
ἐλάτρευε, imp. ind. λατρεύω, to worship, revere. — 


VERBS 909 


ἀπεστήθιζε, imp. ind. ἀποστηθίζω, to learn by heart. 
λογιζόμενοι, pres. part. λογίζομαι, to deem, think. 
περιφρονῶν, pres. part. περιφρονώ(έω), to despise. 
εἰπεῖν, 2d aor. inf. λέγω, to say. 
ἦν, imp. ind. (ancient form) εἰμί, to be. 
κατέθελγε, imp. ind. καταθέλγω, to charm, delight. 
ἐνθαρρυνθείς, aor. part. pass. ἐνθαρρύνω, to encourage. 
᾿µεταφράξων, pres. part. µεταφράζω, to translate. 
προέκυνε, aor. ind. προκύπτω, to result. 
δημοσιευθεῖσα, aor. part. pass. δηµοσιεύω, to publish. 
διήρκεσε, aor. ind. διαρκώ(έω), to last, continue. 
ἐκινδύνευε, imp. ind. κινδυνεύω, to be in danger. 
ἀποβη, aor. Subj. ἀποβαίνω, to result, become. 
ἐξέλαμψε,.8ΟΥ. ind. ἐκλάμπω, to shine forth. 
πωλήσασα, aor. part. πωλῶ(έω), to sell. 
µετώκησε, aor. ind. µετοικῶ(έω). to change one’s abode. 
ἐπαρκέση, ΔΟΥ. 50]. ἐπαρκῶ(έω), to suffice, supply. 
ἐπεστέφοντο, imp. ind. ἐπιστέφω, to crown. 
ἐπραγματοποιοῦτο, imp. ind. pass. πραγματοποιῶ(έω), to 
realize. 
ἵδρυσε, aor. ind. ἱδρύω, to found, establish. 
συνεκέντρωσε, aor. ind. συγκεντρόνω(ῶ-όω), to concen- 
trate, centralize. 
ἐποιήσατο, aor. ind. mid. ποιῶ{έω), to make. 
ἐξέδοτο, 2d aor. ind. ἐκδίδωμι (ἐκδίδω), to publish, edit. 
ἐπέσυρε, aor. ind. ἐπισύρω, to draw upon, attract. 
εἶχε τολμήσει, plup. ind. τολμῶ(άω), to dare. 
ἀμφισβητήσηῃ, ΔΟΥ. Subj. ἀμφισβητῶ{έω), to discuss. 
ἔλαβε, 2d aor. ind. λαμβάνω, to receive. 
παραθέτοµεν, pres. ind. παραθέτω, to present, compare. 
κατέπεισε, aor. ind. καταπείθω, to convince, persuade. 
τύχω, 2d aor. subj. τυγχάνω, to reach, acquire, happen. 


νάνοι 


310 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


θὰ ἐπιδοθῶ, aor. fut. mid. ἐπιδίδω, to give, succeed. 

ἀποθάνῃ, 24 aor. subj. ἀποθνήσκω, to die. 

λαλήσας, aor. part. λαλῶ({έω), to speak. 

ἀπαρνηθῇ, aor. subj. ἀπαρνοῦμαιέομαι), to deny, re- 
nounce. 

ἐζήτει, imp. ind. ζητῶ(έω), to seek, demand. 

ἰδεῖν, 2d aor. inf. βλέπω, to see. 

γνωρῖσαι, aor. int. γνωρίζω, to know. 

ἀκοῦσαι, aor. inf. ἀκούω. to hear. 

ἐπάτησε, aor. ind. πατά(έω), to tread upon. 

ἐξενίσθη, aor. ind. pass. ξενίζω, to receive a guest. 

ἀποπγνέουσι, pres. ind. ἀποπνέω, to breathe out. 

ἐνθύμιζε, imp. ind. ἐνθυμίζω, to remind. 

ἔθελξε, aor. ind. θέλγω, to charm. 

προσομοιάζει, pres. ind. προσοµοιάζω, to liken, compare. — 

ὑπῆρξε, aor. ind. ὑπάρχω, to be, exist. 

φοιτῶν, pres. inf. φοιτώ(άω), to frequent, attend lectures. 

ἀκροώμενος, pres. part. ἀκροῶμαι(άομαι), to hear, listen to. 

ἀποκτήσηῃ, aor. Subj. ἀποκτώ(άω), to obtain, acquire. 

κατέβαλε, 2d aor. ind. καταβάλλω, to overcome. 

ἀναρρώσῃ, aor. 580]. ἄναρρωνύω, to recover health. 

ἐξέδραμε, 2d aor. ind. ἐκτρέχω, to run out, make an 
excursion. 

ὁδοιπορῶν, pres. part. ὁδοιπορώ(έω), to travel. 

ἠσμενίζετο, imp. ind. mid. ἀσμενίζω, to content, please. 

κρίνων, pres. part. κρίνω, to judge, criticise. 

ἑδραιούμενος, pres. part. mid. épava(éw), to make firm. 


Ἤρξατο and ἐποιήσατο are instances of the ancient form of the first 
aorist middle (see page 121, note) ; ἦν is the ancient form of the im- 
perfect (see Appendix) ; ἐξέδοτο is the ancient form of the second 
aorist middle (see Appendix, verbs in μι). 


PREPOSITIONS 311 


Grammar 
PREPOSITIONS (concluded) 


(E.) Governine ΤΗΕ Genitive, ΏΑΤΙΝΕ, ann Accusa- 
TIVE, ἐπί, παρά, πρός--- 


_ 16. “Emi, a. With gen., upon (rest), at the time οἵ: 

ἡ γραφίς σας κεῖται ἐπὶ τοῦ γραφείου, your pen is lying 
on the desk ; 

τοῦτο συνέβη ἐπὶ Φρειδερίκου τοῦ μεγάλου, that hap- 
pened in the time of Frederick the Great. 


b. With dat., for, on account of: 


λυποῦμαι ἐπὶ τούτῳ, I am sorry for that. 


6. With acc., on, at (motion), during: 


ἔρριψε λίθον ἐπὶ τὸν σκύλον, he threw a stone at the 
dog ; 

ἔπεσε ἐπὶ τὸ ἔδαφος, he fell on the ground; 

δανείσατέ μοι ἐπὶ μίαν ἑβδομάδα τοῦτο τὸ βιβλίον, lend 
me this book for a week. 


1%. Παρά, α. With gen., from, by: 
ἔλαβε δῶρον παρὰ τῆς μητρός µου, he received a gift 
from my mother ; , 
ἡ ἐπιστολὴ αὕτη ἐγράφη παρὰ τοῦ ἐξαδέλφου του, this 
letter was written by his cousin. 


ὦ. With dat., by, at the house of: 
ἡ ἀρετὴ καθιστᾷ ἡμᾶς ἀγαπητοὺς παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώ- 
ποις, virtue makes us beloved by God and men : 
διαµένω παρὰ τῷ ἀδελφῷ µου, I live at my brother's 
house. 


312 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ο. With ace., near, by, contrary to, less: 


περιεπάτει παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν, he walked by the river ; 
ἀνέλαβε παρὰ πᾶσαν προσδοκίαν, he recovered, contrary 
to all expectations ; 
δέκα Tapa τέταρτον, a quarter to ten ; 
εἴκοσι παρὰ ὀκτώ, δώδεκα, 20 — 8 = 12. 
18. Πρός, a. With gen., by, for the sake of: 
πρὸς Θεοῦ, for God’s sake. 
b. With dat., in addition to: 
πρὸς τούτοις, besides. 
6. With ace., to, towards, for: 
τὰ παράθυρα βλέπουσι πρὸς βορρᾶν, the windows look 
to the north ; 
ὁ πῖλος χρησιμεύει πρὸς κάλυψιν τῆς κεφαλῆς, the hat 
serves for the protection of the head. 


΄ 


LESSON TWENTY-NINTH 


ΜΑΘΗΜΑ ΕΙΚΟΣΤΟΝ ENNATON 


Τὰ νοσήματα (τέλος) 
Diseases (concluded) 


Μεταξὺ τῶν παθήσεων τοῦ ἀγγειώδους συστήµατος 
Among the affections of the vascular system 
ai καρδιακαὶ νόσοι εἶναι αἱ περισσότεραι. Οἱ 
the heart diseases are the most numerous. Rheu- 
ρευματισμοὶ ἐπιδρώσι συχνάκις ἐπὶ τῆς καρδίας καὶ 
matism acts often uponthe heart and 
παράγουσι παθολογικὰς ἀλλοιώσεις εἰς τὰς κικλίδας. 
causes pathological changes in the valves. 
Ta κύρια συμπτώματα τών παθήσεων τῆς καρδίας 
The chief symptoms οἵ the affections of the heart 
εἶναι ἄτακτος σφιγµός, παλμός, δύσπνοια καὶ 
are irregular pulse, palpitation, difficult breathing, and 
ἄλγος ἐνίοτε. Τὰ αὐτὰ συμπτώματα εἶναι δυνατὸν 
pain sometimes. The same symptoms may 
ὅμως νὰ προέλθωσιν ἐκ δυσπεψίας, καὶ πολλοὶ φαντᾶ- 
also arise from dyspepsia, and many imag- 
ζονται, ὅτι πάσχουσιν ἀπὸ καρδιακῆς νόσου, 
ine that they are suffering from cardiac disease, 
᾿ πράγματι δὲ εἶναι ἁπλῶς καὶ μόνον δυσπεπτικοί. 


but really they are simply and solely dyspeptic. 


514 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Οἱ τοιοῦτοι πολλάκις ἀνησυχοῦσι διὰ τὴν κατάστασιν 
Such often are worried about the state 
τῆς ὑγείας των καὶ γίνονται ὑποχονδριακοί, ἐν ᾧ ἐὰν 
of their health and become hypochondriacal, while if 
συνεβουλεύοντο ἰατρόν τινα οἱ φόβοι των θὰ 
they would consult ἃ physician their fears 
ἔπαυον καὶ τὰ ἀνησυχητικὰ συμπτώματά των θὰ 
would cease and their disquieting symptoms would 
ἐξέλιπον μετὰ μερικὰς δόσεις φαρμάκων. Πολλαὶ 
vanish after afew doses of medicine. | Many 
περιπτώσεις αἰφνιδίου θανάτου εἶναι προϊὸν καρδιακῆς 
cases οἳ sudden death are the result of cardiac 
νόσου. ‘H νεφρῖτις συνδέεται συχνότατα μετὰ 
disease. Bright’s disease is associated very frequently 
τῶν παθήσεων τῆς καρδίας. Ὁ ὕδρωψ' εἶναι κοινὸν 
with affections of the heart. | Dropsy is a common 
σύμπτωμα τῶν νεφριτικῶν νόσων. Τὸ ἀνεύρυσμα εἶναι 
symptom of kidney diseases. An aneurysm is 
τοπικὴ ἐξοίδησις ἀρτηρίας τινός - εἶναι πάντοτε σοβαρὰ 
a local swelling οὗ απ artery; itis always ἃ grave 
ἀσθένεια. Ἢ «Φφλόγωσις τῶν φλεβῶν ὀνομάζεται pre- 
malady. Inflammation of the veins is called phle- 
βῖτι. Οἱ ἠλικιωμένοι πάσχουσι συχνὰ ἀπὸ κιρσῶν. 
bitis. The aged — suffer often from varicose veins. 
Ἐιρσὸς ὁρίζεται ὡς ἀνευρυσμὸς ἢ ἐξοίδησις φλεβός, 
A varix is defined as an aneurysm or swelling of a vein, 
ἰδιαιτέρως τῶν μηρῶν καὶ τῶν σκελῶν. Ἢ φλεβοτομία 
especially of the thighsand of the legs. | Blood-letting 
ἦτο πάλαι κοινὸν θεραπευτικὸν μέσον, ἀλλὰ 
was formerly ἃ common therapeutic measure, but it 
δὲν εἶναι τώρα πολὺ ἐν χρήσει. 
isnot now much in 186. 


DISEASES 315 


,At νευροπάθειαι εἶναι πολὺ γενικαί, ἰδιαιτέρως ὡς 
Nervous diseases are very common, especially, it 
λέγεται ἐν ᾽Αμερικὴ. Ἡ ἀποπληξία εἶναι συνήθως 


is said, in America. Apoplexy is usually 
ἀποτέλεσμα αἱμορραγίας εἰς τὸν ἐγκέφαλον: τὸ 
the result of hemorrhage into the brain; the 


κυριώτερον σύμπτωμα αὐτῆς εἶναι ἡ παράλυσις. Ἡ 
chief symptom of this is paralysis. Epi- 
ἐπιληψία χαρακτηρίζεται δι ἰσχυρῶν συνταράξεων 
lepsy [5 characterized by violent convulsions 
ἢ σπασμῶν τῶν μελῶν τοῦ σώματος. Ἢ αὐτὴ 
or spasms of the members of the body. The same 
ἀσθένεια καλεῖται ὁμοίως σεληνιασμός. Ἢ νευραλγία 
disease is called also falling sickness. Neuralgia 
εἶναι λίαν βασανιστικὴ πάθησις. ᾿Ασθένεια τοῦ 


is ἃ πιοβῦ tormenting affection. Disease of 
ἣν 3 / / ς > / 5 
νοῦς ὀνομάζεται παραφροσύνη. Ἢ ἠλιθιότης εἶναι 
the mind is called insanity. Idiocy is 
εἶδος παραφροσύνης ἐκ γενετῆς. Ἢ ἠλίθιοι εἶναι 
a kind of congenital insanity. Idiots are 


μωροί, ὅλοι οἱ μωροὶ ὅμως δὲν εἶναι ἠλίθιο. ‘O 
stupid, all stupid people, however, are not idiots. One 

μὴ ἀσθενής, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὄχι ὅλως ὑγιὴς εἶναι ἀδιάθετος. 
who is not sick, but still not wholly well, is indisposed. 


"Eye τοὺς πόδας σου ζεστούς, 
Τὴν κεφαλήν σου κρύαν, 

Τὸν στοµαχόν σου ἐλαφρόν, 
᾿Ιατροῦ δὲν ἔχεις χρείαν. 


916 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 4 


a 


Conversation Exercise 


Ποῖαι παθήσεις τοῦ ἀγγειώδους συστήµατος εἶναι a 
περισσότεραι; ᾿Επιδρῶσιν οἱ ρευματισμοὶ συχνάκις ἐπ 
τῆς καρδίας; Τί παράγουσιν εἰς τὰς κικλίδας τῆς καρ- 


« 
ι 
\ 
υ 


δίας; Εἶναι σοβαρόν τι αἱ παθολογικαὶ βλάβαι" τῶν. 


aA / 5 . \ 
κικλίδων τῆς καρδίας; μάλιστα, εἶναι συνήθως πολὺ σο- 
βαρόν, τῷ ὄντι ἀποτελοῦσι µίαν τῶν σοβαρωτάτων νόσων 
τῆς καρδίας. Loita εἶναι τὰ κύρια συμπτώματα τῶν πα- 
A 5 ε , ε 
θήσεων τῆς καρδίας; Elvas ὁ ἄτακτος σφιγμὸς καὶ ὁ 
\ \ / ” / 2 3 
παλμὸς σοβαρὰ συμπτώματα; ὄχι πάντοτε." Εΐναι δυ- 
~ / 
νατὸν νὰ προέλθωσι τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐκ δυσπεψίας; Φαν- 
/ Ν 3 / [τὸ / 3 \ 
τάζονται πολλοὶ ἐσφαλμένως OTL πάσχουσιν ἅπο Kap- 
διακῆς νόσου; Εἶναι οἱ τοιοῦτοι συχνάκις ἁπλῶς καὶ 
A “ \ \ 
µόνον δυσπεπτικοί; ᾿Ανησυχοῦσιν αὐτοὶ διὰ τὴν κατά- 
a 6 Υ͂ Ν » e / 2X 
στασιν τῆς ὑγείας των; Oa ἔπαυον οἱ φόβοι των ἐὰν 
/ \ 
συνεβουλεύοντο ἰατρόν Twa; Oa ἐξέλειπον τὰ avynov- 
/ 
χητικὰ συμπτώµατά των μετὰ μερικὰς δόσεις φαρμάκων ; 
Εἶναι πολλαὶ περιπτώσεις αἰφνιδίου θανάτου προϊὸν καρ- 
n 4 A 
διακῆς νόσου; Συνδέεται συχνάκις ἡ νεφρῖτις μετὰ τῶν 
/ ο ο 5 
παθήσεων τῆς καρδίας; ἸΠοῖον εἶναι τὸ κοινὸν σύμπτωμα 
n lal ’ A 93 
τῶν νεφριτικῶν νόσων; Πῶς ὀνομάζεται ἡ φλόγωσις 
a A SQ/ / 8 9 is haben: / 
τῶν φλεβῶν; Eidos τι νοσήματος" εἶναι τὸ ἀνεύρυσμα ; 
7 ewe / 5 \ = A - ς / ε 
Πάσχουσιν οἱ ἡλικιωμένοι ἀπὸ κιρσῶν; Ls ορίζεται ο 
/ 5 \ 
Ripe O83 Ἠτο πάλαι ἡ φλεβοτομία κοινὸν θεραπευτικὸν 
μέσον; Εἶναι Τώρα πολὺ ἐν χρήσει; 
Eis ποίαν ἜΣ αἱ νευροπάθειαι εἶναι ἰδιαιτέρως 
κοιναί; Εἶναι ἡ ἀποπληξία συνήθως ἀποτέλεσμα αἷς 
/ > \ > / / 5 \ / 
µορραγίας εἰς τὸν ἐγκέφαλον; Τί εἶναι τὸ κυριώτερον 
J a / 
σύμπτωμα αὐτῆς; Διὰ ποίων συμπτωμάτων χαρακτη- 
1 Lesions, injuries. 2 Not always. ὃ What kind of a disease? 
4In what country ? ᾿ 


———— 


ων, 


READING EXERCISE 317 


ῥίζεται ἡ ἐπιληψία; Πῶς καλεῖται ὁμοίως ἡ αὐτὴ ἀσθέ- 
νεια; Δὲν εἶναι ἡ 
θησις ; 


ἠλιθιότης εἶδος παραφροσύνης ἐκ γενετῆς; "Όλοι οἱ 


/ x 
νευραλγία λίαν βασανιστικὴ πά- 


- / x 9 
1 ὥς ὀνομάζεται ἡ ἀσθένεια τοῦ νοός; Εἶναι ἡ 
ἠλίθιοι εἶναι μωροί: εἶναι ὅμως ὅλοι οἱ μωροὶ ἠλίθιοι ; 
a cf δ / 1 
Πῶς ὁρίζεται ἡ ἀδιαθεσία; 


1 Indisposition. 


Reading Exercise 


John Stuart Blackie 
(συνέχεια). 
Ἠπανελθὼν δὲ εἰς ᾿Αθή- 
νας καὶ συναντήσας τὸν κα- 
θηγητὴν Kendrick καὶ τὸν 
"Αρνολδ, ἐπεχείρησε μετ 
> - ή Ν 

αὐτῶν περιοδείαν διὰ Θερ- 
μοπυλῶν, τῶν Ἱ]λαταιῶν, 
τοῦ Ὀρχομενοῦ,τόν Θηβῶν, 
τών Δελφών μέχρι τοῦ Παρ- 
νασσοῦ. "Ὥδευον δὲ ἱππεύ- 
οντες καὶ ἀναγκαζόμενοι νὰ 
ἐφοδιάζωνται μὲ τροφάς: 

9 8 / / > / 
NTO ἢ πορεία λίαν ἐπίπο- 
ο φ x ’ 
vos ἕως ov φθάσαντες εἰς 
τὰς σκιερὰς χαράδρας τοῦ 
Παρνασσοῦ, συνήντησαν 
μέγα ποιμνιοστάσιον, ὅπου 
οἱ ποιμένες ἐδέξαντο αὐτοὺς 
7 \ «πας .. Ν 
φιλοξένως, κατὰ τὰ ἀρχαϊκὰ 
αὐτῶν ἔθιμα. Zwnpotatn 
εἶναι ἡ περιγραφὴ τῆς σκη- 


John Stuart Blackie 
(continued). 


Upon returning to 
Athens and. meeting Pro- 
fessors Kendrick and Ar- 
nold, he undertook with 
them a journey through 
Thermopylae, Plataa, Or- 
chomenus, Thebes, and 
Delphi as far as Par- 
nassus. They travelled 
horse-back, and were 
obliged to provide them- 
selves with provisions. 
The journey was very 
tiresome, until, arriving at 
the shady ravines of Par- 
nassus, they came upon a 
large shepherds’ gather- 
ing, where the shepherds 
welcomed them _hospita- 
bly according {ο their 


818 


a 3 / ο 3 / 
νῆς ἐκείνης, ἥτις ἐνεθουσί- 
a / Ψ \ \ 
ασε τοῦ Βλάκη ὥστε καὶ νὰ 
ψάλλῃ μεγαλοφώνως θού- 
ριον τῶν Σκότων ὀρεινῶν. 
Ἠπανακάμψας εἰς ᾿Αθήνας 
μεσοῦντος τοῦ ᾿Τουνίου, εὗρε 
τὸν καύσωνα ἀφόρητον, 
ϱ/ 3 \ 3 ͵ 
ὥστε ἐκδραμὼν εἰς Σού- 
\ 3 / \ 
νιον καὶ ἐπιστρέψας διὰ 
ο) A Ἂς aA 
τοῦ Μαραθῶνος καὶ τοῦ 
Πεντελικοῦ, ἀπῆλθε λίαν 
3 N / 
ἐξησθενημένος' ἀλλὰ μέ- 
χρις ἐσχάτης του πνοῆς 
€ 
ἐκήρυττεν, OTL ἡ ὁδοιπορία 
3 / 5 ον δ / 
του ἐκείνη ὑπῆρξεν ἡ πλέον 
ἀξιομνημόνευτος περίοδος 
τοῦ βίου αὐτοῦ. "Ex δὲ 
/ / 
Ῥιέννης ἔγραφεν: 


ες / 3 \ 
Ἠπανακάμπτων εἰς τὰ 
/ ΄ A 

ἴδια, δόξα τῷ Θεώ, πεπλου- 
/ he 3 / Ν 
τισμένος μὲ νέας ἰδέας καὶ 

/ > / Ἂν ο 6 
νέα αἰσθήματα περὶ τοῦ ἑλ- 


ληνικοῦ λαοῦ καὶ τῆς ἑλλη-. 


νικῆς φύσεως, ἅς ποτε δὲν 
θὰ ἠδυνάμην νὰ πορισθῶ ἐκ 
τῶν βιβλίων. ᾿Ολίγη ζῶσα 
πεῖρα τοιαύτη εἶναι ἀἄξιω- 
τέρα τῆς ἀναγνώσεως ὁλο- 
κλήρου βιβλιοθήκης.’ 
Πρακτικὸν δὲ συµπέρα- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ancient customs. Most 
vivid is the description of 
that scene, which so in- 
spirited Blackie that he 
sang in a loud voice a 
war song of the Scottish 
Highlanders. Returning 
to Athens the middle of 
June, he found the heat 
unbearable, and after run- 
ning out to Sounion and 
returning by way of Mara- 
thon and Pentelicus, he 
departed greatly exhaust- 
ed. But up to his last 
breath he declared that 
that journey of his was 
the most memorable peri- 
od of his life. From Vi- 
enna he wrote: : 

“T am coming home, 
God be praised, much en- 
riched with new ideas and. 
feelings in reference to 
Greek men and Greek 
nature that books could 
never have given me. A 
little experience of this 
kind is worth libraries of 
learning.” 


A practical result of 


READING EXERCISE 


.σμα τῆς πείρας ταύτης 
ὑπῆρξεν ἡ ἐκ τῆς µελέτης 
τῆς νεωτέρας γλώσσης πε- 
ποίθησις, ὅτι ἡ µετάφρασις 
τῆς Ἰλιάδος ἣν εἶχεν ἤδη 
> - ο / » \ 
ἐπιχειρήσει TO λίαν ἀτελὴς 

\ iva ΝΜ ἣν > ‘ 
καὶ OTL ὠφείλε νὰ ἐπανα- 
λάβῃ τὸ ἔργον ἐξ ἀρχῆς. 
Πρὸς τελειοτέραν δὲ διδα- 
χὴν τῆς ἑλληνικῆς, συµπα- 
ρέλαβε βοηθὸν τὸν ἀρχαῖον 

> a / ’ / 
αὐτοῦ καθηγητήν, ᾿]άκωβον 
Δοναλδσῶνα (νῦν πρύτανιν 
τοῦ Πανεπιστημίου τοῦ 
"Αγίου ᾿Ανδρέα) ὅστις ἀπε- 
δέξατο τελείως τὰς περὶ 

a BJ ΄ 3 

προφορᾶς ἀρχάς του. ἸΑμ- 
Φότεροι δὲ ἐξηκολούθουν 
ἐνήμεροι τῆς ἐν Ἑλλάδι 
Φιλολοηγικῆς κινήσεως καὶ 
τῶν κατὰ τὴν ἐποχὴν ἐκεί- 
νην πολιτικών περιπετειών, 
ἀναγινώσκοντες τακτικὰ 
τὰς ᾿Αθηναϊκὰς ἐφημερίδας 
καὶ ἀπαγγέλλοντες κλέφτι- 
| κα τραγούδια. 

Τὸν δ᾽ ἀκατάσχετον τοῦ- 
τὸν πρὸς τὴν ᾿λλάδα καὶ 
Λο \ / BA 
τὰ EXANVLKA γράμματα Epw- 
Ta µετέδιδεν εἰς τοὺς µα- 
θητὰς αὐτοῦ. “Ὥστε ἱδρύ- 
θη περὶ τὸ 1856 καὶ ἡ 


919 


this journey was the con- 
viction, from the study of 
the modern language, that 
the translation of the Iliad 
which he had already un- 
dertaken was very imper- 
fect, and that he must go 
over the work again from 
the beginning. In order 
to a more complete in- 
struction in Greek, he 
took along as assistant 
his old professor,. James 
Donaldson (now Rector 
of the University of St. 
Andrew), who accepted en- 
tirely his authority in re- 
gard to the pronunciation. 
Both kept themselves in- 
formed concerning the 
literary movement in 
Greece, and of the polit- 
ical changes of that time, 
reading regularly the 
Athenian newspapers and 
reciting Klephtic ballads. 
This impetuous love for 
Greece and Greek letters 
he communicated also to 
his pupils. And so, about 
1856, was founded the 
“Blackie Brotherhood,” 


320 


/᾿Αδελφότης τοῦ Βλάκη," 
ἧς σκοπὸς ἦν οἰκειοτέρα καὶ 
στενωτέρα τῶν προσφιλῶν 
ἐκείνων ἰδεῶν ἀνακίνησις. 
Τῶν συνεντεύξεων τούτων 
ὡς καὶ τῆς ὅλης ἑλληνικῆς 
τοῦ Βλάκη διανοητικῆς ζωῆς 
oN e n Ν 3. τν / 
προϊὸν "ὑπῆρξαν τὰ μετ᾽ ὁλί- 
γον δημοσιευθέντα ᾿ Αισμα- 
τα καὶ μῦθοι τῆς ἀρχαίας 
Ἑλλάδος. 
ἐξέδοτο Φιλοσοφικὴν διατρι- 
\ % a be a \ 
βὴν περὶ τοῦ ἸΚαλοῦ κατὰ 
Τὸ 


» 5 / »Μ 
θον ἔτος ἐποιήσατο ἔναρξιν 


\ 
Mer οὐ πολὺ 


Πλάτωνα. δ᾽ ἀκόλου- 
τών παραδόσεων αὐτοῦ διὰ 
διαλέξεως περὶ τῆς ὁμοιό- 
τητος τῶν Highlanders τῆς 
Σκωτίας καὶ τῶν ὀρεινῶν 
τῆς Ἑλλάδος. Eis τὰς περὶ 
Ἑλλάδος παντοίας γνώσεις 
του προσέτρεξε καὶ ὁ ἐπι- 
φανὴς φυσιοδίφης Sir Rod- 
erick Murchison, συγγρά- 
Pav περὶ τῆς γεωλογίας τῆς 
Ἑλλάδος. 

Ἢ περίοδος αὕτη τοῦ βίου 
τοῦ ἀειμνήστου Φιλέλληνος 
εἶναι ἀξιομνημόνευτος καὶ 
διὰ δύο ἕτερα περιστατικά. 
Περὶ τὸ 1860 συνηντήθη 
τὸ πρῶτον μετὰ τοῦ Γλάδ- 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


the object of which was 
the more intimate and 
closer agitation of those 
beloved ideas. 

A product of these re- 
unions, as also of Blackie’s 
whole Greek intellectual 
life, were the “ Lays and Le- 
gends of Ancient Greece,” 
published a little later. 
Not long after he pub- 
lished a philosophical trea- 
tise on Plato’s Doctrine of 
the Beautiful. The fol- 
lowing year he made a 
beginning of his course 
of lectures on the resem- 
blance of the Highlanders 
of Scotland to the moun- 
taineers of Greece. The 
celebrated naturalist, Sir 
Roderick Murchison, also 
had recourse to his varied 
knowledge of Greece when 
he was writing on the ge- 
ology of Greece. 

This period of the life 
of the ever-to-be-remem- 
bered Philhellene is mem- 
orable also because of two 
other incidents. About 
1860 he met Gladstone for 


VERBS 


\ 
στωνος καὶ ἐγνώρισεν αὐτὸν 
n a \ 
προσωπικώς, ἀφοῦ ἀπὸ πολ- 
ο 7 a 
λοῦ χρόνου παντοῖοι κοινοὶ 
a \ 
δεσμοὶ συνεῖχον αὐτοὺς δια- 
νοητικῶς. Κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν 
\ / 4 x A a 
δὲ χρόνον, ἡ διὰ τῆς φειδοῦς 
καὶ τῆς φιλοπονίας αὐξη- 
θεῖσα οὐσία τοῦ ὀλιγαρκοῦς 
ζεύγους κατέστησεν ἐφικτὸν 
τὸν πόθον ἐγκαταστάσεως 
ἀναπαυτικωτέρας. Διεκο- 
/ i aged 3 3 - 7 
σμήθη δὲ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῶν δι 
> / \ / . 
ELKOVWV καὶ τοπίων ἑλληνι- 
a 8 .] >’ ~ > 
κῶν καὶ δι’ ἐπιγραφῶν ἐκ 
ο δ / \ ΄ A 
τοῦ Ὁμήρου καὶ τῶν ἄλ- 
~ δ 
λων θεῶν οὓς ἐλάτρευεν ὁ 
Βλάκης. 
/ εὖ / 
(ἕπεται τὸ τέλος.) 


321 


the first time, and made 
his personal acquaintance. 
after various common ties 
had for a long time bound 
them together intellectu- ᾿ 
ally. At the same time 
the means of the frugal 
couple, enlarged through 
economy and _ industry, 
made possible the desire 
for a more comfortable es- 
tablishment. Their home 
was adorned with Greek 
pictures and _ landscapes 
and with inscriptions from 
Homer and the other gods 
whom Blackie worshipped. 
(To be concluded.) 


VERBS 


ἐπανελθών, 2d aor. part. ἐπανέρχομαι, to return. 
συναντήσας, aor. part. συναντώ(άω), to meet. 
ἐπεχείρησε, aor. ind. ἐπιχειρῶ(έω), to undertake. 
ὥδευον, imp. ind. ὁδεύω, to travel. 

ἱππεύοντες, pres. part. ἱππεύω, to ride horseback. 
ἀναγκαζόμενοι, pres. part. pass. ἀναγκάξζω, to compel. 
ἐφοδιάζωνται, pres. subj. mid. ἐφοδιάζω, to victual. 


ἦτο, imp. ind. εἶμαι, to be. 


φθάσαντες, aor. part. φθάνω, to arrive. 
συνήντησαν, aor. ind. συναντῶ(άω), to meet. 
ἐδέξαντο, aor. ind. δέχομαι, to receive, welcome. 


21 


822 MODERN GREEK MASTERY | 


ἐνεθουσίασε, aor. ind. ἐνθουσιάξω, to inspirit, exalt. 

ψάλλῃ, pres. subj. ο. to sing. 

ἐπανακάμψας, aor. Paes ἐπανακάμπτω, to return. 

εὗρε, 2d aor. ind. εὑρίσκω, to find. 

ἐκδραμών, 2d aor. part. ἐκτρέχω, to make an excursion. 

ἐπιστρέψας, aor. part. ἐπιστρέφω, to return, come back. 

ἀπῆλθε, 2d aor. ind. ἀπέρχομαι, to depart. 

ἐξησθενημένος, perf. part. mid. ἐξασθενῶ(έω). to become 
weak, enfeebled. 

ἐκήρυττε, imp. ind. κηρύττω, to declare, proclaim. 

ὑπῆρξε, aor. ind. ὑπάρχω, to be. 

ἔγραφε, imp. ind. γράφω, to write. 

ἐπανακάμπτων, pres. part. ἐπανακάμπτω, to return. 

πεπλουτισµένος, perf. part. pass. πλουτίζω, to enrich. 

ἠδυνάμην, imp. ind. δύναμαι, to be able. 

πορισθῶ, aor. subj. mid. πορίζω, to procure, furnish. 

εἶχεν ἐπιχειρήσει; plup. ind. ἐπιχειρῷ(έω), to undertake. 

ὤφειλε, imp. ind. ὀφείλω, to owe, be obliged. 

ἐπαναλάβῃ, 2d aor. subj. ἐπαναλαμβάνω, to repeat. 

συµπαρέλαβε, δὰ aor. ind. συμπαραλαμβάνω, to take — 
along with. 

ἀπεδέξατο, aor. ind. ἀποδέχομαι, to accept. 

ἐξηκολούθουν, i imp. ind. ἐξακολουθῶ{έω), to continue. 

ἀναγινώσκοντες, pres. part. ἀναγινώσκω, to read. 

ἀπαγγέλλοντες, pres. part. ἀπαγγέλλω, to recite. 

μετέδιδε, imp. ind. µεταδίδω, to impart, communicate. 

ἱδρύθη, aor. ind. pass. ἱδρύω, to establish. 

ἦν, imp. ind. εἰμί (εἶμαι), to be. 

δηµοσιευθέντα, aor. part. pass. δηµοσιεύω, to publish. 

ἐξέδοτο, aor. ind. ἐκδίδωμι (ἐκδίδω), to publish. 

ἐποιήσατο, aor. ind. mid. ποιώ(εω), to make, do. 

προσέτρεξε, aor. ind. προστρέχω, to have recourse to. 


PREPOSITIONAL ADVERBS 323 


συνηντήθη, aor. ind. mid. συναντῶ(άω), to meet. 
ἐγνώρισε, aor. ind. γνωρίζω, to know. 

συνεῖχον, imp. ind. συνέχω, to hold together, bind. 
κατέστησε, aor. ind. καθιστῶ(άω), to constitute, render. 
διεκοσµήθη, aor. ind. mid. διακοσμῶ(έω), to adorn. 
ἐλάτρευε, imp. ind. λατρεύω, to honor, worship, revere. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be done after the usual manner. 


Grammar 


PREPOSITIONAL ADVERBS 


In addition to the true prepositions there are several 
adverbs which are used in the sense of prepositions, 
governing the genitive case. These are: 


avev, Without κατέναντι, Opposite 

ἀναλόγως, in relation to κατόπιν, behind 

avapetaév,between,among κύκλῳ, round 

ἀντικρύ, Opposite μακράν, far from 

ἀπέναντι, Opposite : µεταξύ, between, among 

ἄχρι(ς), as far as, until µέχρι(ς), as far as, until 

δίκην, as, like παραπλεύρως, by, near 

diya, δίχως, without πάρεξ, except 

ἐγγύς, near πέραν, the other side of 

ἐκτός, outside of, except πέριξ, round 

ἔναντι, Opposite πλήν, except 

ἐναντίον, against πλησίον, near 

ἕνεκα, ἕνεκεν, on account of συνεπείᾳ, in consequence of 
᾿ ἐντός, Within — χάριν, for the sake of 


ἐνώπιον, in the presence of χωρίς, without 


324 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Δίκην, ἕνεκα or ἕνεκεν, and χάριν may either follow 
or precede the substantive governed; the other prepo- 
sitional adverbs and the prepositions themselves pre- 
cede the substantive, almost without exception. 

“Awa, aS soon as, governs the dative. 


LESSON THIRTIETH 


ΜΔΘΗΜΑ ΤΡΙΑΚΟΣΤΟΝ 


Τὸ ταξειδεύειν 


Travelling 


Taviv ταξειδεύει τις πολὺ ταχύτερον ἢ τὸ 
Nowadays onetravels much more rapidly than 
/ / \ 3 / A / 
πάλαι. Σιδηρόδρομοι καὶ ἀτμόπλοια μᾶς µεταφέρουσι 
formerly. Railways and steamships transport us 
ταχέως εἰς τὰ μᾶλλον ἁπώτατα µέρη τῆς γῆς. 
swiftly tothe most distant parts of the earth. 
Ἢ ἁμαξοστοιχία ἀποτελεῖται ἐκ τῆς ἀτμαμάξης 
The railroad train consists of the locomotive 
\ \ ς \ iA A e / \ \ 
µε την ὑπηρετικὴν ἅμαξαν, τῆς ἁμάξης διὰ τὰς 
with the tender, baggage-car (luggage- 
ἀποσκευὰς καὶ μερικῶν ἁμαξῶν διὰ τοὺς ἐπιβάτας. 
van), and several cars for the passengers, 
Οἱ ἐπιβάται τῆς πρώτης θέσεως ταξειδεύουσι τὴν νύκτα 
The first-class passengers travel at night 
> / \ \ € / 2 3 / 
εἰς κλιναµαξας, καὶ τὴν ἡμέραν εἰς αἰθουσαμάξας, 
in sleeping-cars, and by day in drawing-room cars, 
τοὐλάχιστον εἰς τὴν χώραν ταύτην: εἰς τὴν Εὐρώπην 
at Ιοαδῦ.. in this country ; in Europe | 
τὰ ἔθιμα εἶναι κατά τι διάφορα, καὶ ai ἅμαξαι 
the customs are somewhat different, and the cars 


326 ὃ MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


5 / > Ἣν ΄ὔ > \ ~ 
είναι κατεσκευασµεναι κατ ἄλλον τύπον. ᾿Εντὸς τών 


are built after another model. Within the 
πόλεων ἡ συγκοινωνία «γίνεται διὰ ἱπποσιδηρο- 
cities communication is effected by means of 


δρόμων ἢ ἠλεκτροσιδηροδρόμων, καὶ ἐν Νέα “Υόρκη 
horse Οὐ electric railways, and in New York 
καὶ Σικάγῳ διὰ τῶν ὑπεργείων τροχιοδρόµων. 
and Chicago by means of the elevated railroads. 

᾿Ἠνίοτε ἐποχεῖταί τις ἐφ᾽ ἁμάξης, ἀλλὰ τοῦτο εἶναι - 
Sometimes one drives in a cab, but this is 
πολὺ δαπανηρόν, διότι τὰ μεταφορικὰ εἶναι ὑπέρογκα 
very expensive, for the rate of fare is exorbitant 
ἐν συγκρίσει πρὸς τὰ τοῦ τροχιοδρόμου. Οἱ 
in comparison with that of the street railway. The 
πλούσιοι καὶ οἱ εὐποροῦντες ἔχουσιν ἰδικάς των ἁμά- 

rich and_ well-to-do have their own car- 
Eas ἐπὶ τῶν ὁποίων περιδιαβάξουσι πρὸς τέρψιν. 
riages, in which they go about for pleasure. 
Μερικοὶ ἱππεύουσιν εἰς τοὺς περιβόλους καὶ εἰς τὴν 
Some ride horseback in the parks and in the 
ἐξοχήν, ἀλλὰ πολλοὶ ἄλλοι μεταβαίνουσιν ἐπὶ ποδηλά- 
country, but many others ride on _bicy- 
των. Τὸ ποδηλατεῖν εἶναι πολὺ τερπνὴ καὶ ὑγιεινὴ 
cles. Bicycling is a very pleasant and healthy 
ἄσκησις ὅπου ai ὁδοὶ εἶναι καλαὶ καὶ ὄχι πολὺ 
exercise where the roads απ fine and not too 
ἀνώμαλοι. 

hilly (uneven). 

Ἐπὶ ὑγρῶν ἐπιφανειῶν-- ποταμῶν, λιμνῶν καὶ τῆς 
. Upon fluid surfaces — rivers, lakes, and the 
θαλάσσης---ταξειδεύουσιν εἰς πλοῖα. Τὰ ἱστιοφόρα 

sea —people travel in ships. Sailing vessels 


TRAVELLING 327 
ἦσαν πάλαι τὸ μόνον μέσον συγκοινωνίας, 
were formerly the only means of ἰταπδρογίαδίοῃ, 
ἀλλὰ νῦν πταξειδεύει τις πολὺ ταχύτερον δι 

but now one travels much more quickly by 


ἀτμοπλοίων. Τὸ πλοῖον συνίσταται ἐκ σκάφους, ἱστῶν 
steamer. The ship consists of hull, masts, 
καὶ ἱστίων, πηδαλιουχεῖται δὲ διὰ τοῦ πηδαλίου. 
and sails, and is steered by the rudder. 
Τὸ πρόσθιον µέρος τοῦ σκάφους καλεῖται πρώρα, 
The front portion of the hull is called bow (prow), 
τὸ ὀπίσθιον πρύμνη, τὸ ἄνω µέρος τὸ κατάστρωμα, καὶ 
the back stern, the upper part the deck, and 
τὸ κάτω ἡ τρόπις. ᾿Ἠντὸς τοῦ σκάφους εὑρίσκονται 
the lower the keel. Within the hull are found 
οἱ θαλαμίσκοι καὶ ἡ ἀποθήκη. Τὸ πλοῖον κυβερνᾶται 
the cabins and thehold. The ship is managed 
παρὰ τοῦ πληρώματος ἐπὶ κεφαλῆς τοῦ ὁποίου ἵσταται 
by the crew, at the head of which stands 
ὁ πλοίαρχο». "Όταν τὸ πλοῖον εἰσέρχηται els λιμένα 
the captain. Whenthe ship _ enters a harbor it 
ὁδηγεῖται διὰ πλοηγοῦ. 
is guided by ἃ pilot. 

Κάμνουσιν ἐκδρομὰς πρὸς τέρψιν διὰ λέμβων, 

People make excursions for pleasure ἴῃ rowboats, 
πλοιαρίων καὶ θαλαμηγών. Μερικοὶ πλούσιοι ἔχουσιν 


sail-boats, and yachts. Many rich people own 
εὐρείας θαλαμηγοὺς ἀτμοκινήτους διὰ τῶν ὁποίων 
large steam yachts, by means of which 


κάμνουσι μακρὰς ἐκδρομὰς καὶ ταξειδεύουσιν ἐνίοτε 
they make long trips, ἃ: ἃ travel sometimes 
καὶ περὶ τὴν γῆν. 

even round the world. 


828 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


“Ev τῶν μεγίστων προτερημάτων τοῦ πλούτου εἶναι 
One of the greatest advantages of wealth is 
ὅτι φέρει τοὺς κατόχους του εἰς θέσιν νὰ περιηγώνται 

that it brings its possessors in position to travel 
ὁπουδήποτε θέλουσι, καὶ νὰ ἐπισκέπτωνται ξένα µέρη. 
wherever they wish, and to visit foreign parts. 


Conversation Exercise 


“ / A 
Ταξειδεύει τις τανῦν ταχύτερον ἢ τὸ πάλαι; Μᾶς με- 
, e / > \ A ᾽ η / 
ταφέρουσιν οἱ σιδηρόδρομοι εἰς τὰ μᾶλλον ἅπώτατα µέρη 
a aA ” / e ὃ ὃ > \ \ x εν) f 
τῆς γῆς ; ὄχι μόνον οἱ σιδηρὀδροµοι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ ἀτμό- 
al \ > / / “ A 
πλοια μᾶς φέρουσιν εἰς τὰ ἁπώτατα µέρη τῆς γῆς. Ἐκ 
ποίων ἁμαξῶν ἀποτελεῖται ἡ ἁμαξοστοιχία; Kis ποῖα 
7 ς aA fe x / ς 9 / ο # 
εἴδη ἁμαξών ταξειδεύουσι τὴν νύκτα οἱ ἐπιβάται τῆς πρώ- 
/ / 3 >] is \ ε / 
τής θέσεως; Ταξειδεύουσιν εἰς αἰθουσαμάξας τὴν ἡμέ- 
7 e/ > ¢/. \ / Ἃ / 
ραν; Ταξειδεύουσιν οὕτω εἰς ὅλας τὰς χώρας ἢ μόνον 
> 4 \ / 5 A ey / ΄' 
εἰς ταύτην την χωραν; Kivar τὰ ἔθιμα κατά τι, διάφορα 
\ / 5 e 
εἰς τὴν Εὐρώπην; Εἶναι αἱ ἅμαξαι κατεσκευασµέναι 
3 ν᾽, τὰ 2 a ~ / ¢€ / 
κατ ἄλλον τύπον ἐκεῖ; Πῶς γίνεται ἡ συγκοινωνία 
ἐντὸς τῶν πόλεων; ᾿Εποχεῖταί τις ἐνίοτε ἐφ᾽ ἁμάξης ; 
Ὁ \ , A 
Διατί εἶναι δαπανηρὰ αὕτη ἡ μέθοδος τῆς συγκοινωνίας ; 
5 \ \ A / 
Εἶναι τὰ μεταφορικὰ τῆς ἁμάξης ὑπέρογκα ἐν συγκρίσει 
\ \ An if 
πρὸς τὰ τοῦ τροχιοδρόµου; Ἐχουσιν οἱ πλούσιοι καὶ οἱ 
5) lal > / / 
εὐποροῦντες ἰδικάς των ἁμάξας ; Περιδιαβάξουσι πρὸς 
/ vd \ 3 - ~ 
τέρψιν ἐπὶ ἰδικῶν των ἁμαξῶν; Δὲν ἱππεύουσι πολλοὶ 
3 \ / ς £ 1 / \ 3 \ 
εἰς τοὺς περιβόλους; “ἹἹππεύουσιν ἐπίσης καὶ εἰς τὴν 
3 / \ / ᾿ 
ἐξοχήν; Δὲν μεταβαίνουσι περισσότεροι ἐπὶ ποδηλά- 
4/1 » 4) Ν nm 5 ἧς 
των; Τι ἄσκησις εἶναι τὸ ποδηλατεῖν; Ἐλναι τὸ πο. 
A \ \ \ 
δηλατεῖν τερπνὴ καὶ ὑγιεινὴ ἄσκησις; μάλιστα, εἶναι 


' Abbreviation of τίνος εἴδους, of what kind—what kind of an exercise ? 


| 
| 


READING EXERCISE - κ 329 
i 


τα wg ϱ/ τε \ 5 \ bet 2). \ 
τερπνὴ ἄσκησις ὅπου αἱ ὁδοὶ εἶναι καλαὶ καὶ ὄχι πολυ 
ἀνώμαλοι. 
Αα id la) “ A A 
Πῶς ταξειδεύουσιν ἐπὶ τῶν ὑγρῶν ἐπιφανειῶν;' Πῶς 
A \ / Μ A ς a > A 
καλοῦνται τὰ διάφορα εἴδη τῶν ὑγρῶν ἐπιφανειῶν; κα- 
an 7 / 5 A 
λοῦνται ποταμοί, λίμναι καὶ θάλασσα. ᾖἸΐναι νῦν τὰ 
ς \ / , 
ἱστιοφόρα τὸ μόνον μέσον συγκοινωνίας ; ὄχι, τώρα τα- 
/ \ / be ee / .) / 
ξειδεύει τις πολὺ ταχύτερον δι ἀτμοπλοίων. Ἐκ ποίων 
“ ff \ “ \ i a 
µερων συνίσταται το πλοῖον; Ata τίνος πηδαλιουχεῖ- 
ο a \ A 
ται; lds καλεῖται ἡ λαβὴ" τοῦ πηδαλίου, ἀγγλιστὶ 
Ψ ο) ς lal “ 
tiller; καλεῖται ὁ οἴαξ. Πῶς καλοῦνται τὰ διάφορα 
/ “ / / ς / 3 Ν A 1d 
μέρη τοῦ σκάφους; Τί εὑρίσκεται ἐντὸς τοῦ σκάφους ; 
Παρὰ τίνος κυβερνᾶται τὸ πλοῖον; Τίς ἵσταται ἐπὶ 
an A e “ A 
κεφαλῆς τοῦ πληρώματος; Tis ὁδηγεῖ τὸ πλοῖον, 
/ 
ὅταν εἰσέρχηται εἰς τὸν λιμένα; Διὰ τίνων κάμνουσιν 
5 4, 3 VA 5 ὁ A 3 A 93/ 
ἐκδρομὰς πρὸς τέρψιν ἐπὶ ὑγρῶν ἐπιφανειῶν ; ἔχουσι 
μερικοὶ πλούσιοι εὐρείας" θαλαμηγοὺς ἀτμοκινήτους ;" 
/ \ b \ \ / \ ΄ 
Κάμνουσι μακρὰς ἐκδρομὰς διὰ τούτων; Δὲν ταξειδεύ- 
a \ A δν. κ ἃ ο) 
ουσιν ἐνίοτε dv αὐτῶν καὶ περὶ τὴν γῆν; Τί εἶναι ὃν τῶν 
/ ~ / 9 
μεγίστων προτερημάτων τοῦ πλούτου; Δὲν φέρει οὗτος 
\ lal ε 
τοὺς κατόχους του εἰς θέσιν νὰ περιηγῶνται ὁπουδήποτε 
/ / ς / ee ᾽ / 
θέλουσιν; Δύνανται οἱ πλούσιοι νὰ ἐπισκέπτωνται ξένα 


µέρη ; 


1Fluid surfaces, 7.e., water. 3 Handle. *Eupvs, εὐρεῖα, εὐρύ, 
spacious, roomy. 4 Lit., moved by steam. 
) ᾽ « 


Reading Exercise 


John Stuart Blackie John Stuart Blackie 
(τέλος). (concluded). 
ANN ἡ εὐτυχία δὲν ἤμ- But success did not 
βλυνε τὸν ζῆλον τοῦ Βλάκη blunt Blackie’s zeal for 
ὑπὲρ τῶν ἀρχῶν ἃς ἀνέ- the principles which from 


980 


καθεν ἐξυπηρέτησε. Kal? 
ὅλον τὸ 1865 καὶ 1866 ἐσυ- 
νηγόρει ὑπὲρ τῆς καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς 
A 3 2 ~ 1 
προφορᾶς δι ἐπιστολῶν ἐν 
τῷ “ Χρόνῳ," τῷ “ Ἑκότῳ) 
καὶ ἄλλαις ἐφημερίσι. Τὴν 
δὲ θέρμην τῆς “ ἑλληνικῆς 
ἑταιρίας" ἐπηύξανε, κομί. 
Sov ἐξ Ἑλλάδος ὑπὲρ τῶν 
συνεταίρων ἑλληνικὸν οἶνον. 
Δὲν εἶχεν ἐγκαταλείψει, ἐν 
τῷ μεταξὺ, τὸ ἔργον τῆς 
/ At / 
µεταφράσεως τοῦ Ὁμήρου, 
> \ \ A > 
ἀλλὰ μετὰ πολυετῆ ἐργα- 
/ 3 / Σο / 
σίαν ἐδημοσίευσεν ἰδίᾳ δα- 
πάνῃ τὸ προσφιλὲς αὐτώβι- 
Αλίον. 
1867 ἀνέγνωσεν ὁ Ἑλάκης 


Kata τὸν Μάϊον τοῦ 


ἐν τῷ Βασιλικῷ Ἰνστιτούτῳ 
τοῦ Λονδίνου, νέαν περὶ προ- 
φορᾶς διατριβὴν, “ Music of 
Speech in the Greek and 
Latin Languages.”  Ἔπα- 
νακάµψας δ᾽ εἰς Εδιμβοῦρ- 
γον ἠσχολήθη περὶ τὴν δη- 
µώδη διδαχὴν καὶ διάδοσιν 
τῆς 
Πρὸς τὸν σκοπὸν τοῦτον 


ἑλληνικῆς γλώσσης. 
ἐξέδοτο μετ᾽ ὀλίγον σειρὰν 
ἀγγλοελληνικῶν διαλόγων, 
καὶ ἀκολούθως πάλιν στοι- 
γραμ- 


χειώδη ἑλληνικὴν 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


the first he had promoted. 
During all of 1865 and 
1866 he was pleading in 
favor of our pronunciation 
in letters to the Times, the 
Scotsman, and other jour- 
nals. He increased the 
ardor of the Greek Society 
by importing Greek wine 
from Greece for the mem- 
bers. He had not aban- 
doned in the meanwhile 
the work of translating 
Homer, but after the labor 
of many years he published 
at his own expense his be- | 
loved book. In May, 1867, 
Blackie read in the Royal 
Institute of London a 
new paper on pronuncia- 
tion, “ Music of Speech in 
the Greek and Latin Lan- 
guages.” And returning 
then to Edinburgh, he 
busied himself with popu- 
lar teaching and promul- 
gation of the Greek lan- 
guage. To this end he 
published a little later a 
collection of English- 
Greek dialogues, and fol- 
lowing that an elementary 


READING 


Ἐξηκολούθει δὲ 
κηρύττων τὸ προσφιλὲς 


µατικήν. 


> ~ / \ \ 
αὐτῷ θέµα, τὸ περὶ προφο- 
pas, ἐν ἀλληλογραφία πρὸς 
Γερμανοὺς καὶ Γάλλους λο-. 
γίους. 

To 1872 κατὰ μῆνα 
3 / 9 / / 
Απρίλιον, ἐποιήσατο νέαν 
ἐν τῷ ᾿Ινστιτούτῳ διάλεξιν 

\ An ΕῚ / A 

περὶ τῆς ἐξελίξεως τῆς Ka- 
θομιλουμένης---Ηἱδίουγ and 
Growth of Modern Greek. 
{ / / 
Η ἔκτακτος σπουδαιότης 
τῆς ἐκείνης 
προὐκάλεσε γενικὴν ἐπὶ τοῦ 


πραγματείας 


θέματος προσοχήν" ἀναφέ- 
Ἀ.5.2 A / “ 
ρεται δὲ ἐν τῇ βιογραφίᾳ ὅτι 
¢ « / / 
ο ἡμέτερος κ. I. Γεννάδιος, 
γραμματεὺς τότε διατελών 
τῆς ἐν Κωνσταντινουπόλει 
βασιλικῆς πρεσβείας, ἔτυχε 
“ 3 / ~ / Ὁ 
τῆς ἀδείας τοῦ Βλάκη ὅπως 
μεταφράσῃ τὴν διάλεξιν, 
ἥτις ὄντως ἐδημοσιεύθη ἑλ- 
ληνιστὶ ἐν τῷ “ Neodoyo.” 
ε [η 
¢ \ νὰ / [4 
Η μακρὰ καὶ ἐπίμονος αὕτη 
/ / 2 / 
στρατεία ἤρξατο ἀποδίδου- 
σα καρπούς. Οὐ μόνον οἱ 
μαθηταὶ τοῦ Ἑλάκη, ἀλλὰ 
καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν φίλων του, 
” a \ - 
ἄνδρες τῶν τὰ πρῶτα φε- 
ρόντων ἐν τοῖς γράμμασιν, 


EXERCISE 991 


Greek grammar. He con- 
tinued his beloved theme, 
that on pronunciation, in 
correspondence with Ger- 
man and French men of 
letters. 

In 1872, in the month 
of April, he delivered in 
the Institute a new lect- 
ure on the evolution of the 
modern (spoken) language 
—“ History and Growth of 
Modern Greek.” The ex- 
traordinary importance of 
that work aroused general 
attention to the subject; 
it. is stated in the biogra- 
phy that our (compatriot) - 
Mr. J. Gennadius, who was 
at that time secretary of 
the royal legation at Con- 
stantinople, obtained the 
permission of Blackie to 
translate the lecture, which 
was in fact published in 
Greek in the “ Neologos.” 
This long and persevering 
contest began {ο bear 
fruit. Not only the pupils’ 
of Blackie, but also many 
of his friends, men (of 
those) holding the first 


332 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


μὰ e \ \ 
οἷον ὁ κλεινὸς ποιητὴς 
Browning, ἐπείθετο, 
ρητικῶς τοὐλάχιστον, περὶ 


θεω- 


“ / a) ς 
Τῆς γνησίας προφορᾶς. Ἢ 
δὲ Ανασσα Βικτωρία, ἥτις 
κατ᾽ ἔτος παρεπιδημεῖ ἐν 
Σκοτία ἐζήτησεν ὅπως ὁ 
Ἑλάκης παρουσιασθῇ ἐνώ- 
πιον αὐτῆς. Καὶ μετὰ τὴν 
παρουσίασιν παρηγηγέλθη 
ὅπως ἐγγράψῃ τὸ ὄνομα αὖ- 
τοῦ ἐν τῷ λευκώματι τῆς 
᾿Ανάσσης. Ὑπογράψας δὲ 
ὁ Βλάκης, ἔγραψε καί τινας 
ς 4 8 
ἐλληνικους στίχους. 

Te 1877 ἐξέδοτο τοὺς 
“ Σοφοὺς τῆς Ἑλλάδος, 
\ lal / 
σειρὰν δραματικῶν διαλό- 
γων ἐπὶ Φφιλοσοφικῶν θε- 
/ \ ’ 2 \ 3/ 
μάτων. Τὸ δ᾽ ἐπιὸν ἔτος 
ἐπεχείρησεν ὁδοιπορίαν εἰς 
Αἴγυπτον, ὅπου ἐγένετο εὐ- 
φροσύνως δεκτὸς παρὰ τῶν 
ἡμετέρων. 
᾿Αλλ᾽ ἡ προβεβηκυῖα ad- 
ο) e / \ e / 
του ἡλικία καὶ ὁ πλήρης 
κόπων βίος, ἠνάγκασαν αὐ- 
τὸν νὰ παραιτηθῇ τῆς καθη- 
γεσίας τῷ 1882, ἐν μέσῳ 
γενικῆς τῶν μαθητῶν καὶ 
συναδέλφων αὐτοῦ ἐκδηλώ- 
σεως ἐκτιμήσεως καὶ λύπης. 


rank in letters, such as 
the famous poet Brown- 
ing, were convinced, theo- 


retically at least, as {ο 


the correct pronunciation. 
Queen Victoria, who re- 
sides each year in Scotland, 
requested that Blackie be 
presented to her. And 
after the presentation he 
was ordered to write his 
name in the Queen’s al- 
bum. When signing his 
name, Blackie also wrote 
some Greek verses. 

In 1877 he published 
“The Wise Men of 
Greece,” a collection of 


dramatic dialogues upon 


philosophical subjects. 
The following year he un- 
dertook a journey to Egypt, 
where he was pleasantly 
received by our (people). 

But his advanced age 
and a life full of toil forced 
him to resign from the 
professorship in 1882, in 
the midst of manifesta- 
tions of esteem and regret 
on the part of his students 
and colleagues. 


VEV 


READING 


ς ᾿ κ.) ve 

O ἀκαταγώνιστος πρε- 
σβύτης δὲν ἦτο δυνατὸν οὐδὲ 
οὕτως νὰ καθησυχάση. 
Μεταβὰς μετ᾽ ὀλίγον εἰς 
᾿Οξωνίαν---τὸ κέντρον αὐτὸ 
τῆς ᾿ἨἩρασμιανῆς αἱρέσεως 

> / / Ν 
--ἐποιήσατο διάλεξιν περὶ 
ἑλληνικῆς προφορᾶς. ὋἋὉ 
BA iD) Ὁ AN 
ἄνθρωπος ἣν ὅλος μεστὸς 
ἑλληνικῆς παιδείας καὶ ἑλ- 
ληνικοῦ πνεύματος, ἠλε- 

/ ἣν 5 / 
κτρίζων καὶ ἐνθουσιάζων 
τοὺς πλησιάζοντας αὐτόν. 
Εἶχε διαδοθῇ ἡ φήμη αὐτοῦ 
καθ ὅλην τὴν ᾿Ελληνικὴν 


᾿Ανατολήν. Ἐκ Κωνσταν- 


᾿ τινουπόλεως, Μικρᾶς ᾿Ασί. 


ας, Αἰγύπτου καὶ τῆς ἐλευ- 
θέρας Ἑλλάδος ἐλάμβα- 


συγχα- 
ρητηρίους, μέλι, σῦκα καὶ 


Ν 
ἐπιστολὰς 


γλυκίσματα παντοῖα, ὡς 
φόρον 
φιλίας. 

“"H ζῶσα Ἑλληνικὴ 
ἦτο τὸ προσφιλὲς θέμα τῶν 


εὐγνωμοσύνης καὶ 


συνδιαλέξεων, τῆς διδαχῆς, 
τῆς μελέτης αὐτοῦ. Κατὰ 
Μάρτιον τοῦ 1890 ἀνέγνω- 
σεν ἐν τῇ Βασιλικῇ Ἑταιρία 
τοῦ ᾿Εδιμβούργου δύο δια- 


΄ \ \ \ A 
τριβᾶς, τὴν μὲν περὶ τῆς 


EXERCISE 333 


The indomitable old man 
could not, however, so rest. 
Going a little later to Ox- 
ford, that centre of the 
Erasmian heresy, he deliv- 
ered a lecture on Greek 
pronunciation. The man 
was completely filled with 
Greek learning and Greek 
spirit, electrifying and 
inspiring those who 
came near him. His fame 
had been spread abroad 
throughout all the Greek 
East. From Constantino- 
ple, Asia Minor, Egypt, 
and independent Greece 
he received congratulatory 
letters, honey, figs, and all 
sorts of sweets as a trib-- 
ute of gratitude and friend- 
ship. 


“ Living Greek” was the 
beloved theme of his con- 
versations, his teaching, 
and his study. In March, 
1890, he delivered two lect- 
ures in the Royal Society 
of Edinburgh, one on “ The 
Living Greek Language,” 


304 


“Ζώσης ἑλληνικῆς γλώσ- 
ons,” 
µαντίου Κοραῆ." Kae 
ὅλον τὸ 1890 καὶ 1891 ἐδη. 
µοσίευσεν ἐπιστολὰς καὶ 
διατριβὰς ὑπὲρ τῆς ἰδέας 
ταύτης, ἧς ὑπέρμαχον κρα- 
τερὸν εὗρεν ἐν τῷ ἀειμνήστῳ 
ἱστοριογράφῳ Φφιλέλληνι 
Φρῆμαν. ᾿Αντήλλασε δὲ 
καὶ ἐπιστολὰς ἑλληνιστὶ 
συντεταγμένας, μέτινας τῶν 
ἐν Ὀξωνία καθηγητῶν. 

Τῷ 1991 ἐπεχείρησε νέαν 
ὁδοιπορίαν εἰς τὴν ᾿Ανατο- 
᾿Αποβὰς εἰς Ναύ- 
πλιον μεσοῦντος τοῦ Απρι- 
λίου ἐπεσκέφθη τὸ "Αργος 
καὶ τὰς Μυκήνας, ὅπου πα. 


λήν. 


ρετέθη ἄριστον εἰς τοὺς συ- 
νοδοιποροῦντας ἄγγλους καὶ 
“ ς / / 
ὅπου ὁ Ἑλάκης προέπιεν 
ὑπὲρ τῆς Ἑλλάδος. Ἔπα- 
νελθὼν δὲ εἰς Ναύπλιον 
ἐξηκολούθησε τὸν εἰς Κων- 
σταντινούπολιν πλοῦν Kal 
ἐκεῖθεν ἐπανέκαμψεν εἰς 
᾿Αθήνας, ὅπου ἐξενίσθη ἐν 
τῇ Αγγλικῇ Σχολῇ. Πολ- 
λὰ διηγεῖται περὶ τῆς ἐκεῖ 
διαμονῆς του καὶ τῆς χαρᾶς 
> Φ 3 / Ν / 
μεθ᾽ ἧς ἐπεσκέφθη καὶ πά- 


τὴν δὲ περὶ “᾽Αδα.-᾿ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


and the other on “ Adaman- 
tios Coraés.” Through- 
out 1890 and 1891 he pub- 
lished letters and essays 
in support of this idea, of 
which he found a pow- 
erful champion in the im- 
mortal historian and Phil- 
hellene Freeman. He also 
exchanged letters com- 
posed in Greek with some 
of the Oxford professors. 


In 1891 he undertook a 
new journey to the East. 
Landing at Nauplius in 
the middle of April, he 
visited Argos and Mycene, 
where a lunch was offered 
to the English travellers 


and where Blackie replied 


to the toast of Greece. 
Returning to Nauplius, he 
continued his voyage to 
Constantinople and then 
returned to Athens, where 
he was lodged at the Eng- 
lish School. Much ig re- 
lated concerning his stay 
there and the joy with 
which he visited again the 
Acropolis and the other 


a 


READING EXERCISE 


\ : 
λιν τὴν ᾿Ακρόπολιν καὶ τὰ 
ἄλλα ἱερὰ λείψανα τῆς ἀρ- 

/ 

χαιότητος. 

Ἠπανελθὼν δὲ εἰς τὴν 
Σ κοτίαν γράφει εὐχαριστῶν 
τοὺς φίλους, πέμψαντας αὐ- 

lal 4 \ Qn [44 ο) 
τῷ φύλλα τινὰ τῆς “᾽Ακρο- 

\ 
πόλεως. Τὸν Δεκέμβρι- 
ον τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους εὑρίσκο- 
» \ \ / 
μεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάλιν δια- 
"λεγόμενον ἐν Λονδίνῳ καὶ 
δημοσιεύοντα ἐν τῷ Nine- 
_ teenth Century ἐπίκρισιν τῆς 
ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. Πολυλᾶ μεταφρά- 
σεως τοῦ Αμλέτου. Τοιοῦτος 
\ 4 ©. ye \ “ ς A 

δὲ ἦτο ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς ἑλληνικῆς 
ἐνθουσιασμὸς αὐτοῦ, ὥστε 
καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν φακέλλων τῶν 
ἐπιστολῶν αὐτοῦ εἶχε τετυ- 

/ 4 / ϱ 
πωμµένα ἑλληνικὰ PNTA, οἷον 
᾿Αληθεύων ἐν ἀγάπη καὶ 
Χαλεπὰ τὰ καλά. Ἔκο- 
λακεύετο δὲ ἰδίως ὅταν οἱ 
μαθηταὶ καὶ Φίλοι αὐτοῦ 
ἐπέστελλον αὐτώ ἑλληνιστί. 
Καὶ τὰ δῶρα δὲ ὅσα διένειµε 
κατὰ τὰς ἑορτὰς τοῦ νέου 
” / ς Ke 2 
ἔτους συνωδεύοντο ὑπὸ ἑλλη- 
νικῶν αὐτοσχεδίων στίχων. 

Αἱ ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐκ- 

δροµαί του ἔπεισαν αὐτὸν 
\ a 3 / ο/ 

περὶ τῆς ὠφελείας ἥτις προ- 


990 


sacred remains of an- 


tiquity. 


Returning to Scotland, 
he writes thanking the 
friends who πὰ sent 
him some numbers of the 
Acropolis. In December 
of this year we find him 
again lecturing in Lon- 
don, and publishing in the 
Nineteenth Century a re- 
view of the translation of 
“Hamlet” by Mr. Polylas. 
Such was his enthusiasm 
for Greek that even on 
his envelopes he 
printed Greek texts, such 
as “Speaking the truth 
in charity,’ and “Good 
things are difficult.” He 
was especially fiattered 
when his students and 
friends wrote him in 
Greek; and the gifts 
which he distributed dur- 
ing the New Year holi- 
days were accompanied 
by original Greek lines. 

His excursions through 
Greece convinced him of 
the advantage which re- 


had 


306 


κύπτει ἐκ τῆς ἐπιτοπίου 
γνώσεως τῆς γλώσσης καὶ 
τῆς τοπογραφίας. “Oder 
ἐπεζήτησε καὶ μετὰ τετραε- 
τῇ ἀγῶνα κατώρθωσε νὰ 
συστηθῇ ὑποτροφία πρὸς 
ἀποστολὴν νέων σπουδα- 
στῶν ὅπως ταξειδεύωσιν 
᾿ ἀνὰ εἷς κατ᾽ ἔτος ἐν “Ἑλλάδι 
καὶ ᾿Ανατολῇ. 

Τὸν ᾿Απρίλιον τοῦ 1899 
ἀνέγνωσε καὶ αὖθις νέαν 
περὶ τῆς ἀναπτύξεως τῆς 
νεοελληνικῆς διατριβὴν ἐν 
τῇ Βασιλικῇ ἑταιρίᾳ τοῦ 
Εδιμβούργου: ἡ δὲ ““ἑλλη- 
νικὴ ἑταιρία" ἣν πρὸ ἐτῶν 
εἶχεν ἱδρύσει καὶ ἥτις ηὔ- 
ξανε καὶ ἐκραταιοῦτο, καθή- 
δυνε τὰς ἡμέρας αὐτοῦ τὰς 
γεροντικὰς ἀποτείνουσα 
αὐτῷ ἐμμέτρους  προσφω- 
νήσεις. 

“Ἡτοιμάξετο δὲ νῦν ἠρέμα 
διὰ τὴν μακρὰν ἐκείνην ὁδοι- 
πορίαν, ἣν πάντες θὰ πο- 
ρευθῶμεν, συντάσσων τὸν 
κατάλογον τῆς νεοελληνι- 
κῆς αὐτοῦ βιβλιοθήκης τὴν 
ὁποίαν ἐκληροδότησε τῷ ἐν 
Ἠδιμβούργῳ πανεπιστη- 


/ 5 / \ \ 
bio. ᾿Επεσκέφθη δὲ καὶ 


MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


sults from a local knowl- 
edge of the language and 
topography. He therefore 
asked, and after a four 
years’ struggle succeeded, 
that a scholarship be 
founded for the sending of 
young students to travel, 
one each year, in Greece 
and the Levant. 

In April, 1892, he read 


another new dissertation — 


on the Development of 
Modern Greek, in the 


‘Royal Society of Edin- 


burgh. The Greek Socie- 
ty, which he had founded 
years before and which 
was increasing and grow- 
ing stronger, sweetened 
the days of his old age. by 
sending him addresses in 
verse. 

He was now gently 
preparing himself for 
that long journey which 
we all are to travel, ar- 
ranging the catalogue of 
his Modern Greek library, 
which he bequeathed to 
the University of Edin- 
burgh. He also visited 


a i . . 


READING 


αὖθις διὰ τελευταίαν φορὰν 
Ὀξωνίαν καὶ Κανταβρι- 
γίαν, συνηγορῶν ὑπὲρ τῆς 
καθ ἡμᾶς προφορᾶς, ἀλλ᾽ 
Αὐ- 


Ν [χὰ » / / 
τὸς ὅμως ἐπέμενε διαλεγὀ- 


> 4 Ἁ / 
εἰς ὦτα μὴ ἀκουόντων. 


᾿ς μενος ἑλληνιστὶ πρὸς τοὺς 


ἐπισκεπτομένους αὐτὸν λο- 
/ a 
γίους καὶ δωρούμενος αὐτοῖς 
\ 
τοὺς Αγγλοελληνικοὺς Δια- 
/ - \ 
λόγους καὶ τὴν Στοιχειώδη 
« 4 7 
Ἑλληνικὴν Γραμματικήν. 
Μετὰ πίστεως καὶ ἐπι- 
a / 
μονῆς ἣν µόνον παρὰ Bper- 
n / / 
τανοῖς εὑρίσκει τις τόσῳ 
Ν ᾿ 1 / 
σταθερὰν καὶ ἀκλόνητον, 
5 / tA fi 
εἰργάσθη μέχρι τελευταίας 
αὐτοῦ πνοῆς ὑπὲρ ὑποθέ- 
ἃ > ͵7 ς \ ‘s\ 
σεως ἣν ἐλογίζετο ἱερὰν καὶ 
/ > \ id 
σωστικήν. Αὐταὶ αἱ τελευ- 
nr / ἃ φ / 
ταῖαι του λέξεις ἃς ἀπέτεινε 
x 
πρὸς 
/ » lal e/ . /ι 
σύζυγον αὐτοῦ, ὅτε ἀνοίξας 


\ A 
τὴν βαρυαλγοῦσαν 
τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, μετὰ pa- 
κρὸν κώμα, ὀλίγον πρὶν ἢ 
> A 9 Ν 
ἐκπνεύσῃ, ἦσαν διὰ τελευ- 
ταίαν φορὰν τὸ προσφιλὲς 
αὐτοῦ ρητόν: ““᾿Αληθεύων 
νυν 9) 
ἐν ἀγάπη. 

22 


EXERCISE 


337 


again for the last time Ox- 
ford and Cambridge, plead- 
ing in support of our pro- 
nunciation, but to ears of 
those not hearing. He 
persevered, however, ar- 
guing in Greek with the 
literary men who visited 
him and presenting to 
them the “ Greek and Eng- 
lish Dialogues” and the 
“Greek Primer.” 

With a faith and perse- 
verance which one finds 
so firm and lasting only 
among the British, he la- 
bored up to his last breath 
in favor of a cause which 
he considered holy and 
salutary. His last words, 
which he addressed to his 
deeply afflicted wife, open- 
ing his eyes after a long 
unconsciousness, ἃ little 
before he expired, were, 
for the last time, his be- 
loved text: “ Speaking the 
truth in charity.” 


338 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


VERBS 


ἤμβλυνε, imp. ind. ἀμβλύνω, to dull, blunt. 

ἐξυπηρέτησε, aor. ind. ἐξυπηρετῶ(έω), to serve. 
ἐσυνηγόρει, imp. ind. συνηγορῶ(έω), to advocate, plead. 
κοµίζων, pres. part. κοµίζω, to convey, bring. 

εἶχεν ἐγκαταλείψει, plup. ind. ἐγκαταλείπω, to abandon. 
ἐδημοσίευσε, aor. ind. δηµοσιεύω, to publish. 7 
ἀνέγνωσε, ΔΟΥ. ind. ἀναγινώσκω, to read. 

ἐπανακάμψας, aor. part. ἐπανακάμπτω, to return. 
ἠσχολήθη, aor. ind. mid. ἀσχολῶ(έω), to occupy, employ. 
ἐξέδοτο, aor. ind. mid. ἐκδίδωμι (ἐκδίδω), to publish. 
ἐξηκολούθει, imp. ind. ἐξακολουθῶ(έω). to continue, 
κηρύττων, Pres. part. κηρύττω, to announce, preach. 
ἐποιήσατο, aor. ind. mid. ποιῶ(έω), to do. 

προὐκάλεσε, aor. ind. προκαλώ({έω), to provoke, cause. 
ἀναφέρεται, pres. ind. pass. ἀναφέρω, to quote, mention. 
διατελῶν, pres. part. διατελῶ(έω), to be, remain. 

ἔτυχε, 2d aor. ind. τυγχάνω, to obtain. 

ἐδημοσιεύθη, aor. ind. pass. δηµοσιεύω, to publish. 
ἤρξατο, aor. ind. ἄρχομαι, to begin. | 
ἀποδίδουσα, pres. part. fem. ἀποδίδω, to return, render. 
ἐπείθετο, imp. ind. pass. πείθω. to persuade, convince. 
παρεπιδημεῖ, pres. ind. παρεπιδημῶ(έω), to sojourn. 
ἐζήτησε, aor. ind. ζητώέω), to ask, request. | 
παρουσιασθῇ, aor. subj. pass. παρουσιάζω, to present. | 
παρηγγέλθη, aor. ind. pass. παραγγέλλω, to order. 3 
ἐγγράψη, aor. subj. ἐγγράφω, to inscribe, write down. _ 
ὑπογράψας, aor. part. ὑπογράφω, to sign, subscribe. 
ἐπεχείρησε, aor. ind, ἐπιχειρώ(έω), to undertake. 
προβεβηκυῖα, perf. part. act. προβαίνω, to proceed. 
ἠνάγκασαν, aor. ind. ἀναγκάζω, to force, oblige. 


VERBS 339 


παραιτηθῇ, aor. subj. mid. παραιτώ{έω), to resign. 

᾿καθησυχάση, aor. subj. καθησυχάζω, to rest, repose. 

µεταβάς, aor. part. µεταβαίνω, to repair, go. 

εἶχε διαδοθῆ, plup. ind. pass. διαδίδω, to spread abroad. 

ἐλάμβανε, imp. ind. λαμβάνω, to receive. 

ἀντήλασε, aor. ind. ἀνταλλάσσω, to exchange. 

συντεταγµένας, pert. part. pass. συντάσσω, to construct. 

ἀποβάς, aor. part. ἀποβαίνω, to land. 

ἐπεσκέφθη, aor. ind. ἐπισκέπτομαι, to visit. 

παρετέθη, aor. ind. pass. παραθέτω, to offer, set before. 

προέπιε, 2d aor. ind. προπίνω, to drink to, toast. 

ἐπανελθών, 2d aor. part. ἐπανέρχομαι, to return, come 
back. 

ἐξηκολούθησε, aor. ind. ἐξακολουθώίέω), to continue. 

ἐξενίσθη, aor. ind. pass. ξενίζω, to entertain. 

διηγεῖται, pres. ind. διηγοῦμαι (έομαι), to relate, tell. 

πέμψαντας, aor. part. acc. plur. πέμπω, to send. 

τετυπωµένα, pert. part. pass. ruTdve(6-dw), to print. 

- ἐκολακεύετο, imp. ind. pass. κολακεύω, to flatter. 

_ ἐπέστελλον, imp. ind. ἐπιστέλλω, to write to. 

διένειµε, aor. ind. διανέµω, to distribute, dispense. 

συνωδεύοντο, imp. ind. pass. συνοδεύω, to accompany. 


᾿ ἔπεισαν, aor. ind. πείθω, to persuade, convince. 


προκύπτει, pres. ind. προκύπτω, to result. " 

ἐπεζήτησε, aor. ind. ἐπιζητώ(έω). to ask for, demand. 

κατώρθωσε, aor. ind. κατορθόνω(ώ-όω), to succeed. 

συστηθῇ, aor. subj. pass. συσταίνω (συνίστηµι), to es- 
tablish. 

Snead pres. subj. ταξειδεύω, to travel. 

εἶχεν ἱδρύσει, plup. ind. ἱδρύω, to establish, found. 

ηὔξανε, imp. ind. αὐξάνω, to increase. 

ἐκραταιοῦτο, imp. ind. pass. κραταιώ(έω), to strengthen. 


940 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


καθήδυνε, aor. ind. καθηδύνω, to sweeten, delight. 
ἀποτείνουσα, pres. part. fem. ἀποτείνω, to address. 
ἠτοιμάζετο, imp. ind. mid. ἑτοιμάξζω, to prepare. 

θὰ πορευθώμεν, aor. fut. πορεύομαι, to travel. 
συντάσσων, pres. part. συντάσσω, to arrange. 
ἐκληροδότησε, aor. ind. κληροδοτώ(έω), to bequeath. 
συνηγορῶν, pres. part. cvvayopa(éw), to advocate. 
ἀκουόντων, pres. part. gen. plur. ἀκούω, to listen, hear. 
ἐπέμενε, imp. ind. ἐπιμένω, to persevere. 

διαλεγόμενος, pres. part. διαλέγομαι, to argue, dispute. 
ἐπισκεπτομένους, Pres. part. ἐπισκέπτομαι, to visit. 
Swpovpevos, pres. part. δωροῦμαι{έομαι), to present, give. 
εἰργάσθη, aor. ind. ἐργάζομαι, to work, labor. 

ἐλογίζετο, imp. ind. λογίζομαι, to think, consider. 
ἀπέτεινε, imp. ind. ἀποτείνω, to address. 

ἀνοίξας, aor. part. ἀνοίγω, to open. 

ἐκπνεύσῃ, aor. Subj. ἐκπνεύω, to expire. 

ἀληθεύων, pres. part. ἀληθεύω, to be true, tell the truth. 


Vocabulary Exercise 


To be worked out by the student in the usual way. 


Aids to the Further Study of Modern Greek 


The number of works practically serviceable to the 
student of Modern Greek is somewhat limited. One — 
of the best grammars published, unfortunately of use 
only to those who are familiar with German, is “ Neu- i 
griechische Conversations-Grammatik,” by K. Petraris, | 
Heidelberg: Julius Groos, 1895. Another well-ar- 
ranged work (also in German) is “ Neugriechische : 


AIDS TO THE FURTHER STUDY OF MODERN GREEK 841 


Grammatik,’ by Antonios Jeannarakis, Hannover: 
Hahn’sche Buchhandlung, 1877. These two have been 
consulted in the preparation of various sections of this 
book. A good work in English is “A Handbook to 
Modern Greek,” by Edgar Vincent and T. J. Dickson, 
London and New York: Macmillan & Co., 1887. A 
_ chrestomathy of great value, especially to those who 
desire to study the development of. the modern lan- 
guage, is “ Neohellenica,” by Michael Constantinides, 
London and New York: Macmillan & Co., 1599. An- 
other valuable work to the student of the history of 


_ Modern Greek is “The Modern Greek Language in 


its Relation to Ancient Greek,’ by E. Μ. Geldart, Ox- 
ford: The Clarendon Press, 1870. In this work the 
practical identity of the pronunciation of the Greeks 
of the present day with that of classical, or at least of 
New-Testament, times is well shown. 

Of English-Modern Greek dictionaries, unqualifiedly 
the best is “A Concise Dictionary of the English and 
Modern Greek Languages, as Actually Written and 
Spoken,” by A. N. Jannaris, New York: Harper & 
Brothers, 1895. The Modern Greek-English part is in 
preparation, but not yet published. There are several 
Modern Greek-English dictionaries, but none is en- 
tirely satisfactory ; the most recent and perhaps the 
best is “ A Dictionary of the Greek and English Lan- 
guages,” by John Pervanoglu, Athens: P. D. Sakella- 
rios, 1894. 

For constant practice in reading there is nothing 
better than a Greek newspaper. Such a one is pub- 
lished weekly in New York by Mr. Solon J. Vlasto. 
The title is Ατλαντίς. It contains articles on the cur- 


342 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


rent topics of the day, letters on political and literary 
subjects from Athens, and notices of lectures and dis- 
cussions in this country and abroad on the subject of 
Modern Greek and of the reform in Greek pronuncia- 
tion. 

The vernacular form of Modern Greek is fully ex- 
plained in the grammars of Petraris and J eannarakis, 
above mentioned. An excellent book for practice in 
this form is “Echo der neugriechischen Umgangs- 
sprache,” by A. N. Jannaris, Leipzig: Rud. Giegler. 
The definitions in the vocabulary are in German, con- 
sequently the work will be of little use to such as can- 
not read that language. An edition of the “Echo” 
with English vocabulary is, however, in course of prep- 
aration. | 


APPENDIX 
ΠΑΡΑΡΤΗΜΑ 


‘Tue IRREGULAR VERBS—’Avopada ρήματα 


VERBS in µι 


Tur verbs which belonged to this class in the an- 
cient language are usually replaced in Modern Greek 
by the corresponding forms in ὦ " for.example, ἵστημι 


- (character a), στήνω or σταίνω" τίθημι (character e), 


᾿θέτω: δίδωμι (character ο). δίδω + δείκνυμι (character v), 
δεικνύω. A few forms of a few of these verbs in μὲ 
- are retained, or have been revived in the modern liter- 
_ary language, but they are not often employed. They« 
differ in their conjugation, in the ancient language, 
from the verbs in ω only in the present, imperfect, 
and second aorist. These forms are as follows for the 
four classes of verbs in µι. They are here given in | 
full, but very few of them are ever encountered in 
_ modern works. 


ἵστημι (Character a) 


PRESENT 
ACTIVE PASSIVE 
Ν “ “ 
᾿ς Ind. ἴστ-ημι, -ης, -ησι(ν) ἵστ-αμαι, -ασαι, -αται 
3 A 4 / 
ἵστ-αμεν, -ατε, -ᾱσι(ν) ἱστ-άμεθα, -ασθε, -ανται 


944 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Subj. ἱστ-ώ, -fs, -ἢ ἱστ- μαι, -ἢ (-ῆσαι), -ῆται 
ἱστ- ὦμεν, -ἣτε, -ὁσι(ν) ἱστ-ώμεθα, -ῆσθε, -ὠνται 
Imp. ἵστ-η, -άτω ἵστ-ασο, -άσθω 
ἵστ-ατε, άτωσαν ἴστ-ασθε, -άσθωσαν 
Inf. ἱστ.άναι ἴστ-ασθαι 
Part. ἱστ-άς, -ἃσα, -άν ἱστ-άμενος, -αμένη, -άμενον 
IMPERFECT 
ἵστ-ην, -ης, -η ἱστ-άμην, -ασο, -ατο 
ἴστ-αμεν, -ατε, -ασαν ἱστ-άμεθα, -ασθε, -αντο 


SECOND AoRIS?T 
Ind. ἔστ-ην, -ns, -η 
ἔστ-ημεν, -ητε, -noav 
01. στ-ῶ, -ῆς, -ἢ 
στ-ὤμεν, -ῆτε, -ώσι(ν) 


Imp. στ-ῆθι, -ήτω Wane 
στ-ῆτε, -ήτωσαν 
Inf. στ-ῆναι 
Part. στ-άς, -ᾶσα, -άν 
τίθημι (Character ε) 
PRESENT 
Ind. τίθ-ηµι, -ns, -ησι(ν) τίθ-εμαι, -εσαι, -εται 
τίθ-εμεν, -ετε, εἴσι(ν) τιθ-έμεθα, -εσθε, -ενται 
Φυ0].τιθ-ῶ, -ῆς, -Υ͂ τιθ-ώμαι, -ἢ (-ῆσαι), -ῆται 
τιθ-ὤμεν, -ῆτε, -ὥσι(ν) τιθ-ώμεθα, -ἢσθε, -ὤνται 
Ἱππρ. τίθ-ει, -έτω τίθ-εσο (-ov), -έσθω. 
τίθ-ετε, -έτωσαν τίθ-εσθε, -έσθωσαν 
Inf. τιθ-έναι τίθ-εσθαι 


Ῥατί.τιθ-είς, -εἴσα, -ἐν τιθ-έμενος, -εμένη, -έμενον 


ἐτίθ-ην (-ουν), -ης, -η 
ἐτίθ-εμεν, -ετε, -εσαν 


Ind. ἔθ-ην, -ης, -ἡ 
ἔθ-ημεν, -ητε, -noav 
Subj. 0-0, -ῆς, -η 
ϐ ὤμεν, -Ώτε, -ωσι(ν) 
Imp. θ.ές, -έτω 
ϐ.ἔτε, -έτωσαν 
Inf. ϐ.εἶναι 
Τα11.θ-είς, -εἶσα, -έν 


APPENDIX 845 


IMPERFECT 


> y 

ἐτιθ-έμην, -εσο (-ov), -ετο 
» / 

ἐτιθ-έμεθα, -εσθε, -εντο 


ΙΦΕΟΟΝΡ ΑΟΒΙΞΤ 


ἐθ-έμην, -εσο (-ου), -ετο 
ἐθ-έμεθα, -εσθε, -εντο 

ϐ ὠμαι, -ἢ, -ῆται 
ϐ.ώμεθα, -ἢσθε, -ὤνται 
θ.οὗῦ, -έσθω 

ϐ.έσθε, -έσθωσαν 
ϐ.ἐσθαι 


ϐ.έμενος, -εμένη, -έμενον 


δίδωμι (Character 0) 


PRESENT 


Ind. δίδ-ωµι, -ws, -ωσι(ν) 
δίδ-οµεν, -οτε, -οὖσι(ν) 
Subj. διδ-ώ, -ὥς, -ὦ 


'διδ-ὤμεν, -ὢτε, -ὣσι(ν) 


Imp. δίδ-ου, -ότω 
δίδ-οτε, -ότωσαν 

Inf. διὸ-όναι 

Part. διδ-ούς, -οὔσα, -ov 


δίδ-οµαι, -οσαι, -οται 
διδ-όμεθα, -οσθε, -ονται 
διδ-ὤμαι, -ᾧ (-ὥσαι,) -ώται 
διδ-ώμεθα, -ὥσθε, -ὤνται 
δίδ-οσο (-ου), -ὀσθω 
δίὸ-οσθε, -ὀσθωσαν 


δίδ-οσθαι 


διὸ-όμενος, -ομένη, -όμενον 


IMPERFECT 


ἐδίδ-ουν, -ους, -ου 
1 / 
ἐδίδ-ομεν, -οτε, -οσαν 


ἐδιδ-όμην, οσο (-ου), -οτο 
ἐδιδ-όμεθα, -οσθε, -οντο 


ΘΕΟΟΝΡ AorRIST 


Ind. ἔδ-ων, -ws, -ω 
ἔδ-ομεν, -οτε, -οσαν 


ἐδ-όμην, -οσο (-ου), -οτο 
ἐδ-όμεθα, -οσθε, -οντο 


346 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Subj. 6-0, -ὥς, -ὦ ὃ-ώμαι, -@, -OTAL 
ὃ-ὤμεν, -@TE, -ὥσι(ν) ὃ-ώμεθα, -ὥσθε, -ὤνται 
Imp. δ-ός, -ότω ὃ-οῦ, -όσθω 
ὃ-όὀτε, -όὄτωσαν ὃ-όσθε, -ὀσθωσαν 
Inf. ὃ-οῦναι | ὃ-ὀσθαι 
Ῥατί.δ-ούς, -οῦσα, -ν ὃ-όμενος, -ομένη, -ὀμενον 


δείκνυμι (Character v) 


PRESENT 


Ind. δείκν-υμι, -υς, -υσι(ν) δείκν-υμαι, -υσαι, -υται 


δείκν-υμεν, -υτε, -Ὁσι(ν) δεικν-ύμεθα, -υσθε, -υνται | 


Subj. δεικν-ύω, -ύῃς, -ύῃ δεικν-ύωμαι, -ύῃ (-ύησαι), -ύητα: 
δεικν-ύωμεν, -ύητε, δεικν-υώµεθα,-ύησθε,-ύωνται — 

Imp. δείκν-υ, -ύτω {| -ύωσι(ν) δείκν-υσο, -ύσθω | 
δείκγ-υτε, -ύτωσαν δείκν-υσθε, «ύσθωσαν 

Inf. δεικν-ύναι δείκν-υσθαι 

Part. Sevxv-vs, -Όσα, -vv δεικν-ύμενος, -υμένη, -ύμενον 

IMPERFECT ; 

ἐδείκνγ-υν, -υς, -υ ἐδεικν-ύμην, -υσο, -υτο | 


3 / ᾽ / 
ἐδείκν-υμεν, -υτε,-υσαν  ἐδεικν-ύμεθα, -υσθε, -υντο 


Second Aorist wanting. | 
εἰμί (εἶμαι), to be 


The modern form of εἰμί is εἶμαι, which is the one 
more commonly employed, but many parts of the an- 
cient verb are still in quite frequent use in the elevated 
literary style. 

PRESENT 
ANCIENT MODERN 
Ind. εἰμί, εἶ, ἐστί(ν) εἶμαι, εἶσαι, εἶναι (εἶνε) 
ἐσμέν, ἐστέ, εἰσί(ν) εἴμεθα, εἶσθε, εἶναι (εἶνε) 


ΑΡΡΕΝΡΙΣ 347 


S bi 9 ¥ 3 4 αν 7 
Ὁ]. ὦ, ἧς, 7 MAL, ἥσαι, ἦναι 
ο = = " εν 3 
ὦμεν, ἦτε, ὦσι(ν) ἤμεθα, ἦσθε, ἦναι 
Imp. ἴσθι, ἔστω ἔσο, ἂς ἦναι 
” BA yy > Ave a 
ἔστε, ἔστωσαν (ἔστων) ἐστέ, ἂς ἤναι 
Inf. εἶναι εἶσθαι 
Part. ὦν, οὖσα, ὃν ὦν, οὖσα, ὄν 
IMPERFECT 
3 9 5 ον 3} 9 4 
ἦν(ή), ἦσθα, ἣν ἤμην, ἦσο, ἦτο 


ἦμεν, ἦστε (ἦτε), ἦσαν ἤμεθα, ἦσθε, ἦσαν 


FUTURE 
” ” ” ες ee, ΧΗ αι. 
ἔσομαι, ἔση, ἔσται θὰ ἦμαι, θὰ Hoar, θὰ ἦναι 
ἢ 3 ; 
ἐσόμεθα, ἔσεσθε, ἔσονται θὰ ἤμεθα, θὰ ἦσθε, θὰ ἦναι 


All of the ancient forms above given are not used 
even in the most serious composition; those most fre- 
quently met with are the pres. ind. ἐστί and εἰσί, and 
the imperative ἔστω. The other forms should be made 
sufficiently familiar so that they can be recognized 
when encountered in reading. The dissyllabic forms 
in the pres. ind. (ancient) are enclitic. 

In the modern form, the 3d pers. pres. ind. is often 
written εἶνε. The subjunctive is sometimes written 
εἶμαι, like the indicative, or ἦμαι, without the iota sub- 
scriptum. The infinitive form εἶσθαι is used in the 
second form of the future (θέλω εἶσθαι). The imper- 
fect is employed also in the sense of the perfect or 
aorist, or the latter is frequently expressed by the 
aorist of ὑπάρχω (ὑπῆρξα). to be, exist, or of γίνομαι 
(ἔγεινα), to become. 


948 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


TRREGULAR VERBS in έω and άω 


Verbs in έω do not suffer a contraction to ὦ if they 
would thereby become monosyllabic. Such are: δέω 


(vernacular δένω), to fasten; πλέω, to sail; πνέω. to 
breathe; ρέω, to flow; ξέω, to scrape; χέω (vernacular 
χύνω), to spill, shed; and their compounds. 

The following contracted verbs (with their com- 
pounds) in έω retain the ε instead of η in the aorist and 
forms derived from it: ἀρκῶ, to suffice (ἀρκοῦμαι, to 
have enough); ἐμῶ, to vomit; ἠμπορῶ, to be able ; 
καλῶ, to call; ξέω (not contracted in the present—see 
above), to scrape; τελῶ, to complete; φορῶ, to wear; 
also the compounds (where only these words are found) 
of αἰνῶ (ἐπαινῶ, to praise; συναινῶ, to agree, assert) 
and αἱρῶ (ἀφαιρῶ, to remove; ἀφαιροῦμαι, to forget 
one’s self; διαιρῶ, to divide). The perfect passive 
participle, however, of these compounds takes η in the 
literary language, thus : ἀφῃρημένος, absent-minded. 

The following contracted verbs in ἆω retain a in- 
stead of ἡ in the aorist and derived tenses: All those 
in which the termination (άω) is immediately preceded 
by εν 4, ο, or p; for example: μειδιῶ, to smile; δρῶ, to 
act; ἐπιδρώ, to influence; θεῶμαι, to contemplate, 
view ; ἐρῶμαι, to love. Also the following: γελῶ, to 
laugh, deceive; Sapa, to thirst; θλῶ, to break ; κρεμῶ, 
to hang; πεινῶ, to hunger; σπῶ, to break, burst (an- 
cient, to draw—as a sword). 


IRREGULAR AUGMENT 


The following verbs with initial ε form the temporal 
augment with ει instead of η: ἐθίζω, to accustom, 


γῶν 


ΑΡΡΕΝΡΙΣ 949 


εἴθιζον: ἑλίσσω, to wind, εἵλισσον"' ἑλκύω, to attract, 
εἶλκυον' ἕλκω. to draw, εἷλκον" ἕπομαι, to follow, 
'. εἰπόμην: ἐργάζομαι, to work, elpyafounv: ἕρπω, to 
creep, yea ἑστιώίάω), to regale, eiatiwy: ἔχω, to 
have, εἶχον. 

The following usually take a double augment: 
βούλομαι, to wish, (ἐβουλόμην, or) ἠβουλόμην: δύναμαι, 
to be able, (ἐδυνάμην or) ἠδυνάμην" θέλω, to wish, 
ἤθελον.. 

Some verbs compounded with ορ take the 
augment in the first syllable instead of between the 
preposition and the verb; among these are: ἀμφισ- 
Bnta(éw), to dispute, ἠμφισβήτουν: ἀνάπτω, to light, 
ἤναπτον " ἀνέχομαι, to tolerate, ἠνεχόμην" ἐναντιοῦμαι, 
to oppose, ἠναντιούμην ' καθίζω, to seat, ἐκάθιζον. 

Ἑορτάξω, to celebrate, has ἑώρταζον instead of ἡόρ- 
ταζον " ἐνοχλώ[έω), to annoy, has ἠνώχλουν. 

Εὑρίσκω, to find, takes no augment in the literary 
language: imp. εὕρισκον " aor. εὗρον. Εἰκάζω, to com- 
pare, also usually takes no augment: aor. εἴκασα, or 
sometimes ἤκασα. 

In the vernacular the augment, when preserved, is 
usually placed before the preposition, as: περιπατάώ[έω), 
to promenade, ἐπεριπάτουν instead of περιεπάτουν---Ραῦ 
it is more commonly omitted altogether. 


THE VERB IN THE VERNACULAR 


In the ordinary conversational language the sylla- 
bic augment only is in use, and even this is generally 
omitted in words of more than two syllables, and 
sometimes in them as well. When used with verbs 
compounded with a preposition, it is usually placed 


960 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


before the latter, instead of between it and the verb. 
The temporal augment is found, however, in ἔχω, and 
verbs beginning with o often change this to in the 
imperfect and aorist. The reduplication is not used. 

Verbs ending in πτω are usually changed to φτω or 
Bw, as κόφτω or κόβω instead of κόπτω, to cut. The 
termination σσω is changed to ζω, as τινάζω instead of 
τινάσσω, to shake. The aorist is, however, formed as 
in the literary,language: ἔκοψα, (ἐτίναξα. , 

The final ν of the 1st pers. plur. is dropped, Avope(v), 
and to the ν of the 3d pers. plur. an ε is usually added, 
Avouv(e). The imperfect ends in a instead of ov. In 
the 2d pers. plur. of the aorist the a of the termination 
is often dropped, thus, ζητῆστε instead of ἐζητήσατε, 
you have sought. In the passive the 2d pers. plur. 
ends in όµαστε instead of όµεθα. The imperfect takes 
όµουν instead of όµην, and the aorist termination is 
θηκα instead of θην. The following will illustrate 
these peculiarities. 


ACTIVE 


Ind. Pres. λύω, λύεις, λύει, λύομε (λύουμε), he 
| λύουν(ε) 
Imp. ἔλυα, ἔλυες, ἔλυε, ἐλύαμε, ἐλύατε, ἔλυαν 

(ἐλύανε) | 
Aor. ἔλυσα, ἔλυσες, ἔλυσε, ἐλύσαμε, ἐλύσατε, 
ἔλυσαν (ἐλύσανε) 

Part. Pres. λύοντας (indeclinable) 


PASSIVE 


Ind. Pres. λύομαι, λύεσαι, λύεται, Ἀυόμαστε, λύεσθε, 
λύονται 


APPENDIX 961 


Imp. ἐλυόμουν(α), ἐλυόσουν(α), ἐλυότανε, ἐλυόμαστε, 
ἐλυόσαστε, ἐλυόντανε 
Aor. ἐλύθηκα, ἐλύθηκες, ἐλύθηκε, ἐλυθήκαμε, ἐλυ- 
| θήκατε, ἐλύθηκαν (ἐλυθήκανε) 
Part. Perf. λυμένος, η, ο(ν), οι, αις, a 


The vernacular makes frequent use of the perfect 
with ἔχω or εἶμαι instead of the aorist. It also avoids, 
as far as possible, the use of the passive voice. 

In the case of verbs ending in άγω, έγω, and όγω the ᾿ 
y 15 generally omitted except in the Ist pers. sing., and 
in the plural the entire syllable beginning with this 
letter is dropped, thus: λέγω, λές, λέει, λέμε, λέτε, λέν(ε). 

The preceding sketch of the peculiarities of the verb 
in the vernacular is necessarily very imperfect; the 
principal changes only are mentioned, those which the 
student will more frequently encounter and perhaps 
be puzzled by. One who wishes to make a thorough 
study of the vernacular will find it fully treated in the 
works of Petraris and Jeannarakis, and practically 
illustrated in the “ Echo der neugriechischen Umgangs- 
sprache” (see p. 342). 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF THE JRREGULAR VERBS 


The irregularities of the Greek verb are found 
chiefly in the aorist, the derived tenses (aor. fut. and 
perf. part.) being formed regularly from this. In the 
following table, therefore, the aorist alone is given as 
a rule, note being made of the other tenses only when 
their formation presents something peculiar. A list of 
verbs of which the second aorist is commonly em- 
ployed has been given on p. 103. The verbs and special 


352 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


forms marked with an asterisk (*) are those which are 
peculiar to the vernacular. 


ἄγω, to lead, ἤγαγον (in compounds sometimes 7&a)— 
ἄγομαι, ἤχθην. 

αἰνώ[έω), to praise (used only in compounds), ἤνεσα--- 
αἰνοῦμαι, ἠνέθην. 

αἱρώίέω), to take (used only in compounds), ἤρεσα--- 
αἱροῦμαι, ἡρέθην. 

* ἀκουμπώ(άω), ἀκουμβῶ, to lean against, ἀκούμπησα, 
ἀκούμβησα. 

ἀκροῶμαι{άυμαι), to hear, ἠκροάσθην, ἠκροασάμην. 

ἁμαρτάνω, to sin, ἡμάρτησα, ἥμαρτον. 

ἀμφισβητῶ(έω), to dispute, ἠμφισβήτησα-- ἀμφισβητοῦ- 
μαι, ἠμφισβητήθην. 

ἀναλίσκω, to consume, see καταναλίσκω. 

ἀνάπτω, to light, ἤναψα-- ἀνάπτομαι, ἠνάφθην. 

ἀνέχομαι, to tolerate, ἠνέχθην. 

ἀνοίγω, to open, ἤνοιξα, ἀνέωξα --- ἀνοίγομαι, ἠνοίχθην, 
ἀνεώχθην. | 

ἀνορθῶ(όω), to erect, ἠνώρθωσα-- ἀνορθοῦμαι, ἠνωρθώθην. 

ἀποδιδράσκω, to escape, ἀπέδρ-ασα, -ασες (-as), -ασε (-α), 
-άσαµεν, -άσατε, -ασαν (-αν). 

ἀποθνήσκω, Ἀάποθαίνω, “πεθαίνω, to die, ἀπέθανον, 
Ἀπέθανα. 

ἀπολαύω, to enjoy, ἀπήλαυσα, ἀπέλαυσα. ; 

ἀπολλύω (ἀπόλλυμυ), to lose, ἀπώλεσα" ϱ.Ρ. ἀπολωλώς, 
via, ὁς---ἀπολλύομαι, ἀπωλέσθην; Ῥ.Ρ. ἀπωλεσμένος. 

ἀρέσκω, “άρέσω, to please, ἤρεσα-- ἀρέσκομαι, ἠρεσάμην. 

ἀρκῶ[ίέω), to suffice, ἤρκεσα-- ἀρκοῦμαι, ἠρκέσθην. | 

ἁρπάζω, to snatch, rob, ἤρπασα, Ἑᾶρπαξα-- ἁρπάζομαι, 
ἡρπάσθην, ἠρπάγην, δ ὰἁρπάχθηκα. 


APPENDIX 353 


αὐξάνω, to increase, ηὔξησα, *avEnoa—avEdvouat, ηὐξή- 
θην, "αὐξήθηκα, 

ἀφήνω, ἀφίνω, to’ leave, ἄφησα, ἀφῆκα --- ἀφήνομαι, 
ἀφέθην. 

ἀφικνοῦμαι{έομαι). to arrive, ἀφίχθην, ἀφικόμην. 

βαίνω, to go (chiefly used in compounds), ἔβην, -ns, τη, 
-ημεν, -ητε, -noav, Subj. Ba, Bas, etc. ; imperat. βῆθι 
(in compounds also Ba, thus: ἀνάβα, as ἀναβῃ, 
etc.); part. Bas, Baca, βάν. | 

Barro, to put, ἔβαλον, “ἔβαλα --- βάλλομαι, ἐβλήθην. 
Ἀέθάλθηκα. 

βΒαρύνω, to trouble, ἐβάρυνα --- βαρύνομαι, Ἀβαριοῦμαι, 
Χβαριέμαι, ἐβαρύνθην, ἐβαρέθηκα: βεβαρυμμένος, 
Ἀβαρεμένος. 

βαστάζω, Ἀβαστῶ(άω), to carry, endure, ἐβάστασα, 
Χέἐβάσταξα, Ἱἐβάστηξα---βαστάζομαι Ἀβαστιοῦμαι, 

| ἐβαστάχθην: imperat. βαστάχθητε, Ἱβαστάζου. 

βλέπω, to see, εἶδον, “εἶδα - subj. ἴδω, ἴδῃς, etc., Ιδῶ. δῆς, 
etc.; imperat. ide or ἰδέ, ἂς ἴδῃ, ἂς ἴδωμεν, ἰδέτε, 
ἂς ἴδωσι(ν)" in compounds the accent is never on 
the final syllable in the imperative, as it may be in 
the simple verb. 

Booka, to graze, feed, ἐβόσκησα---βόσκομαι, ἐβοσκήθην. 

Ἀβουλιάζω, to sink, (ἐβούλιαξα --- βουλιάζομαι, (ἐ)βου- 
λιάχθηκα:; p.p. βουλιαγμένος, βουλιασμένος. 

βούλομαι, to wish, ἐβουλήθην or ἠβουλήθην: Ἱπροτί. 
ἐβουλόμην ΟΥ ἠβουλόμην. Hi 

Βρέχω, to wet (as an impersonal verb, to rain), ἔβρεξα 
--“Βρέχομαι, ἐβράχην. 

βρίσκω, to find, see εὑρίσκω. 

βυζάνω, *Bvfaivo, to nurse, ἐβύζασα, "ἐθύζαξα--βυζά- 


νοµαι, ἐβυζάσθην, * (ἢβυζάχθηκα. 
23 | 


804 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


γελῶ(άω), to laugh, ἐγέλασα-- γελῶμαι, ἐγελάσθην. 

Ἐηέρνω, to incline, ἔγειρα. 

γηράσκω, *yepva(éw), to grow old, ἐγήρασα, *éyépaca. 

ἘἈθιαίνω, to recover, ἔγιανα". Ῥ.Ρ. γιαμένος. 

γίνομαι, γίγνομαι, to become, ἔγεινα or ἔγινα " several 
of the ancient forms are occasionally used in the 
literary style, thus: fut. γενήσομαι" 2d aor. ἐγε- 
νόµην, ἐγένετο, ἐγενόμεθα, ἐγένοντο" optative, γέ- 
νοιτο (may it come to pass); inf. γενέσθαι" part. 
γενόμενος. 

γινώσκω, to know, ἔγνωσα in compounds also ἔγνων, -ως, 
-ω, -ωμεν, -ωτε, -ωσαν); Imperat. γνῶθι, ἂς γνώσῃ; 
etc.; part. γνώσας, γνώσασα, γνῶσαν ΟΥ̓ γνούς, 
γνοῦσα, γνόν ---γινώσκομαι, ἐγνώσθην. 

δάκνω, to bite, ἔδηξα---δάκνομαιυ, ἐδήχθην. 

δαγκάνω, to bite, ἐδάγκασα --- δαγκάνομαι, ἐδαγκάσθην, 
* δαγκάσθηκα. 

δεικνύω, δείκνυμι (see p. 346), * δείχνω, to show, ἔδειξα---- 
δεικνύομαι, δείκνυμαι, ἐδείχθην, Ἀἐδείχθηκα. 

δέομαι, to need, beseech, δεῖ, δεῖται, δεόμεθα, δεῖσθε, 
δέονται" imperf. ἐδεόμην, ἐδέου, ἐδεῖτο, ἐδεόμεθα, 
ἐδεῖσθε, ἐδέοντο " aor. ἐδεήθην - this word is also 
used in the active as an impersonal verb, in the 
sense of I (you, he) must, it 18 necessary, thus: 
pres. δεῖ or δέον (really the part.); subj. δέῃ: 
imperf. ἔδει: aor. ἐδέησε " sub}. denon. 

δέρω, “δέρνω, to thrash, ἔδειρα-- δέροµαι, ἐδάρην- 

δέχομαι, to receive, ἐδέχθην, Ἐἐδέχθηκα ΟΥ sometimes 
the ancient 180 aor. mid. form, ἐδεξάμην (see p. 121); 
imperat. δέχθητε, *deEou* Pp.p. δεδεγµένος. 

δέω (not contracted), δένω, to bind, ἔδεσα-- δέοµαι, δένο- 
μαι, ἐδέθην. 


APPENDIX 305 


διδάσκω, to teach, ἐδίδαξα --- διδάσκοµαι, ἐδιδάχθην, 
Ἀδιδάχθηκα. 

διδράσκω, to escape, see ἀποδιδράσκω. 

δίδω, δίδωμι (see p. 345), *Siva, to give, ἔδωσα or ἔδωκα - 

| imperat. δός (δῶσε), ἂς δώσῃ, ἂς δώσωμεν, δώσατε 
or δότε (δῶστε), ἂς δώσωσι(ν) --- δίδομαι, ἐδόθην. 
Ἀἐδόθηκα. 

διψώ(άω), to thirst, ἐδίψασα. 

δύναμαι, to be able, -ασαι, -αται, -άμεθα, -ασθε, -ανται" 
subj. δύνωμαι, -ασαι, -ηται, -ώμεθα, -ασθε, -ωνται: 
imperat. δύνασο, -άσθω, -ασθε, -άσθων ΟΥ -άσθωσαν: 
inf. δύνασθαι" part. δυνάμενος " imperf. ἐδυνάμην 
or ἠδυνάμην, -ασο, -ατο, -άμεθα, -ασθε, -αντο" aor. 
ἐδυνήθην or μην 

ἐγείρω, to rouse, ἤγειρα---ἐγείρομαι, to awake, Πγέρδην : 
Ῥ.Ρ. ἐγηγερμένος. 

ἐθίζω, to accustom, εἴθισα---ἐθίξζομαι, εἰθίσθην. 

εἰκάζω, to compare, εἴκασα, ἤκασα-- εἰκάξζομαι, εἰκάσθην, 
ἠκάσθην. 

εἶμαι, εἰμί, to be (see p. 346); the imperat. in the ver- 
nacular is: va εἶσαι, ἂς εἶναι, ds εἴμαστε, νὰ εἶσθε, 
ἂς εἶναι. 

Χεἰξεύρω, to know, see ἠξεύρω. 

ἐκπλήττω, to astonish, ἐξέπληξα--- ἐκπλήττομαι, ἐξε- 
πλάγην " P.p. ἐκπεπληγμένος. 

ἑλίσσω, to wind, εἵλιξα---ἑλίσσομαι, εἱλίχθην. 

ἑλκύω, to attract, εἵλκυσα---ἑλκύομαι, εἱλκύσθην. 

ἕλκω, to draw, εἷλξα. | 

ἐμποδίζω, to impede, ἠμπόδισα, ἐμπόδισα--- ἐμποδίζομαι, 
ἠμποδίσθην. ἐμποδίσθην. 

ἐμῶ(έω). to vomit, μεσα. 

ἐναντιοῦμαι(ίόομαι), to oppose, ἠναντιώθην. 


906 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ἐννοῶ(έω), to understand ; this verb is regular in. its 
terminations, but the imperf. and aor. ind. are 
formed from the verb νοῶ, and are therefore 
written ἐνόουν and ἐνόησα. 

ἐνοχλῶ(έω), to annoy, ἠνώχλησα " imperf. ἠνώχλουν. 

ἑορτάζω, to celebrate, ἑώρτασα-- ἑορτάζομαι, ἑωρτάσθην. 

ἕπομαι, to follow, imperf. εἰπόμην: the aor. is wanting. 

ἐργάζομαι, to work, εἰργάσθην. | 

ἐρέσσω, to row, ἤρεσα. 

ἕρπω, to creep, imperf. εἶρπον. 

ἔρχομαι, to come, ᾖλθον, “ἦλθα subj. ἔλθω, Ἀξέρθω ΟΥ̓́, 
contracted with νὰ, ἔνἄρθω - imperat. ἐλθέ (in com- 
pounds the accent is regular, ἄπελθε, come, Or gO 
away), *éda, as ἔλθη, ἂς ἔλθωμεν, “ἂς ἔλθουμε, 
ἔλθετε, “ἐλᾶτε, ἂς ἔλθωσι(ν), πὰς ἔλθουν: the an- 
cient fut. part. ἐλευσόμενος 18 sometimes met with. 

ἑστιῶ(άω)., to entertain at a feast, εἰστίασα-- ἑστιῶμαι, 
εἱστιάθην. 

εὑρίσκω, “βρίσκω, to find, εὗρον, “ηὗρα, “βρῆκα, Κεὑρη- 
κα. subj. εὕρω, “βρώ: imperat. εὗρε or εὑρέ (ac- 
cented regularly in compounds), Ἀβρέί(ς), ἂς εὕρῃ, “as 
βρῇ, as εὕρωμεν, “as βροῦμε, εὕρετε, *Bpére, ἂς 
εὕρωσι(ν), “ἂς βροῦν(ε)" imperf. εὕρισκον, “evpioxa 
--αὑρίσκομαι, εὑρέθην, “εὑρέθηκα subj. εὑρεθῶ, 
Ἀβρεθώ: Ρ.Ρ. εὑρημένος, Ἀβρεμένος. 

εὔχομαι, to wish, ηὐχήθην ΟΥ̓ εὐχήθην. 

ἔχω, to have, ἔσχον " part. σχών, σχοῦσα, σχόν" fut. θὰ 
ἔχω, in compounds also -σχω OF ἕξω (note the 
rough breathing in this last form, for this modifies 
the consonant of the compounded preposition, 
thus: ἀπέχω, to remain away, θὰ ἀφέξω" µετέχω, 
to take part, θὰ µεθέξω or θὰ µετάσχω): the 


APPENDIX 357 


imperf. εἶχον is generally employed instead of the 
aor.; passive, ἔχομαι, ἐσχέθην' imperf. εἰχόμην : 
Ῥ.Ρ. ἐσχημένος. 

ζευγνύω, to yoke, ἔζευξα-- ζευγνύομαι, ἐζεύχθην. 

ζω(άω), to live, Gis, ζῇ, ζώμεν, “ζοῦμε, ζῆτε, ζῶσι(ν)», 
Ἀζοῦνίε):' subj. same as the ind.; inf. ζῆν - part. 
ζῶν, ζῶσα, Cov: imperat. ζῆθι, *va ζῆς, ζῆτω or as 
ζῇ, ζῶμεν or As ζῶμεν, “ἂς ζοῦμε, ζῆτε, “νὰ ζῆτε, 
ζήτωσαν or ἂς ζώσι(ν), “ἂς Codv(e)+ aor. ἔζησα. 

ζώνω, ζωννύω, to gird, ἔζωσα --- ζώνομαι, ἐζώσθην - p.p. 
ἐζωσμένος. 

ἠξεύρω, to know, employs the aor. of μανθάνω, ἔμαθον. 

ἠμπορώ(έω), “μπορώ, to be able, ἠμπόρεσα, "μπόρεσα. 

θάπτω. to bury, ἔθαψα-- θάπτοµαι, ἐτάφθην, Ὑἐτάφθηκα 
or ἐθάφθηκα :. p.p. τεθαμμένος, “θαμμένος. 

θέλω, to wish, ἠθέλησα: imperf. ἤθελον. 

θέτω, τίθημι (see p. 944), to place, ἔθεσα, ἔθηκα-- θέτο- 
μαι, ἐτέθην. 

θιγγάνω, Ἀθίγω, to touch, έθιξα, ἔθυγον --- θιγγάνομαι, 
ἐθίχθην. | 

ἵπταμαι, to fly, in pres. like ἵσταμαι (p. 348); aor. 
ἔπτην " imperf. irtaunv: imperat. πτῆθι: inf. πτῆ- 
vat: part. πτάς. 

ἵστημι, to place (see p. 343 and also στήνω): the com- 
pounds of ἵστημι form the pres. act. in ἱστώ(άω). 
regularly conjugated like «ruta. 

κάθημαι, to sit, -ησαι, -ηται, -ήἦμεθα, -ησθε, -ηνται"' subj. 
καθώμαι, -ἢ, -Ώται, -ώμεθα, -ῆσθε, -ὥνται " imperat. 
κάθησο or κάθου, καθήσθω, ἂς καθώµεθα, κάθησθε, 
καθήσθων ΟΥ καθήσθωσαν" inf. καθῆσθαι" part. 
καθήμενος" imperf. ἐκαθήμην, -noo, -ητο, -ήμεθα, 
-noOe, -ηντο" aor. ἐκάθησα. 


358 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


καθίζω, to set, seat, ἐκάθισα - imperf. ἐκάθιξον (irregular 
augment). 
κάθομαι, to sit, ἐκάθησα or ἔκατσα" imperat. κάθησε 
or κάτσε, ἂς καθήσῃ, or ἂς κάτσῃ, etc.; impert. 
" ἐκαθόμουν. 
καίω, to burn, ἔκαυσα, *éxayra—xalopar, ἐκάην, "ἐκάηκα" 
Ῥ.Ρ. κεκαυµένος, “καμμένος or καύμένος (the latter 
usually in the sense of poor, unfortunate, miser- 
able). 
καλώ(έω), to call, ἐκάλεσα--καλοῦμαι, ἐκλήθην, δ ἐκαλέ- 
σθηκα. 
κάμνω, “κάνω, to do, ἔκαμα. 
Ἀκαμόνομαι, to pretend, ἐκαμώθηκα. 
καταναλίσκω, to consume, κατηνάλωσα--- καταναλίσκο- 
μαι, κατηναλώθην. 
κεῖμαι, ἴο 116, κεῖσαι, κεῖται, κείμεθα, κεῖσθε, κεῖνται " 
imperf. ἐκείμην, ἔκεισο, ἔκειτο, ἐκείμεθα, ἔκεισθε, 
ἔκειντο" aor. wanting. 
κερδαίνω, to earn, ἐκέρδησα. 
κερνώ(άω), κιρνῶ, to pour in, ἐκέρασα---κερνοῦμαι, ἐκερά- 
σθην. 
κλαίω, to weep, κλαίεις (κλαῖς), κλαίει, κλαίοµεν 
(ἄκλαῖμε), κλαίετε ("κλαῖτε), κλαίουσι(ν) (᾿ κλαίουν 
or. κλαῖνε); aor. ἔκλαυσα, Ἐξκλαψα --- κλαίομαι, 
ἐκλαύθην, ἐκλαύσθην. 
κλίνω, to incline, ἔκλινα---κλίνομαι, ἐκλίθην. 
κορέννυμι, to satiate (used only in the aorist and de- 
rived tenses), ἐκόρεσα” aor. pass. or mid. ἐκορέσθην " 
Ῥ.Ρ. κεκορεσµένος. | 
κλέπτω, to steal, ἔκλεψα-- κλέπτομαι, ἐκλάπην.. 
κόπτω, to cut, aor. pass. ἐκόπην. 
κράξω, to cry out, ἔκραξα---κράζοµαι, ἐκράχθην. 


APPENDIX 359 


κρεμώ(άω), “κρεμνῶ, to hang, ἐκρέμασα-- κρεμώμαι, έκρε- 
pacOny: (intrans.) κρέµαµαι, like δύναμαι" imperf. 
ἐκρεμάμην. 
κρίνω, to judge, ἔκρινα-- κρίνοµαι, ἐκρίθην. 
κτώμαι(άοµαι). to acquire, is conjugated regularly, but 
also employs certain forms of the ancient middle: 
perf. κέκτημαι, -ησαι, -ηται, -ἦμεθα, ο -«ηνται 
aor. Ist pers. ἐκτησάμην, 3d pers. ἐκτήσατο. 
ἃ κυττάζω, to observe, ἐκύτταξα. 
λαγχάνω, “λαχαίνω, to obtain by lot, ἔλαχον, "ἔλαχα. 
λαμβάνω, “λαβαίνω, to take, ἔλαβον --- λαμβάνομαι, 
ἐλήφθην, “ἐλήφθηκα: p.p. (in compounds) εἰλημ- 
μένος. 
λανθάνω. to remain hidden, ἔλαθον---λανθάνομαι, to err, 
ἐλανθάσθην. 
λόγω, to say ο λέει; κτλ., 566 P- gon εἶπον " subj. 
εἴπω (Χ᾿ Ἰὰς TIS, πῇ; aes "hte, ποῦν-ε)' 1mM- 
perat. εἰπέ (δ᾽ πές or ᾿πέ), ἂς εἴπῃ (*as πῇ), as 
εἴπωμεν (ἂς ᾿ποῦμε), εἰπέτε, εἴπετε, OF εἴπατε 
(ἄ πέτε), ἂς εἴπωσι(ν) (ἂς ᾿ποῦν-ε) (the accent of 
the 2d pers. imperat. is regular in the compounds) 
---λέγομαι, ἐλέχθην, ἐρρέθην" aor. part. ρηθείς - p.p. 
λελεγμένος, εἰρημένος, Ἀλεγμένος, είπωμένος, ' πω- 
μένος. 
λείπω, to fail, be absent, ἔλειψα, ἔλιπον --- λείπομαι, 
 ἐλείφθην, ἐλιπόμην. 
λούω, to bathe, ἔλουσα---λούομαι, ἐλούσθην " Ῥ.Ρ. λελου- 
μένος, Ἀλουσμένος. 
ἃ μαζόνω, to collect, ἐμάζωξα.-- μαζόνομαι, ἐμαζώχθηκα " 
Ἁμαζωμμένος. 
μανθάνω, "μαθαίνω, to learn, ἔμαθον, “ἔμαθα: Ῥ.Ρ. 
Ἁμαθημένος. 


900 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


µαστίξζω, to flog, ἐμάστιξα-- μαστίζομαι, ἐμαστίχθην. 

μιγνύω, to mix, ἔμιξα — μιγνύοµαι, ἐμίγην' Ῥ.Ρ. µεμι- 
μένος. 

μιμνήσκω, to remember (used only in compounds, such 
as dva- and ὑπο-). ἔμνησα--- μιμνήσκομαι (ava-), 
ἐμνήσθην. Z 

*umopa(éw), to be able, see ἠμπορῶ. 

νέμω (more commonly διανέµω), to distribute, ἔνευμα--- 
νέμομαι, ἐνεμήθην. 

νοώ(έω), to understand; this verb 18 reoular in its ter- 
minations, but only the imp. and aor. ind. are em- 
ployed, the other forms being derived from ἐννοώ. 

νυστάζω. to be sleepy, ἐνύσταξα. 

Ἀξερνώ(άω), to vomit, ἐξέρασα. 

* £eyvG(dw), to forget, ἐξέχασα-- ξεχνιοῦμαι ΟΥ̓ ξεχνιέµαι, 
ἐξεχάσθηκα. 

ξέω (not contracted), Ἀξύνω, to scrape, ἔξεσα, “ἔξυσα--- 
ξέομαι, “ξύνομαι, ἐξέσθην, ᾿ἐξύσθηκα. 

οἶδα (perf. with pres. signification), to know, used only 
in the 1st and 3d pers. sing. in certain expressions, 
such as οὐκ οἶδα, I do not know; Κύριος οἶδε, God 
knows; τίς οἶδε; who knows? 

οἰκτείρω, to pity, ὤκτειρα: imperf. ὠκτειρον. 

οἰμώζω, to lament, ὠμωξα. 

ὀλισθαίνω, to slip, glide, ὠλίσθησα. 

ὀμνύω, Ἀδμόνω, to swear, ὤμοσα. 

παίζω, to play, ἔπαιξα-- παίζοµαι, ἐπαίχθην. 

“παίρνω (πέρνω, to take, (ἐ)πῆρα" imperat. πάρε, πάρετε 
or πάρτε-- παίρνοµαι, (ἐγπάρθηκα " Ῥ.Ρ. παρµένος. 

πάσσω, to sprinkle, adorn, ἔπασα---πάσσομαι, ἐπάσθην. 

πάσχω, “παθαίνω, to suffer, ἔπαθον, ἔπαθα. 

πείθω, to persuade, ἔπεισα" anc. perf. πέποιθα, -as, -Ε, 


ΑΡΡΕΝΡΙΣ 901 


-αμεν, -ατε, -ασι(ν)---πείθομαι, ἐπείσθην" anc. perf. 
πέπεισμαι (Ist pers. only in use). 

πειράζω, to annoy, ἐπείραξα-- πειράζοµαι, ἐπειράχθην. 

Ἀπερνῶ(άω), to pass, penetrate, ἐπέρασα. 

πέταμαι, to fly (in present like δύναμαι) " aor. ἐπτάμην " 
imperat. πτῆθι: inf. πτέσθαι' part. πτάµενος. 

πέτομαι, to fly, ἐπτόμην " imperf. ἐπετόμην " imperat. 
πτῆθι: inf. πτέσθαι" part. πτόμενος. 

Ἀπετῶ(άω)., to fly, ἐπέταξα---πετιοῦμαι, πετιέμαι, (ἔγπε- 
τάχθηκα. 

πηγαίνω, ὑπάγω (ἅπάω, πᾷς, πάει, πᾶμε, πᾶτε, πᾶνε), ἴο 
Ε΄ τςτῆγα | 

Ἁπιάνω, to seize, ἔπιασα: imperat. πιάσε--- πιάνοµαι, 
(ὐπιάσθηκα. 

πίνω, to drink, ἔπιον (“ἤπιαν " subj. πίω, “πιῶ " imperat. 
πίε, *mé, ἂς πίη, “ἃς πιῇ, οἷο. -- πίνομαι, ἐπόθην, 
Ἀ(έπιώθηκα. 


τις 


πίπτω. “πέφτω, to fall, ἔπεσον, “ἔπεσα. 


πλάσσω, πλάττω, to create, ἔπλασα-- πλάσσομαι, ἐπλά- 
σθην. : 
πλέω (not contracted), to sail, ἔπλευσα. 
πλύνω, to wash, ἔπλυνα-- πλύνομαι, ἐπλύθην. 
πνέω (not contracted), to blow, breathe, ἔπνευσα---πνέο- 
μαι, ἐπνεύσθην. 
*apnoxo, to swell, ἔπρηξα --- πρήσκομαι, (ἐγπρήσθηκα " 
ΠΡ. πρησµένος. 
προορίζω, to predestinate, is regular, but there are also 
in use the perf. pass. forms προώρισµαι, 1 am pre- 
destined, and προώρισται, it is foreordained. 
ρέω (not contracted), to flow, ἔρρευσα. 
ρηγνύω (ρήγνυμι), to break, ἔρρηξα — ρηγνύομαι (ρήγνυ- 
μαι, -υσαι, -υται, -ύμεθα, -υσθε, -υνται), ἐρράγην. 


4 


362 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


ρίχνω, ρίχτω, to throw, ἔρριξα, ἔρριψα--- ρίχνοµαι, ἐρ- 
ρίχθηκα. 

Ἀρουφῶ(άω), to absorb, swallow, ἐρρούφήξα. 

ρώννυμι, to strengthen, used only in the imperat. mid. 
ἔρρωσο, ἔρρωσθε, meaning farewell. 

σβύνω, to extinguish, ἔσβεσα, ἔσβυσα --- σβύνομαι, 
ἐσβέσθην, "(ἐσβύσθηκα. 

σέβομαι, to honor, ἐσεβάσθην, Ἀθσεβάσθηκα. 

Ἀσηκόνω, to raise, ἐσήκωσα -- σηκόνοµαι, vO get up, 
ἐσηκώθηκα " imperat. σήκω ΟΥ σήκου, σηκωθῆτε. 

σήποµαι, σαπίζω, to putrefy, ἐσάπην or ἐσαπήθην, 
Χἐσάπισα ΟΙ ἐσαπήθηκα. 

σικχαίνοµαι, “σιχαίνομαι, to loathe, ἐσιχάθην, "(ἐσιχά- 
θηκα. 

Ἐσκουντώίάω), to push, ἐσκούντησα ΟΥ̓ ἐσκούντηξα--- 
σκουντιοῦμαι, (ἐσκουντήθηκα ΟΥ (ἐσκουντήχθηκα. 

Ἐσπρώχνω, to push, ἔσπρωξα-- σπρώχνομαι, ἐσπρώχθηκα. 

στάζω. to drop, trickle, ἔσταξα. 

Ἀστέκω or στέκομαι, to stand, stop, ἐστάθηκα " imperat. 
στάσου. σταθῆτε. 

Ἀστήνω, σταίνω, στένω (anc. ἵστημι), to place, ἔστησα" 
ἐστήθηκα" στημένος. 

στηρίζω, to support, ἐστήριξα. 

στρέφω, to turn, regular in the literary language, 
ἔστρεψα" mid. ἐστράφην " in the vernacular occurs 
the alternative form στρήφω, of which the p.p. 
mid. is στρηµµένος ΟΥ στρεμµένος. 

συρίζω, to whistle, ἐσύριξα---συρίζοµαι, ἐσυρίχθην. 

σφάζω, to slaughter, ἔσφαξα--- σφάζοµαι, ἐσφάγην, 
Ἀέσφάηκα or ἐσφάχθηκα. 

Ἀσφαλώ(άω), σφαλνῶ, to close, ἐσφάληξα or ἐσφάλησα 
- σφαλιοῦμαι, (ἰσφαλήχθηκα or (Ὀσφαλήσθηκα. 


APPENDIX 363 


σφυρίζω, to whistle, ἐσφύριξα-- σφυρίζοµαι, ἐσφυρίχθην. 

σώζω, to save, ἔσωσα --- σώζομαι, ἐσώθην' p.p. σεσω- 
σµένος. 

Ὑπάζω, to promise, ἔταξα---τάζοµαι, ἐτάχθηκα. 

τείνω, to stretch, ἔτεινα-- τείνοµαι, ἐτάθην. 


"τελώίέω), to complete, ἐτέλεσα ---τελοῦμαι, ἐτελέσθην : 


the 3d pers. of the anc. perf., τετέλεσται, it is done, 
is in Occasional use. 

τήκω, to melt, ἔτηξα-- τήκομαι, ἐτάκην. 

τίκτω. to give birth, ἔτεκον. 

Ἀπραβάίάω), to draw, shove, ἐτράβηξα — τραβιοῦμαι, 
τραβιέµαι, (ἐτραβήχθηκα. 


τρέφω, “θρέφω, to nourish, ἔθρεψα- “τρέφομαι. ἐτράφην 
Ρ δ Ρ ΠΕΣ ΕἸΣ ΤΠ, 


᾿έτράφηκα or ἐθράφηκα" p.p. τεθραμμένος, Ἔθρεμ- 
μένος. 

τρέχω, to run, ἔτρεξα, ἔδραμον " pres. imperat. (vernacu- 
lar), Ἀτρέχα, τρεχᾶτε. 

τρίζω, to creak, ἔτριξα. 


᾿τρώγω, “τρώω (see p. 351), to eat, ἔφαγον: subj. φάγω 


(φάω, φᾷς, etc.); aor. pass. "(ἐφαγώθηκα": p.p. 
Ἐφαγωμένος. 

τυγχάνω, “τυχαίνω, to obtain, happen, ἔτυχον, Ἔέτυχα. 

ὑπάγω, to go, see πηγαίνω. 

ὑπόσχομαι, ὑπισχνοῦμαι, tO promise, ὑπεσχέθην, ὑπε- 
σχέθηκα. 


φαίνομαι, to appear, ἐφάνην. 


φέγγω, to light, shine, ἔφεγξα, "ἔφεξα. 

φέρω, “φέρνω, to carry, ἔφερα, (in some compounds) 
ἤνεγκον --- φέρομαι, ἐφέρθην, "ἐφέρθηκα, (in some 
compounds) ἠνέχθην. 

φεύγω, to flee, ἔφυγον, “ἔφυγα. 


φθάνω, to arrive, ἔφθασα " p.p. Ἀφθασμένος. 


364 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


Φθείρω, to destroy, ἔφθειρα-- φθείρομαι, ἐφθάρην, *épOa- 
ρηκα or ἐφθάρθηκα. | 
φορώ[έω), to wear, ἐφόρεσα-- φοροῦμαι, ἐφορέθην. 
Ἀφτιάνω, to make, ἔφτιασα-- φτιάνομαι, (ἐφτιάσθηκα. 
Ἀφωνάζω, to call, ἐφώναξα --- φωνάζομαι, ἐφωνάχθηκα᾽ | 
p-p. φωναγμένος. | 
| 


χαίρω (ἄ χαίρομαι), to rejoice, ἐχάρην, "ἐχάρηκα. 

Ἐχαλά[άω), χαλνῶ, tO spoil, ἐχάλασα-- χαλιοῦμαι, (ὄχα- 
λάσθηκα. 

χάνω, to lose, ἔχασα-- χάνοµαι, ἐχάθην, ᾿ἐχάθηκα" ἨῬ.ρ. | 
χαμένος. 

Ἀχαράζει (impersonal), it dawns, ἐχάραξε. 

*voptalve, to satiate or be satiated, ἐχόρτασα. 

χύνω (in compounds χέω —not contracted), to pour, 


ἔχυσα-- χύνομαι, ἐχύθην, Ἀἐχύθηκα " P.P. κεχυµένος. | 

Ἀψάχνω, ψάχω. to search for, ἔψαξα. | 

ψήνω, ψαίνω, to bake, ἔψησα---ψήνομαι, ἐψήθην' ϱ.Ρ. 
ἐψημένος, "ψημένος. 

Ἐψοφῶίάω), to die (usually said of animals), ἐψόφησα " 
Ρ.Ρ. ψοφησμένος. 

ὠθάίέω), to push, is regular (ὤθησα": pass. ὠθήθην), but 
ἐξωθῶ, to expel, has aor. ἔξωσα " pass. ἐξώσθην. 


Handwriting 


The following are given as examples of Greek 
chirography. The first is the copper- plate style, re- 
produced from a school copy-book; the second and 
third are specimens of Greek as actually written. 
These are followed by a transcription in printed char- 
acters and a translation. In the copy-book exercise 
the proverbs are in, the modern popular style, the 


APPENDIX 365 


‘maxims in the ancient; the others are in the modern 
literary style. 
There are three contractions very commonly used in 
: ( 


3 writing, as follows: & (ου), i (or), and ὤἤ (καὶ). 


| 1 

κ. «Ποαρουμίαι. 

ε ζγα ἔργονύπε με lov τεαφρᾷ ὄζων; Έργο va σροσἑο2γιά 

η Mepazo αράό,μωράλα μα. 6 
σου OV pA} dpaan, défov weal pare popu 

| ao e004 EY ay] td, lov » VEYMIUA L PQPEVE 

ΕΟ Lagos wapabourjpnd gin ῥουρέουγα gavel 

“χα tras yooryes ped σαρᾶ vad {ρε φόέ” 

. ο ὥσωῶρα φτεαξαεέωχουν; ζάσζρα. ει la Copa τέ 


vovv lye οσιλειωώ Acuoaes 6 οι σεγοῖσ 0 U0BCI. 


Sopyaia θνωμιιιά.: 
| Cis οἐωγ»οσ ὠρεσΖοῦ αγεύεσδα» wepe aalons 
| Svvavr UCOjLOA Ob. ζρόσου “συγὲ ᾿ γρυσέαν 
| Lopia aqovloy brine lysuiiliporr Logots , ρω: 
Ἱ. «Ζσρό» colt apodovvar lovs eveppelad 
| ορ Yevdes τεαγγῶ VOO liv dauprver bacarifelav 
| Ot prilopes portivovow ryu lad Yuyao. 
| on laprdn piper Sra cavlox Bia pndev gpd: 


| 
| 
| 
| 


Ατηρ Λα, oF rep lg » 
Ἐξ μα. 
a er) Ψ κα. a} Hh. 
5 ad Ge, 7 A 
κας, sydd Kut = 


i σ᾽ ny rly Ly bs ye 


«- 


APPENDI x 367 


hates Brey aie 
Wien τὸ ey Tey 1+ κα. 


ι 4 ρα Sig Ia Le ασις 
δ, νι 

er ΤᾺ ορ ει 
| hens goals ο. 


ει) Gor cn { γυν- 


Pro own 7 Soi Are Lilith, 
| ο, roti yh. ία «τα bar ἆ/- 


prea ο, re stig deel -- 


9608 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


3 


; CF 
Te CF 1 Tpit Wl 


ee ae Y le | 
ες ο ἢ φέρε. 
LV γκο eet; dol seo 
bg 07 As "ite Be κ pee «ορ. 
ή Cor ο ecw nor (ecto 
a οι... 
DE “νά ο 


σα. ύ- fran on ὅΖο».-- 
Gor I δν. 
2 ο FA Lut oreLs 7.3 ος. 


cao om ολ 


“ή κιέες bor. ρω . 
ε΄. ΣΕ ΚΝ 


ZY, 5's. Se 


Why σ΄ eae 


970 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


1 
Παροιμίαι 


“Ora ἔρχονται μὲ τὸν καιρὸ, ὅταν ξέρῃς νὰ προσμένῃς. 
Μεγάλο καράβι μεγάλα κύματα. “Ὅπου ᾿δῇς μεγάλη 
ἀγάπη, δέξου καὶ μεγάλη ἔχθρα. Τὸ θέρος ἔψαλλες, τὸν 
χειμῶνα χόρευε. Ὁ καλὸς καραβοκύρης ᾿ς τὴ φουρτοῦνα 
φαίνεται. Κάλλια ἕνας φρόνιμος ἐχθρὸς παρὰ ἕνας τρελ- 
λὸς φίλος. Τὰ ἄσπρα καταιβάζουν τᾶστρα. Καὶ τὰ 
βόλια κάνουν τὴς δουλειαίς. ”Ασκοπος ὁ νοῦς, διπλοῦς ὁ 


[ή 
κοπος. 


᾿Αρχαῖα Γνωμικά 


Εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος ἀμύνεσθαι περὶ πάτρης. Γυναικὶ 
κόσμος οἱ τρόποι, οὐχὶ χρυσία. Σοφία πλούτου κτῆμα 
τιμιώτερον. Σοφοῖς χρῶ. Αἰσχρόν ἐστι προδοῦναι τοὺς 
εὐεργέτας. Τὸ ψευδὲς" κάλλος ὑπὸ τῶν δακρύων βα- 
σανίζεται. Οἱ ρήτορες γοητεύουσιν ἡμῶν τὰς ψυχάς. 
Χρὴ τἀληθῆ λέγειν. Γνῶθι σαυτόν. Bia μηδὲν πρᾶττε. 
Πλοῦτος τίμιον μὲν, ἀλλὰ τύχης κτῆμα. 


2 


“Ἑλληνικὸν χειρόγραφον, ὡς πάσης ἄλλης γλώσσης, 
εἶναι δύσκολον κατὰ τὸ μᾶλλον καὶ ἧττον διὰ ξένον νὰ 
ἀναγνώσῃ. Καίτοι τὰ γράμματα τῆς γραφῆς ὁμοιάζουσι 
γενικῶς τὰ τοῦ τύπου, ὑπάρχουσιν ὅμως διαφοραί τινες, 
ὡς φαίνεται ἐκ τοῦ προηγουμένου ἀποσπάσματος, ὅπερ 
παρελήφθη ἐκ καλλιγραφίας δηµοσιευθείσης ἐν ᾿Αθήναις. 


lal 


Ἔν δὲ τῇ συνήθει γραφῇ at διαφοραὶ αὗται γίνονται 


3 


\ ’ / 
καταφανέστεραι καὶ χρειάζεταί τις άρκετην οικειοτητα 


\ \ “ ο Ν / \ > / / 
πρὸς την γλὠσσαν WATE να δύναται νὰ ἀναγινωσκη µιαν 


ος 


APPENDIX 371 


ἐπιστολὴν εὐκόλως. Ηρὸς δὲ ὑπάρχουσι συνεσθυγµένοι 
τινες τύποι ἐν κοινῇ χρήσει, οἵτινες δὲν ὁμοιάζουσιν ἢ 
ὀλίγον τὰ κεχωρισμένα γράμματα. Οὗτοι πρέπει προσε- 
κτικῶς νὰ μελετηθῶσι καὶ ἀντιγραφῶσιν ὑπὸ τοῦ σπου- 
δαστοῦ συμφώνως τοῖς ἀνωτέρω διδομένοις ὑποδείγμασιν, 
ὥστε ἀπαντώμενοι εὐκόλως νὰ ἀναγνωρίζωνται. 


3 


9 7 « ᾽ὔ 
Ev Νέᾳ Ὕορκῃ, 
Τῇ 95η ᾿Ιουλίου, 1896. 

᾿Αγαπητὲ φίλε, 
. Ἢ τελευταία ἐξ ᾿Αθηνῶν ἐπιστολή σου μοὶ ἐπροξένησε 

: / ’ / / \ an \ ” / 
μεγάλην εὐχαρίστησιν, διότι πρὸ πολλοῦ τὸ ὄνειρόν µου 
εἶναι νὰ ἐπισκεφθῶ τὴν ὡραίαν ταύτην πόλιν, τὴν ὁποίαν 
ὡς μοὶ περιγράφεις μὲ τὸν ἀείποτε γαλανὸν οὐρανόν της 

\ Ν \ x »/ / (A id 
καὶ μὲ τὴν λευκὴν ἄποψίν της, φαντάζομαι ὡς φανταστι- 

λα 3 \ 5) / 
κὸν θέαμα τέρπον τὸν ὀφθαλμόν. 

᾽ / \ > a > \ \ \ ta) 

Ελπίζω va ἐπισκεφθῶ αὐτὴν κατὰ τοὺς προσεχεῖς 
Ὀλυμπιακοὺς ἀγῶνας καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἀπό τινος καταγίνο- 
. \ > / fol / ¢e Ἂ A \ 
μαι εἰς τὴν ἐκμάθησιν τῆς Newtépas Ἑλληνικῆς τὴν 
id 
ὁποίαν εὑρίσκω ὡραιοτάτην. 
᾿Αναμένων καὶ ἄλλην σου περυγραφήν 
Διατελώ ὁ φίλος σου 


1 
PROVERBS 


All things come with time, when you know how to 
wait. Great ship, great waves. Where you see great 
love, expect also great hatred. You sang in the sum- 
mer, dance in the winter. The good captain is shown 


91. MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


in the storm. Better a wise enemy than a foolish 
friend. Money brings down the stars. And the bul- 
jets do the work. Mind without aim, double trouble. 


ANCIENT MAXIMS 


A most excellent omen is to defend one’s country. 
An ornament to a woman is character, not jewels. 
Wisdom is a more honorable possession than wealth. 
Make use of the wise. It is shameful to betray bene- 
factors. False beauty is tested by the tears. The 
orators charm our souls. One must speak the truth. 
Know thyself. Do nothing by violence. Wealth is 
honorable indeed, but a thing of chance. 


2 


Greek chirography, like that of every other lan- 
guage, is more or less difficult for a stranger to read. 
Although the written letters resemble in general the 
printed, there are nevertheless certain differences, as — 
appears from the preceding extract, which is taken 
from a copy-book published in Athens. In the ordi- 
nary writing these differences become more marked, 
and one needs considerable familiarity with the lan- 
guage in order to be able to read a letter easily. Be- 
sides, there are certain contracted characters in com- 
mon use which do not resemble, or but little, the 
separated letters. These must be attentively studied 
and copied by the student after the above given 
models, so that they may be easily recognized when 
encountered. 


APPENDIX 373 


3 


New York, 
July 20th, 1896. 
Dear Frrenp: 

Your last letter from Athens gave me great pleas- 
ure, since for a long time my dream has been (is) to 
visit that beautiful city, which, as you describe it to 
me with its ever-blue sky and with its white aspect, I 
picture to myself as a fancied spectacle pleasing to the 
By Geo. 
I hope to visit it at the time of the next Olympian 
games, and on that account I have for some time been 
(am) busying myself with the study of Modern Greek, 
which 1 find very beautiful. 


Awaiting another description from you, 


I remain your friend, 


Syllabic Division of Words 


A word at the end of a line, in writing or print, may 
be divided between any two consecutive vowels or 
diphthongs, except that two vowels forming a diph- 
iene cannot be ας thus: ἀ-ό-ρι-στος, τοι-οῦ- 
τος, ὑ-γεί- α, ὑ- -γι-ει-νός. 

A single consonant, whether simple or pom oon, al- 
ways belongs to the following syllable: d-va-Bai-va, 
λό-γος, ἀ-ξι-ό-τι-μος. 

When two or more consonants come together the 
rule of division is that those and only those belong 
to the following syllable, and consequently must be 


874 MODERN GREEK MASTERY 


brought forward to the new line, which together may 
begin a classical Greek word; thus: ἑἐ-κτύ-πη-σα, ἄν- 
θρω-πος, ἀν-ταλ-λάσ-σω. ir 

Three consonants may begin a syllable if, in the. 
classical language, the first with the second and the 
second with the third are found beginning words; 
thus: ᾖ-λε-κτρί-ζω, ai-cxpos: there are no words be- 
ginning with κτρ or «xp, but we find κτυπῶ and τρεῖς, 
and σχίζω and χρόνος. 

Compound words are divided according to their com- 
ponent parts; thus: προσ-φέ-ρω, ὥσ-τε, δυσ-τυ-χής. If, 
however, the final vowel of the first component has 
been elided, the division is made as if the word were 
a simple one; thus: πα-ραγ-γέλ-λω, κα-τέρ-χο-μαι. 


INDEX 


ACCENT, rules of, 8 
in nouns of the first declension, 158 
in nouns of the second declension, 168 
in nouns of the third declension, 181 — 
in verbs, 33, 51 
Address, form of, 86 
Adjectives, comparison of, 227 
declension of, 213 
irregular, in comparison, 228 
irregular, in declension, 216 
of one termination, 218 
of three terminations, 214 
of two terminations, 217 
Adverbs, comparison of, 230, 240 
denoting motion from, 241 
denoting motion toward, 241 
denoting rest, 241 
formation of, 240 
numeral, 146 
of nationality, 241 
prepositional, 323 
Aids to the study of Modern Greek, 340 
Alphabet, 1 
Aorist, 50, 68, 77, 85, 93. 101, 103, 112, 121, 199 
Arithmetical formule, 135, 148 
Article, definite, 17, 205 
in the vernacular, 18, 205 
indefinite, 18 
Augment, formation of the, 49 
irregularities in the, 348 
syllabic, 44 
temporal, 44 


376 INDEX 


Breathings, 7 
Cardinal numbers, 199 
Character of verbs, 122 
Chirography, 2, 364 
Circumflex verbs, 24, 34 
Comparison of adjectives, 227, 290 
of adverbs, 230, 240 
of participles, 228 
of prepositions, 230 
Conditional mood, 75 
Conversation exercises, method of using, 11, 49, 90, 117 
Coronis, the, 45 
Correspondence, formule used in, 153 
Dates, mode of expressing, 135, 146, 153, 157 
Dative case, substitute for the, in ordinary conversation, 18, 158 
Days of the week, 148, $55 
Diminutives, 168 
Diphthongs, 6 
Enclitics, 9 
Fractions, 145, 148 
Future tense, 60, 101 
Grammatical exercises, method of using, 26 
Greek, aids to the further study of, 340 
Handwriting, 2, 364 
Hour, how expressed, 189 
Imperative, 83 
negative form, 87 
Imperfect, 48, 61, 75, 84, 112 
Impure verbs, 122 
Indicative, 25, 88, 85, 46, 52 
Infinitive, 93 
Letters, beginning and ending of, 158 
Lord’s Prayer, the, 271 
Middle voice, 32 
Months, names of the, 254 
Multiplication table, 136, 149 
Multiplicatives, 147 
Nouns, 157 
accent of, 158, 168, 181 
contracted, of the first declension, 159 
contracted, of the second declension, 169 
contracted, of the third declension, 188 
declension of, first, 157 
declension of, fourth, 204 


INDEX 377 


Nouns, declension of, second, 167 
declension of, third, 177 
diminutive, 168 
imparisyllabic, 157 
irregular, 191 
parisyllabic, 157 
proper, 203 
vernacular forms of, 168, 198, 204 

Numbers, abstract, 147 
cardinal, 199 
declension of, 194 
fractional, 145, 148 
multiplicative, 147 
ordinal, 144 
proportional, 147 τ 

Ordinal numbers, 144 

Participles, 101 
comparison of, 228 
declension of, 215 

Passive voice, 32 

Perfect, 65, 75, 101, 119 

Perispome verbs, 24, 34 

Persons, names of, 203 

Pluperfect, 114 

Prepositional adverbs, 323 

Prepositions, 279 
comparison of, 230 
governing the accusative, 281 
governing the dative, 280 
governing the genitive, 279 
governing the genitive, dative, or accusative, 311 
governing the genitive or accusative, 294 

Present tense, 24, 93, 101 

Pronouns, adjective. 248 

demonstrative, 261 

indefinite, 265 

interrogative, 263 

personal, 248 

position of, relative to the verb, 249 

possessive, 252 

reciprocal, 251 

reflexive, 250 

relative, 264 

substantive, 248 ; 


918 INDEX 


Pronunciation, 3 
Punctuation, marks of, 14 
Pure verbs, 122 
Reading exercises, method of using, 57 
A Letter of Counsel to Thomas Jefferson Smith, 257 
A Visitor of Importance, 98 
sop and the Traveller, 91 
Alexander the Great and the African Chief, 235 
An Instance of Perseverance, 210 
Beginning and Ending of Letters, 153 
Benevolence of Louis XVI., 128 
Columbus’s Egg, 185 
Damon and Phintias (Pythias), 162 
John Stuart Blackie, a Review, 288, 302, 317, 329 
Lord Nithsdale and his Wife, 222 
Principal and Student, 173 
Selim III. and the Quick-witted Boy, 118 
Socrates’ Good-breeding, 82 
The Borrower, 224 
The Broken Horseshoe, 109 
The Lady and the Tiger, 58 
The Lord Mayor was Pleased, 72 
The Olympian Games, 245 
The Portrait, 199 
The Pronunciation of the Greek Language, 2738 
The Rebuke of the Courtier, 72 
Valor or Justice, 82 
What the Wise Need, 98 
Xerxes and the False Diamonds, 199 
Reduplication, 102 
Script, 2, 364 
Subjunctive, 25, 33, 35, 96, 52 
Substantives, see Wowns 
Syllabic division of words, 373 
Synizesis, 18 
Than, after a comparative, how expressed, 280 
Thought exercises, method of using, 11 
Time of day, how expressed, 88 
Verbs, 28 
accent of, 33, 51 
aorist, 50 
aorist conditional, 77 
aorist, distinguished from imperfect, 112 
aorist future, 63 


INDEX 379 


| Verbs, aorist imperative, 85 
aorist infinitive, 93 
aorist middle, ancient form of, 121 
aorist of impure verbs, 123 
aorist participle, 101 
aorist, second, 103 
augment, 45 
augment, irregularities in the, 348 
« character of, 122 
i= circumflex, 24, 34 
conditional, 75 
contracted, 24, 34 
deponent, 24 
dictionary form of, 36 
future, 60 
future participle, 101 
_ imperative, 83 
imperative, negative form, 87 
| imperfect, 48 
| imperfect conditional, 75 
imperfect, distinguished from aorist, 112 
imperfect future, 61 
imperfect imperative, 84 
impure, 122 
in έω, dw, and da, 24, 34 
in έω and do, irregularities in, 348 
in pu, 343 
indicative, 25, 38, 35, 46, 52 
infinitive, 93 
irregular, alphabetical list of, 351 
middle voice, 32 
participles, 101 
participles, comparison of, 228 
participles, declension of, 215 
passive voice, 32 
perfect, 113 
perfect future, 65 
perfect participle, 101 
perispome, 24, 34 
pluperfect, 114 
present, 24 
present infinitive, 99 
present participle, 101 
pure, 122 


980 INDEX 


Verbs, reduplication, 102 
subjunctive, 25, 33, 35, 36, 52 
vernacular forms of, 349 
Vocabulary exercises, method of using, 59 
Vocabulary, themes for enlarging the, method of using, 194 
Clothing, 231, 242 
Diseases, 298, 919 
Meals, 283 
Religion, 268 
‘The Human Body, 194, 206, 219 
Time, 253 
Travelling, 325 
Week, days of the, 148, 255 
Written characters, 2, 364 
Year, manner of expressing the, 135, 146 


THE END 


| 
| 
| 
| 


BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. 


_ Books may be kept for two weeks and may be 


renewed for the same period, unless reserved. 


Two cents a day is charged for each book kept 


overtime. 


If you cannot find what you want, ask the 
Librarian who will be glad to help you. 


The borrower is responsible for books drawn on 
his card and for all fines accruing on the same. 
| 


Φ. 


te 


ts paces 
tpn pemapys- 


. oe 

ον ο ἀφω να mand bake 

Deal my VO ah a, 
Mira? Uhm pins tre 

“Ὡς ὦ μὸμ διγῶν. ὦ 


Moa oe 


